This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at|http : //books . google . com/
V
JfóO
I
J 900
Digitized
by Google
THE
COMBINED SPANISH METHOD
A PRACTICAL AND THEORETICAL SYSTEM FOR LEARNING
THE SPAIÍISH LANGUAGE
EMBRACING THE MOST ADVANTAGEOUS FEATURES
OF THE BEST KNOWN METHODS
WITH A PRONOUNCING YOCABULARY
CONTAINING ALL THE WORDS USED IN THE COURSE OP THE WORK, AND
REFERENCES TO THE LESSONS IN WHICH EACH ONE IS EXPLAINED,
THUS ENABLING ANY ONE TO BE HIS OWN INSTRUCTOR
BT
ALBERTO DE TORNOS, AM.
rOBMSBLT DIRBCTOR OF NORMAL SCHOOLS IK SPAIN, AND TBACHBR OF SPANISH
IN THB NBW YORK MERCANTILB LIBRARY, NBW YORK BVBNING HIGH SCHOOL,
AND THB FOLYTBCHNIC AND PACKER INSTITUTES, BROOKLYN
REVISED EDITION
GIVING SPECIAL ATTENTION TO THE VARIATIONS
OF THE SPANISH LANGUAGE IN THE AMEBIC AS
NEW YORK .
D. APPLETON AND COMPANY
1900
Digitized
by Google
>
I
Copyright, 1867,
By D. APPLETON AND COMPANY.
Copyright, 1895,
By MANUEL DE TORNOS.
Copyright, 1899,
By francisca DE TORNOS.
V
cv^'
Digitized
by Google
EEVISEE'S PEEFACE.
Pbofessob De Tobnos's Combined Spanish Method, first
pnblished thirty years ago, has won for itself an established
position among students of the Spanish language. After
the test of use and competition for a quarter of a century,
it still continues to be the most satisfactory book of the
kind in the hands of the public. Nevertheless, the exten-
sive modification of Spanish orthography by the decrees of
the Real Academia Espamola^ enacted some years ago, has
necessitated further revisions in accordance with these
changes. The object of the present edition is to preserve
the unquestioned advantages possessed by the original
work, and at the same time to make it conform entirely
to the rulings of the Academy, in. order to meet the
demands of the modern student.
Since many of those who are to use the method will
do so with the view of travel or residence in some of the
Spanish- American countries, special attention has been de-
voted to a consideration of the American variations from
. Castilian Spanish in the matter of pronunciation. How-
ever, there has been no departure from the grammatical
principles laid down by the Academy.
Digitized
by Google
ir
BMYISER'S PREFACE,
The written lan^age is the same everywhere, save that
the speech and literature of each country have adopted
many words of native origin. It will be found expedient
to acquire first the true Spanísh word, and afterward to
take up the native variant,
June, 1H99.
PEEFACE.
It is an undoubted fact that in teaching, not only lan-
guages, but any other science or art, there neither is, nor
can be, any other method than that of uniting theory with
practice; and the various modes of applying the one to the
other, the extent of the application, and the time at which
it should be commenced, have produced the great number
of methods hitherto published.
This fact is now universally acknowledged, and each
new author proclaims himself to be the only one who has
put it into execution. The most insignificant little phrase-
book does not fail to announce, in its introduction, that it
combines theory and practice ; and grammars containing
nothing more than confused masses of rules, heaped one
upon another, are entitled ^'Theoretical and Practical^ It
is admitted on aU hands that much progress has been made
within the last few years in the art of teaching languages ;
and, in testimony of this, we have only to mention the
excellent oral and practical methods of Jacotot, Manesca,
Ollendorff, Boulet, Kobertson, and others who have followed
in their footsteps, all of which are ably treated, and have
done much good in their way. But each one of the gram-
marians referred to, satisfied with his own invention, looked
Digitized
by Google
Ti
PREFACE,
with diedain upon that of his predeeeaeor. Hence the en-
mity and the ahnost unaccountable diversity of opinion
which we observe amongst them. Had they studied each
other with impartiality^ and endeavored to profit by the
experience, and even the defects of the several eyBtema,
their labora would certainly have been attended with still
more favorable reeults, and of course more considerable
benefit would have accrued thereby to the acience in gen-
eral. Numberless points of excellence are to be found,
scattered here and there, throughout the various ancient
and modem systems, and chiefly thoae already alluded to ;
and it has been taught that, if carefully sifted out and
judiciously combiuedj they would form a new method
which would be in details esaentially superior to any of the
old ones.
This conviction, joined to twenty years' experience in
teaching the Spanish language» sometimes through the me-
dium of one, sometimes of another of the systems mentioned
above, has led the author to prepare and publish the Com-
BmED Method, which he now offers to those desiring to
learn the noble language of Cervantes.
Whether he has successfully attained his object the
public will decide.
OBSEEVATIONS
ON SOME OP THE ADVANTAGEOUS FEATURES OF THE
" DE TORNOS'S COMBINED METHOD."
lit. The advantage of presenting the verb as the first and
principal part of speech, which serves as the axis upon which
all the other parts revolve. These, too, have been introduced
in their turn, not in grammatical order, nor by mere chance,
but in the logical and natural order in which they occur in
discourse, whether written or spoken.
2d. That of explaining these parts of speech in the order
just mentioned, not in an isolated manner, but united to
form a homogeneous whole, and in such a way that the learn-
er will have no difficulty in finding the explanation relative
to the use of each one of them respectively, as often as occa-
sion may require.
3d. These explanations, which embrace the whole theory,
and form a complete grammar of the language, are separate
from and independent of the exercises ; the latter being com-
posed in strict accordance with the examples accompanying
each lesson, in such a manner that those unacquainted with
grammar in general, and those who have no desire to enter
into the theory of the language, or, finally, those who are too
young or too old to learn grammar, may acquire a thorough
conversational knowledge of Spanish, by merely committing
to memory the Vocabulary, studying the Compositions, and
carefully writing the Exercises.
4th. From this arrangement arises another great advan-
tage, namely, that all the elements are found in the vocabu-
lary of each lesson, separated and detached from the examples'
and rules given in the explanation ; thus enabling the student
to see at one glance all that he has to commit to memory for
each recitation.
Digitized
by Google
viii OBSERVATIONS.
5tlL And this division of the lessons into Elements, Com-
position, Explanation, Version, and Exercise, enables the
teacher to divide each lesson into two, three, or even four
parts, according to the age and capacity of the student.
6th. Repetition^ and constant repetition^ is indispensable
in acquiring any language ; but by repetition should not be
understood the simple reiteration of single words and easy
phrases ; but repetition of the idioms, and of those forms of
expression differing most widely from the idiomatical con-
struction of the learner's native tongue. It is true, that
though this is the proper plan for acquiring a thorough
knowledge of a language, that feature might tend to make
the present work appear, at first sight, more difficult than
the books hitherto used ; but such will not be found the case ;
for when there is frequent change of matter there cannot be
monotony ; and variety renders study at the same time easy
and agreeable. This repetition, then, of useful forms of ex-
pression and contrast of style will be found on every page of
our " Combined Method," in which it has been our endeavor
to introduce gradually, and with the necessary explanations
of each, the most important idioms of the Spanish language.
7tii. Although we are of opinion that to learn a language,
and, above all, to learn to pronounce it, it is always preferable
to have the assistance of a skilful teacher, and one who
speaks the language with purity and correctness ; yet, as it
is not always possible to procure such, we have placed at the
end of the Method a Vocabulary, containing all the words
used in the course of the work, and the pronunciation of
each, so that nothing may be wanting to second the efforts of
thosíí who, from choice or necessity, may be their own in-
fitrufitors.
8tli. The Vocabulary, besides giving the pronunciation
and meaning of the words, indicates the lesson in which the
explanation of each has been given in the Grammar. By
this means the learner can with ease refer to the explanation
of all those words of which it has been deemed essential
to give one.
Digitized
by Google
CONTENTS.
PAGE
Revxseb's Prbfacb, iii, iv
Preface, v, vi
A FBV Remarks on the Combined Method, vii, viii
Contents, ix-xviii
Prbliminart Lesson on Orthooraphy and Pronunciation, . . . xiz-xxix
LESSON I.
Rule
1. Regrular verbs, classified in three conjugations, 1
2. Stems,. ......* 2
3. Terminations of the three model verbs, corresponding to all the regular
verbs, 2
— . Suppression of the nominative pronouns, 2
4. F. {Usted) requires the verb in the third person, 3
5. Position of subject and predicate, . 3
6. Use of do and did as auxiliaries, 3
LESSON II.
7. Señor^ señorito^ señora, señorita, use of these words, 4
8. Don and Doña, use of these words, 5
9. iVb, placed before the verb, 6
LESSON III.
10. The conjunction 2^ changed into ¿, 8
11. Qué, interrogative pronoun, 8
12. Pero and Sino, 8 '
13. Español, inglés, &c., one word may be classed with different parts of
speech, 8
LESSON IV.
14. X, preposition to, used after active verbs, when the object is a person,
De, used to express position or the material of which anything is made
El, the article tfie, used to determine a noun masculine singular, .
Contraction of the article el and the prepositions á and de into el, del,
Un, the indefinite pronoun used before masculine nouns,
Uno is only used as a numeral adjective,
11
11
11
11
11
11
LESSON V.
18. Oender, how ascertained, 14
~. I7na, used before feminine nouns, 15
W. Four, how translated, 15
Digitized
by Google
CONTENTS.
LESSON VI.
BULB PAOK
20. The terminations of the persons of the present indicatiye ; how they differ
in the three conjugations, 18
21. Muy^ how translated, 18
22. Nouns ending in o change that vowel into a for the feminine, . . .19
23. Uated and Ustedes abbreyiated into V. and Yds., 19
LESSON VII.
24. Adjectives ending in o, an^ or on^ form their feminine in a, .
— . Adjectives signifying nationality and ending in a consonant .
— . Adjectives are generally placed after their nouns, ....
— . Adjectives used metaphorically are always placed before the nouns,
— . Some adjectives drop their last letter or syllable, ....
23
:f
LESSON VIII.
The endings of the second and third conjugations ; how they differ, . . 26
The conjunction ó changed into ú, 26
Ni^ how translated 26
The plural of nouns, 26
Adjectives agree with their nouns in gender and number .... 27
The article agrees also, 27
Feminine nouns that take the masculine article, 27
' The ueuter 'article to, ' ". 27
LESSON IX.
32. Papá^ mamá^ pie, are exceptions, 81
33. Nouns of more than one syllable, and ending in », form' their plural, . . 81
— . Words ending in z, their plural, 31
34. Words which are compounds of two nouns, their plural, .... 31
35. The days of the week, when they take the article, 31
36. Donde, adonde, cuando, placed before the verb, 81
37. Donde, adonde, (mando, in interrogations require an accent, .... 32
40.
41.
LESSON X.
Irregular verbs, 85
Tener not included in the seven verbs, 85
Personal pronouns as direct or indirect objects, 35
Position of objective pronouns with regard to the verb, 35
It and 80 are translated sometimes by io, 36
Quien, cual, que, de quien, used interrogatively do not take the article, . 87
When the interrogative is governed by a preposition, the same preposition
must be repeated in the answer, 87
El as a definite pronoun, 87
k
LESSON XI.
43. Alguien, alguno, the difference between them 40
— . Any one or anybody, when translated by cualquiera,
44. Nadie, ninguno, their distinction.
40
40
Digitized
by Google
CONTENTS, xi
45. Aiguno and ninguno^ when they lose the o, 40
46. Algo^ alguna cosa^ used affirmatiyely, 40
47. Nada, ninguna coaa^ used negatively, 40
48. Negatives, when placed before the verb, 40
— . Two negatives render the negation more emphatic than one, ... 41
40. A or an^ when not translated, 42
LESSON XII.
60. Tener and ^io&er, their distinction, 44
~. To have and to &e, followed by an infinitive, how they are translated, . . 44
61. Perked, 45
LESSON XIII.
52. Mio^ tuyo, &c., change the o into a for the feminine, . .49
53. Possessive pronouns agree in gender and number with the name of the thing
possessed, 49
5i As pronominal adjectives, mio, tuyo^ suyo precede the noun and drop their
final syllable, ... * 49
55. Mo, when placed after the noun, . 49
56. Possessives used as pronouns agree in gender and number with the nouns
they represent, and take the article, 49
57. When used indefinitely they take the neuter article, 49
58. When connected with the verb to he, the article is omitted, .... 49
60. Vuestro^ vuestra^ when used, ' 50
LESSON XIV.
60. Formation of compound numbers, 54
61. Numbers are indeclinable, except uno and the compounds of ciento, . . 54
63. Un(), its agreement ; when it loses the o, 54
63. Ciento, its agreement ; when it loses the last syllable, 54
LESSON XV.
64. OrdincUs, their agreement and place, 58
— . Prímero and tercero, when they drop their final letter, 58
65. Ordinala, when used, 59
~. N. B.— When ordinals do not require the definite article, 59
LESSON XVI.
66. PreteHt, 64
67. Ante, its meaning, 64
68. Jfd0.andme7U>«, how used, 65
LESSON XVII.
60. Quien, how used,
70. Who, when translated by que, and when by quien, .
71. Ouol and gue relate to persons and things,
72. Cuyo refers to persons and things : its agreement, .
— . It partakes of the nature of the relatives and of the possessives.
xii CONTENTS.
BULB PAGE
73. The preposition placed before the re I atiFc, . . , . , , » B9
74. Relative pronouns can never be suppreseed \n Bpaaiah, , , » . 09
LESSON XV^III.
75. Declension of the demonstrative pronounfl este^ tse^ o^eff . » . , 75
76. Este, how used, 75
77. Use of the adverb dhi, ...*....*,.. Tfi
78. Este, ese, forming one word with the adjective ofrOs .,'.,. 75
79. The demonstrative pronouns used oíí neutí^r, .....,, Til
80. Tfee /ormcr and í^ Zaííer, translated by üyuel and esíe, . * . . 7fi
81. Tfeai o/ or that which, translated by el de, ei qiie^ ,...». rti
82. English personal pronouns rendered in Spanish b^ demonátrative pro-
nouns, . * . K . , . , . 70
83. Aqui, alii, acá, aUá, how employed, . . . , . * . , » 76
LESSON XIX.
86. Para and por, how they differ, , . 81
86. Entre, its meaning, » . , 83
87. Hasta, its meaning, ........... ^ m
LESSON XX.
88. Tanto and cuanto, when they lose the Itist ayllable, . , * . , B7
89. Comparison of eqtiality, how formed + *....,.. 87
90. Ci«in may be employed, fl7
91. Comparison of superiority, how fornied , * , B7
92. Comparison of tn/eriorify, **...» ST
93. Mayor, menor, mejor, peor, are already In the comporaMve degree, . . 88
94. Than, translated by de and que, BH
95. Comparison relating to nouns, verbs^ and ad-mtb^^ B8
LESSON XXT,
96. Superlatives ending in eat, or formed by mo»t^ how tranalated, . . . B3
97. Most, or most of, when translated by iu -mayor part^x or by má&^ , , lía
98. In, preposition, when translated by ite , * , , sa
99. Sui)erlatives formed by very, most^ &c„ when formed in Spanish by muy
and when by isimo » flS
100. Adjectives drop the" last vowel on tjtiking the termination ijtimo, ... 94
101. Other superlatives ending in érriíwo . . fl4
102. Adjectives which change their endiogu berone the terminatlgn üimo^ , S4
103. Superlatives in istmo irregularly fontied^ ..*.*.,. fl4
104. Irregular comparatives and superlativea, . . H
— . These make also a superlative in ítijun^ * , B5
— . Also with muy, and a comparative with mint or menos, . * * . * ftS
105. Substantives used adjectively admit the deirrees of comparüsoUf * . . SB
LESSON XXII.
106. Ser and estar, the distinction between them, ..,.-.. 100
107. " " their employment, . . ... .100
— . N. B.— Use of either ser or estar, but witb díflícreí* meaning, * .101
108. Present participles, IOS
CONTENTS, xiii
LESSON XXIII.
RITLB PAGE
109. Future tense^ 108
110. The definite article used with numerals, indicating the hour of the day, . 108
111. .Büeninjjr and niflr/ii, translated by noc/i€, 108
112. The conjunction «i, when it governs the subjunctiye, and when the indica-
tive, 108
LESSON XXIV.
118. I\tture perfect, 118
114. Acabar rie, its meaning, 113
115. How the pupil may learn a great number of words with little or no diffi-
culty, 113
— . Nouns ending in tion are the same in Spanish, changing the letter t into c, 113
116. The days of the month are counted by the cardinal numbers, preceded by
the article, • 113
LESSON XXV.
117. Saber and conocer, how they differ, 119
118. Aún, ya, todavía, their different meaning and uses, 120
— . Once, twice, &c., translated by una vez, dos veces, &c., 120
— . Miedo, valor, &c., take the preposition de after them, 120
119. To be afraid, to be thirsty, &c., how translated, 120
120. Jamás and nunca, how used, . . .120
LESSON XXVI.
121. Pronoun subject, or nominative, 126
122. Two objective cases of the personal pronouns, how used, .126
123. The objective case, when not preceded by a preposition, is affixed to infini-
tives, present participles, &c., 126
124. When the verb drops the final letter followed by nos or os, . . . 126
— . The reason of this, 127
125. When the objective case may follow the verb, 127
126. When the objective may be placed before the first verb, or after the
second, 127
127. Prepositions, when expressed, always govern the second objective case, . 127
188. Jfi, fi, «Í, when preceded by con, .127
129. Entre, how used, 127
130. The second objective case is used after comparatives, 127
181. When the first objective case is used, 128
182. The objective case of the third person is rendered by le, les, if the preposi-
tion ¿o govern it in English, 128
LESSON XXVII.
188. The third person rendered in Spanish by «e, 133
184. The object of the verb is to be placed last, when two first objective cases
occur in the sentence, 134
185. Placed first when the object of the verb is the reflexive pronoun, . . 135
186. Both of the objective cases belonging to the same person used together, . 136
Digitized
by Google
xiv CONTENTS.
BULE PAGK
137. The expressions d él quiero^ á ti amo^ are incorrect, 137
138. Use of le and les with second objectives, 134
139. The pronouns ¿¿, 2a, Zo, los^ and 2a«, how distinguished from the articles
el, la, 2o, lo8, las, 135
— . The adjective múmo, how used, 136
LESSON XXVIII.
140. When the imperfect is used, 141
141. When the pcwi pcr/eci is used, 142
142. How the expressions to have just and to be just are translated before a
past participle, 143
LESSON XXIX.
143. Thepreíert<per/ec¿, itsuse, 147
144. Derivation of adverbs of manner and quality, 147
145. How adverbs are formed from adjectives, 147
146. Adverbs terminating in mente admit, like adjectives, the degrees of com-
parison, 147
147. How these adverbs can be substituted, 147
148.
149.
150.
151
152.
153.
LESSON XXX.
What imi)ersonal verbs are, . , 158
amanecer and anoc/ier, used in the three persons, . . . •. . .153
Haber and hacer, and other verbs used impersonally, 153
The pronoun it, accompanying impersonal verbs, not translated, . . 154
The article.— Nouns taken in a definite sense require it, .... 154
Nouns used in their most general sense take the article, .... 154
Names of nations, countries, mountains, &c., take the article, ... 154
Nations, countries, and provinces, whwi preceded by a preposition, do not
take the article, 156
Names of some places that always take the article, . . . . . .155
LESSON XXXI.
154. Chistar, signifying to give pleasure to, how used, 161
155. Gustar, followed by the preposition de, 161
156. Gustar, used as an active verb, 161
157. Verbs that require the same idiomatic construction as that of the verb
guitar, 161
158. The verb pesar, when meaning to regret^ . . . . . . . .161
LESSON XXXII.
159. How the passive voice is formed, .167
160. When the passive form is used with the verb aer in the present and imper-
fect tenses of the indicative, 167
161. When the preposition de or por is to be used after passive verbs, . . 167
162. Passive voice formed by sc, 167
163. When the passive, formed with se, is to be preferred, 168
Digitized
by Google
CONTENTS.
XV
LESSON XXXIII.
BULB PAOK
164- Reflexive verha^'vho.t they ATQy 174
165. When are the verbs made reflexive ? 174
166. When a verb denotes reciprocity^ how it is conjugated, . . . .174
LESSON XXXIV.
167. Which are the irregular verbs, 180
168. Verbs which, although they undergo slight changes in their radical let-
ters, are not to be considered as irreg^ular, 180
169. Verbs which change, iinto 2^, 181
170. Verbs ending in uir, .181
171. Regular irregular verbs, 181
172. What is to be observed relative to the object of the verb pagar ^ . . 182
LESSON XXXV.
178. Irregularity of the verb (ico^tor, 187
'-' 174. Imperative mode, when used, 187
175. The « of the first person plural, and the d of the second, suppressed be-
fore no8 and o», 187
176. The subjunctive, used with the negative imperative, 188
177. The future indicative, used for the imperative, 188
178. Adjectives ending in ot», how rendered into Spanish, 188
179. Nouns and adjectives ending in English in ic or ical^ how rendered into
Spanish, 188
LESSON XXXVI.
180. Irregularity of the verb mover ^ 198
181. Sé, as the Spanish indefinite personal pronoun, 198
182. The pronoun «e, in its four functions, 193
183. Nouns ending in English in ty^ how rendered into Spanish, . . . .194
184. Doier. how used, * 194
LESSON XXXVII.
185. Irregularity of the verb atender^ 199
186, 187, 168, 169. Subjunctive Mode, when used in Spanish, 200
190. Present tense of the subjunctive, 201
191. Perfect tense, 202
LESSON XXXVIII.
192. Active Participles, 207
198. Present Participles, 207
194. The verb estar used with the gerund in Spanish, 207
195. When in English the present participle, preceded by a preposition, is used,
how rendered into Spanish, . . _. ._ _. _ ., . . . .207
-The infinitive U86d as a verbal noiin, 207
" 197. The infinitive governed by another verb, how rendered into English, . 208
2
Digitized
by Google
XVI
CONTENTS.
LESSON XXXIX-
138. Irre^arity ot the verb p&iir, . . . , s¡í3
199. T^ usufa fomiH of BoJutatiooB, ....,.,,,. aia
LESSON XL,
aoo. Condiucir, its íme^larlty, . , * .*.,.... . aiO
301. Sejítín rb a preposition and adverb, 'MS
sm. Collective Doims, 320
LESSON XLI,
SOS. Defiectlv© verbs. Placer, , . * . aSS
a04. yiicer, its uae 2S5
906. 8oler, Its ub^^ . ♦ . . 5!2fl
SQQk Dé$de. Its meajiüi^ and use, ........... 23C
SCff. Cimtra, rendered into En^tiáLh by againtU * 330
SOS. 5oi>re JtB Hignific^on, ............ S-ffl
20fl. IVoa, ifca meaning, , . * .... 2:36
210. Tbe conjunctioD pttea, its use^ .......... 337
sni. Pu^f meaiüo^ iü«íf, '..... ^ . 'm
LESSON XLII.
212.' CoTv/uncficmfi, tbelr cloaaiñcatlon, . , . . . . . . .233
SI». What is to be observed in relation to the Kovensnxeot of conjunetlonji, . 332
2J4h Bome eonjunotions that govern the subjuuettve mode, . . , . . 2^
21 B. Compound conjunctiona which require the inñnitEve tuode, . , . , 23S
pie. Compound can Junctions which require the indicative 333
LESSON XLin,
217. Imperfect and past perfect siibjunctlve, 23fl
21 B. How to render into E^pauish the auxUloriea fiusy, miQht^ cant ^x>/vitdf tuilU
tcoufdr and éhoulá, 340
319. Wliat the imperfect mibjtmctivQ denotes^ %¥i
220. What the pa^t perfect denotes, ,.,...,.., 24(}
LESSON XLIT.
221, Augmentstive and diminutive nouns, . . f • « , . < SIfi
33s3h Irregular ttsrtninailíi&íi of ccrtniu dinihujtlveSi 347
223^ Ilimlnntives maj be formed from adjeetíves partid plea, gerunds, and
adverb», 249
224. Some cf tbe primitive words do net adrnit all the diminutive termiua-
tlons, . a4H
22fi. There &re derlvntlvefi which, although the^ appear to be auj^mentatlves
cjT diminutjTes, are not bo, .......... 348
LESSON XLV.
330. The future of the subjunctive, . . , .39
237. Huw the pretietii i>f the HiiTijunctiire may be substituted by the future, . 2i>4
238. The future perfect subjunctive, .864
CONTENTS. xvii
RXTIJB PlOB
229. The perfect subjunctive may be substituted by the future perfect sub-
junctiye, 2S5
290. What is to be observed in order not to misapply the imperfect and past
perfect, 255
231. The future and future perfect subjunctive as determining verbs, . 255
LESSON XLVI.
232, 288. Interjections, 261
LESSON XLVII.
234. Use of the article 268 '
235. The definite article used with common nouns taken In a freneral sense, . 268
236. The article before the namps of the four parts of the globe, names of em-
pires, kingdoms, 4&c., 268
237. Nouns of measure, weight, &c., when they require the article, ... 268
238. The article repeated before every noun enumerated, 260
239. The definite article used before nouns indicating rank, ofiQoe, 4&c., . . 269
240. Used instead of the possessive adjective, 269
241. Used as in English, before nouns, taken in a particular or definite sense, . 269
LESSON XLVIII.
242. Correspondence of the tenses with each other, 276
243. When the determined verb is put in the infinitive, 276
244. When the determining verb is «er, or any impersonal verb, and the govern-
ing verb has no subject, 277
245. Putinthesubjunctive when the determining verb has a nominative, . . 277
246. When the governing verb is put in the present or future of the subjunctive, 277.
247. When there are different subjects of determining and determined verbs, . 278
248. The nominative being the same for both verbs and the governing one in
the indicative, in what mode the determining verb is put, . . . .278
LESSON XLIX.
249,250,251,252,253,254,255,256,257,258,259. Derivative nouns, . ... 284
LESSON L.
260. Compound nouns, 291
LESSON LI.
261. The natural construction, 297
262. 268. Figurative construction, 297
204. Which of the two constructions is preferable, 298
LESSON LII.
265. Past ParticipU9, 804
266. Agreement of past i>articiples 804
267. When a verb has two past participles, one regular and the other irregular,
how they are used, 804
268. Irregular past participles that may be used with the verb habevy . . 805
260. Extraordinary irregularity of the verb morir ^ 305
Digitized
by Google
xviii CONTENTS.
BULB PAO*
270. Some past partlcipleB take an actiye signiflcation, 306
271. Fast participles may sometimes take the place of substanÜTes, . . .805
272. Other tenses in the infinitive mode, . . . . . . . . .806
LESSON LIII.
273. Idiomatic expressions, in which the English preposition differs in meaning
from that which most generally constitutes its proper signification, . 812
LESSON LIV.
274. Conjunctions in English that are frequently used as substitutes for other
words, how rendered into Spanish, 818
275. Spanish conjunctions used as substitutes for other words, .... 818
' — . Different uses of the con junction «i, ...... ^ .. 818
LESSON LV.
276. Some of the principal uses of the conjunction gue, 821
LESSON LVI.
277. Epistolary correspondence, 880
LESSON LVII.
278. Observation in regard to verbs that change their meaning according to the
preposition by which they are followed, 889
LESSON LVIII.
279. The verbs to be glad and to he r€¡joiced^ how translated, .... 844
280. The verbis to he sorry and to grieve^ how translated, 844
281. How the verb caber is used, 846
LESSON LIX.
282. Idioms with the verbs ca^r^ dar, decir , echar ^ 861
LESSON LX.
288. Idioms with the verbs entrar, hacer, ir, llevar, mandar, oler á, saber á,
salir, servir, tardar^ and volver, 358
LESSONS LXI TO LXV.
On the Principal Idioms of the Spanish Language, - 860 to 888
General observations on some grammatical and Idiomatical peculiarities of the
Spanish language, not hitherto treated of in the Grammar, .... 889
Complete list of the conjugations of all the Spanish verbs, . . . 400 to 461
List of all the irregular verbs 456,466
VooABUioRT, containing all the Spanish words used in the Grammar, . 459 to 406
Digitized
by Google
INTKODUCTIOK
OETHOGEAPHY AND PRONUNCIATIOíT.
THE ALPHABET.
The Spanish Alphabet contains twenty-nine letters,
exclusive of W, which is used in foreign words only, and is
pronounced as in English. C%, U, ^, and rr are single let-
ters, although double in form. The alphabet is as follows :
A,
a,
ah*
N,
n»
¿Ti'-nay.
B,
b.
day.
Ñ,
fi,
hi'-^ay.
c,
c.
tJiay, or «ay.f
0,
0,
0,
CH,
ch,
chmf.
P,
P,
'pay.
D,
d,
day.
Q,
q,
Tcoo,
E,
e,
ay.
R,
r,
W-ra/y,
F,
t,
¿//«y.
RR
, rr,
ér'-hray.
G.
g.
Aay.
s,
8,
h'-my.
H,
h,
át'-chay.
T,
t,
tay.
I,
i,
e.
Ü,
U,
00,
J,
J.
W-tah,
V,
V,
vay.
K,
K
hah.
X,
X,
W'Jcees,
L,
1,
ér-lay.
Y,
y,
e-gree-ay'-gah.
LL,
11,
U'-yay, oi
lh''yaAf,\
z,
z,
thay-tah, or my'-tah.^
M,
m«
Im'-may,
* The pupil should not try to learn the Spanish names of the letters
immediately, as they are confusing ; but only their aotmdSf or orthograph-
ical force.
t This is the American variation, now used by the many millions who
speak Spanish as their native tongue in Mexico, Cuba, and South America,
Digitized
by Google
XX INTRODUCTION.
A number of the letters are invariable in Bonnd^ as will bo
seen in the proper place ; and every letter is pronounced in
all positions, except the A, which \ñ always silent, and the u^
without the diéresis, in the syllables guB^ gui^ and que, quL
With a few exceptionsj the Spanish language is pro-
nonnced exactly as it is written, and does not present those
diflficnlties met with in the orthography and pronunciation of
most other languages. The method of representing, in eacli
lesson, the pronunciation of every word by an incorrect or-
thography only augments the labor and doubts of the learner,
besides increasing unnecessarily the size of the work- A few
lessons with a wise teacher who speaks Spanish accurately
will do more to further the acquisition of a correct pronuncia-
tion than all the works that could bo written on the subject.
As the English vowels differ in sound from those of all
other languages, great care ought to be taken to learn the
true sound of the Spanish vowels. They are :
a, e, i, o, u,
A has two kindred sounds: (1) The nanal sound is that
of d in hand ; as, cara^ face, hablarás^ thou wilt speak, (S)
TVhen it is followed by two consonants in the same word, or
at the end of a word and unaccented, it is broader, like íi in
father ; as, parte^ part, «r/e, art, cartas letter, earner meat,
botica^ drug-store. It never varies from these two sounds.
£ usually has the sound of e in they ; as, cera, wax, vero^
true, madera,^ wood ; but when it occurs in a closed syllable,
that is, one which terminates in a consonant, it is short, as 6
in best ; as, sed^ thirst, e&te^ this, el^ the, fmnte^ mind. An
exception to this is found in a few words of more than one
syllable, which end in s or z^ preceded by an accented e ; as,
ingle. % English, interés^ interest, where the e is long, even
though followed by a consonant in the same syllable-
I is invariable, and has the sound of í in machine i as, sí^
yes, sino^ but, alU, there.
INTRODUCTION. xxi
0 is invariable, and has the sound of o in Lord — ^neither
the 0 of note nor that of top ; todo^ all, amo^ I love.
U is invariable, and sounds like u in rule ; as, puro^ pure,
tu7ia^ prickly pear ; it is silent in the syllables gue^ gu% guerra^
except it have a diéresis marked over it ; as, vergüenza^ shame.
In the syllables que^ qui^ it is always silent.
SOUNDS OF THE CONSONANT&
B has the same sound as in English ; but in Castile and
Aragón (where in other respects the Castilian language is
most purely spoken) and in certain parts of Mexico and
South America, they do not press the lips quite as closely to-
gether as those who speak English do, and this causes it to
be very frequently confounded with the v, although they are
distinct letters, and should be pronounced as in English.
C, when followed by a, o, w, or any consonant, sounds like
A ; before e and i, it sounds like th in thanks ; as, caballero^
gracias^ lección ; in the Americas, however, the c, before e
and Í, has undergone a change, and now has the sound of s
in this ; as cera, wax, hacer , to do, — pronounced sa-rah and
Closer. (See letter Z.)
CH is not a double consonant, but a letter which, although
of a double form, has by itself a particular denomination and
sound ; it is pronounced like ch in chess ; as, chico, chocolate,
Eormerly, in words of Hebrew and Greek origin, it had the
sound of k, when the vowel following it was marked with the
circumflex accent ; as, archangel, cMmica : but this practice is
obsolete, and such words are now written arcángel, química.
D has two sounds ; between two vowels, and at the end of
words, it has the sound of th in that ; &Q,ido, amad; but care
must be had not to give this dthe sound of th in thin. Every-
where else it has the sound of d in English ; as, de, divino,
duro.
Digitized
by Google
xxii INTRODUCTION,
P is always pronounced like the English /, and is now
nsed instead otph ; as, Filosofía^ Filadelfia^ instead of Philo-
sqphiay Philadelphia.
0 has two distinct sounds : one, before a, o, Uy or a conso-
nant, is the same sound as in English go^ good; as, gatOy gra-
cias ; before e and i it has a strong, guttural, aspirated sound,
for which the English has no equivalent, and which even a
very strongly aspirated A, as in the words hoty holy y does not
represent ; as, gentCy people ; gestOy gesture ; generaly general.
H is always silent ; as, haccy higOy pronounced as if no such
h were there. It is preserved only as a sign to indicate the
etymology of words, and is now omitted in many words in
which it was formerly used; as, CristOy Fihaofiay TeatrOy
PitágoraSy Filadelfia.
H is always written before words beginning with ue and
uiy and, with three exceptions {uaránidOy uaranoy iiatita)y
before ua.
J has always an aspirated guttural sound, like that which
the g has before e and Ú
L always sounds as in English.
LL is a single letter, and may not be divided at the end
of a line. It has a liquid sound, resembling that of the Eng-
lish II in Williamy brilliant ; as, OuillermOy brillante ; but in
the Americas it has the sound of y with a slight rough breath-
ing ; as, SaltillOy pronounced Sal-tV-yo.
M, N, and F have the English sound.
Ñ is always pronounced like ni in the English word
pinion \ as, caMii^ pronounced can-yon' ,
Q is pronounced like the English h before ue and uiy in
which combination alone it is now used ; in all other posi-
tions it has been replaced by c; as, cuandOy camay comeVy
qmen^ querer*
Digitized
by Google
INTRODUCTION. xxiii
B, between two vowels is like the English r, only it is
softer, and it requires a nice perception to catch the differ-
ence ; as, pero ; at the beginning or end of a word, and
when it occurs as the initial letter of the second division of
a compound word, or when it precedes or follows another
consonant, it is pronounced with a strong triU, produced by
breathing out through the mouth while the tongue is being
vibrated against the upper gums ; as, reloj ^ malrotar^ enrique-
cer^ Israely jprerogativay maniroto^ cariredondo^ &c.
BB is a single letter, and must be treated as such. It
has the rough, trilled sound just described; as, tierra^ hurrOy
perro.
S is pronounced like the English s in say ; as, sdbiOy solo.
Great care must be taken not to give the Spanish $ the
sound of shy or z which it often has in English — as in sioUy
or these. There is no sh or z sound in Spanish.
T is pronounced as in English. ' '
V has the sound of the English v. (See letter B,)
X, at the end of a syllable, has the sound of the x in the
English word tax ; as, examen^ extranjero. At the beginning
of a word or syllable x has the sound of the Spanish /, that
is, a very strong guttural ; as, México, Oaxaca. (See letter
J.) Some replace it by the letter «, when it comes before a
consonant, and write estranjero instead of extranjero. The
grammar of the Spanish Academy does not authorize this
practice.
Y, at the beginning of a word or syllable, is like the Eng-
ish y in the same position ; as, yegua^ Yucatán. It stands
alone in the conjunction y, as a vowel, and was formerly
used as a vowel at the beginning of certain words ; as, Ygle-
stay Trapuato ; but it has given place to i, and it never stands
at the beginning of a word as a consonant mjxioá.eTn Spanish.
It is used instead of i at the end of words in the combina-
tions aiy ei, oiy ui ; as, verdegay y rey y soy y muy. These, and
Digitized
by Google
xxiv INTRODUCTION.
many similar words, are often met with in old Spanish ter-
minating in i.
Z has the same sound as soft c, that is, c before e or i —
in fact, it is the same letter — ^and is only used before a, o, t¿,
and with certain consonants, in modern Spanish, while soft c
takes its place before e and i. Like the c^ it has undergone a
change in soun^ in the Americas. In Spain it has the sound
of th in thistle ; in America, that of 8 in last ; as, corazón^ hizo.
Z never has the sound of English 2;, or the English s in hds.
SYLLABLES.
Such syllables only will be noted here as may be subject
to doubt as to the pronunciation and orthography.
ca, que, qui, co, cu,
hah, Jcay. Jcee. ho. hoo.
za, ce, ci, zo, zu,
iMh, or tah. thayy or wy. thee, or see. thd, or so. tíioo, or soo.
az, ez, iz, oz, uz.
athy or ass. Uh, or és. eeth, or ees. oth, or m. ooth, or oos,
ga, gue, gui, go, gu,
gah. gay. ghee. go. goo.
ja, ge, gi, jo, ju,
hah. hay. hee. ho. hoo.
ya, ye. yi. yo. yu.
cha, che, chi, oho, chu,
tcMh. tcha/y. tehee. t¿ha. teh/M.
11a, lie, Hi, llo, Uu,
lyah, or yah. lyay, or yay. lyee, or yee. lyo, or yo. lyoo, or yoo.
lia, lie, fii, fio, flu,
wyai. nye. nyo. wyoo.
cua, cue, cui, cuo,
hu)ah. hwa/u. hwee. hwo.
gua, gue, gui, guo,
gwah, g^oay, gwee. gwo.
Digitized
by Google
INTRODUCTION,
XXV
DIFHTHONOS.
aiy as in dabais,
dah'-bah-eeaa.
You gave.
«y, *
' hay,
ah'-h
There is.
auj *
* pai^sa,
pah'-oO'Sa.
Pause.
ei.
* yei8,
vai'-eeéB.
You see.
ey, *
' %,
lai'-é.
Law.
ea, *
* hnea,
W-naira.
Line.
eo, *
* virgíneo,
veer-Jie'-nai-o,
Virginal.
ei^, *
* detída,
dai''0<h-da.
Debt.
ia,
* gracia,
grah'-the-a, or grah'-see-aJ^
Grace.
i£, *
* cidlo,
the-ai'-lOy or see-ai'-h."^
Heaven.
*i>, *
* precií?,
prai'-the-o, or prai'-see-o*
Price.
itt, *
* ciwdad,
the-oo-dath' y or i^t-oo-dcM,^
City.
0€, *
' héroe,
ai'-To^L
Hero.
oi, *
' sois,
ao'-eess.
You are.
<nf,
* V(?y,
fio'-e.
I go.
iia, *
* fragt¿a,
frahl-gwa.
Forge.
itó, *
* dt¿€fio,
doo-ain'-yo.
Owner.
ui, '
* rzíido.
Too-e'-do,
Noise.
«y,
* muy,
moo'-e.
Very.
tw, '
' ardwo,
(vr'-doo^.
Arduous.
TRIPHTHONGS.
iai,
as in preciáis, prairtherdh'-eeia, ot prai-iee-ah^-eess.*
iei,
** vaciáis, vah'the-ai'-eess, or mhraeeHii'-eesa,*
uai,
" santigt/<íis, san-U-^wdh'-eeas,
uay,
'* Paraguay, 'pah-rah-gwah'-e.
uei,
'^ averiguáis, dh-^tm^e-gwai'-eeaa.
««y,
" bw«y.
^ai'-€.
Whenever one of the vowels is accented, these combina-
tions do not form diphthongs, because each vowel then be-
comes a separate syllable; as, foia, varia^ efectúa^ &c. In
poetry the diphthongs as well as the triphthongs may be
divided into different syllables by a diéresis, when the verse
requires an additional syllable, as :
" Ó si rodeó tal vez,
Por el Istmo de Suez."
♦ This represents the American- Spanish pronunciation of the letter c.
XXVI
INTRODUCTION
SYTJiABICATIOUT.
Áccnf acy in pronunciation dependa largely on the man-
ner of dividing words into syllable Sj and on a certain nicety in
severing or isolating these, by means of precision in vocal
utterance. This is especially true of certain combinations of
letters. Let the following rules be observed :
1, All Spanish syllables, except the initial one, are sup-
posed to begin with a consonanU^ and in writing or speech all
words must be so divided as to conform to this law ; as, se-ñor,
and not señ-or j Ordios^ and not adi-6s \ ha^ia^ and not hac-ia ;
ce-ra^ and not cer-a^
2* Ll^ ch^ and rr, as has been said, must never be divided
in writing; and diphthongs and triphthongs may not have
their vowels separated at the end of a line,
3, A special effort should be made to have the stress of
voice fall sharply on the accented syllable* Certain vowel
combinations must be carefully severed in pronunciation ; as^
áía^ patto, hac/éí, o/do, creíble; and when two consonants
come together, one at the end of one syllable, and the other
at the beginning of the next, they must be scrupulously
separated by the voice ; as, men-te^ es-fe, prude?i4e^ ausen-ie*
To overlook this is to abandon all hope of a correct and deli-
cate Spanish pronunciation*
ACGENTXJATION.
Attention to these rules is necessary for correctness in
this branch of Spanish orthography, and tbeir mastery will
save endless confusion and worry,
* Such words 03 eT^amen^ ex-acto are apparent violations of this rule,
and it seems that their second syllables beghi with vowela. This is
trae in a sense, hut in reality this :c is a double consonant^ and is pro-
nounced with two sounds ; viz,, k and a, combined in one letter, so that
in pronouncing the word ex-ado, it is sonniied as if it were ek-sac-to, so
that, in speaking, this second syllable beg-ins with a consonant aound*
INTRODUCTION. xxvii
By a revision of the rules governing the placing of the
written accent npon words irregularly accented, made some
years ago by the Spanish Academy, the whole system of
accentuation was changed. The following are the modem
rules:
1. Words ending in vowels are accented on the next to
the last syllable; as, dia/^co, white ; me^a, table; ca¿a^¿o, horse.
2. Words ending in consonants are accented on the last
syllable ; as, hablar, to speak ; unidad, unity ; virtud, virtue.
In both these cases the accent naturally falls on these sylla-
bles without being written.
3. Any departure from these rules must be indicated by
placing an accent upon the syllable which is irregularly ac-
cented; A8,práctico,-pTaxiticsl; A wér/awo, orphan; aZ/i, there;
miércoles, Wednesday ; lápiz, pencil.
4. Since n and s are used constantly as the final letters of
verbs under inflection, they are treated as vowels when they
occur at the end of words, so that any word ending in either
of these letters, and accented on any other than the next to
the last syllable, must have a written accent ; as, interés, in-
terest; inglés, English; corazón, heart; hablarás, thou wilt
speak ; composición, composition ; and this rule is invariable.
Therefore, it is almost needless to add that words ending in
n and s, and accented on the next to the last syllable, do not
take a written accent; as, Carlos, Charles; antes, before;
examen, examination.
5. For purposes of accent, certain diphthongs, when at
the end of words of more than one syllable, are treated as a
single vowel ; viz., io, ia, uo, ua, ie, etc. (but this does not
include eo, ea, oa, or oe), so that when words ending in any
of these combinations are accented on the next to the last
syllable, the accent is not written ; as, hacia, toward ; con-
tinuo, continuous ; especie, sort.
6. Words ending in io, ia, uo, ua, ie, &c., and accented on
the first of these vowels, have the accent written ; as, día,
day ; mío or mía, mine ; hacia, I was making ; envío, I send ;
continúo, I continue.
Digitized
by Google
xxviii INTRODUCTION.
7. The accent is frequently placed on one of the Towels
of a diphthong or triphthong to indicate that that partic-
ular vowel is accented, and not another, on which it would
regularly fall ; as oído, heard ; puntapié, kick ; pais, country ;
leidOj read.
8. The written accent is used to distinguish from each
other certain monosyllabic words, which are similar in
form, but different in meaning ; as, más, more, and mas, but ;
él, he, and el, the ; qué, what or which (interrogative), and
que, that or which (relative) ; té, tea, and te, thee ; si, yes,
and si, if.
9. When the vowels á, é, 6, ú stand alone, as words, they
are always accented.
10. All unnecessary accents are to be avoided ; and aU
words must be pronounced according to their accent, whether
regular and unwritten, or irregular and written. Many
words formerly accented are not now accented; as, antes,
before ; fe, faith ; ti, thee ; hada, toward.
It was formerly the custom to accent aU the first persons
plural of the preterite indicative of verbs of the first and third
conjugations ; as, hablamos, we spoke ; escribimos, we wrote ;
to distinguish them from the same forms of the present
indicative ; as also the same person and number of the future
indicative of all verbs ; as, hablaremos, we shall speak ; apren-
deremos, we shall learn; escribiremos, we shall write; but
this has been abandoned, as being contrary to rule of accent
number 4.
11. When adverbs ending in -mente are formed from ad-
jectives which have a written accent, the written accent is
preserved in the adverbs; as, cómodo, convenient; camodar
mente, conveniently ; práctico, practical ; prácticamente, prac-
tically.
12. Words ending in n and s, and accented on the last
syllable of their masculine singular form, drop the written
accent in their masculine plural and in their feminine sin-
gular and plural ; as inglés. Englishman ; ingleses. English-
men; inglesa, an Englishwoman; inglesas. Englishwomen;
Digitized
by Google
INTRODUCTION. xxix
alemánj a German ; alemanesy Germans ; alemana^ a German
woman ; alemanas^ German women.
The one word carácter^ character, has an irregular accent
in the plural, caracteres^ which is accented on the next to
the last syllable, while it ought to fall on the third from the
last, if it followed its singular.
13. When a pronominal suffix is attached to the end of a
verb which has a written accent on the last syllable, the
accent is preserved to show the nature of the word, even
though this be an apparent violation of rule 1 ; as, hablóy
he spoke ; hablóUy he spoke to him ; also, when a verb is
accented on the next to the last syllable, and a pronominal
suffix is added, thus throwing the accent on the third syl-
lable from the last, the word must have a written accent;
as, tenga^let him have ; téngalo, let him have it ; so also when
there are two such suffixes, and the accent is thrown still
further from the end of the word ; as, diga, tell (subjunctive);
dígalo, tell it ; dígaselo, tell it to him.
PXTKCTX7ATI0N AND CAPITALS.
Spanish is not so profuse as English in its use of either
punctuation marks or capital letters. The punctuation
marks are the same as those used in English, with the addi-
tion of the inverted signs of interrogation and exclamation,
which stand at the beginning of interrogatory and exclama-
tory sentences, phrases, and words; &&, ¿Dónde vive usted?
Where do you live ? and / Oh, que y o supiera! Oh ! that I knew !
Proper nouns begin with capitals ; but proper adjectives,
such as americano, the American (man), alemana, the Ger-
man woman, do not. The names of the months begin with
capitals ; the names of the days of the week begin with small
letters.
Digitized
by Google
Digitized
by Google
DE TOElirOS'S
SPANISH GRAMMAR.
LESSON I.
BEGULAR VERB..
—First ConjugcUion,
TERMINATIONS OF THE INDICATIVE PRESENT.
Singular.
Plural.
1. o.
1. amos.
2. as.
2. ais.
3. a.
3. an.
Hablar, (Infinitive.)
To speak.
INDICATlVi
! PRESENT.
To hablo.
I speak.
Tú hablas.
Thou speakest
Él or ella habla.
He or she speaks.
Usted habla.
You speak, i.e., your honor
speaks.
Nosotros, or 1 , , ,
Nosot«I: i^^^^^o^
We speak.
Vosoü^,orí
Vosotras, ) "«"a**"»-
You speak.
Ellos, or ellas, hablan.
They speak.
Ustedes hablan.
You speak.
Sí (adverb).
Yes.
No "
No, or not
Señor.
Sir.
iHablaustedt
Si, señor, yo hablo.
i Hablan ustedes t
3
COMPOSITION.
Do you speak f
Yes, sir, I speak.
Do you speak t
1
Digitized
by Google
LESSON L
No, señor, ellas hablan.
% Habláis vosotras f
No, señor, ellos hablan.
i Habla ella f
No, señor, ella no habla.
i Hablas tú?
No, señor, él habla.
% Habla usted f
Sí, señor, hablo.
% Hablan ellas f
No, señor, no hablan.
¿Hablamos nosotros!
Sí, señor, hablamos.
4 Habláis vosotras f
Nosotras no hablamos.
No, sir, they speak.
Do you speak f
No, sir, they speak.
Does she speak f
No, sir, she does not speak.
Dost thou speak f
No, sir, he speaks.
Do you speak f
Yes, sir, I speak.
Do they speak f
No, sir, they do not speak.
Do we speak!
Yes, sir, we speak.
Do you speak!
We do not speak.
EXPLANATION.
, 1. Eegulab Verbs. — All the verbs of the Spanish lan-
guage have their infinitive endings in either ar, er^ or ir ;
hence their classification in three conjugations; 1st, those
ending in ar ; 2d, those ending in er ; and 3d, in ir ; as hor-
ilar^ aprender^ escribir.
2. Stems. — The letters before the terminations ar, er, ir,
in the preceding verbs, habl, aprenda escribe are called the
stems.
8. Terminations. — AH regular verbs of the first conju-
gation vary the endings in their respective modes and tenses,
so as to correspond with those of the verb hablar ; all those
of the second conjugation correspond to the terminations of
aprender ; and all those of the third correspond to escribir.
When therefore the student has learned to conjugate one
of the regular verbs of each conjugation, he can conjugate
all the regular verbs of the Spanish language (about 8,000).
For this reason we recommend the pupils to devote their at-
tention, in the first place^ to committing to memory the differ-
ent forms of these three model verbs. They will be found
complete near the end of the book.
As the terminations of the verbs are different for each
^erson, both in the singular and plural, the nominative pro-
LESSON L 3
nouns are ordinarily dispensed with, and are only used to
avoid ambiguity, or for the sake of emphasis ; except the
pronoun Usted^ which is usually expressed. — Usted^ meaning
You, is a contraction from vuestra merced^ Your Honor;
and, being a title, its omission would be considered impolite.
It is usually abbreviated to V. or Ud. for the singular, and
Vds. or Uds. for the plural; but in order not to perplex the
beginner, we shall use the full word for the present.
4. You. — ^In addressing an individual in Spanish, the third
person of the verb is used with the pronoun Usted : as, Usted
haUa^ you speak ; the second person singular is employed only
in addressing the Deity, and in conversation between relatives
and intimate friends, and in speaking to children and ser-
vants. The second person plural is used as the second person
singular when addressing more than one person, and in ad-
dressing audiences — where ustedes would be inappropriate —
and kings or persons in very exalted station, and, in old
Spanish and in certain exalted discourse, the Deity.
6. In a declarative sentence, where a statement is made,
the subject, whether noun or pronoun, precedes the verb ; as.
Usted hablay you speak ; in interrogative sentences the verb
precedes the subject ; as, ¿ Habla él ? does he speak ? (liter-
ally, speaks he ?).
6. The Spanish language has no auxiliary corresponding
to do or did; so all these interrogative sentences must be
teduced to a form similar to the Spanish ; as speak you, in-
stead of, do you speak ; then it is easy to translate this by
¿Habla usted?
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Hablan ellas ? Sí, señor, ellas hablan.
2. ¿ Habláis vosotros ? No, señor ; ellos hablan.
3. ¿ Hablamos nosotras ? No, señor ; ella habla.
4. i Habláis vosotros ? No, señor ; él habla.
5. i Habla ella ? Sí, señor, habla.
6. i Habla él ? No, señor, no habla.
7. i Hablas tú ? Sí, señor, yo hablo.
8. ¿ Habláis vosotras ? Sí, señor, nosotras hablamos.
4 LESSON U.
9. I Hablo JO ? Si, señor, usted habla.
10. é Habla él ? No, señor, no habla.
11. i No hablan ellos ? Si, señor, ellos hablan.
12. é Habla usted ? No, señor, yo no hablo.
13. l No habla usted ? No, señor, jo no hablo.
14. ¿ No hablan ellas ? Si, señor, hablan.
15. i No habláis vosotras ? No, señor, nosotras no hablamos.
EXEBCISB.
1. Do you speak ? I speak.
2. Do they speak ? Yes, sir, they speak.
3. Dost thou speak ? No, sir, he speaks.
4. Do you speak ? No, sir, we do not speak.
5. Dost thou speak ? No, sir, I do not speak.
6. Does he not speak ? Tes, sir, he speaks.
7. Do you not speak ? No, sir, we do not speak.
8. Does she not speak ? No, sir, she does not speak.
9. Do we not speak ? Yes, sir, we speak.
10. Do they (/em.) not speak ? No, sir, they (Jem.) do not
speak.
11. Do we (/em.) not speak ? Yes, sir, we (/em.) speak.
12. Do you speak ? No, sir, I do not speak ; they (/em.) speak.
LESSON II.
MASCULINE NOUNS.
Señor (Sr.). Sir, Mr., or Lord.
Caballero. Gentleman, Sir.
Señorito. Young gentleman.
Don. (Dn., or D.). Mr., Esq.
FEMININB NOUNS.
Señora (Sra.). Madam, or Mrs.
Lady, or My
lady.
Señorita (Srita.). Miss, or young
lady.
Doña (Da.) Mrs.
Manuel.
Emanuel.
Español.
Spanish.
Inglés.
English.
Francés.
French.
Alemán.
German.
Luisa.
Louisa.
Digitized
by Google
I
LESSOir 11.
COMPOSITION.
Señorita, ¿habla usted español t
Sí, señor, hablo españoL
Luisa, % hablas francés ?
No, señor, no hablo francés.
f Hablan ustedes inglés f
Hablamos inglés.
¿ Hablan ellos, ó ellas, francés t
Señora, 4 habla usted español f
Don Manuel, ¿ habla usted alemán f
Caballero, 4 habla usted español f
Señorita Luisa, ¿habla usted francést
Do you speak Spanish, Miss?
Yes, sir, I speak Spanish.
Louisa, dost thou speak French?
No, sir, I do not speak French.
Do you speak English ?
We speak English.
Do they speak French t
Madam, do you speak Spanish ?
Mr. Emanuel, do you speak German?
Sir, do you speak Spanish ?
Miss Louisa, do you speak French ?
EXPLANATION.
7. Señoe. — This word, used alone, i. e., as a vocative, was
originally supposed to imply inferiority on the pari; of the
speaker, and corresponded to the English word master^ as used
by slaves or servants ; and it is so used to-day by the same
classes ; but it is also used in addressing the Deity, or Jesus
Christ, and the king or any person in very high position.
Theoretically, the proper term of address among equals is
caballero^ gentleman or sir ; but señor is very commonly used
in this case at the present time, and especially with the words
«/, yes, 7w>, no ; as, si, señor ; wo, señor. It is used with the
surname, and means Mr., as, Señor Gómez, Mr. Gómez.
Señora, Señorita. — In addressing married ladies, the word
Señora, Madam or Mrs., and Señorita, Young (unmarried)
lady or Miss, may be used alone; as. Señora, or Señorita,
¿habla usted español? Madam, or Young lady, or Miss, do
you speak Spanish ?
Señorito, like Señor, usually implies inferiority on the
part of the speaker, for which reason it is seldom used, except
}fy servants, though it is sometimes applied to boys in play-
fulness, like the English, " My little man," " Young sir."
8. Don, Mr., applies to gentlemen, and Doña, Mrs., to la-
dies. These terms are only used in conjunction with the
Christian names ; as, Don Manuel, Doña Luisa, and still
more respectfully. Señor Don Manuel, Señora Doña Luisa.
Digitized
by Google
6 LESSON II.
This title, conferred, in old times, only upon members of
noble families, is now used in addressing all persons, except
those of very humble station, and is thus abbreviated, Dn., Da.
9. The negative no, is always placed immediately before
the verb.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Habla usted español ? Hablo español.
2. Luisa, ¿ hablas francés ? Hablo francés.
3. i Habla Manuel inglés ? Habla inglés.
4. Caballero, ¿ habla usted alemán ? Sí, señor, hablo alemán.
5. ¿ Hablan ustedes francés ? Hablamos francés.
6. ¿ Hablan ellos inglés ? No, señor, no hablan inglés.
7. ¿ Hablan ellas español ? No, señor, no hablan español.
8. ¿ Habla Luisa francés ? No, señor, no habla francés ; ella
habla español.
9. ¿ No habla Manuel alemán ? No, señor, no habla alemán ;
él habla inglés.
10. ¿ Habla usted español ? No, señor, no hablo español.
11. ¿ Habla Manuel español ? Sí, señor, él habla español.
12. Don Manuel, ¿ habla usted francés ? No, señor, no hablo
francés.
13. Señora Da. Luisa, ¿ habla usted español ? No, señor ;
hablo inglés.
14. Señorita Da. Luisa, ¿habla usted francés? Yo hablo
francés.
15. Caballero, ¿ habla usted alemán ? No, señorita, hablo
español.'
EXERCISE.
1. Do they speak French ? They speak French.
2. Do you speak English ? We speak English.
3. Do they speak Spanish ? No, madam, they do not. speak
Spanish.
4. Sir, do you speak German ? Yes, madam, I speak Germai;-
5. Does Emanuel speak French ? No, sir ; he speaks English.
6. Do you speak Spanish ? No, sir, I do not speak Spanish. .
7. Does not Louisa speak German ? No, sir, she doeanot
speak German ; she speaks French.
8. Emanuel, dost thou speak English ? I speak English.
9. Does Louisa speak Spanish ? Yes, sir, she speaks SpanisH
d by Google
LESSON III. 7
10. Do you speak French ? No, sir, I speak English.
11. Sir, do you speak French ? No, sir.
12. Miss Louisa, do you speak Spanish ? Yes, madam.
13. (Don) Emanuel, do you speak English ? Yes, sir, I speak
English.
14. Do we speak Spanish ? We do not speak Spanish ; we
speak French.
LESSON III.
Estudiar. (Infinitive. )
To study.
Estudio.
I study.
Estudias.
Thou studiest.
Estudia.
He studies.
Estudiamos.
We study.
Estudiáis.
You study. '
Estudian.
They study.
El (mase, sing.).
The.
Y oré.
And.
Qué (interrog. pronoun).
W hat or which.
Pero, sino.
But.
Bien (adverb).
Well.
Mal
Badly.
ADJEC
TIVBS.
Español.
Spaniard.
Inglés.
Englishman.
Francés.
Frenchman.
Alemán.
German.
Americano.
American.
MASCULINB NOUNS.
FEMININE NOUNS.
Alejandro. Alexander.
Margarita. Margi
COMPO
SITION.
ist
¿ Estudia usted español ?
No, señor, el francés estudia espa-
ñol ; pero yo estudio inglés.
1 Qué estudia el americano f
Do you study Spanish t
No, sir, the Frenchman studies Span-
ish ; but I study English.
What does the American study f
Digitized
by Google
$
LI^SSOIí^ IIL
Estutlia español j francés;
Alejandro, ^ estudias francés j ale-
mán T
No, Boñor, Rstudio español é ingles,
Mniiuel iiü esst lidia mío francois,
¿ í^mC' hablan ellos sino español t
I llnbla bien ingles el espaiid í
No, señor, ál habla el inglés mol,
pero habla bien el español.
He studies Spanish and French.
Alexander^ do you study French and
Gorman f
No, sir, i study Spanish and English.
Etnannel studies but (only) French,
What do they speak but Bpanish f
Docs the Spaniard speak English
weUf
No, sir, lie speaks English badly, but
speaks Spanish welL
EXPLANATION.
10. Y, — The conjunction y is changed into é when the
following word begins with i or hi ; as, español é inglés^ Span-
ish and English ; algodón é hih^ cotton and thread*
11. Qué, interrogative pronoun^ is written with an ac-
cent, to distingnish it from que^ relative prononn» or con^
junction.
13. Peeo and Sino, — When we translate hut into Spanish,
we must first ascertain its meaning; because this eon junc-
tion is used in English in various aenaee. Pero is used
adyerBatiTely, where one aentence or phrase or word is set
over against another ; aa. Hablo español^ pero no hablo inglés :
I speak Spanish, but I do not speak English, Sisro is used
in the aensG of exception, as but, when it means nothing but,
besides, else, except, only, no more than ; as, Él no hahla sino
español. He speaks naught but (except) Spanish. Pero is
much more common than sino,
13. We have again introduced the words español^ inglés^
francés^ and alemán into this lesson, because, while they
were given before aa substantives, they are now employed
as adjectives. The pupil will observe that, in Spanish, as in
English, some wortls are, at different timea, different parts oí
speech; ^ El español habla Men francés, The Spaniard
speaks French welh Here the word español i a used as an
adjectivo, meaning Spaniard^ and the word francés aa a
aubatantive, meaning the French language \ Men ia employed
aa an adverb, meaning wellj and it will appear later aa a
Digitized
by Google
LBSSON III. 9
substantive, meaning good. Consequently, the learner, be-
fore translating a word, must first ascertain what part of
speech it is.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. i Habla español Margarita ? Margarita no habla español,
pero habla inglés.
2. ¿ Habla usted español ? No, señor, hablo francés y ale-
mán.
3. Alejandro, i hablas inglés ? Sí, señor, hablo inglés.
4. ¿ Hablan ustedes español ? Hablamos español é inglés.
5. i Qué hablan ellos ? Hablan alemán.
6. Caballero, ¿ estucfia usted español ? Sí, señor, estudio es-
pañol é inglés.
7. i Qué estudia el alemán ? Estudia español.
8. i Estudian ustedes español ? Estudiamos francés y ale-
mán.
9. ¿ Habla bien Luisa el inglés ? Habla bien español é
inglés.
10. ¿ Habla bien Manuel el alemán ? No, señor, habla mal el
alemán, pero habla bien el francés.
11. ¿ Habla bien inglés el americano ? Habla bien inglés, pero
habla mal el español.
12. Señora, ¿estudia usted francés? No, señor, estudio es-
pañol. I
13. i Qué estudia Alejandro ? Él no estudia sino francés.
14. ¿ Qué hablan ellos sino español ? Ellos hablan francés.
EXERCISE.
1. Do you study German ? We study French and Spanish.
2. Does Alexander speak Spanish? Alexander does not
speak Spanish, but he speaks English.
3. Margaret, do you speak French ? No, sir, I speak Ger-
man and Spanish.
4. What do they speak ? They speak Spanish and German,
but do not speak French.
5. Do you speak Spanish ? No, sir, I do not speak Spanish,
but I speak English.
6. Does Louisa speak French well ? She speaks French bad-
ly, but speaks German well.
Digitized
by Google
10
LESSON IV.
7. What do you study ? We study Spanish, and Alexander
studies French.
8. What does the German study ? He studies Spanish.
9. Does he study well ? No, madam, he studies badly.
10. Do you speak Spanish, madam ? No, sir, I do not speak
Spanish, but I speak English and German.
11. Does the Frenchman speak English well ? No, madam,
he speaks English badly, but the Spaniard speaks English well.
12. What does the German study ? He studies English, and
the Englishman studies German.
13. What does Alexander study ? He studies French only.
14. What do they speak but Spanish ? ) They speak
What else do they speak but Spanish ? ) French.
LESSON IV.
Comprdd
'.* anfinitive.)
To buy.
Compro.
I buy.
Compras.
Thou buyesi
Compra.
He buys.
Compramos.
We buy.
Compráis.
You buy.
Compran.
They buy.
Buscar.
To look for, to seek.
Á.
To.
De.
Of, or from.
Al.
To the.
Del.
Of the, or from the.
Un {mase, sing.).
A, or an.
Libro.
Book.
Cuaderno.
Copy-book.
Papel.
Paper.
Madera. Wood, lumber.
Caballo.
Horse.
Tintero.
Inkstand.
* Comprar, to buy, takes the preposition á before the person from
whom something is bought ; as, Compré seda al comerdavUe^ I bought
silk of the merchant.
LESSON IV. 11
COMPOSITION.
4 Qué compra usted t
Compro un libro.
4 Compran ustedes papel t
No, señor, no compramos pi^l,
compramos un cuaderno.
Busco al americano.
Él busca el libro.
El caballo del francés.
El tintero de madera.
What do you buy t
I buy a book.
Do you buy paper t
No, sir, we do not buy paper, we
buy a copy-book.
I look for the American.
He looks for the book.
The Frenchman's horse.
The wooden inkstand.
EXPLANATION.
14. Á. — The preposition a, to. When the direct or in-
direct object of %a verb is a person, it is preceded by the prep-
osition á ; as, Busco al {á él) americano^ I seek the Ameri-
can ; otherwise it is not ; as. Busco él lihro^ I seek the book.
16. De. — The preposition de^ of^ or from^ is used to ex-
press possession, being always placed before the possessor ;
as, El caballo del francés : The Frenchman's horse. Since
there is no possessive case in Spanish, corresponding to the
English '«, all such ideas must be rendered by means of the
preposition de preceded by the thing possessed and followed
by the possessor ; and since Spanish nouns cannot be used as
adjectives, a qualifying phrase, composed of de and a noun,
must be substituted ; as. El tintero de madera. The wooden
inkstand, literally, the inkstand of wood.
16» El. — The article el^ the, is used to determine a noun
masculine singular ; as, el libro, the book.
N. B. — ^When the article el comes after the preposition á
(to), or de (of, or from), the e is dropped, and the two words
become one ; thus, al, del, instead of á el, de el ; but this does
not take place when él is a pronoun ; as, á él, de él ; though
it was common in old Spanish.
17. Un. — The indefinite article tin, shortened from uno, is
used before masculine nouns ; as, un inglés, an Englishman ;
un caballo, a horse.
N. R — Uno is. used only as a numeral adjective, or as an
indefinite pronoun, as will be explained later.
Digitized
by Google
12 LUSSON IV.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Qué compra el francés ? Compra el caballo del inglés.
2. l Qué compráis vosotras ? Compramos un cuaderno.
3. ¿ Qué compra usted ? Compro un libro.
4. ¿ Compran ustedes un cuaderno ? No, señor, compramos
un tintero de madera.
5. ¿ Qué buscas tú ? Busco un libro español.
6. ¿ Qué buscáis vosotros ? Nosotros buscamos un tintero.
7. ¿ Qué buscan ellas ? Buscan el papel.
8. Alejandro, ¿ buscas el papel ? No, señor, busco el cua-
derno.
9. ¿ Estudia Margarita inglés ? No, señor, estudia francés.
10. ¿ Qué estudia el americano ? Estudia español.
11. ¿ Estudian ustedes francés ? No, señor, estudiamos inglés.
12. l Qué estudia ella ? Estudia alemán.
13. ¿ Qué compra usted ? Compro el caballo del español.
14. ¿ Qué compran ellos ? Compran un tintero de madera.
15. ¿ Buscáis vosotros al alemán ? No, señor, buscamos al
francés.
16. ¿ Habláis vosotros alemán ? Sí, señor, hablamos alemán.
17. i Hablan ellas español ? No, señor, hablan francés.
18. ¿ Qué estudia usted ? Estudio inglés y español.
19. ¿ Compra ella un libro ? Sí, señor, compra un libro.
20. ¿ Busca él al francés ? No, señor, busca al alemán.
21. i Qué habla el americano ? Habla español.
22. Manuel ¿ qué estudias tú ? Estudio ademán.
23. ¿ Qué compran ellos ? Compran un caballo.
24. ¿ Qué buscan ustedes ? Buscamos el libro español.
EXERCISE.
1. What do they look for ? They look for an inkstand.
2. What does she look for ? She looks for a book.
3. Do you look for a copy-book ? Yes, sir, we (/em.) look
for a copy-book.
4. Do they (fern.) buy a wooden inkstand ? Yes, sir, they
buy a wooden inkstand.
6. What do you buy ? We buy the Frenchman's horse. ,
6. Do you buy paper ? No, sir, I buy a book.
7. Do you buy a copy-book ? Yes, sir, I buy a copy-book.
8. What does the Frenchman study ? He studies German.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON V.
13
9. Do you study Spanish ? No, sir, I study French.
10. What does she study ? She studies English.
11. What do they (/ew.) study ? They study Spanish.
12. Do you speak French ? Yes, sir, I speak French.
13. Does she speak English ? No, sir, she speaks German.
14. Do you speak German ? No, sir, we (/em.) speak English.
15. Do you look for the Frenchman ? Yes, sir, I look for the
Frenchman.
16. Do you look for paper ? No, sir, I look for a copy-book.
17. What do they look for ? They look for a book.
18. Do you look for the German ? Yes, sir, we (/em.) look for
the German.
19. Do you speak French ? Yes, sir, I speak French.
20. What does Margaret speak ? She speaks English.
21. What do they buy ? They buy a wooden inkstand.
22. What dost thou look for ? I look for a horse.
23. What do you study ? We (/em.) study Spanish.
24 What do you speak ? I speak English.
LESSON V.
Necesitar, (Infinitive.)
Necesito.
Necesitas.
Necesita.
Necesitamos.
Necesitáis.
Necesitan.
Mi.
Su.
Su (n) de usted, or \
El (n). de usted. í
El papá. The papa.
EPiabogado. The lawyer.
El comerciante. The merchant.
El lacre. The sealing-wax
To need, or to be in want of.
I need.
Thou needest
He needs.
We need.
You need.
They need.
My.
His, her, its, their.
Your.
OENDEB.
La mamá.
La pluma.
La tinta.
La gramática.
The mamma.
The pen.
The ink.
The grammar.
Digitized
by Google
14
LESSON V.
El pollo.
Tlie cliicken*
1 La gallina.
The hen.
El algodón.
The cotton.
La »eda.
The ííJIk.
El jabón.
The soap.
La lavandera.
The \ wa
El pañuela
The handker-
woman.
chief.
La camisa.
The BhirL
El zapatero.
The shoemaker.
1
COMPOSITION.
■f
I Necesita el abogado U pluma f
Sí^ señor, neceeita la plum a y el tin-
tero.
I Que Hücesita comprar la lavandera!
Necesita comprar jabón.
¿Necesita el comerciante mi algo-
dón t
Necesita comprar el algodón do us*
ted J ia seda del Irancés.
I necesita u^tf^d bu pañuelo de algo-
dón t
No, selSora, necesito su pañuelo de
seda de ust«d,
|Qn¿ necesitan ustedes t
Necesitamos un pollo y uua gallina.
Does the lawyer want the pen f
Yesi, sir, ho wants the pen and the
inkstand.
What docs the washerwoman want
tohuyt
She wants to buy soap.
Does the merchant want my cotton f
He wants to buy your cotton and
the Frenchman's silk.
Do you want your cotton handker-
chief t
Nü| madam, I want your silk baud-
kerchief.
What do you want!
We want a chicken and a hen.
EXPLANATION,
IB, Gender, — In Spatiieh all nounB are either maaculin©
or feminine ; the neuter gender is only applied to those
things BO indefinitely used that their gender cannot bo de-
termined.
The gender of nouns may be ascertained either by their
signification or their termination,
Nonns which Bignify males, or which denote titles or pro-
fesaiong, Ac, common to men, are maaenline ; and those
which signify females, or profeseionH, iScc,, associated with
women, are feminine, without regard to their terminations :
BO that^ It ombre^ man; cahaUero^ gentleman ; j»i>^^, chicken;
mpntero^ sboemnker; abogado^ lawyer, are masculine; and
mujer J woman ] seilúva^ lady ; gallina^ hen ; lavandera^ wash-
erwoman, are feminine.
GooQÍe
LESSON V.
15
Nouns ending in ¿r, d, ion^ or nmbre are generally femi-
nine, and those ending in other letters are masculine ; as,
Pi^pel. Paper.
Tintero. Inkstand.
BiUete. BiUet.
Lección. Lesson.
Pluma. Pen.
Ciudad. City.
Nouns ending in ema are masculine. Only one noun in
the Spanish language ending in o is feminine — mano, hand.
The letters of the alphabet are all feminine, as letra, letter,
is feminine.
N. B. — Una {indefinite article), a, is used before feminine
nouns in the singular.
To facilitate the pupils in the distinction of gender, the
left-hand side, in the vocabulary, is reserved for masculine,
the right^or feminine nouns.
19, When your is preceded by you, and there is no pos-
sibility of ambiguity, it is translated by su ; otherwise, it is
generally rendered by el — de usted, or su — de usted; as.
Usted necesita su carta.
4 Qué necesita el papá de usted t
Necesita su libro de usted.
You need your letter.
What does yoiir father need f
He needs your book.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Necesita usted mi gramática ? No, señor, no necesito su
gramática de usted.
2. é Necesita ella el pañuelo de seda ? Sí, señor, ella necesita
el pañuelo de seda.
3. ¿ Necesita usted comprar un libro ? Necesito comprar un
cuaderno.
4. i Necesitan ellas el lacre ? No, señor, necesitan el pañue-
lo de algodón.
6 i Qué necesita comprar el abogado ? Necesita comprar
una pluma.
6. ¿ Qué necesita comprar la lavandera ? Necesita comprar
jabón.
7. i Busca usted su pañuelo ? Sí, señor, busco mi pañuelo.
8. i Busca usted el cuaderno de Manuel ? No, señor, busco el
cuaderno de usted.
Digitized
by Google
16 LESSON F,
9. ¿ Habla usted bien el alemán ? No, señorita, hablo mal el
alemán.
10. i Estudian ustedes francés ? No, señor, estudiamos español.
11. i Compra usted un caballo inglés ? Sí, señor, compro un
caballo inglés.
12. i Qué compran ellos ? Compran una plmna y tinta.
13. ¿ Qué compráis vosotras ? Nosotras compramos un pa-
ñuelo de seda.
14. i Qué compra la lavandera ? Compra jabón.
15. ¿ Busca usted á mi abogado ? Sí, señor, busco al abogado
de usted.
16. i Compra la lavandera un pollo ? Compra una gallina.
17. ¿ Compra jabón el comerciante ? No, señor, el comer-
ciante compra algodón.
18. ¿ Buscan ellas el pañuelo de usted ? Buscan el pañuelo
de usted.
19. ¿ Necesita usted hablar al abogado ? Sí, señora, necesito
hablar al abogado.
20. i Necesita usted comprar un libro ? No, señor, necesito
comprar una pluma y papel.
21. ¿ Necesita usted estudiar inglés ? Sí, señor, necesito estu-
diar inglés.
22. i Qué necesitáis vosotras ? Necesitamos comprar lacre.
23. ¿ Necesita usted hablar al francés ? No, señor, necesito
hablar al alemán.
24. i Qué necesita usted ? Necesito un pañuelo de algodón.
EXERCISE.
1. What do you need ? I need a book and paper.
2. What does she need ? She needs your handkerchief.
3. Do you need a horse ? Yes, sir, I need an English horse.
4. What do you need ? I need soap.
5. Does the American need the Spanish book ? Yes, sir, he
needs the Spanish book.
6. Do they need a lawyer ? Yes, sir, they need a lawyer.
7. Do you buy a silk handkerchief ? No, sir, we (fern.) buy
a cotton handkerchief.
8. Do you look for the Frenchman's horse ? No, sir, I look
for the Englishman^3 horse.
9. Dost thou study German ? No, sir, I study English.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON VI.
17
10. What does the merchant buy ? He buys cotton.
11. What does the washerwoman buy ? She buys a hen and
a chicken.
12. Does the lawyer buy a book ? No, sir, he buys paper.
13. Do they {fern,) speak well ? No, sir, they speak badly.
14. Do you speak French, sir ? No, sir, I speak English.
15. Do you study much (mucho) ? No, sir, we study very
little (poco).
16. Do you study fast (aprisa) ? No, sir, I study slowly (des-
pacio).
17. Do you buy cotton from the merchant ? No, sir, I buy
silk from your brother (hermano).
18. What does yotr papa need ? He needs the lawyer's book.
19. What are they looking for ? They are looking for paper.
20. Do you need a copy-book ? No, sir, I need a book.
21. Do you study Spanish ? Yes, madam, I study Spanish.
22. Do you need paper and pen ? Yes, sir, I need paper
and pen.
23. What do they need ? They need a silk handkerchief.
24. What do you need ? I need an English horse.
LESSON VI.
REGULAR VERB.— /Second Conjugation.
INDICATIVE PRESENT — TERMINATIONS.
Plural.
Singular.
1. O.
2. es.
3. e.
Aprender. (Infinitive.)
Aprendo.
Aprendes.
Aprende.
Aprendemos.
Aprendéis.
Aprenden.
Vender.
4
1. emos.
2. éis.
3. en.
Toleam.
I leam.
Thou leamest
He learns
We leam.
You leam.
They leam.
To sell.
Digitized
by Google
18
LESSON VI.
Muy.
Mucho.
Poco.
Aprisa.
Despacio.
Estudioso.
Holgazán.
Hombre.
Muchacho.
Padre.
Hijo.
Hermano.
Man.
Boy.
Father.
Son.
Brother.
Very.
Much, a great deal.
Little.
Quickly.
Slowly.
Studious.
Idle.
}
Mujer.
Muchacha.
Madre.
Hija.
Hermana.
Woman.
Mother.
Daughter.
Sister.
COMPOSITION.
I Aprende muy aprisa el muchacho t
El muchacho estudioso aprende muy
aprisa ; pero el muchacho holga-
zán aprende muy despacio.
I Aprenden inglés su padre y su her-
mano de usted!
Sí, señor, y mi madre y mi hermana
aprenden francés.
I Aprende mucho la muchacha t
No, señor, aprende poco.
I Aprenden aprisa su hijo y su hija
deustedt
No, señor, aprenden despacio.
Does the boy learn Tery fastf
The studious boy learns Tery íast;
but the idle one learns Tery slowly.
Do your father and brother learn
English t
Yes, sir, and my mother and sister
learn French.
Does the girl learn mucht
No, sir, she learns little.
Do your son and daughter learn
fastf
No, sir, they learn slowly.
EXPLANATION.
20. The teemination of the first person in the indica-
tive present of all the conjugations is always o, with the ex-
ception of the following six verbs : dar^ to give— indie, pres.,
first singular, doy ; esfar^ to be — estoy ; haber ^ to have — he ;
ir, to go — voy; saber y to know — sé; ser y to be — soy. The
only difference between the termination of the first and
second conjugations is the changing of the a into e in the
second and third persons singular, and in all the plural.
21. Muy is generally translated by very or very much ; as
Digitized
by Google
LESSON VI. 19
muy bieuj very well ; muy bueno^ very good, &c. ; but it can
never qualify a verb nor stand alone in discourse ; as, Does
he speak very well ? Yes, very. ¿ Habla él muy bien f áí,
mucho. Muy must not be used before mucho ; instead, there-
fore, of saying muy mucho^ the form is muchísimo^ very much.
22. Most masculine nouns ending in o change this letter
into a for the feminine ; as,
Hermano. Brother. Hermana. Sister.
Hijo. Son. Hija. Daughter.
Muchacho. Boy. Muchacha. Girl.
23. The words usted and ustedes, you, singular and plural,
have been written in full up to this point, so as not to con-
fuse the student;. but after this the capital V. will be used,
according to custom, for usted, and Vds. for the plural. It
* is very common at the present time to use Ud. and Uds. as
the abbreviations in letter writing, or business papers.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Aprende V. bien el francés ? No, señor, aprendo muy
mal el francés.
2. i Aprenden ellas aprisa ? No, señor, aprenden despacio.
3. i Aprende mucho el muchacho holgazán ? No, señor,
aprende muy poco.
4. i Aprendéis vosotros aprisa ? Sí, señor, aprisa y bien.
5. ¿ Qué vende el hermano de su padre de V. ? Vende algodón.
6. • l Venden ellas papel ? No, señor, venden plumas y lacre.
7. ¿ Qué vende Margarita ? Vende una gallina.
8. i Vende lacre el comerciante ? No, señor, vende papel.
9. ¿ Necesita V. el pañuelo de su hermana ? No, señor, nece-
sito el pañuelo de su hija de V.
10. é Busca su mamá de V. el pañuelo de seda ? No, señor,
busca el pañuelo de algodón.
11. ¿ Qué necesita su hija de V. ? Necesita hablar al herma-
no de V.
12. ¿ Necesita la muchacha comprar papel ? No, señora, nece-
sita comprar un cuaderno.
13. i Habla V. del francés ? No, señorita, hablo del alemán.
14. ¿ Qué compra su padre de V. ? Compra el caballo del hijo
del abogado.
Digitized
by Google
so LESSOJ^ VL
15. i Qué busca Y. f Busco un libro y una pluma.
16. í Qué bujsca Ja muchacha f Busca el jabón de la hermana
doV.
17. é Aprende mucho el muchacho estudioso ? Sí» señor^
aprende mucho.
18. i Aprende Y. su lección de franca í No, señor, api^endo
mi lección de alemán.
19. i Habla bien Don Manuel el español í Sí, señor, habla
muy bien el español.
20. ¿ Estudia V. gramática inglesa ? No, señor, estudio gra-
mática francesa*
21. i Compra Y. nn tintero y papel ? No compro sino un tin-
tero.
22. i Busca Y, á mi padre ? Sí, señorita, busco a su padre
deV.
23. ¿ Necesita Y. comprar un tintero ? No, señora, necesito .
hablar á mi hermana.
24. i Necesitamos nosotras aprender español f Sí ^ señor, nece-
sitamos mucho aprender españoL
EXERCISE,
1. Does your sister learn English ? Yes, sir^ she learns Eng-
lish.
2, What does your brother learn? My brother leams Spanish.
B, Bo you learn quickly ? No, sir, we learn very slowly.
4, Does the studious hoy learn well f Yes, sir, he learns very
well,
5, What does your brother sell ? He sells cotton and silk,
6* Do you sell paper ? No, sir, I sell sealing wax aud ink.
7. Do they (fern,) need a French book ? No, sir, they need
a copy-book, a pen, and ink.
8. Do you need the Eng-Iish grammar t No, sir, I need the
Spanish grammar,
9. Do you want to speak to mj father ? Yes, sir, I want to
speak to your father.
10. Do you want to speak to my sister's son ? No, sip, I want
to speak to the Frenchman.
11. Does he want to buy a horse I Yea, sir, he wants to buy
a horse.
12. Do you need my hook f No, madam, I need your wooden
inkstand.
4
LESSON VIL
21
13. Do you look for the merchant ? No, sir, I look for your
father.
14. Do they look for papa ? No, sir, they look for the lawyer.
15. Do you buy a book ? No, sir, we buy a copy-book and
paper.
16. Do they study English ? Yes, sir, they study English.
17. Do you study German, sir ? No, I study Spanish, madam.
18. Do you speak English well ? No, sir, I speak English
badly.
19. Does your sister speak French very well ? No, sir, she
speaks very little French.
20. What does your father speak ? He speaks but (only)
English.
21. Does he not speak German ? No, sir, he does not speak
German.
22. Does your daughter speak to your sister ? Yes, sir, she
speaks to my sister.
23. Do you learn very quickly ? Yes, sir, I learn very quickly.
24. Do you sell your book ? No, sir, I sell my paper.
LESSON VII.
Leer, (Infinitive.)
To read.
Leo.
I read.
Lees.
Thou readest
Lee..
He reads.
Leemos.
We read.
Leéis.
You read.
Leen.
They read.
Comer.
To eat, to dine.
Beber.
To drink.
HASCULINE ADJECTIVES.
Bueno. Good.
Hermoso. Handsome.
Feo. Ugly.
Pequeño. Little or small.
Grande (m. &/.). Large.
Español. Spanish, alsoSpaniard.
Americano. American.
FEMININE ADJECTIVES.
Buena. Good.
Hermosa. Handsome.
Fea. Ugly.
Pequeña. Little or small.
Española. Spanish.
Americana. American.
Digitized
by Google
22
LESSON
VIL
Pan.
Bread.
Came.
Meat.
Pescado.
Fish.
Leché.
Milk.
Queso.
Cheese.
Agua.
Water.
Vino.
Wine.
Cerveza.
Beer.
Bülete.
Billet or note.
Cai-ta.
Letter.
COMPOSITION.
I Lee V. un billete t
No, señor, leo una carta.
I Qué come el español f
Come buen pescado, pero come mala
carne.
I Beben Vds. vino bueno f
Bebemos buen TÍno y buena cerreza»
I Qué compra el am<jricano ?
Compra un caballo pequeSo,
I Habla V. al gran hombre f
No, señor, hablo ál hombre grande,
% Qíiá vende la francíjsa f
Yenda seda hermosa.
Do you read a note!
No, sir, I read a letter.
What does the Spaniard eat t
He eats good ñsh, but bad meat,
Do yon drink good wine 1
Wo drink good wine and good beer.
What does the American buy f
He buys a small horse.
Do you speak to the gfreat man f
No, sir, I speak to the large man.
What does the French woman sell Í
She seUs handsome silk.
EXPLANATION.
24. Adjectives terminating in o, an^ or on^ form their
feminine termination in a. Those terminating otherwise are
common to both genderB ; as,
El muchacho holgazán.
La muchacha holgazana.
El hombre comilón.
La mujer comilona.
El hombre felia»
La majer feliz»
La gallina buena^
Adjectives signifying nationality, and ending in a conso-
nant, take an a to form their feminine terminations ; as,
The Mio boy.
The idle girl.
Tlio gbitlonous man.
The g^luttonoua woman.
The happy man.
The buppy woman.
The good hen.
Español. Spanianl.
Española. Spanish.
Libro ingléi. Englisli book.
Gramática inglesa. English grammar.
Those ending in o change this letter into a ; as,
Americano. l American.
Americans. 1 American,
GooqIc
LESSON VIL 23
Adjectives are generally placed after their nouns ; but in
poetry, or in an elevated style, and even in conversation,
many are placed before the noun. This is especially true of
certain short adjectives. Beading and practice will give the
pupil the idea as to their proper use.
Adjectives used metaphorically, or with a signification
different from their proper one, are placed before ; as,
Un gran caballo. | A great horse.
Some adjectives lose their last letter, or syllable, when
they precede the masculine singular noun ; as,
Mai muchacho. Bad boy.
Buen libro. Good book.
Gran caballo. Great horse.
Primer hombre.
Tercer paso.
Cien árboles.
First man.
Third step.
Hundred trees.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. i Lee V. un buen libro ? Sí, señor, leo un libro bueno.
2. i Leemos nosotros bien el ingl^ ? No, señor, leemos mal
el inglés, pero leemos bien el español.
3. i Bebe V. vino ? No, señor, yo bebo agua.
4. i Qué beben ellos ? Beben cerveza.
5. i (joméis vosotros queso y pan ? No, señor, comemos pes-
cado.
6. i Qué comen los ingleses ? Los ingleses comen buena
carne.
7. i Qué bebe el español ? Bebe buen vino y cerveza mala.
8. i Qué lee la americana ? Lee un libro de mi hermana.
9. i Qué estudia el hijo pequeño de V. ? Estudia gramática.
10. i Qué necesita la muchacha hermosa ? Necesita un peque-
ño x>añuelo de seda.
11. i Necesita V. un caballo grande ? No, señor, yo no nece-
fdto un caballo grande, sino un gran caballo.
12. i Qué estudia la española ? Estudia inglés.
13. i Estudia V. la gramática francesa ? No, señor, estudio la
gramática inglesa.
14. i Come pan la inglesa ? Sí, señor, come pan y carne.
15. ¿ Qué beben Vds. ? Bebemos leche.
Digitized
by Google
24 LFSSON VIL
16. i Lee V. un libro inglés ? No, señor, leo un libro francés.
17. ¿ Qué lee la americana ? Lee su lección.
18. i Qué vende la inglesa ? Vende un pañuelo.
19. ¿ Compra V. algodón al comerciante americano ? Sí, se-
ñor, compro algodón al comerciante americano.
20. i Necesita la francesa un pañuelo grande ? No, señor, ne-
cesita un pañuelo hermoso.
21. ¿ Qué busca el muchacho ? Busca á su hermana.
22. i Qué compra V. ? Compro un pañuelo feo, pero bueno.
23. ¿Necesita V. seda ? No, señor, necesito algodón.
24. i Qué lee V. ? Leo el libro de mi padre.
25. ¿ Qué coméis vosotros ? Comemos pan y pescado.
26. ¿ Qué bebe el alemán ? Bebe vino y cerveza.
EXERCISE.
1. What do you read ? I read a great book.
2. Do you read English well ? Yes, sir, I read English very
well.
3. Does the German drink wine ? No, sir, he drinks beer.
4. What do they (fern.) drink ? They drink water.
5. Do you eat meat ? No, sir, I eat fish.
6. What does the Englishman eat ? He eats bread and meat
7. What does your daughter buy? She buys a silk hand-
kerchief from the American woman.
8. Does the studious boy buy a book ? Yes, sir, he buys a
French grammar.
9. Does the handsome American woman buy a large book ?
No, sir, she buys a little book.
10. Does your mamma want a large handkerchief ? No, sir,
she wants a handsome handkerchief.
11. Do you need your book ? No, sir, I do not need my book.
12. Do they need a Spanish grammar ? Yes, sir, they need a
Spanish gi-ammar.
13. Does the woman sell bread ? Yes, sir, she sells bread and
fish.
14. What do you read ? I read my letter.
15. What does your brother read ? He reads a note.
16. Does the girl sell soap ? No, sir, she sells milk.
17. Does the lazy boy learn well ? No, sir, he learns badly.
18. Do you learu much ? No, sir, I learn little.
líí* Do yüu read the bouk ( No, sii-^ I read the lüttor.
LESSON VIH.
25
20. Do you buy cheese ? Yes, sir, I buy cheese. .
21. Do they buy bread ? No, sir, they buy meat and beer.
22. Do you need a handkerchief ? No, sir, I need soap.
23. Do you read your father's letter? No, sir, I read my
brother's letter.
24. Does your father buy an English grammar ? No, sir, he
buys a French book.
25. Does your brother read my note ? No, sir, he reads my
sister's letter.
LESSON VIII.
Third Conjugation.
DÍDICATIVB
PRBSENT-
-TERMINATIONS.
Singular.
Plural.
1. O.
1. imos.
2. es.
2. ís.
3. e.
3. en.
Escribir. (Infinitive.)
To write.
Escribo.
I write.
Escribes.
Thou writest
Escribe.
He writes.
Escribimos.
We write.
Escribís.
You write.
Escriben.
They write.
Eecibir.
1
To receive.
En.
In, into, or at.
Ni.
No, neither, nor.
El (mase. sing.).
La (fem. sing.).
Lo (neuter).
The.
Los (mase, plural).
Las (fem. plural).
'
ADJECTIVES.
Mucho. Much.
Poco. Little.
Muchos. Many.
Pocos. Few.
Digitized
by Google
26
LUSSON VIIL
SÜBSTAMTIVB8.
Periódico.
Newspaper.
Lección.
Lesson.
Periódicos.
Newspapers.
Lecciones.
Lessons.
Ejercicio.
Exercise.
Ley.
Law.
Ejercicios.
Exercises.
Leyes.
Laws.
Zapatero.
Shoemaker.
Plata.
Silver.
Sombrerero.
Hatter.
Semana.
Week.
Semanas.
Weeks.
COMPOSITION.
4 Escribe V. las lecciones ó los ejer-
cicios f
No escribo ni las lecciones ni los
ejercicios.
4 Escriben las señoritas muchos bi-
lletes f
Ellas escriben muchos.
4 Recibe el comerciante plata ú orof
Él recibe oro y plata.
( Escribe Y. la carta en inglés f
Sí, señor, escribo la carta en inglés.
Do yon write the lessons or the ex-
ercises f
I write neither the lessons nor the
exercises.
Do the young ladies write many
notes f
They write many.
Does the merchant receive silver or
goldf
He receives gold and silver.
Do you write the letter in English f
Yes, sir, I write the letter in Eng-
lish.
EXPLANATION.
25. The endings of the third conjugation and those of
the second are the same, except in the first and second per-
sons of the plural ; in which the e of the second conjugation
is changed into i in the third, as must have been observed.
26. The conjunction 6 is changed into ú when the fol-
lowing word begins with o or ho \ as,
Plata Ú oro. I Silver or gold.
27. Ni. — Neither and nor are rendered by ni ; and it is
common to use two negatives in Spanish ; as.
Él no necesita ni la came ni el pes- 1 He wants neither the meat nor the
cado. I fish.
28. The plueal op nouns is formed by adding s to those
terminating in an unaccented vowel ; as,
Ejercicio. Exercise. | Ejercicios. Exercises.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON VIIL 27
And adding es —
Ist. To those ending in an accented vowel ; as,
Alelí. Gilliflower. | Alelíes. Gilllflowers.
2d. To those ending in a consonant ; as,
Lección. Lesson. i Lecciones. Lessons.
3d. To those ending in y ; as.
Ley. • Law. | Leyes. Laws.
Words ending in z form their plural by changing z to c
(since z never stands before e or i), and adding e8\ as,
Luz. Light. I Luces. Lights.
29. An adjective agrees with its noun in gender and
number, and forms the plural according to the rules laid
down for nouns ; as,
Buen hombre.
Buenos hombres.
Buena mujer.
Buenas mujeres.
Good man.
<Good men.
Good woman.
Good women.
80. The article also must agree with the noun to which
it refers, in gender and number ; as.
El libro.
Los libros.
La pluma.
Las plumas.
Lo bueno.
The book.
The books.
The pen.
The pens.
What is good.
Singular feminine nouns beginning with an accented a
or ha take the masculine article el^ instead of the feminine
la, in order to avoid the disagreeable meeting of two ac-
cented a's ; as,
El alma. The soul.
El agua. The water.
El alba. The dawn of day.
El hambre. The hunger, &c.
31. The neuter article lo has no plural number, and
is placed only before adjectives used as substantives in an
abstract sense ; as,
Lo bueno. ^ I The good, i. e., that which is good.
Lo malo. ' I The bad, i. e., that which is bad.
Digitized
by Google
28. LESSON VIH,
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. i Escribe V. á su padre ? No, señor, escribo á mi her-
mano.
2. ¿ Qué escribe V. ? Escribo una carta á la muchacha.
3. ¿Escribe V. muchos billetes? No, señor, escribo muy
pocos.
4 i Escriben ellos bien los ejercicios ? Sí, señor, ellos escri-
ben bien los ejercicios.
5. i Becibe V. libros ingleses ? No, señor, recibo libros fran-
6. i Qué reciben ellos ? Reciben plata y oro.
7. ¿ Reciben mucho oro ? No, señor, reciben muy poco.
8. Lee V. sus cartas ó sus billetes ? No leo ni mis cartas, ni
mis billetes ; leo mis ejercicios.
9. i Necesita V. muchos pañuelos ? No, señor, necesito muy
pocos.
10. i Estudia V. muchas lecciones ? No, señor, estudio
pocas.
11. i Busca V. una pluma ? No, señor, busfco una gramática.
12. i Qué busca su hermana de V. ? Busca los ejercicios en
inglés.
13. l Estudia V. francés ó alemán ? No estudio ni francés, ni
alemán ; estudio español.
14. i Necesita V. mi ejercicio ? Sí, señor, necesito su ejercicio
inglés.
15. i Escribe V. al comerciante ó al abogado ? No escribo al
comerciante, ni al abogado ; escribo á su padre de V.
16. i Escriben ellas los ejercicios de inglés ? No, señor, escri-
ben los ejercicios de español.
17. i Recibe V. muchas cartas de su padre ? No, señor, recibo
muy pocas.
18. i Recibe el comerciante mucho algodón ? Sí, señor, recibe
mucho.
19. i Compra V. muchos pañuelos ? Sí, señor, compro muchos.
20. i Compra su padre de V. muchos caballos ? No, señor,
compra pocos.
21. i Compra V. la gramática del muchacho ? No, señor, com-
pro el cuaderno de la muchacha.
22. i Habla mucho el francés ? No, señor, habla poco.
23. i Escribe V. bien el inglés ? No, señor, escribo mal el in-
glés, pero escribo bien el español.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON VIH. 29
EXERCISE.
1. Does your brother write English well ? Yes, sir, he writes
English well.
2. Do you write to my brother ? No, sir, I write to my father.
3. Do yoii write in English or in Spanish? I write in English.
4. Do they (/em.) write the lessons or the exercises ? They
write neither the lessons nor the exercises ; they write letters.
5. Do you receive many notes ? No, sir, I receive but few.
6. Do they receive gold ? No, sir, they receive silver.
7. Do you receive many letters from your father ? Yes, sir,
I receive many.
8. Do you eat fish ? No, sir, I eat bread and cheese.
9. Do the Germans drink water ? No, sir, they drink beer.
10. Do you read your brother's letter ? No, sir, I read my sis-
ter's letter.
11. Does the merchant sell French paper ? No, sir, he sells
English paper.
12. Does your brother learn German and English ? No, sir,
he learns neither German nor English ; he learns Spanish.
13. Do you need silver or gold ? I need neither gold nor
silver.
14. Do you look for my father ? No, madam, I look for the
lawyer.
15. Do you buy a grammar from the merchant ? Yes, sir, I
buy a grammar from the merchant
16. Do they study their lessons well ? Yes, sir, they study
their lessons well.
17. Do you speak much to your sister ? Yes, madam, I speak
much to my sister.
18. Do you speak Spanish or English ? I speak English.
19. Do you receive French books ? No, sir, I receive English
books.
20. Does the merchant receive silver or gold ? He receives
gold and silver.
21. Do you write your exercises ? No, sir, I write my letters.
22. Do you write a letter to your father ? No, sir, I write to
my sister. .
Digitized
by Google
30
LESSON IX.
LESSON IX.
Vimx, (Infinitive.)
Vivo.
Vives.
Vive.
Vivimos.
Vivís.
Viven.
Besidir.
Mis {plural).
Sus {plural).
Cuando.
Donde {without motion).
Adonde {^ith motion).
To live.
I live.
Thou livest.
He lives.
We live.
You live.
They live.
To reside.
My.
Your.
When.
Where.
Campo, país.
Día.
Días.
Lápiz.
Lápices.
Alelí.
Alelíes.
Cortaplumas,
Hotel.
Flor.
Country.*
Day.
Days.
Pencil.
Pencils.
Gilliflower.
Gilliflowers.
Penknife.
Hotel.
Flower.
Flores.
Casa.
Nueva York.
Francia.
España.
Inglaterra.
Alemania.
Tienda
Ciudad,
Fonda.
Flowers.
House, or homei
New York.
France.
Spain.
England.
Germany.
Store.
City.
Bestauranl
Dion de la aemantuf
Lunes.
Martes.
Miércoles.
Jueves.
Viernes.
Sábado.
Sábados,
Domingo.
Domingos,
Bays of thñ waek,
Monday.
Tuesday.
Wednesday,
Thursday.
Friday.
Baturday.
Saturdays.
Sunday.
Sundays.
♦ Campo refers to the country, as distingidaheí] from the city ; as. Él
t?i>(i en el ñampo^ He livtyi in thts country. Paia refers to oue eoiintry as
opposed to another \ a», Los Estados Unidos es el país de loñ ampriea7iús,
The Uniteíl States is the country of the Atnericans*
f Atl of the masculine gender.
LESSON IX.
31
COMPOSITION.
4 Vive V. en el campo 6 en la ciudad f
Vivo en la ciudad.
( En dónde residen sus papas de V. f
Papá reside en Francia, 7 mamá en
Nueva York.
I Cuándo come V. en casa de sus
hermanos de V. f
Los domingos, martes 7 jueves como
en casa de mis hermanos.
4T en dónde come V. los lunes,
miércoles, viernes 7 sábados f
Como en casa.
Do 70U live in the countr7 or in the
I live in the cit7. [cit7 f
Where do 70ur parents reside f
Father resides in France, and moth-
er in New York.
When do 70U dine at 70ur brothers* f
On SundaTB, Tuesda7s and Thurs-
da7s I dine at m7 brothers*.
And where do 70U dine on Monda7s,
Wednesda7s, Frida7S,and Satur-
I dine at home. [da7sf
EXPLANATION.
32. Papá^ papa ; mamá^ mamma ; pie^ foot ; are excep-
tions to the general rule, and form the plural by the addition
of 8 ; SkB^papáSy papas ; mamas ^ mammas ; pieSy feet.
33. Nouns of more than one syllable, ending in s^ and not
accented on the last syllable, are the same in singular and
plural ; as, lunes^ Monday, or Mondays ; martes^ Tuesday, or
Tuesdays.
34. Words which are compounds of two nouns differ so va-
riously that it is not possible to give rules for the formation
of their plurals ; but compounds of a verb and a noun in the
singular number form the plural in the same manner as sim-
ple nouns ; and compound words of a verb and a noun in the
plural are the same in both numbers ; as, cortaplumas^ pen-
knife, or penknives. •
35. The days of the week always take the article when
they are employed to mark, or express time ; as,
Estudio español el lunes 7 el vier- 1 1 stud7 Spanish on Monda7 and
nes. I Frida7.
36. Dóndcy where (without motion) ; adonde^ where (with
motion) ; cuándo^ when. These adverbs are always placed be-
fore the verb ; as.
I Dónde reside V. f
4 Cuándo escribe V. f
Where do 70U reside!
When do 70U write ?
Digitized
by Google
32 LESSON IX.
87. Donde^ adonde^ and cuando^ when used interrogatively
require an accent ; thus, ¿ Dónde vive f Where does he live ?
¿ Cuándo lee V. f When do you read ?
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I En dónde vive V. ? Vivo en Nueva York.
2. i Dónde viven sus padres de V. ? Mi padre vive eíT la
ciudad y mi madre en el campo.
3. ¿ Dónde viven sus hermanos ? Viven en Francia.
4. ¿ Dónde como V. los sábados y los domingos ? Como en
el hotel de los franceses.
5. ¿ Y dónde como V. los lunes y los martes ? Como en el
hotel americano.
6. ¿ Dónde reside V. ? Resido en el campo.
7. ¿ Y dónde reside su mamá de V. ? Beside en los Estados
Unidos (United States).
8. ¿ Cuándo estudia V. sus lecciones de francés ? Los miér-
coles y los jueves.
9. ¿ Y qué estudia V. los viernes ? Los viernes estudio una
lección de francés.
10. ¿ Cuándo lee V. los periódicos ? Yo leo los periódicos los
domingos.
11. ¿Compran alelíes sus hermanas ? Sí, señor, ellas compran
alelíes.
12. l Estudia V. las leyes de Inglaterra ? No, señor, estudio
las de los Estados Unidos.
13. l Aprende bien la muchacha el inglés ? Sí, señor, aprende
bien el inglés.
14. i Qué beben los españoles y los alemanes ? Los españoles
beben buen vino, y los alemanes buena cerveza.
15. i Dónde compra el comerciante el algodón ? Compra el
algodón en los Estados Unidos.
16. l Y dónde vende el oro y la plata ? En Inglaterra.
17. i Cuándo necesita su hermano dé V. la gramática ? Mi
hermano necesita su gramática el lunes.
18. ¿ En qué hotel come V. ? Como en el hotel de Inglaterra,
19. l Qué compra el comerciante, plata ú oro ? El comer-
ciante no compra ni oro ni plata, compra seda.
20. ¿ Qué estudia V. ? Estudio los días de la semana en inglés.
21. l Escribe V. á Francia ? No, señor, escribo á Inglaterra,
Digitized
by Google
LESSON IX. 88
22. i Qué escribe V. ? Escribo los ejercicios de la semana en
inglés.
23. i Dónde reside su hermana de V. ? Beside en el campo.
24. i En qué país vive su papá ? Vive en Alemania.
EXERCISE.
1. Do you live in the country ? No, sir, I live in town.
2. Where does your sister live ? She lives in New York.
3. Where do your parents {padres) live ? They live in
France.
4. Where does your brother reside ? He resides in Eng-
land.
5. Do you not reside in the United States ? No, sir, in
Spain.
6. In which country does your mother live ? She lives in
the united States.
7. Do you write to your father in Spanish or in English ?
I write in English.
8. Where does the merchant buy cotton ? He buys cotton
in England.
9. Which do you sell, silver or gold ? I sell gold.
10. Where do you dine on Sundays and Mondays ? I dine
in the French hotel.
11. And where on Wednesdays, Fridays, and Saturdays ? In
the German hotel.
12. When do they study their lesson ? On (Jioa) Tuesdays.
13. Does the lawyer study the laws of England ? No, sir, he
studies the laws of the United States.
14. Where does your mother reside ? She resides in Germany.
15. When do you need your grammar ? On Friday.
16. When do your sons study the French lessons ? They
study the French lessons on Mondays and Saturdays.
17. Where does the merchant buy the good penknives ? In
England.
18. What day do you (/em.) receive the newspapers ? We
receive the newspapers on Sundays.
19. Does your sister buy gilliflowers ? Yes, sir, she buys gilli-
flowers.
20. Where do you buy your pencils ? In the French store.
21. What do you study ? I study the days of the week in
Spanish.
5
Digitized
by Google
34
LESSON X
22. Where do your parents reside ? My mother resides in
Spain, and my father in Germany.
23. Where does your sister reside ? She resides in the country.
24. Do you need my books ? Yes, sir, I need your books.
LESSON X.
Tener,
1 To have.
Tengo.
Tienes.
Tiene.
I have.
Thou hast
He has.
Tenemos.
Tenéis.
Tienen.
We have.
You have.
They have.
OBJECTr
7E CASE.
Lo, le, los {mase, pl).
La, las (fem. pl).
Lo {neuter).
It, him, them.
It, her, them.
It, (sometimes) so.
INTEEEOGATI^
E PEONOUNS.
1 Quién, quiénes (pl.) ?
¿ Cuál, cuáles (pl) ?
¿Qué?
De quién, de quiénes (pl.) ?
Con.
Who?
Which one, which ones ?
What or which?
Whose ?
With.
Zapato.
Chaleco.
Bastón.
Sombrero.
Shoe.
Vest
Cane.
Hat
COMPO
Botas. Boots.
Casaca. Coat
Corbata. Cravat
Medias. Stockings.
3ITI0N.
¿ Quién tiene mi bastón f
Yo lo tengo.
¿ Qué corbata tiene V. f
Tengo la bonita.
¿Tienen ellos rai chaleco!
No, señor, tienen la corbata de V.
4 De quién habla Y. f
Who has my cane f
I have it.
Which cravat have youf
I have the pretty one.
Have they my waistcoat f
No, sir, they have your cravat.
Of whom do you speak f
Digitized
by Google
LESSON X.
36
Hablo de los franceses.
4 Tenéis vosotros casacas f
Sí, señor, las tenemos.
4 Quién tiene sombreros I
Los ítelie el comerciante.
4 Necesita V. á mi padre I
Sí, señor, lo necesito.
i Tiene V. mi casaca I
Sí, señor, la tengo.
4 Qué botas tiene V. ?
i Qué tiene V. f
I speak of the Frenchmen. .
Have you coats f
Yes, sir, we have (them).
Who has hats ?
The merchant has (them).
Do you need my father f
Yes, sir, I need him.
Have you my coat f
Yes, sir, I have it.
Which boots have you f
What is the matter with youf
EXPLANATION.
38. Irregular verbs are those which vary from the
model regular conjugations, either in terminations or root
letters. The verb tener ^ to have, to possess, is the first of
the irregular verbs introduced, and its variations are so nu-
merous that it must be learned independently.
A complete list of the irregular conjugations will be found
near the end of the book.
89. Personal Proiíouns as Direct akd Indirect Ob-
jects.— While there is still some uncertainty in the Spanish
language as to the use of the pronouns of the third person,
when they are either the direct or indirect object of the verb,
the general rules are as follows : The direct forms correspond-
ing to Mm^ her, and it (this last a peculiar neuter whose use
will be explained later), are lo, la, lo. Le is the indirect form,
corresponding to to or for Mm, and to to or for her. The mas-
culine plurals are los for the direct, and les for the indirect
object, and for the feminine, las direct, and les indirect.
All these pronouns usually precede the verb in all the
tenses of the indicative mode, in all the tenses of the sub-
junctive mode, except the present used hortatively, and the
past participle. They follow the infinitive, and the pres-
ent participle, and the hortative subjunctive*, in which
cases they are appended to the verbs, and form one word
* The hortative subjunctive is the subjunctive of command or exhor-
tation ; that is, the subjunctive used as an imperative.
36
LESSON X
with them, causing a change of accent, as wül be seen
later; as,
PRONOUNS AS DIRECT OBJECTS.
Él lo busca.
Ella la busca.
Él lo necesita.
Ellos loa aman. '
Nosotros las necesitamos.
He looks for him.
She seeks her.
He needs it.
They love them.
We. need them.
PRONOUNS AS INDIRECT OBJECTS.
Yo le hablo. I I speak to him or her.
Él les habla. I He speaks to them (masc. or fern.).
Certain variations from these rules occur in poetry and
very elevated prose.
Lo is sometimes employed to avoid the repetition of a
whole or part of a sentence, and then it is equivalent to 50, or
it. Of this, however, more will be said when treating of the
regimen of verbs.
40. The interrogative pronouns quién^ cuál, qué, de
quién, who, which, what, and whose, do not require the ar-
ticle; as.
¿ Quién habla f
i Cuál tengo yo I
¿ Qué escribe V. I
i De quién son los caballos ?
Who speaks f
Which one have 1 1
What do you write!
Whose are the horses!
41. When, in a question, the interrogative pronoun is
governed by a preposition, that preposition must also be re-
peated in the answer ; as.
¿ Con quién vive V. í
Con mi amigo.
¿ De quién es el caballo í
De mi amigo.
With whom do you live !
With my friend.
Whose is the horse Í
My friend's.
42. El is frequently used as a definite pronoun, meaning
the one, referring to a noun already expressed or understood ;
as, ¿ Qué sombrero tiene V. ? Which hat have you ? Tengo el
de F., I have the one of you, i. e., yours. ¿ Qué clase de pa-
ñuelo tiene V. f Tengo el de seda. What kin^ of handker-
chief have you ? I have the one of silk, or the silk one.
Digitized
by Google
LUSSON X 37
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. é Qué tiene V. ? Tengo un hermoso bastón.
2. l Tienes tú un buen sombrero ? Sí, señor, lo tengo.
3. i Qué pañuelo tiene ella ? Tiene el de seda.
4. ¿ Cuál tiene V. ? Tengo mi pañuelo.
5. i Tenéis vosotros buenos chalecos ? Sí, señor, los tenemos.
6. i De quién hablan ellos ? Hablan de las americanas.
7. i Tiene V. las corbatas ? Sí, señor, las tengo.
8. ¿ Tienen ellos los hermosos pañuelos de seda ? Sí, señor,
los tienen.
9. l Quién tiene las medias ? Yo las tengo.
10. ¿ Tiene V. mi chaleco ? Sí, señor, lo tengo.
11. i Quién tiene mi bastón ? Su hermano lo tiene.
12. i Habla V. á su hermana ? Sí, señor.
13. i Busca V. á su hermana ? Sí, señorita, la busco.
14. i Estudia V. su lección ? Sí, señor, la estudio.
15. i Necesita "V. á su papá ? Sí, señor, lo necesito.
16. i Qué sombrero tiene V. ? Tengo el de V.
17. l Qué botas busca V. ? Busco las buenas.
18. i Con quién aprende V. el inglés ? Con un americano.
19. i A quién busca Y. ? Busco al abogado.
20. i Qué compra V. ? Compro lápices ingleses.
21. ¿ Tiene V. una buena gramática ? Sí, señor tengo una
muy buena.
22. l Tiene V. muchos libros ? No, señor, tengo pocos.
23. ¿ Tienen ellas mucha seda ? No, señor, tienen muy poca.
24. l Dónde reside V. ? Resido en el campo.
25. ¿ Dónde vive su abogado de V. ? Vive en la ciudad.
26. ¿ Vive en Francia su hermano de V. ? No, señor, vive en
España.
EXERCISE.
1. Who has the stockings ? I have them.
2. What has he ? He has my grammar.
3. Have they my vest ? Yes, sir, they have it.
4. Which books have they (fern.) ? They have yours.
6. Of whom do you speak ? I speak of the Frenchman.
6. Who has mj coat ? They have it.
7. Have you my cravat ? No, sir, I have it not.
8. Have we very good coats ? Yes, sir, we have.
Digitized
by Google
38 LESSON XJ.
9. Who has the handsome stockings? They {fern.) have
them.
10. Do you speak to the Frenchman ? Yes, sir, I speak to the
Frenchman.
11. Do you need my hat ? No, sir, I have my hat
12. Whom do you look for ? I look for your father.
13. What do you buy ? I buy English books.
14. Which shoes do you buy ? I buy the handsome shoes.
15. Which hats have you ? I have the merchantes hats.
16. With whom do you learn English ? I learn with an
American.
17. Have you good coats ? Yes, sir, I have good coats.
18. Have they many grammars ? No, sir, they have very few.
19. Where do you live ? I live in the country.
20. Does your father reside in France ? No, sir, he resides in
England.
21. Does your mother live in G-ermany ? No, sir, she lives in
the United States.
22. Do you buy many books ? No, sir, I buy very few.
23. Who has my handsome boots ? I have them.
24. Which hat have you ? I have yours.
25. What have you ? I have my stockings.
26. Of whom do you speak ? I speak of your father ?
LESSON XI.
IRREGULAR AUXILIARY VERB OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION.
Ser.*
(Infinitive.)
Tobe.
Soy.
I am.
Eres.
Thou art.
Es.
He is.
Somos.
We are.
Sois.
You are.
Son.
They are.
* One of the six verbs whose indicative present first singular does not
end in o.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XL
39
INDEFINITE PBONOXTNS.
Alguien.
Alguno.
Nadie.
Ninguno.
Algo, alguna cosa.
Nada, ninguna cosa.
Todo.
Todos.
Some one, somebody, any-
body, any one.
Some, somebody, anybody.
No one, nobody.
None, no one, nobody.
Something, anything.
Nothing, not anything.
All, everything.
Every one, everybody.
Librero.
Panadero.
Carnicero.
Sastre.
Bookseller.
Baker.
Butcher.
Tailor.
Librería. Bookstore.
Panadería. Bakery.
Carnicería. Butcher's shop
Sastrería. Tailor's shop.
COMPOSITION.
( Son Vds. carniceros f
No, señor, somos panaderos.
4 Es V. carnicero f
No, señor, yo soy sastre.
4 Tiene V. algún pan f
No, señor, no tengo ninguno.
4 Tienen Vds. algo?
No, señor, no tenemos nada.
4 Quién tiene el sombrero I
£1 americano lo tiene.
4 Dónde compila V. pan I
En la panadería.
4 Dónde compra V. sus libros I
En la librería.
4 Eres tú muy estudioso I
No, señor, no lo soy.
4 Tienen todos Vds. buenas gramá-
ticas?
Sí, señor.
4 Quién tiene papel!
Nadie lo tiene.
Are you butchers f
No, sir, we are bakers.
Are you a butcher f
No, sir, I am a tailor.
Have you some bread I
No, sir, I have none.
Have you anything!
No, sir, we have nothing.
Who has the hat!
The American has it.
Where do you buy bread !
In the bakery.
Where do you buy your books!
In the bookstore.
Art thou very studious !
No, sir, I am not (so).
Have you all good grammars ?
Yes, sir.
Who has paper !
Nobody has (it).
Digitized
by Google
40 LESSON XL
EXPLANATION.
43. Alguien, alguno. — Alguien refers to persons only,
and is always used in the singular number ; as,
Vivo con alguien. I I live with some one.
Escribo á alguien. | I write to somebody.
When some one^ any one is followed by the preposition o/,
alguno is used, and not alguien ; as, alguno de ellos escribe
en el periódico, Some of them writes in the newspaper.
Any one or anybody^ not used interrogatively, is translated
by cualquiera^ as will be seen when we introduce the indefi-
nite pronoun.
Alguien may not be used in the negative. Alguno may,
on the contrary, be employed either in affirmative or negative
sentences ; in the affirmative it always precedes the noun to
which it refers, and in the negative it invariably comes after
it; as.
No estudian lección alguna. i They study no lesson (or do not
I study any lesson).
44. Nadie, ninguno. — Ninguno relates to persons and
things, and is used in the negative in the same manner as al-
guno in the affirmative ; nadie relates to persons only, and is
used in the negative in the same way as the pronoun alguien
in the affirmative. In a word, nadie and ninguno are merely
the negative forms of alguien and alguno.
45. Alguno and ninguno lose the o when they come im-
mediately before a masculine noun ; as, ¿ No tiene V. algún
lápiz ? Have not you any pencil ?
46. Algo and alguna cosa are used in the affirmative ;
as.
Como algo, or algima coaa, I I eat something.
¿Recibe V. algo, or alguna coaaf I Do you receive anything I
Anything, when not used interrogatively, is translated
cualquiera cosa, as will be seen in its proper place.
47. Nada, ninguna cosa are used in the negative form.
48. Nada, nunguno, nadie, the adverb no, as well as
any other words expressing negation, are placed before the
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XL 41
verb ; but when no precedes the verb, another negative may
be placed after it, as has been stated already, and the two
negatives serve to strengthen each other, contrary to the
practice of the English language ; as.
No estudio nada.
No hablo á nadie.
No recibo ninguno.
I study nothing.
I speak to nobody, or no one.
I receive none.
But in omitting the negative wo, the words which express
the negation must be placed before the verb ; as.
Nada estudio.
Á nadie hablo.
Ninguno recibo.
I study nothing.
I speak to nobody.
I receive none.
The two negatives are always preferable.
49. The indefinite article a or an is not translated into
Spanish when accompanied by a noun which expresses na-
tionality, profession, &c. ; as,
¿EsV. inglés I
No, señor, soy español.
(Es él sastre?
No, señor, es zapatero.
Are you an Englishman I
No, sir, I am a Spaniard.
Is he a tailor ?
No, sir, he is a shoemaker.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ¿ Es V. francés ? No, señor, soy americano.
2. ¿ Son Vds. alemanes ? No, señor, somos ingleses.
3. i Ei*es tú buen muchacho ? Sí, señor, lo soy.
4. ¿ Sois vosotros sastres ? No, señor, somos panaderos.
5. i Es bueno el libro de su hermano de V. ? Sí, señor, lo es.
6. é Son buenos sus zapatos de V. ? No, señor, son muy
malos.
7. ¿ Tiene alguno mi sombrero ? Sí, señor, alguien lo tiene.
8. ¿ Tiene alguien papel ? No, señor, ninguno tiene papel.
9. é Tiene V. alguna cosa ? No, señor, no tengo nada.
10. ¿ No tiene V. cosa alguna ? Sí, señor, tengo alguna cosa.
11. ¿ Compran pan todos Vds. ? Sí, señor, todos compramos
pan.
12. i Dónde compran Vds. todo su pan ? Lo compramos en
la panadería.
13. i Son Vds. panaderos ? No, señor, nosotros somos zapa-
teros.
Digitized
by Google
42 LESSON XL
14. ¿ Tiene alguien mi sombrero bueno ? Sí, señor, aJg^en
lo tiene.
15. ¿ No compra V. algo ? Sí, señor, compro alguna cosa.
16. ¿ Escribe V. algo ? No, señor, no escribo nada.
17. ¿ Necesita V. todo el papel ? Sí, señor, lo necesito todo.
18. i Necesita V. todas las plumas ? Sí, señor, las necesito
todas.
19. ¿ Es V. sastre ? Sí, señor, yo soy sastre.
20. i Dónde tiene V. su sastrería ? La tengo en Nueva York.
21. ¿ Es su padre de V. librero ? Sí, señor, lo es.
22. i Vende muchos libros ? Sí, señor, vende muchos.
23. i Dónde tiene él su librería ? La tiene en Francia.
24. ¿ Tiene V. una panadería ? No, señor, tengo una carni-
cería.
25. ¿ Habla V. á alguien ? No, señor, no hablo á nadie.
EXERCISE. .
1. Are you an Englishman ? No, sir, I am an American.
2. Are you good boys ? Yes, sir, we are very good boys.
3. Is Louisa a good girl ? Yes, sir, she is a very good girl.
4. Art thou a Frenchman ? No, sir, I am a German.
5. Is yours a good book ? Yes, sir, mine is a very good one.
6. Are they (/em.) studious ? Yes, sir, they are very stu-
dious.
7. Have you anything ? No, sir, I have nothing.
8. Have you nothing ? Yes, sir, I have something.
9. Has anybody a good grammar ? Yes, sir, the Frenchman
has one.
10. Who speaks French ? The American speaks French.
11. Do you write an exercise ? Yes, sir, I write an exercise.
12. Where do you buy all your books ? I buy them in the
bookstore.
13. Are you a bookseller ? No, sir, I am a baker.
14. Where have you your bakery ? I have it in New York.
15. Where do you buy your coats ? In the tailor's shop.
16. Have you all of your books ? Yes, sir, I have all.
17. Do you all reside in the United States ? Yes, sir, we re-
side in the United States.
18. Have you any bread ? No, sir, I have none.
19. Do you speak to anybody ? Yes, sir, I speak to the
Americans.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XII.
43
20. Do you buy anything ? No, sir, I buy nothing.
21. Are you a baker ? No, sir, I am a tailor.
22. Are they French ? No, sir, they are English.
23. Art thou a Spaniard ? No, sir, I am an American.
24. Who is studious ? Emanuel is very studious.
LESSON XII.
IBBEOULÁB AUXILIARY OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION.
Haber. (Infinitive.) |
To have.
He.
I have.
Has.
Thou hast
Ha.
He has.
Hemos.
We have.
Habéia
You have.
Han.
They have.
PAST
PAETICIPLES.—
'First Conj\Agati(m.
Hablado.
Spoke.
Estudiado.
Studied.
Comprado.
Bought.
Buscado.
Looked for, sought
Necesitado.
Second a/i
Needed.
%d Third.
Aprendido.
Learned.
Vendido.
Sold.
Leído.
Read.
Bebido.
Drunk.
Comido.
Eaten, dined.
Eecibido.
Eeceived.
Vivido.
Besidido.
Lived.
Resided.
Escrito (irregular in this
Written.
participle
only).
Hoy.
To-day.
Digitized
by Google
44
LESSON XII.
París.
Londres.
Madrid.
Paño.
Paris.
London.
Madrid.
Cloth.
Habana. Havana.
Viena. Vienna.
Filadelfia. Philadelphia
Esquela. Note.
COMPOSITION.
¿ Cuándo ha escrito V. á su padre f
He escrito hoy á mi padre.
4 Ha recibido V. sus cartas I
Sí, señor, las he recibido.
¿ Ha vivido V. en París ?
Sí, señor, he vivido una semana.
4 Ha residido V. en Londres ?
Sí, señor, he residido algunos días.
4 Han comido ellos?
Sí, señor, han comido.
4 Hemos leído bien nosotros í
Sí, señor, Vds. han leído muy bien.
4 Habéis vendido vosotros muchos
pañuelos?
Hemos vendido muy pocos.
4 Cuándo habéis aprendido vuestra
lección ?
La hemos aprendido hoy.
4 Habéis comprado pan ?
Sí, señor, lo hemos comprado.
4 Ha estudiado V. alemán ?
No, señor, no lo he estudiado.
4 Ha hablado V. con el francés ?
Sí, señor, he hablado con él.
When have you written to your
father ?
I have written to my father to-day.
Have you received your letters?
Yes, sir, I have received them.
Have you lived in Paris ?
Yes, sir, I have lived a week.
Have you resided in London ?
Yes, sir, I resided some days.
Have they eaten (or dined) ?
Yes, sir, they have eaten.
Have we read well ?
Yes, sir, you have read very well.
Have you sold many handkerchiefs?
We have sold very few.
When have you learned your les-
son?
We have learned it to-day.
Have you bought bread ?
Yes, sir, we have bought it.
Have you studied German ?
No, sir, I have not studied it.
Have you spoken with the French-
man?
Yes, sir, I have spoken with him.
EXPLANATION.
60. Tener akd Haber. To have, used as a principal
verb, is translated by teíier^ as an auxiliary, by haber ; as,
Tener caballos.
Tengo oro.
Haber hablado.
Hemos hablado.
To have horses.
I have gold.
To have spoken.
We have spoken.
When the auxiliaries to have and to he^ followed by an in-
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XII. 45
finitive, denote some future action, to have is rendered by
tener que^ and to be by haber de ; as,
Tenemos que escribir. I We have to write.
Hemos de recibir dinero. I We are to receive money.
61. Perfect. — The action of the verb in this tense is
viewed at the close of its progress, as concluded in the present
time, without reference to introduction or continuance ; as,
Alejandro ha estudiado el español. | Alexander has studied Spanish.
It must also be used when we speak indefinitely of any-
thing past, as happening or not happening in the day, year,
or age, in which we mention it ; as,
He escrito hoy muchas cartas. 1 I have written many letters to-day.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ¿ Ha escrito V. sus cartas ? No, señor, he escrito los ejer-
cicios de la lección.
2. ¿ Ha recibido V. su dinero ? Sí, señor, lo he recibido.
* 3. ¿ Ha escrito V. á su hermana ? Sí, señor, he escrito hoy á
mi hermana.
4. ¿ Cuándo ha recibido V. los periódicos de París ? Los he
recibido boy.
5. ¿ Ha leído V. mi libro ? Sí, señor, lo he leído.
6. i Han vivido Vds. en Londres ? Sí, señor, hemos vivido
una semana.
7. ¿ Ha comido V. ? Sí, señor, he comido.
8. é Ha leído V. la carta de mi hermano ? Sí, señor, la he
leído.
9. l Ha vendido V. su bastón ? Sí, señor, lo he vendido hoy.
10. i Ha necesitado V. el libro de mi hermana ? No, señor, no
lo he necesitado.
11. ¿ Ha buscado V. bien el pañuelo ? Sí, señora, lo he bus-
cado bien.
12. l Ha comprado V. pan ? No, señor, he comprado vino.
13. ¿ Ha aprendido V. su lección de español ? La he estudia-
do, pero he aprendido muy poco.
14 ¿ Ha hablado V. con mi padre ? Sí, señor, he hablado con él.
15. i Ha estudiado V. el alemán ? Sí, señor, lo he estudiado
con un francés. .
Digitized
by Google
46 LESSON XII.
16. I Ha vivido V. en la Habana ? No, señor, he vivido en
Filadelfia.
17. ¿ Ha vendido V. muchos lápices ? No, señor, he vendido
muy pocos.
18. ¿ Ha recibido V. sus cartas ? No, señor, he recibido los
periódicos del jueves.
19. i Ha leído V. mi esquela ? No, señor, no la he leído.
20. i Ha buscado V. bien mi bastón ? Sí, señor, lo he buscado
bien.
21. ¿ Ha comprado V. un sombrero ? Sí, señor.
22. i Han hablado ellos á su padre ? No, señor.
23. é Ha aprendido V. el ingjés ? No, señor, lo he estudiado
un poco ; pero no lo he aprendido.
24. i Ha leído V. el periódico de hoy ? Sí, señor, lo he leído.
EXERCISE.
1. Have you received your letters ? Yes, sir, I have received
them to-day.
2. Have you read the newspapers ? Yes, sir, I have read them.
3. Have you written to my sister ? No, sir, I have not writ-
ten to her (Ze).
4. Have you received your letters from Vienna ? I have
received them.
5. Have you read the English newspapers ? Yes, sir, I have
(read them).
6. Have you dined with your sister ? I have dined with her.
7. Have you bought your hat ? I have bought it to-day.
8. Have you looked for my father in Paris ? Yes, sir, I have
looked for him.
9. Have you spoken with him ? Yes, sir, I have spoken
with him.
10. Where have you spoken with him? I have spoken with
him at his house.
11. Have you studied your Spanish lesson ? Yes, sir, I have
studied it.
12. Have you learned it well ? No, sir, I have learned it littla
13. Have the bakers sold much bread ? No, sir, they have
sold very little.
14 Has the tailor bought much cloth ? Yes, sir, he has
(bought).
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XIII.
47
15. Have they (/em.) dined with your sister ? Yes, sir, they
have dined with my sister.
16. Have they dined with your brother ? Yes, sir.
17. What have they eaten ? They have eaten bread and
meat.
18. What have they drunk ? They have drunk water, wine,
and ale.
19. Have you spoken with the Spaniard Í Yes, sir, I have
spoken with him.
20. Have you spoken with him in Spanish or English ? I
have spoken with him in English.
21. Have you received your letters from Philadelphia ? Yes,
sir, I have received them.
22. Have you received them all ? I have received them
all ?
23. Have you lived in London ? No, sir, I have lived in
Vienna.
24. Have you lived with your father ? No, sir, I have lived
with my brotiier.
LESSON XIII.
Querer. (Irregular.)
To wish, to be willing, to love.
Qiierido,
Wished, loved, dear.
Quiero.
I wish, or am willing.
Quieres.
Thou wishest.
Quiere.
He wishes.
Queremos.
We wish.
Queréis.
You wish.
Quieren.
They wish.
Desear.
To desire.
POSSESSIVE
PRONOUNS.
MÍO.
My, or mine.
Tuyo.
Thy, or thine.
Suyo.
His, hers, or its.
Nuestro.
Our, or ours.
Vuestro.
Your, or yours.
Digitized
by Google
48
LESSON XIII.
ütü.
UsefuL
Caro.
Dear.
Barato.
Cheap.
Viejo.
Old.
Joven.
Young.
Rico.
Rich.
Pobre.
Poor.
Amigo.
Friend.
Amiga.
Friend.
Primo.
Cousin.
Prima.
Cousin.
Dinero.
Money.
Moneda.
Coin.
COMPOSITION.
i Quiere V.un sombrero I
No, señor, quiero un bastón.
¿ Quiere V. mucho á su primo I
Sí, señor, lo quiero mucho.
¿Quiere V. escribir?
No, señor, quiero leer.
¿ Quiere V. hablar con mi hermana ?
Sí, señor, quiero hablar con ella.
¿Quiere V. comprar el caballo de
nuestro amigo ?
Sí, señor, quiero comprar el caballo
del amigo de V.
¿Quieres escribir á mi hermano I
Sí, señor, quiero escribirle.
¿ Tiene V. mi bastón f
No, señor, tengo el mío.
¿Tienen ellas nuestros libros?
Sí, señor, tienen los de Vds.
¿ Es viejo su padre de V. ?
Sí, señor, es un poco viejo.
¿ Es joven su hermana de V. ?
Sí, señor, es muy joven.
¿ Es pobre el comerciante ?
No, señor, es muy rico.
¿Ha escrito V. á su amigo?
Sí, señor, he escrito hoy á mi amigo.
¿ Ha hablado V. con su prima?
No, señor, he hablado con mi amigo.
¿ Dónde vive su primo de V. ?
Vive en Filadelfia.
Do you wish a hat?
No, sir, I wish a cane.
Do you love your cousin much?
Yes, sir, I love him much.
Do you wish to write ?
No, sir, I wish to read.
Do you wish to speak to my sister f
Yes, sir, I wish to speak to her.
Do you wish to buy our friend's
horse?
Yes, sir, I wish to buy your iriend's
horse.
Do you wish to write to my brother I
Yes, sir, I wish to write to him.
Have you my cane ?
No, sir, I have mine.
Have they our books?
Yes, sir, they have yours.
Is your father old ?
Yes, sir, he is rather old ?
Is your sister young?
Yes, sir, she is very young.
Is the merchant poor?
No, sir, he is very rich.
Did you write to your friend ?
Yes, sir, I have written, to my friend
to-day.
Have you spoken with your cousin ?
No, sir, I have spoken with my
friend.
Where does your cousin live ?
He lives in Philadelphia.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XIIL
49
EXPLANATION.
52. MÍO, TUYO, SUYO, NUESTEO, VUESTEO, change the final
o into a, to form the feminine termination.
53. The possessive pronouns agree with their nouns in
gender and number ; as,
Naestra gramática. I Our grammar.
.Nuestros libros. I * Our books.
54. When used as pronominal adjectives, they precede the
noun with which they agree ; and it is to be observed that, in
this case, mio^ tuyo, and suyo drop their final syllable ; as,
Nuestros caballos.
Mi pluma.
Tu papeL
Su cuaderno.
Our horses.
My pen.
Thy paper.
His copy-book.
Mis plumas. My pens.
Tus papeles. Thy papers.
Sus cuadernos. His copy-books.
55. Mío, when used in the vocative case — ^that is, in ad-
dressing persons— is placed after the noun governing it ; as.
Escribe, hijo mío. ) Write, my son.
56. When possessives are u; ¿d in an absolute sense, for
nouns not repeated, they a^oe with them in gender and
number, and are preceded bjf the definite article ; as,
Tu gramática y la mia.
De mis muchachos y los tuyos.
Su hermano y el nuestro.
Sus zapatos y los nuestros.
Tus caballos y los suyos.
Thy grammar and mine.
^ \ "ly hojs and thine.
His brother and ours.
His shoes and ours.
Thy horses and theirs^ &c.
57. Possessives are preceded by the neuter article, when
they are indefinitely used ; as,
Lo mío, lo tuyo, lo suyo. i That which is mine, that which is
I thine, that which is his.
58. When the possessive pronoun is connected with the
noun by the verb to he^ the article is omitted ; as,
Este billete es mío.
Esa carta es tuya.
El caballo es suyo.
Muchachos, ¿ es este tmestro libro?
6
This note is mine.
That letter is thine.
The horse is his.
Boys, is this your book!
Digitized
by Google
60 LESSON XIIL
69. Vuestro, vuestea, is chiefly used in addressing per-
sons in very high positions, and in public speech ; as,
Señor, vuestra patria lo exige. | Sir, your country demands it
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. i Quiere V. vino ? No, señor, quiero agua.
2. ¿ Quieren Vds. mis libros ? No, señor, queremos los nues-
tros.
3. ¿ Tienen ellos nuestros periódicos ? No, señor, ellos tie-
nen los suyos.
4. i Tiene V. nuestro libro ? No, señor, yo tengo el mío.
5. i Tenéis vuestros ejercicios ? Sí, señor, tenemos los nues-
tros.
6. ¿ Es vieja su amiga de V. ? No, señor, es joven.
7. ¿ Es rico el comerciante ? Sí, señor, es muy rico.
8. i Vende barato ? No, señor, compra barato ; pero vende
caro.
9. ¿ Es útil la gramática ? Sí, señor, es muy útil.
10. i Quiere V. mucho á su hermana ? Sí, señor, la quiero
mucho.
11. i Quiere V. beber vin' ? No, señor, quiero beber agua.
12. i Quiere V. comprar u ' pañuelo de algodón ? No, señor,
quiero comprar uno de seda. ^
13. ¿ Quiere V. vivir en nueána casa ? No, señor, quiero vivir
en la mía.
14. ¿ Quiere V. estudiar espaf)'»! ? Sí, señor, quiero estudiarlo.
15. i Qué quieren ellos ^ \ .ieren hablar con V.
16. i Quiere V. ir {to go) á mi casa el martes ? No, señor,
quiero ir hoy.
17. é Necesita V. un libro ? Sí, señor, necesito el mío.
18. ¿Desea V. hablar con el abogado? No, señor, deseo
hablar con el comerciante.
19. i Necesita su prima un lápiz ? No, señor, ella no lo nece-
sita.
20. i Ha querido V. mucho á su padre ? Sí, señor, lo he que-
rido mucho.
21. i Ha necesitado V. dinero ? No, señor, he necesitado
amigos.
22. i Ha escrito V. sus cartas ? Sí, señor, las he escrito.
23. ¿ Ha leído V. los periódicos ? Sí, señor, los he leído hoy.
24. i Quiere V. aprender español ? Sí, señor, quiero aprenderlo.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XIII. 61
EXERCISE.
1. Do you wish to eat anything ? No, sir, I wish to drink.
2. What do you wish to drink ? I wish to drink water.
3. Do you wish to speak to your brother ? Yes, sir, I wish
to speak to him (Ze).
4. Do you wish to learn Spanish ? No, sir, I wish to learn
French.
5. Do they wish to live in New York ? No, sir, they wish
to live in Philadelphia.
6. Have you read yoiu* note ? Yes, sir, I have read it.
7. Do you want some wine ? No, sir, I want some water.
8. Do they want my book ? Yes, sir, they want your book.
9. Does yoiu* brother want to speak to my father ? No, sir,
he wants to speak to the lawyer.
10. Did you want my father's letter ? No, sir, we did not
want your father's letter.
11. Did ypu want any money ? Yes, sir, I wanted some.
12. Do you wish to live in France ? No, sir, I wish to live
in the United States.
13. Do you wish to speak French ? No, sir, I wish to speak
Spanish.
V 14. Do they wish to buy a ^ammar ? No, sir, they wish to
buy newspapers.
15. What do you wish to buy ? I wish to buy a handker-
chief.
16. What do you wish to read ? I wish to read the English
newspapers.
17. What do you wish to drink ? I wish to drink some wine
and water.
18. What do they want to sell? They want to sell their
horses.
19. When did you receive your letters from England ? We
have received them to-day.
20. When did you dine with your friends ? I have dined
with them to-day.
21. Have you a useful book ? Yes, sir, I have a Spanish
grammar.
22. Does the merchant sell his hats dear ? No, sir, he sells
them very cheap.
23. Is your friend young ?. No, sir, he is old.
24. Are you rich ? No, sir, I am poor.
Digitized
by Google
52 LESSON XIV.
25. Do you wish to have money ? Yes, sir, I wish to have it
26. Do your friend and cousin live in New York ? No, sir,
they live in Philadelphia.
LESSON XIV.
Llevar, llevado.
Carry, earned.
Enviar, enviado.
To send, sent.
Tomar, tomado.
To take, taken.
Pagar, pagado.
To pay, paid.
Traer, traído.
Bring, brought.
Cuanto.
How much.
Cuantos.
How many.
Bastante.
Enough.
Peso. Dollar.
Centavo. Cent
Café. Coffee.
Chocolate. Chocolate.
Süla.
Mesa.
Cama.
Chair.
Table.
Bed.
CARDINALS — USED AS SUBSTANTIVES AND ADJECTIVES.
Uno, una.
Dos.
Tres.
Cuatro.
Cinco.
Seis.
Siete.
Ocho.
Nueve.
Diez.
Once.
Doce.
Trece.
Catorce.
Quince.
Diez y seis.
Diez y siete.
Diez y ocho.
Diez y nueve.
One.
Two.
Three.
Four.
Five.
Six.
Seven.
Eight
Nine.
Ten.
Eleven.
Twelve.
Thirteen.
Fourteen.
Fifteen.
Sixteen.
Seventeen.
Eighteen.
Nineteen.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XIV.
53
CÁBDINALS — USED AS SUBSTANTIVES AND ADJECTIVES — Continued.
Veinte.
Veinte y uno, etc.*
Treinta.
Cuarenta.
Cincuenta.
Sesenta.
Setenta.
Ochenta.
Noventa.
Ciento.
Doscientos.
Trescientos.
Cuatrocientos.
Quinientos.
Seiscientos.
Setecientos.
Ochocientos.
Novecientos.
Mü.
Dos mil.
líil ciento.
Cien mil.
Un millón.
Twenty.
Twenty-one, &c.
Thirty.
Forty.
Fifty.
Sixty.
Seventy.
Eighty.
Ninety.
A or one hundred.
Two hundred.
Three hundred.
Four hundred.
Five hundred.
Six hundred.
Seven hundred.
Eight hundred.
Nine hundred.
A or one thousand.
Two thousand.
Eleven hundred.
A or one hundred thousand.
A or one million.
COMPOSITION.
4 Han llevado mi sombrero al som-
brerero f
Si, sefior, lo ban llevado.
4 Ha enviado V. la carta á su primo f
La be enviado.
4 Ha tomado V. café f
No, sefior, he tomado cbocolate.
4 Cuánto dinero tiene Y. f
Tengo bastante,
i Cuánto tiene y. f
Tengo diez pesos.
i Ha comido Y. con su hermano
hojt
Have they taken my hat to the
hatter f
Yes, sir, they have taken it.
Have you sent the letter to your
cousin f
I have sent it.
Have you taken coffee f
No, sir, I have taken chocolate.
How much money have you f
I have enough.
How much have you f
I have ten dollars.
Have you dined with your brother
to-day f
* The forms veintiuno and veintiún are sometimes used.
Digitized
by Google
54
LESSOIí^ XIV.
l^Oy señor, no he comido con éL
¿Cuánto ha pagado V. al sombre-
rero!
Ocho pesos y seis centavos.
I Cuántas sillas ha comprado V. f
He comprado seis.
No, sir, I have not dined with him.
How much have you paid to the
hatter!
Eight dollars and six cents.
How many chairs have you bought ?
I have bought six.
EXPLANATION.
NUMERAL ADJECTIVES.
60. In the formation of compound numbers, the same
order is observed in Spanish as in English, except as to the
place of the conjunction ; as.
Mil ochocientos sesenta y seis. ¡ 1866.
61. All these numbers, except uno^ one, and the com-
pounds of ciento^ one hundred, are indeclinable.
62. Uno agrees in gender with the noun to which it
refers, but drops the o when it comes immediately before a
masculine noun, and is sometimes used in the plural, to
mean some or any ; as.
One of the men. •
A woman.
A man.
A great horse.
Some or any shoes.
Uho de los hombres.
Una mujer.
Un hombre.
Un gran caballo.
Unos zapatos.
63. Ciento drops the last syllable when it comes immedi-
ately before a noun of either gender. Its compounds agree
in number and gender with the nouns which they qualify ; as,
One hundred men and one hundred
women.
One hundred and twenty-three
horses.
Cien hombres y cien mujeres.
Ciento veinte y tres caballos.
Doscientos libros.
Trescientas cajas.
Two hundred books.
Three hundred boxes.
hoy.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ¿ Ha escrito V. sus cartas ? Sí, señor, las he escrito.
2. ¿ Las ha enviado V. al correo*? Sí, señor, las he enviado
* Correo, post-office.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XJV. 66
3. i Ha tomado V. café ó chocolate ? He tomado café.
4. ¿ Tiene V. bastante dinero ? Sí, señor, tengo bastante.
5. ¿ Cuánto tiene V. ? Tengo veinte pesos y treinta cen-
tavos.
6. ¿ Cuánto ha pagado V. á su sastre ? He pagado á mi sas-
tre veinte y cinco pesos y cuarenta centavos.
7. ¿ Cuándo ha comido Y. con su amigo ? He comido con
él hoy.
8. i Cuántos caballos ha comprado V. ? He comprado
ocho.
9. l Ha comprado V. sillas ? Sí, señor, he comprado doce.
10. i Tiene V. mucho dinero ? Tengo cien pesos y cincuenta
centavos.
11. ¿ Cuánto tiene su hermano ? Tiene quinientos (600)
12. ¿ Dónde vive V. ? Vivo en Nueva York.
13. ¿ Qué número (number) tiene la casa de V. ? Tiene el nú-
mero trescientos treinta y ocho (338).
14. ¿ !É!a recibido Y. sus periódicos de París f Sí, señor, los he
recibido.
16. ¿ Qué números ha recibido V. ? He recibido el once, doce,
trece, catorce, y diez y ocho.
16. i Los ha leído V. ? No, señor, no los he leído.
17. ¿ Cuántos años (year) ha vivido V. en París ? He vivido
cinco.
18. ¿ Cuántas lecciones ha aprendido Y. ? He aprendido
trece.
19. ¿ Cuántas gramáticas tiene Y. ? No tengo sino una.
20. ¿ Quién ha recibido hoy periódicos ? Nadie los ha recibi-
do hoy.
21. t Es rico el amigo de Y. ? Sí, señor, tiene quinientos mil
(600,000) pesos.
22. t Ha llevado Y. mis cartas al correo ? No he llevado
sino dos.
23. ¿ Ha enviado Y. mis zapatos al zapatero ? Sí, señor, los he
enviado hoy.
24. ¿ Ha tomado Y. muchas lecciones de español ? He toma-
do doce.
26. ¿ Cuánto ha pagado Y. á su amigo ? Tres mil ochocientos
cuarenta y cuatro pesos (3,844).
Digitized
by Google
66 LESSON XIV.
EXERCISE.
1. Do you wish to send anything to your cousin? Yes, sip, I
wish to send money to my cousin.
2. How much money do you wish to send ? I wish to send
$317.
3. Who has taken the money to the tailor ? My cousin
(fern.) has taken it.
4. Where have you sent the horses ? I have sent them to
Paris.
5. How many have you sent ? I have sent two very good
ones.
6. My son, have you taken the $31.50 to the baker ? Yes, sir,
I have taken it.
7. Has your brother sent some chairs to your house ? No,
sir, but he has sent some to his own.
8. How many has he sent ? He has sent ten chairs and
three tables.
9. Has the woman bought no chairs ? Yes, sir, she has bought
twenty-six.
10. How many letters have they written this (está) week ?
They have written three hundred and ten letters and one thou-
sand and one notes.
11. Which newspapers have you sent to your father ? I have
sent him numbers three, fifteen, and eighteen.
12. Has he read them all ? He has read only number fifteen.
13. Has the butcher much money ? He has $1,000.
14. How much have you sent to your friend (fern.) ? I have
sent $111.17.
15. Whom do you wish to pay ? I wish to pay my tailor.
16. Where does your tailor reside ? He resides in Vienna.
17. When have you written to Alexander ? I have written
to Alexander to-day.
18. Have you received a letter from him to-day ? Yes, sir, I
have received six.
19. What day do you receive letters from France ? I receive
them on Tuesdays and Saturdays.
20. How many has your cousin written to you ? None.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XV.
57
LESSON XV.
Pronunciar, pronunciado.
Tocar, tocado.
Cantar, cantado.
Reinar, reinado.
To pronounce, pronounced.
To touch, touched; to play,
played.
To sing", sung.
To reign, reigned.
Como.
How, like, as.
ORDINALS.
Primero, (primer
before a mas-
First
culine noun).
Segundo.
Second.
Tercero (or tercer before a mas-
culine noun).
Third.
Cuarto.
Fourth.
Quinto.
Fifth.
Sexto.
Sixth.
Séptimo.
Seventh.
Octavo.
Eighth.
Noveno, or nono.
Ninth.
Décimo.
Tenth.
Piano.
Piano.
Canción.
Song.
Violin.
Violin.
Palabra.
Word.
Músico.
Musician.
Guitarra.
Guitar.
Pianista.
Pianist.
Historia.
History.
Cantor.
Singer.
Arpa.
Harp.
Tomo or volumen
Volume.
Obra.
Work.
Carlos.
Charles.
Música.
Music.
Luis.
Louis.
Cantora, cantatriz.
Singer.
Enrique.
Henry.
Calle.
Street
Key.
King.
Avenida.
Avenue.
Trabajo.
Work, labor.
Digitized
by Google
58
LESSON XV.
COMPOSITION.
4 Cómo pronuncia Manuel el espa-
ñol f
Lo pronuncia bien.
4 Toca V. la guitarra!
No, seflor, toco el violin y el piano.
4 Canta V. canciones espafíolas f
No, señor, canto canciones inglesas.
4 Quién reina en Rusia f
Alejandro Segundo.
4 En qué calle vive V.f
Vivo en la calle Once.
4 Y V., dónde vive!
Yo vivo en la calle Veinte y tres.
I Qué toca el músico f
Toca el arpa, el violin y el piano.
4 Tiene V. el primer tomo de mi
libro!
No, señor, tengo el segundo.
4 Ha leído V. el tomo tercero!
No, señor, he leído el cuarto.
4 Cuántos años tiene V.
How does Emanuel pronounce Span-
ish! .
He pronounces it well.
Do you play the guitar !
No, sir, I play the violin and the
piano.
Do you sing Spanish songs !
No, sir, I sing English songs.
Who reigns in Russia !
Alexander the Second.
In which street do you live !
I live in Eleventh street.
And where do you live !
I live in Twenty-third street.
What does the musician play !
He plays the harp, violin, and piano.
Have you the first volume of my
book!
No, sir, I have the second.
Have you read the third volume f
No, sir, I have read the fourth.
How old are you !
EXPLANATION.
. 64. The ordinals always agree in gender and number with
the noun, expressed or understood, to which they refer, and
may be placed either before or after that noun ; as,
The first volume.
The first good book.
The first copy-books.
The first lessons.
The second volume.
The second intentions.
El primer tomo (or el tomo primero).
El primer buen libro.
Los primeros cuadernos.
Las primeras lecciones.
El segundo tomo.
Las segundas intenciones.
It has been seen, in the list of ordinal numbers at the
opening of the present lesson, that primero and tercero lose
the final letter when they immediately precede their noun,
if it be masculine, or if they are separated from it only by
an adjective. We may observe here, that tercero is by some
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XV. 59
written entire ; the contracted form, however, is much to be
preferred; as,
El tercer tomo. I The third volume.
65. The ordinals are not so frequently used in Spanish as
in English ; and, except primero^ first, their place is generally
supplied by the cardinal numbers ; as, for instance, in speak-
ing of the days of the month, which are expressed by el dos^
fresy cuatrOy etc.^ the second, third, fourth, &c. The follow-
ing are the principal cases in which the ordinals are em-
ployed : 1st, with the names of sovereigns, popes, &c. ; 2d, in
the enumeration of books, chapters, lessons, &c., and in a few
others ; but, even in these cases, after décimo^ tenth, they are,
by reason of their great length, generally replaced by the
numerals; as.
Carlos Quinto.
Pío Xono.
Capítulo décimo.
Calle Veinte y tres.
Luis Catorce.
Charles the Fifth.
Pius the Ninth.
Chapter tenth.
Twenty-third street.
Louis the Fourteenth.
N. B. — The definite article is not required in the above
examples.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. i Pronuncia V. bien el inglés ? No, señor, lo pronuncio
mal.
2. l Es V. cantor ? No, señor, pero toco.
3. l Qué toca V. ? Toco el violin.
4. ¿ Canta bien su hermana de V. ? No, señor, ella canta
mal ; pero toca bien el piano.
5. ¿ Qué lección estudia V. ? Estudio la cuarta.
6. ¿ En qué calle vive su padre de V. ? Vive en la calle
Catorce.
7. ¿ Qué tomos ha leído V. ? He leído el primero, segundo,
tercero y cuarto.
8. ¿ Cuántos tomos tiene la obra ? Tiene seis.
9. ¿ Qué libro lee V. ? Leo la historia de Carlos Quinto.
10. i Ha leído V. la historia de Enrique Octavo de Inglaterra ?
Sí, señor, la he leído.
11. ¿ Qué tomo lee su hermana de Y. ? Lee el noveno.
Digitized
by Google
60 LESSON XV.
12. i Cuánto dinero ha recibido V. hoy ? He recibido cin-
cuenta y un pesos.
13. i Cuántos hermanos tiene V. ? Tengo cinco.
14. ¿ Cuántos años tiene su hermana de V. ? Tiene quince.
15. i Cuánto tiempo ha vivido V. en París ? He vivido seis
años.
16. i Qué número tiene su casa ? El doscientos seis (206).
17. i Qué día de la semana es hoy ? Hoy es miércoles.
18. i Qué hora tiene V. ? Las diez.
19. ¿ Cuántos días tiene una semana ? Tiene siete.
20. Ocho y doce ¿ cuántos son ? Son veinte.
21. i Cuántos años tiene su papá de V. ? Tiene sesenta.
22. i Cuántos días tiene el año ? Tiene trescientos sesenta y
cinco (365).
23. ¿ Cómo ha leído V. ? He leído despacio.
24. ¿Ha llevado V. mi piano al pianista? Sí, señor, lo he
llevado.
25. ¿ Ha cantado V. mucho hoy ? Hoy he cantado poco.
26. ¿ Cuándo ha vendido V. su caballo ? Lo he vendido hoy.
EXERCISE.
1. What book have you ? A music-book.
2. How many volumes has it ? Three.
3. Which volume have you read ? The first
4. Has not your father read the second volume ? No, sir ;
but my cousin has read it.
5. What are you reading, miss ? I am reading the History
of Charles the Fifth.
6. Who has sold your sister's History of England ? She has
sold it
7. Who has bought the violin ? The pianist
8. Where does he live ? In Seventeenth street
9. In what street does the butcher live ? In Sixth avenue.
10. Have you bought good meat in the butcher's shop ? The
meat that I have bought is very bad.
11. What things have you sent to the tailor ? I have sent
stockings, vests, and pocket-handkerchiefs.
12. What day of the week is to-day ? Monday.
13. Is Monday the first day of the week ? No, sir, it is the
second ; Sunday is the first
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XVI.
61
14. How much money does the merchant require ? He re-
quires $1,500.
15. How much money do you wish to send to your friend ?
I wish to send my friend $60.
16. Does he need much money ? Yes, madam, he is very poor.
17. How many letters have your brothers written to Emanuel ?
Very few.
18. How do your sisters pronounce Spanish ? They pronounce
it well when they read, but not when they speak.
19. When do they write their exercises ? When they have
studied their lessons.
20. And you, when do you write yours ? When my broth-
ers write theirs.
21. How do the poor buy ? The poor buy dear, and the rich
buy cheap.
22. Has your father sold his old horse ? He has sold it.
23. Have you read the History of Louis XVI. ? I have read
volumes first, second, and third.
LESSON XVI.
First Conjugation — Preterit,
TERMINATIONS.
Singular.
Plural.
1. é.
1. amos.
2. aste.
2. asteis.
3. Ó.
3. aron.
Hablé.
I spoke.
Hablaste.
Thou spokest.
Habló.
He spoke.
Hablamos.
We spoke.
Hablasteis.
You spoke.
Hablaron.
They spoke.
Second Conjugation.
TERMINATIONS.
Singular.
Plural.
1. í.
1. imos.
2. iste.
2. isteis.
3. ió.
3. ieron.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XVL
Aprendí
I learned.
Aprendiste.
Thou learnedst.
Aprendió.
He learned.
Aprendimos.
We learned.
Aprendisteis.
You learned.
Aprendieron.
They learned.
Third Conjugation,
TERMINATIONS.
Singular.
Plural.
1. í.
1. imos.
2. iste.
2. isteis.
3. ió.
3. ieron.
Escribí.
I wrote.
Escribiste.
Thou wrote.
Escribió.
He wrote.
Escribimos.
We wrote.
Escribisteis.
You wrote.
Escribieron.
They wrote.
Pasar.
To pass, to spend (in rela
tion to time).
Ayer. Anocbe.
Yesterday. Last night.
Antes de ayer, or
anteayer.
The day before yesterday.
El año pasado.
Last year.
El mes pasado.
Last month.
La semana pasad
a.
Last week.
Ante (prep.).
Before, in the presence of.
Ante todas cosas.
Before all things.
Ante todo.
Above all.
Antes (ad.).
Before (refers to time).
Delante (ad.).
Before (refers to place).
Después (ad.).
Afterward, after.
Más(ad.). Mas(
(conj.).
More. But
Menos (ad.).
Less, fewer.
Que (conj.).
That, than.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XVI.
63
COMPOSITION.
i
J Habló V. con mi padre f
Si, señor, hablé con él antes de ajer.
i Han aprendido Yds. su lección f
Sí, señor, la hemos aprendido hoy.
i Cuándo escribió V. á su hermana f
Escribí la semana pasada á mi her-
mana.
I Ha recibido V. sus periódicos del
mes pasado!
Sí, señor, los hé recibido hoy.
I Cuándo vendió V. su caballo!.
Lo Tendí el aflo pasado,
i Estudia y. antes ó después de
comer!
Estudio antes de comer,
j Habló V. mucho ante el juez !
No, señor, hablé muy poco.
I Qué libro tiene V. delante!
Tengo la gramática española.
I Escribió V. sus cartas!
Sí, señor, las escribí el domingo pa-
iftdo.
/OomeT, na ene» que yo!
tíOi señor, como más que Y*
íHatíaW V. iisu amigo!
Sí, seBor, b vi ayer.
iDóndeloTió V.l
í« yí delante de la iglesia.
Diíf you speak with my father!
Yes, sir, I spoke with him the day
before yesterday.
Have you learned your lesson !
Yes, sir, we have learned it to-day.
When did you write to your sister!
I wrote to my sister last week.
Have you received your newspapers
of last month (last month's news-
papers) !
Yes, sir, I have received them to-day !
When did you sell your horse !
I sold it last year.
Do you study before or after din-
ing (or dinner) !
I study before dining.
Did you speak much before the
judge !
No, sir, I spoke very little.
What book have you before you !
I have the Spanish grammar.
Did you write your letters!
Yes, sir, I wrote them last Sunday.
Do you eat less than I f
No, sir, I cat more tlmn you.
Have you seen ynur friend Í
Ye», íír, 1 mw hhn yestertíay.
Where did yon í¡t't? him !
I saw hUu bcfort: {m front t>f) tUo
church.
Did you speak with him f
Yes, sir ; but very liUie.
Have y oil dined f
Yes^ sir, I have eaten hre^d and
drunk wine.
Have you read and studied your
exercises f
Y^s, sir, 1 have read iind slndie^d
them .
Have you written to youT father t
Yes, sir, I wrote yesterday^
igitigod
byCoogk-
64 LESSON XVL
4 Cuándo ha recibido Y. las cartas
deélf
Las he recibido hoy.
4 Ha enviado V. mis cartas después
de las suyas f
Las he enviado antes.
jHabló V. anteelreyf
No, señor, hablé ante el juez.
4 Cuánto tiempo f
When have you received the letters
from him f
I have received them to-day.
Have you sent my letters after
yours f
I (have) sent them before.
Did you speak before the king?
No, sir, I spoke before the judge.
How longf
EXPLANATION.
66. The Preterit, one of the oldest and most common
forms of the verb, is used in narrating past actions, when
thought of merely as events or single fads^ without reference
to the time they occupied, or to other actions going on at
the same tijne ; as, Alejandro compró un caballo^ Alexander
bought a horse. If there is any limitation of a verb in this
tense, it grows out of the context of the sentence ; as, Escribí
á mi padre en el año 1864^ I wrote to my father in the year
1864. This tense has no suggestion of co7itinued^ repeated^
habitualy or attempted action, as we shall see to be the case
with the imperfect^ or of completed action, as we have seen in
the perfect
In colloquial language the perfect (which has been treated
of in Lesson XII) is sometimes, though incorrectly, substi-
tuted fur tJie preterit. The following example will show the
impropriety of such a substitution :
He escrito á in i padre ayer. 1 1 have written to my father yester-
I day.
nothing remains of yesterday ; it is time past, and has no
connection with the present ; and, as it has been already seen
that the perfect implies that the action of the verb is con-
cluded at the present time, the incorrectness of the foregoing
example is at once apparent.
67. Ante.— This preposition means before^ or in the pres-
ence of I as,
Hftbló antñ ul juez. | He spoke before the judge.
And it sometimes denotes priority, antecedence, &c. ; as,
Aniñ todas cosas. | Before all things.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XVL 65
68. Mis, more ; Menos, less, fewer. — These two adverbs
are used to form the comparative degree of several adjec-
tives, which last they always precede in the sentence ; as.
El vino es más caro que la cerveza. I Wine is dearer than beer.
Yd soy más rico que V. 1 1 am richer than you.
When más means more, it must always have a written
accent. When used to express some degree respecting verbs,
their usual place in the sentence is immediately after them ;
as,
Yo escribo más. 1 1 write more.
Tú hablas menos, I Thou speakest less.
It is well to observe here that más and menos are them-
selves the comparatives of mucho ajiápocoy respectively.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Cuándo habló V. con el abogado ? Habló con él an-
teayer.
2. ¿ Ha hablado V. con mi hermana ? No, señor, hablé ayer
con su amigo de V.
3. i Ha hablado Y. con el pianista ? Sí, señor, le hablé ayer.
4. i Ha aprendido Y. su lección ? No, señor ; pero he escrito
el ejercicio.
5. i Han aprendido ellos sus lecciones de francés ? Sí, señor,
han aprendido las de francés y de español.
6. i Cuándo aprendió isu hermana á tocar el piano ? Apren-
dió el año pasado.
7. ¿ Ha leído Y. la historia de los Estados Unidos ? He leído
el tomo primero y el segundo.
8. i Ha leído Y. la carta de su hermana y la de su amiga ?
He leído la de mi hermana ; pero no la de mi amiga.
9. i Qué ha leído Y. hoy ? He leído los ejercicios de la se-
mana pasada.
10. ¿ Cuándo compró Y. su caballo ? Lo compré el mes pa-
sado.
11. i Dónde habló Y. con mi padre ? Delante de su casa de Y.
12. i Leyó Y. la carta de su padre antes que la de su hermano ?
No, señor, la leí después.
13. i Cuándo residió Y. en París ? Residí antes que Y.
14. ¿ Cuántos años tiene su hermana ? Tiene veinte.
7
Digitized
by Google
66 LESSON XYI.
15. i Cuántos pesos pagó Y. el mes pasado al comerciante f
Quinientos.
16. i Ha llevado V. mis zapatos al zapatero ? Sí, señor, los
llevé ayer.
17. i Cuándo ha recibido V. su dinero ? Lo recibí anteayer.
18. i Ha escrito V. después que escribió mi padre ? No, señor,
escribí antes.
19. ¿ Escribió V. su carta después que recibió la de su her-
mano ? Sí, señor, la escribí mucho después.
20. i Ha hablado V. con la madre antes que con la hija ? No,
señor, hablé antes con la hija que con la madre.
21. i Estudió V. su lección de ayer ? No, señor, estudié la de
antes de ayer ; pero no he estudiado la de ayer ni la de hoy.
22. ¿ Habló V. ante el juez ? Sí, señor, hablé ante el juez y
ante el rey.
23. ¿ Habla V. más que yo ? No, señor, hablo menos ; pero
escribo más.
EXERCISE.
1. Did you speak more yesterday than to-day ? I spoke less ;
but I read more.
2. How many newspapers did your father read yesterday ?
Very few.
3. How old is your sister ? She is nineteen.
4. Who took the vest to the tailor last year? The baker
took it
5. How much did the tailor pay to the baker afterward ?
$59.10.
6. Did he receive the vest after or before the coat ? He re-
ceived it after.
7. Did your sisters sing yesterday ? Yes, sir, they sang and
played.
8. What did they sing? They sang Spanish songs and
played on the piano.
9. Have you {plural) played to-day ? No, madam, we have
not played ; but we have written our French exercises.
10. How many words have your brothers written in Spanish
to-day ? Fewer than last Thursday.
11. Do they speak moi*e English than Spanish ? No, madam,
they speak more Spanish.
12. What have the singers received from Paris ? They have
received some good songs and French music.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XVII.
67
13. Have the singers (fern.) enough Spanish music ? Yes,
sip, they have received some to-day.
14. Did they sing well last month ? Not very well.
15. Who sang in your house the day before yesterday ? No-
body sang.
16. How long did you reside in Vienna? Five years, six
months, and thirteen days.
17. How many churches has Paris? Paris has many churches.
18. How did your cousins pronounce their Spanish yester^
day ? Very well.
19. Are you a musician ? Yes, madam.
20. Is your sister a pianist or a singer, or does she play on the
guitar ? She sings and plays on the piano.
2L When did you speak before the judge ? The day before
yesterday and last week.
22. Do you sing much with the musicians ? I sing a little ;
but before all things I study my Spanish lessons.
LESSON XVII.
' Trabajar.
Mandar.
Quien, quienes.
A quien, á quienes.
¿Qué?
Cuál, cuáles.
Cuyo (mase, sing.), cuya (fem. '
aing.).
Cuyos (mase, plural), cuyas
(fem. plural).
Varios. Algunas veces.
To work.
To command, to send.
Who.
Whom, to whom.
What (inter.), who, that, or
which.
Which one, which ones (inter.).
Whose, which, or of whom.
Several. Sometimes.
Retrato.
Portrait.
Trabajador.
Workman.
Pantalones.
Pantaloons.
Último (a).
Last
Criado.
Servant
Criada.
Servant
Concierto.
Concert
Iglesia.
Church.
Teatro.
Theatre.
Plaza.
Square, market
Mercado.
Market
Compañía.
Company.
Parque.
Park.
Juana.
Jane.
Juan.
John.
Cosa.
Thing.
Digitized
by Google
68
LESSON XVI I.
COMPOSITION.
4 Es viejo el caballero á quien V.
habló en el concierto f
No, sefíor, pero lo es la señora que
ha hablado con V. en el teatro.
I Á quién busca V, !
Busco á la señorita á quien V. busca.
I Quién es el joven que ha hablado
con V, !
Es un criado del hoteL
El muchacho qite lee, y al cuál V.
mandó trabajar, es mi hermano.
La gramática que él tiene, y en la
cuál estudia, es mía.
El caballero auya casa V. compró es
amigo mío.
El comerciante cuyo vino V. com-
pró, vende muy barato.
El libro en que leemos.
La señora á quien hablé es mi madre.
¿ Manda Y. sus niños al Parque
Central !
%k quién mamda V. trabajar!
Á mis criados.
¡ Juan I
¡ Señor ! i qué manda V. f
Quiero la comida.
I En dónde trabajan hoy los traba-
jadores f
Trabajan en la calle.
Is the gentleman to whom you spoke
at the concert old f
No, sir ; but the lady who spoke to
you at the theatre is (so).
For whom do you look t
I am looking for the young lady
that you look for.
Who is the young man that has
spoken with you !
He is a servant in the hotel.
The boy that reads, and whom you
commanded to work, is my brother.
The grammar which he has, and in
which he studies, is mine.
The gentleman whose house you
bought is my friend.
The merchant whose wine you
bought sells very cheap.
The book in which we read (or
which we read in).
The lady I spoke to is my mother.
Do you send your children to the
Central Park?
Whom do you command to work!
My servants.
John I
Sir ! what do you wishf
I wish my dinner.
Where do the workmen work to-
day!
They work in the street.
EXPLANATION.
69. Quien. — The relatiye pronoun quien refers to persons
only, and is always preceded by the preposition á, when gov-
erned by a verb ; as,
El hombre á quien V. quiere. | The man whom you love.
70. Who, coming immediately after its antecedent, is
translated by que ; when it stands alone, or is governed by
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XVIL
69
a preposition, or is used interrogatively, it is rendered by
quien; as,
El muchacho que estudia.
La muchacha con quien hablas.
iQaiéu busca el jabón f
The boy who studies.
The girl with whom you speak.
Who ^eks the soapf
71. Cual and que relate to persons and things ; as.
El muchacho que lee, y al ctuil Y.
mandó trabajar, es m|Jiermano.
La gramática ^ejéHiene, y en la
cucU estudi%^^mia.
The boy that reads, and whom you
commanded to work, is my brother.
The grammar which he has, and in
which he studies, is mine.
Cuál may be regarded as slightly more delicate and indi-
rect than quéy and is more specific, answering somewhat to
which, while qué corresponds more nearly to what ; as,
4 Cuál ea el nombre de V,f I What is your name !
4 Cuál de sus criados trabaja más f \ Which of your servants works morel
72. Cuto also refers to persons and things, but agrees
with the word by which it is immediately followed ; as.
El caballero cuya casa Y. compró es
amigo mío.
El comerciante cuyo vino Y. compró
rende muy barato.
The gentleman whose house you
bought is my friend.
The merchant whose wine you
bought sells very cheap.
This pronoun partakes of the nature both of the relatives
and the possessives.
73. In English the preposition does not always precede
the relative pronoun ; but in Spanish it is indispensable to
place the preposition before the relative ; as.
El libro en que leemos, I The book which we read in (or, in
I which we read).
74. The relative pronoun can never be suppressed in Span-
ish; so that we cannot say, as in English, the lady I spoke to,
but, in full ; as.
La seffora á qtficn habló, es mi l The lady to whom I spoke is my
madre. I mother.
Digitized
by Google
70 LESSON XVIL
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. i Á quién mandó V. ayer al mercado ? Mandé á mi criado
Juan.
2. ¿ Cuál de sus criadcMS trabaja más ? Juan trabaja más que
todos.
3. ¿ Quién es el hombre á quién V. busca ? El hombre á
quien busco es trabajador.
4. i Quién es el caballero con quien habló V. #^yer en el con-
cierto ? Es un discípulo mío.
5. ¿ Á quién quiere V. hablar ? Quiero hablar á la señorita
que toca el piano.
6. i Cómo pasaron Vds. el tiempo en el campo ? Lo pasamos
muy bien en compañía de nuestros amigos.
7. ¿ Es francés el comerciante á quien compró V. el caballo !
Sí, señor, es el francés cuya casa compró V.
8. ¿ Manda (envía) V. sus niños al Parque Central (Central
Park) ? Sí, señor, los mando al Parque Central.
9. i Con quién los envía V. ? Con sus primos.
10. ¿ Qué libro quiere V. leer ? Quiero leer el de Manuel.
11. i No quiere V. leer el que yo tengo ? No, señor, quiero
leer el de Alejandro.
12. ¿ Á quién manda V. trabajar ? Á mis criados.
13. I Juan I I Señor I ¿ Qué manda Y. ? Quiero la comida.
14. ¿ Canta V. bien ? No, señor ; pero la señorita que reside
en su casa de V. canta muy bien.
15. i Estudia V. mucho ? No, señor, pero trabajo mucho.
16. ¿ Ha estudiado Y. hoy su lección ? No, señor, la estudié
ayer ; hoy he escrito los ejercicios.
17. i Cómo pronuncia su maestro de Y. el español ? Lo pro-
nuncia bien ; pero pronuncia muy mal el inglés.
18. i Tocó Y. ayer el piano en casa de sus amigos ? Sí, señor,
tocamos y cantamos.
19. i Qué cantaron Yds. ? Cantamos canciones españolas y
la canción americana llamada, " The Star-Spangled Banner."
20. i Caballeros I ¿ Quieren Yds. tomar chocolate ó cafó ?
Queremos beber vino.
21. ¿ Cuántos días pasó Y. en el campo ? Pítóé toda una
semana.
22. i Por qué no pasa V. un mes en el campo con nosotros ?
Porque necesito residir en la ciudad.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XVIL 71
23. I Cuál de sus amigos habla bien español ? El que estudia
mucho habla bien.
24. i Cuál de sus hermanos estudia más ? El más pequeño.
25. ¿ De quién recibe V. cartas ? De mi padre y mis hermanos.
26. i Es de V. el libro en el cual estudia su hermano ? No,
señor, es suyo.
27. ¿ Trabajó V. mucho ayer ? No, señor ; pero he trabajado
mucho hoy.
28. i Cuándo estudia V. sus lecciones ? Las estudio los miér-
coles y los sábados.
EXERCISE.
1. Whose is the portrait (which) you sent me yesterday ? It
is the portrait of my brother who lives in Germany.
2. Which portrait have you sent to Charles ? I have sent
no portrait to Charles ; but I have sent mine to the musician.
3. With whom did you spend last week ? I spent last week
with my cousin John.
4. In which city of France does the pianist's brother live ?
He lives in the city in which your sister Jane resides.
5. To whom did you send the first volume of your work ?
I sent it to Louis.
6. Whom do you order to work ? My servant John.
7. Who is the lady you are looking for ? She is the mother
of the singer (/ew.) whose piano Charles bought last year.
8. With whom did you send your children to the concert
last night ? I sent them with a servant.
9. With which servant did you send them ? With one of
mine (my own).
10. In which church does Miss Garcia sing? She sings in
Twenty-eighth street church.
11. How did you {plural) pass the time in Philadelphia?
Very well.
12. Did you study many lessons ? We studied very little, and
neither read nor wrote our exercises.
13. How much did you write the day before yesterday ? I
studied a good deal, but wrote little.
14. Which volumes of Eobertson's History has your son?
He has received the first, second, third, and fourth.
15. Did you buy any books at the bookstore in Walker street ?
Yes, madam, I bought the History of Charles V. and some music
books.
Digitized
by Google
72
LESSON XVIIL
16. Whom have you paid with the money I sent you ? I
have paid the man who worked in my house yesterday.
17. Does your servant work much ? No, sir ; but she reads a
great deal.
18. From whom do you receive letters every day ? I receive
letters from Henry on Mondays, Wednesdays, and Fridays, and
from my father on Tuesdays.
19. Who has the boots that I bought in Fourth avenue ?
John has taken them to his cousin who lives in Philadelphia.
20. Has your servant bought any good meat in the market ?
He has not bought any to-day.
21. How many songs have you received from Spain ? I have
received several from Spain and two from England.
22. Have you sung any of them ? None ; but my sister sang
one or two last night at the concert.
23. Are they very good ? One of them is very good, and my
cousin (fern.) sings it very well.
24. How many pencils does the hatter wish? He wishes
twelve pencils and three penknives.
25. Does Louisa play much on the piano ? No, sir ; she is very
lazy, and will neither play nor study.
26. The tailor has a handsome vest, very cheap ; will you buy
it ? I do not wish to buy a vest ; but I wish pantaloons.
27. Has he any pantaloons ? He has none ; he sold them all
last week.
LESSON XVIII.
IRREGULAR VERBS OP THE THIRD CONJUGATION.
Ir, (Infinitive.)
Togo.
PRESENT.
Voy.
Vas.
Va.
I go (or, am going).
Thou goest.
He, or she, goes.
Vamos.
Vais.
Van.
We go.
You go.
They go.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON xriii.
1Z
PRETERIT.
Fm.
I went
Fuiste.
Thou wentest.
Fué.
He, or she, went
Fuimos.
We went.
Fuisteis.
You went
Fueron.
They went
PRESENT.
Venir. (Infinitive.)
To come.
Vengo.
I come (or, am coming)
Vienes.
Thou comest
Viene.
He, or she, comes.
Venimos.
We come.
Venís.
You come.
Vienen.
They come.
PRETERIT.
Vine.
-
I came.
Viniste.
Thou camest
Vino.
He, or she, came.
Vinimos.
We came.
Vinisteis.
You came.
Vinieron.
They cama
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
Singular,
Masculine. Feminine.
Neuter. •
'Este, Esta.
Esto.
This.
Ese. Esa.
Eso.
That
Aquel. Aquella.
Aquello.
That (yonder).
Plural.
Estos. Estas.
No neuter.
These.
Esos. Esas.
u
Those.
Aquellos. Aquellas.
it
Those (yonder).
EUo.
1
It
Aquí, acá.
Here.
Ahí. )
There.
Digitized
by Google
74
LESSON XVIIL
Porqué.
Why.
Porque.
Because.
Lejos.
Far.
Cerca.
Near.
Otro. Ambos.
Another. Both.
Ni uno ni otro (tnd. pro,).
Neither.
Profesor.
Catedrático.* í
Professor.
Juana. Jane.
Discipula. Pupil.
Discípulo.
Pupil.
Zapatería. Shoemaker^s shop.
Lado.
Side.
,, , S Butter (in Spain).
Manteca, "i,, jt r k - \
Lard (m America).
Jardín.
Garden.
Estudiante.
Student
Mantequilla. Butter (in Amer.)
COMPO
SITION.
iDe quién es este libro que tengo
aquif
Ese que tiene V. ahí, y este que yo
tengo aqui, son del profesor.
4 Quién es ctquel caballero que reside
Mi del otro lado de la calle t
Aquel caballero es mi discípulo.
4 Adonde va V.1
Voy allá, al otro lado del parque.
4 No quiere V. venir acá de este lado !
No, sefior, voy allá del otro lado.
4 Quiere Y. comprar aquel libro 1
No, señor, quiero comprar ese otro.
4 Quiere V. ir al teatro con nosotros !
Eso quiero.
4 Llevó Y. aquéllo á la sastrería 1
Lo llevé.
4 Manda Y. algo más 1
No, eso es todo.
4 Envió Y. el chaleco á la sastrería, y
las botas á la zapatería t
Envié ambos.
Whose book is this which I have
heref
That one which you have there and
this one which I have here are
the professor's.
Who is that gentleman who resides
there on the other side of the
street!
That gentleman is my pupil.
Where do you go f
I go there to the other side of the park.
Will you not come here to this side f
No, sir, I go there to the other side.
Do you wish to buy that book 1
No, sir, I wish to buy that other one.
Will you go to the theatre with us f
That (is what) I wish.
Did you take that (thing) to the tai-
lor's!
I did (or I took it).
Do you command anything more (or
have you any more commands) f
No, that is all.
Did you send the vest to the tailor's,
and the boots to the shoemaker's f
I sent both.
* Much used in México.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XVIIL
75
4 Fueron á su casa de Y. el médico
francés y el profesor alemán 1
Fué (tqud^ pero no fué este.
I Habló V. de aquello & mi madre Y
No, señor, pero hablé de eUo á su
padre de V.
En mi casa y en la de su hermano
deV.
El jardín de esta casa y el de la que
V. compró.
Este caballo y eZ de mi amigo.
Did the French physician and the
German professor go to your housef
The former came, but the latter did
not come.
Did you speak of that to my mother !
No, sir, but I spoke of it to your
father.
In my house and in your brother's.
The garden of this house and that
of the one you bought.
This horse and my friend's (that of
my friend).
EXPLANATION.
76. The demonstrative pronouns este^ this, ese^ aquely that,
are thus declined :
Este, ese, aquel {maac, sing,), I Estos, esos, aquellos (mase, plural).
Esta, esa, aquella (fem, sing,). \ Estas, esas, aquellas (fem, plural).
Esto, eso, aquello (neuter).
76. Este is used to point out that which is near to us, and
corresponds to the meaning of the adverb here ; ese points out
that which is at some distance, and corresponds to the adverb
there ; and aquel denotes remoteness, and corresponds to the
adverb yonder ; as.
I^ste libro que tengo aqui,
Sse que tiene V. áhi.
Aquel que llevó Y. allá.
This book which I have here.
That one which you have th^re.
That one which you took there.
77. The adverb aA/, which is not so commonly used as
aquí and alli^ stands intermediate between them as to re-
moteness ; as, aqui^ here ; ahi^ there ; alU^ yonder. AM is
much used in the phrase, / Ahí va ! There he goes !
78. When the pronouns este^ ese precede the adjective otro,
another, they may be written together, so as to form a single
word, in the following manner :
Estotro. "
Estotros.
Estotra.
This other.
Estotras.
These others.
Esotro.
That other.
Esotros.
Those others.
Esotra.
Esotras.
These forms, however, are now rarely used.
Digitized
by Google
76 LESSON XVIIL
79. The demonstrative pronouns, in their quality of adjec-
tives, are used also as neuter. Eso^ that, is the most used of
the three, and almost as much as the personal pronoun to,
and in the same manner ; as,
Eso se hará. I That will be done.
/ Eso es I I That is it !
80. The former and the latter is translated in Spanish by
aquel and este ; thus,
La aplicación y la pereza hacen al
hombre muy diferente ; aquella
lo eleva y esta lo rebaja.
Industry and slothfulness have a
very different effect upon man ;
the former elevates him, the lat-
ter lowers him.
81. When in English the demonstrative pronoun that is
followed by the preposition o/, or either of the relatives who^
which^ expressed or understood, referring to a noun already
mentioned, the definite article, in the corresponding number
and gender, is employed in Spanish ; as.
In my house and in your brother's.
En mi casa y en la de su herma-
no de V.
El jardín de esta casa y el de la
qtte V. compró.
Este caballo y el de mi amigo*
The garden of this house and that
of the one (which) you bought.
This horse and my friend's (». e.,
that of my friend).
82. English personal pronouns, followed by a relative not
agreeing in case, are generally rendered in Spanish by the
demonstrative; as.
Quiero comprar á aquellos que I I want to buy from them who sell
venden barato, | cheap.
83. Aquí, ALLÍ, acá, allá. — Although the adverbs aquí^
here, alU^ there, are employed as synonyms of acá, here, and
allay there, respectively, we must observe that aquí and alU
refer to a place more circumscribed or determinate than acáj
allay and that they suggest the idea of resting in a place ;
while acá and allá convey the idea of motion to or from a
place ; for the same reason we may say, más acáy más alláj
nearer, farther ; and we may not say, más aquí^ more here,
más allíy more there.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XVIIL 77
84. Venie é IE. — The various modes and tenses of ir are
used as auxiliaries, just as in English ; as, Voy á hablar ^ I
am going to speak. In many cases where in English the
verb to come is employed, the Spanish verb ir, to go, must be
used ; as, Will you come to my house to-morrow ? when both
the persons are elsewhere, is rendered thus : ¿, Va Vd. maña-
na á mi casa.^ When the speaker alludes to motion from
some other place to the place where he. is, the verb venir is
used ; but in the case of motion from where he is to some
other place, the verb is ir.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Viene V. del campo ? No, señor, voy allá.
2. ¿ De dónde viene su amigo de V. ? Viene de España.''
3. ¿ Adonde va V. este año ? Este año quiero ir á París.
4. ¿ De quién es ese retrato que tiene V. ahí ? Este que tengo
aquí es el de mi padre, y aquel que tiene su amigo de V. allí, es
de mi madre.
5. i Es discípulo de V. el caballero que reside en aquella her-
mosa casa ? No, señor ; pero su^ prima, que reside de este otro
lado de la calle, es mi discipula.
6. ¿ Va V. á su casa todos los días ? No, señor, voy allá los
lunes, miércoles y viernes.
7. ¿ Cuántas lecciones toma el caballero que vino ayer á su
casa de V. ? Toma dos á la semana.
8. ¿ Quién trabaja más, el profesor ó el discípulo ? El uno y
el otro trabajan mucho.
9. ¿ Es este niño su hijo de V. ? Sí, señor, es mi hijo Manuel.
10. I Manuel ! ¿ quieres venir aquí á mi lado ? No, señor, no
quiero ir.
11. i Por qué ? Porque quiero ir con mi padre.
12. ¿ Cuántos niños tiene V. ? Tengo cinco, tres niñas y dos
niños.
13. i Quiere V. ir con nosotros al Parque Central ? No, señor,
porque tengo que ir con mis niños al campo.
14. i Ha de ir V. (tiene V. que ir) hoy ? Sí, señor, tengo que
ir hoy.
15. i No quiere V. venir acá de este'lado? No, señor, voy allá
del otro lado.
16. ¿ Llevó V. aquello á la sastrería ? Si señor, lo llevé.
Digitized
by Google
78 LESSON XVIIL
17. I Manda V. algo más ? No, eso es todo.
18. ¿ Habló V. de aquello á mi amigo ? No, señor ; pero hablé
de ello á su hermano.
19. i En dónde trabajó V. ayer ? Trabajó en la casa de V. y
en la de su hermano.
20. ¿ Trabajó V. en mi jardín ó en el de mi amigo ? Trabajé
en el uno y en el otro.
21. i Adonde va V. á trabajar hoy ? Voy á trabajar en el jar-
dín de esta casa y en el de la que V. compró el año pasado.
22. l Llevó V. mis botas á la zapatería, y compró V. el pan que
necesitamos ? Llevé las botas ; pero no he comprado el pan.
23. i Qué llevas ahí, Alejandro ? Llevo mis libros.
24. ¿ Qué quiere tu hermano ? Quiere pan y manteca (or man-
tequilla).
25. i Pagó V. al sastre ? Sí, señor, ayer pagué al sastre, y hoy
he pagado al zapatero.
26. i De quién son esos caballos ? Este es el de mi padre, y
aquel es el de mi hermano.
27. ¿ Cuál es el de V. ? Yo no tengo ninguno.
28. i Quiere V. tener uno ? Quiero tener muchos.
29. ¿ Escribió V. la carta y la lección ? Escribí aquella, pero
no he escrito esta.
EXERCISE.
1. Do you go to church every day ? I only (sólo) go on Sun-
days.
2. Where is your servant Jane going ? She is going to the
bakery to buy bread.
3. Do your music teacher {maestro) and your Spanish pro-
fessor come to your house every day ? The former comes every
day, but the latter only comes on Tuesdays and Saturdays.
4. Which of the two works the more ? Both have to work
much.
5. Which of the two horses is the older, this one here or that
one there f This one here is the younger.
6. Have you that letter which you received last Monday ? I
have not that one ; but I have here the one * I received the day
before yesterday.
7. Who wrote these two histories, that of France and that of
America ? Eollin wrote the former, and Robertson the latter.
♦Laque.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XIX. 79
8. Does the piano teacher live far from here ? The piano
teacher does not live far from here ; but the French professor
lives very far.
9. Is that all (Zo que) your brother has studied ? Yes, sir,
that is all.
10. Which lesson have you studied ? I have studied the one
(la qtie) we read the other day.
11. Which did we read, the fifteenth or the sixteenth ? We
read both.
12. Which one do you wish to read first ? I have to read the
former.
13. Why do you have to read the former ? Because I have
not studied it well.
14. Which exercise have you there ? I have mine and my
brother's. ,
15. Is not your brother coming to take his lesson to-day ? No,
sir, he has to take his music lesson to-day.
16. John I Sir !
17. Have you taken my coat to the tailor's ? Yes, sir, I took
it last night
18. Have you paid that man ? Yes, sir, I paid him to-day.
19. How much did you pay him ? I paid him three dollars
and seventy-five cents.
20. Why did you pay him three dollars and seventy-five cents ?
Because he worked one day in this garden, and two in that of the
Twenty-third street house.
21. How many pupils have you ? I have thirty : seventeen
learn Spanish and the thirteen others French.
22. Do they study well ? Some of them study very well ; but
none writes his exercises well.
23. When do you sing and play on the piano ? I study my
lessons before singing and playing.
24. Who is that gentleman that came from Vienna last month ?
That gentleman is the one to whom I spoke last week at the
concert
LESSON XIX.
Racer. (Infinitive.) To do, or to make.
Haciendo (present participle).
Hecho {past participle)
Doing, making.
Done, made.
Digitized
by Google
80
LESSON XIX.
FEESENT.
Hago.
Haces.
Hace.
Hacemos.
Hacéis.
Hacen.
Hice.
Hiciste.
Hizo.
Hicimos.
Hicisteis.
Hicieron.
Partir.
Marchar.
Cambiar.
Para.
Así.
Por. '
Entre.
Hasta.
Hacia.
Sin. Hasta donde.
I do, or make.
Thou doest, or makest
He does, or makes.
We do, or make.
You do, or make.
They do, or make.
PBETE&rr.
I did, or made.
Thou didst, or madesi
He did, or made.
We did, or made.
You did, or mada
They did, or made.
To set out, to depart, to divide.
To go, set out, set off, to march.
Change.
PREPOSITIONS.
For, or in order to.
So, thus.
By, for, through.
Between, among.
Until, even.
Toward.
Without. How far.
Pedro.
Escritor.
Escribano.
Estado.
Médico.
Cuarto.
Aragón.
Tío.
Peter.
Writer.
Notary.
State.
( Physician.
í Doctor.
Koom.
Aragón.
Uncle.
Helena.
Escritora.
Tienda.
Provincia.
Manera.
Escritura.
Comida.
Pieza.
Helen.
Writer (female).
Store, shop.
Province.
Manner.
Writing, convey-
ance.
Dinner.
Room.*
Til
* Much used in the Americas.
ve:
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XIX.,
81
COMPOSITION.
4 Qué hizo V. ayer en su cuarto!
Estudié mi lección.
4 Qué ha hecho V. hoyf
He escrito los ejercicios.
4 Qué hace el zapatero en la zapa-
tería 1
Hace zapatos y botas ^ara V.
4 Tiene V. papel para escribir una
carta f
Sí, señora, lo tengo.
I Quiere V. escribir una carta ^wr mi
hermanaf
4 Para quién es la carta f
Es para Manuel.
Yo parto para Madrid.
¿ Para dónde parte V. f
Parto para los Estados Unidos.
I Habló V. á su padre por mi her-
mano f
Hablé j>or él á mi padre y á mi tío.
4 Habla V. bien el francés f
Lo hablo muy bien, y hasta paso por
francés.
¿ Por cuánto vendió V. el caballo f
Lo vendí por doscientos cincuenta
pesos.
4 Necesita V. enviar ^or algo!
Necesito enviar por el médico.
4 Por qué envía V. !
Envío por vino.
4 Vive V. para comer ?
No, señor, como^ara vivir.
4 Marchó ayer mucho el regimiento
Séptimo f \
Marchó hasta el) Parque Central.
What did you do yesterday in your
room!
I studied my lesson.
What have you done to-day 1
I have written my exercises.
What does the shoemaker do in the
shoe-shop ?
He makes shoes and boots for you.
Have you paper to write a letter!
Yes, madam, I have.
Are you willing to write a letter for
my brother !
For whom is the letter!
It is for Emanuel.
I set out for Madrid.
Where do you go!
I set out for the United States.
Did you speak to your father for my
brother!
I spoke for him to my father and to
my uncle.
Do you speak French well !
I speak it very well, and I even pass
for a Frenchman.
For how much did you sell the
horse !
I sold it for two hundred and fifty
dollars.
Do you want to send for anything!
I want to send for the physician.
What do you send for !
I send for wine.
Do you live to eat !
No, sir, I eat to live.
Did the Seventh Regiment march
far yesterday !
They marched to Central Park.
EXPLANATION.
86. Para and Pob. — As both these prepositions very fre-
quently answer to the English /or, they are apt to be con-
8
Digitized
by Google
82
LESSON XIX.
founded by foreigners. Such confusion may, however, be
avoided by bearing in mind the following rules :
Para expresses aim, object, destination.
Por conveys the idea of want or requirement, substitu-
tion, favor, duration of time, direction, and frequently takes
the place of the English word through, &c. Examples :
WITH PARA.
Papel para escribir.
Paper for writing.
Este libro es para V.
Ttyabook is for you.
IpTrto^SÍS^íííS^^ ^^'•^
I start for NewX^^^*
Comer ^ara vivir.
To eat to live.
Trabajo para ganar la vida.
I work in order to earn a living.
Para el domingo.
Por Sunday.
Este caballo es para su padre de V.
This horse is for your father,
Lo haré para tu hermano.
I shall do it for thy brother.
WITH POE.
Escribo por mi hermano.
I write for my brother.
Cambié mi sombrero por el sfuyo.
I changed my hat for his.
Pasador docto.
He passes for a man of learning.
Venderá la casa por diez mil pesos.
He will seH the house for ten thou-
sand dollars. ^
Trabajo por ganar la vida.
I \^rk to (endeavor to) earn my liv-
ing
Hablé ]5s;o^ tu amigo.
I spoke Av^^r (in favor of) thy friend.
Envío ^or\pan.
I send for tí^^ead.
Lo haré por í^-u hermano.
I shall do it f^r thy brother (for thy
brother's safe).
86. Entbe. — The general meaning of tn is preposition is
between and among^ and it is followed by the nominative case
of the pronoun, and not by the objective, as is the case with
between and among in English ; as.
Between the two. ^
Between you and nie.
Among all. '
Entre los dos.
Entre V. y yo.
Entre todos.
87. Hasta signifies WM, untilj even^ to^ as many as, as far
as', as,
Hasta el domingo.
Pasaron hasta mil.
Voy hasta el Parque Central.
Estudió el español hasta que lo
aprendió.
Till (or until) Sunday.
As many as a thousJand passed.
I go as far as Central Park.
He studied Spanish 'ill he learned it
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XIX. 83
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ¿ Escribió V. la carta para ^u padre, y los ejercicios de la
lección de español ? Hice aquello ; pero no he hecho esto.
2. ¿ Tiene V. papel para escribir una carta ? Sí, señor ; pero
tengo que escribir antes mis ejercicios.
3. i Hizo el sastre mi casaca ? La hizo.
4. ¿ Qué ha hecho el zapatero ? Ha hecho unas botas para
V. y unos zapatos para Manuel.
5. ¿ Para dónde parte V. ? Parto para los Estados Unidos.
6. i Quiere V. escribir una carta por mi hermano ? Sí, señor,
¿ para quién es la carta ? Es para Dn, Manuel.
7. i Habló V. á su padre por mi hermano ? Hablé por él á
mi padre y á mi amigo.
8. i Habla V. bien el francés ? Lo hablo muy bien, y hasta
paso por francés.
9. i Por cuánto vendió V. la casa ? La vendí por ocho mil
10. l Por qué envía V. ? Envío por mis libros.
11. i Vive V. para comer ? No, señor, como para vivir.
12. l Marchó V. ayer con el regimiento Séptimo ? Marché
hasta el Parque CentraL
13. i Es Dn. Pedro escritor ? No, señor, Dn. Pedro es escri-
bano.
14. i De qué manera hace V. eso ? Lo hago así.
15. ¿ Qué hizo V. ayer ? Estudié la lección de español, y hoy
he escrito los ejercicios.
16. i Tiene V. que trabajar más que yo ? Tengo que escribir
más que V. ;,pero no tengo que trabajar mucho.
17. i Hacia dónde van Vds. ? Vamos hacia la iglesia.
18. i En dónde vive V. ? Vivo en la Cuarta avenida, número
trescientos treinta y ocho, entre las calles Veinte y cinco y Veinte
y seis.
19. ¿ Para qué quiere V. mi libro ? Para leerlo.
20. ¿ Quién pagó la comida ? La pagamos entre todos.
21. i Marchan bien estos hombres ? Marchan muy bien.
22. i Por dónde pasaron Vds. cuando fueron á la iglesia ? Pa-
samos por la calle Veinte y tres.
23. ¿ Es esa señora escritora ? Sí, señor, y escribe muy
bien.
24. ¿ De qué país es V. ? Soy de España.
25. ¿ De qué provincia ? De Aragón.
Digitized
by Google
84 LESSON XIX.
26. i Pronuncian bien el español en Aragón ? Lo pronuncian
muy bien.
27. i Hablan bien el inglés en los Estados Unidos ? Lo ha-
blan bien.
28. i Quiere V. ir á mi casa para comer con nosotros ? No,
señor, porque tengo que ir á comer á casa de mi amigo.
EXERCISE.
1. How far did the Seventh Regiment march yesterday ?
They (it) marched to Central Park.
2. Did your sister set out yesterday for Philadelphia ? No,
madam, she did not set out yesterday.
3. When does she start ? She starts to-day.
4. What does your servant look for ? He looks for my cou-
sin's (/em.) letter.
5. What do you do to learn Spanish ? I study the lessons of
my Spanish grammar and read good writers.
6. To whom did you speak last night at the concert ? I spoke
to the physician for Peter.
7. Who is that man who came to your house last night ? He
is my brother's servant.
. 8. Do you speak Spanish well ? No, sir ; but I speak Italian
very well, and I even pass for an Italian {italiano).
9. How did your uncle spend the day yesterday ? Studying
his lessons and writing to Madrid.
10. Is your uncle willing to write a letter for (in favor of)
Charles ? He is willing to write it.
11. Do the young ladies want to send for anything ? They
want to send for the physician.
12. Why do they send for the physician ? To speak for their
servant (/em.).
13. Where does he live ? In Fifth avenue, between Twenty-
fourth and Twenty-fifth streets.
14. Where do you send ? I send to the shoemaker's.
15. What do you send there for ? For some boots and shoes
for Emanuel.
16. How do you write your exercises without ink ? I write
them with a pencil.
17. How did Louis write his exercise the other day ? He and
his sister wrote it between them.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XX.
86
18. Have you sold your old hat ? I changed it for Peter's
new one.
19. Will you pass me that paper to write a letter for my
brother ? This paper is not for letters.
20. What is it for ? It is for my exercises.
21. Whose letter is that ? This letter is for your mother.
22. Where did the singer go last year ? He went to Aragón,
a province in Spain.
23. What have you sent for ? I have sent for nothing.
24. Will you go for wine ? I do not wisk wine, but bread
and meat.
25. Do you live to eat ? No, sir, I eat to live.
26. Have you read the newspapers to-day? No, sir; but I
marched with my regiment.
27. Has the tailor made my vest ? Yes, sir, he made it last .
week.
28. Will you go to the pianistas for my piano ? No ; I have
to study my lessons.
29. Do you write before studying? No; I study first and
write afterward.
LESSON XX.
Salir,
Saliendo (pres, part).
Salido (past part).
To go out, to leave.
Going out.
Gone out
PRESENT.
Salgo.
Sales.
Sale.
I go out.
Thou goest out
He goes out
Salimos.
Salís.
Salen.
We go out
You go out
They go out
PRETERIT.
Salí
Saliste.
Salió.
I went out
Thou wentest out
He went out
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XX.
Salimos.
Salisteis.
Salieron.
México.
Mexico.
We went out.
You went out
They went out.
Tanto.
So, so much, as much.
Cuanto.
How much.
Como.
As, how.
Presto.
Soon, speedily.
Pronto.
Promptly, quickly.
Temprano.
Early.
Tarde.
Late.
Mejor.
Better.
Peor.
Worse.
Mayor.
Greater, larger, older.
Menor.
Smaller, younger.
Mejor.
Better.
Peor.
Worse.
Prudente.
Prudent
Imprudente.
Imprudent.
Pronto.
Prompt, quick, ready.
Presto.
Eeady, prepared.
Callado. •
Silent, taciturn.
Hablador.
Talkative.
Limpio.
Cleanly, clean.
Vivo.
Lively, alive.
Situado.
Situated.
Cansado.
Tiresome, tired.
Fecha.
Date.
COMPOSITION.
|Es Alejandro tan prudente como
su hermano ?
No, señor, Alejandro es muy impru-
dente. Es tom imprudente como
hablador.
I Son los comerciantes más ricos que
los médicos f
Algunos son más ricos; pero otros
lo son menos que los médicos.
I Es Nueva York mayor que Madrid f
Madrid es menor que Nueva York.
Is Alexander as prudent as his
brother ?
No, sir, Alexander is very impru-
dent. He is as imprudent as
talkative.
Are merchants richer than physi-
cians?
Some are richer ; but others are less
rich than physicians.
Is New York larger than Madrid f
Madrid is smaller than New York.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XX.
87
I Qué caballo es mejor^ el de V. ó el
mío?
El de V. es mayor ; pero es^eor que
el mío.
I Tiene V. más de cincuenta pesos?
No tengo más que veinte y tres.
Él tiene tcmto dinero como V,
Yo estudio tanto como V. ; pero no
aprendo tanto.
Él habla español tom bien como Y. ;
pero no lo escribe tam, bien.
Él tiene tcmto cucmto quiere.
Tengo tcmtoa libros y tcmto papel
como él.
Yo escribo más que V. ; pero V. lee
más que yo.
Él habla menos que V,
Which horse is the better, yours or
minef
Yours is larger ; but it is worse than
mine.
Have you more than fifty dollars ?
I have not more than twenty-three.
He has as much money as you.
I study as much as you ; but I do
not learn as much.
He speaks Spanish as well as you ;
but he does not write it as well.
He has as much as he wishes.
I have as many books and as much
paper as he.
I write more than you ; but you read
more than I.
He speaks less than you.
EXPLANATION.
DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
88. The adverbs tmito and cuanto lose the last syllable,
to^ before an adjective or another adverb.
89. The comparative of equality is formed by placing the
adverb tarty so or as, before, and comOy as, after the adjec-
tive; as,
Alejandro es tcm prudente com>o su I Alexander is as prudent as his sis-
hermana. I ter.
90. CuAN may be employed, if the comparative is followed
by an adjective instead of a noun ; as,
Es tan hablador cuan imprudente. | He is as talkative as imprudent.
However, como is more frequently used.
91. The comparative of superiority is formed by placing
the word más^ more, before the adjective, and que^ than, after
it; as.
Él es WAS rico que V. I He is richer than you.
92. The comparative of inferiority is formed by placing
the word menos^ less, before, and que after ; as.
Él es m,eno8 rico que V. | He is leas rich than you.
Digitized
by Google
This house is larger or smaller than
that one.
This horse is better or worse than
mine.
88 LUSSON XX.
93. Mayor, greater or larger; meh'OR, smaller; me job,
better, and peor, worse, are already in the comparative de-
gree, and do not take más or menos before them ; as.
Esta casa es mayor ó menor que esa.
Este caballo es mejor 6 peor que el
mío.
94. TJian^ after comparatives coming before numeral ad-
jectives, is generally translated by de in the affirmative, and
que in the negative ; as.
Tengo más de cincuenta libros. 1 1 have more than fifty books.
No tengo más que veinte pesos. 1 1 have not more than twenty dollars.
96. Comparison may also take place in the case of nounsj
verbs^ and adverts ; but its form is so similar to that laid down
for the adjectives that the student will not require any other
explanation than the examples given in the Composition.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. i Sale V. tanto como su hermano ? No, señor, mi hermano
sale más que yo.
2. ¿ Cuándo salimos nosotros ? Nosotros, salimos muy pronto.
3. ¿ Salió su hermano temprano de casa ? No, señor, salió
tarde.
4. ¿ Salieron Vds. pronto del teatro ? Sí, señor, salimos muy
pronto.
6. ¿ Sale V. presto á la calle ? Sí, señor, salgo muy presto.
6. ¿ Salieron Vds. temprano de la iglesia ? Salimos tarde.
7. i Cuál de estas dos gramáticas es mejor ? La que V. tiene
delante es mejor que la otra.
8. ¿ Es malo este caballo ? Es peor que el de V.
9. i Es buena la pluma de su hermano de V. ? Es mejor que
la mía y peor que la de V.
10. i Cuánto dinero tiene V. ? Tengo cuarenta pesos.
11. ¿ Cuántos libros tiene su hermana ? Tiene tantos como
su prima.
12. ¿ Cuánto tiemjK) vivió V. en París ? Viví cuatro años.
13. ¿ Es su hermano mayor ó menor que V. ? Es mayor.
14. ¿ Quién de su familia de V. habla mejor el inglés ? Mi
hermano menor lo habla mejor que todos.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XX. 89
15. ¿ Dónde lo aprendió ? En Londres.
16. i Cuánto tiempo vivió allá ? Seis años.
17. i Cuándo vino de allá ? Vino el año pasado.
18. i Cuál de Yds. dos estudia más ? Él estudia menos que
yo ; pero aprende más.
19. ¿ Cuál de sus hermanos de V. es más prudente ? El mayor
es muy callado y prudente ; pero el menor es vivo ó imprudente.
20. ¿ Salieron Vds. del concierto antes que nosotros ? No,
señor, salimos después.
21. i Cuándo salió su amigo de Vds. de Nueva York ? Salió
el mes pasado para París.
^. i Cuándo sale Y. para Filadelfía ? No salgo hasta la
semana que viene.
23. ¿ Hacia dónde vive su amigo de Y. ? Yive hacia la plaza.
24. ¿ Por dónde vino Y. de París ? Yine por Inglaterra.
25. ¿ En dónde vive Y. ? En la Quinta avenida entre las
calles Treinta y Treinta y una.
26. ¿ Qué caballo es mejor, el de Y. ó el mío ? El de Y. es
mayor ; pero no tan bueno como el mío.
27. i Tiene Y. más de cien pesos ? Tengo más de ciento.
28. i No tiene Y. más que tres pesos ? No, señor, no tengo
más que dos.
29. ¿ Habla Y. español mejor que Luisa ? No, señor, lo hablo
peor ; pero lo escribo mejor que ella.
30. i Salió Y. ayer temprano ? Salí temprano ; pero hoy he
salido muy tarde.
EXERCISE.
1. Have you written your letter ? Yes, sir, I have written it.
2. What is the date of it (what date has it) ? The first of this
month.
3. Do you {plural) go out much ? We go out this year as
much as last year.
4. Which is the better grammar, mine or yours ? Yours is
better than mine, but not so large.
6. Which of you two goes out earlier, you or your cousin ?
I go out earlier than he.
6. Are merchants as rich as singers ? Some singers are richer
than merchants.
7. Is not this horse as lively as that one ? That one is a little
more lively than this one.
Digitized
by Google
90 LESSON XX.
8. Is. Mexico as large as the United States ? No, miss, the
latter is much larger than the former.
9. When do the musicians leave for Havana ? They leave
next week (the week that is coming).
10. When did you take your music lesson ? I took it the day
before yesterday, early.
11. Did your brothers take theirs as early as you ? No, sir,
they took theirs very late.
12. Which of you two speaks Italian better ? He speaks it
better than I ; but I write it better than he.
13. Do you sing much every day ? I do not sing as much as
I did last month.
14. Does the notary write as well as the physician ? The
former writes better than the latter.
15. Is not that man very tiresome ? He is very talkative and
very tiresome.
16. Is Lewis as prudent as his uncle ? He is more prudent
than he ; but not so taciturn.
17. Are you less tall (alto) than Louisa Í No, she is less tall
than I.
18. Is your uncle, the merchant, as rich as your father ? No,
sir, my father is richer than he.
19. When do your cousins leave for Paris ? They leave very
soon.
20. Is your servant as cleanly as ours ? Ours is more cleanly
than yours, but not so talkative.
21. Have you any writing paper ? I have as much paper and
as much nik a,s I wish.
22. Is HtíLiry very prudent ? He is as imprudent as talkative.
23. Who goes to the bakery quicker than John ? Nobody
goes as quick as ho.
24. Have the merchants sent as much silver to France as to
Spain Í They have sent more to France.
35, Did the «hoemaker make the shoes as quickly as the tailor
made the coat í The former made the shoes quicker, because he
worked mona tliaji the latter.
26. Which works the later, the tailor or the baker? The
latter does not work so late as the former.
27. Aro your father's books larger than ours ? Yours are
smaller than his.
28. Are those horses bad ? They are worse than the others.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXL
91
29. Will you go with your friend (fern.) to the concert ? I
shall not go.
30. Why will you not go ? Because it is very late, and I have
to play on the piano.
31. Where did your mother learn Spanish ? She learned it
here.
32. And does she speak it well ? She does not speak it as well
as she writes it.
33. How much money have you ? I have not more than seven
dollars.
34. Has your friend as much as you ? He has more than I ;
he has received more than two hundred dollars from Spain.
LESSON XXI.
Saber.
Sabiendo.
Sabido.
To know.
Knowing.
Known.
Sé.
Sabes.
Sabe.
I know.
Thou knowest
He knows.
Sabemos.
Sabéis.
Saben.
We know.
You know.
They know.
Supe.
Supiste.
Supo.
I knew.
Thou knewest.
He knew.
Supimos.
Supisteis.
Supieron.
We knew.
You knew.
They knew.
Amar,
Viajar,
To love.
To travel.
Trinidad (fem.).
Trinity.
Digitized
by Google
92
LESSON XXI.
Sabio, sapientísimo.
Hábil, habilísimo.
Difícil, dificilísimo.
Fácil, facilísimo.
Corto, cortísimo.
Alegre, alegrísimo.
Triste, tristísimo.
Feliz, felicísimo.
Largo, larguísimo.
Fuerte, fortísimo.
Nuevo, novísimo.
Fiel, fidelísimo.
Alto, altísimo.
Wise, learned ; very, most or ex-
tremely wise.
Clever, skilful ; very clever.
DiflBlcult; very or most difficult.
Easy ; very or most easy.
Short ; very or most short.
Cheerful ; very or most cheerf uL
Sad ; very or most sad.
Happy ; very or most happy.
Long ; very or most long.
Strong ; very or most strong.
New ; very or most new.
Faithful ; very or most faithful.
Tall ; very or most tall.
IBBEQULAB COMPASATITES AKD SUPEBLATIYES.
Bueno, mejor, óptimo.
Malo, peor, pésimo.
Grande, mayor, máximo.
Pequeño, menor, mínimo.
Alto, superior, supremo.
Bajo, inferior, ínfimo.
Good, better, best.
Bad, worse, worst.
Great, greater, greatest.
Small, smaller, smallest
High, \ ^ig^e^» highest.
( superior, supreme.
Low, H^^^T' I lowest
( inferior, )
Combinado.
I Combined.
COMPOSITION.
r
Efl el má^ sabio de mis discípuloa.
Eííta stífiorita es la más eiinable.
La miij/or parta clol rügimiíínto.
XíE mnt/or parte, 6 los mm, de los
-W cüsa d& la calle.
^ "i, 4 cuáles ííon los profesores
-#ftben más en tu escuela t
» ^fesor <3e aritmética sabe mu-
-^l de frailees sabe más : pero
' profesor de lií^oría ea el que
lie la the wisest of my pupils.
This young lady is the most lovable.
The greater part of the regiment.
The greater part, or the most, oí the
soldiers.
The best house in the street.
i Emanuel, which are the professors
ill your school who know the most f
The professor of arithmetic is
learned, the French professor is
more learned ; but the professor
of history is the most learned.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXL
93
I Es bueno este caballo f
Este caballo es muy bueno ; pero el
de V. es mejor, y el mío es el me-
jor de los tres.
4 Es esta lección muy fácil f
Es fadlisima.
I Es su casa de Y. tan alta como la
míaf
La mía es más alta que la de Y,, y
la de su hermano de V. es la más
alta.
Ese francés es muy cahallero.
I Es alegro 6 triste su amigo de Y. ?
Es alegrisimo ; pero es muy niño.
I Es muy joven f
No, sefior, es viejo.
Is this horse good f
This horse is very good ; but yours
is better, and mine is the best of
the three.
Is this lesson very easy f
It is most, or very easy f
Is your house as high as mine t '
Mine is higher than yours, and your
brother's is the highest.
That Frenchman is very gentle-
manly.
Is your friend cheerful or sad ?
He is most cheerful ; but he is very
childish.
Is he very young f
No, sir, he is old.
EXPLANATION.
96. English superlatives ending in est^ or formed by most^
are rendered by placing the definite article before the Span-
ish comparative ; as,
El más sabio.
La más amable.
The wisest.
The most lovable.
97. Most^ or most of^ when followed by a noun (singular),
is translated by la mayor parte ; as,
La mayor parte del regimiento. | Most of the regiment.
But if the noun is in the plural, most may also be translated
by más^ with the corresponding article ; as.
La mayor parte, ó loa más, de los I Most of the soldiers,
soldados. I
98. The preposition in, after the English superlative, is
translated by de in Spanish ; as.
La mejor casa de la calle. I The best house in the street.
99. Those superlatives which in English are formed with
the aid of very, mostj &c., may in Spanish be formed either
Digitized
by Google
94
LESSON XXI.
with the use of muy before the adjective, or by adding to the
latter the termination isimo ; as,
Muy hábil, or h&hííisimo. i Very clever.
Muy fácil, or ítucüisimo, \ Very, or most easy.
The termination {simo is, however, more expressive of the
al&solute superlative degree than the adverb muy.
100. Observe that adjectives ending in a vowel drop that
vowel on taking the termination isimo ; as.
Corto, cortísimo.
Alegre, AÍegristmo,
Trsite, tristíwmo.
Short, very short
Cheerful, most cheerfuL
Sad, very sad.
101. There are other superlatives ending in érrimo ; as,
Célebre, celebérrimo. I Celebrated, most celebrated.
Salubre, salubérrimo. | Salubrious, very salubrious.
These forms, however, are seldom used.
102. Adjectives ending in the following letters change
them before taking the termination isimo :
Co becomes qu ; as, rico, rizísimo.
Oo " gu ; as, largo, lar^i^isimo.
Ble '* bil ; as, amable, amabilísimo,
Z '* c ; as, feliz, felicísimo.
103. Superlatives in isimo irregularly formed :
Bueno, good, makes boniaimo, very good.
Fuerte, strong, makes fortisimo, very strong.
Nuevo, new, makes novísimo, very new.
Sabio, wise, makes aapieniiaimo, very wise.
Sacro, sacred, makes aacratisimo, very sacred.
Fiel, faithful, makes fidelísimo, very faithful.
104. Irregular comparatives and superlatives :
Bueno, mejor, óptimo.
Malo, peor, pésimo.
Grande, mayor, máximo.
Pequeño, menor, mínimo.
Alto, superior, supremo.
Bajo, inferior, ínfimo.
Mucho, más, lo más.
Poco, menos, lo menos.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXL 95
All these adjectives form also a superlative in isimo^ ac-
cording to the rules already given ; as, maUsimOy poquísimo^
muchísimo.
They admit also a comparative formed with más or menosj
and a superlative with muy ; as,
Menos malo. Less bad.
Los más grandes. The largest.
Muy pequeños. Very small.
106. Substantives used adjectively admit the degrees of
comparison; as.
Es más caballero que tú.
Es muy hombre.
Este hombre es muy niSo.
He is more gentlemanly than thou.
He is very much of a man, or very
manly.
This man is very childish.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Supo V. su lección antes de ayer ? La supe muy bien,
y la sé todos los días.
2. ¿ Ama V. á su hermano ? Lo amo.
3. l Le ama á V. su hermano ? No lo sé.
4. i A quién ama V. ? Amo á mis papas.
5. i Ha viajado V. mucho ? He viajado mucho en Europa ;
X)ero he viajado muy poco en América.
6. l Sabe V. el español ? Muy poco, señorita ; pero lo aprendo.
7. Y V., señorita, ¿ lo sabe V. ? No, señor, no lo sé, ni lo
aprendo.
8. i Por qué no estudia V. el español ? Porque aprendo la
música, y no tengo tiempo para estudiarlo.
9. i Es muy hábil su profesor de música de V. ? Es habilí-
simo.
10. i Sabe V. cantar ? No, señora, pero sé tocar un poco el
piano.
11. ¿ No sabe V. tocar la guitarra ? No, señora, toco el violin.
12. ¿ Aprende bien ese caballero el español ? Estudia mucho
y lo aprende muy bien.
13. ¿ Quién aprende más pronto el español, las señoras ó los
caballeros ? Las señoras aprenden mucho más pronto.
14. i Quién es el más sabio de sus discípulos de V. ? La seño-
rita N., es la más sabia de todos mis discípulos.
Digitized
by Google
96 LESSON XXL
15. i Cuál de estos niños es el mejor ? El que ama á sus pa-
dres, y estudia más sus lecciones, es el mejor.
16. ¿ Marchó todo el regimiento séptimo por Broadway hasta
el Parque Central ? No, señor, pero la mayor parte de él.
17. ¿ Fueron al campo los soldados ? Los más de los soldados
fueron allá.
18. ¿ Es esta la mejor casa de la calle ? No, señor, esta casa
es muy buena ; pero la de Astor es mejor y la de Stewart es la
mejor de la ciudad.
19. i Sabe V. quién pasó por aquí anoche ? No, señor, pero sé
quién pasó por la Quinta avenida.
20. i Es bueno este caballo ? Este caballo es muy bueno ; pero
el de V. es mejor, y el mío es el mejor de los tres.
21. i Es caballero ese francés ? Sí, señor, es muy caballero.
22. i Es ese hombre alegre ó triste ? Es muy alegre ; pero es
muy niño.
23. i Fué V. al concierto la semana pasada ? Fm' antes de ayer.
24. ¿ Quiere V. tocar el piano ? Quiero, pero no sé.
25. ¿ Ha venido su amigo de V. ? Ha venido.
26. ¿ Cuándo vino ? Vino antes de ayer.
27. ¿ Cuándo sale V. ? Quiero salir la semana que viene.
EXERCISE.
1. Do you know French ? No, sir, but my brother knows it.
2. Is that physician clever ? He is most clever.
3. Which is the most skilful physician ? Ours is the most
skilful in the city.
4. Is Miss Louisa very amiable ? Yes, she is very amiable.
5. Alexander, which is the most learned teacher in your
school ? The English teacher is learned, the teacher of arith-
metic is more learned; but the Italian teacher is the most
learned of all.
6. Is your schoolmistress cheerful, Louisa ? Yes, mamma,
she is most cheerful and very happy.
7. Did you know your lessons well yesterday ? Yes, I knew
them very well, better than to-day's, for I have not had time to
study them.
8. Does your brother know his every day ? I do not know ;
but he works very little.
9. Is he taciturn ? No, sir, he is very talkative.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXL 97
10. Which is the largest church in New York? Trinity
Church is the largest and the handsomest in the city.
11. Whose is that handsome house there ? It is my uncle's.
12. Is it not the finest in the street ? No ; Mr. Emanuers is
the finest in the city.
13. Did the 12th Eegiment go out to march yesterday ? Not
all, but the greater part went out.
14. Did not all the soldiers march through Fourteenth street
last Thursday ? The most of them marched through Fourteenth
street, but not alL
15. Is your Spanish lesson for to-day difficult ? Yes, it is the
most difficult (that) I have had this month.
16. Is your French lesson very difficult, Charles ? No, sir ;
my French lesson for to-day is the easiest one in the grammar.
17. Which is the best Spanish grammar? The Combined
Spanish Grammar is the best and the easiest.
18. Is not your table very low for writing ? Yes, it is very
low ; I write better on a higher one.
19. Will you take this small pen to write your exercise ? No ;
I do not write well with my own, which is very small, but larger
than yours.
20. Have you travelled much in Europe ? I have travelled
very much in America, but very little in Europe.
21. Which is the longest street in New York ? Broadway is
the longest in the United States.
22. Do you love your parents ? Yes, I love them very much.
23. Why does not Margaret love her cousin ? She does not
love him because he is very taciturn.
24 Which of your pupils is the wisest ? Henry and Louisa
are the wisest of all my pupils.
25. Who reads the most newspapers in your house ? I do not
know ; but papa reads a great many.
26. To whom have you paid the most money to-day ? I have
paid most to the tailor, because he has worked most for me.
27. Does not your washerwoman work very much ? Yes, she
works very much, but earns (ganar) very little money.
28. Whose horse is the most lively, yours, Charles', or mine ?
Charles' is lively, mine is more lively, but jours is the liveliest
of the three.
29. On what street do you live ? I live on Twenty- third street.
30. Is that a fine street ? Yes, it is one of the finest streets
up-town (of the upper part (parte alta) of the city).
0
Digitized
by Google
98
LESSON XXII.
LESSON XXII.
Estar.
To be (in* a certain place,
state or condition).
Estoy.
I am.
Estás.
Thou art.
Está.
He is.
Estamos.
We are.
Estáis.
You are.
Están.
They are.
Prestar. |
To lend.
PRESENT PARTICIPLES.
Hablando.
Speaking.
Estudiando.
Studying.
Comprando.
Buying.
Buscando.
Looking for.
Necesitando.
Needing, wanting, requiring.
Aprendiendo.
Learning.
Vendiendo.
Selling.
Leyendo.
Beading.
Bebiendo.
Drinking.
Comiendo.
Eating, dining.
Escribiendo.
Writing.
Eecibiendo.
Eeceiving.
Viviendo.
Living.
Besidiendo.
Eesiding.
Teniendo.
Having, holding.
Siendo.
Being.
Queriendo.
Wishing, desiring, loving.
Llevando.
Carrying, taking.
Enviando.
Sending.
Tomando.
Taking.
Pagando.
Paying.
Pronunciando.
Pronouncing.
Cantando.
Singing, chanting.
Tocando.
Touching, playing.
Haciendo.
Doing, making.
Pasando.
Passing.
Digitized
by Google
LESSOJ>r XXII.
Trabajando.
Mandando.
Yendo.
Viniendo.
Estando.
Norte, sur, este, oeste.
Working.
Sending, commanding.
Going.
Coming.
Being (in a certain state &c.).
North, south, east, west
COMPOSITION.
iE8 grande su casa de V. t
Ea grande ; pero está en mal estado.
I En qué calle está la casa de su her-
mano de V. t
Está en la Cuarta' avenida.
/ Es Luisa bonita!
Es muy bonita.
/ Está ella contenta f
No está contenta, porque está enfer-
ma.
/ Es enfermiza f
Lo es mucho.
% De quién es esta casaf
Es de mi hermano.
Está muy bien situada.
Esta carta es para Margarita.
Nueva York está entre el río del
Norte y el del Este.
El señor Walker es pintor.
La mesa es de madera.
Estuve en casa hasta que Y. Uegó.
Mi amigo está para partir.
Estoy sin comer.
i Qué está Y. haciendo t
Estoy escribiendo.
4 De quién es Y. amado?
Soy amado de mis niños.
Manuel es bueno.
Manuel está malo.
i Está Pedro cansado ?
Está cansado y es cansado.
i Por qué está tan callado Alejandro?
Porque es callado.
Is your house large t
It is large ; but it is in bad condition.
On what street is your brother's
house t
It is on (the) Fourth avenue.
Is Louisa pretty f
She is very pretty.
Is she contented 1
She is not contented» because she is
sick.
Is she sickly f
She is very much so.
Whose house is this!
It is my brother's.
It is very well situated.
This letter is for Margaret.
New York is between the North and
East rivers.
Mr. Walker is a painter.
The table is of wood.
I was at home until you arrived.
My friend is about to set out.
Ihave not dined (I am withouteatlng).
What are you doing t
I am writing.
By whom are you loved t
I am loved by my children.
Emanuel is good.
Emanuel is ill.
Is Peter tired t
He is tired, and he is tiresome.
Why is Alexander so silent!
Because he is taciturn.
Digitized
by Google
100 LESSON XXII.
EXPLANATION.
106. Ser and Estar. — These two verbs have in English
but one equivalent — ^ro be ; but their respective significations
and uses are. so materially different as to constitute one of
the chief difiSculties of the Spanish language. By careful
observation, however, of the following simple rule the learn-
er will, we are assured, be enabled to overcome that difficulty,
and know exactly when to use the one and when the other of
these two verbs.
107. Whenever we wish to express what persons or things
are^ and their mode of being, in their essence, see is the verb
to be employed ; but if we desire to express the state^ condi-
tion^ or location of persons or things, and the mode of that
state, condition, or location in a relative manner, then estar
must be used.
The following examples will serve to render the applicar
tion of this rule more clear :
1st. Esta casa es grande.
2d. Esta casa está limpia.
3d. Esta casa está en Broadway.
4th. Luisa es bonita.
5th. Luisa es feliz.
6th. Luisa está contenta.
7th. Luisa está enferma.
8th. Luisa es enfermiza.
This house is large.
This house is clean.
This house is on Broadway.
Louisa is pretty.
Louisa is happy.
Louisa is content.
Louisa is sick.
Louisa is sickly.
In the first example we use ser to express what kind of a
house the one referred to is — i. e. large ; in the second, estar,
inasmuch as we desire to express hoto, or in what state the
house is, i. e, in a clean state ; estar is also employed in the
third, sixth and seventh examples, the object being to make
known respectively where the house is, and in what state or
condition Louisa is or finds herself; while in the fourth, fifth
and eighth ser again comes into play, seeing we wish to desig-
nate Louisa's mode of being in an essential manner.
From the above general rule may be deduced the follow-
ing observ9jtipns :
1st. Tl¿t:SE:¿ Au«tjbe used whenever we wish to express
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXII.
101
possession, use, purpose or destination ; to point out the na-
tionality, profession or calling of persons ; the place of pro-
duction of things or the materials of which they are com-
posed ; the simple fact of existence, and the occurrence of
events.
2d. That estab is to be employed in speaking of situa-
tion or position, place, state or condition, in making the pro-
gressive form in ndo (corresponding to the English ing) of
other verbs; and, lastly, to govern verbs in the infinitive
mode with the aid of a preposition, or past participles with-
out such aid.
Examples of the uses of sek and estak :
SER.
La casaca ea de mi hermano.
The coat is my brother's.
La carta 68 para Margarita.
The letter is for Margaret.
El señor Walker ea pintor.
Mr. Walker is a painter.
Este vino ea de España.
This wine is from Spain.
La mesa ea de madera.
The table is of wood.
Has aido prudente en hacerlo así.
Thon hast been prudent in so doing.
Hoy es la celebración.
The celebration is to-day.
Son las diez.
It is ten o'clock.
J^tté el caso como yo escribi á V.
The case was as I wrote to you.
Esta casa eatá bien situada.
This house is well situated.
Nueva York eatá entre el río del
Norte y el del Este.
New York is between the North and
East rivers.
Eatuve en casa hasta que llegó.
I was at home until he arrived.
Él eatá escribiendo.
He is writing.
Mi amigo eatá para partir.
My friend is about to set out.
Eatoy por no hacerlo.
I am inclined not to do it.
Eatamoa sin comer.
We have not dined (or eaten).
Esta carta eatá fechada en Madrid.
This letter is dated from Madrid.
Estoy amado.
I am loved.
N. B. — As it frequently occurs that, in perfect accord-
ance with the rules of grammar, the same sentence may be
construed with either seb or estar, though conveying en-
tirely different ideas, it is essential to inquire thoroughly into
the respective meaning of these two verbs, in order to avoid
the confusion which must necessarily arise from their misap-
Digitized
by Google
102
LESSON XXIL
WITH ESTAB.
Manael eatd bueno.
Emanuel is well.
Juan está malo.
John is sick.
Pedro está cansado.
Peter is tired.
Juana está viva.
Jane is alive.
Alejandro está callado.
Alexander is silent.
Este niño está limpio.
This child is clean.
Esta naranja está agria.
This (particular) orange is sour.
plication. The importance of this remark may be seen from
the following examples :
WITH SEB.
Manuel es bueno.
Emanuel is good.
Juan 68 malo.
John is bad (or wicked).
Pedro 68 cansado.
Peter is tiresome.
Juana 68 yiya.
Jane is lively.
Alejandro 68 callado.
Alexander is taciturn.
Este niño 68 limpio.
This child is cleanly.
Esta naranja 68 agria.
This is a sour orange (i. 6. of the
sour species.
What is said in the course of the present lesson relative
to SER and estab, being all that is requisite to enable the
student to determine which of the two is to be used in an]^
ordinary case, his attention will not be again called to them
until we come to treat of their idiomatic uses.
108. The PRESENT PARTICIPLES are used with auxiliaries
to express an existing state or condition, or a continued ac-
tion. They are usually regular ; there being only ten irregu-
lar ones, which are as follows : diciendo^ from decir ^ to say ;
durmiendo^ from dormir^ to sleep ; irguiendOy from erguir^ to
hold upright ; oyendo^ from oír, to hear ; pidiendo, from pe-
dir, to request ; pudiendo, from poder, to be able ; riendo,
from reir, to laugh ; trayendo, from traer, to bring ; vinien-
do, from venir, to come; yendo, from ir, to go, and com-
pounds of these.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ¿ Qué está haciendo el muchacho ? Está estudiando su
lección.
2. ¿ Ha estudiado V. la suya ? La estudió ayer.
3. ¿ De quién es V. amado ? Estoy amado de mis niños.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXII. 103
4. I Está V. escribiendo sus ejercicios ? No, señor, estoy escri-
biendo una carta.
5. i Está Margarita cansada ? Margarita no está cansada ;
pero es cansada.
6. l Por qué está Pedro tan callado ? Porque es callado.
7. ¿ Para quién es esta carta ? Es para V.
8. i En dónde está situada Nueva York ? Está situada entre
el rio del Norte y el del Este. ^
9. t Es V. español ? No, señor, soy americano.
10. i Es ese caballero abogado ? No, señor, es médico.
11. i Cómo está Alejandro ? Está bueno.
12. i Es Alejandro buen muchacho ? Es bueno.
13. i Estuvo V. ayer en mi casa ? Estuve allí hasta que su
padre de V. vino.
14. i De qué es este tintero ? Es de madera.
15. i Es grande su jardín de V. ? Es grandísimo ; pero está
en mal estado.
16. i En qué calle está su casa de V. ? Está en la Cuarta
avenida.
17. i Es hermosa la casa de su amigo de V. ? Es hermosísima.
18. l Es Luisa feliz ? Luisa es muy feliz ; pero no está con-
tenta, porque no vino V. á verla (to see her),
19. ¿ Es V. enfermizo ? No, señor ; pero estoy enfermo.
20. ¿ De quién es aquella casa tan alta ? Es de un amigo
mío ; pero quiere venderla porque está mal situada en esta calle
tan fea.
21. i Cuándo parte V. ? No se, quiero partir hoy, porque
tengo mucho que hacer.
22. l Partió su amigo de V. ayer ? No, señor, ha partido hoy.
23. i Fué V. á la iglesia el domingo pasado ? Sí, señor, voy á
la iglesia todos los domingos, cuando no estoy enfermo.
24. ¿ Vive su amigo de V. en el campo ? No, señor, reside en
la ciudad.
25. i Qué hace en la ciudad ? Trabaja de abogado.
26. l Qué hace V. ? Yo vendo y compro : soy comerciante.
27. ¿ Pasó V. por París, cuando fué á Madrid ? Sí, señor, y
■por otras muchas ciudades de Francia y España.
28. i Viaja V. mucho ? He viajado mucho ; pero no viajo
más.
29. l Viajó V. en México ? Sí, señor, estuve allí el año pasado.
30. i Es bonito país ? El país es hermosísimo.
Digitized
by Google
104 LESSON XXII.
EXERCISE.
1. Where is your house situated ? On Eleventh street
2. Is it very large ? No, sir, it is not as large as my uncle's.
3. Which of the three languages* English, French or Span-
ish, is the richest ? The Spanish is much richer than the other
two.
4. Do you speak Spanish ? No, madam ; hut I am learn-
ing it
5. Do you and your sister take a lesson to-day ? No, our
teacher is not coming (does not come) to-day ; he is sick.
6. What lesson are you at (in). We are at the twenty-
second, one of the most difficult in the grammar.
7. Is Louis very taciturn ? he speaks very little. No, sir, he
is not taciturn ; but he is silent to-day, because he is unwell.
8. Why is Henry so cheerful to-day ? He is cheerful be-
cause he has received letters from his father and mother.
9. Is he a good boy ? He is a very good boy ; he is studying
his Italian lesson.
10. How is your friend to-day ? He is much better than yes-
terday.
11. Where is that wine from which Charles is drinking ? It
is from Spain.
12. Has your father been prudent in selling his horse ? He
has been most imprudent in selling it
13. Whom do you love ? I love my father and mother, and
I am loved by them.
14. Where is that letter from ? It is (comes) from Paris.
15. Have you (plural) dined to-day ? No, sir, we have not
dined ; our servant is very ill.
16. What do you do every day to pass the time ? Sometimes
I sing and play on the piano, and at others I read the newspapers
and go out to walk (pasear),
17. What does Mr. Emanuel do ? He is a merchant
18. For whom is that letter that Louisa is writing ? It is for
her cousin (fern.).
19. Is Alexander a tiresome boy ? No, madam, but he went
to walk very early, and he is tired.
20. Was Louis at your house yesterday ? Yes, sir, he was
there until my uncle came.
* Lenguas.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXIIL
105
21. How is your uncle to-day ? He is very well ; he is about
to set out for Paris.
22. Is Henry tired ? No ; but he is very tiresome.
23. Whose book is that ? It is my friend's ; but he wants to
sell it, because it isL very badly written.
24. How much does he want for it ? He wants five dollars
and a half.*
25. Is it in French ? No, sir, it is in Spanish.
26. When do you {plural) leave for Europe ? We leave
very soon.
27. Have you a garden at your house ? Yes, sir, I have a very
fine garden.
28. Is it very large ? It is very large.
29. What is your friend doing in Paris ? He is studying law
(for a lawyer).
30. And you, what do you do in Philadelphia ? I work as a
notary.
31. From whom is this letter? It is from the pianist, and
for you.
LESSON XXIII.
FUTÜKE,
First Conjugation.
TEEMINATIONS, '
sing.
PluraL
1. Ó.
1. emos.
2. as.
2. éis.
3. á.
3. án.
Hablaré.
I shall speak.
Hablarás.
Thou wilt speak.
Hablará.
He will speak.
Hablaremos.
We shall speak.
Hablaréis.
You will speak.
Hablarán.
They will speak.
^ Medio.
Digitized
by Google
106 LESSON XXIIL
Second Conjugation,
Aprenderé. I shall learn.
Aprenderás. Thou wilt learn.
Aprenderá. He will learn.
Aprenderemos. We shall Jeam.
Aprenderéis. You will learn.
Aprenderán. They will learn.
Third Conjugation,
Escribiré. I shall write.
Escribirás. Thou wilt write.
Escribirá. He will write.
Escribiremos. We shall write.
Escribiréis. You will write.
Escribirán. They will write.
Desear.
To desire.
Practicar.
To practise.
Bailar.
To dance.
Principiar.
To commence, to begin.
Acabar.
To ñnish.
Medio.
Half.
Proximo.
Next.
Entonces.
Then.
Anoche.
Last night.
Antes de anoche.
The night before last
Mañana. ^
To-morrow.
Pasado mañana.
The day after to-morrow.
La mañana.
The morning.
Si.
If.
Gusto.
Deseo.
Negocios.
Oficio.
Minuto.
Segundo.
Vals.
Idioma.
Lenguaje.
Taste, pleasure.
Desire, mind.
Business, occupa-
tion.
Office.
Minute.
Second.
Waltz.
t Language.
Noche.
Gracias.
Familia.
Práctica.
Teoría.
Hora.
Polca.
Lengua.
Tarde.
Night.
Thanks.
Family.
Practice.
Theory.
Hour.
Polka.
Tongue, language.
Afternoon.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXIII.
107
COMPOSITION.
I Estudiará Y. mañana su lección de
español t
Sí, señor, la estudiaré mañana por la
mañana.
I A qué hora principiará V. f
Principiaré á las tres de la mañana*
Señorita, | quiere V. bailar un valst
Gracias, caballero, no sé bailar vals.
I Bailará Y. una polca f
Sí, señor, con mucho gusto.
Hablo mal el español, porque no lo
practico.
Y. necesita practicar mucho para
aprender una lengua.
Practicaré en España, porque iré
allí muy pronto.
i Qué días toma Y. sus lecciones de
piano f
Las tomo los lunes y los viernes, á
las once de la mañana.
I Á qué hora tomará Y. las lecciones
de francés!
Las tomaré á las diez.
I Qué hora es f
Es la una.
Son las once 7 cuarto.
Son las tres menos diez minutos.
Mañana iré al campo, 7 pasado ma-
ñana tendré el gusto de pasar el
día con Y.
Gracias ; entonces seré mu7 feliz.
i Bailaremos en su casa de Y. f
Si, señor, bailaremos, cantaremos,
tocaremos 7 practicaremos el es-
pañol toda la noche.
Mu7 bien, mu7 bien ; entonces se-
remos más que felices, seremos fe-
licísimos.
Will 70U stud7 70ur Spanish lesson
to-morrow t
Yes, sir, I shall stud7 it to-morrow
morning.
At what hour will 70U commence t
I shall commence at three o'clock in
the morning.
Will 70U (dance a) waltz. Miss t
Thank you, sir, I do not know how
to waltz. ^
Will 70U dance a polka t
Yes, sir, with great pleasure.
I speak Spanish badl7, because I do
not practise it.
You need to practise a great deal in
order to learn a language.
I shall practise in Spain, because I
shall go there ver7 soon.
On what da7s do 70U take 7our pi-
ano lessons!
I take them on Monda7s and Fri-
da7s, at eleven o'clock in the
morning.
At what hour will 70U take 7our
French lessons!
I shall take them at ten (o'clock).
What o'clock is itt
It is one (o'clock).
It is a quarter past eleven.
It is ten minutes to three.
I shall go to the country to-morrow,
and shall have the pleasure of
spending the day after to-morrow
with 70U.
Thank 70U; then I shall be ver7
happ7.
Shall we dance at your house t
Yes, sir, we shall dance, sing, play
and practise Spanish all the even-
ing (the whole night).
Yery well, very well ; then we shall
be more than happy; we shall bo
most happy.
Digitized
by Google
108
LESSON XXIII.
I En dónde pasó Y. ayer la noche f
La pasé con mis amigos los señores
Martínez 7 su familia.
¿Cuánto tiempo estuvo V. en su
casaf
Fui á las siete de la noche 7 salí á
los once 7 media.
Where did 70U spend the evening
7esterda7 f
I spent it with m7 friends, Mr. and
Mrs. Martinez and (their) family.
How long were 70U at their house f
I went at seven in the evening and
left (went out) at half -past eleven
o'clock.
EXPLANATION.
109. The Futube Tense. — This tense affirms what is yet
to be or to take place at a future time (mentioned or not) ; as,
Seré comerciante. I I shall he a merchant.
Juan estudiará mañana. I John will stud7 to-morrow.
It is also used as a softened imperative, as will be seen
when that mode is introduced.
The future of all conjugations is formed by adding the
one set of terminations to the infinitives ; and it is therefore
very regular. There are only ten irregular futures, and these
add the regular endings to the stems given below in connec-
tion with the first person. They are as follows :
Future.
Infinitive
Future.
Infinitive.
Cabré,
caber,
to contain.
Querré,
querer.
to wish.
Diré,
decir,
to sa7.
Sabré,
saber.
to know.
Haré,
hacer.
to do.
Saldré,
salir.
to go out.
Podré,
poder.
to be able.
Valdré,
valer.
to be worth.
Pondré,
poner.
to place, to
put.
Vendré,
venir.
to come.
110. The DEFINITE ABTiCLE, always feminine in this case
as agreeing with hora^ hour, understood, must be used before
numerals indicating the hour of the day, and the word 0* clock
is never translated into Spanish ; as,
Á las tres de la tarde. I At three o'clock in (of) the af ter-
I noon.
111. NocHE (evening or night), commences at sundown ;
so that evening and night are both translated into Spanish
by noche.
112. The conjunction si, when conditional, does not re-
quire a subjunctive in Spanish as it does in English, unless
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXIII. 109
the latter be followed by should^ as will be seen in the proper
place ; in all other cases, si is followed by the present indica-
tive ; as,
Si V. tiene papel, % escribirá t | If you have paper, will you write t
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. i Cuándo principiará V. á escribir sus ejercicios ? Prin-
cipiaré mañana.
2. i Á qué hora acabará V. ? Acabaré á las diez y media.
3. Alejandro, i qué quieres ser, abogado ó escritor ? No seré
ni abogado ni escritor, seré comerciante.
4. Señorita, ¿ quiere V. bailar una polca ? Gracias, caballero,
no bailaré, porque estoy muy cansada.
5. i Bailará V. la próxima ? Sí, señor, con mucho gusto.
6. i Practicará V. el piano hoy ? No, señor, hoy no tengo
tiempo ; pero practicaré mañana por la mañana.
7. i ftné hará V. mañana ? Mañana por la mañana escribiré
mis ejercicios y practicaré el español con mi hermano.
8. i <^ué días toma V. lección de piano ? Los lunes y viernes.
9. ¿ A qué hora tomará V. su lección mañana ? Á las once
y cuarto.
10. i Irá V. á mi casa en el campo ? Iré pasado mañana y
tendré el gusto de pasar el día con V.
11. i Bailaremos en su casa de V. ? Sí, señor, bailaremos, can-
taremos y practicaremos el español toda la noche.
12. i En dónde pasará V. mañana la noche ? La pasaré con
mis amibos los señores Martínez y su familia.
13. ¿ Á qué hora irán Vds. allá ? Iremos á las siete de la
noche.
14. i Hasta qué hora estarán Vds. ? Hasta la una y media.
15. i Estará V. mañana por la mañana en su cuarto ? Estaré
hasta las nueve y diez minutos.
16. i Es triste su hermano de V. ? No, señora, no es triste ;
pero está triste.
17. ¿ Es V. feliz ? Soy felicísimo ; pero no estoy contento esta
tarde.
18. i Es V. mayor que su hermano ? No, señora, soy el menor
de toda la familia.
19. ¿ Quién es el mayor ? Juan es el mayor.
20. i Sale V. de casa temprano ? Salgo tempranísimo.
Digitized
by Google
lio LUSSON XXIII.
21. ¿ Á qué hora ? Salgo á las ocho y media.
22. i Salió V. ayer tan temprano ? No, señor, ayer salí más
tarde ; pero hoy he salido temprano.
23. ¿ Á qué hora saldrá Y. mañana ? Mañana saldré á la una
de la tarde.
24. ¿ Para quién escribe V. una carta ? Escribo al abogado,
por el pobre Juan, que lo necesita para un negocio.
25. ¿ Partirá V. mañana para la Habana ? No, señor, no par-
tiré hasta la semana próxima.
26. ¿ Es este caballo muy fuerte ? Es fortísimo ; pero ese que
está ahí es más fuerte y el que está allí al otro lado es el más
fuerte.
EXERCISE.
1. When will you commence to study music ? I desire to
commence next month. .
2. Do you know how* to dance ? I do not dance very well ;
but I am going to take lessons soon.
3. Do you study in the morning or in the afternoon ? I
study in the morning.
4. At what o'clock do you take your lessons ? At a quarter
to three in the afternoon (tardé),
5. Does your teacher ' come so late ? Yes, he has a great
many pupils this year.
6. Will you dance a waltz' Miss ? Thank you, sir, I danced
so much the night before last that I am tired.
7. Then it will be better to talk. I shall talk with much
pleasure.
8. When will your cousin write his exercise? He will
write it to-morrow morning.
9. At what time do you receive your newspapers ? I receive
them every day at eight o'clock in the morning.
10. Mr. Louis, will you come and dine at my house ? I shall
be very happy to go with you.
11. How did you spend the evening at your friend's ? Very
well ; his wife (lady) is most amiable.
12. Has not she travelled in Europe ? No, sir ; but they spoke
last night of travelling very soon.
13. Is their family large ? No, they have no children.
14. Does not your friend speak Spanish very well ? Yes, sir,
he sometimes even passes for a Spaniard.
* Sow is not used in Spanish in such cases.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXIV.
Ill
15. Did you practise much with him ? No ; his cousin speaks
French very well, and so we spoke that language all the evening.
16. Where will you spend this evening ? I do not know ; but
the day after to-morrow we shall go to your house.
17. Thank you I then I shall be more than happy ; I shall be
most happy.
18. How many seconds make a minute ? Sixty.
19. How many minutes make an hour ? Sixty minutes ?
20. And how many hours has a day ? A day has twenty-four
hours, a week seven days, a month four weeks, and a year twelve
months.
21. Peter, what o'clock is it ? It is half-past two.
22. Then I am going to take my lesson : will you come ? No,
thank you ; I wish to read this morning's paper.
23. Until what hour will you be engaged ? I shall finish at
one.
24. Peter! Sir!
25. Has the tailor finished my vest ? Yes, sir, here he is with
the vest and the coat.
26. When will the shoemaker make my boots ? He will make
them by next Tuesday.
27. Have you any business in Philadelphia ? Yes, sir, I am
writing the history of Louis XVI., for a gentleman of that city.
28. Mr. Henry, are you happy ? Yes, sir, thank you, I am
very happy ; but I am not very contented this evening.
29. Why are you not contented ? Because my father has not
written to me this week.
LESSON XXIV.
FUTUBE PERFECT.
Habré escrito.
Habrás escrito.
Habrá escrito.
Habremos escrito.
Habréis escrito.
Habrán escrito.
Coser.
Lavar.
Barrer.
Pasearse.
I shall have \
Thou wilt have >• written.
He will have )
We shall have \
You will have > written.
They will have )
To sew.
To wash.
To sweep.
To walk (take a walk).
Digitized
by Google
112
LESSON xxir.
Dedal.
Thimble.
Aguja.
Needle.
Hilo.
Thread.
Primavera.
Spring.
Verano.
Summer.
Acción.
Action.
Invierno.
Winter.
Nación.
Nation.
Otoño.
Autumn (Fall).
Afectación.
Affectation.
Enero.
January.
Navegación.
Navigation.
Febrero.
February.
Agitación.
Agitation.
Marzo.
March.
Aprobación.
Approbation.
Abril.
April.
Aceptación.
Acceptation.
Mayo.
May.
Atracción.
Attraction.
Junio.
June.
Conversación.
Conversation.
Julio.
July.
Dirección.
Direction.
Agosto.
August
Circunspección. Circumspection
Septiembre.
September.
Clasificación.
Classification.
Octubre.
October.
Colección.
Collection.
Noviembre.
November.
Combinación.
Combination.
Diciembre.
December.
Comparación.
Comparison.
Composición.
Composition.
Eeputación.
Eeputation.
COMPOÍ
3ITI0N.
Habré escrito mi lección antes de ir
á casa del profesor.
Babré acabado á las diez.
El abogado acaba de hablar.
Yo acabo de estudiar mi lección.
La lavandera habrá acabado de la-
var á las cuatro.
¿ Á cuántos estamos t
Estamos á seis.
¿ Qué día del mes es hoyf
Es el primero.
i Qué fecha tiene esa carta?
El primero de Enero de mil ocho-
cientos sesenta y seis.
I En qué año fué V. á México t
Fui en Septiembre de mil ochocien-
tos cincuenta y dos.
i Irá V. este verano á Europa f
No, señor, iré en el invierno.
i Paseará V. mucho esta primaveral
No, señor, trabajaré mucho.
I shall have written my lessons be-
fore going to the professor's.
I shall have finished at ten o clock.
The lawyer has just spoken.
I have just studied my lesson.
The washerwoman will have finished
washing at four o'clock
What day of the month is it f
It is the sixth.
What day of the month is to-day f
It is the first.
What is the date of that letter f
January 1st, 1866.
In what year did you go to Mexico!
I went in September, 1852.
Will you go to Europe this summer t
No, sir, I shall go in the winter.
Will you walk much this spring t
No, sir, I shall work a great deaL
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXIV. 118
EXPLANATION.
113. The FUTURE PERFECT aflSrms something future that
will have taken place before or at the time of some other
future action or event or state expressed in the sentence ;
and is composed of the future of the verb haber ^ to have, and
the past participle of another verb ; as,
Habré escrito mi ejercicio antes de
ir á casa del profesor.
Habré acabado á las diez.
I shall have written my exercise be-
fore going to the professor's.
I shall have finished at ten o'clock.
114. Acabar de is employed before an infinitive in the
sense of to kavejust^ and the infinitive is translated in Eng-
lish as a past participle ; as,
Acaba de hablar. I He has Just spoken.
Acabo de estudiar. I I have just studied.
116. In order to facilitate the acquisition of words, we
shall give now and then a few rules, with the help of which
the learner will be enabled to convert several thousand Eng-
lish words into Spanish; and, although we have proposed
not to introduce many new words or elements at one time,
these observations will enable the pupil to learn a greater
number of words with little or no diflSculty at all, from the
striking resemblance that those words bear to the English
ones.
The greater part of English nouns ending in tion are ren-
dered into Spanish by changing the letter t into c ; as, appro-
bation, aprobación. Those ending in sion do not undergo
any orthographical change ; as, provision, provisión ; those
ending in ssion^ drop one s to form the Spanish word ; as,
possession, posesión. Those which end in ction, change the
t to Cj thus leaving double cj as diction, dicción. It is to be
observed that the only consonants that can be doubled in
Spanish are c, n and r. All nouns of the above termina-
tion are feminine, and their last syllable must have a written
accent.
116. The days of the month are all counted in Spanish by
the cardinal numbers, preceded by the article, except the first
10
Digitized
by Google
114 LESSON XXIV.
day ; and there are several forms of asking the day of the
month ; e. g,j
i Qué día del mes tenemos f ^ I
I Qué día es hoy f ( What day oí the month is it f
I Á cuántos estamos del mes
There is no preference between these ; but the answer
must be made in the same form as the question ; as,
I Qué día tenemos f
Tenemos el seis.
¿Á cuántos estamos f
Estamos á dos.
I Qué día es hoy t
Es el primero.
What day oí the month is it f
It is the sixth.
What day oí the month is it f
It is the second.
What day oí the month is to-day f
It is the first.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ¿ Habrá V. acabado de escribir su lección á las diez y me-
dia ? No sé ; pero la habré acabado antes de ir á casa del pro-
fesor.
2. t Ha hablado aquel abogado ? Sí, señor, acaba de hablar
éste.
3. ¿ Ha hablado bien ? Muy bien, pero con afectación.
4. ¿ Hará V. una buena composición para la lección próxima ?
Sí, señor, si tengo tiempo, la haré.
5. ¿ Lava bien su lavandera de V. ? Lava muy bien.
6. ¿ Adonde envía V. sus niños ? Los envío á pasearse con
la criada.
7. i Adonde ? Á la plaza de Madison.
8. ¿ Está cerca de su casa de V". ? Está muy cerca.
9. i Barrió el criado ayer mi cuarto ? No, señor, no lo barrió
ayer pero lo ha barrido hoy.
10. ¿ Lo barrerá mañana ? Lo habrá barrido antes de las
nueve.
11. i Muchacho, ¿ está el sastre en la sastrería ? No, señor,
acaba de salir.
12. ¿ Á qué hora principiaron Vds. á bailar ? Principiamos á
las diez de la noche.
13. ¿ Desea V. practicar el inglés ? Sí, señor, si tengo tiempo
principiaré pasado mañana.
14. ¿ Dónde está su amigo ? Está viajando por Francia.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXIV. 115
15. i Ama su hermana de Y/ mucho á sus hijos ? Si, señor, los
ama muchísimo.
16. i Saldrá V. muy pronto para Europa ? Quiero salir ma-
ñana.
17. ¿ Sabe V. bailar el vals ? No, señor, pero sé bailar el rigo-
dón y la polca.
18. ¿ De dónde vienen Vds. ? Venimos de Francia, y vamos
para Filadelfia.
19. ¿ Quiere V. salir á pasearse ? Muy bien, iremos al Parque
Central.
20. i Quién lavó estos pañuelos ? Están muy mal lavados.
Su lavandera de V. los lavó.
21. ¿ Dónde pasó V. el verano ? Lo pasé en el campo. ¿ Y el
invierno ? En la ciudad.
22. ¿ Cuáles son los meses más alegres del año ? Los de la
primavera.
23. i Sabe V. la dirección de la casa de su hermano de V. ? Sí,
señor, calle Catorce, número ciento veinte y cinco.
24 ¿ A qué hora comen Vds. ? Comemos á las tres de la
tarde.
26. ¿ (^uó hora tiene V. ? Tengo las dos y veinte.
2^, i A qué hora salieron sus hermanas para el parque ? Sa-
lieron á las seis y media de la mañana.
27. ¿ Y á qué hora volvieron ? Á las once menos cuarto.
28. I Buenos días I— Buenos días.— ¿ Está V. bueno ? Muy
bueno, gracias. ¿ Y su familia de V. ? Muy buena, gracias.
29. ¿ Baila V. la polca ? No, señor, estoy principiando á
aprenderla.
EXERCISE.
1. When will your uncle have finished his letter ? He will
have finished it at eight o'clock.
2. When will you have your letter written ? I shall have it
written before going to the professor's.
. 3. When will the notary make the conveyance (writing) ?
He has just made it.
4. Will your servant have swept my room before the lesson
hour to-morrow ? Yes, sir, she will have swept it at six o'clock.
5. What day of the month is it ? It is the thirteenth.
6. Does your washerwomau come to wash in your house ?
She does not, but she washes very well.
Digitized
by Google
116 LESSON XXIV.
7. How many lessons do those gentlemen take every month ?
They take four every week ; that makes sixteen every month.
8. Which are the best months for walking? The three
months of spring, and the three of autumn.
9. Where are you coming (do you come) from ? I am come
from walking.
10. Will you give * me a needle and thread and a thimble to
sew ? Here is the needle ; I am going to look for the thread and
thimble.
11. In what year did your sister Margaret go to England ?
She went in June, 1866.
12. What is the date of that letter ? Madrid, 7th July, 1866.
13. Will you go to Europe this summer ? No, madam, I shall
not go before next spring.
14. Is December a good month for travelling ? No, it is one
of the worst in the year.
16. How did you {plural) spend the day yesterday? We
walked in Central Park.
16. Did you walk the whole day ? No, we walked until twelve
o'clock, and then we read and played on the piano.
17. Did not you pass the afternoon at Mr. Martinez's ? No,
we did not go out all (in all) the evening, Margaret was a little
sick.
18. Do you know which are the longest months ? Yes ; they
are January, March, May, July, August, October, and Decem-
ber.
19. And which are the shortest ? April, Jime, September, and
November.
20. But what do you do with February ? February is the
shortest of all ; it has but twenty-eight days.
21. Will you walk much this spring ? No, miss, I shall work
a great deal.
22. When will the tailor sew my vest ? He will sew it to-
morrow evening.
23. Has not the lawyer spoken ? He has just spoken.
24. Until what hour did he speak ? Until half -past one.
25. Did he speak in Spanish ? No, he spoke in French to-day ;
but to-morrow he will speak in Spanish.
2^. Do you not wish to practise Italian ? Yes, sir, and I shall
practise the day after to-morrow, if I have time.
* Dar,
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXV.
117
27. If your teacher comes to-day, will you take a lesson ? I
shall take it if he comes.
28. Does he pronounce well ? He pronounces very well, but
with some affectation.
29. How many Spanish words do you know that end in ción ?
I know very many.
30. Which are they ? Conversation, approbation, agitation,
complication, classification, intention, desertion, circmnspection,
nation, navigation, and very many others.
Conocer,
Conozco.
Conoces.
Conoce.
Conocemos.
Conecéis.
Conocen.
Conocí.
Conociste.
Conoció.
Conocimos.
Conocisteis.
Conocieron.
LESSON XXV.
I To know, to be acquainted with.
PEBSENT INDICATIVE.
I know.
Thou knowest.
He knows.
We know.
You know.
They know.
PBETERIT.
I knew.
Thou knewest.
He knew.
We knew.
You knew.
They knew.
Conoceré.
Conocerás.
Conocerá.
Conoceremos,
Conoceréis.
Conocerán.
He conocido.
PERFECT.
I shall know.
Thou wilt know.
He will know.
We shall know.
You will know.
They will know.
I have known.
Digitized
by Google
118
LESSON XXV.
PUTUEE
PERFECT.
Habré conocido.
1
I shall have known.
1
Gozar.
To enjoy.
Prometer.
To promise.
Una vez.
Once.
Dos veces, &c.
Twice.
Alto.
High, loud.
Bajo.
Low.
Siempre.
Always.
Nunca.
Never.
Jamás.
Never.
Ya.
Already, yet {interrogatively)
Ya (loith a negative).
No longer.
Aún. Aun.
Stm, yet. Even.
Todavía.
Still, yet, even.
Á menudo.
Often.
Demasiado.
Too, too much.
Bastante.
Enough, pretty.
Frío. Cold (the).
Vergüenza. Shame.
Calor. Heat.
Eazón. Reason.
Miedo. Fear.
Sed. Thirst.
Sueño. Sleep.
Lástima. Pity.
Dolor. Pain.
Salud. Health.
Valor. Courage, worth, value.
Moda. Fashion.
Maestro. Master, teacher.
Maestra. Misti^ss (school).
Un catarro. A cold.
COMPOÍ
Hambre. Hunger.
3ITI0N.
i Conoce V. á ese hombre t
No lo conozco ; pero sé quien lo co-
noce.
I Por qué no aprende V. sus leccio-
nes!
Conozco que he hecho mal en no
aprenderlas ; pero prometo saber-
las para mañana.
I Sabe V. francés f
No, señor, pero voy á aprenderlo;
i conoce Y. un buen maestro f
Do you know that mant
I do not know him ; but I know who
knows him.
Why do you not learn your lessons!
I know that I have done wrong in
not learning them ; but I promise
to know them for to-morrow.
Do you know French t
No, sir, but I am going to learn it ;
do you know a good teacher f
Digitized
by Google
/
LJESSON XX r.
lid
(Estudia y. aún (todavía) el español f
Ya no lo estadio.
(Sabe V. hablarlo ya!
Todavía no.
(Ha principiado ya su hermano de
V. sus lecciones f
Ya ha principiado; pero no las
aprenderá jamás, porque no es-
tudia bastante.
(Cuántas veces ha estado Y. este
mesen el teatro!
He estado una vez ; pero el mes pa-
sado estuve tres veces.
(Tiene V, miedo de su maestro!
No tengo miedo de él ; pero tengo
vergüenza de él.
(De quién tiene Y. lástima!
Tengo lástima de ese pobre hombre.
(Tiene V. calor ó frío!
No tengo ni calor ni frío; tengo
hambre 7 sed.
(Tiene razón el abogado!
El abogado no tiene razón.
(Tiene él razón alguna vez !
Tiene razón algunas veces, pero no
siempre.
( Hará V. eso otra vez !
No lo haré jamás (nunca).
(Amará Y. á su amigo!
Lo amaré por siempre jamás.
(Ha leído Y. jamás ese libro!
Nanea jamás lo haré.
(Tiene su madre de Y. buena salud!
Sí, sefior, goza de muy buena salud.
(Tiene Y. hambre ó sed !
No tengo ni hambre ni sed, tengo
suefio.
Do you still study Spanish!
I study it no longer.
Do you know how to speak it al-
ready!
Not yet.
Has your brother commenced his
lessons yet !
He has (already) commenced; but
he will never learn them, for he
does not study enough.
How many times have you been in
the theatre this month !
I have been once ; but last month I
was there three times.
Are you afraid of your master !
I am not afraid of him ; but I am
ashamed before him.
On whom do you take pity!
I take pity on that poor man.
Are you warm or cold !
I am D either warm nor cold ; I am
hungry and thirsty.
Is the lawyer right !
The lawyer is not right.
Is he right sometimes!
He is right sometimes, but not al-
ways.
Will you do that again (another
time) !
I will never do it.
Will you love your friend !
I shall love him always (for ever).
Have you ever read that book ?
I shall never do it.
Is your mother in good health (has
your mother good health) ?
Yes, sir, she enjoys very good health.
Are you hungry or thirsty !
I am neither hungry nor thirsty, I '
am sleepy.
EXPLANATION.
117. Saber, to know, and conocer, to be acquainted with.
—It must be observed, in order not to confound these two
Digitized
by Google
120 LESSON XXV.
verbs, that saber is employed to signify the act of knowing,
being informed of, having learned, or having a knowledge of
something ; whereas conocer is used to express the fact of
being acquainted with, perceiving, or being able to distin-
guish persons or things ; as,
I Sabe V. quién conoce á este hom- 1 Do you know who knows that man f
bre? I
118. AÚN, YA, Todavía. — The adverb aún indicates that
the subject of the sentence continues in the same state as be-
fore ; quite the reverse with the adverb ya, which always sig-
nifies discontinuancey completion of a former state (expressed
or understood) ; e. g.j
I Escribe V. aún f I Do you write yet f
No escribo ya. 1 1 do not write any longer.
Todavía^ yet, still, is synonymous with aún ; as.
Está trabajando todavía (or aún), \ He is still working.
Once, twice, &c., are rendered in Spanish by una vez, dos
veces, &c.
Miedo, valor, vergüenza, lástima, tiempo, take the prepo-
sition de after them ; as,
Tengo miedo de salir. 1 1 am afraid to go out.
Tengo vergüenza de ese hombre. 1 1 am ashamed of that man.
119. When in English the verb to be precedes the adjec-
tives hungry, thirsty, afraid, ashamed, right, wrong, warm,
cold, sleepy, it is translated by the Spanish verb tener and the
corresponding substantive ; as.
I Tiene V. miedo!
I Tiene V. sed I
¿Tiene V. calor t
i Tiene V. ícÍííÍ
Are you afraid f
Are you thirsty t
Are you warm f
Are you cold f
120. Jamas and nunca may be used indiscriminately, or
ono for the other ; as,
JamUB (or nunca) lo he conocido. 1 1 have never been acquainted with
him.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXY. 121
Sometimes they are used together, to give more energy to
the expression ; as,
Nv/nca jamás lo haré. | Never, no never, shall I do so.
But jamás has the peculiarity of being used after the
words jpor siempre and joara siempre^ for ever ; where, instead
of being a negative, it affirms, meaning eternally ; as,
Le amaré j9or siempre jamás, 1 1 will love him forever.
Sometimes it is used alone interrogatively, meaning ever ;
as,
4 Ha leído V, jamás ese libro f I Have you ever read that book f
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Dónde conoció V. á su amigo ? Le conocí en París el in-
vierno pasado.
2. ¿ Sabe Y. quién conoce á ese hombre ? Mi padre lo conoce
muy bien.
3. ¿ Cuándo conoceré á su hermano de V. ? En el otoño lo
conocerá V.
4. i Ha conocido V. en Londres á ese caballero ? Sí, señor,
lo conocí allí el año pasado.
5. i Cómo está su hijo de Y. ? Malo ; no goza de buena salud.
6. ¿ Bailó V. mucho en el baile de anoche ? Sí, señor, mu-
chísimo.
7. ¿ Quién es ese caballero ? Es un escritor de grande repu-
tación.
8. ¿ Tienen mucha aceptación sus obras ? Tienen muchísima.
9. ¿ Sabe V. lo que han prometido sus amigas de V. ? No lo
sé. — Han prometido estudiar sus lecciones.
10. ¿ Vendrá Y. mañana á comer con nosotros ? No, señor, he
prometido comer con mis amigos los alemanes.
11. l Habla ya español su primo de V. ? No lo habla aún, y
no lo hablará jamás (nunca), porque no estudia bastante.
12. i Barrió V. mi cuarto ? No, señor, pero prometo barrerlo
mañana temprano. ,
13. i Cuántas veces prometió V. buscar mi sombrero ? Jamás
lo prometí.
14. ¿ No desea V. ir ya á su país ? Lo deseo muchísimo.
16. ¿ Sale V. ya á pasear todos los días ? No salgo sino algu-
nas veces.
Digitized
by Google
122 LESSON XXV.
16. ¿ Llevó V. ya mi carta al correo ? Todavía no la he
llevado.
17. ¿ No ha estado Y. jamás en París ? No, señor, jamás he
estado.
18. ¿ No ha leído V. jamás la historia de los Estados Unidos ?
Sí, la he leído uDa vez.
19. ¿ Habla bien el abogado ? Habla bien, x)ero muy bajo.
20. i Comprende V. ya el español ? Si hablan alto, y despacio,
sí, señor.
21. ¿ Tiene V. bastante que hacer ? Tengo demasiado.
22. i Cuántos años tiene V. ? Tengo veinte y uno.
28. i Cuándo vio V. por última vez á su familia ? M día seis
de Septiembre del año de mil ochocientos cincuenta y cinco.
24. i Cuándo conoció V. al pianista ? Lo conocí ayer por pri-
mera vez.
25. ¿ Han salido sus hermanas para el campo ? Todavía no,
pero saldrán muy pronto.
26. i Qué hace su padre de Yds. ? Está gozando del buen
tiempo en el campo.
27. ¿ Qué tiene su niño de V. ? Tiene frío y sueño.
28. i Tienen ellos hambre ? No, señor, tienen sed,
29. ¿ Tiene V. valor para hercerlo ? Sí, señor, i)ero tengo ver-
güenza.
30. ¿ No tiene V. lástima de esa mujer ? Sí, señor, tengo lás-
tima de ella, porque no tiene bueaa salud.
31. i Tiene sueño su madre de V. ? No, señor, pero está muy
cansada.
EXERCISE.
1. Do you know that man ? Yes, sir, that gentleman is my
uncle.
2. Are you still writing ? No, I am no longer writing.
3. Has Charles come from the country yet ? No, he has not
come yet.
4. Have you {plural) ever read the History of Civilization
by Guizot ? No, but we shall read it next spring.
5. Are not you ashamed of not having read the History of
the United States ? I am not ashamed, because I am too young
to read history.
6. When will you commence to read it ? I shall commence
next year.
7. Very well ; it is a useful study {estudio).
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXV. 123
8. Does your aunt enjoy good health ? Yes, sir, thank you,
she enjoys very good health.
9. Are you cold, madam ? No, thank you, I wish to go out
a minute, because I am very warm in this room.
10. Is it ten o'clock yet ? No, it is but a quarter past eight.
11. Who is that gentleman to whom your cousin spoke last
n^ght at the concert ? I do not know him.
12. And that gentleman who came this morning to your
house, who is he ? He is a Spanish writer who enjoys a great
reputation.
13. Has he written many works ? He has already written
many books, and he is going to write a history of Spain.
14. Do you know Sir Walter Scott's works ? Yes, I have read
them all.
15. Are not they much esteemed in Europe (have they not
much estimation) ? Yes, very much.
16. When did your brother become acquainted with his (el)
Spanish friend ? Last year, in London.
17. Are you sleepy, young ladies ? Yes, we are very tired,
thirsty and sleepy (tener sed y sueño),
18. Will you take a little wine ? No, thank you, we never
take wine.
19. Does your mother know Emanuel's address (direction)?
Yes, here it is in this letter.
20. Will you read it ? With much pleasure. Emanuel Mar-
tinez, Esq., 113 Broadway.* A thousand thanks.
21. Did your cousin's (fern.) friends commence their lessons
the other day ? Yes, they commenced, and are much pleased
(content) with them.
22. Why does the lawyer speak so low ? I do not know.
23. Does not he speak as low as his brother loud ? He speaks
low from (by) affectation.
24. Which of your servants (fern,) sews the best ? None of
them sews.
25. How many conjugations has the Spanish language?
Three regular (regular) conjugations.
26. Have you ever been in Philadelphia ? I have never been
there yet ; but I shall go next year.
♦ The nearest approach which Spanish offers to the title Esquire is
Señar Don^ before the Christian and surname ; as, Sefior Don Juan Oui-
terMf John Gaiteras, Esq.
Digitized
by Google
124
LESSON XXVL
27. Did your father write the letter for Peter yesterday ? No,-
but he .promised to write it the day after to-morrow.
28. Has your shoemaker enough to do ? Yes, sir, he has too
much to do.
29. Will you always love your brothers and sisters ? Yes, I
shall love them forever.
30. Do you not pity that man ? I do pity him, for he has
nothing to do.
31. Have you money enough to buy a house ? Yes, sir, I have
enough.
Dar.
Doy, das, da.
Damos, dais, dan.
LESSON XXVI.
I To give.
PRESENT INDICATIVE.
I give, thou givest, he gives.
We give, you give, they give.
DÍ, diste, dio.
Dimos, disteis, dieron.
Daré, darás, dará.
Daremos, daréis, darán.
He dado, has dado, &c.
PRETERIT.
I gave, thou gavest, he gave.
We gave, you gave, they gave.
FUTURE.
I shall give, thou wilt give, he
will give.
We shall give, you will give,
they will give.
PERFECT.
I have given, thou hast given,
&c.
Habré dado, &c.
Ganar.
Sing. Nom. Yo.
l8t Obj. Me.
2d Obj. A mi.
FUTURE PERFECT.
I I shall have given, &c.
To gain, earn, win.
I.
Me, or to me. ;
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXVL
125
Plur, Nom.
I8t0hj.
M Obj.
Sing. Nom.
l8t Obj.
2d Obj.
Plur, Nom,
l8t Obj.
U Obj.
Sing. Nom.
l8t Obj.
2d Obj.
Plur. Nom.
l8t Obj.
2d Obj.
Sing. Nom.
l8t Obj.
2d Obj.
Plur. Nom.
l8t Obj.
2d Obj.
Nosotros.
Nos.
Á nosotros.
Tú.
Te.
Áti.
Vosotros.
Os.
Á vosotros.
Él.
Le, lo.
Áél.
Ellos.
Los, les.
A ellos.
Ella.
La, le.
Á ella.
Ellas.
Las, les.
Á ellas.
Sing, and Plur,
l8t Obj. Se.
2d Obj. Á sí.
Neuter Form.
Nom. Ello.
l8t Obj. Lo.
2d Obj. Á ello.
We.
Us, or to us.
Thou.
Thee, or to thee.
Ye, you.
Ye, you, or to you.
He.
Him, or to him.
They.
Them, to them.
She.
Her, to her.
They.
Them, to them.
Himself, herself, itself, them-
selves ; or to himself, to her-
self, to itself, to themselves.
It.
It.
To it
COMPOSITION.
I Conoce Y. á aquellas señoras f
seo conocerlas.
Conociéndolas las amará V.
De-
I Me promete V, llevarme á su casa!
Doy á V. mi palabra.
¿ Qué le dio á V. mi primo I
Quiso darme unas flores ; pero 70 no
quise recibirlas.
Do you know those ladies t I desire
to know them.
On knowing them you will love
them.
Do you promise me to take me to
their house t
I will give you my word.
What did my cousin give you t
He wanted to give me some flowers ;
but I would not receive them.
Digitized
by Google
126
LESSON XXVI.
I Quieres venir conmigo al teatro f
No iré contigo, porque mi padre
quiere llevarme consigo.
I Son estas flores para ti f
No son para mi ; son para Y.
Yo te necesito.
Ella nos habló en el teatro.
Él me amará con el tiempo.
Nosotros le hablamos en el concierto.
Yo le escribí una carta.
Ella les dio un libro.
Wilt thou come with me to the the-
atre!
I will not go with thee, because my
father wants to take me with him.
Are these flowers for theef
They are not for me, they are for you,
I want thee.
She spoke to us in the theatre.
He will love me in time.
We spoke to him at the concert.
I wrote him a letter.
She gave them a book.
EXPLANATION.
121. Subject or Nominative. — To what lias already been
said, in Lesson X, relative to pronouns as subjects or nomina-
tive eases to verbs, we shall here simply add, that they may
at all times precede their verbs, unless the latter be in the
imperative mode, or be used interrogatively ; examples :
Yo estudio.
TÜ escribes.
Vengan ellos,
I Lee ella f
I study.
Thou writest
Let them come.
Does she read.
122. Personal Pronouns. — In Spanish there is a pecul-
iarity to be observed among the personal pronouns : that is,
that they have two objective cases ; one of which can never
be used with a preposition, and the other never without one.
123. The Objective Case, when not preceded by a prepo-
sition, is affixed to infinitives, imperatives, and present parti-
ciples; as.
AmarZa.
Amémos/o.
Amándo¿o«.
Habiéndola amado.
C6rapraZe« algo.
Habiéndolos hallado.
To love her.
Let us love him.
Loving them.
Having loved her.
Buy them something.
Having found them^
124. In the imperative mode, and in the subjunctive used
hortatively, the verb drops the final letter in the first and
second persons plural, when followed by nos or os ; as,
Amámono8 instead of amémosnos, I We loved each other.
Amáoa instead of amados, \ Love each other.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXVI. 127
In the first case, this is for the sake of enphony ; and in
the second the d is dropped, in order that the imperative may
not be confounded with the past participle. Nevertheless,
we say idosj go, and not ios ; but this is the only exception
to the rule.
126. The objective case may sometimes elegantly follow
the verb, even when the verb is in the indicative mode ; as,
Llevóme al* teatro. I He took me to the theatre.
126. When one verb governs another in the infinitive
mode, the objective case referring to the second verb may be
placed either before the governing verb, or after the governed
one; as,
Quiero llevarlo, or lo quiero llevar. I I wish to take him.
127. Pbeposition'S, when expressed, always govern the
seco9id objective case ; as,
Para mi. For me.
Sin ti. Without thee.
Hacia ellos. Toward them.
128. Mi, TI, SI, when preceded by con, take go after them,
and are joined to the preposition ; as.
Conmigo.
Contigo.
Conmigo.
With me.
With thee.
With him, her, them, it.
129. Ektbe is used with the nominative case of the first
person singular, in this expression,
Untre tú y yo. I Between thee and me ;
but in every other instance it governs the second objective
case; as,
Entre sL I Between themselves.
Entre nosotros. | Between us.
180. The second objective case is always used after com-
paratives; as,
Te quiero máe que áél. | I love thee better than him.
Digitized
by Google
128 LESSON XXVI.
131. When in English the objective case of the first or
second person is the object of the verb, or of the preposition
to, expressed or understood, we use the first case ; as.
Yo te necesito.
Ella nos habló.
El me amará.
I want thee.
She spoke to us.
He will love me.
132. In Lesson X. we explain the objective case of the
third person when it is the object of the English verb ; but
if the third person in English be governed by the preposition
to^ expressed or understood, we render it by te, les^ for both
genders; as.
Nosotros le hablamos.
Yo le escribí.
Ella lea dio.
We spoke to him.
I wrote to her.
She gave them.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. i Qué me dará V. ? Le daré á V. las gracias.
2. i Qué les dio V. á su niños ? Les di veinte centavos.
3. ¿ Me darás algo por mi trabajo ? Algo te daré si lo haces
bien y si no, nada.
4. i Qué cosa os dieron en casa de tu primo ? Nos dieron
chocolate.
5. ¿ Qué le has prometido á tu prima ? Bailar hoy con ella.
6. l Cómo seremos más felices ? Amándonos los unos á los
otros.
7. ¿ Cuándo vendrá él con nosotros ? Vendrá mañana tem-
prano.
8. ¿ Cuándo saldrá V. conmigo á paseo ? Tendré ese gusto
pasado mañana.
9. ¿ Quién irá conmigo al teatro esta noche ? Yo iré contigo.
10. ¿ Dónde hablaste á mis amigos ? Les hablé en el Parque
Central.
11. ¿ Les leyó V. mi carta ? No, les leí la de su hermana de V.
12. ¿ Me envió V. los libros ? No, señor, los envié á su her-
mano de V.
13. i Cómo supo V. de sus amigos ? Escribiéndoles.
14. i Cómo conoció V. á su amiga ? Bailando con ella en casa
de su hermano.
15. i Qué le prometió V. á su prima ? Le prometí llevarla á
la ópera.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXVL 129
16. i Nos hablaron ellos alguna yez ? Nos hablaron una ó
dos veces en el paseo.
17. ¿ Por qué no les habló V. ? Porque no los conozco bien.
18. ¿ Qué le han escrito á V. sus amigos ? Que vendrán á ha-
blamos.
19. ¿ Quieres salir conmigo á paseo ? Sí, saldré contigo.
20. ¿ Cuándo iremos á casa de tus amigos ? Iremos hoy, por-
que ellos tendrán mucho gusto en conocerte.
21. ¿ Me pasará V. el pan ? Con mucho gusto. — Gracias.
22. ¿ Qué le prometiste á tu prima ? Le prometí ir á su casa
mañana y llevarle un pañuelo de seda.
23. i Cuándo le habló V. ? Le hablé anoche en casa de su
madre.
24. l (^iere V. venir á pasear ? Mejor será estarnos aquí.
25. i A qué vienen Vds. ? Venimos á hablarle á V.
26. i Cuándo iremos al campo con nuestros amigos ? Iremos
TnañüTift,
27. i Cómo les ganó á Vds. la lavandera tanto dinero ? Laván-
donos los vestidos y trabajando mucho.
28. i Cuántas veces á la semana habla V. con sus amigos ?
Nos hablamos todos los días.
29. i Vendrá hoy su primo de V. á comer con nosotras ? Sí,
porque quiere conocerlas á Vds.
30. i Le dio V. los buenos días á su prima ? Le di los buenos
días ayer en la plaza y le hablé de V.
31. Le doy á V. las gracias. ¿ Tiene buena salud ahora ? Sí,
señora, está muy buena.
32. ¿ Le dio á V. los periódicos ? No, señora, pero prometió
mandarlos mañana.
EXERCISE.
1. What was * that you gave to your friend last night at the
theatre ? I gave him the second volume of Mr. Eomanos's new
work.
2. Why do not you give him the ñrst volume ? I have al-
ready given it to my cousin.
"3. Did not you promise last week to give me those two vol-
umes ? Yes ; and you shall have them the day after to-morrow.
4. Will you come with me to the country in the summer ?
I will go if you set out on the first of July.
* See the conjugation of the verb Sea, at the end of the book.
11
Digitized
by Google
130 LESSON XXVI.
6. Will you and your uncle come with us to walk this after-
noon ? This evening we have to go to the concert
6. When will you go out with us ? I do not know ; but I
think (that) to-morrow (creo que mañana),
7. Have you heard (sabido) from your father this week?
No ; but we heard from our brother John last week.
8. How often has he written to you from Boston ? We have
received seven or eight letters from him.
9. How much did that singer make (gain) in New York ?
Which one ? I do not know any singer.
10. Do not you know the singer who spent last week at your
uncle's in the country ? Yes ; but it was in Philadelphia that he
sang, not in New York.
11. Are you cold ? No, sir ; but I am hungry and thirsty.
12. When will you take Emanuel to see your children ? I
shall take him to-morrow. — They will be pleased to make his ac-
quaintance.
13. How many languages does that gentleman speak ? He
speaks only his own ; but his cousin speaks five.
14. Which are they ? He speaks French, German, Spanish,
English, and Italian.
15. How did he learn so many languages ? By studying the
grammar of each one of them (coda una de ellasX reading the
works of the best writers, and practising with the natives (natu-
ral).
16. Does he write all those languages as well as he speaks
them ? He writes them better than he speaks them.
17. Did not I see you (plural) speaking to the notary yester-
day in the park Í No, it was the day before yestenUy.
18. What has lie done iu that affair (negocio) of your
brotlier'sf He has done nothing yet; and us> he has to leave
town {la ciudad) this afternoon^ he will do nothing all this
wtjek*
19. Who is tli%> who danced so well last night at
your houi*e 'i lh> A * ter ? she is my cousin.
ífü^ Wlieíi íl¿ i ^ ¡end Mr. Pérez ? I saw him the
■ot, and we talked for more than
and concerts.
'rzlove last ; but we did not talk about
rhose house did you sob him ? At
LESSON XXVIL 181
^. At what o'clock did you go there ? I went at a quarter to
eight, and left at half-past ten.
23. Did you see many Mexicans there ? I only saw one : that
Mexican lawyer who has just written a history of his country.
24. Does he leave soon for Europe ? He wishes to set out next
week.
25. Did John write to his father the day before yesterday ?
Yes, and he has heard (saber) since that he set out last week for
France.
26. Has your sister read the books yet which she received
from Louisa last week ? Yes ; and she wishes to read them again
(otra vez) .
27. I shall see her this evening ; and if you wish (it) I shall
take them to her (se los).
28. Thank you. Have you much to do now ? No, I never
have much to do in summer.
29. Is Peter tired ? No ; but he is the most tiresome boy I
knew.
LESSON XXVII.
Decir. I To say, to tell.
PEESENT INDICATIVE.
Digo, dices, dice, decimos, ( I say, or tell, &c.
decís, dicen. I
Dije, dijiste, dijo, dijimos, I I said, or told, &c.
dijisteis, dijeron. |
FÜTÜEE.
Diré, dirás, dirá, diremos, I I shall or will say, or tell, &c.
diréis, dirán. I
PERFECT.
He dicho, has dicho. Sec. I I have said, or told, Sec.
FUTUEB PEBFEGT.
Habré dicho, &c. I I shall or will have said,
I told, &c.
Digitized
by Google
132
LUSSOJT XXVII.
Dispensar. )
Excusar. \
To excuse.
Perdonar.
To pardon.
Creer.
To believe, to think.
Ofender.
To offend.
•Llamar.
To call, to knock.
Enseñar.
To teach, to show.
Ahora.
Now.
Mismo (adverb).
Just, very.
Mismo.
Same, self.
Necesario.
Necessary.
Preciso.
Precise, needful.
Kegular.
Kegular, middling.
Parte. Despatch.
Ramillete. Bouquet
Estudio. Study.
Parte. Part.
Humor. Humor, disposition.
Falta. Fault, mistake.
Sujeto. A person, subject,
Esperanza. Hope.
topic.
Puerta. Door.
Asunto. Subject, business,
Noticia. News.
matter.
COMPO
3ITI0N.
Le compró un ramillete, y se lo
He bought her a bouquet, and sent
mandó.
it to her.
Les escribiré tres cartas, y se las
I shall write them three letters, and
mandaré.
send them to them.
Ella se lo ha prometido.
She has promised it to her.
¿Qué está V. haciendo con ese libro f
What are you doing with that book t
Estoy enseñándoselo á Manuel.
I am showing it to Emanuel.
¿Leleistelacarta!
Did you read the letter to him f
Ya se ía leí.
I did. (I read it to him already.)
Ella me lo dijo.
She told it to me.
Yo se lo di.
I gave it to him.
Mi madre me ama á mi.
My mother loves me.
Tu amigo te busca á ti.
Thy friend looks for thee.
Yo les di las noticias á ellos.
I told them the news.
Yo se las daré á V,
I will tell them to you.
Á ti te amo, or te amo á ti.
I love thee.
t Qué le ha dicho á F. su hermano f
What has your brother told youf
No me ha dicho nada.
He has told me nothing.
Digitized
by Google
LUSSON XXVIL
133
/ Le dije yo eso d F. f
V. no me lo dijo.
¿Se lo ha dicho éláV.f
Me lo ha dicho.
i Quiere Y. decir eso á sus amigos f
Quiero áeciraelo á ellos,
¿ Quién llama á la puerta f
Soy yo mismo.
¿ Tiene buen humor su amigo de V. f
Sí, señor, tiene buen humor cuando
le Tan bien los negocios.
4 Gana ese sujeto mucho en ese ne-
gocio!
Él no gana para si mismo; pero
gana para otros.
Tengo esperanza de que me per-
donará.
Did I tell you that f
You did not tell it to me.
Has he told it to you f
He has told it to me.
Will you tell your friends that t
I will tell it to them.
Who knocks at the doorf
It is I (myseli).
Has your frfend a good disposition!
Yes, sir, he is good humored when
business goes well with him.
Does that man make (or earn) much
in that business !
He does not make for himself ; but
he makes for others.
I have hopes he will pardon me.
EXPLANATION.
183. Objective Pronouns, continued. — When two pro-
nouns of the third person, one as direct object and the other
as indirect, come together in the same sentence, the indirect
is translated by se ; as,
Le compró un ramillete, y aelo
mandó.
Les escribiré tres cartas, y ae las
mandaré.
Mi criado ae lo dará.
He bought her a bouquet, and sent
it to her.
I shall write them three letters, and
send them to them.
My servant will give it to him.
This is done for the sake of euphony, changing the first of
the two pronouns, whatever its full form may be {le^ la or les\
into 86. This rule applies to all pronouns, after as well as be-
fore the verb ; as.
Ella ae lo ha prometido (instead of
ella le lo).
Prometiéndoselo (instead of prome-
tiéndolelo).
4 Le leíste la carta !
Ta ae la lei, instead of ya le la lei.
She has promised it to her.
Promising it to him.
Did you read the letter to him !
I read it to him (already).
184. When two pronouns of the third person are the ob-
Digitized
by Google
134 . LESSON XXVII.
jects of a yerb, and one of them is direct and the other indi-
rect, the indirect stands first in order of position ; as,
Ella me lo dijo. i She told it to me.
To se to dL 1 1 gave it to him.
135. But if the object of the verb be the reflexive pro-
noun, it must be placed first ; as,
Luego M me excusó. I He excused himself immediately to
I mé.
186. The use of a double objective case, one either be-
fore the verb or attached to the end of it, and the other after
it and preceded by the preposition rf, is very common in
Spanish, and is used for the sake of clearness or emphasis ; as.
Mi madre me ama á mi.
Tu amigo te busca á ti.
Él 86 lo dijo á ellas.
To lea di las noticias á ellos.
To se loa daré á Vda.
My mother loves me.
Thy friend seeks thee.
He told it to them.
I told them the news.
I will tell them to you.
187. The second objective case of any of the persons should
never be used in the sentence, preceded by á^ as the object of
the verb, without being accompanied by the first (except
after comparatives); therefore, such expressions as these:
á él quiero^ á ti amo^ are incorrect, and should be thus : á él
le quiero^ á ti te amo. While the general custom is to place
the second objective case with its preposition á after the verb,
it is occasionally placed before it. In this case the^rs^ objec-
tive comes between the second objective and the verb ; as,
Á ti te amo. I I love thee.
Á él le hablo. I I speak to him.
If the first objective case follows the verb, the second
must be placed after the first ; as.
Amándole á él, \ Loving him.
138. Whenever the two forms of the objective are used,
the indirect first objectives le and les^ mase, and f em., singular
and plural third person, must be used ; as,
Le necesito á éL I I need him.
Le amo á ella. | I love her.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXVII. 136
Lo and la would be proper in this case, if only one form
were nsed.
189. It may appear that the personal pronouns él^ la, lo,
lo8 and las might be confounded with the articles eZ, Za, to,
los^ las^ having the same form; but they are easily distin-
guished, since the articles must always be accompanied by
and precede nouns ; as, el tiempo^ la salud, los soldados, las
obras, lo bueno ; while, on the other hand, the personal pro-
nouns are only employed with yerbs, and placed before or
after them ; as.
La lUvaron, or lleváronla, I They carried it.
Lo buscaron, or Imseáronlo, \ They looked for it.
The adjective suflBx mismo, self, is placed after nouns or
pronouns for the sake of emphasis ; as.
Él no ama á nadie más que á sí
mismo.
Este mismo hombre lo hará.
To mismo lo haré.
He loves no one but himself.
This -^erj man will do it.
I myself shall do it.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ¿ Le dijo V. eso al inglés ? Se lo dije.
2. ¿ Se lo dijo V. en inglés ó en español ? Se lo dije en inglés.
3. ¿ Le comprendió á V. ? Sí, señor, muy bien.
4. ¿ Y qué le enseñó á V. ? Me enseñó el retrato de su her-
mana.
6. i Lo tiene V. ? No ; se lo envié ya.
6. i Me lo enseñará V. ? Se lo enseñaré á V. la semana
próxima.
7. i Ha llamado V. á la criada ? La he llamado y no ha ve-
nido.
8. i No le perdonará V. esa falta ? No quiero perdonársela,
9. Á quién llama mi padre ? Te llama á ti.
10. ¿ Quieres enseñarme tu vestido nuevo ? Te lo enseñaré
con mucho gusto.
11. ¿ Vendrán tus amigos á damos los buenos días ? Creo que
vendrán á dárnoslos.
12. ¿ Nos han enviado los periódicos ? Oslosenviaránmañana.
13. ¿ Cuánto le ganó V. á ese sujeto ? Le gané dos mil tres-
cientos cincuenta y cuatro pesos.
Digitized
by Google
136 LESSON XXVIL
14 I Que les dieron á sus amigas de V. ? Prometiéronles lle-
varlas á paseo ; pero no les dieron nada.
15. i Quién dijo eso ? Yo mismo lo dije.
16. i Para quién son estos libros ? Para ti mismo.
17. ¿ Han mandado mis cartas al correo ? Sí, señor, yo mismo
las he mandado.
18. ¿ Quién me ha enviado este ramillete ? Su amiga misma
se lo ha enviado.
19. ¿ Le leiste á tu padre las noticias de Francia ? El mismo
las ha leído.
20. ¿ Quieres enseñarme tu reloj ? Quiero enseñártelo.
21. i Quién llamó á la puerta ? Yo mismo llamé.
22. i Tiene V. esperanza de ver su país ? Sí, señor, tengo espe-
ranza de verlo muy pronto.
23. ¿ Cantaron bien anoche en el concierto ? Cantaron bien
la primera parte ; pero la segunda muy mal.
24. ¿ Cómo está su tío de V. ? Está bueno ; pero de muy mal
humor.
25. i Es hombre de mal humor ? No, señor, es hombre muy
amable ; pero hoy está de mal humor por asuntos de familia.
26. ¿ Creen ellos ganar dinero á ese hombre ? Creen ganár-
selo.
27. i Necesita V. enviar este periódico á su hermano ? Nece-
sito enviárselo.
28. ¿ Cuándo quiere V. mandar su piano al pianista ? Se lo
quiero mandar ahora.
29. i Cuándo necesita V. hablar al abogado ? Necesito ha-
blarle ahora mismo.
30. i Es esta la carta que V. recibió ayer ? Es la misma.
31. i A quién ama el mexicano ? No ama á nadie más que á
sí mismo.
32. l Para quién trabaja esa mujer ? Trabaja para sí misma.
33. l Qué le ha dicho V. hoy á su padre ? Lo mismo que le
dije ayer.
EXERCISE.
1. Good morning, sir ; how are you ? Very well, thank you.
2. How is your family ? Very well, thank you.
3. When did you hear from your cousin Jane ? I received
a letter from her yesterday. But will you excuse me an instant ?
some one is knocking at the door.
4. Have you sent your sister the bouquet I bought for her
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXVII. 13t
the other day ? Not yet ; but I shall send it to her to-morrow
znoming.
6. Will you write to her at the same time and tell her what
Charles said ? I am going to write to her at once, and I shall
tell her.
6. Do you think my father will pardon us ? I do (I think so),
because Emanuel showed me a letter he received from him, in
which he says he will pardon both of us.
7. And what does Henry think of the matter ? He thinks
the same.
8. Have the pupils shown their new books to their teacher
yet ? Yes, they showed them to him yesterday.
9. Does he think they are good ? He says they are very
good.
10. What else (more) did he say ? He said that if they study
them with attention they will very soon speak Spanish.
11. Is that all * he said ? That is all.
12. Who is knocking at the door ? is it thou, Peter ? Yes,
it is I.
13. Why did you not come earlier ? I was (have been) read-
ing the news from Italy.
14. What is the news (what news have we) ? The papers say
that the Italians have gained another victory (victoria),
15. What did that man promise you last night ? He promised
to bring me some volumes of the History of the United States.
16. Has he brought (traído) them to you yet ? Not yet.
17. When do you think he will bring f them ? He has to
come to our house this evening, and I think he will bring them
with him.
18. What do you wish to see ? I wish to see your new dress,
if you will have the goodness (bondad) to show it to me.
19. Will you tell the Englishman what I have told you ? I
shall not tell it to the Englishman; but I shall tell it to the
Frenchman this very day.
20. Will he believe it ? Yes, he will (believe it) ; he believes
everything I tell him.
21. Have they taken my letters to the post-office ? I took
them myself, sir.
22. Who is my father calling? He is calling you to send
you to the bookstore for a book.
* Lo que. t Traerá.
Digitized
by Google
138
LESSON XXVIIL
23. Do you know why Louis does not send us the papers any
more {ya) ? He promised to send them ; but you know that no
steamer {vapor) has arrived * this week yet
24. When does the merchant want to see the notary ? He
wants to see him just now.
25. There he is talking to a gentleman ; will you go and tell
him that my father wishes to speak to him a moment {momento) ?
26. Good morning, sir ; father wishes to tell you something ;
will you come now ? Yes, I shall go at once.
27. How is your son, Mr. Alexander? He is much better,
thank you; but he would not come out this morning, because
he has to study his lesson.
28. What language is he learning ? He is not learning any
now ; he commenced to learn Spanish in the winter.
29. What is he studying, then ? He takes lessons in (of)
writing, history, and music.
30. What part of the grammar art thou in now, Peter ? I
have just reached (arrived at) f the twenty-seventh lesson.
31. Do you have to send this paper to your brother ? I have
to send it to him this very day.
LESSON XXVIII.
IMPERFECT AND PAST PERFECT TENSES.
IMPERFECT.
First Conjugation,
TERMINATIONS.
Singular.
1. aba.
2. abas.
3. aba.
Plural.
1. abamos.
2. abáis.
3. aban.
Hablaba, hablabas, hablaba.
Hablábamos, hablabais, habla-
ban.
I spoke, was speaking, or used
to speak, &c., &c.
We spoke, &c.
' Llegar.
t Acabo dd.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXVIII.
139
Second Conjugation,
•
TERMINATIONS.
Ringular.
Plural.
1. ía.
1. iamos.
2. ías.
2. iais.
3. ía.
3. ian.
Aprendía, aprendías, aprendía.
Aprendíamos, aprendíais, apren-
dían.
I learned, was learning, or used
to learn, &c., &c.
Third Conjugation,
TEEMINATIONS.
Singular.
Plural.
1. ía.
1. íamos.
2. ías.
2. íais.
3. ía.
3. ían.
Escribía, escribías, escribía.
Escribíamos, escribíais, escri-
bían.
I wrote, was writing, or used to
write, &c., &c.
PLUPERFECT.
Había
Habías
Había
Habíamos
Habíais
Habían
^ hablado.
> aprendido.
) escrito.
^ hablado.
> aprendido.
) escrito.
I had
Thou hadst
He had
We had
You had
They had
^ spoken.
> learned.
) written.
J spoken.
> learned.
) written.
Acabar.
To finish.
Entrar.
To enter, come in, go in.
DeBer.
To owe.
Deber.
Should, ought, must, to be to, to
be one's duty to.
Dudar.
To doubt.
Temer.
To fear, be afraid of.
Abrir, abierto (irregular in
this
To open, opened.
past participle
only).
Ambos,
I Both.
Digitized
by Google
140
LESSON XXVIII.
Cuidado.
Care.
Cabeza.
Head.
Deber.
Duty.
Mano.*
Hand.
Prójimo.
Neighbor.
Ropa.
Clothes.
Vecino.
Neighbor.
Ventana.
Window.
Reloj.
Clock, watch.
Visita.
Visit.
Cuenta.
Bill, account
Marido, esposo.
Husband.
Esposa.
Wife.
COMPOSITION.
Yo escribía cuando V. vino.
£l estudiaba sus lecciones todos los
días.
Margarita bailaba mucho cuando era
joven.
Yo acababa de salir cuando V. entró.
I Abría V. la puerta 6 la ventana en
el invierno f
En el invierno no abría ni la una ni
la otra; pero en el verano abría
ambas.
4 Había V. escrito los ejercicios an-
tes de dar su lección I
No los había escrito ; pero había es-
tudiado la lección.
Debe V. tener cuidado no solo de
estudiar la lección, sino de escribir
los ejercicios, porque si no V. no
aprenderá nada.
4 En dónde está su vecino de Y. ?
Acaba de entrar.
I Qué hora tiene su reloj de V. I
Son las doce j cuarto.
I Tenía su vecino de V. cuidado de
su ropaf
Debía hacerlo, pero no lo hacía.
Debemos amar al prójimo tanto co-
mo á nosotros mismos; pero mi
vecino no me ama á mí ni yo le
amo á él.
No dudo lo que V. dice.
I was writing when you came.
He used to study his lessons every
day.
Margaret used to dance much when
she was young.
I had just gone out when you came
in.
Used you to open the door or the
window in winter!
In winter I used to open neither ; but
in summer I used to open both.
Had you written your exercises be-
fore taking your lesson f
I had not written them ; but I had
studied my lesson.
You must take care, not only to
study your lesson, but (also) to
write your exercises; for if not,
you will learn nothing.
Where is your neighbor!
He has just come in (entered).
What o'clock is it by your watch
(what hour has your watch) f
It is a quarter past twelve.
Used your neighbor to take care of
his clothes f
He should have done so, but did not.
We should love our neighbor as our-
selves ; but my neighbor does not
love me, nor do I love him.
I do not doubt what you say.
* Memo is the only Spanish noun ending in o that is feminine.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXVIII. 141
EXPLANATION.
140. The IMPEEFEOT is used (1) especially where differ-
ent past actions are conceived of as going on at the same time ;
(2) also in reference to past aGÜonB frequently repeated^ and
in reference to continuing past states or conditions ; (3) it
represents action as attempted merely, and not as accom-
plished ; (4) habitualy or custom^ary past action or state ; as
may be seen by the following examples :
Yo escribía cuando V. vino.
Él estudiaba sus lecciones todos los
dias.
El hombre vendía un caballo.
Y un vapor subía de la tierra.
/ was uniting when you came.
He studied his lessons every day.
The man was selling (went trying to
sell) a horse.
And a y&i^ot used to go up from the
earth.
Next to the infinitive the imperfect is the most regular
form of the verb, there being only three verbs which are
irregular in this tense ; viz., iba^ from ir, to go, era, from
ser^ to be, and veiay from very to see.
141. The PAST PEEFECT is used to express what is past,
and took place before some other past action, event, or state,
expressed or understood ; as,
Yo TiaMa leido ya los periódicos 1 1 had already read the newspapers
cuando V. me los dio. I when you gave them to me.
142. Acabar de. — The English expressions, to have just,
and to be just, before a past participle, are translated into
Spanish by acabar de^ preceding an infinitive ; as,
Aectbo de entrar. 1 1 have just come in.
Él acaba de abrir la ventana. I He has just opened the window.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ¿Ha hablado V. con la señorita? No, ella acababa de
salir cuando yo toqué á la puerta.
2. i Dudaba V. entrar ? Sí, porque temía ofender á V.
3. No señor ; ¿ qué hora es ? Mi reloj tiene las once y cuarto.
4. i Y qué hora tiene V. ? Yo tengo las once y media.
5. i Sabe V. qué hora es en el reloj de la iglesia ? Cuando
yo pasaba estaban dando las once.
Digitized
by Google
142 LESSON XXVIII.
6. ¿ Entonces ahora deberán ser no más que las once y veinte
ó veinte y cinco minutos ? Creo que serán un poco menos.
7. ¿ Ha hablado V. con mi vecino ? He ido á hacerle una
visita, pero había salido.
8. i No habló V. con la señora ? Sí, estaba en la ventana
cuando yo pasé.
9. ¿ Tiene una mano muy hermosa ? Sí, pero los ojos son
más hermosos.
10. ¿ Qué tenía en la cabeza ? Dos flores.
11. ¿ Quién llama á la puerta ? La lavandera, que viene á
buscar la ropa.
12. l Cuánto le debo á V. ? Me debe V. veinte y cinco cen-
tavos de la ropa de la semana pasada.
13. ¿ No se los ha pagado á V. mi marido ? No, señora, no
tenía dinero.
14. ¿ Duda V. lo que le digo ? No, señora, lo creo.
15. i Está bien lavada la ropa ? Muy bien ; yo misma la lavé.
16. ¿ Hizo V. la visita á su vecino ? Fui á su casa ; pero había
salido.
17. i Va V. muchas veces al teatro ? Cuando vivía en París
iba á menudo ; pero aquí voy muy pocas veces.
18. ¿ Cómo debemos amar al prójimo ? Tanto como á noso-
tros mismos.
19. ¿ Quién es el prójimo ? Todos los hombres son nuestros
prójimos.
20. ¿ Está mala su hermana de V. ? Sí, señora, y de cuidado
(seriously).
21. ¿ Cuántas visitas le ha hecho el médico ? Muchísimas.
22. l Deben Vds. tener mucho cuidado de ella ? Sí, señora,
ya lo tenemos.
23. ¿ Cuántas visitas le debo yo á V. ? Con esta son tres.
24. ¿ No vendrá V. á comer mañana con nosotras ? Mañana
iré al campo con mis vecinos.
25. ¿ Había V. recibido la carta del francés cuando recibió la
mía ? La recibí después.
26. ¿ Por qué trabaja V. tanto ? Porque es mi deber.
27. ¿ Vendrán V. y su hermana á pasar una semana con noso-
tros ? Sí, señora, la semana próxima vendremos ambos.
28. i Quién abrió mi ventana, Juan ? Señor, yo mismo la abrí.
29. i Habló V. con el sastre ? Fui allá, pero había salido.
30. i Cunado vino V. ? Ahora mismo acabo de entrar.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXVJIJ. 143
31. i Dónde está mi padre ? Acaba de salir á la calle.
32. i Sabes adonde fué ? Fué á comprar ropa.
33. i Habrá ido á la Cuarta avenida ? No, señor, creo que fué
á Broadway.
34. ¿ Qué hora es ? El reloj de su cuarto de V. acaba de dar
las doce.
EXERCISE.
1. What were you doing when Alexander went into your
room ? I was talking to my father.
2. I thought you were writing your exercises. No, I had
written them already.
3. Does the servant take care to sweep your room every day ?
Yes, he knows very well it is his duty.
4 Why did you not come before ? you were to come at nine
o'clock. I know I have done wrong in not coming earlier ; but
I have been writing all the morning.
5. Does your sister Margaret dance now as much as she
used? When (she was) in the city she used to dance very
much, but now she has no time.
6. When you lived in the country did you open both the
doors and the windows ? I opened neither.
7. Had you finished your work before going to the concert ?
I had (finished it).
8. Do you doubt what I tell you ? No, sir, I never doubted
anything you told me.
9. Is your neighbor afraid to open his windows in winter ?
He is not afraid to open them.
10. Who was it that went out last night after ten o'clock ?
No one went out ; my brother came in at that hour.
11. Did Alexander go out when your cousin came in ? He
had already gone out when my cousin came in.
12. Where is he now ? He has just gone out to walk.
13. Will he be out very long (much time) ? He will not be
long ; he is to take his Spanish lesson this evening.
14 Did you pay (make) a visit to my neighbor last week ? I
went to his house, but he was not at home.
15. When did you see the pianist ? He came to see me the
other day, but I had gone out.
16. Do you think we shall have studied our lessons before
going to the teacher's ? I think we shalL
Digitized
by Google
144 LESSON XXVIIL
17. What o'clock is it by (in) your watch ? It is seventeen
minutes past three by mine ; what time have you ?
18. It must be (deben ser) half -past three; has the music
teacher come ? Not yet
19. Will you have the kindness to go to his house and tell
him I shall not take my lesson this afternoon? With much
pleasure.
20. So soon 1 Well, did you see the teacher ? No, madam,
he had just gone out.
21. How much do you owe the tailor now ? I owe him very
little ; you know I sent him some money last month.
22. I know (it) ; but did he not send (pasar) in another bill
on Monday ? If he has sent in another I have not seen (visto) it.
23. I thought you were in the country, Mr. Emanuel ? I was
there last week.
24. Why did you not come yesterday ? I saw you were writ-
ing and I feared to offend you.
25. But you know it was your duty to come in ; you knew I
wanted you. Well, if you pardon me this time (vez), I shall
come in the next time.
26. How often do you go to the theatre? Not very often
now ; I used to go every night in the week.
27. How are we to love our neighbor ? As ourselves.
28. Who is our neighbor? All mankind (men) are our
neighbors.
29. How many visits has the physician made to your uncle ?
He began his visits on the 30th of December, and visited him
twice a week until April 4th.
30. How many visits do I owe you for now ? You owed me
for twelve, but you paid me for nine, and so you only owe for
three now.
31. Whose letter did you receive first, mine or Jane's ? When
yours came to hand (my hands), I had already received Jane's.
32. Will you take your lesson to-day ? I am to go to the
Central Park this afternoon with my mother, and so I shall not
take my lesson until to-morrow.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXIX.
LESSON XXllt.
PRETERIT PERFECT.
145
Hube
Hubiste
Hubo.
Hubimos.
Hubisteis
Hubieron
^ hablado.
> aprendido.
) escrito.
I had ^ spoken.
Thou hadst > learned.
He had ) written.
hablado.
/- aprendido.
) escrito.
)
We had
You had
They had
^ spoken.
> learned.
) written.
Ver.
Mirar.
Esperar.
Así que.
Apenas.
No bien.
Tampoco (conj\).
También (adverb).
También (conj.).
Además.
Primeramente, or en primer
lugar.
Segundamente, or en segundo
lugar.
Frecuente.
Frecuentemente.
Cómodo.
Cómodamente.
To see. (See Conjvgation^ page
To look.
To hope, to wait for.
As soon as.
Scarcely.
No sooner.
Neither, not either.
Also, likewise.
As well, moreover.
Moreover, besides.
Firstly.
Secondly, &c.
Frequent
Frequently.
Convenient, comfortable.
Conveniently, comfortably.
Incómodo.
Inconvenient, uncomfortable.
Incómodamente.
Inconveniently, uncomfortably.
Probable.
Probable, likely.
Probablemente.
Probably, likely.
Perfecto.
Perfect.
Perfectamente.
Perfectly.
Correcto.
Correct.
Correctamente.
Correctly.
Ojo.
Correo.
Lugar.
Eye.
Post, post-office,
courier.
Place.
13
Vista.
Comodidad.
Milla.
Sight, view.
XJonvenience,
comfort.
Mile.
Digitized
by Google
146
LESSON XXIX.
COMPOSITION.
'Cuando lo hube conocido lo amé.
Apenas hubo salido él cuando yo
entré.
No bien lo hube visto cuando lo co-
nocí.
Así que hube escrito la carta la llevé
al correo.
Cuando lo conocí lo amé.
4 Iba V. frecuentemente al teatro el
año pasado 1
Iba f recuentísimamente, or muy fre-
cuentemente.
Él vive en esa casa cómodamente, or
con comodidad.
Él escribe correcta y perfectamente ;
pero V. escribe más fácilmente.
When I had known him I loved him.
Scarcely had he gone out when I
came in.
No sooner had I seen him than I
knew him.
As soon as I had written the letter
I took it to the post-office.
When I knew him I loved him.
Did you go often to the theatre last
year!
I went very often.
He lives comfortably, or with com-
fort, in that house.
He writes correctly and perfectly;
but you write more easily.
EXPLANATION.
143. The PBETEBIT PERFECT is used to express a past
action or event that took place immediately before another
action or event also past. It is never used except after some
of the adverbs of time ; cuando, when ; asi que, as soon as ;
no bien, no sooner ; apenas, scarcely ; luego que, immediately
after ; después que, soon after ; as,
Cuando lo hube conocido.
Apenas hubo salido cuando yo vine.
No bien lo hu¡be visto cuando lo co-
nocí.
When I had made his acquaintance.
Scarcely had he gone out when I
came.
No sooner had I seen him than I
knew him.
This tense is very little used, not only for the reason al-
ready mentioned, of its being preceded by an adverb of time,
but also because its place may be elegantly supplied by the
PEETERiT: as.
Cuando lo conoci.
Apenas salió cuando yo vine.
No bien lo vi cuando lo conocí.
When I had known him.
Scarcely had he gone out when I
came.
No sooner had I seen him than I
knew him.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXIX. 147
144. The adverbs of manner and quality, in Spanish as
well as in English, are generally derived from adjectives.
146. To form an adverb from an adjective, it is suflBlcient
to add mente to the adjective, if the latter has the same ter-
mination in both genders ; as.
Frecuente, frecuentemente.
Gramatical, gramaticalmente.
If the adjective has a different termination for each gen-
der, then mente is added to the feminine ; as.
Incómoda, incómodamente.
Perfecta, perfectamen/e.
When two or more of these adverbs follow each other, only
the last one takes mente^ the others taking the feminine ter-
mination a ; as.
Cicerón habló sabia y elocuente- 1 Cicero spoke learnedly and dó-
menle. I quently.
146. These adverbs terminating in mente^ being derived
from adjectives, admit of similar comparison ; as.
Easily.
More easily.
Less easily.
As, or so easily.
Very easily, or most easily.
Fácilmente.
Más fácilmente.
Menos fácilmente.
Tan fácilmente.
Muy fácilmente, or facilísimamente.
147. Those adverbs may, without any change in the sense,
be substituted by a substantive governed by the preposition
con; as.
Él vive cómodamente, or con como- 1 He lives comfortably,
didad. I
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ¿ Ve V. aquella flor .tan hermosa ? Miro, pero no la veo.
2. i Ve V. qué hora es en el reloj de la iglesia ? No, pero
miraré en mi reloj.
3. i Ha visto V. á su hermano ? Sí, señor, lo vi apenas hubo
salido del teatro.
4. é Le conoció á V. mi vecino ? No bien lo hube hablado,
me conoció.
Digitized
by Google
148 LESSON XXIX.
5. I Han venido mis amigos ? Vinieron así que hubo V. salido.
6. ¿ Le dieron á V. mis libros ? Me los dieron, no bien les
hube hablado de ello.
7. ¿ Y se marcharon muy pronto ? Se marcharon así que
hubieron escrito sus cartas.
8. i Qué hizo V. después ? Primeramente (qr primero) fui al
correo y después al mercado.
9. i Qué quiere V. hacer ? Primeramente escribir los ejerci-
cios y después estudiar la lección.
10. ¿ Por qué no lo hizo V. antes ? En primer lugar porque
no tenia humor y en segundo porque apenas tuve tiempo.
11. ¿ Habla V. francés frecuentemente ? Sí, señor, lo hablo
con frecuencia.
12. ¿ Lo escribe V. correctamente ? Cuando lo estudiaba lo
escribía con más corrección que ahora.
13. ¿ Aprende V. inglés ó español ? Aprendo ambos.
14. i Y su hermano de V. ? Mi hermano los aprende también.
15. i Los hablan Vds. con perfección ? Sí, señor, el inglés lo
hablamos perfectamente ; pero el español ni yo, ni él tampoco.
16. i Ha enviado V. su carta al correo ? No, señor, la enviaré
mañana.
17. i La ha escrito V. ? Tampoco la he escrito, porque quiero
hacerlo con comodidad.
18. ¿ Ha aprendido V. la lección de hoy ? He aprendido la
de hoy y la de mañana también.
19. i Cuándo piensa V. salir para París ? Probablemente sal-
dré la semana próxima.
20. ¿ No vive V. cómodamente aquí ? Sí, señor, pero vivo más
cómodamente en Francia.
21. ¿ Vivía V. cómodamente cuando estaba en Londres ? No,
señor, vivía incómodamente porque no hablaba inglés.
22. i Tiene V. otro libro además de ese ? Sí, señor, tengo
otros dos.
23. ¿ Está V. malo de la vista ? Sí, señor, tengo malo un ojo.
24. i Por qué no ha venido aún su primo de V. ? Porque quiere
venir con comodidad.
25. i Tiene V. buena vista ? Sí, señor, pero ahora tengo los
ojos malos.
26. ¿ Cuándo estudia V. sus lecciones ? Las estudio de día
porque el estudio de noche es malo para la vista.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXIX. 149
27. é Dónde están sus hermanos de V. ? Salieron á paseo no
bien hubieron escrito sus ejercicios.
28. ¿ Cuándo escribieron las cartas ? Así que hubieron apren-
dido sus lecciones.
29. i Llevó V. mis cartas al correo ? Sí, señor, así que V.
hubo salido.
30. i Va V. con frecuencia al correo ? Sí, señor, voy frecuen-
temente : voy todos los días.
EXERCISE.
1. Did you go to the lawyer's as I told you ? I went as soon
as you told me.
2. Was he at home ? did you see him ? He was not in when
I went ; but I waited until he came.
3. Did you show him the letter ? I opened it and showed it
to him ; but he would * not read it.
4. What did your children do after taking t^ieir lesson ?
They had scarcely finished their lesson when they went to bed.
5. Did you look at the horses your brother bought on Mon-
day ? I did (look at them), and I think they are very fine.
6. Have you ever taken your family to Italy ? Yes, several
times ; last year we travelled in Italy.
7. Did you spend some time in the principal cities ? Yes ;
but principally in Rome (Roma), Florence (Florencia) and
Milan (Milán),
8. Where were you on the 15th of December, 1865 ? On the
15th we were in Florence in the morning, and in Rome at night.
9. Did you all enjoy good health in Europe ? Yes, all, ex-
cept (menos) Alexander, who had a sore (malo) eye the greater
part of the time.
10. Did you go often to the theatre ? We generally went
every evening.
11. Had you any difficulty (dificultad) in understanding f the
language ? None ; you know Emanuel speaks Italian very cor-
rectly ; he had learned it before setting out for Europe.
12. Did you see many Americans when you were travelling ?
Very many ; some of them we knew very well, and others were
friends of ours.
13. Where is the letter you were writing this morning ? As
soon as I had finished it John took it to the post-office.
♦Quiso. f Comprender.
Digitized
by Google
150 LESSON XXIX.
14. Do you ever write to your uncle ? Very little since we
left New York ; but there I used to write to him very frequently.
15. Which of you three writes French the most correctly* ?
I know it is not I ; and as to (en cuanto á) Peter and Louis, I
think Peter writes best, but Louis writes with more ease (more
easily).
16. Do you see that beautiful flower ? I am looking ; but I
do not see it
17. Will you tell me what time it is by the church clock ? I
am looking at the church ; but I see no clock.
18. Have not you good sight ? Yes, very good ; but I have a
very sore eye.
19. Did not my cousins come ? They came as soon as you
went out
20. Did you show them my portrait ? I did ; but they scarcely
had time to look at it
21. Did they say where they were going? They said they
were going to the country.
22. How long are they to be there ? They did not tell me that
23. Are not they coming for me to-morrow ? Yes, sir, they
are coming for you to go and pay a visit to Mrs. Peñaverde.
24. Have you ever seen a more comfortable little room than
this one ? Besides being comfortable it is very handsome.
25. Why do you not speak Spanish with Mr. Eiberas ? In
the first place, because I do not speak it well enough ; and in
the second, because he speaks English very correctly.
26. I tb ought you were studying Spanish ? I am studying
it ; but studying and speaking are two distinct {distinto) things.
37. Did you tell the music teacher that Louisa wishes to take
lessons ? Not yet ; but 1 shall see him to-morrow and tell him.
28. Why did you liot take your lesson yesterday ? I was sick.
39. Have you studied yesterday's lesson, and toniay's ? I have
studied both.
30- Will you come to-morrow at the same hour ? Probably I
shall
* Mejor.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXX.
151
LESSOlí XXX.
IMPERSONAL VERBS.
Llover.
Lloviendo.
Llovido.
Present,
Imperfect.
Preterit.
Future.
To rain.
Raining.
Rained.
Indicative.
Llueve.
Llovía.
Llovió.
Lloverá.
It rains.
It was raining.
It rained.
It will rain. ,
Compotmd Tenses.
Perfect. Ha llovido.
Past perfect. Había llovido.
Preterit perfect. Hubo llovido.
Future perfect. Habrá llovido.
It has rained.
It had rained.
It had rained.
It will have rained.
Amanecer.
Anochecer.
To grow light
To grow dark.
Diluviar.
To rain like a deluge, to rain in
torrents.
Granizar.
To hail.
Helar.
To freeze.
Lloviznar.
To drizzle.
Nevar.
To snow.
Relampaguear.
Tronar.
To lighten.
To thunder.
PERSONAL VERBS U
SED IMPERSONALLY.
Bastar.
To be sufficient.
Haber.
Hacer.
Ser.
(Signifying) there to be.
(Signifying) to be.
Tobe.
Convenir.
Parecer.
To suit, to be proper.
To seem, to appear.
Brasil.
Menester.
Hielo.
Brazil.
Necessity.
Ice.
Habana.
Havana.
Nieve.
Snow.
Lluvia.
Rain.
Digitized
by Google
162
LESSON XXX.
Helado.
Trueno.
Medio día.
Viento.
Ice cream.
Thunder.
Noon.
Wind.
Tarde.
La mañana.
Media noche.
Especie.
Afternoon.
Morning.
Midnight
Kind.
COMPOSITION.
4 Es necesario estudiar mucho para
aprender el español f
Es menester estudiar mucho, pero
no tauto como para aprender el
inglés.
En Nueva York llueve y llovizna
mucho, pero no diluvia como en
la Habana.
En Madri4 amanece muy temprano
y anochece muy tarde en el verano.
En la Habana amanece y anochece
siempre á la misma hora, en todos
los días del afio.
En el Brasil no nieva ; pero truena
y relampaguea mucho siempre
que llueve.
En la Habana no hay hielo, porque
no hace bastante frío para helar ;
y por eso lo llevan de Nueva York.
En Nueva York ha helado y nevado
mucho este Año ; pero en el pasa-
do nevó y heló muy poco.
I Hace mucho calor en este país t
En los meses de Noviembre, Diciem-
bre y Enero hace mucho frío ; pero
en Junio, Julio y Agosto hace
mucho calor.
i Qué tiempo hace f
Parece que va á llover, porque hay
mucho viento y hace calor.
Cuatro años ha, or hay cuatro años,
que no veo á mi padre.
Pero V. tiene esperanza de verle
pronto, porque llegará hoy á Nue-
va York en el vapor " Etna " que
viene de Europa.
Is it necessary to study much to
learn Spanish %
It is necessary to study a great deal,
but not so much as to learn Eng-
Hsh.
In New York it rains and drizzles a
great deal, but it does not rain in
torrents as in Havana.
In Madrid day breaks very early and
night falls very late in summer.
In Havana day breaks and night
falls at the same hours every day
in the year.
In Brazil it does not snow ; but it
thunders and lightens much when-
ever it rains.
In Havana there is no ice, becaase
it is not cold enough to freeze ;
and for that reason they take it
from New York.
In New York it has frozen and
snowed much this year ; but last
year it snowed and froze very
little.
Is it very warm in this country f
In the months of November, Decem-
ber and January it is very cold ;
but in June, July and August it
is very warm.
What kind of weather is it f
It appears it is going to rain, be-
cause it is very windy and hot.
I have not seen my father for four
years.
But you (have) hope to see him soon ;
for he will arrive to-day in New
York by the steamer " Etna " (that
is) coming from Europe.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXJjT.
153
En verano voy á pasear todos los
días al amanecer.
i Va V. á la cama temprano %
No, señor, tarde ; á la media noche.
% Come V, al medio dial
No, señor, como al anochecer.
¿Va V. ala Habana!
No, señor, voy á Francia.
La Francia es más alegre que la In-
glaterra.
£1 muchacho estudia mucho.
El estudio de la gramática es nece-
sario.
El hombre necesita" trabajar.
La conversación es muy útil' para
aprender una lengua.
In summer I go to walk every morn-
ing at daybreak.
Do you go to bed early f
No, sir, late ; at midnight.
Do you dine at noon %
No, sir, I dine at nightfall.
Are you going to Havana %
No, sir, I am going to France.
France is more pleasant than Eng-
land.
The boy studies much.
The study of grammar is necessary.
Man needs to work.
Conversation is very useful for learn-
ing a language.
EXPLANATION.
148. Impersonal verbs are those which are used only in
the infinitive mode and in the third person singular of all
the tenses, and have no definite subject ; as,
Llueve.
Tronará.
Nevaba.
It rains.
It will thunder.
It was snowing.
149. The verbs amanecer and anochecer are sometimes
used in the three persons, both numbers ; but then they are
not impersonal, but neuter ; as,
Yo amaneci en Nueva York, y ano- 1 1 was in New York at daybreak, and
checi en Filadelfia. I in Philadelphia at nightfall.
160. Habee and hacer are often used impersonally, and
are in such cases to be rendered into English by the corre-
sponding tenses of the verb to be.
The verb Jiaber^ when conjugated impersonally, has the pe-
culiarity of taking a y in the third person of the present
indicative; as,
There is much fruit.
There will be many men.
It was cold.
Many years ago.
Hay mucha fruta.
Habrá muchos hombres.
Hizo frío.
Hace muchos años.
Digitized
by Google
154 LESSON XXX,
In this case haber and its forms corresponds to the Eng-
lish there to be, there is, there are, there were, there will be,
there may be, &c., and when it has this meaning it is used
in the singular only ; as,
J, No hay cartas f I Are there no letters!
¡ Haya luz ! I Let there be light.
N". B. — Ha is sometimes elegantly used for hay ; as,
Doce años ha, or hay doce afíos. | Twelve years ago ;
but it is to be observed that ha always follows the time, while
hay precedes it.
There are many other verbs which, although not imper-
sonal, are sometimes used as such ; as.
Es muy tarde.
Es preciso.
Es menester.
Parece.
Conviene.
Basta.
It is very late.
It is necessary.
There is necessity.
It seems, it appears.
It suits, it is proper.
It is sufficient, it will do.
161. As it may have been observed, the pronoun tY, which
accompanies impersonal verbs in English, is not translated
into Spanish.
152. The Abticle. — Nouns taken in a definite sense re-
quire the article ; as,
El muchacho estudia. I The boy studies.
El estudio de la gramática es útil. | The study oí grammar is useful.
Nouns used in their most general sense are preceded by
the article ; as.
El hombre necesita trabajar. Man needs to work.
La conversación es muy útil para Conversation is very useful for leam-
aprender una lengua. ing a language.
Names of nations, countries, provinces, mountains, rivers
and seasons, generally take the article ; as.
La España.
La Inglaterra.
El invierno.
Spain.
England.
Winter.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXX. 155
153. Nations, countries, and provinces, when preceded by
a preposition, do not take the article unless they are per-
sonified; as.
Las proTÍncias de España. I The provinces of Spain.
El yalor de la España. | The courage of Spain.
Nevertheless, the article is employed under all circum-
stances with the names of some places ; as.
El BrasiL
Brazil.
La Habana.
Havana.
El Ferrol.
Ferrol.
La China.
China.
El Japón.
Japan.
EI Perú.
Peru.
Los Estados Unidos,
The United States.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Qué tiempo hace ? Ahora hace calor ; antes hacía frío.
2. i Lloverá mañana ? Creo que nevará.
3. ¿ Llueve mucho en Nueva York ? Llueve y llovizna bas-
tante ; pero raramente diluvia.
4. ¿ Hace mucho frío en la Habana en el mes de Enero. Hace
alguno, pero nunca nieva ni hiela.
5. ¿ Eelampaguea ? Eelampaguea y llovizna.
6. ¿ Por qué escribe V. tantos ejercicios ? Porque para apren-
der una lengua no basta hablarla, es necesario también saber
escribirla.
7. ¿ Nieva mucho en el Brasil ? En el Brasil no nieva, más
que en las montañas, donde hay nieve todo el año.
8. ¿ Quiere V. tomar un helado ? No, señor, los helados no
son buenos en este tiempo.
9. ¿ Cuánto tiempo hace que no ve V. á su familia ? El dos
de Septiembre próximo hará once años.
10. i Por qué no vino V. anoche ? Porque llovía y hacía
mucho viento.
11. ¿ Tiene V. miedo de los truenos ? Cuando relampaguea
mucho, sí señor.
12. ¿ Por qué no fué V. anoche al concierto ? Porque lloviz-
naba y estaba nevando.
13. ¿ Á qué horas come V. ? Al amanecer tomo chocolate ;
al medio día como, y al anochecer tomo el té.
Digitized
by Google
156 LESSON XXX.
14. i Se levanta Y. al amanecer todos los días ? Cuando es
menester, si señor.
15. ¿ Á qué hora salió V. del teatro el sábado ? Á media noche.
16. i Cuándo salieron sus hermanas para el campo ? Ayer al
medio día.
17. ¿ Cuándo volverán ? Pasado mañana por la noche.
18. ¿ A qué hora amanece en el verano ? En verano amanece
á las cinco y anochece á las siete y media.
19. ¿ Por qué se marcha V. tan pronto ? Porque es menester.
20. ¿ Es menester salir si amanecer ? No, basta salir al medio
día.
21. i Hay muchos alemanes en Nueva York ? Sí, señor, hay
muchísimos.
22. i Cuántos días hace que no lo ve V. ? No hace más que
uno.
23. i Hay algún francés en su casa de V. ? Hay cuatro fran-
ceses y una francesa.
24. i Cuándo vinieron Vds. ? Ayer al medio día.
25. i Cree V. qué lloverá hoy ? Parece que sí, porque hace
mucho viento y mucho calor.
2Q, i Llovió mucho aquí el año pasado ? Aquí llovió mucho,
pero en la Habana llovió más.
27. ¿ Nieva mucho en este país ? En el invierno nieva mucho.
28. ¿ Se hiela el agua ? Muchas veces.
29. ¿ Habrá mucho hielo el año próximo ? En el invierno
habrá mucho hielo.
30. ¿ Hace mucho frío ? Sí, señor, y al amanecer llovía y gra-
nizaba.
31. ¿ Por qué hace tanto frío hoy ? Porque nevó ay^r.
EXERCISE.
1. Is it raining ? I do not know.
2. You do not know ? How, are you still in bed ? — ^Yes, and
I shall be until seven o*clock.
3. At what o'clock did you go to bed ? At midnight
4. What is it necessary to do in order ,to learn Spanish ? It
is necessary to study a good grammar, talk a great deal with Span-
iards, and read the works of good authors.
5. What were you doing in the garden this morning at day-
break ? I was walking.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXX. 157
6. Have you read the Spanish newspaper yet that I lent *
you ? Yes, sir, here it is. Thank you.
7. What language do they speak in Brazil ? Portuguese
{porttigués),
8. Do you see that lightning t ? Yes, it is lightening and
thundering very much.
9. Is it proper to have the windows open when it thunders ?
No, it is better to have them shut (cerradas),
10. I think (it appears to me) it will soon rain. Yes, I think
so too ; it is already drizzling.
11. John ! Sir. Is there any water in my room ? — No, sir,
but if you wish, I shall take some there now.
12. In what months of the year does it freeze most in New
York ? During (durante) the months of January and February.
13. I believe there is a great deal of ice used (se usa) in New
York during the summer. A great deal, and it is very cheap.
14. It appears that there will be little ice next summer. Very
little, the winter has not been cold enough to have much.
15. What watch is that which you have there ? It is the one
I always had.
16. I thought you had given, your watch to Charles, and
bought your (the) neighbor's ? No, Charles has a very pretty
little watch.
17. What o'clock is it by your watch ? It is just four o'clock
(son las cuatro en punto),
18. Who knocked at the door just now ? It was Mrs. Mar-
tinez ; it is thundering, and you know she is afraid of the light-
ning.
19. Why did she not come in ? She did not like to (would
not) disturb you (molestarle á V.\ madam.
20. Do you know whether Alexander has sent the papers to
his brother yet ? I think he has (me parece qvs si),
21. Did you take him the two volumes I showed him yester-
day ? I took them to him this morning.
22. Was he in the house when you went ? No, madam, he
had just gone out.
23. Will you open that window, if you please ? With
pleasure.
24. And this one also ? No, thank you ; it is better to have
that one shut.
* Prestar. t Relámpago.
Digitized
by Google
158
LESSON XXXI.
25. What kind of weather is it to-day ? Very had ; it has
heen raining and hailing ever since (desdé) daybreak.
26. Madam, here are two beautiful bouquets that Mrs. G-arcia
has sent you from her garden. She is very kind (buena).
27. Who brought them ? Her servant (fern.),
28. When did she bring them ? You had no sooner gone out
than she came.
29. How windy it was last night I Yes, and it rained in
torrents the whole night, from nightfall until daybreak this
morning.
30. What news is there from Europe ? I do not know ; I
have not yet seen the newspapers.
LESSON XXXI.
Gustar.
I To like, to please.
PRESENT.
(Á mi) me gusta or gustan.
(Á ti) te gusta *'
(Á él) le gusta
(Á nosotros) nos gusta, orgustan.
(A vosotros) os gusta, "
(Á ellos) les gusta, "
I like it or them.
Thou likest it or them..
He likes it
We like it
You like it
They like it
IMPEEFECT.
(Á mi) me gustaba or gustaban.
(Á ti) te gustaba, &c.
Gustar de. I
I liked it or them.
Thou likedst it, &c.
To be fond of.
Gusto de.
Gustas de.
Gusta de.
Gustamos de.
Gustáis de.
Gustan de.
I am fond of.
Thou art fond of.
He is fond of.
We are fond of.
You are fond of.
They ai'e fond of.
Digitized
by Google
LFSSOJ^ XXXI.
159
IMPEEFECT.
Gustaba de.
Gustabas de, &c.
Gustar.
I was or used to be fond of.
Thou wast or used to be fond
of, &c.
To taste.
Placer.
To please.
Pesar {impersonal).
To regret.
Pesar {in all its persona).
To weigh.
Faltar or hacer falta.
To want.
Faltar.
To fail, to be
ing.
wanting or miss-
Acomodar.
To suit, to accommodate.
Convenir.
To suit, to be convenient
Importar.
To be important.
Cerca.
Near.
Lejos.
'
Far.
Dentro.
Within.
Fuera.
•
Without.
Bello.
Beautiful, fine
.
Posible.
^
Possible.
Imposible.
Impossible.
Poeta.
Poet.
Poesía.
Poetry, poem.
Pintor.
Painter.
Pintura.
Painting.
Escultor.
Sculptor.
Escultura.
Sculpture.
Placer.
Pleasure.
Prosa.
Prose.
Dios.
God.
Fruta.
Fruit
Pesar.
Regret, sorrow.
Manzana.
Apple.
Melón.
Melon.
Naranja.
Orange.
Melocotón. )
Durazno.* S
Peach.
Artes {plu).
Arts.
Arroba.
Arroba.
Arte.
Art, skill.
* Durazno, peach, the word most commonly used in many parts of
the Americas.
Digitized
by Google
160
LESSON XXXL
COMPOSITION.
¿ Le gusta á Y. la fruta f
Sí, señor, me gustan las naranjas y
los melones.
A mí me gustan los melocotones y
las manzanas.
¿ Cuál de las bellas artes le gusta á
V. másl
Me gustan todas, la música, la poe-
sía, la pintura y la escultura.
iVa V. á la ópera muy á menudo I
Voy dos ó tres veces por semana.
Me parece que Hovera pronto, y me
gusta porque tengo un gran placer
en ver llover.
I Es posible I Á mí no me gusta ver
llover ; pero me gusta muchísimo
ver nevar.
4 Le acomoda á V. ese caballo?
No me conviene^ porque es muy
viejo, así que no lo compraré.
¿Vive V. cerca 6 lejos de aquí!
Vivo muy cerca.
4 Vive V. dentro ó fuera de la ciudad!
Ahora en la ciudad ; pero en el ve-
rano vivo en el campo.
¡, Qué le falta á V. para ser feliz f
No me falta nada, gracias á Dios.
Deseo conocer al pintor cuya pin-
tura tiene V. en su cuarto.
¿ Le pesa á V. de no haber estado en
el concierto f
Me pesa mucho de no haber estado,
porque no tuve el placer de ver á
su amigo de V.
Á mi me pesa de ello también.
Do you like fruit I
Yes, sir, I like oranges and melons.
I like peaches and apples.
Which of the fine arts do you like
best?
I like them all, music, poetry, paint-
ing, and sculpture.
Do you go to the opera very often f
I go two or three times a week.
It appears to me that it will soon
rain, and I am glad of it (I like
it), because I find (have a) great
pleasure in seeing it rain.
Is it possible I I do not like to see
it rain ; but I like to see it snow.
Does that horse suit you Í
It does not suit (or answer) me, be-
cause it is very old, so that I shall
not buy it.
Do you live near here, or far away f
I live very near.
Do you live in or out of town I
In town now, but in the country in
summer.
What do you want (is wanting to
you) to be happy f
I want nothing, thank God.
I desire (or wish) to know the painter
whose painting you have in your
room.
Do you regret not having been at
the concert 1
I deeply (very much) regret not hav-
ing been there, for I had not the
pleasure of seeing your friend.
I regret it too (also).
Digitized
by Google
LUSSOJSr XXXL
161
EXPLANATION.
154. GusTAE, deriyed from the noun gusto^ pleasure, and
signifying literally to give pleasure tOy is the yerb by which we
translate to like ; but in passing from English to Spanish, the
nominatiye case or subject becomes the objectiye, and the
latter is preceded by the preposition á ; as,
4 Le gusta á V. la poesía f I Do you like poetry f
Me gusta (or á mi me gusta) mucho, i I like it very much.
155. GusTAB, followed by the preposition de^ means to be
fond of y and sentences in which it is used are constructed as
in English ; as,
Yo gusto de la música.
Él gusta de la poesia.
1 1 am fond oí music.
I He is fond of poetry.
156. GuSTAB, used as an actiye yerb, means to taste^ and
governs the objectiye, without the aid of any preposition
whatever; as.
4 Gusta y. la sopa?
No, señor, gusto la carne.
I Do you taste the soup f
I No, sir, I taste the meat.
157. The verbs pesar^ to regret ; faltar^ in the sense of
to want, or hacer falta^ to have need of ; acomodar ^ to suit ;
convenir y to suit ; importar ^ to be important ; placer j to please,
and some others, require the same idiomatic construction of
the sentence as that explained in the case of gustar ; as.
Nos falta (or nos hace falta) dinero.
Á V. le importa ese negocio.
Mucho me place.
We want (or are in want of) money.
That business is important to you.
It pleases me much.
This last verb is defective, and is very little used, except
in the present and imperfect of the subjunctive mode, as will
be seen in the proper place.
158. The verb pesar, when meaning to regret, generally
takes the preposition de after it ; as.
Me pesa de ello.
13
1 1 am sorry for it.
Digitized
by Google
162 LESSON XXXL
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. i Le gusta á V. la ópera ? Cuando era joven me gustaba
más que ahora.
2. i Vendrá V. mañana á comer con nosotros ? Sí, señor, no
faltaré.
3. i Necesita V. hoy su reloj ? Hoy no me hace falta, mañana
me convendrá tenerlo.
4. i Quiere V. saber lo que he hecho hoy ? No me importa
saberlo.
5. i Compra V. el caballo del inglés ? No, señor, no me con-
viene : es muy caro.
6. Dicen que es muy bueno. No importa.
7. i Por qué vive V. tan lejos de la ciudad ? Porque no me
gustan vecinos.
8. Antes vivía V. cómodamente cerca de la población. Sí ;
pero ahora no me gusta.
9. ¿ Cuántas arrobas pesa V. ? Peso ocho arrobas y cinco
libras.
10. ¿ Ha visto V. á su prima ? No, señor, y me pesa mucho
de ello.
11. ¿ Cuánto pesa su niño de V. ? No sé, porque no lo hemos
pesado aún.
13. i Quiere V. ir á paseo con D. Carlos, nuestro vecino ? No
quiero ir con él porque habla mucho, y no me gustan los habla-
dores.
13. No obstante, el año pasado estaba V. en buena amistad
con él. Sí ; pero ahora me pesa y me pesará siempre.
14. ¿ Nunca serán Vds. amigos otra vez ? Jamás : es im-
posible.
15. i Por qué ? No puedo decírselo á V.
16. i Eso no le gustará á él ? Nada me importa.
17. ¿ Están Vds. comiendo pan ? No, señor, estamos comiendo
fruta.
18. i Gusta V. ? * Sí, comeré una manzana.
19. i No le gustan á V. los melones ? Sí, señor ; pero me gus-
tan más los melocotones y las naranjas.
20. ¿ Quién es aquella señorita tan bella que paseaba ayer con.
V. en el parque ? Es una amiga mía.
♦ Literally, do you wish ; but it means, would you like some! will you
have some!
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXXI. 163
21. I Qué son los hombres que vinieron antes de ayer con V. ?
El uno es poeta, el otro pintor y escultor el otro.
22. ¿ Cuál de las bellas artes le gusta á V. más ? Todas me
gustan : pero la poesía más que las otras.
23. i Le gusta á V. leer una bella poesía ? Sí, señor, me gusta
mucho.
24. i Hace mucho frío hoy ? Fuera hace bastante ; pero den-
tro de casa hace muy poco.
25. ¿ Por qué no fué V. al baile anoche ? Porque no me gus-
tan los bailes.
26. l Es posible que siendo tan joven no le gustan á V. ? A
mi me importa estudiar ; no bailar.
27. i Por qué no quiere V. bailar ? Porque estoy cansado.
28. i Qué es lo que le hace falta á V. para ser feliz ? Nada me
hace falta por ahora, gracias á Dios.
29. i Qué le falta á V. ? Me falta el sombrero.
30. Aquí está. ¿ Se marcha V. ?— Sí, señor, si V. no manda
otra cosa.
EXERCISE.
•
1. Are your brothers and sisters fond- of study ? They are
not so fond of it as some children I have known.
2. Do they ever read poetry ? Sometimes, but not very of ten.
3. Do you imderstand Spanish poetry ? Not yet ; but I un-
derstand prose perfectly well.
4. Do you ever eat fruit ? Yes, I am very fond of apples,
oranges, peaches and melons.
5. Is that gentleman a sculptor ? No, madam, he is a painter,
and enjoys a high reputation.
6. Do you know that it is raining ? Raining I no, I did not
(know it).
7. Do you think it is going to thunder ? I think it is (I
think so).
8. Then it is impossible to go out ? By no means {de ningún
modo) : we are not afraid of lightning.
9. Does it always lighten when it rains ? Not always.
10. Good morning, Mr. Retortillo, how do you do ? Very
well, thank you ; and how are you (and you) ?
11. What do you wish ? I have come to see if this letter is
correctly written ? It is perfectly correct
Digitized
by Google
164 LESSON XXXL
12. Who wrote that letter ? A friend of mine, who writes
Spanish very well.
13. Why do you not learn Spanish yourself ? I have no time,
and I regret it very much.
14. What profession {profesión) do you like best ? Of all
professions I like that of a physician best.
15. When did you see Miss Meléndez ? I had the pleasure of
seeing her the other day.
16. How do you like (qué tal) your new piano ? Very much.
17. Who is your music teacher ? I have none just now ; but
I used to have a German teacher.
18. How much do you w^igl^ ? I weigh a hundred and sixty-
five pounds (libras).
19. Does Charles weigh as much as Alexander? No, sir,
Alexander weighs twenty pounds more.
20. Is Mr. Martinez at home ? No, sir, he is out.
21. When will. he be in ? I do not know ; he did not say (it)
when he was going out (al salir),
22. Does your uncle live in or out of town ? In summer ho
lives out of town.
23. When he is in town where does he live ? On Twenty-
second street, near Fifth avenue.
24. How did you spend your time when you were in the
country ? I walked morning and evening, and during the day I
read the beautiful poems of Zorrilla and Espronceda.
25. Have you ever read any of Martinez de la Rosa's poems ?
Yes, but I do not like them so well as those of Meléndez.
26. Which is the greatest Spanish painter ? Spain has had a .
great number of excellent painters, but the most celebrated of aU
are Murillo and Velazquez.
27. Are your cousins pleased with their new house ? I believe
so ; but they say they liked the old one better.
28. Where did they live before taking the house in which
they reside now ? On Fourteenth street, near Seventh avenue.
29. Are they not comfortable in the new one ? It is not for
that; but they are very fond of ñowers, and they have no gar-
den now.
30. Will you come out and take a walk with me ? Yes, if
Emanuel comes with us ; if not, I shall go and practice on the
piano.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXXII.
165
LESSON XXXII.
Poder. (See this verb at the
To be able ; may, &c.
end of the booh)
Esperar.
To expect, to wait for, to hope.
Castigar.
To punish.
Engañar.
To deceive, to cheat.
Quemar.
To bum.
Tratar.
To treat; to have intercourse
with.
Tratar de.
To endeavor, to try, to treat of.
Tratar en.
To deal in.
Seguir. (See this verb at the
To follow.
end of the book.)
ADVERBS AND ADVERBIAL PHRASES.
Casi.
Almost, nearly.
I Cuánto tiempo ?
How long ?
Cuanto antes.
As soon as possible.
De Moda.
Fashionable.
De balde. )
Gratis. \
Gratis; for nothing.
De cuando en cuando.
From time to time; now and
then.
De improviso.
Suddenly, unexpectedly, un-
awares.
De veras. ^
Verdaderamente. )
Indeed, truly.
En lo sucesivo, j
En el porvenir. >
In future.
En lo futuro. )
Hasta no más.
To the utmost, to the extreme.
Poco á poco.
Little by little, by degrees, gen-
tly.
Por supuesto.
Of course.
Tal vez. )
Acaso. )
Perhaps.
Picaro. Rogue (roguish).
Coqueta. Coquette.
Bribón. Rascal.
Sociedad. Society.
Ejemplo. Example; instance.
Política. Politics.
Digitized
by Google
o
166
LESSON XXXII.
COMPOSITION.
Mi hermano está castigado algunas
veces por no saber sus lecciones.
T su amigo de Y. Alejandro, ¿ lo es
alguna vez f
Lo es de cuando en cuando; pero
mi hermana no ha sido castigada
jamás, porque sabe siempre sus
lecciones.
¿ Ha sido y. engañado alguna vezf
Hasta no más, porque hay muchos
picaros en la sociedad.
Esta casa está bien situada.
La carta estaba mal escrita.
Manuel es amado de {or por) Mar-
garita.
El libro ha sido escrito por un fran-
cés.
Se quemó (or fué quemada) la
Esta casa se hizo en seis meses.
I En cuánto tiempo se hizo la de V. f
En cosa de tres meses.
¿ Cuánto tiempo necesita V. para es-
cribir esa carta!
Está casi acabada ; estoy con V. en
un minuto.
Poco á poco ; va V. muy aprisa.
Tal vez ; pero tengo prisa y quiero
acabar pronto.
I, De veras í
Por supuesto : tengo que ir al correo.
Dios está en todas partes, lo sabe y
lo puede todo, y nos perdonará si
tratamos de hacer nuestro deber.
¿Es su reloj de Y. de modaf
Sí, señor ; pero no me gusta, porque
es muy pequeño.
My brother is sometimes punished
for not knowing his lessons.
And yoar friend Alexander, is he
ever punished (ever so) f
He is, now and then ; but my sister
has never been punished, because
she always knows her lessons.
Have you ever been deceived Í
To the utmost, for there are a great
many rogues in society.
This house is well situated.
The letter was badly written.
Emanuel is loved by Margaret.
The book was written by a French-
man.
The house was burnt.
This house was built (made) in^six
months.
How long was yours in building
(making) Í
About three months.
How long shall you be in writing
that letter Í
It is almost finished ; I shall be (am)
with you in a moment (minute).
Gently : you go very quick.
Perhaps so ; but I am in haste, and
I want to get done (finish) soon.
Indeed Í
Of course: I have to go to the post-
office.
God is everywhere; He knows all
things, and nothing is impossible
for Him (can do all) ; and He will
pardon us, if we endeavor to do
our duty.
Is your watch fashionable f
Yes, sir; but I do not like it, be-
cause it is too small.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXXII. 167
EXPLANATION.
169. Passive Voice. — The past tenses of this voice are
usually formed by the different tenses of the auxiliary ser
added to the past participle of the verb, care being taken that
the participle agree with the subject, in gender and number,
like an adjective ; as,
Soy amado.
Hemos sido amador.
Habéis sido amadas.
Serás amada.
I am loved.
We have been loved.
You have been loved.
Thou wilt be loved.
When, however, the action of the verb is conceived of as
in the present, or when allusion is made to a state or condi-
tion, the forms of estar are more common ; as.
La carta estaba mal escrita. I The letter was badly written.
Esta casa está bien situada, I This house is well located,
160. The passive verb formed by ser is used in Spanish in
the present and imperfect of the indicative mode, only when
it is designed to express a mental act ; as,
Manuel es amado de Margarita. | Emanuel is loved by Margaret.
When a mental act is not expressed, the passive verb be-
ing in the present or imperfect of the indicative mode, estar
is the auxiliary to be used, and not ser ; as.
El libro ha sido escrito por un fran-
cés, or el libro está escrito por un
francés (instead of es escrito),
161. When the action of the verb refers to the mind, the
preposition de or por may be used after the passive verb, be-
fore the agent, and por only, when otherwise ; as,
Manuel es amado de (or por) Marga- 1 Emanuel is loved by Margaret,
rita. " I
162. The Spanish language very often makes use of the
reflexive se where in English the passive voice is employed ;
as,
The house was burnt.
This house was built (made) in six
months.
The book was written by a French-
man.
Se quemó la casa.
Esta casa se hizo en seis meses.
Digitized
by Google
168 LESSON XXXIL
163. This form is preferred when the subject is an inani-
mate thing, or when it is undetermined.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ¿ No puede V. esperar ? Esperai*ó un poco.
2. ¿ No me engañará V. ? Por supuesto que no ; yo no soy
ningún picaro.
3. Buenos días. ¿ De qué están Vds. tratando ? — Estábamos
hablando de modas.
4. ¿ Puede V. decirme si mi sombrero es de moda ? No es
de la última (moda).
5. ¿ Cuánto tiempo hace que pasó esta moda ? Habrá ya un
mes, poco más ó menos.
6. i Quiere V. quemar las cartas de esa señorita ? Sí, señor,
porque es una coqueta.
7. i De veras ? Yo creía que era una señorita de mucha cir-
cunspección. Hace algún tiempo lo era; pero poco á poco ha
ido siguiendo el ejemplo de otras.
8. ¿ Tal vez el ser coqueta es de moda en la sociedad del día ?
Así lo creo.
9. V. debe excusar á las niñas ; ellas son inocentes y no creen
hacer mal en eso.
10. ¿ Ha sido V. engañado alguna vez ? Hasta no más ; por-
que hay muchos picaros.
11. ¿ Han sido castigados sus niños de V. ? Sí, señor, han sido
castigados por no saber sus lecciones.
12. ¿ Y aquel criado tan bueno que V. tenía ? Es im bribón ;
no lo quiero ni de balde.
13. ¿ De veras ? V. lo trataba muy bien. Acaso por lo mismo
que yo lo trataba bien, me ha tratado él tan mal.
14. i Le gusta á V. la sociedad ? Sí, señor, de CHando en
cuando.
15. i Por qué pues no vive V., en la ciudad ? Porque se me
quemó la casa.
16. i Cuánto tiempo hace ? Casi un mes.
17. Y ahora, ¿ no va V. allá nunca ? Voy de cuando en
cuando.
18. Eso es verdaderamente un gran mal ; pero en lo sucesivo
tendrá V. más cuidado. — Por supuesto que si
19. i No pudo V. saber quién le quemó la casa ? No ; pero
creo que fué un bribón, que me quería mal.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXXII. 169
20. I Quiere V. acabar ya ? Sí, cuanto antes ; no puedo espe-
rar más.
21. i Qué piensa V. hacer ahora ? Trato de castigar al que me
quemó la casa.
22. ¿ Y después ? Después veré si puedo hacer otra.
23. ¿ Y no tiene V. ahora ninguna allá ? Tengo una hecha
de improviso.
24. Poco á poco irá V. haciendo otra. Así lo espero.
25. ¿ Por supuesto que su señora vivirá en la ciudad ? Sí ;
pero va allá de cuando en cuando ; el otro día llegó de impro-
viso, cuando menos la esperaba.
26. i No puede V. volver mañana por aquí ? Mañana tal vez
no, pero pasado sí.
27. Entonces le espero á V. sin falta. Puede V. esperarme ;
no faltaré.
28. l Irá V. hoy á la comedia ó á la ópera ? Tal vez iré á la
ópera, porque es más de moda.
29. ¿ Nunca va V. á la comedia ? Sí ; voy de cuando en
cuando.
30. ¿ Sabe V. que se ha quemado la Academia (academy) de
Música ? Sí ; anoche lo leí en los periódicos.
EXERCISE.
1. Papa, may I go out ? Yes, you may go out for half an
hour.
2. How long is it since your house was burnt ? Only three
weeks.
3. Why does that woman punish her children so much ?
She always punishes them when they do wrong (obrar mal),
4. Does she reward (recompensar) them when they do right ?
I believe she does.
5. Why do you burn all that young lady's letters ? Because
she is only a coquette.
6. I think you are wrong ; I have known her a long time,
and I believe she is very circumspect (circumspecta),
7. Why does your family always live in the country ? Be-
cause we do not like society.
8. And is it not possible to live in town without going into
society ? It is impossible.
9. We always live in town, and yet (sin embargo) we never
go into society.
Digitized
by Google
lYO LUSSON XXXIL
10. Peter, can you write that letter for me now ? I can.
11. When do you want it ? As soon as possible.
12. Have you ever been deceived by that man ? Yes, very
often ; he is a rascal.
13. How long have you known him ? Not long ; but each
time I have had business with him, he has deceived me.
14. Indeed ! What business is he in ? I cannot tell you.
15. Do you often go to the theatre ? Never to the theatre ; I
go to the opera now and then.
16. Can you tell me whether my hat is fashionable ? Yes, it
is in the latest fashion.
17. Is Peter s the fashion too ? No, those hats went out of
fashion last year.
18. Where is your old servant? He lives with us no
longer.
19. Did you give Charles the fruit you were to buy for
him ? No, he came for it the other day, but I had not had
time to buy it.
20. Why did you come so late to-day to your lesson? My
exercise was very diflBcult, and I could not finish it in time.
21. Well, I hope you will come in time in future ? Yes, in
future I shall come at four o'clock precisely.
22. I hope you will not deceive me ? Of course I shall not ;
I never deceive anybody.
23. Will that young gentleman* beat the concert witi\ you
to-morrow night ? Perhaps he will go with us.
24. Does he not go every night ? Indeed I do not know.
25. How long is it since you began to take lessons ? About
{cerca dé) four months.
26. And do your brother and sister take their lessons at the
same hour as you ? No, my brother takes his at ten o'clock, and
my sister at twelve.
27. Where did you become acquainted with the gentleman
who danced last with your cousin (fern,) yesterday evening ? I
made his acquaintance in Madrid the year before last (hace dos
años).
28. Has this young man deceived you as often as his father ?
He has ; you know children almost always follow the example
of their parents (padres).
* Caballerito.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXXIIL
171
29. Do you think Charles is loved by Louisa ? I think she
loves him as much as it is possible to love.
30. What did you tell the tailor ? I told him you wanted
your coat and vest for the day after to-morrow. .
LESSON XXXIII.
REFLEXIVE VERBS.
INFINITIVE MODE.
Lavarse.
Haberse lavado.
Haberse de lavar.
To wash one's self.
To have washed one's self.
To have to wash one's self.
PRESENT PARTICIPLE.
Lavándose.
Habiéndose lavado.
Habiéndose de lavar.
Washing one's self.
Having washed one's self.
Having to wash one's self.
INDICATIVE PRESENT.
(Yo) me lavo.
(Tú) te lavas.
(Él) se lava.
(Nosotros) nos lavamos.
(Vosotros) os laváis.
(Ellos) se lavan.
I wash myself.
Thou washest thyself.
He washes himself.
We wash ourselves.
You wash yourselves.
They wash themselves.
{The other simple tenses are conjugated in like manner,)
PERFECT.
(Yo) me he lavado.
(Tú) te has lavado.
(Él) se ha lavado.
(Nosotros) nos hemos lavado.
(Vosotros) os habéis lavado.
(Ellos) se han lavado.
I have washed myself.
Thou hast washed thyself.
He has washed himself.
We have washed ourselves.
You have washed yourselves.
Thev have washed themselves.
(The other compound tenses are conjugated in like ma>nner,)
CJortar.
Cortarse.
Afeitar.
To cut.
To cut one's self ; to be ashamed.
To shave.
Digitized
by Google
172
LüSSOlf^ XXXIII.
J
Afeitarse.
Levantar.
Levantarse.
Cansar.
Cansarse.
Descansar.
Descansarse.
Contentar. •
Contentarse.
Burlar.
Burlarse.
Preguntar.
Responder.
Engañar.
Engañarse.
Temer. Reir.
Barbero.
Cansancio
Descanso.
Contento.
Respondón.
Cuchillo.
Pelo ó cabello.
To shave one's self.
To raise, to lift
To get up, to rise.
To weary, to fatigue, to tire.
To tiré one's self, to get tired.
To rest.
To content, to please.
To content one's self.
To mock, to jest.
To jest, to make jest of, to laugh
at
To question, to ask, to enquire.
To answer.
To deceive.
To deceive one's self.
To fear. To laugh.
Arriba.
Up.
Abajo.
Down.
Detrás.
Behind.
Encima.
Upon, above.
Debajo.
Under.
Luego.
Presently.
i Qué tal ?
How ; how do you do ?
Descansadamente.
Easily.
De burlas.
In jest
Descansado.
Rested.
Contento.
Content
Barber.
Weariness, fa-
tigue.
Rest
Contentment.
Ever ready to
reply.
Knife.
Hair.
Pregunta.
Respuesta.
Question, query.
Answer.
Burla. Jest
Declinación. Declination.
Derivación. Derivation,
Disposición.
Uña.
Disposition.
Nail (finger).
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXXIIL
173
COMPOSITION.
¿ Á qué hora se levantó V. ayer I
Me levanté temprano ; me levanto
al amanecer todos los días.
¿ Qué hizo V, entonces I
Me afeité y salí.
I Se lava V. antes de afeitarse I
Me afeito antes de lavarme.
I Son fáciles de aprender las palabras
declinación, derivación y dispo-
sición I
Son facilísimas, porque casi todas
las palabras que acaban en ción
son lo mismo en inglés, cambiando
la c en t.
Tengo un barbero que afeita muy
bien, pero es carísimo ; | qué tal
afeita el de V. ?
El mío no afeita muy bien ; pero es
baratísimo, porque me afeito yo
mismo.
Ahora me afeita el barbero, porque
me he cortado la maño y no pue-
do afeitarme yo mismo.
% Por qué se burla V. de su amigo I
Me burlo de él porque se levanta
muy tarde.
I Se ha cansado V. de estudiar?
No, señor, porque cuando me canso
de estudiar, descanso escribiendo.
% Ama y. á su hermano?
Nos amamos el uno al otro.
4 Le gusta á V. más preguntar que
responder ?
No, señor, yo no soy preguntón, y
me gusta hacer ambas cosas.
Yo no trabajo mucho, lo hago des-
cansadamente.
¿Se engaña V. á sí mismo alguna vez I
V. habla de burlas ; puede uno en-
gañarse á sí mismo jamás Y
At what o'clock did you get up yes-
terday I
I rose early; I rise at daybreak
every morning.
What did you do next (then) I
I shaved myself and went out.
Do you wash yourself before shaving
(yourself) ?
I shave before washing myself.
Are the words declination, deriva-
tion and disposition easy to learn ?
They are very easy, because all words
ending in cion are the same in
English, changing the c into t
I have a barber that^ shaves very
well, but he is exceedingly high
(dear) ; how does your's shave I
Mine does not shave very well ; but
he is very cheap, for I shave my-
self.
The barber shaves me at present
(now), because I (have) cut my
hand, and I cannot shave myself.
Why do you make fun of your friend?
I make fun of him because he gets
up very late.
Have you got tired of studying ?
No, sir ; because when I get tired of
studying, I rest myself by writing.
Do you love your brother?
We love each other.
Do you like to ask questions better
than to answer them ?
No, sir, I am not inquisitive; I
like to do both.
I do not work much ; I do it at my
ease.
Do you ever deceive yourself ?
You speak in jest ; can one ever de-
ceive himself ?
Digitized
by Google
174
LESSON XXXIII.
Por supuesto que sí.
¿ Está su amigo de Y. abajo 6 arriba ?
i Está mi libro debajo ó encima de
la mesa?
¿ Qué tal le gusta á V. Nueva York f
Certainly (so).
Is your friend up-stairs or down-
stairs?
Is my book upon the table or un-
der itf
How do you like New York f
EXPLANATION.
164. Eeflexive Verbs. — Almost all active verbs may be-
come reflexive in Spanish, and be used pronominally. The
objective pronoun must be of the same person as the subject,
and each person is conjugated with a double personal pro-
noun. However, the nominative pronoun is almost always
included in the verb in Spanish, while in English it is ex-
as.
Infinitive. Amarse.
To love one's self.
Fart, Prea, Amándose.
Loving one's self.
INDICATIVE PRESENT.
Me amo.
I love myself.
Te amas.
Thou lovest thyself.
Se ama.
He loves himself.
Nos amamos.
We lo7« ourselves.
Os amáis.
You love yourselves.
Se aman.
They love themselves.
And in the same manner in all the other tenses.
165. When an agent performs an action upon a part of
himself, the verb is made reflexive ; and the possessive pro-
nouns, my, his^ etc., are translated into Spanish by the article
el^ la^ ¡08, las ; as.
Me corto el cabello.
Se corta las uñas.
I cut my hair.
He cuts his nails.
166. When the verb denotes a reciprocity of action be-
tween two or more individuals, it is formed, in Spanish, ii^
the same manner as the plural of reflexive verbs ; as,
Nos amamos.
Os engañasteis.
Se temerán.
We love one another.
You deceived each other.
They will fear each other.
Digitized
by Google
LJSSSON XXXIIL 175
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ¿ Se ha afeitado V. ? Ni me he lavado ni afeitado.
2. I Cuántas veces lava la criada á los niños ? Los lava por
la mañana, al medio día y á la noche.
3. i Cuándo les corta las uñas ? Se las corta los miércoles j
los sábados.
4. ¿ Se lavantan temprano ? Á las seis en verano, y á las
siete en invierno.
5. i Por qué no se levantó V. hoy más temprano ? Porque el
criado no me despertó.
6. i No despierta V. temprano ? Cuando estoy cansado, no.
7. i Estaba V. muy cansado ayer ? Sí, señor, el paseo me
cansó mucho.
8. Entonces, ¿ querrá V. descansar hoy todo el día ? No, he
descansado ya bastante durante la noche.
9. i Con cuánto dinero se contenta V. ? Yo me contento con
poco.
10. i Se contentará V. con diez pesos ? Se burla V. de mí.
11. No, yo sólo pregunto. — V. me pregunta y yo respondo
que no.
12. i Habla V. de burlas ó de veras ? Hablo de veras ; yo no
me contento con menos de cien pesos.
13. i Se burla V. de mí ? No, señor, yo nunca hablo de burlas ;
y V. tendrá que contentarse con lo que se le ha dado ya.
14. V. es quien se engaña. — El engañado será V., yo no.
15. i Para qué llama V. al barbero ? Para afeitarme.
16. i Por qué no se afeita V. mismo ? Porque tengo miedo de
cortarme.
17. i Dónde está el cuchillo ? Está sobré la mesa.
18. ¿ Adonde va V. ? Voy á cortarme el pelo.
19. ¿ Dónde vive su barbero ? Vive detrás de la iglesia.
20. i Preguntó V. al criado por mis botas ? Sí, señor, me dijo
que estaban debajo de la cama.
21. i Sale V. ahora á paseo ? No, señor, saldré después.
22. i Qué tal está su amigo de V. ? Ahora está más contento.
23. i Qué tal es el criado que tiene V. ahora ? Es muy res-
pondón.
24. i Dónde está su padre de V., arriba ó abajo ? Antes estaba
abajo, ahora me parece que está arriba.
25. ¿ Qué tal ha pasado V. la noche ? Muy descansadamente ;
he dormido muy bien.
Digitized
by Google
176 LESSON XXXIIL
26. i Cómo están escritos los ejercicios de su gramática de V. ?
Están por preguntas y respuestas.
27. i Hizo V. la pregunta que le dije ? Sí ; pero no me dieron
respuesta.
28. i De qué trata la lección de hoy ? De la declinación y de-
rivación de los nombres, y de la disposición de las palabras en la
composición.
29. i Qué está V. leyendo ? Las disposiciones del rey Car-
los III.
30. i Aprende bien el español su amigo de V. ? No, señor,
tiene muy poca disposición para las lenguas.
31. i Qué hizo V. ayer después que se levantó ? Me lavé y me
afeité.
32. ¿ Se cansó V. mucho ayer ? Sí, señor, me cansó mucho el
paseo al parque.
33. i Necesita V. descanso ? Descanso bastante de noche.
EXERCISE.
1. Where do you sleep ? In the small room on the third floor
{pisó),
2. What time do you get up every morning ? I generally
rise at six o'clock.
3. At what hour do your children rise in summer ? They
rise at daybreak.
4. At what time do they go to bed ? At nightfall.
5. Where do you wash yourself ? I wash myself in my own
room.
6. Do you wash yourself in hot {caliente) or cold water ? I
wash myself always in cold water.
7. Why do you not wash sometimes with warm water ? Be-
cause cold water is much better for the skin {cutis).
8. Where do you go to be shaved ? I go to the barber's.
9. Where does your barber live ? In Broadway, near Broome
street.
10. Are you tired ? No, sir, I never tire myself writing.
11. Are you speaking in earnest or in jest ? In earnest ; I am
not in a humor to jest.
12. It seemed to me you were in a humor to jest a while ago ?
Not at all ; on the contrary,* it was my brother that was making^
fun of me because I had cut my hand.
* De ningún modo, al contrario.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXXIIL 177
13. Well, no matter; I know you are fond of jesting and
laughing at everybody. You deceive yourself, my dear sir
{señor mío).
14 Charles, can you go to the tailor^s to tell him I wish to see
him ? It is impossible for me to go out now, I am expecting Mr.
Valero.
15. Do not mind, I shall send John. John cannot go either ;
he has to be here at the same time as I.
16. Will you go to the post-office and ask if there are any let-
ters for me ? I asked this morning when I took father's letters,
and they told me there were none.
17. Did you see the newspaper I was reading when your cousin
came in ? There it is on the table behind the dictionary.
18. Why did you get your hair cut (hacerse cortar) ? Be-
cause it was too long (largo).
19. Indeed I I thought you liked long hair ? On ladies, yes ;
but it is not very suitable for a man.
20. Where is Peter ? I think he is up-stairs.
21. Will you do me the favor to call him ? Certainly (cierta-
mente).
22. Was the musician satisfied with what you gave him ? He
did not appear to be content.
23. How do you like the vest that my tailor made for you ?
Pretty (pastante) well ; but I like the work of my own tailor
better.
24. How is your uncle to-day ? The physician came to see
him this afternoon, and he said he was much better.
25. What are those gentlemen doing over there ? Do you not
see that they are resting ?
26. How do you know they are tired ? They have been walk-
ing all the morning.
27. Then they are very wise (hacer muy bien) to rest Of
course; rest is agreeable (grato) when one is tired (se está
cansado).
U
Digitized
by Google
178
LESSON XXXIV.
LESSON XXXIV.
IBBEGÜLAB VEBBS.
Acertar.
To guess, to make out, to
hit the mark.
INDICATIVE— iVc«ení.
Acierto.
I guess.
Aciertas.
Thou guessest
Acierta.
He guesses.
Acertamos.
We guess.
You guess.
Aciertan.
They guess.
IMPBEATIVE.
Acierta tú.
Guess thou.
Acertad vosotros.
Guess.
SÜBJUNCTIV
1Í— 'Present
Acierte.
I may guess.
Aciertes.
Thou mayest guess.
Acierte.
He may guess.
Acertemos.
We may guess.
Acertéis.
You may guess.
Acierten.
They may guess.
Verla conjugate
d like ACERTAR.
Calentar.
To warm, to heat
Cerrar.
To shut, to close.
Confesar.
To confess.
Despertar.
To awake, to wake.
Gobernar. Acercar.
To govern. To approach.
Merendar.
To lunch.
Neg;ar,
To deny.
Pensar.
To think, to intend.
Quebrar.
To break.
Sentarse.
To sit down.
&« that are recular, aUlwu^jh sm
oil changes are made to presenm tJie
pronuficiation i
)f the infinitive.
Vencer.
To vanquish, to oyercome.
ResuLTcir.
To indemnify.
Pagar.
To pay.
Digitized by
,^
LESSON XXXIV.
179
Delinquiir.
Escoger.
Poseer.
Proveer.
Huir.
Argüir.
To commit a fault, to transgress.
To choose.
To possess.
To provide.
To flee, to fly.
To argue.
Aver.
Let us see.
Quizá.
Perhaps.
Delincuente.
Delinquent, offender, transgres-
sor.
Inocente.
Innocent.
Franco.
Frank, open.
Cualquiera.*
Any, any one, some one, what-
ever, whatsoever.
Cualquiera parte.
Any place.
Fuego.
Jardinero.
Motivo.
Sofá.
Fh^.
Gardener.
Motive.
Sofa.
Consecuencia.
Prudencia.
Verduras.
Deuda.
Consequence,
conclusion.
Prudence.
Vegetables.
Debt
COMPOSITION.
4 Le gnista á Y. calentarse al fuego?
Sí, sefior, me gusta calentarme al
fuego en el invierno cuando hace
mucho frío.
4 Qué calienta el criado?
Está calentando el café.
|Á qué hora despertó V. ayer?
4 A ver si acierta V. I
No sé, quizá despertó V. á las cinco.
Despierto todas las mafianas á las
cuatro y media.
Do you like to warm yourself at the
firet
Yes, sir, I like to warm myself at
the fire in winter when it is very
cold.
What is the servant warming?
He is warming the coffee.
At what hour did you awake yester-
day?
Let us see if you can f guess ?
I do not know ; perhaps you awoke
at five o'clock.
I awake every morning at half-past
four.
■ Cualquiera drops the final a when it precedes a masculine singular
noun.
f Words printed in italics are not to be translated into Spanish.
Digitized
by Google
180
LESSON XXXIV.
4 Cierra Y. la puerta ó la abre f
He cerrado la puerta y abierto la
ventana.
4 Es delincuente aquel hombre f
Lo creo, porque huye.
Niego la consecuencia ; V. no arguye
bien, él puede ser inocente y huir
por prudencia.
4 Se proveyó V. de flores?
Me proveí de fruta y mi hermana
de verduras.
4 Pagó V. por ellas al jardinero I
Yo le pagué la fruta y mi hermana
le pagó las verduras.
4 Piensa Y. ir á Europa este verano 1
Deseo irme á alguna parte, porque
confieso que tengo mucho miedo
del cólera.
Hay muchos que niegan tener mie-
do ; pero yo tengo el valor de con-
fesarlo francamente.
4 Á qué hora se desayuna Y. ?
Me desayuno á las ocho, meriendo á
las dos y como á las seis.
4 Me promete Y. ir á comer conmigo
hoyf
Entre comer ó merendar con Y. es-
cojo el merendar, porque Y. come
demasiado temprano.
Are you shutting the door or open-
ing it 1
I have shut the door and opened the
window.
Is that man a transgressor?
I think so, for he flees.
I deny the conclusion ; you do not
argue correctly (well) ; he may be
innocent and flee (or fly) for pru-
dence.
Did you provide yourself witii flow-
ers f
I provided myself with fruit, and
my sister with vegetables.
Did you pay the gardener for them t
I paid him for the fruit, and my sis-
ter paid him for the vegetables t
Do you intend to go to Europe this
summer I
I wish to go somewhere, for I con-
fess I am very much afraid of the
cholera.
There are many who deny being
afraid ; but I have the courage to
confess it freely.
At what hour do you breakfast t
I breakfast at eight, lunch at two,
and dine at six.
Will you (do you) promise to come
and dine with me to-day t
Between lunching and dining with
you, I choose lunching, for you
dine too early.
EXPLANATION.
167. Irregulab Verbs. — All verbs that are not conju-
gated throughout according to the model verbs already given
{hablar^ aprender^ escribir) are called irregular,
168. It is, however, to be observed, that although some
verbs vary slightly in their radical letters, they are not to be
considered as irregular on that account, inasmuch as those
changes take place in order to preserve throughout the whole
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXXIV. 181
conjugation the sound of the root consonants. This obser-
vation should be carefully borne in mind, so as not to take
for irregular verbs those which are really not so.
Many verbs ending in car, cer, cir, gar, for instance, un-
dergo respectively the variations mentioned above : those in
car change the c into qu before e ; as,
Tocar. I To touch.
To^t^ (instead of tocé). I I touched ;
those in cer and cir change the c into z before a and o ; as,
Veneer. To vanquish.
Ven^o (instead of venco). I vanquish.
Resarcir. To indemnify.
Resarzo (instead of resarco). I indemnify ;
and lastly, those in gar take u after the g before e ; as,
Pagar. i To pay.
Pagué (instead of page). I I paid.
For the same reason delinquir changes qu into c, before a
and 0 ; as, delinco, delinca, delincamos ; and escoger, to choose,
changes the g into j before a and o ; as, escojo, escoja.
169. The verbs which terminate in eer, as creer, to be-
lieve ; leer, to read ; poseer, to possess ; proveer, to provide,
in those terminations which contain an i, change it into y
whenever it is to be joined with another vowel ; as, creí,
creyó ; leí, leyeron ; poseí, poseyere ; proveí, proveyíremos, &c.
170. The same change is made in the verbs ending in uir,
when the u and the i make a part of two different syllables.
Thus huir, to fly, makes, in the third person of the preterit
deñnite, huyó ; argüir, to argue, makes argüyó, &c.
171. The regular irregular verbs, about five hundred arid
fifty in number, may be divided into seven classes, present-
ing each a certain regularity in its irregularity; that is
to say, whose irregularities occur in the same persons and
tenses, so that when the pupil has learned seven verbs, or one
of each of those groups, he will be able to conjugate all the
regular irregular verbs, leaving only the few that conñne their
irregularities to themselves and their compounds, the major-
ity of which have already been introduced in previous les-
Digitized
by Google
182 LESSON XXXIV.
sons, such as hdber^ tener ^ &c. ; but the student can find them
all conjugated near the end of the book.
Acertar may serve as a model for the conjugation of the
first of these seven classes of irregular verbs, just as hablar
does for the first conjugation of the regular verbs. The
irregularity of acertar j and of all those conjugated like it,
consists in its taking an i before the last e of the stem, in the
firsty second and third persons singular, and the third person
plural of the indicative present, of the subjunctive present,
and in the second person singular of the imperative. {See
list of the irregular verbs near the end of the booh.) In all
the other modes and tenses those verbs are regular, and the
pupil can easily form them according to their respective con-
jugations.
172. Pagab may take for its direct object either the value
paid or the thing paid for, while the person paid is the indi-
rect object. Por may be used before the thing paid for ; as,
Pago los caballos, or pago por los I pay for the horses.
caballos.
Pago mil pesos por los caballos.
Pago al comerciante mil pesos por
los caballos.
I pay a thousand dollars for the
horses.
I pay the merchant a thousand dol-
lars for the horses.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. i Acertará V. la casa de su prima ? Sí, señor, yo la
acertaré.
2. i Podrá V. acertar quién estuvo aquí ayer ? No acierto.
3. i No entiende su hermano de V. lo que le digo ? Sí, señor ;
pero no acierta á responder.
4. ¿ Se calienta V. al fuego ? Sí, señor, porque hace mucho
frío.
6. 4 Por qué no cierra V. entonces la puerta ? Confieso que
no había pensado en ello.
6. i Á qué hora despertó V. esta mañana ? Desperté á las diez.
7. i El que gobierna una casa y una familia, no debe levan-
tarse temprano ? No lo niego.
8. i Piensa Y. merendar hoy ? Sí, señor, nosotros merenda-
mos todos los días.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXXIV. 183
9. i Por qué no se sienta V. en aquella silla, que es mejor ?
Porque tengo miedo de romperla.
10. i Le pagó V. á su criado ? Sí, señor, le pagué ayer y hoy
se ha huido.
11. ¿ No le perdonará V. ? No, señor, porque quien delinquió
una vez delinquirá dos.
12. ¿ Y no se resarció de su trabajo ? Sí, señor, antes se pro-
veyó de ropa en mi casa.
13. ¿ Qué lenguas posee él ? El inglés, el francés y el
italiano.
14. i Quién posee ahora la casa de campo de Y. ? El ameri-
cano la posee.
15. ¿ Se la ha pagado á V. ? No, señor, no me pagó nada.
16. ¿ Compró V. flores al jardinero ? Le compré verduras y
mi hermana le compró flores.
17. i Le pagaron Vds. al jardinero por ellas ? Yo le pagué
las verduras y mi hermana pagó por las flores.
18. i Á quién le gustan más las flores, á V. ó á su hermana ?
Creo que á ella le gustan más las flores ; pero á mí me gusta más
la fruta.
19. ¿ Qué fruta le gusta á V. más ? Me gustan las naranjas y
las manzanas.
20. i Paga V. siempre sus deudas ? Las pago cuando tengo
dinero.
21. ¿ Piensa V. ir al campo este verano ? Deseo ir á cual-
quiera parte, porque confieso que tengo mucho miedo del
cólera.
22. ¿ No tiene V. vergüenza de confesarlo ? Hay muchos que
niegan tener miedo ; pero yo tengo el valor de confesarlo fran-
camente.
23. i Á qué hora despertó V. ayer ? Ayer, creo que desperté
á las cinco. Despierto todos los días á las cuatro y media.
24. ¿ Y á qué hora se desayuna V. ? Me desayuno á las siete,
meriendo á las dos y como á las seis.
25. i Me promete V. venir hoy á comer conmigo ? No puedo
prometérselo, porque no sé si tendré tiempo.
EXERCISE.
1. How cold it is this morning I Yes, it is very cold.
2. Will you not come and warm yourself at the fire ? No,
thank you ; I do not like to warm myself at the fire.
Digitized
by Google
184 LESSON XXXIV,
3. In that case it is better to shut the doors and the win-
dows. Perhaps it Í8.*
4. Do you intend remaining (estarse) here during the win-
ter ? If my uncle remains, I shall too.
5. Will you not choose other rooms if you remain ? Yes, I
intend to do so.
6. Q-ood evening, Charles ; wilt not thou sit down for a few
minutes ? With pleasure.
7. Did you find out (make out) the musician^s house yester-
day ? I made out the house without much difficulty, but I did
not see him. .
8. How was that ? He must have been out, for I knocked
at his door.
9. At what hour do you dine ? I generally dine at six
o'clock.
10. Then you lunch at noon? Yes, sir, I generally lunch
about that hour.
11. Do you eat fruit every day at dinner ? Not every day.
12. Did your brother pay for the fruit he bought last week ?
No ; but he has to go out to-morrow, and perhaps he will go and
pay for it.
13. Let us go and take a walk. Where do you wish to go ?
14. We can go to Central Park. Very well ; let us go there ;
I think it is the finest promenade in the city.
15. At what time do they open the park in the morning ? I
believe it is open in summer at five o'clock.
16. And at what time is it shut ? At eleven o'clock, I believe,
or perhaps a little later.
17. In that case it will be better not to go there until to-
morrow ; it is now rather too late (algo tardé).
18. How too late ? It is only half -past seven, so that we have
three hours and a half for walking.
19. Where are they taking that man to ? They are taking
him to prison (la cárcel),
20. What are they taking him to prison for ? He must be
guilty of some misdemeanor (delinquir),
21. Has the servant taken the letter to the pianist yet ? He
took it to him yesterday afternoon.
22. Have you seen the news this morning ? No ; what news
is there ?
* English words printed in italics are not to be translated into Spanish.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXXV. 185
23. There was a great fire last night on Fourth street, and
twelve houses were burned.
24. Where is Alexander ? He is up-stairs.
25. Have any of you seen my Spanish dictionary ? Yes, I
had it this morning in my room.
2^. What were you doing with it ? I was looking for a new
word which I met with *' while reading the history you lent me.
27. How did you manage (acertar) to wake so early this morn-
ing ? My brother awoke me by singing in my room, at five
o'clock.
28. At what time do you generally wake ? If no one comes
to interrupt (interrumpir) my sleep, I never wake before nine.
29. Is it not better for the health to rise early ? Certainly ;
but then it is necessary to go to bed early also.
30. Why do you not go to bed early ? I am fond of reading
and study, and so I rarely go to bed before two o'clock in the
morning (de la madrugada).
LESSON XXXV.
IRREGULAR VERBS— (7on/mwed
Acostar. | To put to bed.
INDICATIVE — Present
A-Cuesto^ acuestas, acuesta. I I put to bed, &c.
Acostamos, acostáis, acusatan. I We put to bed, &c.
IMPERATIVE.
. . . , . J , \ \ Put (thou) to bed.
Acuesta tu, acostad vosotros. I t^ , , <J.^.^
^ I ( Put (you) to bed.
SUBJUNCTIVE — Present
Acueste, acuestes, acu^este, acos-
temos, acostéis, acuesten.
I may, or can, put to bed, &c.
VERBS CONJUGATED LIKE ACOSTAR.
Acostarse.
Aprobar.
Almorzar.
To go to bed, to lie down.
To approve.
To breakfast.
* English words in italics are not to be translated.
Digitized
by Google
186
LESSON XXXV.
Contar.
Consolar.
Encontrar.
Mostrar.
Probar.
]Elecordar.
Reprobar.
Bogar.
Soñar.
To count ; to relate, or telL
To console.
To meet.
To show.
To prove ; to try ; to taste.
To remind ; to remember.
To reprove.
To entreat
To dream.
Delicioso.
Delicious.
Espacioso.
Spacious.
Industrioso.
Industrious.
Eeligioso.
Religious.
Aristocrático.
Aristocratic.
Clásico.
Classic.
Fanático.
Fanatic.
Monárquico.
Monarchical
Tiránico.
Tyrannical.
Trágico.
Tragic.
Poético.
Poetical.
Analítico.
Analytical.
Satírico.
Satirical.
Filosófico.
Philosophical.
Cómico.
Comic, comical.
Económico.
EconomicaL
Lacónico.
Laconic.
Metódico.
Methodical.
Crónico.
Chronic.
Vaso.
Sermón.
Mundo.
Capítulo.
Perro.
Tumbler, gla
Sermon.
World.
Chapter.
Dog.
Taza. Cup.
Moral. Moral.
República. Republic.
Independencia. Independence.
Religión. Religion.
COMPOSITION.
Manuel, acuéstate temprano y leván-
tate temprano también.
Alejandro, cuéntame lo que te dijo
Luisa.
Emanuel, go to bed early and rise
early too.
Alexander, tell me what Ijouisa told
thee.
Digitized
by Google
LUSSOJ}^ XXXV.
187
Ayúdate y Bios te ayudará.
Ama á tú prójimo como á ti mismo.
Sé religioso, pero no seas fanático.
Sé industrioso y económico y no se-
rás pobre.
Sentémonos, que estoy cansado.
Amaos como hermanos y no habléis
mal uno del otro.
Entre V¿, Dn. Pedro, y tome V.
asiento, or siéntese V.
No puedo, estoy de prisa.
Juan, cierra la puerta, pero no cierres
la ventana.
Caballeros, entren Vds., y les mos-
traré mis libros.
Alejandro, confiesa tu falta y te la
perdonaré.
No los ofendamos.
Amigos, cantemos y bailemos y sea-
mos felices.
No támaras en vano el nombre del
Señor tu Dios.
Help thyself, and God will help
thee.
Love thy neighbor as thyself.
Be religious, but not fanatical.
Be industrious and> economical and
thou wilt not be poor.
Let us sit down, for I am tired.
Love each other as brothers, and
speak no evil one of another.
Come in, Mr. Peter, take a seat, or
be seated.
I cannot, I am in a hurry.
John, shut the door, but do not shut
the window.
Come in, gentlemen, and I shall
show you my books.
Alexander, confess thy fault, and I
shall pardon thee.
Let us not offend them.
My friends, let us sing, dance and
be merry.
Thou shalt not take the name of the
Lord thy God in vain.
EXPLANATION. •
178. The verb acostar is irregular in the same forms as
acertar y and changes the o of the stem to ue. (See this verb
and those conjugated like it near the end of the booh,)
174. The IMPERATIVE MODE Is used for commanding or
inciting, and its only true forms are the second persons, sin-
gular and plural. The subjunctive is used to take the place
of the first and third persons, as will be seen more fully later.
The IMPERATIVE may not be used with negatives, but, instead,
the SUBJUNCTIVE : as.
No lo hagas. >
ais.)
Do not do it.
No lo hagáií
176. As has already been said, the s of the first person
plural, and the d of the second, are suppressed before nos and
OS I as,
Amémonoa.
Amáoa.
Let us love each other.
Love one another.
Digitized
by Google —
188 LESSON XXXV,
176. When the subjunctive is substituted for the nega-
tive imperative, the objective pronouns are placed before
it; as,
No lo digas. . I Do not tell it.
No los ofendamos. I Let us not offend them.
177. The future of the indicative is often used as a soft-
ened imperative in stating commands ; as.
No tomarás en vano el nombre del I Thou shalt not take the name of the
Señor tu Dios. I Lord thy God in vain.
178. Many English adjectives ending in ous are rendered
into Spanish by changing this termination into oso ; as.
Delicioso. I Delicious.
Espacioso. I Spacious, &c.
179. Many English nouns and adjectives ending in ic or
icdl have in Spanish the termination ico ; as,
Fanático. I Fanatic, fanatical.
Poéttco. I Poetic, poetical.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. Luisa, estudia bien tu lección de español y escribe los
ejercicios.
2. i Qué me dará V., papá, si la estudio bien y no hago faltas
en los ejercicios ? Te llevaré conmigo al Parque Central.
3. Papá, i no llevará V. á Alejandro y á Manuel con noso-
tros ? Si son buenos muchachos y estudiosos los llevaré también.
4. Alejandro, ven acá y cuéntame qué hiciste ayer en el
campo. — Con mucho gusto. Por la mañana me levanté tem-
prano, me lavé y almorcé y después fui á pasearme. Volví muy
cansado y me acosté á las nueve.
5. ¡ Juan I ¿ Señor ? Mañana me desx)ertarás á las cinco,
me limpiarás las botas y me traerás el caballo temprano, porque
quiero ir á dar un paseo y tomar un vaso de leche en el hotel del
Parque Central.
6. Amigo mío, no seas fanático, pero sé religioso. No seas
satírico ni hablador, pero sé prudente, económico é industrioso y
serás feliz.
7. Por Dios, Don Pedro, no hable V. más, le prometo á V.
estudiar y ser buen muchacho.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXXV. 189
8. No seas respondón, haz tu deber, ayúdate y Dios te ayu-
dará.
9. Don Pedro, á mí no me gustan los sermones largos, sién-
tese V. y hablemos de otra cosa.
10. Mire V., Dn. Juan, á aquella señorita que está en la ven-
tana del vecino ; i la conoce V. ? Sí, señor, la conocí en Fila-
delña.
11. i Qué tal le gusta á V. ? Muchísimo ; es una señorita per-
fecta, y habla el español tan bien como el inglés.
12. ¿ Quiere V. llevarme á su casa ? Tengo deseo de conocerla.
— Con mucho gusto, pero antes necesito la aprobación de ella.
13. ¿ Le aman á V. mucho sus niños ? Me aman y yo los
amo ; y toda la familia nos amamos los unos á los otros, así es
que somos felicísimos.
14. i Se aman Yds. los unos á los otros tanto como se aman
Yds. mismos ? Creo que sí.
15. Hable Y. alto y despacio si Y. gusta y entonces entenderé
todo lo que Y. dice. — Así lo haré ; pero Y. no pensará en otra
cosa que en lo que yo digo, porque si no, no hablaré más.
16. i Le conviene á Y. comprar aquella casa ? No me con-
viene, porque es muy cara y está muy lejos de la ciudad.
17. ¿Qué le parece á Y. del tiempo? Hoy es el cuatro de
Julio de 1866, y por supuesto hace calor ; pero hace muy buen
tiempo para la celebración de la independencia de esta gran
República.
18. i Cuántos años hace hoy que los Estados Unidos celebran
su indei)endencia ? Ciento veinte y dos años.
19. I Parece imposible ! En im poco más de cien años ha lle-
gado esta nación á ser una de las potencias {powers) más grandes
del mundo.
20. Eso debía ser así, y no dude Y. que llegará un día en que
la libertad y la religión reinarán en el mundo haciendo felices á
todas las naciones como á otras tantas familias que tienen un
mismo padre.
EXERCISE.
1. Did you get up late to-day ? No ; I got up at daybreak to
go to walk in the country.
2. Where did you walk ? I went first to Central Park, and
then to Harlem.
3. What is the first thing we read in Telemachus ? We read
Digitized
by Google
Á
190 LESSON XXXV.
that Calypso could not console herself for the departure (par-
tida) of Ulysses.
4 Where have you been all this time, sir ? it is more than a
week since you last came to see us ; that is not right (estar bien),
I confess I am rather negligent (negligente) sometimes.
5. You have doubtless already gone to see your old friend ?
Yes, and he wanted to make me spend a month with him at his
country house.
6. What part of the country does he live in? On Long
Island, about ten miles from the city.
7. Was not he glad to see you ? We looked at each other
for about ten minutes without being able to say a word ; at last
(en fin) he broke the silence (rompió el silenció)^ and said to
me: "What! is it you, my dear friend? After seven years'
absence (avsencia) I How glad I am ! "
8. Did he know you as soon as he saw you ? Yes, and I knew
him, though I met him at some distance from his father's house.
9. Doubtless he asked you about your travels ? Of course.
" Where have you been ? " said he. " What have you done ?
what have you seen ? are you rich ? are you happy ? Tell me
all you have done since you went away (irse) ; all your adven-
tures. I wish it ; I desire it ; I beg it of you ; it will give (you
will do) me the greatest pleasure."
10. All that proves his joy at seeing you. Yes, I know that ;
but how many questions I
11. Did he wish an answer to each one of them ? Of course ;
and I answered them as well as I could.
12. What did you tell him ? I told him that after having
left France, I went to Spain, and from there into Portugal (Por-
tugal), and that after a few months passed in Lisbon (Lisboa) I
went on to Italy, where I remained four years.
13. What are the hours for breakfast and dinner among the
Italians? The Italians, like the French, usually (generally)
breakfast at eleven o'clock, and dine between five to seven in
the evening.
14. And do they never eat anything before the breakfast
hour ? Almost everybody takes a cup of coffee or chocolate
in the morning soon after rising.
15. What kind of governments are there in Europe ? In
Europe we find almost every, form (forma) of government,
republican and monarchical
1
Digitized
by Google"
LESSON XXXVI. 191
16. What is that book you have in your hand ? An analyt-
ical treatise (tratado) on Spanish poetry that I was going to
show to your cousin.
17. Have you seen Boileau^s satirical poems ? My uncle has
promised to bring me that work from Paris.
18. Are you fond of reading ? Yes, I take (find) great pleas-
ure in reading books of all kinds, classical, poetical, religious,
analytical, satirical, philosophical, &c.
19. Do you remember the peaches our friend sent us from the
country last year ? Of course I remember them, and that they
were delicious.
20. Charles, go and have your breakfast ; I wish to take you
to see the fine horse your uncle has bought for Alexander.
21. Will you not buy one for me, too, papa ? If you are a
good boy I probably shall.
22. Do you ever dream ? Very often ; last night I dreamed I
was travelling.
23. Indeed ! Where were you going ? I do not remember
now.
24. What was your father saying to Peter when I came in ?
He was reproving him for not having written his exercise yes-
terday.
25. Can you tell me what day this is ? To-day is Wednesday,
July 4th, of the year 1866, and the ninety-first of the Independ-
ence of the United States.
LESSON XXXVI.
Respetar. To respect.
Parar. To stop.
Mover. To move.
INDICÁTIVB — Present. .
Muevo, mueves, mueve, move- 1 I move, &c.
mos, movéis, mueven. \
IMPEBÁTIYE.
Mueve tú, moved vosotros. | Move, &c.
SUBJUNCTIVE — Present. ,
Mv^eva, mvsva^, musva, mova- 1 I may move, &c.
mos, mováis, mv^evan. I
/
/-dby Google
Digitized b
192
LESSON XXXVI.
Verba conjugated like motee.
Llover.
To rain.
Morder.
To bite.
Doler.
To grieve, to
pain, to ache.
Volver.
To turn, to return.
Antes que.
Before.
Aunque.
Although.
Como.
Since, provided.
Para que. )
Á fin de. )
In order that,
in order to.
Todo el mundo.
Everybody.
Principalmente.
Principally, chieñy.
Antagonista.
Antagonist.
Atrocidad.
Atrocity.
Artista.
Artist.
Capacidad.
Capacity.
Materialista.
Materialist.
Claridad.
Clearness,
Naturalista.
Naturalist.
light.
Organista.
Organist.
Ci^eldad.
Cruelty.
Violinista.
Violinist.
Dificultad.
Difficulty.
Purista.
Purist.
Eternidad.
Eternity.
Escritorio.
Office.
Facilidad.
Facility.
Clima.
Climate.
Noticias.
News.
Dolor.
Grief, pain, ache.
COMPO
Guerra.
3ITI0N.
War.
Se dice que Maximiliano ha partido
de México.
% Se cree eso I
Aquí lo cree todo el mundo; pero
en Francia no se cree.
¿ Cree V. que se podrá pagar pronto
la deuda de los Estados Unidos I
No se hará muy pronto; pero se
hará.
Aquí se habla español.
Aquí se vende buen vino.
Se perdona algunas veces á los de-
lincuentes, pero no siempre.
El hombre se engaña á sí mismo.
¿Envió V. el violin al violinista I
Se lo envié. i
It is said that Maximilian has left
Mexico.
Is that believed I
Here everybody believes it ; but in
France it is not believed.
Is it thought that the United States
debt can soon be paid I
It will not be done very soon ; but
it will be done.
Spanish spoken here.
Good wine sold here.
Transgressors are pardoned some-
times, but not always.
Men deceive themselves.
Did you send the violin to the vio-
linist f
I sent it to him, or did send it to him.
\
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXXVI.
193
¿Tocan bien el piano en España f
En Espafia se toca bien la guitarra.
¿Se habla bien el espafiol en la
América del Surf
Lo hablan y pronuncian bien.
¿Le duele á Y. la cabeza f
Sí, señor, mucho.
¿ Cómo se llama V. t
Me llamo Juan.
¿Cómo se llama eso en español f
¿ Cómo se dice eso en español f
Lo mismo que en inglés.
Do they play well on the piano in
Spain?
They play the guitar well in Spain.
Do they speak Spanish well in South
America?
They speak it and pronounce it
well.
Does your head ache t
Yes, sir, very much.
What is your name f
My name is John.
What is that called in Spanish?
How do you (or, do they) say that
in Spanish f
The same as in English.
EXPLANATION.
180. MovEE, to move, is irregular in the same forms as
acostar \ i. e., in the first, second, and third persons singular,
and the third person plural, of the indicative and subjunc-
tive modes, and in the second person singular of the impera-
tive. {See this verh^ and those conjugated like it^ at the end
of the book,)
181. Se is an indefinite personal pronoun referring to a
personal agency in such a manner as to leave undetermined
hoth the sex and the number of the subject. It corresponds,
in this respect, to the English we^ they^ people^ one or it ; in
fact, with all expressions that mention persons thus vaguely
and indefinitely. It is used with the third person singular
of the verb ; as.
It is said, or they say.
It is believed, or they believe.
They (people) will not do it, or it
will not be done.
Good wine is sold here.
Spanish is spoken here.
Se dice,
Se cree.
No ae hará.
Aquí se vende vino bueno.
Aquí se habla espafiol.
182. The four uses of the pronoun se have now been illus-
trated ; and it may be well to state them all again, in order
that its various functions may be well understood so as to
avoid all confusion. They are the following :
15
Digitized
by Google
194 LjESSO]>r XXXVI.
1st. As an indefinite subject, as has been seen in the pres-
ent lesson ; as,
Se dice, I They say.
2d. To form the passive voice of verbs (see Lesson
XXXII.) ; as,
Se perdona algunas veces á los de- 1 Transgressors are sometimes par-
lincuentes. I doned.
3d. As a reflexive pronoun ; as,
Manuel se engafia. i Emanuel deceives himself.
4th, and lastly, the objective pronoun se, for the sake of
euphony, takes the place of the objectives fe, la, lo, les (see
Lesson XXVII.) ; as,
Se lo pagaré á V. mañana. 1 1 will pay it to you to-morrow.
183. Many English nouns ending in ty may be changed
into Spanish by substituting dad for this syllable ; as,
Actividad. I Activity.
Capacidad. I Capacity.
N. B. — All nouns of this termination are feminine. Many
English nouns ending in ist, are rendered into Spanish by-
adding to these letters an a ; as.
Artista. I Artist.
Organista. I Organist, &c.
184. DoLEB. — This verb is used in the same manner as
the verb gustar, to like (see Lesson XXXI.) ; as,
¿Le duele á V. la cabeza f | Does your head ache?
The same may be expressed in the following manner :
¿Tiene V. dolor de cabezal | Have you a headache t
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Se vende buen vino en Nueva York ? Se vende bueno
y malo ; pero muy caro.
2. ¿ Qué noticias hay ? Se dice que la Alemania y la Italia
están en guerra.
3. i Se cree eso ? No sólo se cree, sino que se sabe que la
guerra ha principiado ya.
Digitized
by Google
LUSSON XXXVI. . 195
4 ¿ Se habla español en Nueva York ? En Nueva York se
hablan todos los idiomas, pero principalmente el inglés, el ale-
mán, el francés y el español.
5. ¿ Se aman los franceses y los ingleses ? Creo que no se
aman como hermanos ; pero se resx)etan.
6. ¿ A quién se ama más en este país, á los franceses ó á los
ingleses ? Es cosa que no sabré decir.
7. ¿ En los Estados Unidos se respetan las iglesias de todas
las religiones ? Sí, señor, porque hay libertad de religión ; es
una cosa muy buena para el país, y yo la deseo para todas las
naciones del mundo.
8. Hablemos de otra cosa, porque todos no son tan liberales
como V. ; y no se hará V. amigos si habla tan francamente.
I 9. Convengo con V. en eso, además no se debe decir todo
^o que se piensa ; pero para aprender una lengua se debe prac-
ticar mucho y se debe hablar de todo un poco.
10. V. tiene razón en eso, y una conversación en que no se
habla, sino de '* si hace calor ó frío, si ha estado V. en el teatro,
en el concierto, ó en la iglesia, y de si tiene V. el sombrero y el
fusil, y el vino, y el dinero de V. ó del vecino " es muy cansada.
11. Por supuesto ; pero V. debe saber que lo que se llama en
inglés small talk* es muy de moda. — Lo sé, es muy de moda, y
hasta necesario algunas veces.
12. l Le dijo V. eso á su amigo ? • No se lo dije, porque mi
hermana se lo había dicho ya.
13. ¿ Por qué no me lo dijo V. á mí ? Porque mi hermano
me ha dicho que se lo dirá á V. mañana.
14. ¿ Toca Dn. Pedro bien el piano ? No, señor, pero se en-
gaña á sí mismo y cree tocarlo muy bien.
15. Véngase V. esta tarde por aquí, é iremos á dar un paseo.
— Bien, si V. me espera hasta las seis, vendré, pero no antes, por-
que no puedo salir del escritorio hasta esa hora.
16. ¿ Qué tal tiempo ha hecho hoy en la ciudad ? Hoy ha
hecho buen tiempo y ayer hizo buen tiempo también ; pero ma-
ñana hará mal tiempo.
17. i Cómo sabe V. que hará mal tiempo mañana ? Porque
en Nueva York no hace nunca buen tiempo por tres días.
18. ¿ V. cree que no hace buen tiempo más que (sino) en la
Habana ? Perdone V. no me gusta el clima de la Habana ni el
de Nueva York.
* Charla,
Digitized
by Google
196 LUSSON XXXVI.
19. Entonces, ¿ qué clima le ^sta á V. ? El de España, por-
que allí tenemos verdaderamente las cuatro estaciones.
20. ¿ Qué quiere V. decir ? Quiero decir que en España hace
calor en verano aunque no muchísimo ; en invierno hace frío,
pero no nos helamos; en otoño hace un excelente tiempo de
otoño, y en la primavera tenemos primavera.
21. ¿ Bien, y no es lo mismo en Nueva York ? Escúseme V. ;
en Nueva York no he conocido la primavera ; hay muy pocos
días de otoño, un invierno larguísimo y un verano calurosísimo.
22. I Y en la Hahana ? En la Hahana hay todo el año el
verano de Nueva York.
23. i Yo pensaha que á V. no le gustaba hablar del tiempo ?
V. no me ha entendido ; creo que debe hablarse de todo, pero no
siempre del tiempo.
EXERCISE.
1. Why do you not come more quickly when I call you ? I
cannot come any more quickly, my head aches.
2. Where do you think Spanish is spoken best ? In Madrid,
and in all parts of Old and New Castile (Castilla).
3. And is it not spoken well in South America ? There is
some difference in the pronunciation ; but, in general, people of
education speak correctly, whether they be* South Americans
or Spaniards.
4. William, will you be good enough to take this letter to
the post-office as you go to take your lesson ? I shall take it in
the afternoon ; I have not time now.
5. Are there many organists in the United States ? Yes ;
and in New York, principally, there are a great many excellent
organists and pianists.
6. Do you like that man^s manner of speaking ? No, I do
not ; he is too much ofa\ purist.
7. Is your brother studying natural history ? I cannot tell
you whether (si) he is studying it or not ; but I know he has
just bought the complete works of Buffon.
8. Who is Buffon ? A celebrated French naturalist
9. What did that man do who was taken to prison this
morning ? They say he was arrested (arrestar) for cruelty to
animals.
* Ya sean.
f English words in italics are not to be translated into Spanish.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXXVI. 197
10. Will he be punished for it ? Of course ; transgressors of
that kind are rarely let oflF unpunished (pardoned).
11. What is the matter with Alexander ? A dog bit him on
the hand.
12. Come here, Alexander ; show mfe your hand. Is this the
one ? No, it is the other.
13. Does it pain you much ? It was very painful (pained)
when I was first bitten, but now it is less so.
14. I have always told you how necessary it is to be careful
with dogs. I know that ; and I shall do so in future.
15. Does your new watch run well ? Not very well ; it stops
three or four times a day.
16. Is your son getting on well in his studies ? Fairly well ;
he has a great deal of ability, and is fond of study.
17. Look here, Charles. What do you wish ?
18. Count from one to a thousand in Spanish. Oh ! I can do
that with the greatest ease.
19. Well, let us see ? One, two, three, four, five, six, seven,
eight, nine, ten, eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen, fifteen, sixteen,
seventeen, eighteen, nineteen, twenty, twenty-one, thirty, forty,
fifty, sixty, seventy, eighty, ninety, a hundred, a hundred and one,
two hundred, three hundred, four hundred, five hundred, six hun-
dred, seven hundred, eight hundred, nine hundred, a thousand.
20. How do they write that last word in Spanish ? I do not
remember.
21. What is that ? you do not remember ! Did you not learn
in the lesson on pronunciation, at the beginning of the gram-
mar, that in Spanish every word is written just as it is pro-
nounced ? Oh, yes, now I remember.
22. Tell me, if you please, Mr. R., is French as easy to pro-
nounce as Spanish ? They say that, on the contrary, it is much
more difficult
23. But it is not impossible to learn French pronunciation ?
I did not say that ; I only said that they say it is more difficult
than Spanish pronunciation.
24. How do I pronounce? Very well; but, in reading or
speaking, take a little more care with the z.
25. Please pronounce the name of that letter again (to return
to pronounce) ? With the greatest pleasure ; it is called z.
26. What other letter (letra) is pronounced like (the) z ? C,
when it comes (finds itself) before an e or an i.
Digitized
by Google
198
LESSON XXXVII.
LESSON XXXVII.
Subir.
Atender.
I To go up, or come up, to ascend.
I To attend.
INDICATIVB — PresenL
Atiendo, atiendes, atiende, I attend, &c.
atendemos, atendéis, atien-
den.
mPBEATIVB.
Atiende tú, atended vosotros. | Attend, &c.
SüBJXJNCTivB — Present,
Atienda, atiendas, atienda, aten- 1 1 may, or can, attend, <Scc.
damos, atendáis, atiendan. I
Verba conjugated like atender.
Ascender.
To ascend, to mount
Descender.
To descend.
Defender.
To defend.
Entender.
To understand.
Encender.
To light, to kindle.
Perder.
To lose.
Alegrarse.
To be glad, to rejoice.
Charlar.
To prattle, to chat
HaUar.
To find.
Llegar.
To arrive.
Enviar.
To send.
Preparar.
To prepare.
CONJUN
CTIONS.
Con tal que.
On condition that; provided
(that).
Puesto que.
Since, inasmuch as; supposing
that.
Dado caso que.
In case.
Hasta.
Until, till.
Aun cuando.
Even, although.
Por tanto.
Therefore.
Por cuanto.
Seeing that, for.
Á menos de. )
Á menos que. )
Unless.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXXVII.
199
También.
Además.
Ya.
Tampoco.
Ojalá.
Vapor.
Globo.
Eesfriado.
í Vapor.
( Steamer.
Balloon.
Cold.
Also, too.
Moreover, besides.
Whether, either.
Neither.
Would to God, God grant.
Altura. Height
Friolera. Trifle.
Estada, perma- Stay, perma-
nencia, nence.
COMPOSITION.
Deseo que esté estudiando su lección.
Creo que la está estudiando.
4 Piensa V. que tiene razón t
No pienso que la tenga.
No lo creeré aunque me lo digan
mil.
Lo creo aunque él lo niega.
Dudo que venga hoy.
Dudo que haya venido.
Dado caso que V. no me encuentre
en casa, aguárdeme Y. hasta que
venga.
Así lo haré con tal que Y. me pro-
meta volver pronto.
Volveré tan pronto como pueda.
Temo que no haya recibido mi carta.
I Ojalá que la reciba ! pero yo temo
que la recibirá.
Á menos que Y. venga primero á
verme, yo no iré á verle á Y.
Puesto que él haya venido, ¿ le ha-
blará Y. I
Aunque haya venido no le hablaré
antes que él me hable.
I wish him to study his lesson.
I think he is studying it.
Do you think he is right I
I do not think he is.
I shall not believe it though a
thousand tell it to me.
I believe it, although he denies it.
I doubt whether he will come to-day.
I doubt his having come.
In case you should not find me at
home, wait for me till I come.
I shall do so, on condition you prom-
ise me to come back soon (or
quickly).
I shall return as soon as I can.
I fear he has not received my letter.
God grant that he may not receive
it ! but I fear he will (receive it).
Unless you come first to see me, I
shall not go to see you.
Supposing him to have come, will
you speak to him ?
Although he have come I shall not
speak to him before he speaks to me.
EXPLANATION.
186. Atender, to attend, and all the verbs conjugated
like it, take an i before the last e of the radical letters in the
same form as acertar ; i. e., in the first, second and third per-
Digitized
by Google
200 LUSSON XXXVJL
sons singular, and third plural of the present indicative, and
the present subjunctiye, and in the second person singular of
the imperative. {See page 394.)
188. The SUBJUNCTIVE mode is that form of the verb by
which are expressed condition^ hypothesis^ contingency^ and
which is generally used in a clause subjoined or subordinate
to another clause or verb, and is preceded by certain conjunc-
tions ; as, que^ aunque^ áfin de que^ con tal que^ antes que^ &c.
As none of the modes of the English verb correspond ex-
actly to the Spanish subjunctive ; and as the tenses of the
latter are often employed to express ideas, which, in English,
are conveyed by those of the indicative or the potential, and
not unfrequently by the infinitive, pupils experience much
difficulty in determining when the subjunctive is to be used.
Were we to give all the rules necessary for the correct use of
this mode, a whole volume might be filled ; we shall therefore
give here those most needed to guide the student in all ordi-
nary cases.
187. The subordinate verb is put in the subjunctive when
the leading verb means admiration^ wish^ will^ desire^ consent^
prohibition^ hinderance^ necessity^ command^ douht^ regret^
joy J usefulness^ contentment^ hope^ fear y surprise, ignorance^
preference, negation, permission, sorrow, &c.
The subjunctive mode is here required because we are
not positive that what we wish, command, &c., will be accom-
plished ; but the same verb which governs the subordinate
one in any of the tenses of the subjunctive, when the accom-
plishment of the action is doubtful, governs it in any of those
of the indicative when the action is regarded as certain to
take place ; as,
Q-ive it to those who (may) have
come.
Give it to the four who have (or are)
come.
In the first example, the verb is put in the subjunctive,
because the speaker is not positive how many have come, or
whether any have as yet come. In the second, the indicative
Déselo V. á los que ) ^ , ^ ,
iioyon Tenido. \ Doubtful.
Déselo V. á los cuatro )
que han venido. \ <^«^'«*'*-
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXXVIL 201
is employed, because the speaker is certain that the persons
alluded to haye arrived, and is also informed as to their
number.
188. There are in Spanish certain conjunctions which re-
quire the subjunctive mode after them, on account of the in-
definite and uncertain meaning which they commonly have.
Some of them, however, it will be seen, occasionally occur
with a positive signification, and may, in that case, take the
indicative; as.
No lo creeré aunque ) ^ ^ .
1 J . if Contingent
me lo digan mil. ) ^
Lo creo aunque él ) ^ ^ .
, . ^ \ Certain.
me lo mega. )
I will Bot believe it though a thou-
sand tell it to me.
I believe it, although he denies it
(to me).
189. Finally, there are other parts of speech, and even
whole phrases, which, on account of their indeterminate and
doubtful, or contingent, meaning, require the subjunctive
after them.
190. The PBESEíTT TENSE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE marks a
contingent action as going on at the present moment, or to
take place at some future time ; as.
Dudo que venga. 1 1 doubt whether he will come.
N. ^. — Another use of this mode and tense has been
noticed already in treating of the imperative. (See Lesson
XXXV.)
191. The PERFECT TENSE exprcsses a doubtful or contin-
gent action or event, as having been completed some time
past, or that will have taken place before the completion of
another future action or event ; as.
Dudo que haya venido.
Yo le daré su libro cuando él me
haya dado el mío.
I doubt whether he has come.
I shall give him his book when he
will have given me mine.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. i Espera V. que llegue hoy el vapor de Europa ? Creo
que ha llegado esta mañana.
2. Yo dudo que haya llegado todavía, i Quiere V. enviar su
criado para preguntar si ha lleg'ado el vapor ? Con mucho gusto,
porque yo también deseo tener noticias de Europa.
Digitized
by Google
202 LESSON XXXVII.
3. ¿ Cree V. que llegará un día en que pcnlamos ir á Europa
en globos aereostáticos ? Mucho me alegraré que llegue ese día,
pero creo que no lo veremos nosotros, porque es muy difícil, y
quizá imposible, el hallar la dirección de los globos.
4. ¿ Suben muy alto los globos ? No creo que suban á más
de dos ó tres mil pies, pero si se quiere pueden subir hasta la
altura de quince ó diez y seis mil pies.
5. Dado caso que llegue hoy el vapor ; ¿ espera V. á su amigo ?
Por supuesto que sí, puesto que me escribe que llegará en este
mismo vapor.
6. Ojalá que llegue, pero temo mucho que haya tomado otro
vapor y que no llegue hasta la semana próxima.
7. ¿ Duda V. que haya estudiado su lección ? Dudo que la
haya estudiado, porque es muy holgazán.
8. A menos que V. estudie bien las lecciones y haga con
mucho cuidado los ejercicios de la gramática, no aprenderá V.
el español.
9. Sí, pero yo creía que se podía aprender una lengua con
sólo la práctica. — Así es ; pero entonces se necesita practicar
todos los días con quien la hable muy bien.
10. ¿ En cuánto tiempo piensa V. que hablaré yo el español ?
V. lo hablará cuando sepa bien todas las lecciones de la gramá-
tica, y haya practicado y escrito los ejercicios.
11. Y después que haya aprendido toda la gramática^ practi-
cado, y escrito los ejercicios, ¿ hablaré perfectamente el español ?
No, señor; pero hablará V. bastante correctamente para llevar
una conversación, escribir una correspondencia, y poder hacer
negocios en esta lengua.
12. Yo pensaba que el español era una lengua muy fácil. —
Verdaderamente lo es para aprender lo que acabo de decirle á
V. ; pero para hablarlo perfectamente como V. quiere, todas las
lenguas son difíciles.
13. Y si V. no lo cree, hágame el favor de decirme si habla
V. su propia lengua y la escribe perfectamente. — Yo confieso que
todavía tengo algo que aprender en el inglés.
14. Créame V., amigo mío, el estudio de una lengua no es
una friolera. — Creo que tiene V. mucha razón ; pero hay muchos
que quieren aprenderlo todo y muy pocos que quieran estudiar.
15. i Me promete V. venir á verme cuando venga á la ciudad ?
Aunque venga á la ciudad no podré venir á ver á V. á menos
que acabe temprano mis negocios.
Digitized
by Google
LJSSSON XXXVIl 203
16. I Sabe V. hacer frases (phrases) en español con todos los
tiempos del modo indicativo ? Sí, señor, y también con el im-
perativo, el presente y el perfecto de subjuntivo.
17. Muy bien, entonces hágame V. ocho frases con los ocho
tiempos de indicativo, una con el imperativo y dos con el pre-
sente y perfecto de subjuntivo de cualquier verbo.
18. ¿ Está V, malo ? ¿ Ha estado V. hoy en el escritorio ?
¿ Estaba V. en su casa cuando su amigo fué á verlo ? ¿ Había
V. estado en el teatro antes de ir al baile ? ¿ Estuvo V. ayer en
la ciudad ? ¿ Qué hizo V. así que hubo estado algún tiempo en
el hotel ? ¿ Estará V. en casa mañana todo el día ? ¿ Habrá
escrito V. su ejercicio antes de las cuatro ? Estudia tus leccio-
nes y escribe los ejercicios. No pierdas el tiempo. ¿ Duda V.
que yo sepa mi lección ? ¿ Duda V. que yo la haya estudiado ?
EXERCISE.
1. John, there is some one at the door ; go and see who it is.
Yes, sir.
2. Is Mr. Retortillo in ? Yes, sir ; who shall I say wishes to
see him ? Tell him that Mr. Pérez wishes to speak to him a
moment.
3. Mr. Pérez wishes to see you a moment, sir. Let (qiie) him
come up.
4 Oh 1 I am so glad to see you I How are you ? how have
you been ? when did you return ? — I arrived by the steamer
Napoleón III., on Wednesday last.
5. Did you receive all the letters I wrote you during (du-
rante) my absence ? I received one in March, dated at Eome.
6. How did you spend the time ? did you pass through Spain,
as you had intended ? No ; while I was still in Paris, and pre-
paring to set out for Madrid, I learned that my brother was very
ill in Florence.
7. Indeed I I am very sorry to hear that. What was the
matter with him (what had he) ? A heavy (strong) cold, that
he had caught on his way from Turin to Florence.
8. He had not, I believe, enjoyed very good health for a long
time before leaving home ? No, he has always been sickly ; but
principally for about a year before his voyage to Europe, he had
colds almost every month, and I may say that he was never
without headaches, day or night.
9. Had he an Italian physician to attend him ? No, Dr.
Digitized
by Google
204: . LESSON XXXVII.
Pérez, his family physician, who was travelling through Italy
that same winter, just arrived at Florence the same day as my
brother, and, hearing of his illness, went at once (inmediata-
mente) to see him.
10. How long was he ill ? Nearly three weeks.
11. How ? Are you going away so soon ? Sit down and let
us chat for half an houB about your family. Thank you ; I can-
not stay any longer now, but I shall have the pleasure of seeing
you again to-morrow.
12. Where are your brothers ? They are gone to see the bal-
loon that is to go up this afternoon.
13. Indeed ? I thought the balloon was not to go up until
Saturday. It was not to have gone up until Saturday ; but, on
account of the fine weather, it is to go up this afternoon.
14. Will many persons go up in it ? Very few, I think ; peo-
ple in general do not like to go to such a height.
15. Do you understand all that is said in Spanish ? I under-
stand more and more every day ; but there are still many words
and constructions that I do not know.
16. How long do you think it will be before I can understand
all, and speak like a native ? That is a hard question to answer ;
provided you study with attention, read a great deal, and prac-
tice with Spaniards, you will soon understand and speak with
ease ; but it is difficult for a foreigner to speak any language ex-
actly like a native.
17. But do you believe it to be impossible ? No, I do not say
it is impossible, but it is very difficult ; and, besides, I do not
think it is necessary. All that is required (wanted) is correct-
ness, and the ability to converse with ease.
18. Has John's servant lighted the fire ? Not yet ; John does
not wish it to be lighted until he returns.
19. Well, Charles, have you found out* the meaning of the
word you asked me about yesterday ? No, sir ; I have searched
for it in all the dictionaries, and it is not to be found in any of
them.
20. Why do you not ask your teacher ? he can tell you im-
mediately. Yes, I know that very well ; but I do not like to ask
him so many questions : every day he comes I have a new one
to ask him.
21. Do not stop at trifles of that kind ; your teacher is very
* English words italicized are not to be translated.
Digitized
by Google
LFSSOJ>r XXXVIIL
glad to be able to answer all questions, knowing that by that
means {medio) you will learn better and more quickly.
22, I am very glad to see you defend bim, for Alexander
said he was not fond of answering questions, and did not like
inquisitive persons. — Nor does he ; but an inquisitive person is
one thing, and a person who asks questions in order to gain
knowledge is another.
LESSON XXXVIII.
Sentir. {See conjugation of
this verb near end of gram-
mar.)
Verbs conjugated like sentir.
To feel, to be sorry for, to re-
gret.
Arrepentirse.
To repent.
Consentir.
To consent.
Preferir.
To prefer.
Asegurar.
To secure, to insure, to assure.
Animar.
To animate, to encourage, to in-
duce.
Desanimar.
To dishearten, to discourage.
Ayudar.
To aid, to help.
Enfermar.
To fall (or get) sick, to make
sick.
Exigir.
To exact, to require.
Quedar.
To remain.
Perfeccionar.
To perfect, to finish.
Usar.
To use, to wear.
Generalmente.
Generally.
De memoria.
By heart.
Ambos.
Both.
De continuo.
Continually.
Perezoso.
Lazy.
Examen.
Examination.
Helena. Ellen.
Oficio.
Trade, office.
Persona. Person.
Alberto.
Albert.
Lectura. Reading, lecture.
Digitized
by Google
206
LSSSON XXXVIII.
Norte. North.
Sur, or sud. South.
Este, oriente. East
Oeste. i w t
Occidente. J
Profesión. Profession.
Escuela. School.
Muerte. Death.
Vida. Life.
Promesa. Promise.
List of the active participles or verbal nouns and adjectives formed from
the verbs already introduced.
Viviente.
Estudiante.
Escribiente.
Residente.
Tocante (en
orden á).
Eeinante.
Saliente.
Amante.
Practicante.
Principiante.
Living being.
Student.
A lawyer's clerk,
a writer in a
commercial
house
Resident.
Concerning.
Reigning.
Salient.
Lover.
Practitioner.
Beginner.
Paseante. Walker, passer-by,
promenader.
Creyente. Believer.
Conveniente. Convenient, suita-
ble.
Importante. Important
Tratante. Dealer.
Cortante. Sharp, edged.
Gobernante. Governing.
Contante. Ready.
Doliente. Sad, afficted,
mournful. *
COMPOSITION.
/
Tocante á lo que V. me dijo el otro
^^a, deseo que no se hable más de
/ ello.
Entraron cantando.
Lo encontraron leyendo.
I Qué está V. haciendo I
Estoy leyendo.
Vengo de comer.
Trabaja sin descansar.
El trabajar es bueno para muchas
cosas.
El descansar después de trabajar es
necesario.
La vimos bailar.
Manuel es estudiante industrioso.
I Es V. residente de los
Unidos I
Él es buen creyente.
\
Concerning what you told me the
other day, I wish no more to be
said about it.
They came in singing.
They found him reading.
What are you doing.
I am reading.
I am coming from dinner.
He labors without resting.
Work is good for many things.
Rest after labor is necessary.
We saw her dancing.
Emanuel is an industrious student.
Are you a resident of the united
States?
He is a good believer.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXXVIII. 207
EXPLANATION.
192. AcTiTE Paeticiples. — Many Spanish verbs have,
besides the present and past participles, another called the
active participle which is sometimes a verbal adjective and
again a verbal noun. Those formed from verbs of the first
conjugation end in ante ; as, amante^ loving, lover ; and those
formed from the second and third end in tente or ente ; as,
asistente^ assistant, ohedieyite^ obedient.
Participles of this kind cannot be formed from all verbs,
and indeed those already in existence can only be regarded as
mere verbal nouns or adjectives, inasmuch as, with the excep-
tion of a very limited nmnber to be found in use, such as to-
cante^thej do not follow the regimen of the verbs from which
they are derived.
193. Present Pabticiple.— This form of the verb, cor-
responding exactly to the English participle ending in ing,
never varies its termination in the construction of sentences.
In the first conjugation it ends in ando^ and in the second
and third in iendo. It is the best means for conveying the
idea of a progressing action or state ; as,
Entraron cantando. I They came in singing.
Le encontraron leyendo. | They found him reading.
194. The verb estar^ as has already been mentioned, is
used with the present participle in Spanish, as^the verb to le
with the sathe participle in English ;, as,
Yo estoy leyendo, 1 1 am reading.
Ellos están escribiendo» I They are writing.
196. The INFINITIVE is used in Spanish when in English
the present participle, preceded by a preposition, is used ; as
Se fué sin verlo, I He went away without seeing him.
Trabaja sin descansarse, \ He labors without resting.
196. The INFINITIVE is also used as a verbal noun or pres-
ent participle, in which case it /takes the masculine definite
article before it ; as,
El trabajar es bueno para la salud.
El descansar después de trabajar
mucho es necesario.
W^ork is good for the health.
Rei^t is necessary after much work.
Digitized
by Google
L£SSON XXXVIII.
\,
'^T.97. The Spanish language has a very peculiar but deli-
cate use of the present participle and the infinitive where
/ one or the other of these occurs in immediate connection
with a governing verb, corresponding to such English phrases
as, They entered singing^ We saw her dancing. In such a
case, when the subject of the governing verb is represented
as continuing its state or action through the appended clause,
as in the first of these sentences, it is rendered into Spanish
by the present participle ; as, Ellos entraron cantando y They
entered singing ; but if the subject is represented or under-
stood as not continuing its state or action through the ap-
pended clause, but another person or thing is introduced, the
\^ subjoined clause is rendered by the infinitive ; as, La vimos
"-bailar^ We saw her dancing.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ¿ Le gusta á V. más leer que escribir ? Me gustan ambas
cosas, pero creo que leyendo se aprende más que escribiendo.
2. i Es estudioso ese muchacho ? No, señor, pero hoy estu-
dia mucho porque mañana tienen examenes en su escuela.
3. ¿ Piensa V. que sea conveniente ese negocio ? Yo pienso
que lo es, pero quizá no lo sea.
^4. i Qué está V. haciendo ? Estoy estudiando mi lección de
español.
5. ¿ Sintió Helena mucho la muerte de su amiga ? La sintió
tanto que se enfermó.
6. i Cómo se siente ahora ? Está un poco mejor.— Me alegro
que esté mejpr, porque es muy buena poiuchacha.
7. ¿ Puede V. prestarme trescientos pesos ? Puedo prestár-
selos á V., pero no me gusta el prestar dinero (to lend).
8. ¿Cómo se aprende á hablar el español? Hablando se
aprende á hablar ; del mismo modo que bailando se aprende á
bailar y haciendo zapatos se aprende á zapatero.
9. ¿ Se arrepintió aquel hombre de su mala acción ? No lo
creo porque es un picaro que vive de engañar. ,
10. i Qué profesión ú oficio tiene ? No tiene ni oficio, ni pro-
fesión ninguna, es un paseante
11. é De dónde viene V. ? Vengo de comer.
12. ¿ De dónde viene el viónto ? Viene del Sur, pero esta ma-
ñana venía del Este.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXXV III, .
13. ¿ Llueve en Nueva York cuando está el viento al Este ?
No, señor, generalmente llueve cuando el viento está al Oeste.
14. Alberto, anímate, sé estudioso y aprende de memoria la
lección para mañana. Papá, hace mucho calor j estoy can-
sado.
15. Bien, no te desanimes, descansa un poco y vuelve á tra-
bajar después. — V. quiere que yo esté trabajando continuamente.
16. No, querido, no quiero que trabajes demasiado ; pero
acuérdate que en este mundo no se logra nada sin trabajar. —
Bien, papá, yo sé que V. tiene siempre razón, descansaré un
poco ahora y después acabaré de estudiar mi lección.
17. ¿ Se quedó mucho tiempo su amigo de V. en el concierto ?
Ambos nos quedamos hasta que se acabó.
18. A Tuvieron Vds. ayer exámenes en la escuela ? Ayer tuvi-
mos examen de gramática, antes de ayer de historia, hoy de espa-
ñol y mañana lo tendremos de aritmética.
19. Manuel, levántate y vete á la escuela. ¿No sabes qué
hora es ? No, señor, yo pensaba que era temprano.
20. ¿ Cómo, temprano ? Ya son las siete y media y todavía
tienes que lavarte y almorzar ; | vamos, vamos, perezoso, arriba I
— ^Allá voy papá, allá voy ; y dispénseme V., no sabía que era
tan tarde.
EXERCISE.
1. Have you heard any more concerning the matter about
which we were speaking the other day ? Nothing further ; but
I expect by to-morrow to be able to tell you something more.
2. When does your friend intend setting out * on his trip to
the South ? Probably by the end (últimos) of November, or be-
ginning of December.
3. Is he to be long absent ? He knows nothing as yet of
how long he may be absent (ausente).
4. Concerning books to be read in order to perfect one's self
in a language, what kind do you think the best ? There is little
difference in books to be used for that purpose (propósito).
5. Are there not some better than all the others ? Not that
I know of : each student will prefer those that treat of the sub-
ject he likes best
6. But beginners cannot do so, for there are many books
too difficult for them, are there not ? Certainly ; I thought it
♦ Emprender,
Digitized
by Google
210 LUSSON XXXVIII.
needless to say that beginners must needs search for books easy
to be read.
7. It seems to me that newspaper reading is very useful;
what do you think? Yes; and especially for those who take
pleasure in studying politics of the day.
8. Do you think I shall be able to understand Cervantes's
great work after I have gone through (recorrer) the whole of
the grammar ? No, sir, you will not ; you will have to read and
study a great deal before you will be able to understand thor-
oughly the writings of any of the Spanish classic authors.
9. Who is that young man we met while walking, and to
whom you spoke ? He is a lawyer's clerk.
10. Does he make much money at that occupation ? I can
not tell you ; but he is undoubtedly a man of talent {talento).
11. Are the children gone to school yet, Louisa? All but
Henry, who wishes not to go to-day, if you will consent
to it.
12. I am afraid he is a very Idzy boy ; he is continually ask-
ing not to be sent to school.
13. How can he expect to learn if he neither goes to school
nor studies at home ? He wishes to study at home ; he says that
if you consent to his staying at home, he will study anything
you please.
14. Well, I shall give him something to learn by heart, and
we shall see what he does. — Very well ; but do not give him too
much to do at the beginning, for he is easily disheartened.
15. I never require of any one more than he is able to do. —
That is perfectly right.
16. Tell Charles and Albert that I wish to see them, and that
I have two books for them. — I need not go to tell them ; hero
they are coming.
17. Come here, boys. — ^Well, papa, what do you want with us ?
18. To give you these two books : one for each. — How beau-
tiful!— Yes, that is true; but they are something more than
beautiful : they are good.
19. What are they about ? This one treats of man in life and
of all living beings ; and that one of man's state after death.
20. Now, I wish you to read a chapter, each one in his book
every day, after your lessons; and then you may go out and
walk for an hour. — Thank you, sir ; and we can assure you that
we shall do so with the greatest pleasure.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXXIX.
211
21. Tell me, Albert, where did you buy that hat ? That is
one of those hats that were worn three summers ago. I know
that very well, for I bought it at the time they were being worn,
and I have worn it ever since.
22. This author seems to have travelled a great deal; have
you read any of his travels ? Yes, and I like them exceedingly
(muchiaimó).
23. I am going to read them, too, as soon as I have time. In
what countries did he travel principally ? He has been in nearly
every country of the globe. East, West, North, and South.
24. What is the trade or profession of that person, just gone
out ? He is a physician ; he has been in this city for nearly five
years. He is an excellent practitioner.
LESSON XXXIX.
Pedir. (See conjugation near I To petition, to ask for.
end of grammar.) I
Verbs conjugated like pedib.
Competir.
To contend, to compete.
Elegir.
To elect, to choose.
Medir.
To measure.
Eeñir.
To quarrel, to scold.
Seguir.
To follow.
Eendir.
To render ; to exhaust, to do out,
to wear out
Eepetir.
To repeat.
Servir.
To serve.
Teñir.
To dye.
Vestir.
To dress.
Divertirse.
To amuse one's self.
Casarse.
To marry ; to get (or be) married.
Besar.
To kiss.
Enamorarse.
To fall in love.
Celebrar.
To celebrate, to praise, to be
glad.
Cenar.
To take supper.
Digitized
by Google
212
LESSON XXXIX.
Presentar.
Reconocer.
Estimar.
Agradecer.
To present, to introduce one
person to the acquaintance
of another.
To recognize, to examine closely.
To estimate, to value, to esteem.
To thank, to be thankful, to be
obliged.
£n hora buena.
It is well, well and good.
Así asi.
Soso.
Tal cual.
Middling, so so.
Hasta la vista.
Till I see you again.
Hasta luego.
Good-bye for a while.
Sin novedad.
Well, in a good state of health.
Medianamente.
Middling.
¡Ahí {int.)
Ah!
¡Oh! {int)
Oh!
Respetable.
Respectable.
Delicado.
Delicate, weak.
Infinito.
Infinite.
Junto.
Near, close to, together.
Discreto. Encantador.
Discreet Charming.
Favor.
Beso.
Servidor.
Pie.
Honor.
Vestido.
Esposo.
Asiento.
Capítulo.
Sobrino.
Favor.
Kiss.
Servant.
Foot.
Honor.
Dress.
Husband.
Seat.
Chapter.
Nephew.
Tertulia.
Novedad.
Celebración.
Servidora.
Ocasión.
Complacencia.
Bondad.
Esposa.
Orden.
Memorias.
Enhorabuena.
Party, soiree.
Novelty.
Celebration.
Servant
Occasion.
Complaisance.
Goodness, kind-
ness.
Wife.
Order, command.
Regards.
Congratulation.
COMPOSITION.
4 Qué le pide á Y. ese hombre f
No me pide nada ; me pregunta que
hora es.
What is that man asking for?
He is asking me for nothing ; he is
asking me what o'clock it is.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXXIX.
213
Beso á V. la mano, caballero.
Beso á y. la suya.
4 Cómo está su familia de V. f
Todos están bien, gracias; IJ la
de V.?
Asi asi ; los niños están muy buenos,
pero mi esposa no se siente bien.
Á los. pies de V., señora.
Beso á V. la mano, caballero.
A la orden de V., Doh Pedro.
Vaya V. con Dios, Don Juan.
Buenos días, Doña Luisa, |cómo lo
pasa V. hoy I
Bien, para servir á V. ; | y V. ?
Sin novedad á la disposición de V.
Señor D. M., tengo el honor de pre-
sentarle al Sr. D. P.
Caballero, celebro la ocasión de cono-
cer á V.
Tenga V. la bondad de darme el cu-
chillo.
Con mucho gusto.
Mil gracias.
Hágame V. el favor de decirme,
como se llama esto en español.
Sírvase V. tomar asiento.
Lo siento mucho, pero no puedo,
tengo que marcharme.
Tenga V. la bondad de ponerme á
los pies de su esposa de V.
I kiss your hand, sir (a Spomiah ex-
pression of courtesy y used on meet-
ing or parting).
And I kiss yours (reply to the
above).
How is your family?
All are well, thank you ; and yours f
So so; the children are very well,
but my wife does not feel well.
At your feet, madam {Spanish ex-
pression of courtesy, used to
ladies),
I kiss your hand, sir {ladies* reply
to the above).
At your service, Mr. Peter.
God be with you, Mr. John.
Good morning, Miss Louisa, how do
you do to-day ?
Well, thank you ; and yout
I am very well too, thank you.
Mr. M., I have the honor to intro-
duce (or present) you to Mr. P.
I am happy to make your acquaint-
ance, sir.
Have the goodness to give me the
knife.
With much pleasure.
Thank you.
Be kind enough to tell me what you
call this in Spanish.
Please to take a seat.
I am very sorry, but I cannot, I
must be off.
Have the goodness to present my
regards to your lady (or wife).
EXPLANATION.
198. Pedie. — A paradigm will be found near the end of
the grammar, showing how this verb, and all those conju-
gated like it, change the e of their stem into i,
199. The USUAL foems of salutations, among gentle-
men in greeting each other, are the following :
Digitized
by Google
214:
LESSON XXXIX.
Beso á y. la mano.
Servidor de V., caballero.
A la orden de V.
Vaya V. con Dios.
Servidor de V,
Para servir á V,
Tenga V. muy buenos días.
I kiss your hand.
Your servant, sir.
Your most obedient.
Adieu, or God be with you.
Your servant.
At your service.
Good day to you.
This last expression is used from the earliest part of the
morning till mid-day ; from which time till dark this expres-
sion is used,
Buenas tardes. ( Good afternoon ;
and from dark until the following morning, both on meeting
and taking leave,
Buenas noches. | Good night.
All these expressions are used in the plural number.
In saluting a lady, or on introduction, the expressions
most frequently used are :
Á los pies de V., señora. I
Para servirle á V., señora. |
The lady's reply is :
Beso á V. la mano, caballero. I
To inquire after another's health :
Cómo lo pasa Y.^ or cómo estáj I
V. t [• How do you do?
iCómole vaáV.t ) |
To answer :
Madam, at your feet.
At your service, madam.
I kiss your hand, sir.
Medianamente bien.
Perfectamente bien.
Para servir á V.
Muy bien, gracias.
Así así, or tal cual ; y V., i cómo lo
Fairly well.
Perfectly well.
At your service.
Very weD, thank you.
So so ; and how do you do t
Sin novedad. Oh I nothing new.
Á la disposición de V. At your service.
For introducing one person to another :
Señor Don M., tengo el honor de I Mr. M., I have the honor of intro-
presentarle al Señor Don P. | ducing Mr. P. to you.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXXIX, 216
And the reply is :
Caballero, celebro la ocasión de
conocer á V., or
Reconózcame V. por «m servidor
suyo.
For asking or requesting :
Tenga Y. la bondad de darme.
Hágame V. el favor de decirme.
Sírvase V., or tenga V. la compla-
cencia de.
And for returning thanks :
Mil gi'acias, or
Muchísimas gracias.
Se lo agradezco á V. infinito.
Sir, I am happy to make your ac-
quaintance.
I am entirely at your service.
Have the goodness to give me.
Do me the favor to tell me.
Have the kindness to.
A thousand thanks.
Many thanks.
I am very much obliged to you.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. Señor D. Juan, ¿ qué le pide á V. mi muchacho ? No me
pide nada ; me pregunta qué hora es.
2. Yo creía que le pedía á V. dinero, porque él está siempre
pidiendo centavos á todo el mundo. — Vaya ! no lo riña V. ; á
todos los niños les gusta que les den centavos. — Verdad es, pero
á mí no me gusta que los míos los pidan.
3. Dígame V., D. Pedro, ¿ quién es aquella señorita que está
sentada en el sofá junto á su esposa de V. ? Esa es una señorita
muy amable, hija del Señor D. Luis Martínez, familia muy res-
petable á quien conocí hace muchos años.
4. i Quiere V. hacerme el favor de presentarme á ella ? Con
mucho gusto ; pero le advierto que no se enamore de la Señorita
Martínez, porque está para casarse.
5. Pierda V. cuidado ; yo solo deseo conocerla para gozar de
su discreta conversación. — En hora buena venga V. y lo pre-
sentaré.
6. Señorita Martínez, tengo el honor de presentar á V. el
Señor Don Juan McLaren. — Caballero, celebro la ocasión de
conocer á V. — Señorita, reconózcame V. por su servidor.
7. I Ah I aquí viene Don Alberto y su esposa. — Sírvanse Vds.
pasar adelante.
8. ¡ Oh I Señor Don Pedro, me alegro mucho de encontrar á
V. por acá. Mil gracias, señora, soy muy feliz en volver á ver
áVds.
Digitized
by Google
216 LESSON XXXIX.
9. Á los pies de V., Señorita Martínez. — Beso á V. la mano,
caballero.
10. Doña Margarita, ¿ cómo está su familia de V. ? Todos
están bien, gracias, ¿ y la de V. ? Así, así ; los niños están muy
buenos, pero mi esposa está delicada.
11. Sírvase V. tomar asiento, D. Alberto. — Lo siento mucho,
pero no puedo; he prometido á mi madre volver pronto para
cenar con ella.
12. Señoras, á los pies de Vds. Beso á Vds. la mano caballeros.
13. Á la orden de V., D. Pedro. Vaya V. con Dios, D. Juan.
14. Tenga V. muy buenas noches, Doña Luisa, ¿ cómo lo pasa
V. hoy ? Bien, para servir á V., ¿ y V. ? Sin novedad, á la dis-
posición de V.
15. Buenas noches, D. Pedro ; hasta mañana. Hasta mañana,
póngame V. á los pies de su señora.
16. Dé V. memorias de mi parte á toda la familia. — De su
parte de V. lo estimarán mucho.
17. Adiós, Manuel, ¿ adonde vas tan de prisa ? Voy á acom-
pañar á mi hermana al teatro, y desde allí iremos á la tertulia
del Señor Marrací.
18. Celebraré que te diviertas mucho. Yo también pienso ir
á la tertulia del Señor Marrací ; con que, así no te digo adiós, ya
nos veremos. — Hasta la vista. — Hasta luego.
EXERCISE.
1. Good morning, Charles 1 Are you never going to get up ?
— Why, how late is it ?
2. It is nearly nine o'clock ; but it is nothing new to see you
in bed at that hour. Ah ! you are always making fun of me for
lying in bed so long in the morning, and I think I rise very early.
3. Up, then, and dress yourself as quickly as possible ; I wish
you to come and breakfast with me.
4. Indeed I What good things are you going to give me ?
You will have a ñrst-rate breakfast, with excellent wine, followed
by delicious chocolate.
5. Tell me, my dear fellow : I can never remember the name
of that young lady that I met at your sister's party ; what is her
name ? Oh, no matter ; my sister has invited * her to dine this
evening, and if you wait for dinner with us I will introduce you
to her.
* Invitar,
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XXXIX. 217
6. Papa, here is my friend Mr. N., whom I have the pleasure
of presenting to you. I am very happy to know you, sir.
7. Be kind enough to take a seat, and excuse me an instant ;
I shall be back immediately. Certainly, sir.
8. How are your old friends the Retortillos ? They are very
well, thank you ; they are to be here this evening, so you can
have a chat with them.
9. Why did you not introduce me long ago to your father ?
I am very sorry for not having done so, and my father has often
scolded me for my neglect (negligencia).
10. Do you expect your uncle to-day ? I do not ; but if he
comes, well and good ; we shall be glad to see him.
11. Will you be good enough to give me that newspaper that
is on the chair next the window ? With the greatest pleasure.
12. What news is there this morning ? I see that a new presi-
dent (presidente) has been elected in one of the provinces of
South America.
13. They might have chosen another occasion for electing him,
I think. Ah, of course ; they are at war with Spain.
14. How much do they ask for the house that is for sale on
Fifteenth street ? Father was saying yesterday that they are
asking a very high price.
15. What do you understand by a high price ? More than
the house is worth (valer),
16. You seem greatly dissatisfied at the price ; have you any
intention of buying the house ? Yes, unless it has been sold
already.
17. What news have you from Boston ? is Miss Guevara
married yet ? I have not heard from the family for a month ;
but I suppose she must be married by this time ; she was to have
been married in July.
18. Will you come and take a walk before dinner ? Ah, you
must excuse me ; believe me, I am worn out with fatigue.
19. What is that you said, Emanuel ? I have told you once,
and I shall not repeat it.
20. Do you know that young lady who is sitting on the sofa
beside your niece ? Yes ; I shall introduce you to her, if you
wish.
21. When will you introduce me ? At once, on condition
that you will not f^ in love with her.
22. Well, will you promise ? I will ; you know I am going
Digitized
by Google
218
LESSON XL.
to get married, and I only wish to enjoy her charming'*' conver-
sation.
23. Miss Veleta, permit me to have the honor of introducing
to you Mr. Bomelio. How do you do, sir ? I am very happy to
know you, miss.
24. Well, John, what do you think of her ? That she is charm-
ing ; and I am exceedingly obliged to you for introducing me.
25. Oh, Louisa I come and look at this beautful dress.— Oh,
how beautiful 1 How much did it cost ?— Only a trifle of $120.
26. How much did you pay for that last coat of yours, Alex-
ander ? — Only eighty dollars.— Not so very much {no se me hace
caro).
LESSON XL.
To conduct, to lead, to drive.
Conducir. {See conjugation of
this verb near end of gram-
mar.)
Verba conjugated like conducie.
Producir.
To produce.
Traducir.
To translate.
Introducir.
To introduce.
Obrar.
To act
Envidiar.
To envy.
Olvidar.
To forget
Existir.
To exist
Según {prep.)
According to.
Siquiera {conj.).
At least, even.
Colectivo.
Collective.
Particular.
Private, particular.
COLLECTIVE NOUNS.
Ejército.
Army.
Tropa. Troop.
Gentío.
Crowd.
Gente. People.
Rebaño.
Flock, herd.
Multitud. Multitude.
Par.
Pair, couple.
Docena. Dozen.
Centenares.
Hundreds.
Centena. A hundred.
Millares.
Thousands.
Mitad. Half.
*Enc<m
tadora.
Digitized
by Google
LESSOK XL.
21
El tercio.
The third.
La tercera.
The third.
El cuarto.
The fourth.
La cuarta parte
5. The fourth, &
El dozavo.
The twelfth.
Una infinidad.
An infinity.
El doble.
The double.
Higo.
Fig.
Conciencia.
Conscience.
Carácter.
Character.
Circunstancia.
Circumstance
Habitante.
Inhabitant
Uva.
Grape.
Gobierno.
Government.
Especie.
Species, kind.
Eecurso.
Recourse, re-
Naranja.
Orange.
sources.
Castaña.
Chestnut.
Monte.
Mountain.
Nuez.
Nut
Bosque.
Wood (forest).
Cuestión.
Question.
Río.
River.
Producción.
Production.
Lago.
Lake.
Libertad.
Liberty.
Nombre.
Noun, name.
Causa.
Cause.
Camero merino.
Merino sheep.
Irlanda.
Ireland.
Rincón, esquina.
Corner.
COMPOÍ
Naturaleza.
3ITI0N.
Nature.
Obró según su conciencia.
Habla según las circunstancias.
Lo cuento según me lo han contado.
Entró (or entraron) en la ciudad una
tropa de soldados.
En el ejército de los Estados Unidos
había soldados de todas las nacio-
nes.
El tercio (or la tercera parte) de
esos hombres no saben escribir.
El gentío era tan grande que no pu-
dimos pasar.
ün par de caballos americanos vale
por dos pares de caballos mexica-
nos.
He acted according to his conscience.
He speaks according to circum-
stances.
I tell it as it was told me.
A troop of soldiers came into the
city.
In the United States army there
were soldiers of all nations.
The third of those men do not know
how to write.
The crowd was so great that we
could not pass.
A pair of American horses are worth
two pairs of Mexican horses.
EXPLANATION.
200. Conducir, to conduct, and the verbs conjugated
like it, take a z before the radical c in the terminations begin-
ning with 0 or a. They also take the terminations je^ jiste^
Digitized
by Google
220 LESSON XL.
jo^ jimos^ jisieis^ jerofiy in the preterit, Ac, as may be Been in
the conjugation of conducir^ near the end of the grammar.
201. Según. — We class this word among the prepositions,
in conformity to the general practice among Spanish gramma-
rians, and because it sometimes has the character of such ; as.
Obró eegún sa conciencia. He acted according to his conscience.
Habla según las circunstancias. He speaks according to circum-
stances.
Nevertheless, in other cases it is employed as an adverb ; as,
Lo cuento según me lo han contado. 1 1 tell it as it was told to me.
202. Singular collective nouns usually take a singular
verb; but when the individuals composing the collective
noun are prominent in the mind of the speaker, the verb
may be in the plural ; as,
Entró (or entraron) en la ciudad I A troop of soldiers came into the
una tropa de soldados. | city.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Produce España buena fruta ? España produce excelente
fruta de todas especies.
2. i Cuál es la mejor fruta de España ? No sabré decir á V.,
porque toda es buena, y hay centenares de especies, por ejemplo :
las uvas son de las mejores del mundo ; los melocotones y los me-
lones son también muy buenos, sin contar con las naranjas, los
higos, las castañas, las nueces y otra infinidad de frutas.
3. I Es España un país caro ó barato ? Es demasiado barato.
Con un peso se puede vivir mejor en España que en Nueva York
con cuatro.
4. ¿ Bien, entonces por qué vino V. á vivir en los Estados
Unidos ? Esa ya es otra cuestión. España no tiene que envidiáis
á ningún país del mundo en cuanto á su clima ni á sus produccio-
nes, ni menos en cuanto al carácter de sus habitantes ; pero bajo
su gobierno no se goza de la misma libertad que se goza bajo el
de la República de los Estados Unidos.
5. ¿ Es esta la causa por la cuál V. vino á residir en este país ?
Hay muchas otras. Por ejemplo, es verdad que en España no se
conocen las hambres que hay en Irlanda, Alemania y otros países,
y que, como he dicho, se vive mejor allí con un peso que aquí con
cuatro ; pero también es verdad, que en cualquiera profesión ú'
Digitized
by Google
LJSJSSON XL. 221
oñcio es más fácil ^nar cuatro pesos en los Estados Unidos, que
uno en España.
6. i Por tanto V. cree que los recursos de los Estados Unidos
son más grandes que los de otros países ? Por supuesto que sí.
Aquí la nación es grande ; la libertad es grande ; los montes, los
ríos, los lagos, los bosques son grandes ; la naturaleza es grande ;
todo es grande ; Nueva Tork es grande y los hombres mismos
son también grandes ; pero no más grandes que los españoles.
7. Hablando de esto, V. se olvida que en este ejercicio tiene
V. que practicar con los nombres colectivos. — V. tieoe razón, se
me habían olvidado los nombres colectivos hablando de las dos
naciones que más amo en el mundo.
8. En cuanto á los nombres colectivos, su práctica es muy
fácil 7 todo se reduce á decir : que en Nueva York hay multitud
de gentes de diferentes naciones, millares de mujeres y cosas
buenas y centenares de hombres y cosas malas.
9. ¿ Pero y qué dice V. con respecto á los rebaños, ejércitos,
etc. ? Que en España hay rebaños de cameros merinos que, así
como su ejército, no tienen superiores en el mundo.
10. i Según eso V. cree que todo lo mejor existe en España ?
Todo no, puesto que mis niños son Americanos.
11. Vamos, V. se burla. — No, señor, yo hablo de veras para
practicar el español.
12. V. habla según las circunstancias. — No, señor, yo hablo
según mi conciencia.
13. Acuérdese V. que según V. obre con los demás así obra-
rán ellos con V. — Muy bien y así como yo hable de ellos, así
hablarán ellos de mí ; pero yo no debo hablar de ellos mejor que
de mí mismo.
14. é Quiere V. pagarme la mitad, el tercio ó el cuarto de lo que
V. me debe ? Ni lo uno ni lo otro, porque no tengo dinero ahora.
15. Déme V. á lo menos un par de pesos. — Mañana le daré á
V. una docena de pesos, pero hoy ni tan siquiera un centavo.
16. Adiós, Carlos, me canso de charlar y me voy á acostar.
Buenas noches, Luis, no olvide V. de pagar sus deudas.
EXERCISE.
1. What is the name given to a large number of sheep to-
gether ? It is called a flock.
2. What were you doing so long in the street ? I went to
see the cause of the great crowd at the corner of the next street.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XL.
3. Well, what was it ? I could not see anything ; hut it
seems there was a fire in some of the streets near here.
4. You seem to be very much of a Spaniard ; why did you
ever come to the United States ? I shall not deny that I like
the government ; yet that is not the only reason I had for com-
ing here.
5. Can you tell me some of the others ? Certainly ; although
living is higher here than there, business of all kinds is better,
and it is easier to make money here, not only than in Spain, but
than in any other country in Europe.
6. I am very glad you think so ; how long have you been
here ? It will be four years next September.
7. Will you be good enough to tell me something of your
country ? That will give me much pleasure.
8. You talk so much about Europe in general, and about
Spain in particular, that I cannot help (no puedo menos dé)
thinking you intend to go there. You are quite right ; it is pos-
sible that my brother and I shall take a trip (viaje) to Spain next
fall.
9. Well, in order to be able to enjoy yourselves as much as
possible, it will be necessary for you to know how to speak the
language perfectly before starting. We intend to do that
10. Do you think all the soldiers in the army are Americans ?
No, nor even the half, and perhaps not even the third.
11. How many inhabitants are there in this city ? I am not
able to tell you exactly ; but there cannot be much less than a
million.
12. Which city in the world has the most inhabitants ? Lon-
don ; it has about three millions of inhabitants.
13. Ah ! you are jesting ; or else you are an Englishman. I
am not jesting, neither am I an Englishman, but a Frenchman ;
after London comes New York.
14. By whom is that book? This is the celebrated Don
Quixote (Quijote), by Cervantes.
15. In how many parts is it ? Two ; the first containing (con-
tener) some fifty-two chapters, and the second about eighty-four.
16. What effect (efecto) does the reading of Don Quixote
produce upon you ? It makes me admire, and even leads me
to envy the genius (genio) of its author.
17. Ah I I see ; you say that to please me, because you know
that I too admire the grand work of Cervantes. Pardon me, sir ;
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XLL
223
I never speak according to circumstances, but always according
to my conscience.
18. But, have you forgotten your promise already? What
promise is that ? I do not remember any.
19. No matter ; I see you have completely forgotten it. I am
very sorry.
20. What are the best fruits that Spain produces ? Spain pro-
duces so many kinds of fruit, and such delicious ones, that it is
almost impossible for me to mention them all : you have excellent
grapes, melons, peaches, apples, oranges, and an infinity of others.
21. Have the soldiers that came into the city last night gone
away yet ? They marched this morning at daybreak.
22. How was our old friend Harnero when you last heard
from him ? He was in Boston, entirely without means, having
been deceived by a bad man who took the whole of his money
from him, and fi^m whom he was unable to recover {recobrar)
even the fourth part.
LESSON XLI.
Soler.
To be accustomed to, to do,
or be, usually.
Bendecir.
To bless.
Caer.
To fall, to see (understand).
Dormir.
To sleep.
Morir.
To die.
Errar.
To err.
Jugar.
To play.
Oir.
To hear.
Oler.
To smell.
Contradecir.
To contradict.
Poner.
To put.
Pudrir.*
To rot.
Réir.
To laugh.
Valer.
To be worth.
Yacer.
To lie.
{See tJie conjugation of these verbs near the end of the grammar,)
♦ The verb pudrir was formerly written podrir ; but the Academy
now adopt sthe spelling pudrir ; and thus this verb has changed from
Digitized
by Google
LUSSON XLL
Reposar.
Premiar.
Examinar.
To rest, to repose.
To reward.
To examine.
Desde.
Since, from.
Contra.
Against, toward.
Sobre.
Above, over, about.
Tras.
After, behind, besides.
Pues.
Well, then ; therefore, &c.
Helo aquí.
Here he (or it) is.
Desde ahora.
Henceforward, from now,
just now.
Desde aqui
From here.
Kn efecto.
Indeed, in efPect, in fact,
really.
Eterno. Eternal.
Afortunado. Fortunate.
Convicto. Convicted.
Desgraciado. Unfortunate.
Infortunio.
Reo.
Grito.
Coche.
Vicio.
Fraile.
Diego.
Verbo.
Principio.
Misfortune.
Criminal.
Cry, scream.
Carriage.
Vice.
Fray, friar.
James.
Verb.
Beginning, prin-
ciple.
Carlota.
Creación.
Caridad.
Prenda.
Virtud.
Tristeza.
Experiencia.
Página.
Charlotte.
Creation.
Charity.
Pledge, quality, ac-
complishment
Virtue.
Grief, sorrow.
Experience.
Page.
COMPOSITION.
I Suele V. levantarse temprano f
Suelo levantarme tarde.
I Solía V. ir á pasearse á caballo el
año pasado f
No, señor, solía pasearme en coche.
Plegué á Dios que tengamos pronto
lo que deseamos.
Do yon usually rise early f
I usually rise late.
Were you accustomed to ride horse-
back last year!
No, sir, I used to ride in a carriage.
God grant we may soon have what
we desire.
being one of the most irregular of verbs to an almost entirely regular
verb, being irregular in the past participle only, podrido.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XLL
225
Desde ahora prometo servirle á V
en lo que pueda.
El hombre ha obrado mal para con
Dios y consigo mismo desde la
creación del mundo.
Desde Nueva York á Filadelfia hay
ochenta y ocho millas.
Yo juego contra ti.
Esta casa está contra el Este.
La ciudad está sobre un monte.
La caridad es sobre todas las vir-
tudes.
Voy tras ti.
Sufre la pena pues lo quieres.
Tras la primavera viene el verano.
Tras ser culpado, él es el que levanta
el grito.
Leeré este libro pues V. me dice que
es bueno.
From this moment I promise to
serve you as far as I can.
Man has acted wrongly before God
and to himself since the creation
of the world.
It is eighty-eight miles from New
York to Philadelphia.
I play against thee.
This house faces the East.
The city is built upon a mountain.
Charity is above all the virtues.
I go after thee.
Suffer the consequences (pain), since
. such is thy will.
After spring comes summer.
In spite of his being guilty, it is he
who raises the cry.
I shall read this book since you tell
me it is good.
EXPLANATION.
203. Defective verbs are those which lack some of their
modes, tenses, or persons. Placer^ to please, and yacer ^ to lie,
belong to this class, and are found used in the following
tenses and persons :
Indicat, Pres. 3d person sing.
Imperfect,
Perfect ind,
Subjunc. Present.
Imperfect.
Future imp.
PLACER.
Place.
Placía.
Plugo.
Plegué,
í Pluguiera, i
It pleases.
It did please.
It pleased.
It may please.
It might please.
It may please.
Í Pluguiera. )
( Pluguiese. )
Pluguiere.
These persons of the subjunctive mode in this verb are
only used in the following expressions : plegué^ or pluguiera^
or pluguiese á Dios, would to God ; and si me pluguiere, if it
should please me. '
204. Yacer. — 'So part of this verb is used except the
third persons of the present indicative, yace and yacen, chiefly
at the beginning of epitaphs.
17
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XLL
206. Soler is used only in the present and imperfect of
the indicative mode. This verb has the peculiarity of never
being employed except as a determining verb, governing the
determined verb without the aid of any preposition, and al-
ways in the present infinitive ; as,
Suelo pasear temprano. | I usually go early to walk.
206. Desde, from, points out the source of time or place ;
as,
Desde la creación del mundo. i B^rom the creation of the world.
Desde Nueva York á Filadelfia. | From New York to Philadelphia.
For this reason it forms a part of several adverbial expres-
sions which signify time or place ; as.
Desde ahora. I From this time.
Desde aquí. I From hence.
207. Contra is used in all cases as the English against
208. Sobre, upon, above, &c., serves to denote the super-
imposition of some things with respect to others, either by
their location or by their excellence or power ; as.
La ciudad está sobre un monte.
La caridad es sobre todas las vir-
tudes.
The city is on a mountain.
Charity is above all virtues.
It has also the signification of además^ moreover, or ade-
más de^ besides ; as.
Sobre ser reo convicto quiere que
le premien.
It also signifies time ; as,
Hablar sobre mesa. |
Surety; as.
Prestar sobre prendas. I
209. Tras, behind, after, &c., signifies the order in which
some things follow others ; as.
Besides being a convicted crimi-
nal, he wishes to be rewarded.
To talk over the table.
To lend upon pledge.
Voy tras ti. I
7}ras la primavera viene el verano. |
It also signifies besides ; as.
Tras ser culpado, él es el que le-
vanta el grito.
I follow thee.
After spring comes summer.
Besides being guilty, he remon-
strates.
Digitized
by Google
LUSSOK XLL 227
210. The conjunction pues, since, is used to account for
a proposition brought forward ; as,
Leeré este libro pue» V. me dice I I shall read this book since you
que es bueno. | tell me it is good.
211. Pues is often used in a sense similar to wel\ or
tlien\ as,
Ya me voy pues. I I am going then.
¡ Pues, si ! 1 Well, yes !
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ¿ Sobre qué quiere V. que hablemos hoy ? No sé ; de cual-
quiera cosa, con tal que practiquemos con los verbos defectivos y
las preposiciones contra^ desde, sobre y tras.
2. Que me place, pero dígame V., ¿ cree V. que tenemos mu-
cho que practicar con el verbo yacer f No, señor, puesto que es
un verbo que solo sirve para ponerse en los epitafios.
3. Pues si V. gusta le haremos un epitafio y pasaremos á
practicar con otro verbo que no sea tan triste. — Soy de su opinión
de V., porque no me gustan las cosas tristes.
4. Helo aquí: ^
" Aquí yace el verbo yacer,
Otra cosa no sabiendo hacer."
6. Ese epitafio me hace recordar á mi otro, óigalo V. :
" Aquí Fray Diego reposa,
Y jamás hizo otra cosa."
6. Hombre, tenga V. caridad de mí y no me haga V. reír
hablando de epitafios, que es cosa más bien para hacer llorar que
para hacer reir. ¿ Suele V. tener siempre tan buen humor ? No
siempre ; pero no se gana nada con estar triste.
7. En efecto, más vale estar alegre que triste, pero no siem-
pre se puede estar alegre, ¿ y entonces que hace V. ? Entonces
mando á pasear al mal humor.
8. Eso es más fácil de decir que de hacer ; ¿ quiere V. decirme
como lo hace V. ? Convengo con V. ; pero cuando el hombre
quiere verdaderamente una cosa la logra casi siempre.
9. Plegué á Dios que yo logre estar siempre contento puesto
que estar contento es ser feliz. ¿ Qué es lo que V. hace para estar
siempre contento ? Yo no le he dicho á V. que estoy siempre
contento, pero procuro estarlo y así logro no estar triste.
Digitized
by Google
228 LESSON XLL
10. i Cómo lo hace V. ? Obro según las circunstancias. Exa-
mino la causa de mi tristeza ó mal humor ; si es mi falta me con-
suelo porque creo que Dios me castiga para que yo me corrija, y
me haga mejor con la experiencia.
11. Bien, i y cuando V. es inocente y le sucede un infortunio ?
Entonces me consuelo también, porque creo que todo lo que Dios
nos envía es para nuestro bien.
12. Entonces es V. filósofo. No, señor, mejor que eso; soy
religioso.
13. i Tiene V. miedo de la muerte ? No, señor, porque sé que
todos hemos de morir, y que tras la muerte viene la vida eterna.
14. i Cuántos niños tiene V. ? Cinco ; dos niños y tres niñas.
15. i Cómo se llaman ? El mayor de los niños se llama Ale-
jandro y el menor Manuel.
16. ¿ Y las niñas ? Las niñas son Luisa, Carlota y Margarita.
17. i Cuánto tiempo hace que no ha estado V. en España ?
Hace veinte años que salí de España.
18. i Y no ha vuelto V. ? No, señora, y creo que nunca vol-
veré.
19. i Por qué ? No porque no lo haya deseado, sino porque
las circunstancias no me lo han permitido.
20. Porqué habla V. tanto de sí mismo en sus conversaciones,
i no piensa Y. que eso puede cansar á sus oyentes ? Así es la
verdad, señora ; pero para mí es la materia de conversación más
interesante que puedo encontrar.
EXERCISE.
1. James, do you know where Charlotte has gone ? I saw
her going out, but I do not know where she has gone.
2. Can not you help your brother in his misfortune ? you
know he relies {contar) upon your aid. I shall do all in my
, power to serve him ; but you know that is not much.
3. Margaret, go and call Charles; tell him he has played
enough, and that I want him to attend to his music lessons.
Why, he has been at his lessons for the last half hour !
4. Ah I that is another thing. Where is he then ? Here
he is.
5. Well, Charles, how are you getting on with your music ?
Very well, papa ; but I think Jane will have to help me with my
Spanish exercise.
6. My dear boy, always do your own exercises, then you will
Digitized
by Google
\LESSON XLIL 229
be sure they are done. Oh, yes, I know ; as they say : " Help
yourself and Heaven will help you."
7. How beautiful that lady is ! Yes ; but, my dear sir, her
accomplishments far surpass her beauty.
8. I do not doubt it at all ; but how do you know that ? have
you known her long ? Long enough to find out her good quali-
ties, which, in my opinion, are of more value than all the beauty
in the world.
9. Have you found time yet to examine the books I put on
your table the other day ? I have, and the examination caused
(produced) me a great deal of sadness.
10. How so ? From the beginning, page after page, I found
that the author had not the least experience of the world ; and
besides, he contradicts toward the end what he has given as a
general rule at the opening of his work.
11. I am very much grieved (sorry) that such is your opinion,
So am I ; but you know it is better (worth more) to tell the truth,
even though it should offend the author himself.
12. Can you read that epitaph ? I believe it is in Elnglish.
Yes ; it says : *' Here lies Pedro Gutiérrez."
13. Is that all it says ? No, there is a great deal more ; but I
can not read it
14. Ah, indeed I I see ; you do not read English as well as
you thought. I do not ; and I promise you that from this mo-
ment I shall study it attentively until I know it thoroughly.
15. What do you smell ? The book that Charles has just
bought
16. What odor has it ? It smells like new paper.
17. What was that man rewarded for ? For having returned
{devolver) five hundred dollars, which he found in the park, to
the person that had lost it.
18. I am very glad that he has been rewarded ; but virtue is
always rewarded, sooner or later {tarde que temprano).
LESSON XLII.
Adquirir.
Asir.
Caber.
Cocer.
To acquire.
To seize.
To contain, to hold.
To cook.
Digitized
by Google
LSSSON XLIL
Erguir.
Satisfacer.
Traer.
To erect
To satisfy.
To bring, to carry.
{See conjugation of these verba near the end of the gramma^,)
Conseguir.
Callar.
Reprender.
To succeed, to get.
To be silent, to hold one's
tongue.
To reprehend, to chide.
Divisar.
To perceive, to descry, to espy.
Fumar.
To smoke.
Establecer.
To establish.
Saber {imp. verb).
(In the signification of) to
taste, or to savor.
Sorprender.
To surprise.
Entrambos.
Both.
Solo.
Alone.
Ir á caballo.
To ride on horseback.
Ir en coche.
To ride in a carriage.
De todos modos.
At all events, by all means.
De ningún modo.
By no means, not at all.
Manos á la obra.
To work I
Por mi parte.
For my part
Así sea.
So be it, let it be so.
I Cáspita I (int.),
I Vaya 1 (int.).
Wonderful ! too bad I
Come, now I indeed I go away !
CONJUNCTIONS.
They are classified as follows :
Copulative,
Que.
También.
Ó,
u, ya.
Sea que.
Tampoco.
That Además.
Also. Y or é.
Ni.
DÍ8Ju>nctive,
Por cuanto.
Para que.
Or, either,
whether.
Whether.
Neither.
Á fin de.
Moreover.
And.
Neither, nor.
Whereas.
So that, in order
that
In orddi» that
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XLIL
231
AdverscUive,
Mas, pero. But
Ann cuando. Even.
Aunque. Although,
though.
CauaaJ.
Porque, que. Because.
¿ Por qué ? Why ?
Pues, pues que. Since.
Por. For.
Por tanto. Therefore.
Si. '
Sino.
Con tal que.
Á menos de.
Conditional,
If.
But.
Provided.
( Unless.
ContiniuiHve.
Pues, puesto Since, inas-
que. much as.
Comparative,
Como, asi como. As.
Así. So.
Antes de.
Before.
Lejos de.
Far from.
En lugar de.
Instead of, in place of.
Por falta de. •
For want of.
De miedo de. )
Por temor de. )
For fear of.
Como quiera que.
However.
Fuera de que.
Besides.
Al instante que, or luego
que,
As soon as.
or tan pronto como.
De manera que.
So that.
Desde que.
Since.
Acuerdo.
Daño.
Cigarro.
Cigarrillo.
Tabaco.
Jaque.
Caso.
Advice, or opin-
ion.
Harm, damage.
Chess.
Cigar.
Cigarette.
Tobacco.
Check.
Marca.
Fortuna.
Partida.
Opinión.
Pipa.
Compañía.
Brand, mark.
Fortune.
Party, game,
departure.
Opinion.
Tobacco-pipe,
pipe.
Company.
COMPOSITION.
Conjunttions governing the auhjimctive.
Dado qne me escriba no le respon-
deré.
Granted that he should write me, I
will not answer him.
Digitized
by Google
232
LESSON XLIL
Con tal que el trabaje.
Á menos que me pague.
Sea que se vaya ó que se quede.
Calle y. no sea que nos oiga.
Provided he work.
unless he pay me.
Whether he set out or remain.
Be silent lest he should hear us.
Conjunctions governing the indicative.
Al instante que recibi la carta le
respondí.
De suerte que (or de modo que) no
pudo conseguirlo.
De manera que no está nada satis-
fecho.
4 Qué ha hecho V. desde que le he
visto á V. f
Llegué tan pronto como pude.
Mientras que V. juega él estudia su
lección.
Yo reprendo á V. sus faltas porque
le quiero.
As soon as I received the letter I
answered him.
So that he could not bring it about.
So that he is not pleased at all.
What have you been doing since I
saw you!
I got here (or there) as soon as I
could.
While you play, he studies his les-
son.
I reprove you for your faults be-
cause I love you.
Conjunctions governing the infinitive.
Yo trabajo á fin de ganar dinero.
No le visitaré antes de conocerle.
Lejos de amarlo lo aborrece.
I work in order to earn money.
I shall not visit him before making
his acquaintance.
Far from loving him, he abhors him.
EXPLANATION.
212. Conjunctions. — The student is already acquainted
with the greater part of the conjunctions ; but in this lesson
they are again given, so that he may see how they are classified.
Besides the conjunctions introduced in this lesson, there may
be formed a variety of expressions which answer the same end
as conjunctions ; as,
Como quiera que, | However ;
Fuera de que, | Besides ;
and a large number of others.
213. It would require too much space to specify all the
conjunctions that govern verbs in a given mode ; more is to
be learned from the teacher, and by constant practice in
reading and conversation, than from all the rules that could
be given.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XLIL 233
214. The subjunctive should be used after the following
conjunctive expressions : Dado que^ granted that ; con tal que^
provided that ; á menos que, unless ; no sea que, lest, for fear ;
antes que, sin que, sea que, &c. ; as,
Dado que me escriba no le respon-
deré.
Con ted gtie él trabaje.
Á menos que me pague.
Granted that he should write to me,
I shall not answer him.
Provided that he work.
Unless he pay me.
216. Other expressions having de, instead of que, require
the verb in the infinitive mood ; such as, áfin de, in order to ;
á menos de, unless, &c.
218. Finally, other compound conjunctions govern the
indicative; as, al instante que, as soon as; de manera que,
so that, &c.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. Buenos días, Don Carlos. — Téngalos V. muy felices, Don
Enrique ; al instante que lo divisé desde la ventana lo reconocí.
2. ¿ Cómo está toda la familia ? Todos buenos ; acaban de
salir.
3. ¿ De manera que está V. solo ? Sí, señor, en lugar de salir
quise quedarme á esperar á V. pues sabía que había V. de venir.
4. ¿ Quién se lo dijo á V. ? Á que no acierta V. — Verdadera-
mente no sé quién puede habérselo dicho á V.
5. Fué Helena, su hija de V., que acaba de salir á pasear con
mi esposa y Margarita, mi hija.
6. Y nosotros, ¿ qué haremos ? Lo qu« V. guste.
7. Mi opinión es que juguemos una partida de ajedrez, que
fumemos un cigarro, bebamos un vaso de vino de Cariñena, y
vayamos después á sorprender á las señoras al parque. ¿ Está
V. de acuerdo ? Perfectísimamente.
8. Pues bien, manos á la obra ; ¿ juega V. mucho ? Mediana-
mente ; pero como no lo practico temo que me gane V.
9. I Qué hombre I si hace á lo menos dos años que no he
jugado, fuera de que jamás he sido muy fuerte.
10. ¿ Cuáles quiere V., las negras ó las blancas ? Cualesquiera,
de todos modos he de perder.
11. Jaque á la reina Don Enrique. — Pues creo que está per-
dida.—Sí, señor, no puede huir— vaya pues le doy á V. la partida,
puesto que sin reina es casi imposible ganar.
Digitized
by Google
234 LESSON XLIL
12. é Quiere V. que en lugar de jugar más vayamos á ver las
señoras ? Sí, señor, luego que bebamos del vino de Cariñena.
13. I Hombre, sí, lo había olvidado I aquí está, y aquí tiene V.
también pipas, cigaiTi^os de la Habana, cigarrillos de la marca de
la Honradez y tabaco de Virginia para la pipa ; ¿ qué prefiere
V. ? Yo prefiero los cigarrillos.
14. Á su salud de V., Don Carlos. — Á la de V., Don Enrique.
— i Cáspita I i qué bien sabe el de Cariñena I
15. ¿ Le gusta á V. ? ¡ Qué si me gusta I desde que vivo en
Nueva York no he probado vino mejor.
16. Puesto que le gusta i por qué no repite V. ? Por temor de
que me haga daño, no suelo beber mucho, y temo que me ponga
im poco alegre.
17. Aquí tiene V. fuego ; ¿ qué tal le gustan á V. esos cigarri-
llos ? Excelentes.
18. Señor ; ¿ Qué quieres Juan ? Los caballos están listos.
19. I Qué I ¿ Vamos á caballo ? Sí, señor, las señoras han ido
en coche.
20. ¿ Qué camino tomaremos ? Iremos por la Quinta avenida,
que es la calle más hermosa de Nueva York.
21. Tenemos buen tiempo, D. Enrique. — Hermosísimo, y con
esto, buena salud, amigos fieles, una larga familia y una buena
fortuna, i qué más podemos desear ?
22. Tiene V. razón, Don Carlos, por mi parte soy feliz y sólo
deseo que Dios me dé una larga vida para ver á todos mis hijos
bien establecidos. — Así sea, Don Enrique, lo deseo para entram-
bos.
EXERCISE.
1. Does your brother never go out on horseback ? Some-
times ; but not very often.
2. What can be the reason of that ? I thought he was very
fond of horses and riding on horseback. So he is ; but he does
not often take exercise of that kind for fear of falling off.
3. How does he go to Central Park, then ? Why, in a car-
riage of course.
4. Fie I What carriage does he go in ? In his cousin's, of
course, for want of one of his own.
5. Who will give me a cigarette ? No one here ; there is
nobody here that smokes any thing but cigars or pipes.
6. Too bad I May I ask why none of you use cigarettes ?
Certainly ; and we shall tell you with the greatest pleasure : at
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XLIIL 235
one time we all smoked what you call " cigarette,'' but what we
call a " poor man's cigar," until one day Henry came (you know
Henry is something of a doctor), and, with his head erect, said
with a voice of thunder : " What's this ? smoking cigarettes ? "
7. Well I what more did he say ? " Don't you know that
what you are smoking there is noüiing but paper ? You will
all be sick I "
8. What did you do then ? We were surprised at first : but
very soon we promised never to smoke such a thing again, as it
was good for nothing, and only tasted of paper.
9. Be that as you please ; for my part I shall always prefer
the cigarette to the cigar {tabaco puro). Perhaps you are right ;
each one has his own liking, and so we shall say no more
about it.
10. What news do you bring from Boston ? Some good, and
some bad : my cousin has been very fortunate in that affair I
spoke of to you ; but he met with an unfortunate accident last
week.
11. Ah I how was that ? He was out riding in company with
some friends, and in returning home he fell from his horse.
12. I am very sorry indeed ; and I hope he may soon be able
to attend to his business.
13. What do you think of playing a game of chess ? I am
ready to play one, if you wish ; but you will not find my game
very good.
14. Why do not you practise more than you do ? I have
practised very much, with a desire to become perfect in the
game, but have not been able to succeed.
LESSON XLIII,
Advertir.
Conjugar.
Desconfiar.
Cometer.
Distinguir.
Formar.
Devolver.
To take notice, to observe, to
warn.
To conjugate.
To distrust, to mistrust
To commit»
To distinguish.
To form, to shape.
To return, to give back.
Digitized
by Google
236
LESSON XLIIL
Descuidar. To neglect, to be at ease in one's
mind.
Pertenecer. To belong.
Molestar. To molest, to trouble.
Resultar. To result, to turn out.
(The student ought by this time to know almost all the conjugations^
both of the regular and the irregular verbs ; should lie at any time be at
a loss for some part of a verb, he m>ay refer to the conjugations near the
end of the grammar.)
Cada. I Every, each.
Sin duda.
Certainly, without doubt
I Adelante I
Go on I go ahead ! come in I
En adelante.
Henceforth.
Compuesto.
Compound.
Irregular.
Irregular.
Completo.
Complete.
Varios
.
Various, divers, several
Simple.
Simple.
Seguro.
Secure, sure.
Obvio.
Obvious.
Lo demás.
The rest
Conoci-
miento.
Bill of lading.
Condición.
Condition.
Knowledge.
Navidad, or
Natividad.
Nativity, Christ-
José.
Joseph.
mas.
Artículo.
Article, section.
Relación.
Relation.
Pronombre.
Pronoun.
Duda.
Doubt
Participio.
Participle.
Ventaja.
Advantage.
Adjetivo.
Adjective.
Frase.
Phrase.
Adverbio.
Adverb.
Prontitud.
Promptitude.
Presente.
Present.
Sentencia.
Sentence.
Imperfecto.
Imperfect.
Conjugación.
Conjugation.
Perfecto.
Perfect.
Verdad.
Truth.
Futuro.
Future.
Imprudencia.
Imprudence.
Pluscuamper-
Pluperfect
Preposición.
Preposition.
fecto.
Conjunción.
Conjunction.
Infinitivo.
Infinitive.
Interjección.
Interjection.
Indicativo.
Indicative.
Paz.
Peace.
Imperativo.
Imperative.
Molestia.
Bother.
Subjuntivo.
Subjunctive.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XLIIL
237
COMPOSITION.
Descuide V.
I Cuántos tiempos tiene el modo in-
dicatiyot
Ocho : cuatro simples y cuatro com-
puestos.
Bueno sería no descuidarse.
Convendría que se hiciese la paz.
Aunque dijeras (or dijeses) la ver-
dad, no te creería.
¡ Ojalá que cesara (or cesase) la gue-
rra ! así seríamos más felices.
Pensé que estudiaras.
No creí que estudiase Y.
Juzgué que estudiaría Y.
Dije que leyeras.
Dijo que leerías.
Dijimos que leyese.
Deseaba que ganaras (or ganases).
Quiso que te casaras (or casases).
No sé si iría ó no.
Si tuviera (or si tuviese) buenos li-
bros leería.
Sería imprudencia ir con este tiem-
po.
No quiso ir.
Debemos perdonar á nuestros ene-
migos.
V. puede hablar, pero yo no lo puedo.
4 Si hubiera (or hubiese) Y. recibido
los libros me los habría Y. pres-
tado!
Si los hubiera (or hubiese) recibido
se los habría prestado; pero no
los he recibido aún.
En lugar de venir á verme me escri-
bió.
Make yourself easy (or be at ease in
your mind).
How many tenses has the indicative
moodt
Eight: four simple and four com-
pound.
It were well not to be off one's guard.
It would be well if peace were
made.
Though thou shouldst tell the truth,
he would not believe thee.
Would that the war would come to
an end I we should then be hap-
pier.
I thought thou wouldst study.
I did not think you would study (or
were studying).
I judged you would study.
I said thou wert to read (or wouldst
read).
He said thou wouldst read.
We said he was to read.
He wished thee to win.
He wished thee to marry.
I do not know whether he would go
or not.
Had I (or if I had) good books I
should read.
It were imprudent to go in this
weather.
He would not go.
We ought to forgive our enemies.
You can speak, but ( can not.
Had you received (or if you had re-
ceived) the books, would you have
lent them to me I
If I had received them I should have
lent them to you ; but I have not
received them yet.
Instead of coming to see me, he
wrote to me.
Digitized
by Google
238
LÜSSON XLIIL
Él no jugará por temor de perder su
dinero.
; Quiera Dios que se corrija I
¡ Así sea I Lo deseo para entram-
bos.
Bebo á la salud de V., Don Enrique.
Á la de V., Don Carlos.
Señores, manos á la obra, no sea que
no podamos acabar á tiempo.
í)e todos modos creo que no lo con-
seguiremos.
He will not play, for fear of losing
his money.
God grant that he may change !
So be it I That is my desire for
both.
I drink to your health, Mr. Henry.
Your health, Mr. Charles.
To work, gentlemen, for fear we
should not be able to finish in
time.
At all events, I do not think we
shall succeed.
EXPLANATION.
217. Imperfect and Past Perfect Subjunctive.
Although it has been deemed expedient, in the example of
the conjugation of verbs in the subjunctive mood, to give
but one English equivalent for each of the three terminar
tions Hay ra^ se, it is not to be inferred therefrom that they
may be used indiscriminately. Indeed, the correct applica-
tion of each of these terminations presents as much diflBculty
to the student of Spanish as does that of the English signs
mighty couldy should^ would to the foreigner learning Eng-
lish. The following rules will, however, serve as a guide in
all ordinary cases, and enable the pupil to surmount not a
few of the most serious obstacles to the right use of the ter-
minations in question :
1st. When the sentence begins without a conditional con-
junction, the verb may take either the first or the second
termination {ría or ra), though in this case the form ría is
preferable ; as,
It would be well not to be off one's
guard.
It would be well if peace were made.
Bueno serio (or fuera) no descui-
darse.
Convendría (or oonviniera) que se
hicieae la paz.
2d. In sentences beginning with 5Í, siñOy aunque^ bien
quBj dado que, &c., or with an interjection expressive of de-
sire, either the second or third termination may be employed
{ra or se) ; and in expressing the fulfilment of the condition
Digitized
by Google
l:bsson xliil
239
which may have been stated in a prior verb the forms in ría
are used ; as,
Aunqne dijeras (or dijeses) la ver-
dad, no te creeria.
Though thou toldest (or wert to
tell) the truth, he would not be-
lieve thee.
3d. When the imperfect of the subjunctive is preceded
by a verb in the preterit indicative, such 9^ pensar^ to think,
decir^ to say, &c., any of the terminations may be used ; but
it must be observed that the idea conveyed will be different,
according to the termination employed ; as,
Pensé que estudiara V., or que estu-
diaría V.
No creí que estudiase V. (or estu-
diara) V.
Juzgué que estudiarla (or estudiara)
V.
Dije que leyera (or leeHa) V.
Dijo que leye«e (or leyera) V.
Dijimos que leyera (or leyese).
I thought you might study, or I
thought you would study.
I did not think you were studying,
or I did not think you would study.
I judged you would study, or might
study. f
I said you might read, or would read.
He said you were to read.
We said he was to read.
4th. But if this tense be preceded or governed by a verb
in any of the past tenses of the indicative, such as desear^ to
desire, querer^ to wish, then the second termination {ra) or
the third {sé) must be used, and never the first {ría) ; as,
Deseaba que ganara (or ganase) V. I He was desirous that you might win.
Quiso que V. se casara (or casase). I He wished you to get married.
A glance at the foregoing rules and examples will suflSce
to show that the second and third terminations ra and se
may be used one for the other without any change in the
sense of the phrase. Ria^ on the other hand, is entirely
different from the other two, and may not be substituted for
them, since it alters the meaning of the sentence.
5th. When, in translating into Spanish, whether is to be
rendered by si, would or should must be rendered by the ter-
mination ría ; as.
No sé SI iría.
Kg sabia si él vendría.
1 do not know whether he would
go.
I did not know whether he would
come.
Digitized
by Google
240 LESSON XLIIL
6th. The inverted forms had /, had he^ &c., meaning if I
had^ if he hadj &c., are always to be turned into Spanish by
verbs with either of the terminations ra or se^ preceded by
the conjunction si ; as,
Si tuviera (or tuviere) buenos libros, I Had I (or if I had) good books, I
leeria. I would read.
7th. Were^ used in the place of would ie, is to be trans-
lated by -ría, occasionally by -ra, but never by -se ; as.
Sería (or fuera) imprudencia ir con It were imprudent to go in this
este tiempo. | weather.
218. The English auxiliaries may, mighty can^ couldj will^
would and should are sometimes to be translated into Span-
ish by principal verbs of the same meaning ; as,
No quiso ir. [ He would not go.
y, puede hablar, pero yo no \o puedo, \ You may (orean) speak, but I cannot.
In the first example we see that by would not is conveyed
the idea of the lack of willingness or desire on the part of
the person alluded to, and not the idea that the lack of
action was contingent as an unfulfilled condition. Had the
latter been the sense intended, we should then have ren-
dered would by the form in Ha of the verb ir, to go ; thus.
Él no iria, ) He would not go ;
for, in that case, the object would have been simply to pre-
dict that he would not go^ as dependent on some such condi-
tion as, if I did not go too, si yo no fuese también. Hence,
the closest attention is required, in order to find the real
meaning of the auxiliaries above mentioned, before attempt-
ing to translate them.
219. The imperfect subjunctive describes a contingent
action that took place some time ago, or that is taking place
at the present time, or that will take place after the com-
pletion of the action expressed by the determining verb.
220. The past perfect subjunctive represents a contingent
action as completed before some period of time already past,
or before some other action which is now also completed,
or which would be now completed had it taken place.
Digitized
by Google
I
LUSSON XLIIL 241
The closest attention to the foregoing remarks is essen-
tial, in order to avoid the improper substitution of the tenses
of the indicative for those of the subjunctive, which all for-
eigners, and especially those of English speech, are liable to
make.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Duda V. que se haga la paz este verano ? Convendría
que se hiciese la paz ; pero temo que no se haga.
2. i Iría V. á Europa si tuviera (pr tuviese) tiempo ? No iría
aunque tuviera tiempo, si no tuviese dinero.
3. i Ojalá I que tuviera V. (or tuviese) mucho dinero, porque
entonces me prestaría V. alguno ; ¿ no es así ? Si tuviera mucho
le prestaría á V. alguno ; pero con la condición de que me lo
devolviese pronto.
4. i Teme V. acaso que no se lo devolviera ? Todo pudiera
suceder, amigo mío.
5. Si V. me hubiera (pr hubiese) prestado algo, y yo no se lo
hubiese {or hubiera) devuelto, V. tendría razón en desconfiar.
— Todo eso está muy bien ; pero si, en lugar de ser V., fuera yo
el que necesitara dinero, y V. el que lo tuviera, ¿ me lo prestaría ?
Por supuesto que sí.
6. Pues con todo eso yo no sé si V. lo haría. — i Por qué piensa
V. tan mal de mí ?
7. i Ha olvidado V. ya que el año pasado, por Navidad, fui á
pedirle á V. cien pesos y me los negó V. ? Mal pudiera yo pres-
társelos á V. cuando yo no los tenía ; pero esté V. seguro, Don
José, que no hubiera tenido un gran placer en habérselos pres-
tado á V. si los hubiera {or hubiese) tenido.
8. i Si V. supiera usar correctamente los tiempos y modos
del verbo, sabría V. hablar español ? Sí, señor, con los cono-
cimientos que ya tengo de las demás partes de la oración, creo
que hablaría bien el español si supiera usar bien los tiempos y
modos del verbo.
9. ¿ Qué es lo más importante al aprender una lengua ? El
conocimiento de todo lo que hace relación al verbo.
10. i Por qué cree V. que el verbo es lo más importante? Por-
que sin los verbos no se puede formar una sola sentencia.
11. i Luego, según eso, bastará aprender la conjugación de los
verbos regulares é irregulares para hablar una lengua ? No^
señor, si uno sabe conjugar los verbos regularmente se conju-
18
Digitized
by Google
242 LESSON XLIIL
gan en las gramáticas ; pero sí sabiéndolos conjugar como se
debe.
12. ¿ Pues qué, hay algún otro modo de conjugar los verbos ?
Los verbos deben conjugarse formando sentencias completas en
todos sus modos y tiempos.
13. i Qué ventajas resultan de esto ? Las ventajas son obvias,
pues formando sentencias completas con cada tiempo y modo se
aprendre á distinguir estos tiempos y modos, acabandos por usar-
los correctamente.
14. i Y cree V. que hablaría bien el español si pudiese hacer
sentencias en todos los tiempos y modos del verbo ? Sin duda
alguna, una vez que V. forme estas sentencias con prontitud y
sin cometer faltas, hablará V. español.
15. Pues manos á la obra, ¿ quiere V. que haga algunas en el
modo indicativo ? No, señor, en las lecciones pasadas ha prac-
ticado V. bastante con ese modo, haga V. algunas ahora con el
modo subjuntivo.
16. Presente : ¿ Desea V. que yo aprenda el español ? ¿Es
correcta ? Perfectamente ; adelante.
17. Perfecto de subjuntivo : Temo que la guerra no haya aca-
bado en Europa. ¿ Está bien ? Sí, señor, está muy bien ; pero
no necesita V. preguntarme á cada sentencia que haga, si está
correcta, porque yo tendré buen cuidado de advertírselo á V.
cuando no sea así.
18. Pluscuamperfecto : Si yo hubiera creído que esto le moles-
taba á y. no se lo habría preguntado. — Esto no me molesta d9
ningún modo y espero que V. no se moleste tampoco por lo que
yo acabo de decir.
19. Imperfecto : ¿ Sería suficiente hacer una frase en cada
tiempo ? Sería suficiente si cada tiempo se usase en un solo
caso ; pero como hay muchos y muy varios, convendría practi-
car en todos tanto como fuese posible.
EXERCISE.
1. Before going out, Henry, I wish to give you a piece of
advice. Well, go on I
2. What is that advice * you have to give me ? Be quiet,
and listen to what I have to tell you.
* Consejo,
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XLIIL 243
3. Did you warn your cousin not to lend his carriage to that
young man who asked him for it ? Yes, but he said he would
do so, and that he did not distrust that young man at all.
4. Do you now know how to conjugate all the verbs in the
Spanish language ? I am not sure ; my memory is not very
good ; and so I always like to look at my grammar, for fear of
making (committing) mistakes.
5. Can you tell me how many conjugations of regular verbs
there are in Spanish ? Yes, sir, there are three.
6. When you see a new verb, how do you know to what con-
jugation it belongs ? By the termination of the infinitive mood.
7. Can you tell me to what conjugation the verb comprar
belongs ? Certainly ; it belongs to the first
8. How do you know that ? I see the characteristic termi-
nation of the first conjugation, which is ar,
9. And of which conjugation is entender f The second ; its
termination being er.
10. Very well. Now, if I say existió, can you tell me all
about that verb ? Yes, sir, it is a regular verb, third person sin-
gular, of the preterit tense of the indicative mode ; it belongs to
the third conjugation, its infinitive being existir.
11. Are there in Spanish no conjugations other than those
about which you have just told me ? Yes, very many. Those
I have mentioned (mencionar) already are the three regular
ones.
12. What do you understand by " regular verbs " ? Regular
verbs are those which are conjugated in all their modes and
tenses exactly like the models (modelos) given in different parts
of the grammar.
13. And " irregular verbs," what are they ? Those whose con-
jugation is different from the models.
14. If you could speak Spanish as well as English, do you
think you would prefer it to your own language ? I should like
to be able to speak it as well ; but there is no language in the
world that I should prefer to my own.
15. If I were to lend you this phrase book would you return
it to me next week ? I should if you wanted it, and I promised
to return it to you at that time. '
Digitized
by Google
244
LESSON XLIV.
LESSON XLIV.
Aproximar.
To approach, to draw near.
Apurar.
To perplex, to press.
Aullar.
To howl.
Ladrar.
To bark.
Cuidar.
To take care of.
Dejar.
To leave, to let.
Emplear.
To employ
Matar.
To kill.
Permitir.
To permit.
Eobar.
To rob, to steal.
Imponer.
To impose.
Tantico.
Somewhat ; a little.
Vaya de cuento.
To begin my story.
Como iba diciendo de mi
As I was saying (in my story).
^ cuento.
Á mi costa.
At my expense, to my cost
Ya le veo á V
. venir.
I see what you are at.
Venir á pelo.
To suit exactly, to be apropos.
De sopetón.
Unexpectedly.
Cuanto más.
The more.
i Por Dios !
For Heaven's sake I
¡Hel
Hoi hoal What?
I Oiga I
Indeed 1 Just listen I
Chico.
Little, small.
Revoltoso.
Noisy.
Caliente.
Hot, warm.
Apurado.
Embarrassed.
Burlón.
Jester,* scoffer.
Natural.
Natural.
Aumentativo.
Augmentative.
Diminutivo.
Diminutive.
Picaro.
Rogue, rascal.
Satisfecho.
Satisfied, contented.
Cuento .
Tale, story.
Anécdota. Anecdote.
Corro.
Group of per-
Casuca. Miserable
sons.
house.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XLIV.
245
Cojo.
Tiame.
Mosca.
Fly; tiresome
Brazo.
Arm.
person.
Ademán.
Attitude.
Necesidad.
Necessity,
Francisco, Paco
Francis,
need.
{dim.).
Frank.
Pierna.
Leg.
José, Pepe {dim.)
Joseph, Joe.
Boca.
Mouth.
Caldo.
Broth.
María, Mariqui-
Mary.
Calducho.
Poor broth.
ta {dim.).
Pistoletazo.
Pistol shot
Concepción,
{No English
Poetastro.
Poetaster.
Concha {dim.).
equivalent
Lugar.
Place.
Pistola.
Hstol.
Garrote.
Bludgeon.
Estratagema.
Stratagem.
Garrotazo.
Blow of a
Josefa, Pepa
Josephine.
bludgeon.
. {dim.).
Cañón.
Cannon.
Francisca, Paca
Frances,
Cañonazo.
Cannon-shot.
{dim.)
Fanny.
Ladrón.
Thief, robber.
Costumbre.
Custom.
Clase.
Class.
COMPO
SITION.
Lo aprendi á mi costa.
Antes no le había comprendido á
v., ahora ya le veo venir.
Él me dio la noticia de sopetón.
¡ Por Dios I D. Francisco, no hable
V. de eso.
4 Conoce V. á aqnel hombrónt
Si, señor, es el marido de mi veci-
nita Mariquita.
V. me sorpende. ; Es posible que
sea aquel hombronazo el marido
de esa mujercita !
4 Es ose hombre cojot
Sí, señor ; en la última guerra reci-
bió un pistoletazo en una pierna.
I Ha matado V. alguno vez á alguno t
Sí, señor, el año pasado maté de un
garrotazo al perro de mi vecino,
porque no me dejaba dormir, au-
llando todita la noche.
Ese hombre es un picaronazo, que no
hace sino beber y no atiende á las
necesidades de su familia.
I learned it to my cost.
I did not understand you before,
but now I see what you are at.
He gave me the news unexpectedly.
For Heaven's sake I Mr. Francis, do
not speak of that.
Do you know that big man t
Yes, sir, he is the husband of my
little neighbor Mary.
You surprise me. Is it possible
that that enormous man is that
little woman's husband.
Is that man lame I
Yes, sir ; in the last war he received
a pistol shot in one of his legs.
Did you ever kill any one t
Yes, sir; last year I killed my
neighbor's dog with a bludgeon,
for he would not let me sleep —
howling the whole night through.
That man is a great rascal who does
nothing but drink, and does not
attend to the wants of his family.
Digitized
by Google
246
LESSON XLJV.
Este perro es chiquito, pero yo tengo
uno chiquitito.
Carlotita, ye á cuidar de tu her-
manita.
Ese niQo es un picaríllo.
Esta niña es una coquetilla.
Mi pobrecico hijo está muy malo.
Pepe, i has visto mi caballito I •
Sí ; pero yo en tu lugar, Paco, le
llamaría caballejo, porque creo
que no marece el nombre de caba-
llito.
Pepe vino callandito.
Mi amigo está apuradillo.
Esa Niña está muertecita de frío.
Tu casa está lejitos.
Él no es poeta, sino poetastro.
This dog is pretty small, but I have
a very little one.
Charlotte, go and take care of your
little sister.
This child is a little roguei
This little girl is a little coquette.
My poor little son is very sick.
Joe, have you seen my pony.
I did ; but if I were you, Frank, I
would call it a nag, for I think it
is not worthy the name of pony.
Joe came in softly.
My friend is a little embarrassed.
That little girl is almost dead with
cold.
Your house is pretty far away.
He is no poet, but a poetaster.
EXPLANATION.
221. Augmentative and diminutive nouns are those
derivatives which serve to augment or diminish the significa-
tion of their primitives ; not only in regard to size, but also
esteem, character, dignity, importance, &c.
They are formed by adding various terminations to the
primitive nouns, dropping generally the vowel, if it end in
one. The terminations which are used are very numerous ;
but those most frequently adopted are azo^ on^ ote for the
augmentative masculine, and aza, ona, ota for the augmen-
tative feminine nouns. These terminations are equivalent
in their meaning to the English words iig^ large^ stout, tall,
and such like ; as,
DERIVATnrBS.
Hombrón, hom- A tall, or large,
brazOf hombro^e. man.
Mujerona, muje- A tall, or large,
raza, mujerona. woman.
But the nouns which have those terminations are not always
augmentatives, since the nouns pistoletazo, pistol shot ; caño-
nazOy cannon shot; garrotazo, blow of a bludgeon, do not
PRIMITIVES.
Hombre. A man.
Mujer. A woman.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XLIV.
247
augment the signification of their primitives, pistola^ cañóriy
and garrote^ and consequently are not augmentatives.
Familiar use has introduced many other augmentative and
diminutive terminations ; as,
llombrono^o. i A very large man.
Ficaronajso. | A very great rascal.
The terminations most used as diminutives are in, illo,
tto, icOy ete, uelo or e/o, for the masculine ; the feminine are
formed by adding a to the termination in, and by changing
the final vowel of the others into a.
Many of the diminutive terminations may acquire a still
further diminutive signification by adding other terminations
to them ; thus,
Chico.
Chiquito.
Chiquitito.
Small.
Very small.
Very, very small.
The manner of applying these terminations, as much for
their different meanings as for their various orthographical
accidents, admits of so much variety that practice seems the
only means of acquiring the proper use of them ; as,
Mi hermani/o.
IJn hombrecito.
Un viejecito.
Él es un picariZto.
Carlotiía.
Una pobre viejecito.
Ella es una coquetiZ/a.
Mi pobrecico hijo (or mi pobre
hijito).
Un caballe/o.
Un pobreto.
Un ladronzwcZo.
Un reyezweto.
My dear little brother.
A dear little man.
A dear little old man.
He is a dear little rogue.
Dear little Charlotte.
A poor dear little old woman.
She is a dear little coquette.
My poor little son.
A miserable little horse, a nag.
A poor useless creature.
A petty young thief.
A petty king.
222. Besides the terminations mentioned, there are many
others which may be called irregular, inasmuch as they can
be affixed to certain nouns only, among them the most irregu-
lar are those of persons ; as,
Francisco, Paco, etc. I Francis, Frank.
Concepción, Concha, etc. | {No equivalent in English,)
Digitized
by Google
248
LESSON XLIV.
José, Pepe, etc.
María, Mariquita, etc.
Joseph, Joe.
Mary.
223. Although the diminutives proceed in general from
substantive nouns, as we see by the preceding examples, they
are also formed, in familiar style, from adjectives, participles,
gerunds, and even from adverbs ; thus we not unf requently
say:
R.evoltos^7Zo es el muchacho.
Muerteciío de frío.
Tod//o el día.
Pan calenttío.
ApuradiZZo estuvo.
Vino calland*7o.
Leji7os está tu casa.
The boy is rather turbulent.
Half dead with cold.
The whole day over.
Warm bread (slightly warm).
He was somewhat embarrassed.
He came softly.
Your house is pretty far away.
224. Primitive words, ending of themselves in any di-
minutive termination (such as cept'Wo, brush ; abanico, fan ;
espe/o, looking-glass, &c.), cannot take an additional termi-
nation similar to their own, without producing a disagree-
able sound, which ought always to be avoided. Words end-
ing in ito or ita are excepted.
The same termination may often serve to express affection^
pity^ contempt^ &c., being in this respect like the interjec-
tions, and it is consequently very difficult to classify them.
Very often their real meaning can be distinguished only by
the nature of the conversation and the intonation of the
voice. They are, nevertheless, not to be used too profusely,
because when they come too close together they render the
discourse monotonous, in consequence of the similarity ex-
isting between them.
225. There are in Spanish other derivatives, formed more
or less at fancy, and which are not augmentatives or diminu-
tives, although they may appear to be such ; these might be
called depreciatives {despreciativos)^ because there is always
in them something of censure, maliciousness, or mockery ; as,
Casa, casuca.
Poeta, poetastro.
Caldo, calducho.
Pueblo, poblacho.
House, miserable-looking house.
Poet, poetaster.
Broth, poor broth.
Miserable little village.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XLIV. 249
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. i Tiene V. lástima de aquel pobrete ? No tengo lástima
de él, porque es un ladronzuelo.
2. ¿ Le ha robado á V. algo ? No, señor, él sabe muy bien
que si se atreviese á robarme yo lo mataría de un pistoletazo.
3. Y i por qué no de un garrotazo, ó un cañonazo ? ¿ Por
qué? No sé porqué, probablemente he empleado la palabra
pistoletazo porque tengo una pistola y no tengo ni garrote, ni
cañón.
4. No, señor, esa no es la razón ; i quiere V. que yo se la
diga ? Bien, veamos.
5. V. no tiene valor para matar una mosca cuanto más á un
hombre ; pero V. quería practicar con las palabras matar y pis-
toletazo y esta es la sola razón por la cual V. iba á cometer un
homicidio.
6. Vaya, Don Francisco, V. es poeta, hombre de ingenio y
de buen humor y quiere divertirse á costa mía, i no es verdad ?
Ya lo veo á V. venir, V. quiere hacerme decir que no soy poeta
sino poetastro introduciendo esta palabrita más de la lección.
7. Solo le faltaba á V. llamarse Quevedo para serle parecido
en todo, hasta en el nombre. — Mil gracias por el honor de la com-
paración, pero volviendo á lo del pistoletazo.
8. i Por Dios 1 D. Francisco, no sea V. tan burlón y déjeme
V. estar en paz. — Lo dejaré á V., Don Pepe, si me permite con-
tarle un cuentecito ; y para que le parezca á V. más interesante,
se lo contaré á V. introduciendo tantos aumentativos y diminu-
tivos como me sea posible.
9. Con esa condición le escucho á V. — Pues bien ; vaya de
cuento : Había un hombrecillo en cierto lugarcillo. — ^Y observe
V., D." Pepito, que para el cuentecito lo mismo hubiera dado que
el hombre hubiera sido hombrón y el lugar lugarón. — Adelante
con el cuentecillo que me va gustando un tantico. Pues es el
caso que este hombrón, hombrecito, hombrecillo, hombrote, hom-
brecico, hombrazo, hombronazo, hombracho, ó como V. quiera
llamarle. . . .
10. Yo no quiero llamarle nada, V. le ha llamado ya sufi-
ciente; pero al cuento, al cuento ó se acabará el ejercicio sin
que lleguemos al fin.— Pues este ¡hombrezuelo no sabía más que
un cuentecillo ; pero lo contaba á todo el mundo que encontraba.
11. Pero yo no comprendo como podía hacer que su cuento
viniese á pelo y V. sabe que no se cuenta un cuento así de sope-
Digitized
by Google
260 LESSON XLIV.
ton, como se dan los buenos días. — Al principio, el viejote se en-
contraba apuradillo para conseguirlo ; pero el picaruelo inventó
después una estratagema por medio de la cual hizo que su anec-
dotilla viniera á pelo siempre.
12. I Oiga ! i y qué estratagema fué esa ? Óigala V. ; pero antes
debo advertir á V. que en su anécdota había algo que hacía rela-
ción á cañonazos y pistoletazos.
13. i He I ¡ Ya vuelve V. á los pistoletazos 1 Pues bien, como
iba diciendo de mi cuento, se aproximaba el buen viejecito ca-
llandito á cualquier corrillo que encontrase y poniéndose el dedo
índice sobre la boca en ademán de imponer silencio, les pregun-
taba. " i Han oído Vds. un cañonazo ? " No, señor, era natural-
mente la respuesta ; pues bien, respondía mi hombre muy satis-
fecho.— Ahora que hablamos de cañonazos les contaré á Vds. una
anécdota ... y aquí contaba su cuento.
14. Yo no veo la aplicación de su cuento de V. todavía, Sr. D.
Francisco. — i Cómo ! D. Pepe, ¿ no ha oído V. un pistoletazo ?
EXERCISE.
1. How did you like that story by Fernán Caballero which
I lent you ? Very much indeed ; it gives a very good idea of
the manners, customs, and language of the low classes in Anda-
lusia (AndaliLcid),
2. What did that man want ? He is a poor lame man ask-
ing for a piece of bread, or a few cents to buy some.
3. He is lame, you say ; how did that happen to him ? He
says he was at the war and received a pistol shot in the leg.
4. What does the physician give to your cousin since he has
been sick ? He has given him some medicine (medicina), and
says he must take broth three times a day.
5. Do you like broth ? Yes, very well ; but not such poop
broth as they make for my cousin.
6. How does that poor man make his living since he lost
both his arms ? He can do nothing in the world, and lives on
what little money he gets from his brother, who is himself rather
embarrassed just now.
7. Come nearer to the fire, Louisa ; it is a little cold this
morning. Thank you, I do not feel the cold much ; but I should
be obliged to you if you would call Fanny in to warm herself ;
she is half dead with cold.
8. Is Henry going to be employed by that merchant to whom
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XLV, 261
you spoke for him some time ago ? Yes. I think it is probable-
and I shall be very glad, for the poor fellow * is a little embar-
rassed, and has been so for a long time.
9. If I were in your place I should not allow that dog to
howl so the whole night through. My father will not let me
speak about it to our neighbor, who lives in that miserable old
house next to ours; it is his dog, and he ought not to let it
howl in such a manner.
10. Just listen to him I as if I could not go and kill it with a
bludgeon. — Kill it I There would be no necessity for killing it ;
just giveliim one good blow with the bludgeon you talk of and
he would let you sleep in future.
11. Have you ever read Don Quixote ? No ; why ? If you
take the trouble to read it you will find a very good anecdote of
a madman (Jocó) and a dog, in the first chapter of the second
part of that justly celebrated work.
12. Have you paid attention to what is said in to-day's lesson
on augmentatives and diminutives ? Yes, madam ; and it seems
to me that the proper use of them must make a language expres-
sive and elegant in a high degree {gradó).
13. Is Concepción a very common name for ladies in Spain ?
There are a great many called by that name ; the diminutive is
Concha,
14. Is your mother satisfied with her new servant? Very
much so.
15. Why did she let the other one go away ? She was very
glad to see her go away, because she used to steal everything
that came to her hand.
16. Is that coffee warm ? No, sir ; but I could warm it in a
few minutes, if you wished.
LESSON XLV.
Avisar.
Admirar.
Aconsejar.
To advise, to notify, to let one
know.
To admire.
To counsel, to advise.
• Remember that English words italicised are not to be translated.
Digitized
by Google
252
LUSSON XLV.
Apremiar.
Afectar.
Compadecer.
Convertir.
Deseítar.
Empeñar.
Explicar.
Fusilar.
Guardar.
Librar.
Mentir.
Mencionar.
Permanecer.
Relatar.
Santificar.
Suceder.
Sonar.
Volar.
De todo corazón.
En su interior.
Ya caigo.
Bien venido.
A cual más.
De buena fe.
Esto es.
Ya lo ve V.
To urge, to compel one to do any-
thing by order of court.
To feign, to affect.
To pity.
To convert
To desert.
To pledge, to engage.
To explain.
To shoot.
To guard, to observe, to keep.
To free, to liberate, to 'deliver.
To lie.
To mention.
To remain.
To relate.
To sanctify.
To happen, to succeed.
To sound.
To fly.
1 Ah bah !
Oh, pshaw I
I Toma !
Indeed !
Ancho.
Wide, broad.
Falso.
False.
Calvo.
Bald.
Famoso.
Famous.
Notorio.
Notorious, well known.
Crédulo.
•Credulous.
Crítico.
Critical.
Formal.
Formal, straightforward.
Supei-sticioso.
Superstitious.
Escéptico.
Skeptic, skeptical.
With all my heart.
In his mind.
I see (or understand).
Welcome.
Vieing with each other.
In good faith.
That is.
So you see.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XLV.
253
Sol.
Sun.
Oración.
Prayer.
Amor.
Love.
Tierra.
Earth, land.
Cielo.
Sky, heaven.
Calva.
Baldness, the bald
Keino.
Kingdom.
part.
Fin.
End, purpose.
Ana.
Ann.
Deudor.
Debtor.
Voluntad.
Will, choice.
General.
General.
Profecía.
Prophecy.
Cuervo.
Eaven, crow.
Fisonomía.
Physiognomy,
Agüero.
Omen.
countenance.
Interior.
Interior.
Tentación.
Temptation.
Espíritu.
Spirit.
Sinceridad.
Sincerity.
Lodo.
Mud.
Injusticia.
Injustice.
El padre nuestrc
K The Lord's
Ridiculez.
Ridicule.
Prayer.
Compasión.
Compassion.
Tren.
Train.
Materia.
Matter.
Parroquiano.
Parishioner,
Fe.
Faith.
customer.
Bolsa.
Purse.
Lector.
Header.
Excepción.
Exception.
Frente.
Forehead.
Formalidad
Formality.
COMPOÍ
3ITI0N.
Dios te lo premie.
Si para fines de año no hubiere pa-
gado, lo apremias (or apremíalo,
or lo apremiarás).
Si viene {or como venga) será bien
recibido.
Quien tal diga miente.
Si así lo haces. Dios te lo premie.
Si al salir de tu casa vieres volar
cuervos, déjalos volar y mira tú
donde pones los pies.
Todo hombre calvo no tendrá pelo ;
y si tuviere alguno no será en la
calva.
Lo perdonarán todo lo que hiciere.
Le escribiré á V. lo que me dijere.
Si permaneciere aquí algún tiempo
se lo avisaré.
May Qod reward you for it.
If at the end of the year he has not
paid you, compel him to do so.
If he comes^ he will be well re-
ceived.
Whoever says such a thing, lies.
If you do so, may God reward you.
If on going out of your house you
should see crows fly, let them fly,
and look where you put your own
feet.
Every bald man is without hair; or
if he should have any, it would
not be on the bald part.
They will forgive him every thing
he may do.
I shall write to you what he may
(happen to) say to me.
If I should (or should I) remain here
any time, I shall let you know.
Digitized
by Google
254
LESSON XLV.
Le escribiré á Y. lo que me diga.
Le perdonarán lo que haga.
Si hubiere salido cuando V. llegue.
Aunque hubiere llegado antes que
reciba la carta.
Aunque haya llegado antes que re-
ciba la carta.
El general mandó que todos los que
desertaran fuesen fusilados.
£1 general mandó que todos los que
hubieran desertado fuesen fusila-
dos.
El general ha mandado que todos
los que desertaren sean fusilados.
El general ha mandado que todos
los que hubieren desertado sean
fusilados. ^
Quien lo dijere miente.
Si viniere, será bien recibido.
Si asi lo hicieres.
I shall write you what he may say
to me.
They will forgive him every thing
he may do.
If he should have left when you ar-
rive.
Although he may have arrived be-
fore he receive the letter.
Although he may have arrived be-
fore he receive the letter.
The general ordered that all those
who might (happen to) desert
should be shot.
The general ordered that all those
who might have deserted should
be shot.
The general has ordered that all
those who*may desert {%. e. may
happen to desert) should be shot.
The general has ordered that all
those who may have deserted be
shot.
Whoever should say so would lie.
If he should come, he would be well
received.
If you should do so.
EXPLANATION.
226. The future of the subjunctive mode represents a
contingent action to take place some time hence ; as,
I shall write to you what he may
(happen to) say to me.
Le escribiré á V. lo que me dijere.
Lo perdonarán todo lo que hiciere.
Si permaneciere aquí algún tiempo
se lo avisaré.
They will forgive him every thing
he may do in future.
If I should (or should I) remain
here any time I shall let you
know.
227. The present subjunctive may be substituted for
the foregoing tense, except when the verb is preceded by the
conditional si ; as, Le escribiré á V. lo que diga ; Le perdo-
narán lo que haga.
228. The future perfect subjunctive, which is not so
Digitized
by Google
If he should have left when you ar-
rive.
Although he may have arrived be-
fore he receive the letter.
LESSOX XLV, 265
much used as the future subjunctive, describes a contingent
action dependent on a future event ; as,
Si hvinere salido cuando V. llegue.
Aunque hubiere llegado antes que
reciba la carta.
229. The peefect subjunctive may be substituted for
the above tense, except when the verb is preceded by the
conditional si ; as, aunque haya llegado antes que reciba la
carta.
230. In order that the imperfect and past perfect sub-
junctive, which also express a future contingent action or
event, be not misapplied, as too frequently they are, and con-
founded with the future simple and compound future of the
same mode, the following distinction must be attentively ob-
served :
Ist. That the imperfect sjid. past perfect may be employed
when the actions or events expressed in the sentence are fu-
ture only in reference to some other time expressed, or merely
implied, in the sentence.
2d. That the subjunctive future and subjunctive future
perfect must be used when the contingent action or event im-
plied in the sentence is future with regard to the action ex-
pressed by the determining verbs ; as.
El general mandó que todos los que
desertaran fuesen fusilados.
£1 general mandó que todos los que
hubieran desertado fuesen fusila-
dos.
El general ha mandado que todos
los que desertaren sean fusilados.
El general ha mandado que todos
los que hubieren desertado sean
fusilados.
The general ordered that all those
who should (might happen to) de-
sert should be shot.
The general ordered that all those
who had (might have) deserted
should be shot.
The general has ordered that all
those who desert (t. e, may hap-
pen to desert) shall be shot.
The general has ordered that all
those who have deserted shall be
shot.
231. The future and the future perfect subjunctive also
act as determining verbs ; but they govern the subordinate
Digitized
by Google
256 LESSON XLV.
verb only in the present or the future indicative, and in the
imperative; as,
Quien lo dijere^ miente.
Si viniere será bien recibido.
Si asi lo JviciereSf Dios te lo premie.
Whoever should say so will lie.
If he should come, he will be well
received.
If you do so, may God reward you
for it.
If at the end of the year he has not
paid you, compel him to do so.
Si para fines de afio no te hubiere pa-
gado, lo apremias, or aprémiaJo,
or lo apremiarás.
These determining sentences of the future simple of the
subjunctive may be turned to the present indicative in cer-
tain cases, and to the present subjunctive in others ; as.
Si viene, or como venga, será bien
recibido.
Quien tal diga miente.
Si así lo JiaceSy Dios te lo premie,
etc.
If he* comes, he shall be well re-
ceived.
Whoever says so lies.
If you do so, may God reward you
for it.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. Don Jose, me han dicho que es mal agüero al salir uno de
su casa ver volar cuervos ; i qué piensa V. sobre ello ? Yo pienso
como Don Francisco de Quevédo.
2. ¿ Y qué es lo que pensaba ese famoso escritor sobre esta
materia ? Oiga V. lo que él decía.
3. Si al salir de tu casa vieres. volar cuervos, déjalos volar, y
mira tú donde pones los pies.
4. ¡ Ah ! ¡ bah I Quevedo era un criticón que no perdonaba
nada, pero allá en su interior quizá creía un poquito como todo
el mundo en los agüeros ; ¿ no cree V. así ? i Qué si creía ? Por
supuesto que sí. Vea V. aquí otro de los agüeros en que creía.
5. Si vas á comprar algo, y al ir á pagar no hallares la bolsa
adonde llevabas el dinero, es agüero malísimo, y no te sucederá
bien la compra.
6. I Toma I Esa es una verdad de Perogrullo, y ya veo que
V. no cree en los agüeros pero al menos V. creerá en las profecías ;
i no es verdad, Don José ? i O I sí, señora, mucho, sobre todo en
las de Perogrullo.
7. l Qué profecías son esas, que nunca las he oído ? Señora, .
no podré relatárselas á V. todas, pero le. diré á V. algunas si V. lo
desea.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XLV. 257
8. Con mucho gusto, hágame V. el favor. Pues bien, oiga
V. : " Si lloviere habrá lodos." " El que tuviere tendrá."
9. ¡ Ah ! ya caigo ; es por esto que se llama cualquiera verdad
que es muy notoria, verdad de Perogrullo. ¡ Vamos ! aquí viene
Don Enrique, puede ser que él crea en algo, porque V. no cree
en nada.
10. Á los pies de V., Doña Anita.--Beso á V. la mano Don
Enrique.
11. Á las órdenes de V., Don José.— Bien venido, Don Enri-
que.— Aquí tiene V. á Doña Anita empeñada en hacerme super-
sticioso.
12. ¿ Y V. es también escéptico ? ¿ No cree V. en sueños, en
espíritus, en fisonomías ? ¿ en qué cree V., Don Enrique ? Yo,
señorita, soy un hombre muy crédulo, creo en todo, creo hasta
las mujeres.
13. Mil gracias, Don Enrique ; yo creía que la sinceridad esta-
ba siempre de parte de la mujer y no del hombre, pues son Vds.
todos á cual más falso. — Señorita, ó V. nos hace una injusticia, ó
yo soy una excepción ; pero volviendo á lo de las creencias, con-
fieso de buena fe que soy un poco supersticioso. — Me alegro mu-
cho, de ese modo me ayudará V. á convertir á Don José que no
cree en nada.
14. Perdone V., señorita, yo creo en una de las cosas que V.
ha mencionado, esto es, en las fisonomías. — ¡ Bien, bien I explí-
quenos V., entonces, su significado.
15. El que tuviere la frente ancha tendrá los ojos debajo de la
frente, y vivirá todos los días de su vida. — i Por Dios I Don José,
hable V. formalmente.
16. Pues bien, con toda formalidad. Todo hombre calvo no
tendrá pelo, y si tuviere alguno no será en la calva.
17. I Ya lo ve, V. I se burla de todo, y no cree en nada, es un
escéptico completo. Defiéndase V., amigo Don José, ó quizá es
verdad que no cree V. en nada. Entonces le compadezco á V. de
todo corazón.
18. i Hombre I déjeme V. en paz, y guarde V. su compasión
para todas esas pobres gentes que creen, ó afectan creer, todas
esas ridiculeces ; yo creo lo que veo ; creo lo que siento, y creo lo
que mi razón me aconseja creer ; por eso creo en el sol, en el amor,
en Dios. — i Vamos ! ahora va á hacernos creer que es hombre muy
religioso.
19. Señor Don José, esta señorita y yo tenemos grandes deseos
19
Digitized
by Google
258 LJESSOK XLV.
de aprender el Padre nuestro en español ; ¿ lo sabe V. ? No sola-
mente lo sé, sino que es una oración que me gusta mucho.
20. ¿ Nos hora V. el favor de decírnosla ? Con mucho gusto,
helo aquí
21. '* Padre nuestro, que estás en los cielos, santificado sea tu
nombre, venga á nos el tu reino. Hágase tu voluntad, así en la
tierra como en el cielo. El pan nuestro de cada día dánoslo hoy.
Perdónanos nuestras deudas, como nosotros perdonamos á nues-
tros deudores. Y no nos dejes caer en tentación. Y líbranos de
mal.'' Amén.
22. Mil gracias, Don José ; voy á aprenderlo de memoria por-
que me suena muy bien en español.
EXERCISE.
1. At what time does the sun rise at New York in the month
of September ? The sun rose here this morning at twenty-seven
minutes past five o'clock.
2. What did your teacher say to you to-day when your les-
sons were finished ? Nothing to me in particular ; he spoke to
all of us about reading good books, as very necessary in order to
acquire the love of truth and sincerity in all our actions.
3. Here are the works of Francis de Quevedo ; have you ever
read them ? Yes, very often ; and I very much admire his pro-
found knowledge of the human heart.
4. He is also somewhat of a jester ; is he not ? Yes, but for
a very wise end ; he shows the ridiculousness of belief in augu-
ries, omens — for instance, the flight {vuelo) of crows, &c.
5. What do you think of his prophecies ? The only end of
his prophecies seem to be to divert his readers, telling them that
all bald persons have no hair, or if they should have any, it would
not be on the bald place.
6. Do you know what the general has ordered ? He has
given orders that all soldiers that desert shall be shot
7. Do you pity that poor soldier who is to be shot ? I did not
know there was one to be shot ; what crime did he commit ? Ho
deserted.
8. What will they do to that robber if they find him ? He
will be shot.
9. Do you not think he deserves to be shot ? There can be
no doubt of it: he who kills a man must die by the hand of
man.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XL VI.
259
10. Are there still superstitious people in the world ? Yes, a
great many ; and I must say, that, even among the learned, we
find a large number whose education ought to lead * us to have
a higher opinion of them.
11. Has that gentleman yet paid you the money he owed you
such a long time ? Not yet ; indeed I begin to fear he will never
pay me.
12. If he should not pay you before he leaves the coimtry, com-
pel him to do so. So I intend to do.
13. How long does your father intend to remain in Germany ?
Perhaps two or three months ; but should he remain longer, he
will write for me to go to him.
14. Welcome, Mr. Martinez 1 how long have you been in town ?
Only a few days ; and I shall return home as soon as I hear from
my brother.
15. What a fine forehead that young lady has I I have never
seen such a beautiful countenance, with the exception of that of
a lady whom I met in Spain a few years ago.
LESSOÍÍ XLVI.
Adivinar.
To guess.
Acordar.
To agree, to tune.
Acordarse.
To recollect, to remember.
Colocar.
To lay, to place.
Meter.
To put in, to make (noise).
Peinar.
To comb.
Picar.
To prick, to chop, to hash.
Persistir.
To persist.
Eomper.
To break.
Coger.
To take, to catch.
Esconder.
To hide, to conceal.
INTERJECTIONS.
lAy!
Ay!
¡Zape! Heaven pre-
¡Eal
Cheer up
come.
serve us I
come!
I Victoria I Victory *
¡Eh!
Oh! ahí
I Cómo I How 1
*
Debería
hacemos.
Digitized
by Google
260
LESSON XL VI.
iHuyl
1 0x1
I Sus I
I Uf (or huf) I
i Hola!
I Tate I
iCa!
¡ Viva]I
I Dale I
Whew !
Get you gone 1
Come I come 1
Ughl
Halloa!
Take care !
Pshaw I
Hurrah!
Go!
¡ Qué horror ! O horror I
Aire.
Cambio;
Alfiler.
Atlántico.
Éxito.
Buen éxito.
Cable.
Peine.
Presidente.
Buido.
Chasco.
Patio.
Tratado.
Dolor.
Asombro.
Maullido.
Gato.
I Anda!
¡Calle!
¡Chito {or
ton)!
¡ Diantre !
¡ Cuidado !
¡ Dios nos
¡Vamos !
¡ Vuelta I
Gol go away!
Strange!
chi- Hush 1
The deuce !
I Look out !
( Take care !
libre! Heaven pre-
serve us !
Come!
Turn about
(or roimd)!
Finalmente.
Finally.
Llevar á cabo.
To accomplish.
Llevarse chasco.
To be disappointed.
• Cabal.
Just, exact
* Fresco.
Cool, fresh.
* Listo.
Eeady, quick.
iEestante.
Kemaining, remainder.
Telegráfico.
Telegraphic.
Extraordinario.
Extraordinary.
Dichoso.
Happy.
Air.
Change.
Pin.
Atlantic.
Besult
Success.
Cable.
Comb.
President
Noise.
Disappointment
Yard, pit (theatre).
Treaty, treatise.
Pain, grief.
Amazement.
Mewing.
Cat
Camisa.
Cuenta.
Empresa.
Cualidad.
Austria.
Palangana.
Prusia.
Procesión.
Constancia.
Prueba.
Tranquilidad.
Victoria.
Shirt chemise.
Account
Enterprise.
Quality.
Austria.
Wash-basin,
wash-bowl.
Prussia.
Procession.
Constancy.
Proof, trial.
Tranquillity.
Victory.
Gazette, news-
paper.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XL VI.
COMPOSITION.
I Ah ! qué desgracia !
¡ Ay de mí I
¡ Oh I dolor !
# ¡ Ah ! bribón I
¡ Ah ! qué alegría !
/ ¡ Oh ! asombro I
¡ Ay, si le cojo I
; Oh I ya nos veremos I
¡ Bah ! no hables de esa manera !
i ¡ Huy ! me quemé con el cigarrillo I
¡ üí ! qué calorazo t
i Ea ! á trabajar t
I Tate I tate ! no pase V. por ahí, que
veo un hombre escondido !
\ Zape I ese gatazo no me deja dor-
mir con sus maullidos !
¡ Toma ! toma ! eso ya lo sabía yo.
¡ Viva la libertad !
¡ Diantre de muchachos I y qué rui-
do meten !
; Hola ! D. Francisco ! dichosos los
ojos que lo ven á V I
jQué me sé yol
La cuenta está cabal.
Espero no llevarme chasco, y que
llevaré á cabo mi empresa.
Ah ! how unfortunate !
Woo is me !
Ah I how sad I
Ha ! rascal !
Ah I what joy I '
Oh I wonder !
Let me get hold of him I
Oh 1 1 shall see you again !
Pshaw ! don't talk that way !
Whew ! I have burned myself with
the cigarette !
Oh I how warm it is !
Come to work I
Take care ! don't go that way ; I see
a man hiding !
Heaven preserve us I that con-
founded cat will not let me sleep
with its mewing !
That's all, eh ! 1 knew that much
myself.
Hurrah for liberty I
Did you ever hear such children!
what a noise they make I
Halloa I Mr. Francis ! it is good for
sore eyes to see you !
How can I tell f
The account is exact (correct).
I hope not to be disappointed, and
that I shall carry out my under-
taking.
EXPLANATION.
232. Interjections are words which serve to express the
different emotions and affections of the soul. There should
be a separate interjection to express each passion or emotion ;
but this not being the case, we often use the same ones to ex-
press joy, grief, affright, astonishment, mockery, anger, &c.,
the signification of each interjection changing according to
the voice, gesture, and manner of the speaker.
The exclamations that are properly called interjections in
Spanish, inasmuch as they have no other use, and because
Digitized
by Google
262 LESSON XL VI.
they consist of only one word, are the following : Ah, ay, iaJi,
ca, eh, huy, oh, ox, sus, uf, ea, hola, ojalá, tate, zape, and a few
others.
Ah, ay and oh are used indifferently to express pain, joy,
mockery, surprise, scorn, anger, or admiration ; as,
/ Ah ! que desgracia I
/ Ay de mi !
/ Oh ! dolor I
/ Ah ! bribón I
/ Ah ! que alegría I
/ Oh ! asombro I
¡Ah! que necio I
/ Ay si le cojo !
/ Oh ! ya nos veremos I &c.
Ah I what misfortune I
Woe is me !
Ah ! how sad I
Ha ! rascal !
Oh ! what joy I
Oh I wonder I
Ah ! what a fool I
Let me get hold of him I
Oh ! I shall see you again I
233. / Bah I expresses displeasure, and sometimes wonder
and admiration. / He ! besides being used to attract the at-
tention, is often employed in the sense of alas ! / Sus ! serves
only to encourage. / Huy ! is an exclamation expressive of
pain. / Ea ! serves to encourage, and sometimes to call the
attention. We use / hola ! to call our inferiors, and intimate
friends, and to manifest joy and surprise. / Tate ! expresses
surprise, and serves to warn any one of some danger. / Ojalá I
serves to manifest ardent desire for something.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Ea ! ea ! muchachos, arriba ! que ya es hora de levan-
tarse.—¿ Pues qué hora es, papá ? Ya son las seis y quiero que os
vistáis, lavéis y toméis el café prontito, para ir á tomar el aire
fresco de la mañana en la plaza de Madison.
2. I Sus ! arriba ! y el que se me presente primero listo irá á
comprarme el Heraldo y tendrá el centavo del cambio. — Helena,
ponme agua para lavarme. — No, Helena, no ayudes á Alejandro
que ese ya puede vestirse solo, ayuda á Carlotita y á Manolito.
3. Luisa, dame mis zapatos y mis medias. — Búscalos tú mismo,
yo no voy á ayudarte para que te vistas antes que yo.
4. I Cuidado I ¿ no veis que vais á romper esa palangana ?
Es este Manuel que todavía no se ha puesto más que una media y
un zapato y se quiere lavar antes que yo, que me he puesto ya la
camisa, los zapatos y el pantalón.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XL VI. 263
5. I Ay ! ¡ ay ! — ¿ Qué es eso, Luisa ? Me he picado con el al-
filer que estaba poniendo en mi vestido.
6. ¿ En dónde está el jabón ? Qué me sé yo.
7. i Carlota, me quieres dar el x)eine, ó te vas á estar peinando
todo el día ? Déjame en paz, ahora acabo de principiar.
8. Mamá, mire V. que Alejandro no me deja ayudar á vestir
á Manuel, i Mamá, dónde esta mi sombrero ?
9. Papá, ya estoy listo, déme V. el dinero para comprar el
Heraldo. — No, no, papá ; mire V. que se ha puesto el sombrero
sin peinarse.
10. I Cómo ! eso no, Alejandro, no se sale á la calle sin pei-
narse.— Papá, ya estoy listo. — ^Y yo. — ^Y yo.
11. I Chiton 1 I Diantre de muchachos y que ruido meten I
Aquí tenéis diez centavos, cuatro para el Heraldo y de los seis
restantes uno para cada uno, cuenta cabal, me traéis el Heraldo
y después os vais á la plaza y no volváis, á lo menos en un par
de horas.
12. Margarita, ahora que tenemos tranquilidad tráeme la pipa,
antes de ponerme á escribir, fumaré un poco y leeré las noticias
en el patio al fresco.
13. ¡ Hola I grandes noticias I ¿Qué hay de nuevo ? El Great
EaMern ha llegado, y se dice que el gran cable telegráfico ha sido
finalmente colocado, uniendo así la Europa y la América.
14. I Es posible I entonces pronto tendremos noticias todos los
días de Europa. — Así lo espero, pero no debemos estar muy segu-
ros de ello, porque ya te acordarás del chasco que llevamos años
pasados.
15. I Ah I sí, ya me acuerdo ; en 1858, cuando se celebró el éxi-
to del cable telegráfico con aquella grande procesión, y se vendía
por la calle la gaceta extraordinaria con el parte telegráfico de la
Eeina Victoria al Presidente de los Estados Unidos.— Espero que
no nos llevemos ahora el mismo chasco.
16. í ¡ La extraordinaria ! ! ¡ i La gaceta extraordinaria ! I jEh!
muchacho, aquí, aquí
17. i Cuánto vale ? Diez centavos.
18. i Victoria I Viva I Viva ! ¿ Qué dice de nuevo ? El ca-
ble del Atlántico ha tenido buen éxito, el primer parte recibido
por él es el tratado de paz entre el Austria y la Prusia.
19. Esta es una prueba más de lo que puede llevar á cabo el
hombre, si tiene constancia y persiste en una empresa. — i Cree V.
que yo también tendré buen éxito en mi empresa ?
Digitized
by Google
26i LESSON XLVL
20. I Qué empresa es esa ? \ Cómo ! ¿ no la adivina V. ? La
empresa de aprender el español.
21. ¡ Ah ! No dudo que V. hablará español si persiste y tiene
constancia ; puesto que con estas cualidades se ha logrado que
hable el cable del Atlántico.
EXERCISE.
1. Can you tell me what kind of weather we shall have to-
morrow ? Oh, what a question I Do you suppose that I can de-
cide as to the weather we shall have before it comes ?
2. Did the pianist say he would come to tune the piano ? He
said he would come to-morrow, but that he could not come to-
day.
3. Have you seen that the Atlantic telegraphic cable is laid
at last ? Yes ; I am glad to see that the undertaking has been so
successful.
4. Do you know who sent the first dispatch by the cable ? I
am not sure ; but I remember that the first, at the time of the
former cable, in 1858, was that sent by the President of the United
States to the Queen of England.
5. What was the occasion for laying a second cable ? Ah,
come now ! do you not know that the first one, having broken
shortly after it was laid, became entirely useless {inútil) ?
6. Have you seen the news to-day by Atlantic telegraph ?
No ; what is the news ? That a treaty of peace has been signed
{celebrar) between Prussia and Austria.
7. Charles, go and look for the comb, where you put it when
you finished with it. I have not seen it since Henry was using
it ; and even if I had, I should not tell you where it is.
8. Ah, you little rogue ! there, you have broken the wash-
basin. It is not my fault, Henry wanted it first, and I had al-
ready commenced to wash myself ; but he persisted and wished
to take it from me.*
9. O horror ! just see what a state his hair (peló) is in I Go
this instant and get the comb and comb your hair before you dare
to appear before me.
10. Have you a pin to give me ? Yes, here is a paper of pins ;
take all you want and give me back the rest.
11. Did you know your lessons well this morning ? Yes, very
* Persistió en quitármela.
Digitized
by Google
LUSSON XL VI. 265
well, and the proof is that papa allowed me to go to see the pro-
cession.
12. Why did you kill that poor little fly ? Have I not told
you many times that I don't wish you to catch or kill flies ?
13. Is that bread fresh ? Yes, sir, the baker brought it only a
few minutes ago.
14. We were to have gone to the yard to play at twelve o'clock.
You may go now ; but do not make much noise.
15. Where were you going when I met you ? We were com-
ing home to dine.
16. Has the shoemaker sent you his bill ? Yes, but it is not
correct.
17. Has not your uncle written to you since he went away ?
He has sent several telegraphic dispatches to my father on busi-
ness ; but he has not written to us once (una sola vez).
18. Is not there to be a new opera to-night ? No ; but I un-
derstand there is to be a new play (comedia) at the theatre.
19. That is nothing extraordinary ; there are new pieces very
often now.
20. If Louisa were a little taller would not she be handsomer
than Jane ? She would be at least quite as handsome.
21. Would you desire to have the window open ? I think it
would be much cooler if it were open.
22. Would you not like me to repeat to you that story I told
you the other day ? If you had time I should be much obliged
to you for telling it to me once more.
23. Would not quietness be much better for that gentleman
than so much noise ? He could not live without noise.
24. Might you not have broken your arm or your leg when
you fell out of your carriage ? Yes, if I had not taken care.
25. If I had wanted money when I was in the country would
you not have brought me some ? If I could have gotten (conse-
guir) it I would.
26. Would not your aunt have been disappointed if she had
not been in time to take the three o'clock train ? She would have
been terribly disappointed, for she was going to spend the day at
a friend's, about ten miles out of town.
Digitized
by Google
266
LESSOJ^ XL VIL
LESSON XLVII.
Acompañar.
To accompany.
Cargar.
To load, to charge.
Curar.
To cure, to attend (as a physi-
cian).
Dañar.
To injure, to damage.
Deleitar.
To delight
Incomodar.
To incommode.
Incomodarse.
To get out of temper.
Equivocar.
To mistake.
Evitar.
To avoid, to shun.
Instruir.
To instruct
Ocupar.
To occupy.
Padecer.
To suffer.
Solicitar.
To solicit, to apply for, to urge.
Dimes y diretes.
Ifs and ands.
El no sé qué.
An inexplicable something.
Dolor de cabeza-
Headache.
Masculino.
Masculine.
Amable.
Amiable.
Agradable.
Agreeable.
Extranjero.
Foreign, foreigner.
Interesante.
Interesting.
Moribimdo.
Dying.
Valiente.
Valiant, arrant
Femenino.
Feminine.
Acento. Accent
Alma. Soul.
Bolsillo. Purse.
Comedia. Comedy.
Autor. Author.
Vara. Eod, yard
Esfuerzo. Eíf ort, bravery.
{measure).
Efecto. Effect.
Libra. Pound.
Fastidio. Unease, uneasiness.
Manteca, or Man- Butter.
Ciudadano. Citizen.
tequilla.*
Hospital. Hospital.
Calidad. Quality.
♦ In the Americas manteca is lard, and nurntequillaf butter.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XL VIL
267
Método.
Method.
Cantidad.
Trabajo.
Labor, work.
Ñapóles.
Naples.
Eeal.
Real.
Sonido.
Sound.
Chelín.
Shilling.
COMPOSITION.
Quantity.
El porqué de todas las cosas.
Los ayes del moribundo.
Los dimes y diretes.
El cuando.
El no sé qué.
El tener amigos no daQa.
Hay hombres de un saber extraor-
dinario.
Una nada le incomoda.
La constancia y el trabajo son nece-
sarios al hombre en todas sus em-
presas.
La América es mayor que la Europa.
La Francia es una nación muy po-
blada.
El clima de España.
Los esfuerzos de la España, *
Cuatro pesos la vara.
Dos reales la libra.
Treinta centavos la docena.
Dos veces al día.
Cuatro pesos por vara.
La fe, la esperanza y la caridad.
El Señor De Vargas tiene tres niños.
La Señora Martínez es muy prudente.
Ella me dio la mano.
Puso la mano en el bolsillo.
Muchos caballeros solicitaron mi
mano.
El caballero á quien vio V. ayer en
mi casa.
The why and the wherefore of all
things.
The groans of the dying.
The ifs and ands.
The time.
I know not what.
It is hurtful to no one to have
friends.
There are men of extraordinary
knowledge.
A mere nothing puts him out.
Constancy and labor are necessary
for mankind in all their enter-
prises (or undertakings).
America is larger than Europe.
France is a very populous nation.
The climate of Spain.
The efforts of Spain.
Four dollars a yard.
Two reales a pound.
Thirty cents a dozen.
Twice a day.
Four dollars a yard.
Faith, hope, and charity.
Mr. Vargas has three children.
Mrs. Martinez is very prudent.
She shook hands with me.
He put his hand in his pocket.
Many gentlemen have solicited my
hand.
The gentleman whom you saw yes-
terday in my house.
* The article is here used with the name of a country even though
following the preposition (see § 336), as the noun is personified.
Digitized
by Google
268
LESSON XL VIL
EXPLANATION.
234. Use of the Aeticle. — Any of the parts of speech,
and sometimes even whole sentences, may be used as nouns,
and as such may take the article, as has just been observed
in the Composition of the present lesson, in which we see
examples of verbs, adverbs, and interjections preceded by the
article, and treated in every respect as substantives.
235. The definite abtigle is to be used before all ab-
stract nouns, taken in a general sense, and in the full extent
of their signification ; as.
Constancy and labor are necessary
to mankind in all undertakings.
La constancia y eZ trabajo son nece-
sarios al hombre en todas sus em-
presas.
236. The article is used before the names of the four parts
of the globe : before the names of empires, kingdoms, prov-
inces, and countries ; and before the four seasons of the year,
and the days of the week ; as.
La América es mayor que la Europa.
La Francia es una nación muy po-
blada.
El invierno en el Sur es más agra-
dable que el verano.
Yo iré á visitarle á V. el lunes.
America is larger than Europe.
France is a very populous nation.
The winter in the South is more
agreeable than the summer.
I shall come to see you Monday.
But it is omitted before the names of kingdoms, provinces,
&c., when they are preceded by a preposition ; unless they be
personified, as has been observed in Lesson XXX. ; as,
El clima de España. I The climate of Spain.
Los esfuerzos de la España. \ The bravery of Spain.
Kingdoms bearing the same name as their capitals do not
admit the article ; as, Ñapóles^ Naples.
237. Nouns of measure, weight, &c., when preceded by
the indefinite article in English, as an equivalent to each^ re-
quire the article ; as,
Cuatro pesos la vara.
Dos reales la libra.
Treinta centavos la docena.
Dos veces al dia.
Pour dollars a yard.
Two reales a pound.
Thirty cents a dozen.
Twice a day.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XL VIL 269
If the preposition por be used, we omit the article ; as,
cuatro pesos por vara^ &c.
238. The article is generally repeated before every noun
enumerated, especially if they differ in gender ; as.
La fe, la esperanza y la caridad. I Faith, hope and charity.
Loa días y las noches. I The days and nights.
239. The definite article is used before nouns indicating
rank, office, profession or titles of persons, when these are
spoken of, but not when spoken to ; as.
El General Sheridan es valiente.
El Señor De Vargas tiene tres niños.
La Señora Martínez, es muy pru-
dente.
General Sheridan is brave.
Mr. De Vargas has three children.
Mrs. Martinez is very prudent.
240. The definite article is used instead of the possessive
pronoun when the latter refera to parts of our own body ;
as.
Me he cortado la mano, 1 1 have cut my hand.
Me duele la cabeza, I My head aches.
This applies even to parts of the body of other persons ; as,
She gave me her hand (or shook
Ella me dio la mano.
Poso la mano en el bolsillo.
hands with me).
He put his hand in his pocket.
But the pronoun must be used when the use of the article
would occasion ambiguity ; as.
Muchos caballeros solicitaron mi I Many gentlemen solicited my hand,
mano. |
241. The definite article is also employed, as in English,
before nouns taken in b, particular or definite sense ; as,
El caballero á quien vio V. ayer en I The gentleman whom you saw yes-
mi casa. I terday in my house.
We restrain ourselves from adding the many other rules
which we might give, if they were not subject to numerous
exceptions, and, especially, if we were not of the opinion that
practice and reading are of more value to the student than
any rules as to when to employ and when to omit the
article.
Digitized
by Google
270 LESSON XL VIL
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Cuál de las partes del mundo es la mayor ? El Asia es
la mayor.
2. ¿ Es Asia nombre masculino ? No, señor, es femenino.
3. Entonces, ¿ porqué le pone V. el artículo masculino ? Por
evitar el mal sonido que resultaría de poner dos oes juntas.
4. i Luego, V. pone siempre el artículo masculino delante de
todo nombre femenino que empieza por a ? No, señor ; esto sólo
sucede en singular, y cuando sobre dicha vocal carga el acento
de la palabra.
5. i Ha leído V. el " Sí de las Niñas " de Moratin ? Sí, señor,
lo leí bace mucbos años ; pero á mí me gusta más la *^ Comedia
Nueva " del mismo autor.
6. Qué tal le gusta á V. su nueva vecinita ? Dicen que es
muy bonita. — En efecto lo es ; pero á mí no me gusta, porque
anda siempre en dimes y diretes, y una nada la incomoda.
7. ¿ Cuáles son las virtudes del alma ? La fe, la esperanza y
la caridad.
8. ¿ Tiene V. alguna cosa interesante que decirme boy ? Mu-
chísimas interesantísimas é importantísimas para practi-
car y aprender el español.
9. I Uf I ya va V. á principiar con sus adverbios, preposicio-
nes y artículos ; va V. á decirme, por supuesto, que estas partes
de la oración unas veces se ponen antes las unas que las otras, y
vice versa ; que las unas gobiernan á las otras y las gobernadas
gobiernan á su vez á otras, que se acuerden ó no entre sí. i Creé
V. que todo eso será interesante para mí con el fastidio que tengo,
y el dolor de cabeza que padezco ? ¡ Calle ! entonces, caballerito,
V. ha equivocado la casa.
10. i Qué quiere V. decir con eso de equivocar la casa ? Quiero
decir que, en lugar de venir á la clase, debió V. ir hoy al hospital
y de allí al teatro.
11. ¿ Para qué ? Para que le curasen en una parte de sus do-
lores y en la otra del fastidio.
12. Sí; pero. Señor Profesor, yo siempre creía que el mejor
método de enseñanza es aquel que ** instruye deleitando." V.
tiene mil razones, pero ha olvidado una pequeña circunstancia
que requiere su método.
13. ¿ Y cual es esa circunstancia ? Que no puede aplicarse
sino con aquellos discípulos que se deleitan aprendiendo.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XL VIL 271
14. Y ahora volviendo al artículo. — Señor Profesor, V. me
excusará, pero no volvamos al artículo porque no puedo que-
darme más aquí hoy.
15. i Cómo es eso ? el tiempo de la lección no ha acabado
todavía. — V. tiene razón; pero hoy es necesario que me vaya
temprano, porque he prometido acompañar á unas señoritas á
la opera.
16. I Oh I entonces es necesario no faltar á su palabra. — Señor
Profesor, buenas noches (este buen señor me fastidia con sus ex-
plicaciones).— Diviértase V. mucho, Señor Don Pepito (este ama-
ble joven aprenderá español, para el tiempo que yo compre una
casa en la Quinta Avenida, enseñándolo).
EXERCISE.
1. If I should come for you this evening, would you come
with me to see the Martinez family ? I should, with great pleas-
ure, if Charlotte would accompany us.
2. How well does that lady speak French ? They say she
speaks it very correctly, though with a slightly foreign accent.
3. Might he not be cured if he called in a good physician ?
He is of the opinion that physicians do more injury than good
to mankind.
4. Do you know anything of the author of that play ? Yes,
I have read or seen all his plays ; they are very interesting, and
delighted me exceedingly.
5. What is death ? The separation of soul and body.
6. Can one be a citizen of the United States without having
been bom {nacer) in the country ? Yes, after having resided in
the United States a certain number of years one may become a
citizen.
7. Where is that poor man going ? To the hospital ; he has
broken his leg.
8. Pardon me, I think you are mistaken ; it is rather his arm
that is broken ; for if his leg were broken he could not walk.
9. Do you remember the name of the principal city of
Naples ? Yes, the name of the principal city is that of the
kingdom also.
10. Did you shake hands with that young lady ? Yes, as soon
as she saw me she came toward me and gave me her hand.
11. Is that cloth {paño) sold very high ? Not very ; it costs
only three dollars a yard.
Digitized
by Google
272
LESSON XL VIH.
12. How often do you take your Spanish lessons ? Twice a
week.
13. Would you not learn faster if you took a lesson every
other day {un dia si y otro no) ? My teacher says I should ;
but I have not time to take lessons so often.
14. Would you like the summer to return again ? No, thank
you, I am glad it is past, for I assure you I have suffered enough
with the heat.
15. How sad it is on the field of battle {campo de batalla) to
hear the groans of the dying ! Yes ; and, notwithstanding, men
will persist in killing each other for a foot* of ground (terreno).
16. How much a pound is butter ? Thirty cents for one kind,
and forty cents a pound for the best.
17. Do you think it can injure any one to have friends ? No,
it can injure nobody to have friends.
J8. Is not that man very amiable and agreeable ? Very rarely,
for a mere nothing irritates him.
19. Are there many learned men in that country ? There have
been, and there are at present men of extraordinary learning.
20. Which are the three principal virtues ? Faith, hope, and
charity.
21. Is Miss Cabargas married yet ? Not yet, although a large
number of gentlemen have solicited her hand.
22. I suppose you have all read some Spanish comedies ? Sev-
eral Spanish and some French comedies, by the best dramatists.
23. Which of all the French comedies that you have read do
you like best ? Those of Moliere.
LESSON XLVIII.
Afirmar.
Afligir.
Admitir.
Atreverse.
Criticar.
Condescender.
Convencer.
Declarar.
Toaflarm.
Toafaict
To admit, to accept.
To dare.
To criticise.
To condescend, to consent.
To convince.
To declare.
♦ Palmo (literally a span).
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XL VIH.
273
Depender.
Disponer.
Diferenciar.
Edificar.
Entretenerse.
Fabricar.
Suponer.
Nombrar.
Influir.
Ocultar.
Observar.
Obedecer.
Proporcionar.
Pretender.
Publicar.
Quejarse.
Begularizar.
Beflexionar.
Bidiculizar.
Reformar.
To depend.
To dispose, to arrange»
To differ.
To edify, to build.
To amuse.
To construct, to make, to
build.
To suppose.
To name, to appoint
To influence, to affect.
To conceal, to hide.
To observe.
To obey.
To proportion, to procure, to
offer, to afford.
To pretend, to lay claim to, to
aspire to, to sue for.
To publish.
To complain, to moon.
To regulate.
To reflect
To ridicule.
To reform.
Lo que sé decir.
Sin que V. me lo diga.
Volver á las andadas.
Para mi tengo.
W hat I can say.
Without your telling me.
To do so again, to return to
(one's) old habits.
In my opinion.
Á trueque.
Sin embargo.
Candidamente.
De modo.
On condition.
Nevertheless, notwithstand-
ing.
Candidly.
In such a manner, that so
that therefore.
I Bravo I
Very good 1 Bravo I
Bruto.
Cierto.
Aéreo.
Angelical.
Brutish.
Certain.
Airy, aerial.
Angelic, angelical.
Digitized
by Google
274
LESSON XLYIIL
Ideal.
Ideal.
Interior.
Interior.
Incompleto.
Incomplete.
Imperfecta
Imperfect
k.
Exterior.
Exterior.
Extraño.
Strange.
I^al. ^
Equal.
Humano.
Human.
Positivo.
Positive.
Real.
Real, royal.
Arquitecto.
Architect.
Carrera.
Career.
Anciano.
Old man.
Desgracia.
Misfortune.
Ciego.
Blind.
Diferencia.
Difference.
Cal y canto.
Stone.*
Curiosidad.
Curiosity.
Bruto.
Brute.
Exageración.
Exaggeration.
Idiota.
Idiot.
Franqueza.
Frankness.
Espacio.
Space.
Juventud.
Youth.
Complemento.
Complement.
Ilusión.
Illusion.
Goce.
Enjoyment.
Felicidad.
Happiness.
Mal.
Evil.
Risa.
Laugh, laughter.
Material.
Material.
Realidad.
Reality.
Objeto.
Object.
Ruindad.
Meanness.
Palacio.
Palace.
Riquezas.
Riches.
Pájaro.
Bird.
Enfermo.
Sick.
Prisionero.
Prisoner.
Pensamiento.
Thought.
Castillos en el
Castles in the
aire.
air.
COMPO
SITION.
Adivino el raotiTo por el cual nos ha-
blan adulado los mismos que des-
pués nos critican, criticaban, cri-
ticaron, han criticado, criticarán.
Leíamos una noticia que acababa {pr
acaba) de publicarse.
I guess the reason why those same
persons who had flattered us be-
fore, criticise, did criticise, criti-
cised, hare criticised, will criticise
us afterward.
We were reading the news just pub-
lished (that had just been pul>-
lished, or has just been published).
* Cal y canto, literally, lime (mortar) and stone, comes to mean what
is solid, substantiaL
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XL VIII.
275
Contaba la desgracia que los afligió.
No seré yo el primero que se atreva.
Aprended vosotros, los que os que-
jáis, quejabais, quejasteis, habéis
quejado, quejaréis.
Él quiere jugar.
Nosotros queremos estudiar.
Él hubo de condescender.
Tengo que callar.
Ellos deben estar muy ocupados.
Quiero (pr pienso) salir.
Añrmo (or declaro) que saldré.
Digo' que saldré.
!Es útil estudiar las lenguas.
Conviene á los hombres instruirse.
!E1 estudio de las lenguas es útil.
Lia instrucción conviene á los hom-
bres.
Conviene que yo estudie.
Es útil que los hombres se instru-
yan.
Lies mandó callar. )
Lies mandó que callasen, f
Impedir que se cometan injusticias
es el objeto de las leyes.
Deseo que me comprendas.
No lograrás que lo castiguen.
Se le ayudará si fuere necesario.
He sentido que no se convenza (con-
venciera or convenciese).
Habrá llamado para que le abran
(abrieran or abriesen) la puerta.
Creo que lo convenceré fácilmente.
Reflexionaré lo que he de hacer.
Pensé que él iba á matarla.
Pensé que enviara (or enviaría) la
. carta.
He was telling the misfortune that
afflicted them.
I shall not be the first to dare.
Know, you who complain, were com-
plaining, complained, had com-
plained, will complain.
He wishes to play.
We will study.
He had to consent.
I have to be silent.
They must be very busy.
I wish (or am minded) to go out.
I affirm (or declare) that I will go
out.
I say that I shall go out.
It is useful to study languages.
It is to man's interest to acquire
knowledge.
The study of languages is useful.
Knowledge is useful to man.
It is to my interest to study.
It is useful to mankind to possess
knowledge.
He ordered them to be silent.
To prevent the doing of injustice,
such is the object of laws.
I wish you to understand me.
You will not succeed in having him
punished.
He shall have help if it be neces-
sary.
I was sorry that he might not be
convinced.
He will have knocked that the door
might be opened.
I think I shall convince him easily^
I shall reflect as to what I shall
do.
I thought he was going to kill her.
I thought he might or would send
the letter.
Digitized
by Google
278
LESSON XLVIII.
EXPLANATION.
242. COREESPONDENCE OF THE TeNSES WITH EACH
OTHEB. — When one verb is connected with another by a
relative, there are many combinations in which the deter-
mining and the determined verbs may be found ; both may
be in the indicative or in the subjunctive mode, or one in
the indicative and the other in the subjunctive; but both
cannot be in the infinitive or in the imperative ; as.
Adivino el motivo por el cual nos
habían adulado los mismos que
nos eriticcm, criticaban, critica-
ron, han criticado, criticarán.
Leiamo8 una noticia que acababa
(or cuMba) de publicarse.
Contaba la desgracia que loa afligió.
No 8eré yo el primero que se atreva.
Aprended vosotros los que os qiie-
j'áia, quejabais, quejareis, habéis
quejado, quejaréis,
243. The determined verb is put in the infinitive when-
ever it has the same subject as the determining verb ; as.
Él quiere yw^or. i He wishes to play.
Nosotros queremos estudiar, \ We wish to study.
This is the reason why the auxiliaries haber de^ tener que^
deber^ always take the governed verb in the infinitive, because
the subject, or nominative, is the same for both verbs ; as,
I guess the reason why those same
persons who have flattered us be-
fore, criticise, did criticise, criti-
cised, have criticised, will criti-
cise us afterward.
We were reading some news that had
(or has) just been published.
He was telling^the misfortune that
afflicted them.
I shall not be the first to dare.
Learn, you who complain, were com-
plaining, complained, had com-
plained, will complain.
Él hubo de condescender.
Tengo que callar.
Ellos deben estar muy ocupados.
He had to consent.
I have to be silent.
They must be very busy.
An exception to this rule occurs when the determining
verb expresses a positive and decided affirmation ; and so we
say:
Quiero (or pienso) saJir.
Afirmo (declaro) que saldré.
I wish (or intend) to go out.
I affirm (or declare) that I shall go
out.
We must also except the verb decir^ which cannot govern
another verb in the infinitive, because whenever we employ
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XL VII I.
277
it to announce our own actions it is not with the pui*po8e
of relating them, but to manifest our resolution to execute
them; as,
Digo que saldré, 1 1 say I shall go out.
244. When the determining verb is ser^ or any impersonal
verb, and the governed verb has no subject, the latter is
placed in the infinitive ; as,
£s útil estudiíM' las lenguas.
Conviene á los hombres iríatrwirse.
It is useful to study languages.
It is to the interest of mankind to
acquire knowledge.
And such is the natural construction, because the true
subject of this proposition is the very infinitive itself, which
stands there as a noun, an office that cannot be performed
by the other modes. The above sentences are equivalent to
these :
£1 eétíidio de las lenguas es útil.
La instrucción conviene á los hom-
bres.
The study of languages is useful.
It is to the interest of mankind to
acquire knowledge.
245. But if the determined verb also has a nominative,
then it must be placed in the subjunctive ; as.
Conviene que yo estudie,
£s útil que los hombres se instru-
yan.
It is to my interest to study.
It is useful to mankind to
knowledge.
Those verbs that express command, govern either of the
two forms, since we say equally well :
Los mandó callwr, ) I ^^ ^^^^^^^ ^^^^ ^ y^^ ^.j^^^.^
Lios mandó que callasen, ) \
246. When the determining verb is in the infinitive, in
the present or future of the indicative, or in the imperative,
connected with the governed verb by a conjunction, this lat-
ter verb is put in the subjunctive mode, ordinarily in the
present or in the future ; as.
Impedir que se cometan injusticias
es el objeto de las leyes.
Deseo que me comprendas.
No lograrás que le castiguen.
Se lo ayudará si fuere necesario.
To prevent the doing of injustice,
such is the object of the laws.
I wish you to understand me.
You will not succeed in having him
punished.
He shall have help if it be necessary.
Digitized
by Google
278 Lussoy XL VIII.
247. When the governing verb in the indicative has one
subject, and the determined verb another, the latter may not
be in the infinitive, but must take some iorm oí the subjunc-
tive; as,
He sentido que no se convenza {con-
venciera or convenciese).
Habrá llamado para que le abran
(ábrieran% or abriesen) la puerta.
I was sorry he should not be (or was
not) convinced.
He knocked, of cowscy in order that
tft^ door may (or might) be opened.
248. When the determining verb is in the indicative, it
generally governs the determined one in the same mode, if
the nominative is the same for both verbs ; as,
Creo que le convenceré fácilmente. 1 1 think I shall convince him easily.
Reflexionaré lo que he de hacer. 1 1 shall reflect on what I have to do.
But if each verb has a different nominative, the second
verb may be placed in the indicative or in the subjunctive ; as.
Per^é que iba á matarla.
Pensé que me enviaba (or enviaria)
la carta.
I thought he was going to kill her.
I thought he would send me the
letter.
Much more might be said upon this subject, did we not
fear to exceed the limits prescribed by the nature of the
present work.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. Doña Luisita, i Le gusta á V. formar castillos en el aire ?
Mucho ; pero creo que formo demasiados.
2. Me alegro mucho que, como á mí, le guste á V. el mundo
de las ilusiones, y también apruebo su franqueza de V. en confe-
sarlo.— Y ¿ por qué lo había de ocultar ? ¿ Qué mal hay en eso ?
3. No sé si hay mal ó no, lo que sé decir es, que todo el mundo
afecta no formarlos y con cierta risita burlona pretenden ridicu-
lizar á los que, como V. y yo, confesamos candidamente que los
hacemos.
4. ¿ Y cree V., D. José, que esas gentes vivan sin ilusiones
de ninguna especie ? No, señorita, no lo creo. Dios ha dado á
todo hombre, á diferencia del bruto, un mundo ideal interior
además del mundo positivo exterior, á excepción de los idiotas.
6. I Cuánto me alegro de oirlo I ¡ porque yo tenía tanta ver-
güenza de mis pobres castillos en el aire I ¿ De modo es que V.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XL VIII. 279
cree que yo no soy sola ? De ningún modo, todo el mundo los
forma, la diferencia sólo existe en la manera.
6. I Ah I Don José, V. me va pareciendo un buen arquitecto
de castillos en el aire y uno de estos días voy á pedirle que me
muestre uno de los muchos que habrá edificado. — Con mucho
gusto, señorita, á trueque, sin embargo, de que V. me admita en
uno de sus palacios aéreos.
7. No, eso no, jamás podría yo poner en evidencia mis cas-
tillos ; pero V. dice que la diferencia sólo existe en la manera de
formarlos; explíqueme V. esto, quizá así lograré reformar los
míos, porque he observado que son incompletos; siempre les
falta algo. — Pues es extraño, señorita, porque yo creía que sólo
las cosas humanas eran imperfectas y sus ilusiones de V. sien-
do
8. Por supuesto, i angelicales 1 i Vamos ! déjese V. de cum-
plimientos, ya sabe V. que no me gustan, y respóndame V. á mi
pregunta si V. gusta, porque tengo curiosidad de saber como for-
man otros sus castillos. — Obedezco, señorita, y para principiar,
debo decir que yo me equivoqué cuando dije que solo se diferen-
ciaban en la manera, porque también influye mucho el material.
9. ¿ Cómo el material ? ¡ si se fabrican en el aire I. ¡ Espero
que no los fabrique V. de cal y canto 1 — No, señorita, no de cal y
canto ; pero se fabrican ; y si se fabrican, de algo se fabrican.
10. ¿ Pero de qué, señor, de qué ? Yo formo castillos, pero no
necesito nada para hacerlos ; vuelo más que los pájaros, mando
hasta en las voluntades de los otros, hago volver al tiempo en su
carrera, dispongo del espacio, de la fortuna, y hago (fue me obe-
dezca hasta el amor. — Eso lo creo sin que V. me lo diga, señorita.
11. i Dale! no vuelva V. á las andadas, y cuénteme V. qué
materiales son esos de que V. me hablaba. — V. misma acaba de
nombrar algunos.
12. l Cuáles ? I Cómo ! ¿ qué más materiales quiere V. para
formar un castillo en el aire, que poder disponer, como V. dice
que puede, de las voluntades de los otros, del tiempo, del espacio,
la fortuna y hasta del amor ?
13. í Toma ! Pero yo no poseo ninguna de esas cosas en reali-
dad, y sin embargo mis castillos me entretienen y divierten mu-
cho.— Perdone V., señorita, V. las posee y con ellas forma V. eso
bonito mundo interior, que le proporciona á V. los goces que no
le da el exterior.
14. Y en eso tiene V. razón, que mis ilusiones, ó sea como V.
Digitized
by Google
280 LE830N XLVIIL
las llama, mi mundo interior, me consuelan muchas veces de la
ruindad del mundo exterior. — Eso sucede á todo el mundo, de
€83e modo, el ciego ye, el enfermo goza de salud, el prisionero de
libertad, el pobre de las riquezas y el anciano de la juventud, las
ilusiones hacen los males menores. En^ este mundo ideal es en
donde los hombres son verdaderamente iguales, y para raí tengo
que no es ilusorio, sino real, puesto que de él depende nuestra
felicidad.
15. ¿No cree V. que hay alguna exageración en lo que V.
dice? No, señora, pero sí, creo, que debemos tener buen cui-
dado de regularizar nuestros pensamientos y de basar siempre
nuestros castillos en el aire en la virtud y la religión.
16. I Bravo I bravo ! muy bien', así me gustan á mí los castillos
en el aire.
EXERCISE.
1. Who built the house in which you are living at present ?
An excellent architect, a friend of my father's.
2. Are you certain it was an old man that was suing for her
hand ? I cannot affirm that it was an old man.
3. What a misfortune that he will not study I It would be
a real misfortune if it were true ; I think it is not true.
4. Bo you ever build castles in the air? Seldom; for, in
my opinion, real castles, built of stone, are to be preferred to
the aerial ones of which you speak.
6. What a pretty bird you have there! does it sing? It
sings the whole day long.
6. Do you think our young friend is really as happy as he
appears to be ? No, there must be some exaggeration in what
he says.
7. In what respect do these two authors differ from each
other? Bead the works of both, and you will observe for
yourself.
8. Do they both write equally well ? No, one of them
arranges his thoughts in a very strange manner, so that it is
sometimes impossible to understand his meaning,*" and it is at
all times disagreeable to read him.
9. Is Peter now punished in school as often as formerly ?
As often as ever ; but it is useless to punish him ; for though he
is good for a few days, he always goes back to his old habita
* Lo que quiere decir.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XLIX.
281
10. Does that man always say what he thinks ? J am sure
I cannot say; but it seems to me that there is in his manner
of speaking a something I cannot explain that hides his real
thoughts.
11. Is he generally liked by those who know him ? On the
contrary, everybody hates him and ridicules him for his mean-
12. Have you any curiosity to see the interior of a royal
palace ? If the occasion offered (presented itself), I should like
to see it ; otherwise I am perfectly content with the interior of
my own house.
13. You are wise in that ; happiness is not always to be found
in palaces. Ah I I see you are * something of a philosc^her.
14. How is this, sir ? your exercise is incomplete. I confess
that had I wished I might have finished it ; but you will find
that, as far as it goes, it is not imperfect.
15. That is to say that the quality does not depend on the
quantity. Precisely so; you may complain of my not having
done the whole of the exercise, but I do not think you can criti-
cise the part I have brought to you.
16. What size f is the book your friend has just published ?
The same size as the one he published before.
LESSON XLIX.
Acudir.
To hasten (to a place), to refer.
Sumar.
To add up.
Agregar. •
To add.
Añadir.
To add.
Componer.
To compose, to mend, to fix.
Contener.
To contain.
Incluir.
To include.
Facilitar.
To facilitate.
Ofrecer.
To offer.
Por instruido que sea.
1 However learned he may be.
An teriormente.
Formerly, previously.
Comparativamente.
Comparatively.
* Tiene V.
t Tamaño,
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XLIX.
Corrientemente.
Fluidamente.
Suficiente.
En general.
Generalmente.
Considerablemente.
Particularmente.
En cuanto á.
Artificial.
Anterior.
Aborrecible.
Celeste, azul celeste.
Celestial.
Célico.
Chinesco.
Creible.
Despreciable.
Familiar.
Gigantesco.
Terrestre.
Territorial.
Terroso.
Terrado, terrero.
Terrenal.
Terrón.
Ricacho.
Picaresco.
Patronímico.
Propio.
Mudable.
Verbal.
Arenal.
Ascenso.
Alvarez.
Calrinista.
Catolicismo.
Diccionario.
Escobajo.
Sandy (ground).
Promotion.
Alvarez.
Calvinist.
Catholicism.
Dictionary.
A bad broom.
Currently, fluently.
Fluently.
Sufficient
In general
Generally.
Considerably.
Particularly, privately.
i As to, as for.
Artificial.
Anterior, previous.
Hateful.
Celestial, sky-blue.
Celestial, heavenly.
Celestial, heavenly.
Chinese.
Credible.
Despicable.
Familiar.
Gigantic.
Terrestrial, earthly.
Territorial.
Terreous, earthy.
Terrace.
Terrestrial, earthly.
Lump (or clod) of earth.
Very rich.
Boguish.
Patronymic.
Proper, own.
Changeable.
Verbal.
Arboleda.
Ascensión.
Carnuza.
Creencia.
Ciencia.
Gentualla.
Madrastra.
Grove.
Ascension.
Bad meat
Belief, credence.
Science.
Rabble.
Step-mother.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XLIX.
283
Boticario.
Druggist, apothe-
Terminación.
Termination.
cary.
Dicha.
Happiness.
Domínguez.
Dominguez.
Isla.
Island.
Fernández,
Fernandez.
Educación.
Education, rear-
Idiotismo.
Idiom.
ing.
Filosofastro.
Philosophaster.
Escoba.
Broom.
Hijastro.
Step-son.
Excusa.
Excuse.
Hermanastro. Step-brother. |
Explicación.
Explanation.
Hombracho.
Corpulent
Espada.
Sword.
Libraco.
A contemptible
Exclamación.
Exclamation.
book.
Firma.
Signature.
Pajarraco.
An ugly bird.
Gota.
Drop.
Latinajo.
Dog Latin.
Figura.
Figure, appear-
Manzanar.
Apple orchard.
ance.
Pinar.
Pine grove.
Facción.
Feature.
Protestante.
Protestant
Factura.
Invoice.
Padrastro.
Step-father.
Facultad.
Faculty, power.
Significado.
Signification,
Adquisición.
Acquirement
meaning.
Astronomía.
Astronomy.
Vinacho.
Bad wine.
Afluencia, flui- Fluency.
Protestantis-
Protestantism.
dez.
mo.
Habanero.
Havanese.
Madrileño.
Madrilenian.
Rodríguez.
Rodriguez.
Sánchez.
Sanchez.
Amante.
Lover, sweet-
heart
Árbol.
Tree.
Amador.
Lover.
COMPO
SITION.
4 Por qué lee V. ese libraco f
Why do you read that miserable
book?
Porque no tengo otro; pero V. se
Because I have
no other; but you
equivoca, es un libro clásico exce-
are mistaken
, it is an excellent
lente.
classic (book)
4 Conoce V.á
aquel ricacho f
Do you know that rich man f
Lo conozco ; pero no lo trato, porque
I know him ; but I have no inter-
es un hombracho que sólo le gusta
course with him, because he is a
tratarse con
gentualla.
low man, whose taste it is to asso-
ciate with the rabble only.
Digitized
by Google
284
LESSOir XLIX.
Juan, no barras con ese escobajo,
que ensucia más que limpia.
La carne buena se vende á treinta
centavos la libra; la carnuza á
veinte.
Ese estudiante suele decir latinajos,
pero no sabe latín.
En la América del Norte hay más
protestantes que católicos.
Los boticarios en los Estados Unidos
no solo venden medicinas, sino
perfumería, cigarros y otras mu-
chas cosas.
4 Vive el Señor Fernández con su
padre I
No, señor, porque no quiere vivir
con su madrastra y hermanastros.
4 Es V. madrileño f
No, señor, soy Habanero.
Aquel filosofastro es despreciable.
Esa señorita es muy amable ; pero
muy mudable.
John, do not sweep with that stump
of a broom ; it dirties more than
it cleans.
Good meat sells at thirty cents a
pound, poor (bad) meat at twenty.
That student is in the habit of re-
citing dog Latin, but he does not
know Latin.
There are more Protestants than
Catholics in North America.
In the United States the druggists
sell not only medicines, but per-
fumery, cigars, and many other
things.
Does Mr. Fernández live with his
father I
No, sir, because he does not wish to
live with his step-mother and
step-brothers.
Are you a Madrilenian I
No, sir, I am a Havanese.
That philosophaster is a despicable
(man).
That young lady is very amiable,
but very changeable.
EXPLANATION.
249. Derivative Nouns. — These nouns constitute one
of the chief sources of the richness of the Spanish language ;
we have already introduced some of them in previous lessons,
when treating of augmentative and diminutive terminations.
These terminations are yery numerous, both for the sub-
stantives and adjectives, and each one of them determines
the general signification of the derivative noun. As it would
be impossible to give in this case a complete list of all these
terminations, we shall endeavor to lay before the student
such of them as are to be found in most common use.
250. The terminations aco, acho, alia, and uza, denote in-
feriority; as,
Itihraco. I A contemptible old book.
Pajarraco. I An ugly bird.
Digitized
by Google
LUSSON XLIX.
285
c. YinaeJio, Bad wine.
Gentualla. Rabble.
Carnt^^a. j Bad meat.
The termination ocho is sometimes augmentative ; as,
Ricacho, I Very rich.
HombrocAo. I A big (or corpulent) man.
251. Ajo implies meanness, and the consequent contempt
inspired by it ; as,
'Escobajo. I An old stump of a broom.
Latino/o. | Dog Latin.
252. The terminations aZ, ar^ egOy ico, il, isco^ in adjec-
tives, commonly denote the quality of the thing ; as,
Artificio^.
Familior.
Gigantesco.
Picaresco.
Clásico.
Chinesco.
Artificial.
Familiar.
Gigantic.
Koguish.
Classic.
Chinese.
253. In substantives the same terminations, aZ, ar, and
also eda and edo, serve to form collective nouns ; as.
Arboleóla.
ArenaZ.
Manzanar.
Pinar.
Grove.
Sandy ground.
Apple orchard.
Pine grove.
254. The terminations ante, ario, ente, ero, ista and or are
for the most part expressive of use, sect, profession, trade, or
occupation; as.
Estudiante.
Student
Boticario.
Druggist.
Zapatero.
Shoemaker.
Organista.
Organist.
Protestan/e.
Protestant.
Calvinista.
Calvinist.
Pintor.
Painter.
255. The termination astro signifies inferiority in a super-
lative degree ; b,b, filosofastro, a despicable philosopher ; poetas-
tro, poetaster ; and it is curious to observe that it also serves
Digitized
by Google
286 LESSON XLIX.
to express the degrees of relationship existing betweem those
persons who more generally hate than love each other ; as,
Hermana«/ro. Step-brother.
Rijcuttro,
Padrastro.
'M.&dTostra,
Step-son.
Step-father.
Step-mother.
266. Ble corresponds to the same termination in Eng-
lish; as,
AborreciWe.
Creíble,
Mnáible.
Amhble,
Hateful.
Credible.
Changeable.
Amiable.
267. Ismo corresponds to the English termination t«wi; as,
Catolicismo. i Catholicism.
ProtestantVamo. | Protestantism.
268. The names of nationalities are also derivatives, and
have their terminations in ero, es^ eño ; as,
Habanero.
Francia.
Madrileño.
Havanese.
French, Frenchman.
Madrilenian.
289. Many patronymic, or family, names are also deriva-
tives; for instance, Alvarez^ Domínguez^ Fernández^ Rodri-
guezy Sánchez^ &c., were the names that were given to the
sons of the Alvaros, Domingos, Fernandos, Sodrigos, San-
chos, &c., changing the final o in ez.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Es necesario para hablar una lengua aprender todas las
palabras que contiene dicha lengua ? De ningún modo, además,
yo no creo que exista un hombre, por instruido que sea, que las
sepa todas.
2. i Cuántas palabras piensa V. que sean suficientes para po-
der hablar el español corrientemente ? De tres á cuatro mil
palabras primitivas con sus derivados es todo lo que se requiere,
para hablar una lengua fluidamente.
3. Sí, pero probablemente los derivados serán en tanto ó ma-
yor número que los primitivos. — Así es, pero una vez que se cono-
Digitized
by Google
LESSON XLIX. 287
cen las terminaciones, es muy fácil el formarlos, aunque nunca
se hayan visto anteriormente.
4. I Es posible I entonces esto debe facilitar mucho el estudio
de la lengua. — Muchísimo, porque, como ya hemos dicho, sabien-
do los primitivos no tiene más que añadírselas las terminaciones,
segfún el significado que quiera dárselas.
6. i Quiere V. hacerme el favor de formar algunos derivados?
Sí, señor, con mucho gusto ; déme V. los primitivos.
6. i Cuáles son los derivados de cielo ? Celeste y celestial.
7. i De tierra ? Terrestre, terrenal, y otros.
8. i Por qué no me los da V. todos ? Porque me parece mejor
que aprenda V. primeramente los de más uso, pues sobre haber
muchos, los hay de poco uso comparativamente.
9. i Cuáles otros se pudieran formar de cielo y tierra ? Céli-
co, terroso, terrón, y otros muchos.
10. ¿ Se pueden formar derivados de los verbos ? Sí, señor, y
á estos se les da el nombre de verbales.
11. ¿Cuáles se derivan del verbo amar? Amador, amante,
amado, amable.
12. ¿ De ascender ? Ascenso, ascensión.
13. i De creer ? Creyente, creencia, creíble, crédulo, crédito.
14. ¿De estudiar? Estudiante, estudio; pudiendo agregar
además los aumentativos y diminutivos que también son deriva-
dos, como estudiantillo, estudiantón, &c.
15. ¿ De qué se derivan los nombres de familia G-onzález, Do-
mínguez, &c. ? Se derivan de los nombres propios Gonzalo,
Domingo, &c.
16. ¿ Cuántas palabras cree V. que contendrá esta gramática ?
Más de tres mil palabras primitivas y un gran número de deri-
vadas.
17. ¿ En acabar la gramática x)odré traducir y hablar sobre
cualquiera materia que se ofrezca ? Podrá V. hablar de todo y
seguir una conversación en general como V. ve que ya lo hace-
mos ; pero para traducir y hablar de cualquiera ciencia, arte ú
oficio en particular, tendrá V. que acudir al diccionario, porque
es imposible introducir en una gramática todas las palabras nece-
sarias para X)oder hacer esto.
18. Y en cuanto á los idiotismos de la lengua, ¿ se hallarán
todos en esta gramática ? Tampoco, puesto que se x)odrían com-
poner tres ó cuatro volúmenes como este y quizá no incluirían
todos los de la lengua.
Digitized
by Google
288 LUSSON XLIX,
19. I Cómo los aprenderé entonces ? En la conversación de
personas instruidas y en la lectura de buenos libros.
EXERCISE.
1. Did Charles go to another regiment at the time of his pro-
motion ? Yes, he left the 71st and went to the 7th.
2. What do you know about the names Sánchez, Domínguez,
and all those ending in ez ? That they mean son of Sancho, son
of Domingo, and are formed from those names by adding the
termination you have just mentioned.
3. To whom does that magnificent pine grove belong ? To
the step-son of the gentleman who owns that pretty little house
you see over there in the distance (á lo lejos).
4. What miserable book is that you are reading so atten-
tively ? It is no miserable book at all (ninguno\ it is the diction-
ary ; I always go to the dictionary for a word the meaning of
which I do not know.
5. Do you know the names of all the heavenly bodies ? No,
nor you either ; the science of astronomy is still imperfect, and
there are besides many of the heavenly bodies hidden from hu-
man sight.
6. Is not that young gentleman a great lover of the sciences ?
Yes, but most particularly of the exact sciences.
7. Why do you sweep with that stump of a broom ? It is
the best I have.
8. Did you say he was a philosopher ? No, on the contrary,
I said he was but a philosophaster.
9. How does that rich fellow amuse himself ? Beading his-
tory in general, and that of his own country in particular.
10. I observe that you speak German very fluently now;
have you changed your book ? No, I have the same one still,
but I myself study more than I did formerly.
11. Do you know whether your cousin speaks as fluently as
your sister ? Mrs. Alvarez says that in familiar conversation
they speak equally fluently.
12. Do you write any compositions ? Yes, our father requires
us to write two compositions a wee^k on the idioms of the lan-
guage.
13. Is it not a despicable habit to ofl^er to do things we never
intend to perform (llevar á cabo) ? I should fiay it is more than
despicable, it is even hateful.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON L.
14. Does not the study of grammar considerably facilitate the
acquisition of a language ? Yes, but that alone is not sufficient :
something more is required.
15. Have you much fruit at your home in the country ? We
have a very fine orchard of apples.
16. What language was that your young friend spoke in a
moment ago ? What he takes for Latin ; but what is not in
reality anything but dog Latin.
17. Would not that letter have been better if you had not
added that last word ? It appeared to me to be necessary to add
that to what I had already said, so that the meaning might be
more easily understood.
LESSOÍÍ L.
Amenazar.
To threaten, to menace.
Apoyar.
To lean upon, to support
Disgustar.
To displease, to disgust, to
grieve.
Recurrir.
To recur, to have recourse.
Sacar.
To take out.
Á pesar de.
In spite of.
Y diciendo y haciendo.
And suiting the action to the
word.
I Todo sea por Dios I
I hope all will be for the best I
Tomar las de Villadiego.
^"To take to one's heels, to
make off.
Sobre todo. t
Above alL
Desproporcionadísimament»e.
Without any proportion.
Adverbial.
Adverbial.
Antisocial.
Antisocial.
Antepenúltima.
Antepenultimate.
Inútil.
Useless.
Componente.
Component.
Izquierdo.
Left.
Derecho.
Right
Penúltima.
Penultimate.
Superlativo.
Superlative.
21
Digitized
by Google
290
LESSON L.
Anteojos.
Aguardiente.
Barbilampiño.
Correvedile.
Bienhechor.
Director.
Dolor de mue-
las.
Dentista.
Disgusto.
Hazmereir.
Condiscípulo.
Pisaverde.
Pormenor.
Puntapié.
Parasol.
Paraguas.
Quitasol. «
Socialismo.
Sacamuelas.
Pueblo.
Vicerector.
Spectacles.
Brandy.
Beardless.
Tell-tale.
Benefactor.
Director.
Toothache.
Dentist.
Disgust, grief.
Laughing-stock.
Schoolmate.
Fop, coxcomb.
Detail.
Kick.
Parasol.
umbrella.
Parasol.
Socialism.
Tooth-drawer.
People, town.
Vice-rector.
Equivoción.
Ganapierde.
Barbería.
La derecha.
La izquierda.
Sinrazón.
Partícula.
Quijada.
Las damas.
Mistake.
A gamé in check-
ers.
Barber-shop.
The right hand.
The left hand.
Injustice.
Particle.
Jaw.
Draughts, check-
ers.
COMPOSITION.
No le está bien á un anciano el ser
pisaverde, eso es propio de barbi-
lampiüos.
% Quién ha dado un puntapié á aquel
muchacho ?
Yo se lo he dado, porque es un corre-
veidile.
Este hombre juega muy bien á las
damas, sobre todo á la ganapierde.
% Tiene V. un quitasol ó un paraguas f
Tengo ambos.
Ese joven bebe mucho aguardiente
y no hace caso de los consejos de
su bienhechor.
Eso es la razón porque es el haz-
mereir de todo el mundo.
% Tiene V. buena vista ?
It is not becoming to an old man to
be a fop ; that belongs to beard-
less boys.
Who gave that boy a kick f
I did, for he is a tell-tale.
This man plays very well at
draughts, and especially at ganct-
pierde (give away).
Have you a parasol or an umbrella t
I have both.
That young man drinks a great deal
of brandy, and gives no heed to
the admonition of his benefactor.
That is the reason why he is the
laughing-stock of every one.
Have you good sight I
Digitized
by Google
LESSON L.
291
No, señor, y esta es la razón porque
uso anteojos.
Mi condiscípulo Manuel me ha ayu-
dado á hacer la composición.
Es inútil que me cuente V. los por-
menores.
El director y el vicerector de la es-
cuela son hombres excelentes.
Me disgustan las sinrazones.
El socialismo, á pesar de la opinión
de los que lo apoyan, es antisocial
é imposible.
No, sir, and that is the reason why I
use spectacles.
My school- fellow Emanuel has
helped me to do my composition.
It is useless for you to tell me the
details.
The director and sub-rector of the
school are excellent men.
unreasonableness disgusts me.
Socialism, in spite of the opinion of
those who support it, is antisocial
and impossible.
EXPLANATION.
260. Compound Nouns. — These are very numerous in the
Spanish language ; some are formed oí two nouns, as barbi-
lampiño^ beardless ; puntapié^ a kick ; aguardiente^ brandy ;
others are formed of a noun and a verb, as quitasol^ parasol ;
sacamuelaSy tooth-drawer ; others of an adjective and a verb,
as pisaverde, coxcomb ; others of a noun and an adverb, as
bienhechor, benefactor ; others of a noun and a preposition,
as anteojos, spectacles ; others of two verbs, as ganapierde, a
mode of playing draughts ; others of two verbs and a pro-
noun, as hazmereir, laughing-stock ; three verbs, a pronoun
and a conjunction enter into the formation of correveidile,
tale-bearer ; and, finally, others are composed of a noun and
some one of the following component particles : a, ab, abs, ad,
ante, anti, circum or circun, cis, citra, co, com, con, contra,
de, des, di, dis, e, em, en, entre, equi, es or ex, extra, im, in,
infra, inter, intro, o, ob, per, por, pos, pre, préter, pro, re,
retro, sa or za, se, semi, sesqui, sin, so, sobre, son, sos, su, sub,
super, sus, tra, trans or tras, ultra, and vice or vi ; as,
-antisocial.
Composición.
Condiscípulo.
/)^rector.
Disgusto.
Jwposible.
Iwútü.
Pormenor.
Antisocial.
Composition.
School-fellow,
Director.
Displeasure.
Impossible.
useless.
Detail.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON L.
Po«puesto.
iSmrazóu.
Ficfirector.
Post-fixed.
Unreasonableness.
Vice-rector.
We call them component particles^ because the majority
of them — although they are true Latin and Greek preposi-
tions— have no signification in Spanish, except as prefixes,
in which case they serve to augment, diminish, or modify the
signification of the simple word in proportion to the strength
or value they have in the languages from which we have
taken them.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. Don José, i sabe V. el significado de las palabras penúltima
y antepenúltima ? Sí, señor, porque corresponden á las palabras
inglesas penultimate y antepenultimate,
2. Pues bien, ahora, que hablamos de " cañonazos," quiero
decir, ahora que hablamos de estas palabras, le contaré á V. un
cuentecito. — Muy bien, á mí me gustan mucho los cuentos, sobre
todo cuando no son largos y vienen á pelo.
3. Pues este viene á pelo y no es largo. — Entonces cuente-
meló V., Don Pedro, escucho con la mayor atención.
4. Pues vaya de cuento : Un caballero tenía un fuerte dolor
de muelas, y fué á un aacamuélas para que le sacase una.
6. 1 Hombre I ¿ y por qué no *fué á casa de un dentista ? Por-
que en aquel pueblecito no había dentistas y tuvo que ir á una
barbería, cuyo barbero unía á su oficio el de sacamuelas.
6. I Pobre hombre I adelante.— Este barbero, ó sea sacamuelas,
pero que de ningún modo era dentista, le preguntó :
7. " i Qué muela le duele á V. ? " "La penúltima del lado
izquierdo de la quijada inferior."
8. " Muy bien," y diciendo y haciendo le sacó, no la penúl-
tima, sino la última.
9. " i Huy I ¿ qué ha hecho V., hombre ? yo le dije á V. que
me sacase la penúltima, y V. me ha sacado la última." — " I Calle 1
pues yo creía que penúltima y última era todo una misma cosa."
10. " No, hombre, no ; la penúltima es la que está antes de la
última." — " I Diantre ! Mil perdones, y siéntese V. que esta vez no
me equivocaré."
11. *' i Vamos, y todo sea por Dios 1 " " ¡ Ay I ay ! hombre
dado á Barrabas 1 "
Digitized
by Google
LESSON L. 293
12. " ¡ Toma I ¿ y ahora por qué se queja ? é no vengo de sacarle
la que estaba antes de la última ? " " Si ; pero V. olvidó contar la
que me sacó anteriormente, de modo que ahora me ha sacado la
antepenúltima^ — La ante . . . . ¿ qué ? Pero no importa, deje-
mos estos malditos nombres, que han sido causa de mi equivoca-
ción, y siéntese V. que yo le asegura á V. que. ..."
13. Pero el parroquiano, dándolo á todos los diablos, tomó las
de Villadiego, y se cree que nunca más recurrió á un sacamuelas
para que le sacase la penúltima muela.
14. i Cuál es la palabra compuesta más larga en español ?
Desproporcionadisimamente,
15. i De qué palabras se compone ? De la partícula compo-
nente dea, el nombre proporción, la terminación superlativa
9ima y la terminación adverbial mente,
EXERCISE.
1. Do you use spectacles because it is fashionable with some
people to wear them, or because you cannot see without them ?
Because I cannot see without them.
2. My toothache is not any better yet. Then you had better
go to the dentistas and get him to extract {sacar) the tooth.
3. Do you often see the beardless youth who came to walk
with us without being asked * last evening ? Not often, nor do
I care to see him very often, he is too much of a fop for my taste.
4. Which way do I turn here to go to the new hotel ? Turn
to the right ; it is not more than two squares to the hotel.
6. What did he do when you said that ? He took to his
heels, and I have neither heard of nor seen him since.
6. What were your two school-fellows doing at the door a
few minutes ago ? One of them had told the director of a mis-
take in the other's exercise, and this one threatened to punish
him for his trouble (molestia) ; so, suiting the action to the
word, he gave him a kick, and called him a despicable tell-tale.
7. Has your brother bought the house yet that he intended
to buy ? No ; when he came to examine the details he found
the price of the house entirely out of proportion to the value.
8. Do you always take an umbrella when it rains ? I sel-
dom use an umbrella ; when it rains I never go out, if I can
avoid it
* Invitasen.
Digitized
by Google
294
LESSON LI.
9. What a strange man that is! Yes, he is the laughing-
stock of every one who knows him.
10. What kind of wine do they give you in your hotel ?
They give us very poor wine, and so I drink very little of it ; I
prefer water.
11. Do you often play at draughts (or checkers) ? Very
often ; but I prefer the give-away game.
12. What is that man^s business ? He keeps a barber's shop
in Sixth or Seventh avenue.
13. I wish you to be good enough to translate this letter for
me. Oh ! it ¡s useless to talk to me of translating anything just
now (por ahora), for I have a headache.
14. Where is that family living now ? In a small town in
the western part of the state.
LESSON LI.
Atravesar.
To traverse, to cross.
Atropellar.
To run over, to hurry one^s self
too much.
Causar.
To cause.
Correr.
To run.
Calcular.
To calculate.
Dividir.
To divide.
Exponer.
To expose.
Extrañar.
To wonder at.
Hospedar.
To lodge and entertain.
Incendiar.
To set fire to.
Llorar.
To cry, to weep.
Manifestar.
To manifest, to show, to inform.
Ordenar.
To order, to arrange.
Oponer.
To oppose.
Proponer.
To propose.
Parar.
To stop.
Procurar.
To procure, to try.
Resistir.
To resist.
Rivalizar.
To rival.
Simpatizar.
To sympathize.
Ni con mucho.
Far from, far from it.
Á decir verdad.
To tell the truth.
Digitized
by Google
LESSi
JIí LI.
29S
En lo que respecta.
With respect to.
En marcha.
Let us go, let us start
Á lo largo.
Lengthwise.
Á esta parte.
Within the last
Ápie.
On foot
En frente.
In front, opposite.
Continuamente.
Continually
Perpendicularmente.
Perpendicularly.
Alrededor. )
Alderredor. )
Around.
Admirable.
Admirable.
Apto.
Apt
Curioso.
Curious.
Desocupado.
Disengaged,
unoccupied.
Directo.
Direct.
Indirecto.
Indirect
Figurado.
Figurative.
Inepto.
Inapt, unsuitable.
Gramatical.
Grammatical.
Complemento. Complement.
Academia.
Academy.
Cosmopolita. Cosmopolite.
Admiración.
Admiration,
Carruaje. Carriage.
wonder.
Delito. Crime.
Arquitectura.
Architecture.
Dibujo. Drawing.
Construcción.
Construction.
Individuo. Individual,
Belleza.
Beauty.
member.
Frase.
Phrase.
Literato. Man of letters.
DistAucia.
Distance.
Gozo. Enjoyment
Esquina.
Corner.
Museo. Museum.
Lágrima.
Tear.
Paseo. Promenade.
Laboriosidad.
Industry.
Punto. Point, place.
Marcha.
March.
Edificio. Edifice.
Metrópoli.
Metropolis.
Peligro. Danger.
Madurez.
Eipeness, matu-
Ómnibus. Omnibus.
rity, prudence.
Soltero. Bachelor.
Permanencia.
Permanence,
Público. Public.
stay.
Trascurso. Course of (time).
Sorpresa.
Surprise.
Eincón. Comer.
Vista.
Sight view.
Tablero de da- Checker-board.
Orilla.
Bank, border.
mas.
Batalla.
Battle.
Kemuneración. Remuneration.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LL
COMPOSITION.
Oriente 7 Occidente.
Cielo y tierra.
El hombre discreto ordena siempre
las cosas con madurez.
La casa de Juan se ha incendiado.
Un indiriduo inepto para escribir
puede ser apto para otras cosas.
El reo, á quien se castiga, ha come-
tido grandes delitos.
Un hombre pobre es muy diferente
de un pobre hombre.
Hemos dado im gran paseo.
Hemos dado un paseo grande.
Lo que Y. dice es una cosa cierta.
Yo he observado cierta cosa.
Madrid, á 33 de Agosto de 1866 {or
Madrid, Agosto 23 de 1866, or
Madrid y Agosto 23 de 1866).
Yo soy quien probaré que tú te
equivocas.
Dios es admirable en todos sus obras,
pues todas ellas manifiestan su
poder y su bondad (or admirable
se muestra Dios en todas sus obras ;
su poder y su bondad manifiestan
todas ellas).
Sólo Dios es grande, hermanos míos.
Adiós, Juan ; 4 qué tal t
Hasta maOana. Buenos días.
Nueva York, ciudad de los Estados
, Unidos.
Yo mismo le vi llorar lágrimas de
gozo.
Pronto se calmarán las borrascas
que agitan la nave del estado.
4 Ha estado V. alguna vez en el Mu-
seo de Nueva Yorkt
East and West.
Heaven and earth.
The sensible man always arranges
his affairs with prudence.
They have set fire to John's house.
An individual that is unsuited for
writing may be apt at other things.
The culprit that is being punished
has committed great crimes.
A poor man (a man in poverty) is
very different from a poor fellow.
We have had an excellent walk.
We have taken a long walk.
What you say is certain.
I have observed a certain thing.
Madrid, August 28d, 1866.
It is I who shall prove that you are
mistaken.
God is wonderful in all His works,
for they all set forth his power
and His goodness.
God only is great, my brethren.
Good morning, John; how do you
dot
I shall see you to-morrow.
New York, a city of the United
States.
I myself saw him shed tears of joy.
The tempests by which the ship
of state is tossed shall soon be
calmed.
Have you ever been in the New
York Museum f
EXPLANATION.
Ifotwithstanding the fact that we have already made
some general observations relative to the place each part of
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LI. 297
speech occupies in sentences, we deem it expedient to add
here a few rules which the student will find of considerable
service in composition.
261. The NATURAL CONSTBUCTION demands that the
substantive be placed before the adjective ; that the govern-
ing word precede the one governed; that the subject pre-
cede the verb ; that the verb precede the adverb by which it
is modified ; that the complement come after the Verb and
the adverb, if there be one ; and that when two or more
things are to be expressed, of which one, from its nature,
comes before the other, this order be preserved ; as.
Oriente y Occidente.
Cielo y tierra.
Norte y Sur.
Este y Oeste.
East and West.
Heaven and earth.
North and South.
East and West.
262. PiGUBATiVE Construction. — The genius of the
Spanish language permits us to depart in some cases from
the above rules ; thus avoiding the monotonous uniformity
which would otherwise exist, and leaving the writer more
latitude for the construction and arrangement of his periods.
So long as sense and perspicuity do not suffer, there is ordi-
narily no fixed position for any of the parts of speech.
Therefore :
1st. Personal pronouns subjects of verbs may, with a few
exceptions, be expressed or suppressed at will.
2d. When the pronominal subject is expressed, it may
be placed either before or after the verb.
3d. The same liberty may be taken with the verb, adverb
and complement.
4th. Nevertheless, for the sake of clearness in our sen-
tences, it is essential that certain words which together form
a whole (such as adjectives with the substantives they qual-
ify, or parts of sentences, acting the part of subject or com-
plement) should be arranged in the same order as that in
which the ideas they express are naturally presented to the
mind.
6th. There are also certain words which, when placed
Digitized
by Google
298 LESSON LL
before certain others, have a signification very different from
that which they haye when placed after them.
Of all the modem languages the Spanish is certainly the
most ñexible ; indeed, in no other can the same idea be ex-
pressed with the same words in so endless a variety of con-
structions.
Let the following sentence serve as a proof of the truth
of this assertion :
Esta señorita era hija de Don Ma- 1 This young lady was the daughter
nuel Sánchez. | of Mr. Emanuel Sanchez.
263. Words which, from their nature, cannot be separa-
ted : Esta señorita. De Don Manuel Sánchez.
Natural Construction. Esta señorita era hija de Don Manuel Sánchez.
Ut inversion. Era esta señorita hija de Don Manuel Sánchez.
2d ^ Era hija esta señorita de Don Manuel Sánchez.
Sd ^ Era de Don Manuel Sánchez hija esta señorita.
4th ** De Don Manuel Sánchez era hija esta señorita.
6th ** Hija era esta señorita de Don Manuel Sánchez.
6th " Hija de Don Manuel Sánchez era esta señorita.
7th ** Hija de Don Manuel Sánchez esta señorita era.
Sth ** De Don Manuel Sánchez hija era esta señorita.
264. The natural construction is, of course, the most gram-
matical, but the best writers generally seek for rhetorical
rather than grammatical effect, and this is often achieved by
inversion, as being more easy and elegant, and as giving at
the same time more freedom to imagination and genius.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Oh ! amigo mío, V. por Nueva York ! i Cuánto lo cele-
bro ! Sí, señor, aquí me tiene V., Don Fernando, no he podido
resistir la tentación de venir á ver la América.
2. I Me alegro infinito I ¿ Pero por qué no vino V. á hospe-
dar á mi casa ? En primer lugar, porque llegué anoche muy
tarde ; y en segundo, porque á los solteros nos gusta la libertad y
la vida del hotel.
3. Bien, no me opongo, á condición de que vendrá V. á pasar
con nosotros algunos días. — Lo haré así con mucho gusto, ade-
más, Don Fernando, que, como no sé hablar inglés y esta ciudad
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LL 299
es tan grande, tengo miedo de perderme si salgo solo, y quisiera
que, durante mi permanencia en ella, tuviese V. la bondad de ser
mi cicerone, de modo es que me propongo, pasar la mayor parte
del tiemx>o en su compañía.
4. En eso me hará V. mucho placer, además de que yo goza-
ré tanto como V. con la sorpresa y admiración que le causarán á
V. las vistas de esta, metrópoli, é Ha estado V. jamás en Londres
ó en París ? No, señor, jamás he salido de España hasta ahora.
o. i Cuándo quiere V. que principiemos nuestros paseos ?
Cuando V. guste ; ahora mismo si está V. desocupado, porque, á
decir verdad, tengo una gran curiosidad.
6. i Quiere V. que vayamos á pie ó en coche ? A pie, si V.
gusta; me parece que podremos ver más cómodamente; pero
tomaremos un coche cuando haya que salir de la ciudad.
7. Pues en marcha, venga el brazo.— Yo temo que voy á mo-
lestar á V., Don Fernando, porque soy muy curioso, como dicen
los franceses, soy uxí flaneur, y me llaman la atención hasta las
cosos más pequeñas.
8. Entonces simpatizaremos, porque á mí me gusta observarlo
y criticarlo todo.— ¿ Qué calle es esta en que estamos ahora ? Esta
es la Cuarta avenida, y esa que la atraviesa es la calle Veinte
y tres.
9. i Cómo es eso ? Las calles en Nueva York están divididas
en avenidas, que son las que atraviesan la ciudad á lo largo, y en
calles, que la atraviesan de occidente á oriente, cortando las ave-
nidas en ángulos rectos y formando toda la ciudad como un ta-
blero de damas, de modo que sabiendo el número de la calle
ó avenida y el de la casa adonde se va, puede calcularse fácil-
mente la distancia.
10. Y este edificio de arquitectura tan curiosa de la esquina,
¿ qué es ? Esta es la nueva academia de dibujo, donde se exponen
al público muy buenas pinturas.
11. i Hay aquí tan buenas pinturas como en el museo de Ma-
drid ? No, ni con mucho ; este país es aún nuevo, y aunque pue-
dan hacerlo en otras cosas, todavía no pueden rivalizar en lo que
respecta á las bellas artes en Europa.
12. I Hombre, qué hermosa plaza ! Esta es la plaza de Madi-
son y todos estos bellos edificios que V. ve á su alrededor, y
la plaza misma, han sido hechos de veinte años á esta parte.
13. i Qué edificio es aquel de enfrente que es tan grande como
un palacio ? Ese es el hotel de la Quinta avenida, y en efecto
Digitized
by Google
300 LESSON LI.
V. tiene razón en compararlo á un palacio, porque los hoteles son
en realidad los palacios de los Estados Unidos, y se dice que son
los mejores del mundo.
14. I Cuidado I hombre, por jkxío se deja V. atropellar -por el
ómnibus. — ¡ Cáspita ! ¡ qué mujer tan hermosa I
15. Sí ; pero no debe V. pararse á admirar las bellezas, en me-
dio de Broadway en su punto de reunión con la Quinta avenida,
porque corre V. peligro de ser atropellado por los carruajes de
todas especies que continuamente lo atraviesan.
16. Don Fernando, ¿ son todas las señoras en Nueva Tork tan
hermosas como esa que acaba de pasar ? No sé, porque yo sólo
miró donde ponía los pies, procurando escapar al mismo tiempo
de los carruajes ; pero sí podré decirle á V. que mujeres más her-
mosas que las que he visto yo en Nueva York no oreo que se en-
cuentren en ninguna parte del mundo.
17. I Oiga V. I ¿no hablan español esos que van dolante de
nosotros I Eso no debe V. extrañarlo ; esta es una ciudad cosmo-
polita ; en ella hay gentes de todas las naciones y V. oirá en el
trascurso de poco tiempo hablar alemán, español, francés y otras
muchas lenguas.
EXERCISE.
1. What do you understand hy the complement of a verb ?
It is a phrase or a part of a phrase that serves to complete the
idea expressed by the verb.
2. Can you tell me what a cosmox>olitan is ? A cosmopoli-
tan is one who is not a stranger in any country, a citizen of the
world.
3. Where does that gentleman live ? On Fifth avenue, at
the comer of Twenty-second street.
4. How long has your uncle been a member of the Royal
Academy of Madrid ? He is not a member of the Royal Acade-
my of Madrid ; but he has been a member of the Academy of
Sciences for the last ten years.
6. Take that book from Charles and give it to Peter. I shall
give him some other book, because if I took that one from Charles
he would cry.
6. Is your friend married ? No, sir, he is a bachelor.
7. Have you ever seen Da Vinci's celebrated painting, " The
Last Supper"?* No; but I have seen the engraving of that
* La cena.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LIL
801
painting, made by Morghen, and it is a fact admitted by every
one, that, notwithstanding the absence of color, that engraving
is a true reproduction of the original.
8. How long does it take to go from here to Central Park ?
But a short time ; the distance is not very great.
9. Could you run there in as short a time as one could go in
a carriage ? I do not doubt that I could, if I started from the
same place and at the same time as the carriage.
10. How are the several States of the Union divided ? Into
Northern, Southern, Eastern, and Western.
11. Is that not the tallest man you have ever seen ? Far from
it ; I have seen several much taller.
12. Have they been able to nil that position yet ? I believe
not ; I understand that one of our friends was about to apply for
it {pretenderlo), but his father was opposed to his doing it, and
so he would not persist
13. How far did you go before finding him ? I walked about
half an hour by the river side, inquiring of every one I met,
whether he had seen a young man on horseback ; and at last an
old man told me that he had seen him cross the river, nearly
opposite the new building which they are putting up (erecting)
at a short distance from the entrance to the public promenade.
14. Are there any fine public walks in the metropolis ? Some
seven or eight beautiful ones, the most of which have been made
within the last five years.
LESSON LII.
Aconsejar.
Aprovechar.
Consistir.
Colorir.
Citar.
Costar.
Comunicar.
Demostrar.
Deteriorar.
Expresar.
Freir.
Grabar.
To counsel, to advise.
To profit, to embrace (profit by)
To consist
To color (paintings).
To quote, to cite.
To cost
To communicate.
To demonstrate, to point out
To deteriorate.
To express.
To fry.
To engrave, to impress on the
mind.
Digitized
by Google
302
LESSC
)N LIl.
Tomarse (el trabajo).
To take the trouble.
Prender,
To take up, 1
to arrest
Perfeccionar.
To perfect.
Merecer.
To merit, to deserve.
Reunir.
To gather, 1
unite.
to assemble, to re-
Remunerar.
To remunerate.
Visitar.
To visit, to search.
Por ejemplo.
For instance.
Que yo sepa.
For all I know.
LÍ8t of the Irregular Past Partieipl
ea and Participial Adjectives of all
the Yerba already introduced.
Abierto.
Opened.
Frito.
Fried.
Bendito.
Blessed.
Hecho.
Done.
Contradicho.
Contradicted.
Impuesto.
Imposed.
Convicto.
Convicted.
Muerto.
Died.
Compuesto.
Composed.
Manifiesto.
Manifested.
Dicho.
Said, told.
Oculto.
Hidden, con-
Devuelto.
Given back, re-
cealed.
turned.
Opuesto.
Opposed.
Dispuesto.
Disposed.
Preso.
Taken, arrested.
Escrito.
Written.
Puesto.
Placed, put
Electo.
Elected.
Provisto.
Provided.
Expreso.
Expressed.
Roto.
Broken.
Expuesto.
Exposed.
Satisfecho.
Satisfied.
Visto.
Seen.
Vuelto.
Returned.
Amplio.
Ampie.
Actual
Present.
Antiguo.
Ancient, old.
Contemporáneo.
Contemporary.
Enemistado.
At variance, on bad terms.
Dramático.
Dramatic.
Moderno.
Modern.
Honroso.
Honorable
.
Político.
Political.
Cocinero.
Cook.
Amenidad.
Agreeableness,
Capitán.
Captain.
amenity.
Acierto.
Success.
Biblioteca.
Library.
Colorido.
Coloring.
Cena.
Supper.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LIL
303
Grabado.
Engraving.
Comedia.
Comedy, play.
Fresco.
Cool, refreshing
Costumbre.
Custom, habit.
air.
Erudición.
Erudition.
Empleo.
Employment
Fuente.
Fountain, source.
Drama.
Drama.
Existencia-
Existence.
Estilo.
Style.
Elegancia.
Elegance.
Joven.
Youth.
Instrucción.
Instruction, learn-
Mercader.
Dealer.
ing.
Paisano.
Countryman.
Ignorancia.
Ignorance.
Hecho,
Action, fact.
Mención.
Mention.
Siglo.
Century.
Literatura.
Literature.
Verso.
Verse.
Medianía.
Moderation, me-
Soldado.
Soldier.
diocrity.
Prosa
Prose.
Novela.
Novel.
Política.
Politics.
Tragedia.
Tragedy.
Vasija.
Vase, vessel.
COMPOÍ
3ITI0N.
Está enemistado con su primo.
Colocado en vasijas.
Ha cantado una canción española.
Los caballos que han comprado los
mercaderes no son buenos.
Los caballos que fueron comprados
por los mercaderes son buenos.
Están {pr quedan) demostradas estas
verdades. ,
La cocinera había frito (or freído) el
pescado.
Han prendido {or preso) al culpable.
No sé si habrán ya proveído {or pro-
•visto) el empleo.
Has roto el vaso.
i Ha visto y. un caballo muerto t
No, pero he visto un caballo matado.
% Quién ha muerto á ese caballo t
Un paisano le ha muerto.
El capitán fué muerto por sus sol-
dados.
He is on bad terms with his cousin.
Placed in vases (or vessels).
He has sung a Spanish song.
The horses that the dealers have
bought are not good.
The horses that were bought by the
dealers are good.
These truths are (or stand) demon-
strated.
The cook had fried the fish.
They have arrested the offender.
I do not know whether they have
already arranged for (a person to
fill) the position.
You have broken the glass.
Have you seen a dead horse f
No, but I have seen a horse with a
sore back.
Who killed that horse f
A countryman killed it.
The captain was killed by his sol-
diers.
Digitized
by Google
304
LESSON LIL
Él se ha matado.
Él se ha muerto.
Ese es un joven muy leído, muy apro-
vechado y muy callado.
Es un hecho que la Cena de da
Vinci está felizmente expresada
en el grabado de Morghen, no
obstante que le falta el colorido
de la pintura.
Aunque el fresco de la Cena, hecho
por da Vinci, está mal colorido y
deteriorado, ha sido grabado con
acierto por Morghen.
He killed himself.
He died.
That young man is well read, makes
the most of his opportunities, and
talks little.
It is a fact that Da Vinci's "Last
Supper" is happily represented
in Morghen's engraving, notwith-
standing the fact that the latter
lacks the coloring of the painting.
Although the fresco of the **Last
Supper," made by Da Vinci, is
badly colored, and time worn,' it
has been engraved with success
by Morghen.
EXPLANATION.
Past Pakticiples. — Some past participles retain the
regimen of their verbs ; as,
Enemistado con su primo. 1 On bad terms with his cousin.
266. The past participle must agree in gender and num-
ber with its subject, except when used in a compound tense
with the verb haber alone, in which case it is unchangeable ;
as.
Ha cantado una canción. He has sung a song.
Los caballos que han comprado los The horses that the dealers have
mercaderes. bought.
But the past participle, if it comes after the verbs ser^
esfar^ quedar^ or any other, except haber^ agrees with the
subject in gender and number ; as.
Los caballos que fueron comprador
por los mercaderes.
Están (or quedan) demostrador estas
verdades.
The horses that were bought by the
dealers. '
These truths are (or remain) demon-
strated.
267. Some verbs have two past participles, one regular and
the other irregular. These are used quite differently, since
the irregular one, regarded as a substantive, is employed in
an absolute sense only, and never signifies motion, whether in
the active or in the passive form. For this reason the ir-
Digitized
by Google
LESSOJ^ LII. 305
regular participles may be accompanied by the verbs ser^
estar ^ quedar^ and others, but. never by the auxiliary haher ;
inasmuch as it would be improper to say : huho convicto^ he
contracto^ instead of, huho convencido^ he contraído.
268. The irregular participles frito^ fried ; preso^ taken
prisoner ; provisto^ provided, and roto^ broken, are the only
ones that can be used with the verb haber^ to form the com-
pound tenses ; as,
La cocinera había frito (or freído)
el pescado.
Han prendido {oí presó) al culpable.
No sé si habrán js^ proveído {or pro-
visto) el empleo.
Has roto el vaso {sounds better than
has rompido el vaso).
289. The verb matar ^ in the sense of to take away life,
has the extraordinary irregularity of appropriating for its
past participle that of the verb morir ; the participle matado
being used to express wounds or sores in animals, resulting
from the rubbing of the harness, or from cruel treatment ; as,
The cook had fried the fish.
They have taken (or arrested) the
offender.
I do not know whether they have
already provided (a person to fill)
the office.
You have broken the glass.
Un caballo matado.
Un caballo muerto.
Un paisano le ha muerto.
El capitán fué muerto por sus sol-
dados.
A horse with a sore back.
A dead horse.
A countryman killed him.
The captain was killed by his. sol-
diers.
But in speaking of a person that has committed suicide, we
must say :
Se ha matado (and not Se ha muer- i He has killed himself.
to), I
270. Many past participles are used as adjectives in con-
nection with persons ; as,
Un joven leído, aprovechado, calla- 1 A well read, thrifty and silent youth.
do. I
271. Past participles are sometimes used as substantives,
and the difference can be known only by the context, as seen
in this sentence :
23
Digitized
by Google
306
LESSON Lll.
Es un hecho que la Cena de da Yinci
está felizmente expresada en el
grabado de Morghen, no obstante
que le falta el colorido de la pin-
tura.
It is a fact, that " The Last Supper**
by Da Vinci is happily expressed
in the engraving of Morghen, not-
withstanding the latter lacks the
coloring of the painting.
Where the words hecho^ grabado and colorido^ are substan-
tives, the same words appear as participles in the following
phrases :
Aunque el fresco de la Cena, hecho
por da Vinci, está mal colorido y
deteriorado, ha sido grabado con
acierto por Morghen.
Although the fresco of " The Last
Supper," made by Da Vinci, is
badly colored and deteriorated, it
has been engraved with success by
Morghen.
272. Other grammarians add one more tense in the infini-
tive mood ; as,
Haber de amar. I To have to love.
Habiendo de amar. • Having to love.
Such a classification, however, is no longer essential, nor even
correct. In early Spanish literature that form frequently oc-
curred, performing the office now almost exclusively filled by
the regular terminations of the tenses, and chiefly those of
the future indicative and the imperfect subjunctive.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Qué le gusta á V. más, la conversación ó la lectura?
Ambas cosas me gustan mucho.
2. i Qué género de lectura le gusta á V. más ? La historia,
la comedia, y la novela.
3. i Prefiere V. la prosa al verso ? No, señor, la poesía me
gusta más ; pero ha de ser muy buena, porque en poesía no me
gusta la medianía.
4. Que autores, en la literatura moderna, me aconseja V. que
lea para perfeccionarme en el español. — En historia y política lea
V. á Lafuente, y á Miñano.
5. ¿ Y para la comedia ? Á Moratín, Bretón de los Herreros
y Don Ventura De la Vega.
6. i No tienen Vds. otros ? Sí, señor ; pero yo le cito á V.
solamente los mejores y solamente á los contemporáneos.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LIL 307
7. I Y poetas ? Zorrilla, Espronceda, Hartzenbusch, y otros
muchos.
8. ¿ Tienen Vds. algún buen crítico contemporáneo por el
estilo del antiguo Quevedo ? Yo creo que no pueden encon-
trarse dos Quevedos ; pero, sin embargo, tenemos críticos de cos-
tumbres muy buenos, tales como Larra (Fígaro), Don Ramón de
Mesonero Eomanos, Pelegrín, y otros.
9. i Tienen Vds. buenos autores para la tragedia y el drama ?
Sí, señor, muy buenos, por ejemplo, Martínez de la Rosa, García
Crutiérrez, Gil y Zarate, &c.
10. Yo no sabía que tuviesen Vds. tantos autores buenos en la
literatura actual. — Yo pudiera citarle á V. otros muchos ; pero si
V. reúne las obras de los catorce mencionados logrará V. tener
una pequeñita librería de literatura moderna, que le enseñará á
V. más español que todas las gramáticas y métodos que se han
compuesto para enseñar esta lengua hasta el día, y que le remu-
nerarán á V. ampliamente por el trabajo que le ha costado el
aprenderla, con el placer y la instrucción que le comunicarán.
11. i Es posible ! Yo había oído decir, y así lo había llegado
á creer yo mismo, que España no poseía nada que mereciese men-
ción en su literatura moderna, y á decir verdad, los únicos libros
buenos que creía que Vds. poseían eran el Don Quijote de Cer-
vantes y las obras dramáticas de Calderón de la Barca. — Así lo
he oído yo decir también, y en verdad que es una cosa que no
puedo comprender, esa general ignorancia de la existencia de
una literatura española contemporánea, que ha producido más
y mejores obras que las que se han producido en algunos siglos
no solamente en España sino en otras naciones.
12. ¿ Se conocen en España nuestros autores ingleses contem-
poráneos ? Se conocen mucho más de lo que aquí son conocidos
los españoles ; la prueba es que la mayor parte están traducidos
al castellano, y Vds. no tienen ninguna traducción, que yo sepa,
de todos esos autores que^acabo de citarle á V.
13. Probablemente consiste en que los americanos é ingleses
no aprenden mucho el español. — Entre los americanos debo hacer
tres honrosas excepciones, que son : Washington Irving, Prescott,
y Ticknor. Estos distinguidos escritores no solo aprendieron el
español, sino que viajaron en España, visitaron nuestras mejores
bibliotecas y quizá adquirieron en aquellas fuentes mucho del
saber, la erudición, el gusto y la elegancia en el decir que comu-
nican á sus obras tanto interés y amenidad.
Digitized
by Google
308 LESSON LIL
EXERCISE.
1. Ought we not to make the most of (profit by) every occa-
sion that offers for acquiring knowledge ? That is the only way
to arrive at the possession of knowledge.
2. Tell the cook that I wish that fish not to be fried. It is
too late to tell her so ; she has already fried it
3. Has that work been translated into Spanish ? Not that
I know of ; but it was finely translated into French, by M. de
rOrme, a few years ago.
4. Is not that gentleman to whom you introduced me a short
time since a dramatist ? He is, and his plays might serve as a
model of elegance for many dramatists of greater pretensions
{pretensiones).
6. Have they found out yet who set fire to your uncle's
house ? Yes ; and the offender has been arrested and convicted
of the crime.
6. Would you be good enough to lend me that novel a
chapter of which you read me the day before yesterday? I
should with great pleasure if it were mine; but it belongs to
Alexander ; and, as we are on bad terms at present, I should not
like to ask any favors of him.
7. Would that painting be injured * by being exposed to the
heat of the sun {sol) ? Certainly ; and the heat of a strong fire
would produce the same effect upon it.
8. Did your friend, the captain, return with his regiment
from the war ? No ; he was killed in the first battle that took
place after his arrival at the seat (featro) of war.
9. I saw no mention made of his death in the newspapers.
No ; I believe his name did not appear in the list (lista) of the
killed ; but the sad news was communicated to his brother by
an officer of the same regiment
10. Do you like to walk in the garden in the morning before
breakfast ? I generally go to the garden every morning and
evening to read and smoke in the cool air,
11. I wish you had bought that work on English literature.
So do I ; it would have been very useful to Louisa, who is so
desirous of becoming perfect in that language.
12. Did your father think Peter merited the remuneration he
received ? I do not know whether he did or not ; but, at all
♦ Deterioren',
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LIIL
309
events, Peter must have merited some remuneration, or other-
wise he would not have gotten any.
13. Are you going to have your name engraved on your
watch ? I shall have only my initials {inicial) engraved on it.
14. What kind of literature does your aunt like best ? Ha !
you ask me more than I can tell you ; I really cannot say whether
she has any opinion in the matter ; for the fact is, that never hav-
ing regarded her as a woman of much erudition, I have not
taken the trouble to ask her.
LESSON LIII.
Agradar.
To please.
Aguantar.
To bear with, to put up with, to
suffer.
Alcanzar.
To reach, to overtake, to catch.
Alimentar.
To feed.
Armar.
To arm.
Bajar.
To go (or come) down.
Corretear.
To run about.
Conceder.
To concede, to grant.
Distar.
To be distant.
Descomponer.
To decompose, to put out of
order.
Determinar.
To determine, to induce.
Etíhar.
To throw, to put (in).
Exceder.
To exceed.
Hinchar.
To swell
Nadar.
To swim.
Prohibir.
To prohibit.
Quitar.
To take off, to take away.
Contrario.
Contrary.
Descompuesto.
Decomposed, out of order.
Dotado.
Endowed, gifted.
Excelente.
Excellent.
Indigno.
Unworthy.
Improviso.
Improvised, unexpected.
Terrible.
Terrible.
Digitized
by Google
310
LESSON LUL
•
Antojo.
Desire, longing,
Alabanza.
Praise.
whim.
Apariencia.
Appearance.
Alcance.
Reach.
Estocada.
Thrust.
Consejo.
Counsel.
Busca.
Search.
Discurso.
Speech, discourse.
Comida.
Dinner.
Gatillo.
Pincers (dentist's).
Custodia.
Keeping.
Juicio.
Judgment, trial.
Edad.
Age.
Juramento.
Oath, affidavit.
Hermosura.
Beauty.
Mar.
Sea.
Obligación.
Duty.
Navio.
Ship.
Vela.
Sail, candle.
Piso.
Floor, story.
Travesura.
Trick, pertness.
Tiro.
Shot.
Corrida de toros. BuU-fight
Precepto.
Precept.
Oposición.
Opposition.
Torero.
Bull-fighter.
Toro.
Tribunal.
Bull.
Tribunal, court,
COMPO
SITION.
Correr por las calles.
Habló de {or sobre) ese negocio.
i Qué está V. haciendo f
Estaba para decírselo á V.
No alcanzo á comprenderlo.
Hace las cosas á su antojo.
Iba en busca de un amigo.
Me opuse á ello.
Á lo largo del río.
Venga V. conmigo.
No sé qué determinar.
De ningún modo.
Está comiendo.
Entró por la ventana.
Delante de mi ventana.
Ante el juez.
Antes de ahora.
Tales acciones son indignas de un
caballero.
Parecía fuera de sí.
Excede á toda alabanza.
Sin duda alguna.
De día.
Uno á uno.
j Por dónde le vino á V. I
To run about the streets.
He spoke about that affair.
What are you doing I
I was about to tell you.
It is above my comprehension.
He does things after his own fancy.
I was in search of a friend.
I set my face against it.
By the river side.
Come along with me.
I am at a loss how to act.
Not at all.
He is at dinner.
He came in by the window.
Before my window.
Before the judge.
Before now.
Such actions are beneath a gentle-
man.
He appeared to be beside himself.
It is beyond all praise.
Beyond all doubt.
By day.
One by one.
How did you come by it f
Digitized
by Google
LESSON Lili.
311
Luego.
Por mar.
Á la mano.
Échelo V. en tierra.
En cuanto á mi.
Dígaselo V. de mi parte.
Á consecuencia de eso.
De acuerdo con.
Tenía esperanza de que seryiria.
Bajar al jardín.
Todos nosotros.
Le pido á V.
i Cuánto dista f
De improviso.
Quítese V. el sombreo.
Se la llevó.
Le dejé ir.
Por ese motivo.
Adelante.
Sobre mi palabra.
Al contrario.
No se tratan.
Les impuso esa obligación.
Alimentarse de esperanzas.
Venga V. el doce de Mayo.
Al ipr del) otro lado.
Se acabó.
Vuelva V. á leerlo.
De miedo.
Fuera de peligro.
Fuera de casa.
Está sin dinero.
Descompuesto.
Perdió el juicio.
Por curiosidad.
Estar de mal humor.
Pasaré k su casa de V.
Pasamos por Francia.
Le atravesó de parte á parte.
Por él.
Por medio de él.
De día en día.
Según las apariencias.
By and by.
By sea.
At hand.
Throw it down.
As for me.
Tell him that for me.
In consequence of that.
In accordance with.
I was in hopes it would do.
To go down to the garden.
All of us.
I beg of you.
How far is it f
Off-hand.
Take off your hat.
He carried her off,
I let him off.
On that account.
Go on.
On my word.
On the contrary.
They are not on good terms.
He imposed that obligation upon
them.
To live on hope.
Come on the 12th of May.
Over the way, on the other side.
It is all over.
Read it over again.
From fear, for fear.
Out of danger.
Out of doors.
He is out of money.
Out of order.
She is out of her mind.
Out of curiosity.
To be in bad humor.
I shall go to your house.
We passed through France.
He ran him through.
Through (i. e., on account of) him.
Through (t. c, by means of) him.
From day to day. ^
According to appearances.
Digitized
by Google
312
LESSON LIIL
Eso está aún por venir.
Diez contra uno.
Hasta hoy.
El navio está á la yela.
Es menor de edad.
Bajo de juramento.
Hacia allá.
i Están levantados ?
Al segundo piso.
Que suban la comida.
Le pusieron en custodia.
Hincharse de soberbia.
No la puedo aguantar.
Ármese V. de paciencia.
Su hermosura me sorprendió.
No la conozco.
Dotado de virtudes.
Me agradó su discurso.
Á tiro de pistola.
Á mi alcance.
No hay nadie en casa.
Asomado á una ventana.
That is yet to come.
Ten to one.
To this day.
The ship is under sail.
He is under age.
Under oath.
Up that way.
Are they up I
Up two flights of stairs.
Let them bring up the dinner.
He was taken into custody.
To be puffed up with pride.
I cannot put up with her.
Arm yourself with patience.
I was struck with her beauty.
I am not acquainted with her.
Endowed with virtues.
I was pleased with his discourse.
Within pistol-shot.
Within my reach.
There is nobody within.
At a window.
EXPLANATION.
273. Idioms are certain peculiar modes of expression
which cannot be translated literally into another language.
We have already introduced some Spanish as well as English
idioms ; but they are very numerous in all languages, and it
would be as unnecessary to give within the compass of a
grammar all those peculiar to the Spanish language, as it
would be to introduce all its words. The student will find
them in the several dictionaries, and principally in the works
of good writers.
However, we have introduced in the "Composition" of this
lesson as many as the limits of this book would permit ; giving
examples of phrases in which the English preposition differs
in meaning from that which most generally constitutes its
proper signification, and consequently must be translated by
words corresponding to those in the place of which it stands; as.
No sé qué determinar. i I am at a loss how to act.
De ningún modo. | Not at all.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LIIL 313
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ¿ Dónde está Alejandro ? Está corriendo por las calles.
2. ¿ Por qué no me lo dijiste antes ? Estaba para decírselo
áV.
3. Yo no quiero que ande correteando calles. — Creo que iba
en busca de su amigo.
4. Se lo tengo prohibido ; pero él no me obedece, y hace las
cosas á su antojo. — Yo me opuse á ello, y le dije qué V. quería ir
á paseo con todos nosotros.
5. Don Carlos, si V. desea, iré á buscarlo. — De ningún modo,
V. no lo encontraría ; lo que temo es que haga alguna travesura
que le cueste cara.
6. Yo creo que subiendo á lo largo del río lo encontraré, por-
que si no me engaño le oí decir que quería ir á nadar. — No sé qué
determinar, pero no, mejor será dejarlo, vamonos nosotros á paseo
(or vamos).
7. Su hermano Manuel es muy diferente, excede á toda ala-
banza y siempre obedece los preceptos de su papá. — Sin duda
alguna Manuel es un muchacho excelente.
8. I Hola I aquí viene Juanito. ¿ Va V. al campo con noso-
tros ? Con mucho gusto ; pero antes tengo que pedir á V. un
favor.
9. Délo V. por concedido. — ¿ Palabra de honor ?— Sobre mi
palabra. ¿ Qué es ?
10. Que perdone V. á Alejandro.— i Vaya I sea así, puesto que
di mi palabra ; ¿ pero dónde está ? Se escondió y no se atreve á
presentarse de miedo, pero ahora lo veo asomado á una ventana
en el segundo piso de su casa de V.
11. Yo creo que ha perdido el juicio ese muchacho ; venga V
acá, señor mío, y cuéntenos qué ha hecho en todo este tiempo
que ha estado fuera de casa.— Papá, perdóneme V., que no lo vol-
veré á hacer otra vez.
12. Bien, bien, dejémoslo así por esta vez.
13. ¿ Don José, como está su hermana de V. ? Está mejor y
esperamos que ya está fuera de peligro.
14. i Mató el torero al toro á la primera estocada ? Sí, señor,
á la primera estocada lo atravesó de parte á parte.
15. ¿ No se trata V. con su vecino ? No, señor, es un hombre
lleno de soberbia, á quien no puedo aguantar.
16. i Se dio el navio á la vela para la Habana ? Sí, señor, el
navio está á la vela.
Digitized
by Google
314 LESSON LIIL
17. ¿ Pusieron al culpable en custodia ? No, señor, le dejaron
bajo juramento de que se presentaría en el tribunal.
18. i Conoce V. á la Señorita Sánchez ? Hace poco tiempo
que hice su conocimiento, su hermosura me sorprendió y es una
señorita dotada de grandes virtudes.
19. i Viajó V. el verano pasado por mar ó por tierra ? Por
supuesto por mar, puesto que fui á Europa.
20. ¿ Pasaron Vds. por Francia ? Sí, señor, pasamos por Fran-
cia, y el doce de Mayo entramos en París.
21. i Está V. de mal humor ? Sí, señor, malísimo, porque
tengo un terrible dolor de muelas.
22. Le aconsejo á V. que se arme de paciencia. — Mil gracias,
por su buen consejo, pero creo que será mejor armarse de un
buen gatillo.
EXERCISE.
1. How does that man spend his time ? He seems to do
nothing but run about the streets.
2. Is not your uncle's sight good ? No, sir ; and that is the
reason why he wears spectacles.
3. Is that the way you spell {escribir) that word ? Oh, no,
of course not ; I must take out one of the e's.
4. Does your watch keep good time (andar bien) ? Yes,
when it goes, which occurs very rarely*; it gets out of order
about twice a month.
5. Did you see the Spanish man-of-war (ship of war) that
came into port (puerto) last month ? Yes, I saw it the day it
set sail (darse á la vela) to return to Spain.
6. Did you go to see a bull-fight during your stay at Madrid t
I did; and although I do not like it myself, I could not help
(no poder menos de) admiring the amazing dexterity of the men
(bull-fighters) who dared to expose their lives in attacking the
furious animal.
7. How many stories are there to the house in which you
live ? Three ; I generally sleep on the third floor.
8. Cannot you induce him to stay at home ? No, he wishes
to go ; it is a whim of his, and he will not bear any opposition.
9. Were you iñ court at the time of the trial ? No, I could
not go down town that day.
* Mara vez.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LIV.
315
10. How far had he gone before you overtook him ? I caught
up with him at the comer of the street.
11. How is your cousin getting on ? Pretty well ; but his arm
is still swollen, and to all appearance it pains him very much.
12. I wonder how he can bear up under so much suffering.
He lives in the hope of getting better one day or other.
13. Did that man swear he had not been there ? He made
(prestar) affidavit that he had never set (put) his foot in the
hoilse.
14. What a beautiful young lady that is I That is true ; but
her learning by far exceeds her beauty.
LESSON LIV.
Apegarse.
To adhere to, to be attached.
Criar.
To raise (breed), to bring up.
Concebir.
To conceive.
Continuar.
To continue.
Encerrar.
To shut up.
Guardar.
To guard, to take care, to keep.
Pintar.
To paint.
Presidir.
To preside.
Ponderar.
To make much of, to praise.
Combatir.
To combat.
Reducir.
To reduce.
Rodar.
To roll.
Sacudir.
To shake, to shake off.
Tirar.
To pull, to draw, to throw, to
throw out (or away).
Llenar.
To fill.
Estusiasmar.
To render enthusiastic.
Al cabo.
After all, finally, at the end.
De repente.
Suddenly, on a sudden.
No obstante.
Notwithstanding.
Si acaso.
If at all, in case.
Si bien.
Although.
Amarillo.
Yellow.
AzuL
Blue.
Digitized
by Google
316
LESSON LIV.
Anaranjado.
Orange.
Atento.
Attentive.
Confuso
Confused.
Feroz.
Fierce.
Bondadoso.
Kind.
Favorite
K
Favorite.
Griego.
Greek.
Añil.
Indigo.
Ligero.
Light, slight, speedy.
Lleno.
Full.
Montaraz.
Mountaineer, wild.
Vistoso.
Conspicuous, showy.
Colorado, rojo.
Red.
Romano
Roman.
Particular.
Particular, private, rare.
Picante.
Pungent.
Temerario.
Daring, rash.
Violado.
Violet (color).
Verde.
Green.
Prismático.
Prismatic.
Cabo.
End.
Algazara.
Shouts (of joy).
Circo.
Siege, circus.
Autoridad.
Authority.
Color.
Color.
Confusión.
Confusion.
Bullicio.
Rumpus, noise,
Carcajada.
Burst of laughter.
bustle.
Corrida.
Fight (bull), race.
Ceremonial.
Ceremony.
Violeta.
Violet (ñower).
Espectro solar.
Solar spectrum.
Diversión.
Diversion.
Goce.
Delight, joy.
Clase.
Class.
Dicho.
Saying.
Infancia.
Infancy.
Desierto.
Desert.
Idea.
Idea.
Interés.
Interest.
Fiesta.
Feast, festival.
Guante.
Glove.
Guiñada.
Wink.
León.
Lion.
Ocupación.
Occupation.
Local.
Situation.
Corrida de
Bull-fight.
Entusiasmo.
Enthusiasm.
toros.
Enemigo.
Enemy.
Pelota.
Ball.
Lloras.
Tears, cry.
Plaza de
Arena.
Paso.
Step, pace.
toros.
Prisma.
Prism.
Proeza.
Prowess, exploits.
Rumor.
Rumor.
Sonrisa.
Smile.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LIV.
317
Ser. Being.
Traje. Dress, costume.
Becibimiento. Reception.
Suelo. Ground.
Grito. Shout, cry.
Valentía.
Jaula.
Bravery.
Cage.
COMPOSITION.
Los yimos cuando entrábamos.
Si no hubiera sido por mí, lo habrían
matado.
Yo iría si no creyera que fuese
inútiL
Diga V. si vendrá ó no.
Que venga ó que novenga.
Dudo que lo sepa.
Por atentos y bondadosos que sean
{or no obstante lo atentos que son)
y por bondadosos que sean.
Es menester que se cuide V., porque
si no se enfermará.
Es menester que obedezca V. las ór-
denes ; de lo contrario sufrirá las
consecuencias.
ó yo tengo razón ó él la tiene.
Ni prometas ni obres sin pensar.
No lo haría si me importara la vida
(t. e., aunque, or por más que me
importara la vida.
Valiente, si los hay.
Tuvo el valor, si tal nombre merece
una acción temeraria de combatir
solo contra tantos enemigos.
Quiero saber si emplea bien el tiem-
po.
i Si habrá llegado el correo f
Mira si viene.
No sé si lo hago.
Si (es que) acabo de entrar.
Si (cuando) él al cabo ha de venir.
Si (es que) no es eso.
Si (ya) lo dije.
We saw them as we were entering.
But for me, they would have killed
him.
I should go, did I not think it use-
less.
Say whether you will come or not.
Whether he come or not.
I doubt whether she knows it.
However attentive they are, and
however kind they may be.
You must take care of yourself, for
if you do not you will be ill.
You must obey the orders ; for if you
transgress them, you will suffer
the consequences.
Either I am right or he is.
Neither promise nor act without
thinking.
I would not do it, though my life
were at stake.
A valiant man, if there are any in
the world.
He had the courage, if the rash action
of fighting alone against so many
enemies is worthy of such a name.
I wish to know whether he employs
his time profitably.
If the mail should have arrived ?
See if he is coming.
I do not know whether to do it or not.
I have but just come in.
For, after all, he must come.
But that is not it.
But I said so.
Digitized
by Google
318
LESSON LJV.
Si (porque) no hay cosa que yo haga.
Apenas si se oía el confuso rumor
de los pasos.
For I do nothing at all.
The confused tramping of feet could
scarcely be heard.
EXPLANATION.
274. There are several conjunctions in English that are
frequently used as substitutes for other words ; these conjunc-
tions are generally rendered in Spanish by the words which
they stand in the place of ; as,
Los vimos cucbtido entrábamos. i We saw them as we were going in.
Diga V. ai quiere venir 6 no. | Say whether you will come or not.
275. The Spanish conjunctions are also often used as
substitutes for other words of very different meanings. Let
81 and que serve as examples :
/Si, as an adverb, is, as we have already observed, aflSrma-
tive, except when employed ironically.
6V, as a conjunction, may be employed in a variety of sig-
nifications. The following are some of its principal uses :
1st. To denote the condition on which depends the accom-
plishment of an action ; as,
Si quieres acompañarme, voy á sa- 1 If you will accompany me, I am
lir. I going out.
2d. To express indispensable conditions ; as,
Tendrás el caballo si lo pagas. I You will have the horse if you pay
I for it.
3d. In the sense of although, or even though ; as.
I should not do it, even though my
life were at stake.
No lo haría ai me importara la vida
(i, e., aunque or por más que, me
importara la vida).
4th. In familiar conversation this conjunction is often
employed in meanings very different from those we have just
explained. For instance, it is often used instead of es que^ it
is because ; cuando, when ; porque, because ; and not unf re-
quently instead of ya, already, as we read in one of Moratin's
comedies :
Si (es que) acabo de entrar.
Si (cuando) él ai cabo ha de venir.
1 1 have just entered.
I For, after all, he must come.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LIV. 319
But that is not it.
But I said so (or did saj i
For I do nothing at alL
Si (es qne) no es eso.
Si (ya) lo dije.
Si (porque) no hay cosa que yo
haga.
5th. It is often used redundantly ; as,
Apenas si se oia el confuso rumor de I The confused tramping of feet could
los pasos. I scarcely be heard.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Iría V. á ver á su hermano si tuviera] tiempo ? Yo iría si
no creyera que fuese inútil.
2. Diga V. si vendrá ó no. — Amigo mío, temo salir, porque
hace mal tiempo, y es menester que me cuide porque si no enfer-
maré.
3. i Estuvo V. ayer á ver el recibimiento del Presidente ?
No, señor, mis ocupaciones no me lo permitieron.
4. ¿ Cuáles son los colores en que se descompone el espectro
solar ? Violado, añil, azul, verde, amarillo, anaranjado y rojo.
5. i De qué color tiñe V. sus guantes ? Los tino de amarillo.
6. ¿ Qué tal le gusta á V. este ejercicio ? No me gusta de nin-
gún modo, y si continúa tan interesante como hasta aquí, creo
que me hará dormir.
7. ¿ Qué costumbres le gustan á Y. más, las de España ó las
de los Estados Unidos ? Naturalmente, como español, me gustan
más las de España.
8. Pero ¿ cuáles son las mejores ? No sabré decírselo á V.,
cada nación tiene las suyas y cada individuo se apega desde su
infancia á las de su propio país.
9. ¿ Cuál es la diversión favorita del pueblo español ? Las
corridas de toros ; esto se entiende hablando del pueblo en gene-
ral y aun de muchos caballeros de la primera clase de la socie-
dad ; pero no de todos, porque hay muchos, principalmente,
señoras, que jamás han visto una corrida de toros.
10. Debe ser una diversión muy cruel y muy peligrosa. — No
deja de ser peligrosa, pues los toros de España son más feroces y
ligeros que los de ninguna parte del mundo, criado con este ob-
jeto montaraces, de modo que cuando de improviso se encuen-
tran en la plaza muestran una ferocidad y una valentía en nada
inferior á la de un león de los desiertos del África, que se encon- .
trase de repente en estos circos llenos de seres humanos.
11. i Quiere V. hacerme el favor de relatarme una corrida de
Digitized
by Google
320 LUSSON LIV.
toros ? Lo haría con mucho gusto ; pero sé que no podría hacerlo
como merece esta antigua diversión, en algo semejante á los cir-
cos de los griegos y romanos.
12. I Vamos I pruebe V. — ^Pero si es imposible, y aunque
llegara á pintarle á V. el local, los vistosos trajes, tanto del
pueblo como de los toreros, los curiosos ceremoniales de la fiesta,
las autoridades que la presiden, las tropas que la guardan ; la
música, el bullicio. Tos dichos picantes, las sonrisas, las guiñadas,
los lloros y carcajadas, todo esto no serviría de nada para ha-
cerle á V, concebir una pequeña idea del gozo y entusiasmo que
anima al pueblo español en una corrida de toros.
13. I Es posible I i Con que todo eso hay ! pues yo creía que
se reducía á una carnicería de vacas y caballos. — Pues si V. estu-
viera en Madrid le sucedería como á todos los extranjeros, que á
pesar de criticarnos esta diversión, jamás pierden una corrida de
toros.
14. Pero ¿ en qué puede consistir ese goce que V. me pondera?
I Goce I hombre, he visto yo tirar á la plaza el bastón, el bolsillo
y hasta el reloj, entusiasmado de la proeza de algún toreador.
Eso era lo que yo le decía á V. que no era fácil de pintar, porque
no consiste en la cosa misma por más interés que tenga sino en
la disposición particular y el entusiasmo de cada uno. Y si no,
dígame V. en el juego del fragata * americano en que no se ve
otra cosa que una pelota que rueda por el suelo, ó se eleva por el
aire, despedida por un garrote. . . . I ¡ ¡ Qué es lo que mueve toda
aquella algazara y ruido y confusión y gritos de. Hola I ! I Wil-
lie 1 1 1 Charley I! ! Here ! ! I Here ! I ! Run! I! James! 1 1 Hurra! !I
Hurra ! ! !
15. Ha, ha, ha; V. me hace reir con su corrida de toros.
I Vaya ! me alegro, algo se ha ganado, porque al principio yo
creía que V. se iba á dormir.
EXERCISE.
1. Had not you better leave a line for him in case he should
come ? I think it would be better ; notwithstanding the fact
that it seems impossible for him to reach here to-night.
2. Do the boys still continue to take lessons ? One of them
still continues, although he is the least studious of the three ; the
other two gave up all of a sudden last month.
♦ Base balL
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LIV. 321
3. What shouts are those I hear up-stairs ? Charles has
some friends with him, and they are getting enthusiastic on the
occasion of the President's visit to the city.
4. Do you know how to keep a secret ? I wish to know that
before I tell you this one. — I do. — ^Well, so do I.
5. I suppose * they gave the General a grand reception when
he returned from the war ? A magnificent t one, fit for a king ;
it was Peter's uncle that presided at it.
6. Can you tell me how many prismatic colors there are,
and what are their names ? I shall try ; let me see : Green,
blue, violet, red, orange, yellow, indigo.
7. What is the best time for learning a language with the
least trouble ? During childhood ; at that age the study of lan-
guages is reduced to its simplest expression.
8. What would the earth be without the light and heat
which we receive from the sun ? A complete desert ; neither
man nor any living being could exist, and there would be no
vegetation ; for all animated nature is sustained by the vivify-
ing {vivificador) effects of the sun.
9. What is the use of the prism ? It possesses the power of
decomposing a sunbeam (rayo del sol), thus enabling (poder) us
to see separately the rays of the different colors which unite to
form what is called light
10. Where are you going now ? it is not yet time for the
theatre. Why, it is half-past seven, and the play begins at eight
sharp.
11. If my friend should have come while I was out ? Oh, I
imagine that if he had come he would have left some word
(dejar dicho) for you.
12. What is that confused tramping of feet \ that I hear in the
street ? A crowd of people running to see a fire in the next
street.
13. Do you hear how that lady praises* the courage of the
man who has just gone into the lion's cage (jaula) ? I do, and
I was just thinking that she might find an occupation of more
interest ; besides, I do not see any proof of courage in such a rash
action as that of shutting one's self up with a ferocious animal
like the lion.
* Suponer, t Magnifico.
X Eumor de pasos, * Aplaudir.
Digitized
by Google
322
LUSSOii LY.
14. What sort of dress did Miss H. wear at the hall ? A hlue
silk dress, with violet and orange trimmings (guamicionea). Can
you conceive of anything more detestable ?
LESSON LV.
Afianzar.
To secure, to fasten, to prop.
Conquistar.
To conquer.
Construir.
To construct, to build.
Fundar.
To found, to go upon (a prin-
ciple).
Medir.
To measure.
Portarse.
To conduct one^s self, to be-
have.
Tirar.
To throw.
Desigual.
Unequal.
Extremado.
Extreme.
Horrendo.
Horrific.
Distinto.
Distinct.
Ridículo.
Bidiculous.
Inmemorial.
ImmemoriaL
Eecto.
Right, straight
Auxilio.
Castellano.
Árabe.
Crimen.
Catalán
Cimiento.
Dialecto.
Fulano.
Gallego.
Modelo.
Defecto.
Mérito.
Reino.
Terreno.
Título.
Help.
Castilian.
Arab.
Crime.
Catalonian.
Foundation.
Dialect.
Such a one,
and so.
Galician.
Model.
Defect.
Merit.
Kingdom,
Ground.
Title.
so
Andalucía.
Castilla.
Cataluña.
Corona.
Avila.
Galicia.
Isabel.
Imperfección.
Irregularidad.
Guipúzcoa.
Igualdad.
Medida.
Pesa
Nobleza.
Andalusia.
Castile.
Catalonia.
Crown.
Avila.
Galicia.
Elizabeth, Isa-
bella.
Imperfection.
Irregularity.
Guipúzcoa.
Equality.
Measure.
Weight (for
weighing).
Nobility.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LV.
323
Vascuence.
Zutano.
Escritorio.
Basque.
Such a one.
Office. .
Persona.
Regularidad.
Valencia.
Vizcaya.
Universidad.
Person.
Regularity.
Valencia.
Biscay.
University.
COMPOSITION.
Tratemos ahora de descansar, que
será lo mejor.
Si no hay virtudes, que son el ci-
miento de la libertad, no se afian-
zará esta en los pueblos.
¡ Qué hermosa que estás !
Ese sí que es un modo de portarse
con honor.
Que llaman.
Que me deje en paz.
¡ Qué me matan !
En muchas obras no se encuentra
otro (or más) mérito que el estilo.
Es que estoy ocupado.
Es que se encuentra sin ningún
auxilio.
Con la pérdida de su madre está
todo el día llora que llora.
I Qué no lo hubiera yo sabido !
4 Qué siempre has de ser un holga-
zán?
¡ Qué hermoso cielo !
I Qué horrenda noche I
¡ Qué cielo tan hermoso 1
Á que si.
Á que no.
Á que lo digo.
Á que lo hago.
; Qué de crímenes se vieron !
¡ Qué de injusticias no se cometen I
Qué ! 4 no vienes f
Fulano !— t Qué f
I
Iré á paseo, que no estaré siempre
metido en casa.
Qué quiera que no quiera.
No es hijo mío, que si lo fuera . . .
Let US try to rest now ; that will be
best.
If there be no virtues, which are the
foundation of liberty, it will have
no firm foothold among nations.
How beautiful you are !
That, now, is an honorable way of
acting.
Some one is calling (knocking).
Let him leave me alone.
Murder I
Many works are void of all merit
save that of style.
Well, but I am busy.
Well, but he is entirely forsaken.
She does nothing the whole day
through but lament the loss of
her mother.
Ah ! could I but have known it I
Are you always to be a sluggard t
What a beautiful sky 1
What a horrible night I
What a beautiful sky I
I wager it is.
I wager it is not.
I wager I can say it.
I wager I can do it.
How much crime there was I
How much injustice is not there
committed I
What ! are you not coming t
Such a one! What!
I shall go and take a walk, for I will
not be always stuck in the house.
Whether he will or not.
He is no son of mine, for if he were . . •
Digitized
by Google
32á: LESSON LV.
EXPLANATION.
278. Que, as a conjunction, is employed in so many dif-
ferent ways and meanings, tending to i)erplex the learner,
that we deem it essential to mention here some of its prin-
cipal uses :
It is employed as a copulatiye ; as.
Tratemos ahora de descansar, que I Let us go to rest now ; that will be
será lo mejor. | best.
It sometimes serves to introduce an incidental proposi-
tion dependent on the principal one ; as,
Si no hay virtudes, qite son el ci-
miento de la libertad, no se afian-
zará esta en los pueblos.
If there are no virtues, which are
the foundation of liberty, the lat-
ter will have no firm foothold
among nations.
It is employed instead of sino^ but, after either of the
adjectives otro or más ; as.
En muchas obras no se encuentra I Many works are void of all merit
otro (or más) mérito que el estilo. I except the style.
•It is employed instead of pero^ but, in the phrase es que^
with which we convey the reason why something is or is not
done ; as,
Us que estoy ocupado.
Us que se encuentra sin ningún
auxilio.
But I am busy.
But he is entirely forsaken.
The conjunction que, placed between two words of the
same meaning, besides uniting them as a conjunction, gives
more energy to the expression ; as.
Con la pérdida de su madre está I She is the whole day over lamenting
todo el día llora qus llora. | the loss of her mother.
At other times it serves to confirm more and more the
expression; as.
/ Qué hermosa ^ue estás I {instead
off / Qué hermosa estás I)
I Ese si que es un modo de portarse
con honor ! (instead of, ¡ Ese sí es
un modo de portarse con honor I)
How beautiful you are t
That, now, is an honorable mode of
acting I
Digitized
by Google
Some one is calling.
Let him leave me alone.
Murder I
LESSON LV. 325
The conjunction que^ at the beginning of a sentence, im-
plies a word or clause going before it ; as,
Que llaman.
Que me deje en paz.
/ Qaé me matan !
In all these examples a word or clause is understood be-
fore the que ; as, mirady in the first ; deseo or quiero^ in the
second ; and reparad or sabed^ in the third.
When the sentence is interrogative or exclamatory, que
denotes desire and expostulation ; as,
¡Qué no lo hubiera yo sabido 1 Ah 1 could I but have known it I
^ Qué siempre has de ser un holga- Are you always to be a sluggard 1
• zánt
In an exclamatory sentence, and when it precedes a noun
and an adjective, or an adjective alone, it is equivalent to
cvdn\ as,
¡Qui hermoso cielo I I What a beautiful sky 1
¡Qy4 horrenda noche I | What a horrible night !
But if in these sentences the substantive comes first, the
particle tan must be put between, because we cannot S9.y :
/ Qué cielo hermoso ! but, / Qué cielo tan hermoso !
In some sentences a determining verb is understood ; as,
Á que si.
Á que no.
Á que lo digo.
Á que lo hago.
I wager it is.
I wager it is not.
I wager I can say it.
I wager I can do it,
in which is understood the present indicative apuesto^ I ven-
ture or wager.
In other sentences it is equivalent to a collective noun or
a plural adjective, and must be followed by the preposition
de\ as,
/ Qué de crimines se vieron I
/ Qué de injusticias no se cometen !
How much crime there was !
How much injustice is there not
committed I
instead of saying : / Cuántos crímenes I ¡ Cuántas injusti-
das I or, / Qué multitud de crímenes 6 injusticias !
Digitized
by Google
326 LESSON LV.
It also denotes surprise, and is used as an interrogative,
and for answering ; as,
/ Qué ! i no vienes t | What I are you not coming t
and is equivalent to an entire proposition answering ; as,
¡ Fulano 1 ^ Q;u^ f (i. c, 4 Qué quie- 1 So and so I What f (i. e., What do
res I I you wish f)
At other times it is employed instead of the adversative
sino, and the copulative y, in sentences where the second
member denotes opposition to what is expressed in the
first; as.
He will not get it, but will remain
with the desire.
I shall go out to walk, for I will not
be always stuck in the house.
No lo conseguirá; qtte se quedará
con el deseo {instead of sino qtte
se quedará, etc.).
Iré á paseo, que no estaré siempre
metido en casa (instead of y no
estaré, etc.).
It is not unfrequently used in the place of a disjunctive
conjunction; as,
Que quiera que no quiera {i. e., l Whether he will or not.
quiera ó no quiera. |
It is sometimes substituted for one or other of the causáis,
pues, porque, pues que; as.
No es hijo mío, que si lo fuera ... I He is no son of mine, for if he
(». 6., porque or pues^ si lo fuera). | were . . .
In this meaning it is more used in poetry than in prose ;
as,
" Que quien se opone al cielo,
Cuanto más alto sube, viene al suelo."
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. j Se habla el castellano en todas las provincias de España ?
En los tribunales, universidades, y oficinas públicas, sí señor ;
pero el pueblo habla diferentes dialectos.
2. ¿ Qué dialectos son estos ? El catalán, que se habla en
Cataluña ; el valenciano, en Valencia ; el gallego, en Galicia : y
el vascuence que se habla en las provincias vascongadas, que son
Álava, Guipúzcoa y Vizcaya ; se cree que este último es lengua
madre y una de las más antiguas de Europa.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LV, 327
3. I En dónde se habla el castellano ? . En las demás provin-
cias, Castilla, Aragón y Andalucía.
4. ¿ Por qué no se habla el español en toda España ? Porque
España estuvo anteriormente dividida en varios reinos ; de estos
algunos fueron conquistados por los Árabes, otros pertenecieron
á Francia, y otros ñnalmente permanecieron independientes por
muchos siglos, hasta que Fernando ó Isabel, echando á los
Árabes de España, reunieron las coronas de Aragón y Castilla.
5. ¿ Son diferentes las costumbres de las provincias de Es-
paña ? Mucho ; no solamente no se habla la misma lengua en
todas, sino que hasta poco tiempo hace cada provincia tenía leyes
diferentes, y aun hoy día tienen pesas, medidas, traje y hasta
caracteres muy distintos.
6. Pues eso debe ser muy incómodo ; en los Estados Unidos
tenemos la ventaja de hablar una misma lengua y tenemos las
mismas pesas, medidas y monedas. — Verdad es, pero también es
cierto que Vds. han hecho todo esto con la experiencia adquirida
en el antiguo mundo.
7. ¿ Y por qué no lo hacen Vds. así en España ? Porque
nosotros tenemos ya establecidas estas cosas de tiempo inmemo-
rial, y no es fácil cambiar costumbres arraigadas por tanto siglos.
8. Cuando Vds. fundan una ciudad en este nuevo mundo,
eligen el terreno necesario, tiran Vds. líneas rectas y trazan
calles y plazas ; para esto no siguen el modelo de una antigua
ciudad de Europa, pero las antiguas ciudades de Europa con sus
imperfecciones é irregularidades les han mostrado á Vds. el
modo de construir ciudades, cuyo solo defecto consiste en su ex-
tremada regularidad.
9. ¿ Y no cree V. que de esta igualdad resultan grandes ven-
tajas ? Sin duda alguna, y sería de desear que en todo el mundo
se hablase la misma lengua, hubiese la misma moneda, pesas y
medidas, y, tanto como el clima, las costumbres y otras circuns-
tancias lo permitiesen, las mismas leyes.
10. También me han dicho que hay en España varias clases
de sociedad ; ¿ no es así ? Sí, señor ; pero eso sucede en todas las
naciones del mundo.
11. No en los Estados Unidos. V. ve que aquí no se dan
títulos de nobleza, no hay diferencia en el traje, y decimos Mr.
Johnson, hablando del presidente, and Mr. Johnson, hablando
de un carnicero, y el mismo Presidente Johnson era antes sastre,
de modo que la igualdad existe en las personas como en las cosas.
Digitized
by Google
328 LESSON LV.
12. No olvide V., sin embargo, que Dios no ha hecho dos
cos£U3 iguales en el mundo, y que los hombres son quizá más
desiguales entre sí que las mismas cosas. — Concedido, y no hay
cosa que májs ridicula me parezca que las lavanderas vestidas de
señoras, y los rowdies del Bowery afectando ser caballeros.
EXERCISE.
1. Did you meet them as you were going in, or as you were
coming out ? As we were entering.
2. What is the. name of the province in Spain in which they
speak the Catalonian language or dialect ? Catalonia.
3. In which province do they speak the Basque? In the
three Basque provinces.
4. And do these dialects differ very materially* from the
Castilian language ? Yes, very materially ; in general they are
more like the French than the Spanish.
5. Have you ever heard the Spanish name for the natives of
Galicia ? Yes, sir, for I am well acquainted with several Gali-
cians living in New York.
6. Can you tell me the weights and measures principally
used in the Peninsula (Peninsula) ? The principal weight, en-
tirely different from all those of the United States, is the arroba.
7. How many Isabellas have there been on the throne of
Spain ? Two ; the first was Isabella the Catholic, and the present
queen is Isabella II.
8. By what event is the reign of Isabella the Catholic dis-
tinguished from all other reigns ? By the discovery of America
by Christopher Columbus (Cristóbal Colón), in the year 1492.
9. Was not there some other very important event that
occurred about the same time ? Ah I yes ; at the commence-
ment of that queen's reign ; you mean, I suppose, the conquest
of the Arabs, and union of the crown of Castile and Aragón.
10. Are railroads very common in the Peninsula ? Not so
common as in other European countries ; but of late years the
spirit of enterprise seems to be revived in Spain, and to the few
which now exist we shall soon see a large number of others
added.
11. Let us sit down and rest for half an hour, for I am very
tired, and you must be so too.
♦ Mucho,
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LYL
329
12. How beautiful the sky looks (is) to night I That is true ;
but how it rained all day I
13. How long has that newspaper been published ? Ten
years, for it was established (founded) in 1856.
LESSON LVI.
Apreciar.
To appreciate.
Apresurar.
To haste.
Favorecer.
To favor.
Invitar.
To invite.
Apreciable.
Appreciable.
Corriente.
Current, fluent.
Estimado.
Esteemed.
Excelentísimo.
Very (or most) excellent
Favorecido.
Favored.
Invariable.
Invariable.
íntimo.
Intimate.
Fino.
Fine.
Servidor.
Servant.
Mercantil.
Mercantile.
Comercio.
Corazón.
Convite.
Formulario.
Respeto.
Sobrescrito.
Corresponsal.
Giro.
Giros.
Commerce, trade.
Heart.
Invitation, feast,
banquet, party.
List of formulas.
Respect
Address.
Correspondent
Draft (money).
Turn.
Manner (of style).
Atención.
Corresponden-
cia.
Esquela.
Fórmula.
Expresión.
Estructura.
Intimidad.
Inicial.
Residencia.
Attention.
Correspondence.
Note.
Form, formula.
Expression.
Structure.
Intimacy.
Initial.
Residence.
COMPOSITION.
Señor D. José Romero.
Muy Sr. mío.
Muy Sr. nuestro.
Muy Sres. míos.
Muy Sres. nuestros.
Mr. Joseph Romero.
Dear Sir, My Dear Sir.
Dear Sir.
Sirs; Gentlemen.
Sirs; Gentlemen.
Digitized
by Google
330
LESSON LVI.
Señora Da. Isabel Jiménez.
Muj Sra. mía.
Muy Sra. nuestra.
sHemos recibido su ap^^*, apreciable
(or su est*», estimada, or su favor*»^
favorecida).
Las de V. del 2 del corriente (or
cor*").
4 del pp*« (próximo pasado).
Se repite á las órdenes de V.
S. S. S.
(Su seguro servidor).
Q. S. M. B.
(Que su mano besa).
M. De.T.
Q. S. P. B.
(To Ictdies, que sus pies besa).
Muy Sr. mío y amigo.
Mi querido amigo.
Mande V. con toda franqueza á su
invariable amigo y S. S.
El Sr. A. De L. presenta (or ofrece)
sus respetos al Sr. D. I. De H., y
le hace saber que.
Sr. D. José Martinez,
Del Comercio de Madrid.
Sres. D. Francisco Sánchez,
Hermanos y Ca., Cádiz.
Señora Da. Teodora Jiménez y
Arteta, Calle Mayor N'. 10,
Zaragoza.
Al Ex"»o. (Excelentísimo),
Sr. D. Juan Valero y Arteta.
B. L. M.,
Al Sr. De V.
s. s. s.,
A. De T.
Mrs. Isabella Jiménez.
My Dear Madam.
Dear Madam.
We have received your favor (or
your esteemed favor).
Your favors of the 2d instant.
4th ult.
Yours very truly, who kisses your
hand, or who kisses your feet.
My Dear Sir and Friend.
My Dear Friend.
Command with freedom your true
friend and faithful servant.
Mr. A. De L. presents his compli-
ments to Mr. I. De H., and begs
to inform him that
Mr. Joseph Martinez,
Merchant, Madrid.
Messrs. Francis Sánchez Bros. & Co.,
Cádiz.
Mrs. Theodora Jiménez y Arteta,
10 Mayor Street,
To His Excellency, John Valero y
Arteta.
(Form of addressing letters, notes,
&c., to persons living in the same
place as the writer.
EXPLANATION.
277. Epistolary Correspondence. — ^We could not, with-
out overstepping the limits of a grammar, give here all the
terms peculiar to mercantile correspondence ; those desirous
to become perfect in that branch may consult the several
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LVL
331
M7 Dear Sir.
Sir; Dear Sir.
Gentlemen.
works written on the subject, among which we particularly
recommend Mr. De Veitelle's " Mercantile Dictionary," pub-
lished by D. Appleton & Co. We merely give here the gen-
eral forms for beginning and ending letters.
In addressing persons of different classes of society, except
those having titles, letters begin as follows :
Muy Señor mío.
Muy Señor nuestro.
Muy Señores míos. )
Muy Señores nuestros. J
And to ladies :
Muy Señora mía. I My Dear Madam.
These expressions are most generally abbreviated thus : —
Muy Sr. mío ; Muy Sr. n^^ ; Muy Sres. míos ; Muy Sres nr^' ;
Muy Sra. mía ; Muy Sra. W«; Muy Sras. n*""*.
In the body of the letter, su wp^^^ (su apreciable), or su
est^ (su estimada), or sufavor^ (su favorecida) — carta^ letter,
being understood — are equivalent to your favor or your es-
teemed letter.
Such expressions as these are translated thus :
Las de V. del 2 del cor*» (corriente) ;
4 del pp*® (próximo pasado) ; 8 de
Mayo, etc.
Yours of the 2d inst. ; 4th ult. ;
8th oí May, &c.
The following forms are employed at the end of letters :
Se repite á las órdenes de Y.,
S. S. S.
(Su seguro serridor).
Q.S.M.B.
(Que su mano besa).
Manden Yms. cuanto gusten á
S. S. S.,
Q. S. M. B.
To a lady, the form is the same, only changing the letter
M. into P., thus :
I am, Dear Sir,
Yours respectfully.
Command at pleasure your faith-
ful servant.
S. S. S.,
Q. S. P. B.
(Que sus pies besa).
Your faithful servant, who kisses
your feet.
Digitized
by Google
332
LESSON LVI.
In a more familiar style :
Muy Sr. mío y amigo.
Mi querido amigo.
Mande Y. con toda franqueza á su
invariable amigo y S. S.
My Dear Sir and Friend.
My Dear Friend.
Command with freedom your true
friend and faithful servant.
Esquelas^ notes, are also written in Spanish, as in English,
in the third person ; as,
Mr. A. De L. presents his respects to
Mr. I. De H., and begs to acquaint
him that, &c.
El Sr. A. De L. presenta {or ofrece)
sus respetos al Sr. Dn. I. De H., y
le hace saber que, &c.
The most usual manner of addressing letters is :
Sr. Dn. José Martínez, del Comercio de Madrid.
Sres. Dn. Fran»® Sanchez, Hermanos y Ca., Cádiz.
Sra. Dfía. Teodora Jiménez y Arteta, Calle Mayor N°. 10.
Al Ex"»» Sr. D. Juan Valero y Arteta, Madrid.
In the city :
TO A GENTLEMAN.
B. L. M.,
Al Sr. D. P.,
s. s. s.,
A. T.
TO A LADY.
B. L. P.,
Á la Sra. Da. F. V.,
s. s. s.,
A.T.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Le gusta á V. escribir cartas ? Me gusta escribir á mis
amigos íntimos ; pero me gusta más recibir cartas que escribir-
las.
2. Yo no sé bien el ceremonial ó formulario de cartas, ¿ quiere
V. hacerme el favor de decirme cómo se principia una carta ?
Con mucho gusto, pregúnteme V. aquello que no sepa.
3. ¿ Cómo se principia una carta dirigida á una persona cual-
quiera con quien no tenemos intimidad ? Si es un caballero,
principiamos con la fórmula de Muy Sr, mío, j si es una señora
con la de Muy Señora mía.
4. ¿ Y para acabar ? Escribiendo á un caballero solemos
decir entre otras muchas expresiones,
"Queda de V.,
s. s. s.,
Q. S. M. B., '
Fulano dé tal."
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LVL 333
5. ¿ Y si es una señora á quien escribimos ? Lo mismo, sólo
cambiamos la inicial de mano, M., en la inicial de piea^ P., así,
" Queda de V.,
s. s. s.,
Q. S. P. B.,
Fulano de tal."
6. i Y cuándo es á un íntimo amigo ? Entonces es más pare-
cido al inglés y principiamos diciendo : " Querido amigo," y para
acabar, cualquiera de las muchas expresiones que se usan, como :
*' Tu amigo que te ama de corazón,
Fulano de tal."
7. i Cómo se escriben las esquelas de invitación, &c., á las
personas que viven en la ciudad ? Se escriben, como en inglés,
en la tercera persona.
8. i Quiere V. escribirme una esquela invitándome á comer ?
Sí, señor, vea V. así : " Los Sres. De V. presentan sus respetos á
los Sres. De T., y les suplican que les hagan el honor de venir á
comer con ellos el martes á las cinco. Lunes, Abril 8 de 1866."
9. Veamos si V. puede responderme en español. — Vea V.,
" Los Sres. De T. se apresurarán á acudir al amable convite de
los Sres. De V., y les presentan sus más ñnas atenciones."
10. Muy bien, muy bien, ahora sólo falta poner la dirección
(el sobre). — Estando las personas á quien me dirijo en la ciudad,
creo que el sobrescrito debe ponerse así :
"B. L.M.
Al Sr. De V.
s. s. s.,
A. De T."
11. i Cree V. que podré ahora traducir una carta mercantil en
inglés ? Sí, señor, y escribirla también, puesto que V. sabe ya la
estructura de la lengua, además de poseer un gran número de
sus giros, idiotismos y palabras más necesarias ; pero todavía
tendrá V. necesidad de acudir al diccionario, porque no es posible
introducir en una gramática todas las palabras y frases que
requiere una correspondencia mercantil.
EXERCISE.
1. Do you ever do any of the correspondence in your office
{escritorio) ? Not often, for I do not know how to write letters
in Spanish, and the greater part of our correspondence is carried
on (llevar) in that language.
Digitized
by Google
334 LESSON LVL
2. You ought, in that case, to make that branch the ob-
ject of particular study for a time. That is what I desire to
do; and I should be obliged if you would give me some
instruction (instruir) in the forms most observed by Spanish
houses.
3. I shall take much pleasure in teaching you all I know
myself ; but as I have never been in business, there are many
points of which I am ignorant (ignorar),
4. What is the first thing to write in a letter ? In Spanish,
as in English, the date is generally the first thing ; it is written
thus : «
CÁDIZ, Dec. 1, 1898.
5. What comes next ? The name and residence of the per-
son to whom we are writing, thus :
Messrs. Lafuentb, Sons & Co., Malaga:
6. So far there is little difference between the two languages.
Very little ; we next go on to say (liiego se pone) :
Gentlemen (or Sir, or My Dear Sir, or Dear Sirs, or, if we write
to a lady, Madam) :
7. Ah! there I observe a decided difference: is that the
form always followed in beginning letters ? For business
letters, yes ; but for familiar correspondence we have many
others ; indeed,* they are usually in conformity with the taste
of the writer.
8. Be good enough to tell me one or two. With the greatest
pleasure: My Dear Friend : My Very Dear Alexander : Esteemed
Friend : My Ever Dear Mother, &c.
9. How do you acknowledge (aciLsar) the receipt of a letter ?
In this manner: I have duly received your esteemed favor (or
letter) of the 17th instant.
10. As for the body of the letter, the form depends entirely
on the nature of the business ; and, in general, all that is reqiiired
is totsay just what is necessary and nothing more, and to avoid
obscurity (obscuridad) in order that our ideas may be completely
understood by our correspondent (corresponsal).
11. The usual ways to close a letter are :
I am, dear sir,
Your most obd't ser't ; or,
I am, sir.
Yours very truly.
* Ul hecho 68.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LYIL
335
12. And for familiar letters :
I am, dear Charles,
Your true friend and loving cousin ; or,
With kindest expressions to your brother,
Believe me to remain your ever faithful and lov-
ing friend.
LESSON LVII.
Abalanzar.
To balance, weigh, throw, thrust
Abalanzarse.
To spring.
Concordar.
To agree.
Cumplir.
To fulfil, to keep, to do (duty).
Conversar.
To converse.
Entregar.
To give, to hand, to deliver.
Escapar.
To escape.
Honrar.
To honor.
Participar.
To participate, to partake.
Regir.
To govern.
Auxiliar.
To help.
Honrado.
Honest, honored.
Plural.
Plural.
Singular.
Singular.
Barón.
Crédito.
Encargo.
Género.
Empleo.
Plato.
Número.
Régimen.
Tema.
Diptongo.
Triptongo.
Varón.
Error.
Barón.
Credit
Commission,
charge, order.
Kind, cloth.
Employment,
office.
Plate, dish.
Number.
Regimen.
Theme, exercise.
Diphthong.
Triphthong.
Man.
Error, mistake.
Alhaja.
Agudeza.
Cocina.
Confianza.
Espada.
Fuga.
G-racia.
Manía.
Promesa.
Pretensión.
Concordancia.
Versión.
Tema.
Jewel.
Wit, witty say-
ing.
Kitchen.
Confidence.
Sword.
Flight
Favor, good '
graces.
Mania.
Promise.
Pretension,
claim.
Concord, agree-
ment.
Version.
Whim.
Digitized
by Google
336
LESSON LYII.
COMPOSITION.
Acordarse con alguno.
Acordarse de alguno.
Caer á la plaza.
Caer en la plaza.
Caer de la gracia de alguno.
Caer en gracia á alguno. .
Contar una cosa.
Contar con una cosa.
Convenir á uno.
Convenir con uno.
Cumplir con uno.
Cumplir por uno.
Dar algo.
Dar con algo.
Dar en una cosa.
Dar por algo.
Dar crédito.
Dar á crédito.
Dar la mano.
Dar de mano.
Dar en manos de.
Dar con el pie.
Dar por el pie.
Dar ñn {or cabo) á una cosa.
Dar fin de una cosa.
Declararse á alguno.
Declararse por alguno.
Dejar hacer algo.
Dejar de hacer algo.
Deshacerse alguna cosa.
Deshacerse de alguna cosa.
Disponer sus alhajas.
Disponer de sus alhajas.
Echar tierra á una cosa.
To agree with any one.
To remember any one.
To front on the square (said of a
house).
To fall in the square.
To fall from any one's favor (or good
graces).
To get into any one's favor (or good
graces).
To relate, to tell a thing.
To count upon a thing.
To suit (to be convenient for) any
one.
To agree with any one.
To do one's duty toward any one.
To act in the place of any one.
To give anything.
To find anything.
To be obstinate.
To give for anything.
To give credit, to believe.
To give on credit.
To give the hand (or to shake
hands).
To lay aside, to abandon.
To fall into the hands of.
To despise, to scorn, to make light oL
To overthrow.
To bring to an end, to finish.
To destroy.
To confide one's secrets to any one.
To side with any one, to declare
one's self in favor of any one.
To let anything be done.
To leave anything undone.
(Speaking of things) to be destroyed.
To dispose of (or part with) any-
thing.
To arrange one's jewelry.
To dispose of one's jewelry.
To forget anything, to cast it into
oblivion.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LYIL
337
Echar un género en tierra.
Entender una cosa.
Entender en una cosa.
Entregarse al dinero.
Entregarse del dinero.
Escapar á buenas.
Escapar de buenas.
Estar en alguna cosa.
Estar sobre alguna cosa.
Estar á todo.
Estar en todo.
•Estar con cuidado. 1
Estar de cuidado.
Estar en si.
Estar sobre si.
Estar con algano.
Estar por alguno.
Estar en hacer alguna cosa.
Estar para hacer alguna cosa.
Estar por hacer alguna cosa.
Estar alguna cosa por hacer.
Gustar un plato.
Gustar de un plato.
Hacer confianza á una persona.
Hacer confianza de una persona.
Hacer una cosa con tiempo.
Hacer una cosa en tiempo.
Hacerse á una cosa.
Hacerse con una cosa.
Hacerse de una cosa.
Hallarse algo.
Hallarse con algo. •
Ir con alguno.
Ir sobre alguno.
Major de edad.
Mayor en edad.
24
To throw anything on the ground
(or down).
To understand a thing.
To be a judge of a thing.
To make a god of one's money.
To receive, to take charge oí money.
To make the best of one's escape.
To make a happy escape.
To be aware of anything.
To push an affair.
To be ready for whatever may come.
To pay attention to every matter.
To be anxious, solicitous.
To be dangerously ill.
To be at himself or herself.
To be proud.
To be with any one, to be of any
one's opinion.
To favor any one.
To be resolved (or disposed) to do
anything.
To be about to do anything.
To be inclined to do something.
To remain to be done.
To taste a dish (of any kind of
food).
To be fond of a dish.
To make a confidant of any one.
To put confidence in any one.
To do a thing at one's leisure (so as
not to be pressed for time).
To do a thing in time, at a suitable
time.
To get used to a thing.
To get (or procure) a thing.
To provide one's self with a thing.
To. find anything.
To be in possession of (or have) any-
thing.
To go with anybody, to be on any
one's side, to listen to any one.
To fall upon (or attack) any one.
To be of age.
To be older.
Digitized
by Google
338
LESSON LVIL
Participar una cosa.
Participar de nna cosa.
Poner una cosa en tierra.
Poner una cosa por tierra.
Poner con cuidado.
Poner en cuidado.
Preguntar á uno.
Preguntar por uno.
Quedar en hacer una cosa.
Quedar una cosa por hacer.
Responder una cosa.
Responder de una cosa.
Saber á cocina.
Saber de cocina.
Salir con una empresa.
Salir de una empresa.
Salir á su padre.
Salir con su padre.
Salir de su padre.
Salir por su padre.
Ser con alguno.
Ser de alguno.
Ser para alguno.
Tener consigo.
Tener para sí.
Tener de hacer algo.
Tener que hacer algo.
Tirar la espada.
Tirar de la espada.
Tratar de vinos.
Tratar en vinos.
Vender al contado.
Vender de contado.
Volver á la razón.
Volver por la razón.
Volver en razón de tal cosa.
To communicate anything (to an-
other).
To participate in anything.
To lay anything on the' ground.
To make little of a thing.
To put (or place, or lay) with care.
To alarm, to give anxiety.
To ask any one (interrogate).
To ask (or inquire) for anything.
To agree to do anything.
To remain to be done (speaking of
things).
To answer something (giving an
answer).
To answer for anything.
To smell (or taste) of the kitchen.
To be skilful in (or to understand)
cooking.
To carry out an enterprise.
To give up an enterprise.
To resemble one's father.
To go out with one's father.
To be released from the wardship of
one's father.
To go bail for oqc's father.
To be of any one's opinion.
To belong to any one's party.
To be for any one (of things).
To have with (or about) one.
To be persuaded.
To be going to do anything.
To have to do anything.
To throw down (or away) one's
sword.
To draw one's sword.
To talk about wines.
To deal in wines.
To sell for cash:
To sell on the instant.
To recover one's reason.
To stand up for reason (or what is
right).
To return for such a reason (or mo-
tive).
Digitized
by Google
LJESSON LVIL 339
EXPLANATION.
278. It is a general custom, amongst authors of Spanish
grammars and Spanish methods, to copy entire the forty
pages devoted by the Spanish Academy in its Grammar to a
list of verbs requiring certain prepositions after them. But
we, notwithstanding our most profound respect for the body
just mentioned, refrain from following in the footsteps of
our predecessors, and that not merely on account of the use-
lessness of the list, but for the more potent reason that we
believe it likely to misguide the student at every step. An
eicample : — Any one not thoroughly acquainted with Span-
ish syntax would, on reading the very first article in the
list above referred to. Abalanzarse á los peligros^ natu-
rally conclude therefrom that the verb abalanzar governs
at all times and under all circumstances the preposition d.
Now that would be absurd, for nothing is more usual than
to see and hear the expressions : — Abalanzarse contra
{or sobre) su enemigo^ abalanzarse con {or sin) juicio^
abalanzarse para sacudir^ de repente, &c. And so of
all the other verbs, each of which may, according to the
idea to be conveyed, govern almost any preposition in the
language.
It would be vain to attempt to give, in a work of the
nature of the present one, a complete set of rules for deter-
mining the various significations of every verb as decided or
modified by the attendant preposition ; but, since much can
be done, even here, toward helping the student through the
most difficult parts, we could not resist giving in this day's
Composition a list composed of those verbs which are at the
same time of most frequent occurrence in general every-day
conversation, and susceptible of the greatest diversity of
meaning, according to the preposition by which they are
followed.
Before dismissing this subject we deem it fitting to re-
mark that a large number of English verbs, to determine the
meaning of which a preposition is indispensable, are ren-
dered in Spanish by a verb alone. For example :
Digitized
by Google
340
LESSON LVIL
Bajar.
To go down.
Entrar.
To come in.
Salir.
To go out.
Subir.
To go up.
Sacar.
To draw out.
Partir.
To set out.
Caer.
To fall down.
This may be the reason why many Spanish grammarians
have thought that in Spanish the same thing doed not exist.
We regret that the dimensions of our book will not permit
us to give a more complete list in corroboration of the fact
that Spanish verbs too enjoy that transition of signification
which is so frequent in English verbs.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ¿ Á qué lado caen las ventanas de su cuarto de V. ? Tres
caen á la plaza de Madison y las otras tres caen á la calle Veinte
y cinco.
2. i Le cae á V. en gracia ese muchachito ? Sí, señor, porque
responde con mucha agudeza.
3. i Puedo contar con su promesa de V. ? V. puede contar
con ella, porque yo cumplo siempre lo que prometo.
4. ¿ Da V. crédito á todo lo que oye ? No, señor, á menos
que conozca las personas.
6. i Da V. la mano á aquel pobre ? Sí, señor, porque aunque
pobre es honrado.
6. ¿ Ha dado V. fin á su tarea ? Todavía no ; pero pronto
daré de mano.
7. Si V. deja esos libros en manos de ese muchacho, pronto
dará fin de ellos. — Así lo creo ; pero es necesario que los niños
tengan algo para entretenerse.
8. ¿ Cómo ha dispuesto Y. de sus alhajas ? Las he guardado,
porque pude encontrar dinero sin venderlas.
9. i Qué se hizo de aquel mal negocio en que se metió su
primo de V. ? Se le ha echado tierra, y nadie se acuerda más
de él.
10. i En qué se ocupa su amigo de V. ? Entiende en vinos ;
pero es cosa que no entiende.
11. é Cómo está su esposa de V. ? Ella está de cuidado, y yo
con cuidado.
12. i Está V. en hacer aquel negocio ? Estoy para hacerla
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LVIL 341
13. i Queda V. en hacer ese encargo por mí ? Quedo en ha-
cerlo y pierda V. cuidado, que no se quedará por hacer.
14. i Es V. mayor de edad ? No, señor, todavía no ; pero soy
mayor en edad con respecto á mis hermanos.
15. No ponga V. eso por tierra. — No lo pongo por tierra, sino
en tierra.
16. i Piensa V. salir con su empresa ? No, señor, pero pienso
salir pronto de ella.
17. ¿ Tiró ese homhre de la espada ? Tiró de la espada,
porque la sacó ; pero el miedo le hizo emprender la fuga y la tiró.
18. Don Juan, é le gusta á V. vender al nado ? No, señor, me
gusta vender al contado y de contado.
19. i Volvió D. Francisco por la razón ? No, señor, D.Francisco
no ha vuelto ala razón, y por consiguiente no volvió por la razón.
20. ¿ Se acuerda ese homhre con su esposa ? No, señor, no se
acuerdan.
21. i Se acuerda V. de lo que le dije á V. ayer ? No, señor, lo
he olvidado.
22. i Conviene V. ahora conmigo en que el español es más
fácil que el inglés ? Convengo con V* en ello.
23. i Le conviene á V. hacer eso ? No, señor, no me conviene.
24. i Dio V. por fin con lo que buscaba ? No, señor, todavía
no lo he encontrado.
25. Este hombre ha dado en la tema de querer aprender sin
estudiar ; ¿ no le parece á V. que es una pretensión muy ridicula ?
Bidiculísima.
EXERCISE.
1. Has the Baron given up his project? He told me he
would like to give it up, if he could do so honorably.
2. I understand that he is an honorable man ? Yes, and he
is therefore respected by all who know him.
3. Has your brother come to an agreement with that dealer
for the purchase of the horse about which he was speaking ? It
appears not, and that, on the contrary, he desires to get rid of the
one he has.
4. Did you inform the merchant of the order you received
from the West ? Not yet ; but I intend to let him know of it
this very day.
5. Does that woman understand cooking ? She says she does ;
and she handed me a letter from a lady with whom she lived two
years.
Digitized
by Google
342
LESSON LVIIL
6. Did tlie captain draw his sword as soon as he heard his
antagonist's reply ? He had already drawn it ; but when he
heard the reply he threw down his sword, and ran and gave his
hand to the man whom, a few moments before, he was resolved
to kill.
7. Has your brother sent you the books he promised you ?
No, and that need not surprise you, for I can never rely (count)
on him for anything.
8. That is to say, he never keeps his promise ? That is pre-,
cisely what I mean to say.
9. Do past participles always agree in gender and number
with the subject of the verb ? Yes, always, except when gov-
erned by the auxiliary to have.
10. Are there not some participles, past and present, that do
not retain the regimen of the verbs to which they belong ? —
There are very many ; and, if you like, I shall mention some of
them. — Be good enough to do so.
11. I hope you have provided yourself with everything ne-
cessary for your journey ? Everything, except one or two arti-
cles which I have been unable to find.
12. How do you advise me to arrange (dispose) all these books ?
I have only one counsel to give you in the matter, and that is, to
dispose of them as quickly as you can.
13. Would you like to taste this dish ? No, thank you, I am
not fond of it.
14. Is he not of your opinion ? Not at all ; he always goes
(sides) with his father.
LESSON
LVIII.
Notar.
To note, to observe, to perceive.
Cazar.
To hunt, to chase.
Chancear.
To jest.
Combinar.
To combine.
Concertar.
To concert, to agree.
Concluir.
To conclude, to finish.
Enfriarse.
To cool, to get (or grow) cold.
Encargar.
To charge, to commission, to
order.
Flotar.
To float.
Improvisar.
To improvise.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LVIIL
343
Inspirar
To inspire.
Eepartir
To divide.
Saltar.
To leap, to jump.
Trinchar.
To carve, to cut.
Cobrar.
Brindar.
To collect. To toast.
Á lo lejos.
At a distance,
in the distance.
A cuestas.
On one's back.
on one's shoulder.
Á la española.
In the Spanish fashion.
Atrás.
Backward, ago, behind.
Blanco.
White.
Bonito.
Pretty.
Durable
duradero.
Durable.
Elocuente.
Eloquent
Galante,
Gallant.
Bello sexo.
Fair sex.
MagníficD.
Magnificent
Negro.
Black.
Eodeada
Surrounded.
Vacía
Empty.
Abanica
Fan.
Ala.
Wing.
Apetito.
Appetite.
Botella.
Bottle.
Aficionado.
Amateur, one
Caza.
Hunt
fond of.
Chanza.
Jest
Baúl.
Trunk.
Cima.
Top, summit
Buey.
Ox.
Colina.
Hill.
Brindis.
Toast.
Dama.
Lady.
Carro.
Car, cart.
Imaginación.
Imagination.
Canasto.
Basket.
Llave, clave.
Key.t
Conductor.
Conductor.
Milla.
Mile.
Pretexto.
Pretext.
Pechuga.
Breast (of fowl).
Peñasco.
Eock, cliff.
Fuerza.
Force, strength.
Embarcadero.
Ferry.
Suerte.
Luck, sort
Piropos (pl).
Sweet things.*
Tarea.
Task.
Pasaje*
Fare.
Vocal.
Vowel.
Sitio.
Place, spot.
Voz.
Voice, word.
Salón.
Saloon.
Sombra.
Shade, shadow.
Vocabulario.
Vocabulary.
Elocuencia.
Eloquence.
* Piropos^ sweet words, honeyed sayings.
t Llave, key to a door ; clave^ key to a book, or to an arch, mysterious
writings, or in a figurative sense.
Digitized
by Google
344
LESSON LVIIL
COMPOSITION.
Quedamos en que saldríamos á las
cinco.
Este canasto es superior á mis fuer-
zas.
Á la salad de las señoras.
Decir piropos á las señoritas.
Sírvase Y. pagar al conductor.
¡ Mire y. qué gracia t
i Qué tal le gusta á V. t
Pongamos los canastos á la som-
bra.
La subida de la colina con un gran
canasto á cuestas, me ha abierto el
apetito.
Me alegro de ver á V.
Se alegró de la noticia.
Lo siento mucho.
Me pesa mucho saberlo.
¿Cuántas personas caben en esta
iglesia!
No cabíamos todos en el salón.
i Puede caber en tu imaginación tal
cosat
Cabe mucho en este baúL
No caber de pies.
Á mí me cupo en suerte venir á la
América.
No caber de gozo.
We agreed to set out (or start) at
five o'clock.
This basket is more than I am able
to manage.
To the health of the ladies.
To say sweet things to the young
ladies.
Please pay the conductor.
Only think I
How do you like it f
Let us set the baskets in the shade.
Coming up the hill with a large bas-
ket on my back has sharpened my
appetite.
I am glad to see you.
He was rejoiced at the news.
I am very sorry for it (♦. e., I regret
it much).
I am very sorry to know it (». e., it
grieves me much to know it).
How many persons does this church
hold!
The saloon could not hold us all.
Can such « thing enter your imagi-
nation!
This trunk holds a good deal.
To have no room to stand.
It was my lot to come to America.
To be overjoyed.
EXPLANATION.
IDIOMATIC USE OP CERTAIN VERBS.
279. Alegrabse. — The verbs to he glad and to he rejoiced
at are translated by the reflexive verb alegrarse ; as,
Me alegro de ver á V. 1 1 am glad to see you.
Se alegró de la noticia. | He was rejoiced at the news.
280. Sentir and pesar. — To he sorry and to grieve are
translated by these verbs ; as,
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LVIIL 345
Lo siento mucho. I am very sorry for it {i, e., I greatly
regret it).
Me pesa mucho saberlo. I am very sorry to know it {%. e., it
grieves me much to know it).
281. Cabee, to be capable of containing, &c. — This verb
is employed in different manners in Spanish ; as,
How many persons does this church
hold (or is it capable of contain-
ing)f»
The saloon could not hold us all.
Can such a thing enter your imag-
ination t
This trunk holds a great deal.
To have no room to stand.
It was my lot to come to America.
¿Cuántas personas ec^en en esta
iglesia!
No eoMamoa todos en el salón.
I Puede caber en tu imaginación tal
cosat
Cabe mucho en este baúL
Ko caber de pies.
A mí me cupo en suerte venir á la
América.
No caber en sí.
No ccUter de gozo.
To be well satisfied with one's self.
To be overjoyed.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. Buenos días, señores, ¿ conque ya todos están listos ? Pues
no habíamos de estar, si son ya las seis y quedamos en que sal-
dríamos á las cinco.
2. Habríamos estado aquí de los primeros, si no hubiera sido
que, después de haber andado dos ó tres manzanas, echó de ver
mi esposa que había olvidado la llave del cuarto, el paraguas, el
abanico, y yo no sé cuántas otras cosas más ; pero en fin ya esta-
mos aquí, ¿ cuándo partimos ? Estamos esperando el carro que
va al embarcadero de la calle Treinta y tres.
3. Señoras, estén Vds. prontas, porque veo venir el carro. —
Don Martín, ayúdeme V. á llevar este canasto, porque es superior
á mis fuerzas. — Llame V. á Don Pepito, que no hace más que
decir piropos á las señoritas, porque yo tengo ya dos paraguas y
tres niños de que cuidar.
4. Don Pepe, V. que no tiene niños, ni canastos, etc., sírvase
V. pagar al conductor. — (¡ El diantre del hombre I ahora me pesa
DO haber tomado un canasto.)
5. I El pasaje caballeros I ¿ Cuántos somos ? uno, dos, tres,
cuatro, caballeros ; una, dos, tres, cuatro, siete señoras, esto es :
once personas mayores y catorce niños.
* Literally, how many persons Jiold themaelvea in this church t
Digitized
by Google
346 LESSON LVIIL
6. Papá, I está muy lejos el sitio adonde vamos á pasar el
día ? No, Luisita, solamente unas diez millas.
7. ¿ De este lado ó del otro del río ? Del otro, desde aquí lo
puedes ver.
8. i No ves allá á lo lejos, en la cima de aquella colina, una
casa blanca en donde flota la bandera americana ? Sí, señor, es
muy bonito sitio y debe tener muy buenas vistas.
9. Cuidado con los niños al saltar en tierra, no se caiga
alguno al agua. — ¿ Están todos fuera ? ¿ No se ha olvidado
nada ? — No, señor. — Pues en marcha.
10. Don Pepito, tome V. ese canasto, y cuidado no le deje caer
y rompa las botellas que contiene. — i Hombre, por Dios I con el
pretexto de que venía con las manos vacías, me ha hecho V.
pagar los carros y el vaporcito por veinte y tres personas, y ahora
me quiere V. hacer cargar con el canasto del vino.
11. Vamos, Don Pepito, llévelo V. ahora hasta la cima de
aquella colina, que á la vuelta á casa yo me encargo de llevarlo.
— i Mire V. qué gracia I á la vuelta 1 qué es lo que quedará
de una docena de botellas, después de beber veinte y tres per-
sonas.
12. Nada ; el que no ayude á llevar los canastos no partici-
para» de su contenido. — Señores, repartamos la tarea ; que los hom-
bres lleven los canastos, las mamas á los niños, los niños los
paraguas, y las señoritas á Don Pepito.
13. Da. Delfina i qué tal le gusta á V. este sitio ? ] Oh I es
delicioso ; I qué vistas tan bonitas I
14. Pongamos los canastos á la sombra de ese hermoso árbol.
— Sí, y pongámonos nosotros también á la sombra, que al sol
hace calorcito.
15. i No le parece á V., Don Enrique, que es tiempo de poner
la mesa ? — Así me parece, porque la subida de la colina con un
gran canasto á cuestas me ha abierto el apetito.
16. Señores, la comida está en la mesa.— Señoras, i qué es lo
que Vds. dicen ? i en la mesa I i Ah I sí, ya vemos, sobre un gran
peñasco á la sombra de aquel árbol i magníñca idea I
17. Don Pepito, traiga V. un par de sillas más, que faltan para
dos señoras. Allá voy, i cáspita con las sillitas 1 cada una pesa
cien libras ; pero, eso sí, son durables, no haya miedo de que se
rompan. — Tomen Vds. asiento, señoras.
18. Pase V., Don Martín, primero. No, señor, después de V.
— Señores sin cumplimientos que se enfría la comida.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LVIIL 347
19. i Quién quiere sopa ? ¡ Hombre, sopa I yo, yo, sírvame V.
un plato, Don Enrique.
20. Poco á poco, Don Pepito, en el campo, no tenemos sopa.
— Pues yo creí que V. me la ofrecía. — Yo preguntó por saber
quién era aficionado á la sopa.
21. Señor Don Pedro ¿ quiere V. hacerme el favor de trinchar
ese pollo ? Con mucho gusto.
22. Da. Margarita ¿ voy á mandarle á V. un pedazo de pe-
chuga ? No, señor, gracias, mándeme V. el ala ó la pierna, que
me gusta más.
23. Don Pepito, im brindis, vamos un brindis.— Excúsenme
Vds., señores, yo no sé hacer, y menos improvisar brindis.
24. Pero hombre, ¡ eso dice.V. que es tan galante y elocuente
con las damas I ¿ No le inspira á V. algo el bello sexo de que
se halla V. rodeno ? Pues bien, á la salud de las señoras.— Y
é por qué no ?
EXERCISE.
1. Has not the baker come yet ? You are in a jesting mood
(humor) this morning ; he came long before you were up.
2. Never mind; I have change enough to pay for all. —
You are too late, I have already paid ; the conductor has
no time to wait half an hour collecting the fare of each passen-
ger.
3. Your appetite seems to be a little better to-day than usual ;
how do you account for that ? Really you praise my appetite
beyond what it deserves ; I am happy to say that it is at all
times in excellent condition.
4. Do you not find it good exercise to climb to the top of the
hill with that heavy basket on your arm ? The fact is that I
shall have to give it to some one else for a while, for my strength
is not equal to the task.
5. I wonder whom you can give it to ; you see that we have
each of us something to carry. Well, in that case, I must change
with some one that has a lighter burden {cargo) than my own.
6. Does not John intend to become a soldier? He does,
though entirely contrary to the will of his father, who set his
face against it in the most determined manner.
7. How many trunks is each passenger {posajero) permitted
to keep with him in his berth {camarote) ? Only one, supposed
to contain the articles he may need to have at hand during the
Digitized
by Google
348
LUSSON LIX.
8. Did you ever go on a lion-hunt while you were in South
Africa ? Several times, and I can assure you it is a most inter-
esting and exciting scene.
9. Did you go entirely for pleasure ? No, I managed to com-
bine business and pleasure, otherwise I should probably never
have seen that country, for you know that such a voyage as that
costs a great deal of money.
10. Did you drink many toasts during the dinner ? A good
many, and the ñrst one I proposed was to the fair sex.
11. Nothing surprising in that ; I know it would scarcely be
possible to surpass you in gallantry. You are flattering me now,
for the ladies on every hand agree in calling you the most gal-
lant young gentleman in the country.
12. Just see if your eloquence will not succeed in persuading
your young friend to come with us to-morrow. With all my
heart; but imfortunately he does not speak French, and you
know how much my eloquence loses in English.
13. Does the art of pleasing depend on what we do and what
we say? It does not, in my opinion, depend so much on
what we do and say as on how we do things and how we say
them.
14. Is it not surprising that your sister has not yet come ? I
believe she has gone to see her young Spanish friend (/ew.),
although she left me but half an hour ago, under pretext of hav-
ing to write a letter.
15. Do you generally dine in the Spanish fashion at home ?
We generally dine in the French fashion, notwithstanding the
fact that we are all very fond of the Spanish way of cooking.
LESSON LIX.
Amenazar.
To menace.
Cojear.
To be lame, to limp.
Colgar.
To hang.
Corregir.
To correct
Cubrir.
To cover.
Cubrirse.
To put on one's hat, to cover
one's self.
Descubrir.
To discover, to uncover.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LIX.
349
Descubrirse.
Despedir.
Definir.
Durar.
Bodar.
Prestar.
Vencer.
To take off one^s hat, to make
one's self discovered.
To send away, to put away, to
give up.
To define.
To last
To roll, to run on wheels.
To lend.
To conquer.
Cosade.
About
Capaz.
Capable, able.
Condicional.
Conditional.
Cariredondo.
Eoundfaced.
Casero.
Household, family, domestic.
Compañero.
Companion.
Claro.
Clear.
Copulativo.
Copulative.
Generoso.
Generous.
Defectivo.
Defective.
Libre.
Free, unembarrassed.
Vulgar.
Vulgar, common, usual.
Vistoso.
Showy.
Asesino.
Aumento.
Cerrojo.
Campo.
Corredor.
Dedo.
Diálogo.
Dolor de cos-
tado.
Deseo.
Descuido.
Grito.
Gemido.
Pagaré.
Assassin.
Increase, aug-
mentation.
Bolt
Field, country.
Broker.
Finger.
Dialogue.
Pain in the side.
Desire, wish.
Carelessness.
Shout
Groan, moan.
Promissory
note.
Barba.
Carcajada.
Decena.
Definición.
Evidencia.
Espalda.
Gana.
Hoja.
Lotería
Llave.
Pena.
Pera.
Pobreza.
Pascua.
Rodilla.
Vuelta.
Beard, chin.
Biu*st of laughter.
About ten.
Definition.
Evidence.
Back.
Desire, mind.
Leaf.
Lottery.
Key.
Difficulty, pain.
Pear.
Poverty.
Easter.
Knee.
Turn, change.
Digitized
by Google
360
LESSON LIX.
Presidio.
State prison.
Posición.
Position.
Peral.
Pear-tree.
Excusa.
Excuse, apology.
Pésame.
Condolence.
Premio.
Prize, premium,
reward.
Salto.
Jump, spring.
Semblante.
Look.
Trago.
Draught, drink.
COMPOSITION.
Su pagaré de V. cae el mes que
viene.
Le ha caído la lotería.
Este edificio cae al (or hacia el)
Norte.
Mis yentanas caen á la mano dere-
cha.
Este vestido te cae bien.
No cayó en la cuenta.
Ya caigo en ello.
Estar al caer.
Caer de pies, de rodillas.
Lo doy por hecho.
Lo dieron por libre.
Me doy por vencido.
Le dio un dolor de costado.
La lectura de ese libro te dará ganas
de dormir.
Al fin dio en la dificultad.
Dar los buenos días.
Dar las pascuas.
Dar el pésame.
Dar la enhorabuena.
Dar gritos.
Dar gemidos.
Di6 una carcajada.
Dar á comprender.
Darse á conocer.
Dar una vuelta.
Dar pena.
Dar gusto.
Dar gana.
Your note falls due next month.
He has won a prize in the lottery.
This building looks toward the
North.
My windows are on the right hand.
This dress fits her welL
He did not see the drift (of what
was said).
Ah, now I see ! ,
To be about to take place.
To fall on one's feet, on one's knees.
I take for granted it is done.
They let him go free.
I give up.
A pain struck him in the side.
Reading this book will put you
asleep (or make you sleep).
Finally he fell upon the difficulty.
To wish one a good day.
To wish a happy Easter.
To express condolence.
To congratulate.
To give shouts.
To utter groans.
He burst out laughing.
To give to understand.
To make one's self known.
To take a turn, to go round.
To cause displeasure.
To give pleasure.
To have a mind; to take a notion.
Digitized
by Google
LUSSON LIX.
351
Dar saltos.
Dio que decir.
f^sto no dice bien con aquello.
El blanco dice bien con el azul.
Su vestido dice su pobreza.
El semblante de Juan dice bien su
mal genio.
Este peral echa muchas peras.
Esta planta no ha echado hojas.
He echado un trago.
Eche V. la llave á la puerta.
Echar pie á tierra.
Echar el cerrojo.
Echarlo á juego {qr chanza).
Hoy echan la comedia nueva.
Ha echado coche.
Echar á presidio.
Echar por los campos.
Echaron á correr.
Lo echó todo á perder.
Echar á rodar.
No echo de ver este defecto.
% Echa V. de menos algo t
Ko, señor ; echo de menos á alguien.
Me eché á dormir.
Se echó á reir.
Se echó á corredor.
Lo puso de patitas eh la calle.
To jump about.
He left room for a talk.
This is not in strict accordance with
that.
White goes very well with blue.
Her dress declares her poverty.
John's bad temper is pictured on
his countenance.
This pear-tree bears a great many
pears.
This plant has not had any leaves.
I have taken a drink.
Lock the door.
To dismount.
To draw the bolt.
To take it in play (or in jest).
The new play comes out to-night.
He has bought a carriage.
To send to prison.
To set out across the fields.
They set out running.
He spoiled all.
To set rolling.
I do not perceive the defect.
Do you miss anything!
No, sir ; I miss some one.
I went asleep.
He began to laugh..
He became a broker.
He threw him into the street.
EXPLANATION.
The verbs caer^ to fall ; dar^ to give ; decir ^ to tell,
or to say ; echar ^ to throw ; differ from the English in meaning
as conveyed by the sentences which are given in the Compo-
sition, and to which we refer without putting them here, in
order to avoid repetition.
There they are to be found, with their English transla-
tions, which is the only explanation of which they admit.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. Don Gonzalo, ¿ le ha caído á V. la lotería ? No, señor ;
pero mi pagaré ha caído.
Digitized
by Google
352 LESSON LIX.
2. Luisita, i quién ba hecho ese vestido que te cae tan bien ?
Mi mamá lo cortó y yo lo cosL
3. ¿ No sabe V. por qué me hace ahora tantos cumplimientos
Don Enrique ? No, señor, no sé qué motivo tenga para ser ahora
más político con V. que lo ha sido hasta aqu¿
4. i No sabe V. que me ha caído el premio de los cien mil
pesos en la lotería de la Habana ? Sí, señor ; ya me lo ha dicho
V. antes.
5. Pues bien, ¿ no cae V. ahora en la cuenta ? i Ha I ya caigo
en ello. Don Enrique quiere pedirle á V. dinero prestado.
6. ¿ Han dado las doce ? Están al caer.
7. ¿ Dieron garrote á los asesinos ? No, señor, al fin los
dieron por libres, porque no había evidencia suficiente para sen-
tenciarlos.
8. ¿ Qué ha tenido su hermano de V. que no lo he visto por
tanto tiempo ? Le dio un dolor de costado y ha tenido que guaiv
dar cama por una semana.
9. é Á que no adivina V. lo que acabo de hacer ? Segura-
mente que no lo adivinaré, porque Y. es capaz de hacer muchas
cosas buenas y malas.
10. i Se da V. por vencido ? Me doy. — ^Pues vengo de echar
un trago.
11. i Qué comedia echan hoy ? Hoy dan la tragedia de " Me-
dea," en donde representa la Señora Ristori ; i irá V. ?
12. Siendo en italiano no iré, porque no comprendo el ita-
liano y me daría ganas de dormir.
13. Sr. D. Alejandro, vengo á darle á V. los buenos días. —
Téngalos V. muy buenos.
14. i No me quiere V. dar alguna otra cosa ? Sí, señor, le doy
á V. la enhorabuena por el aumento que ha tenido V. en su
familia. — Viva V. mil años.
15. Todo eso es muy bueno, D. Pepito ; pero sea V. generoso
y déme V. alguna cosita más. — Hombre, si V. no se da á com-
prender yo no sé qué más darle á V. i Ha I sí, ya caigo I que
estamos en tiempo de. . . . Doy á V. felices pascuas.
16. Dale, Dale, si no es eso, yo hablo del dinero que presté á
V. hace más de un año.—j Ha ! Señor D. Alejandro, no crea V.
que yo lo haya echado en saco roto.
17. Pues bien ; ¿ por qué no me lo da V. ? i Por qué ! hombre,
ahora ha dado V. en la dificultad, y esta es que yo no tengo
dinero, y por consiguiente no puedo darlo.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LIX, 353
18. Entonces, i qué es lo que V. puede dar ? i O ! en cuanto á
eso yo puedo dar muchas cosas.
19. I Ha ! me alegro mucho, veamos lo que V. puede dar. — En
primer lugar puedo dar gemidos.
20. I Puf! {pshaw). — También puedo dar gritos.
21. I Dale ! — Puedo dar, . . . que decir.
2!¡í, No lo dudo. — Puedo dar un pésame.
23. I Dios me libre ! — Puedo dar saltos.
24. Vaya acabe V., hombre, acabé V. — Puedo dar á com-
prender.
25. Sí, eso sí, demasiado comprendo.-— Puedo darme á conocer.
26. Ya, ya, conozco de qué pie cojea V. — Puedo dar una
vuelta.
27. Pues vuélvase V., por donde ha venido y nunca dé V.
más vueltas por esta casa. — Y todavía más, pueda dar una carca-
jada. ,
28. i Juan ! Juan I echa á ese hombre de casa, y después echa
la llave y el cerrojo á la puerta, i Haya picaro ! lo he de echar á
un presidio I
29. ¿ Has echado á ese hombre á la calle ? Sí, señor, ya lo
puse de patitas en la calle.
30. Y l qué dijo ? Primero se echo á reír, yo le amenacé que
lo echaría á rodar y entonces echo á correr.
3L El diantre del hombre siempre está pidiendo dinero pres-
tado y sobre no pagarlo se viene á reir de uno en su barbas. —
Señor, ¿ manda V. alguna otra cosa ? No, te puedes ir, yo voy á
echarme á dormir, ese bribón me ha dado un gran dolor de
cabeza.
EXERCISE.
1. Is there anything in the papers this morning relative to
the trial of the murderer of Smith ? I understand that his trial
will not take place before a month from this time.
2. Why did you not bring your friend with you ? He is not
able to walk very far to-day, owing to a pain in his side, which
has troubled him for the last three days.
3. Did you tell the servant to draw the bolt of the door ?
No, but I told him to lock the door.
4. Who is that I hear groaning ? You hear no one groan-
ing ; it is some one shouting in the distance.
5. How did your cousin lose his situation ? He owes that
misfortune entirely to his own carelessness.
Digitized
by Google
354
LESSON LX.
6. Charles, are you not going to say good morning to that
gentleman ? I need not say good morning to him now, for I have
already wished him a happy Easter.
7. Did that merchant pay his correspondent at Malaga after
all ? He did not pay him ; hut he gave him a note at three
months.
8. What do you understand hy parlor plays (household com-
edies) in Spain ? They are plays represented hy private indi-
viduals * sometimes in private houses, from which circumstance
they take their name.
9. Do you know that round-faced little man who is sitting
next to your uncle ? That is one of the principal actors (actor)
in the parlor plays given at Mr. Gutierrez's.
10. What became of the offender ? The evidence not being
sufficient to prove the crime of which he was accused f he was let
go ; otherwise he would have been sent to state prison.
11. Did they refuse to give him the things he wanted on
credit ? Of course they did, because no one can rely on him nor
give credit to anything he says.
12. Will that young man probably obtain the employment
for which he has applied ? Most probably he will, because he
has had the good fortune to get into the president's favor.
13. How I do you not attend your classes this week ? No, I
am not very well ; and so a friend of mine was good enough to
offer to act in my place.
14. Was the error corrected before the letter was dispatched t
No, it was not discovered in time to be corrected.
LESSON LX.
Decidir.
Ejecutar.
Ejercer.
Ensuciar.
Enemistar.
Escuchar.
Exagerar.
Exhibir.
To decide.
To execute.
To exercise.
To dirty, to soil.
To put at enmity.
To listen to, to hearken to.
To exaggerate.
To exhibit.
* Aficionados,
t Acusar,
Digitized
by Google
LESSON" LX.
355
Extrañar.
Enfriarse.
Encargar.
Exclamar.
Exceptuar.
Esforzar.
Estrechar.
Sospechar.
Tardar.
Atolladero.
Camino.
Astrónomo.
Cólera.
Cometa.
Cofre.
Cajón.
Capricho.
Cuello.
Cargo.
Exterior.
Extranjero.
Embarcadero.
To wonder at, to find strange.
To grow cold, to get (become)
cold.
To commission, to order, to
give charge.
To exclaim.
To except
To endeavor, to make effort
To press.
To suspect.
To delay.
Extra.
Extra.
Empero.
But
Elíptico.
Elliptical.
Agrio.
Sour.
Estrecho.
Close, narrow.
Preciso.
Essential, indispensable, pre-
cise.
Elocuente.
Eloquent.
Tonto.
Foolish, stupid.
Travieso.
Mischievous.
Entrambos.
Both.
Entretanto.
In the mean time.
Excepto.
Except
Difficulty.
Road, way.
Astronomer.
Cholera.
Comet.
Chest
Drawer, box.
Caprice.
Neck.
Cargo, charge.
Exterior, outside.
Foreigner.
Landing.
Casaca.
Colocación.
Civilización.
Cólera.
Corte.
Cometa.
Cita.
Charla.
Claridad.
Compañía.
Caja.
Cartilla.
Coat, dress-coat
Situation.
Civilization.
Anger.
Court
Kite.
Appointment
Chat
Clearness.
Company.
Box, case, cash
{commercial).
Primer.
Digitized
by Google
356
LESSON LX,
Espejo.
Mirror, looking-
Calentura
Fever.
glass.
Casualidad.
Chance.
Estrecho.
Strait
Cantidad.
Quantity.
Elemento.
Element.
Capa.
Cloak.
Gobernador.
Governor.
Cara. )
Haz. \
Face.
Grado.
Grade, degree.
Horno.
Oven.
Carga.
Charge (of a gun,
Luto.
Mourning.
&c.).
Litro.
Litre.*
Cuchara.
Spoon.
Matemático.
Mathematician.
Culpa.
Fault, blame.
Tonel.
Cask.
Criatura.
Creature, infant
Termómetro.
Thermometer.
Costa.
Cost, coast.
Ferrocarril.
Railroad.
Disculpa.
Apology.
Fruto.
Fruit (result).
Estación.
Season, station.
Fondo.
Bottom.
Existencia.
Existence.
Fluido.
Fluid.
Fragata.
Frigate.
Máscara.
Mask.
Tontera.
Foolish action.
Pretensión.
Pretension,
claim.
Hierba.
Grass.
COMPO
SITION.
Hoy entra la primavera.
Spring begins to-day.
Mañana entra el mes de Octubre.
The month of October commences
to-morrow.
Entra en el número de los sabios.
He is of the number of the learned.
Entró á reinar
á los quince años.
He began to reign at fifteen years
of age.
Este tonel hace cien litros.
This cask holds 100 litres.
No le hago tan tonto.
I do not take him for such a fool.
Yo le hacía más rico.
I took him to be richer.
Haz por yenir.
Try to come.
Hace de gobernador.
He is acting as
governor.
Esa pobre muchacha está haciendo
That poor girl]
s acting the part of a
de madre á sus hermanos.
mother to her brothers and sisters.
Á eso Yoy.
That is the point I am coming to.
Voy de paseo.
I am going for
pleasure.
Van de máscara.
They are going in masks.
Va de luto.
He is in mourning.
* Equal to 1.056 American quarts.
Digitized
by Google
LESSOJíí^ LX.
357
Le va en ello la vida.
Vengo en ello.
4 Cuánto me lleva Y. por esto f
Estos dos amigos se llevan muy
bien.
No nos llevamos bien.
Este camino lleva á Madrid.
Le llevo dos afios j medio.
Me llevé chasco.
Lleva una casaca á la francesa.
Se hizo á la vela.
Manda que nos traigan el almuerzo.
Haré que nos lo traigan.
4 Hace V. teñir su vestido de azul f
No, señor, lo he mandado teñir de
verde.
Saldrá buen matemático.
Salió muy travieso.
Ya he salido de todos mis granos.
Me salió una buena colocación.
Este negocio me ha salido bien.
Le salió mal su empresa.
Este niño ha salido á su padre.
Salió de la regla.
Pronto saldré de hijo de familia.
Esta capa me sale en cincuenta
pesos.
Se salió con su pretensión.
Sirve al rey.
No sirve para nada.
Sírvase Y. admitir mis disculpas.
Él tarda mucho en decidir.
I Cuánto tarda en responder!
¡Adiós! Yolveré á ver á Y., y le
volveré á hablar de eso.
Este vino se vuelve agrio.
Se volverá bueno con el tiempo.
Este melón sabe á melocotón.
His life is at stake.
I agree to that.
How much will you charge me for
this!
These two friends agree very well
together.
We do not agree well together.
This road leads to Madrid.
I am two years and a half older
than he.
I was disappointed.
He wears a coat made in the French
fashion.
He set sail.
Order the breakfast to be served.
I shall have it brought to us.
Are you getting your dress dyed
bluef
No, sir, I have ordered it dyed green.
He will turn out (to be) a good
mathematician.
He (or she — the child) turned out
very naughty.
I have gotten rid of all my grain.
A good situation turned up for me.
This business has turned out well
for me.
His undertaking turned out badly.
This child resembles his father.
He departed from the rule.
I shall soon be of age.
This cloak cost me fifty dollars.
He obtained what he desired.
He serves the king.
It is good for nothing.
Please accept my apology.
He is slow in deciding.
How long he is in answering !
Good-by ! I shall see you again, and
talk more to you on the subject.
This wine is turning sour.
It will become good again in time.
This melon has the taste of a peach.
Digitized
by Google
358 LESSON LX.
Este TÍno haele á vinagre.
D. Juan hace un gran papel en la
corte.
Napoleón III. hace un gran papel en
la política del mundo.
This wine smells of vinegar.
John makes a great noise at court.
Napoleon III. plays a great part in
the politics of the world.
EXPLANATION.
283. In the Composition of this lesson we give the prin-
cipal idioms with the verbs entrar ^ to go (or come) in ; hacer,
to do, to make ; tV, to go ; llevar, to take, to charge ; mandar,
hacer, in the sense of to order, to cause to be done ; oler á, to
smell of ; and saber á, to taste of ; salir, servir, tardar and
volver.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. i Cuándo entra la primavera ? Debo confesar francamente
que no sé el día preciso en que entra y sale cada estación.
2. Entonces V. no entra en el número de los sabios, puesto
que no sabe cuándo estamos en invierno y cuando en Verano. —
Poco á poco, señor Don Pedro, eso sería hacerme entrar en el
número de los idiotas.
3. i Pues no acaba V. de decirlo ? Yo acabo de decir que no
sé el día preciso en que entra cada estación ; pero cuando veo
crecer la hierba y las hojas de los árboles, y abrirse las flores,
sospecho que estamos en la primavera.
4. I Ha I V. sospecha ! Vamos, ya es algo. — Sí, señor, y del
mismo modo, cuando veo el termómetro en la sombra, que marca
98**, creo adivinar que estoy, una de dos, ó en un homo ó en
Nueva York en la estación del verano.
5. Vamos, yo le hacía á V. más ignorante de lo que en efecto
es ; i y cómo adivina V., ó sospecha, que se encuentra V. en el
otoño ? Cuantos los melocotones se acaban y las hojas caen.
6. I Bien I bien ! i y el invierno ? Cuando por la mañana no
puedo lavarme por hallar que se ha helado el agua en la pa-
langana.
7. Ya veo que es V. im sabio perfecto. Veamos en historia
i á qué edad entró á reinar el Rey Pepino ? — ^¡ Cáspita I Señor
Don Pedro 1 es más fácil criticar que ejecutar, y más fácil hacer
preguntas que responderlas, y si no, respóndame V. que la echa
de sabio.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LX. 359
8. ¿ Cuántos litros hace ese tonel ? i Hombre I yo ¿ qué he de
entender de medir toneles ?
9. Pues cambiaré de materia, i quién hace de gobernador en
Manila ? i Y á mí qué me importa I
10. I Vaya ! ese es un buen modo de salir del atolladero. — No,
señor, sírvase V. recibir mis disculpas, tengo que irme ahora,
pero volveré á ver á V., y volveremos á tratar de esa materia.
Adiós, señores.
11. i Qué le parece á V., Don Enrique, de ese caballero ? Me
parece que este joven saldrá buen matemático, porque ha salido
en todo á su padre.
12. i Sabe V. si salió bien ó mal de su empresa ? Es un nego-
cio que le ha salido muy bien.
13. i Se lleva bien Luisa con sus hermanos ? Sí, señor, y aun-
que no les lleva más de tres ó cuatro años, les sirve de madre.
14. i Cuanto le cuesta á V. esa capa ? Me sale en unos cin-
cuenta pesos.
15. i Cuánto tardará la fragata en hacerse á la vela ? No sé,
creo que el capitán es hombre que tarda en decidirse.
16. i De qué color hace V. teñir su vestido ? Lo mandé teñir
de amarillo.
17. Don Manuel, mande V. que nos suban el almuerzo. — Haré
que nos lo traigan.
EXERCISK
1. When does Spring begin ? It begins in March and ends
in May.
2. Has your young friend passed his examination yet ? The
examinations have not taken place ; but when they do, he will
prove to be the best Spanish student in the country.
3. In what month does the cold weather generally commence
in the north of Spain ? Winter usually sets in about the middle
of November.
4. How much does this cask hold ? It holds from 100 to 120
litres.
5. How soon do you set out for Europe ? As soon as the fine
weather begins.
6. Are you going on business, or for pleasure ? For pleasure
only.
7. How are they going to the ball ? They are going in masks.
8. How much did your tailor charge you for that coat ? It
cost me forty-five dollars.
Digitized
by Google
360
LESSON LXI.
9. What do you take to be my cousin's age ? I should take
hhn to be about the same age as his friend.
10. You had better guess again. I give it up.
11. How old is he, then ? He is two years and four months
older than his friend.
12. Do you know whether the pianist's brother succeeded in
obtaining the position he applied for ? He did not ; but an ex-
cellent situation turned up for him a short time after.
13. How long will it take for you to dye this dress for zne ?
About a week.
14. What color do you wish it to be dyed ? I wish to have it
dyed blue.
15. Do you think this boy will turn out to be as good a musi-
cian as his father ? I have not the least doubt of it, for he resem-
bles him in every respect {en todo),
16. Have the goodness to accept my apology for not coming
yesterday as I had promised. Certainly, sir ; I know very well
that you have a great deal of business to arrange.
17. For whom is Mr. Terrero in mourning ? For his uncle,
who died about a year ago in Manila.
LESSON LXI.
Felicitar.
To felicitate, to congratulate.
Fiar.
To trust
Ignorar.
To be ignorant of, imaware of •
Lastimar.
To hurt, to wound.
Improvisar.
To improvise, to do (anything)
offhand.
Inquietar.
To make uneasy, to cause anxi-
ety.
Intentar.
To attempt, to intend.
Interrogar.
To interrogate, to question.
Invertir.
To invert, to invest
Interesar.
To interest, to be of interest
Invitar.
To invite.
Imprimir.
To print
Obligar.
To force, to oblige.
Eehusar.
To refuse.
Lisonjear.
To flatter.
Llevar.
To carry, to take, to charge.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LXL
361
Descuidado.
Careless.
-
Final.
. Final.
Ignorante.
Ignorant
Impersonal.
ImpersonaL
Increíble.
Incredible.
Indefinido.
Indefinite.
Inexplicable.
Inexplicable.
Ingenioso.
Ingenious.
Inmediato.
Immediate, close by, next
Inquieto.
Uneasy, restless.
Justo.
Just, right
Ultimo.
Last
Lisonjero.
Flattering.
Especiero.
Spicer, grocer.
Loco.
Mad.
Lento.
Slow.
Solemne.
Solemn, cruel.
De Zeca en Meca.
To and fro.
Á ciegas.
With one's eyes shut
Ágatas.
On all-fours.
En el ínterin.
In the mean time.
Ampo de la nie- Whiteness of
Anchuras (J.ph)
. Ease.
ve. snow.
Cuba.
Cask, toper,
Asno. Ass.
drunkard.
Descuido. Carelessness.
Cara.
Face.
Hueso. Bone.
Cartilla.
Primer.
Golpe. Blow, stroke.
Calabaza.
Pumpkin, re-
Dares 7 tomares. Dispute.
fusal.
índice. Index.
Imaginación
Imagination.
Ingenio. Genius.
Intención.
Intention.
Insecto. Insect
Interrogación.
Interroga-
Instinto. Instinct
tion.
Instnmiento. Instrument
Inversión.
Inversion.
Interrogante. Question, note
Justicia.
Justice.
of interro-
Llave.
Key.
gation.
Lluvia.
Eain.
Italiano. Italian.
Lista.
List
Arco iris. Eainbow.
Lisonja.
Flattery.
Galicismo. Gallicism.
Luna.
Moon.
Digitized
by Google
362
LESSON LXL
Hierro.
Iron.
Luz.
Light.
Juego.
Play.
Latitud.
Latitude.
Loco.
Madman.
Longitud.
Longitude.
Lugar.
Place.
Legua.
League.
Latín.
Latin.
Letra.
Letter.
Sonido. )
Son. )
Sound.
Limosna.
Alms.
Limpieza.
Cleanness.
Pico.
Beak.
Línea.
Line.
Levita
Levite.
Levita.
Frock-coat
Uso.
Use, custom.
Kama.
Branch.
Objeto.
Object.
Teja.
Tile.
Oído
Ear, hearing.
Ocasión.
Occasion.
Olfato.
Smell.
COMPO
Vergüenza.
3ITI0N.
Shame.
Á más tardar.
Á media palabra.
Á medida de sus deseos.
Á sus anchuras.
Al descuido y con cuidado.
Abrir el ojo.
Allá se las haya.
Andar á ciegas.
Andar á gatas.
Á todo correr.
Vaya V. con Dios.
Él ya de capa caída.
Él ya de Zeca en Meca.
Ir de puntillas.
Andar en dares y tomares.
Andarse por las ramas.
De tejas abajo.
Asir la ocasión por los cabellos.
Bailar al son que se toca.
Beber los aires or los yientos.
Beber como una cuba.
Blanco como el ampo de la nieve.
Bocado sin hueso.
Burla burlando.
Buscar cinco pies al gato.
No caber de gozo.
No caber en sí.
At latest.
At the slightest hint.
According to one's wishes.
At one's ease.
Studiously careless.
To be upon the alert.
Let him look to that.
To grope in the dark.
To creep on all-fours.
With all speed.
Go in peace.
He is crestfallen.
He goes roving about, to and fro.
To go on tiptoe.
To quarrel.
Not to come to the point.
Humanly speaking.
To take time by the forelock.
To go with the stream.
To desire anxiously.
To drink like a fish.
White as the driven snow.
An employment without labor; a
sinecure.
Between joke and earnest.
To pick a quarrel.
To be overjoyed.
To be bursting with pride.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LXI.
363
No cabe en él.
Caer de su asno.
Caérsele á uno la cara de vergüenza.
Callar el pico.
Chanzas aparte.
Con mil amores.
Con su pan se lo coma.
Conque, hasta la vista.
Cosa que no está en la cartilla.
Bar á alguno con las puertas en la
cara.
Dar á luz.
Dar por supuesto, or por sentado.
Dar chasco.
Dar el sí.
Dar golpe una cosa.
Dar calabazas.
Ko se le da nada.
He is not capable of such a thing.
To acknowledge one's fault.
To blush with shame.
To hold one's tongue.
Jesting aside.
Most willingly.
That is his own business.
I hope we may soon meet again.
Something out of the common way.
To shut the door in one's face.
To publish ; to give birth to.
To take for granted.
To disappoint.
To consent.
To strike one with admiration, or
astonishment (said of things).
To give the mitten.
He cares nothing about it.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ¿ Le salen á V. las cosas á medida de sus deseos ? Chan-
zas aparte, Don Juan, V. sabe bien que de tejas abajo eso nunca
sucede.
2. Sí, pero como V. baila al son que se toca y sabe asir la
ocasión por los cabellos, siempre está á sus anchuras y tiene
siempre algún bocado sin hueso. — Amigo, caiga V. de su asno y
confiese de buena fe que si anda de capa caida, es porque va
siempre de Zeca en Meca, y porque bebe más que una cuba.
3. Adiós, Don Pedro, me voy, porque no quiero buscar cinco
pies al gato. — ^Vaya V. con Dios, Don Juan.
4. Don Pedro, me parece que V. ha dado con la puerta en la
cara á Don Juan. — ^No, señor, Don Enrique, á otro se le caería la
cara de vergüenza, pero á él no se le da nada, y pronto lo volverá
V. á ver por acá.
5. Entonces él no entiende á media palabra. — A más tardar
lo verá V. aquí otra vez dentro de media hora.
6. El pobre hombre anda á ciegas, y si no abre el ojo, irá á
parar á un hospital.-— Con su pan se lo coma, y allá se las haya ;
yo lo siento solamente por su niña, que es una señorita perfecta.
7. Me han dicho que V. quería casarse con ella, ¿ es verdad,
Don Enrique ? — Sí, señor, y lo hubiera hecho con mil amores,
porque además de ser muy amable ó instruida, es muy bonita,
Digitized
by Google
364 LUSSON LXL
tiene ojos negros muy hermosos y es tan blanca como el ampo
de la nieve.
8. Pues i por qué no se casó Y. con ella ? Por una pequeña
dificultad.
9. Quizá Y. se andaría por las ramas y no sabría asir la oca-
sión por los cabellos. — No, señor, nada de eso, antes al contrario
yo lo daba todo por supuesto, porque V. sabe que soy rico, y creí
que la niña me daría el sí sin hacerse de rogar.
JO. i Pues qué, no se lo dio ? No, señor, no me dio el sí, pero
me dio calabazas.
11. I Miren la rapazuela I i y Y. qué hizo ? Yo que bebía los
vientos por ella, y creía que sus calabazas eran cosa que no es-
taban en la cartilla, recurrí á su padre, creyendo que él no me
negaría la mano de su hija.
12. i Y bien y qué ? Que me llevé un solemne chasco, el
padre me rehusó la mano de su hija ni más ni menos que ella lo
había hecho.
13. i Pero qué razón le dio á Y. para ello ? Me dijo que su
hija, aunque pobre, era hija de un caballero y que ni ella querría
ni él la obligaría jamás á casarse con un especiero común é igno-
rante ; que el dinero era una gran cosa, pero que no lo compraba
todo.
14. i Y V. qué dijo ? Yo, 'por no andar en dares y tomares y
dimes y diretes, me callé el pico y salí de su casa á todo correr.
EXERCISE.
1. Would you not be more likely to obtain what you wish,
if you came to the point at once ? Perhaps I should ; but the
matter is an important one, and I considered it necessary to
enter into some explanation concerning it.
2. Do you think he would understand me ? Of course he
would, at the slightest hint
3. How did your cousin Charles succeed in that affair?
Everything turned out according to his wishes.
4. How soon do you suppose this book will be published ? I
hope it will be published in a very short time ; I know they are
working at it with all possible speed.
6. Have you ever seen a more active man than that mer-
chant ? Never ; and I have never seen a less active man than
his brother ; he always ñoats with the stream, and troubles him-
self about nothing.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LXL 365
.6. Ought you not to have shown that letter to your brother ?
I should have done so, of course, but I took for granted that he
had already heard the news.
7. You had better tell your friend to look out, and not get
into a quarrel with that man. That is his own business ; let him
look to it himself.
8. Is it possible that he could be cajwible of such an action ?
Yes, but the worst of all is, that he is not ashamed to acknowl-
edge it to every one he meets.
9. When is Peter to be married ? I cannot say certainly ; but
I suppose in about a month at the latest.
10. I don't know any one who has a better position than your
uncle ; plenty of money and scarcely anything to do. That is a
fact, his position is a real sinecure.
11. What has occurred to that gentleman ? he looks quite
crestfallen. Do not be astonished at that; he has been unfor-
tunate in business, and has lost almost all he possessed in the
world.
12. Are you trying to pick a quarrel with me ? No, I
assure you, jesting aside, that the matter stands exactly as
I say.
13. How was he received by the lady's father ? He was not
received at all, they shut the door in his face.
14. If you desire so anxiouly to see him, why do you not go
to his house ? I cannot make up my mind {decidirme) to do
that ; you know he is bursting with pride, and he would very
probably refuse to receive me.
15. Well, I hope we may soon meet again ; present my re-
spects to your family. With the greatest pleasure.— Please not
to forget the letter.
16. I care nothing about that; all I desire to know is if
he will be here in time. I think you may rely on his being
punctual.
17. I have been told that your brother was about to be mar-
ried to Miss Ramirez ; is it true ? I really cannot say how the
matter will turn out ; so far everything seems to be going ac-
cording to the desire of both parties.
Digitized
by Google
366
LESSON LXIL
LESSON LXII.
Aplicar.
Cebarse.
Echar á perder.
Errar.
Ocurrir.
Murmurar.
Madrugar.
Medir.
Montar.
Mudar.
Nacer.
Sazonar.
Reunirse.
Modificar.
To apply.
To feed, to gloat
To spoil.
To err, to miss.
To occur.
To murmur, to grumble^.
To rise early.
To measure.
To mount, to amount
To change, to move.
To be bom, to spring up, to
proceed.
To season, to ripen.
To unite, to collect together, to
assemble.
To modify.
Desprevenido.
Unawares, unprepared.
Intachable.
Unimpeachable, unquestion-
able.
Maldito.
Perverse, confounded.
Mayúscula.
Capital (letter).
Minúscula.
Small Getter).
Numeral.
Numeral.
Noble.
Noble.
Nominativo.
Nominative.
Neutro.
Neuter.
Masculino.
Masculine.
Objetivo.
Objective.
Quieto.
Quiet, at rest
Cumpleaños.
Menoscabo.
Pique.
Rayo.
Socio.
Sabor.
Menudo.
Birthday.
Detriment, lessen-
ing.
Point, verge.
Thunderbolt
Associate, partner.
Taste, savor.
Change, small
change.
Apariencia.
Bravata.
Botica.
Fiesta.
Centella.
Siesta.
Suerte.
Appearance.
Bravado.
Drug store.
Feast, holiday.
Spark, flash.
Siesta (afternoon
nap).
Luck, fortune,
chance.
Digitized
by Google
LUSSON LXIL
367
Meridiano.
Meridian.
Murmuración.
Murmurings.
Metal.
Metal.
Malicia.
Malice.
Miembro.
Member.
Mente.
Mind.
Mineral
Mineral.
Muestra.
Sample, sign.
Momento.
Moment.
Manera.
Manner.
Mozo.
Youth, waiter.
Manteca, or man
- Butter.
Macho.
Male.
tequilla.
Maestro.
Master, teacher.
Medida.
Measure.
Manuscrito.
Manuscript
Olla podrida.
Sort of mixed
Mar.
Sea.
dish.
Olor.
Smell, odor.
Ostra.
Oyster.
Olivar.
Olive ground.
Negación.
Negation.
Ostión. (See
Oyster.
Mar.
Sea.
Ostra.)
Negativa.
Negative.
Palo.
Wood, stick.
Nota.
Note.
Polvo.
Dust, powder.
Zaga.
Rear-guard.
Paño.
Cloth.
Parabién.
Felicitation, con-
gratulation.
COMPO
SITION.
De buenas á primeras.
Without ceremonj
r.
De buena fe.
In good faith.
De mala íe.
Deceitfully.
De intento.
On purpose.
De oídas.
From hearsay.
Decir por decir
To talk for the sake of talking.
Dejar á uno colgado.
To frustrate one's
hopes.
Dejar á uno en
la calle.
To strip one of his all.
Dejar atrás los vientos.
To go quicker than the wind.
Dejar correr.
To go with the world.
Dejar el campo
libre.
To yield to one's competitors.
Dejar en blanco.
To leave blank.
Dejarse alguna cosa en el tintero.
To forget to say something.
Dia de cumpleaños.
Birthday.
Saber algo de buena tinta.
To know anything on good au-
thority.
De día en día.
From day to day.
De un día para
otro.
From one day to another.
De hoy en ocho días.
This day week.
Un día si y otro no.
Every other day.
Hoy día.
Now-a-days.
Dicho y hecho.
No sooner said than done.
Digitized
by Google
368
LESSON LXIL
Dormir á pierna suelta.
Dormir la siesta.
Echar á perder algo.
Echar bravatas.
Echar rayos 7 centellas.
Echar la culpa á alguno.
Echar suertes.
Empefiarse en hacer algo.
Empeñarse por alguno.
En un abrir y cerrar de ojos.
Encenderse en cólera.
Errar el tiro.
Erre que erre.
Escarmentar en cabeza agena.
Estar á pique de perderse.
Estar de casa.
Estar de fiesta.
Estar en ascuas.
Estar en lo que se dice.
Estar á sus anchuras.
Estar sobre sL
Estar desprevenido.
Estar mano sobre mano.
I Estás en tus cinco sentidos?
To sleep at one's ease.
To take an afternoon nap.
To spoil anything.
To brag, to boast.
To be furious, enraged.
To throw the blame on any one.
To cast lots.
To insist upon doing anything.
To interest one's self for any one.
In the twinkling of an eye, in a trice.
To ñy into a passion.
To miss one's aim.
Obstinately.
To take warning by others' misfor-
tunes.
To be within an ace of being lost.
To be in dishabille.
To be merry.
To be upon thorns.
To comprehend what is said.
To be at one's ease.
To be on one's guard.
To be off one's guard.
To be idle.
Are you in your senses?
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. Señores, dejen Vds. el campo libre, que aquí viene Don
Pepito echando bravatas y rayos y centellas. — ^Bien venido, Don
Pepito, ¿ qué trae V. de nuevo, que parece estar fuera de sí ?
2. No, señor, yo estoy en mis cinco sentidos, pero hay gentes
de mala fe que hablan por hablar y se ocupan de criticar al pró-^
jimo. — i Y eso á qué viene ?
3. Yo no lo digo por V., Don Enrique, pero V. sabe que hay
muchos desocupados que se vienen á su botica de V. y critican á
todo el mundo. — i Vamos, vamos ! Don Pepito, que á V. también
le ^sta un poquito la murmuración.
4. Ciertamente, porque si no i qué sería de la conversación
sin un poquito de crítica que la sazone y le dé interés ? Muy
bien, pero entonces no eche V. la culpa á nadie de hacer lo mis-
mo que V. hace.
5. Sí, pero yo hablo sin malicia, de buena fe y digo lo que
me ocurre por decirlo, nada más. — Así pueden decir los demás.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LXIL 369
6. Sí, pero yo no soy como Don Carlos, que viene aquí de
día en día, y de la mañana á la tarde hablando más que un saca-
muelas y sin dejar á nadie hueso sano. — Sí, pues apliqúese V. el
cuento.
7. No, señor, yo no soy ni tan hablador ni tan murmurador
como ninguno de los que se reúnen aquí, y si no, observe V. un
poquito á cada uno de ellos, Don Gonzalo, por ejemplo, ¿ ha ve-
nido hoy ? No, señor, no ha venido, ni vendrá, porque es el día
de su cumpleaños y lo celebra con su familia en el campo, por
consiguiente puede V. cebarse en él á su sabor.
8. Don Gonzalo es hombre de buenos sentimientos y hombre
honrado, no haya miedo que yo diga nada en menoscabo suyo,
pero tiene un maldito genio que le hace echar á perder toda con-
versación.
9. Pues yo no había observado eso. — i Cómo hombre ! pues si
viene aquí un día sí y otro no, á criticará los que se reúnen en la
botica de la esquina, y los días que no viene aquí va á la botica
de la esquina á criticarnos á nosotros.
10. i Y qué es lo que le hace echar á perder las conversaciones
como decía V. pocos minutos ha ? Que en un abrir y cerrar de
ojos se enciende en cólera.
11. Bien, por Don Gonzalo, ¿ y nuestro vecino, Don Alberto,
ese sí que es intachable, no le parece á V. ? i Ho I en efecto, es un
excelente hombre, lástima qué errase el tiro.
12. i Qué quiere V. decir con eso de errar el tiro ? Hablo con
respecto á sus negocios.
13. Y bien ¿ qué le sucedió ? Que escogió malos socios, y le
han dejado en la calle.
14. Pero eso no puede ser ; Don Alberto goza de muy buena
reputación, V. habla de oídaQ. — No, señor, que lo sé de buena tin-
ta, y hoy día está á pique de perderse.
15. Pues él parece dormir á pierna suelta. — Está obligado á
hacerlo así por guardar las apariencias.
16. ¿ No se ha dejado V. algo en el tintero ? Sin duda que me
he dejado, pero es tíirde y voy á dormir la siesta.
EXERCISE.
1. Is the custom of taking an afternoon nap as common in
Spain now-a-days as in former times ? It is quite as common
now-a-days as it ever was, not only in Spain, but in almost every
country of Europe.
26
Digitized
by Google
370 LUSSON LXIL
2. Are you perfectly certain that he acted with sincerity in
that matter ? I am quite sure, as I know it on good authority.
3. Who told you that young man had acted deceitfully to-
ward your cousin ? I do not care to say much in the matter,
especially as all I know respecting it I only know from hearsay.
4. Can you tell me how that merchantes enterprise turned
out ? Very badly ; for shortly after he had engaged in it, he
heard of his brother's misfortune, which frustrated all his hopes.
5. Did Alexander manage to pay his debts after all ? No,
he did not; and although his intentions were strictly honor-
able, his creditors {acreedores) would wait no longer, and they
stripped him of all he possessed in the world.
6. What date do you wish me to put here ? Just leave a
blank, and Charles will put in the date before he sends off the
letter.
7. When do you think they will be able to give me some of
the papers ? Probably by this day week.
8. What did he say when he saw how the tailor had spoiled
his coat ? Fortunately for the latter he was in a merry mood,
and did not fly into a passion as he usually does when anything
occurs to displease him.
9. Are you in your senses, my dear friend ? are you not aware
that such a thing is impossible ?
10. Did he shut the door on purpose ? Yes, but he sent his
servant to take us into another room, for he was in dishabille, and
did not wish to be seen until he had dressed.
11. How often do you go to dine at your uncle's ? I generally
go every other day.
12. Have your friends returned yet from the country ? No,
they have been putting it off * from day to day for some time,
and I shall not be in the least astonished if they do not return
before November.
13. Why did you not bring your sister with you ? I did all I
possibly could to persuade her to come, but she insisted on stay-
ing at home.
14. How did they decide who should go first ? They cast
lots for it.
♦ Posponer,
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LXIIL
371
LESSON LXIII.
Retirar.
Pegar.
Pescar.
Posponer.
Preceder.
Prometer.
Razonar.
Sesfriarse.
Regalar.
En frente.
Frente por frente.
De hito en hito.
De gradó.
Por fas ó por nefas.
j
To retire, to wühdraw.
To stick, to adhere, to beat
To fish.
To postpone.
To precede.
To promise.
To reason.
To take cold.
To regale, to present
In front, opposite.
Fixedly, with open eyes.
By fair means.
Justly or unjustly.
I Cascaras I
Dear me I Oh I
Afortunado.
Fortunate.
Ageno.
Foreign, belonging to others.
Formal.
Formal, steady, respectable.
Pasivo.
Passive.
Perezoso.
Lazy.
Personal.
Personal.
Posesivo.
Possessive.
Potencial.
Potential.
Preciso.
Precise, necessary, obligatory.
Preliminar.
Preliminary.
Pretérito.
Preterit
Puntual.
Punctual.
Partitivo.
Partitive.
Radical.
Radical.
Raro.
Rare, curious.
Recíproco.
Reciprocal.
Reñexivo.
Reflective.
Rubio.
Fair (of the hair and complex-
ion).
Ruin
Mean.
Alarde.
Bulto.
Ganso.
Boast
Bulk, bundle.
Goose.
Bulla.
Baza.
Noise, uproar.
Trick (card-
playing).
Digiti:
zed by Google
372
LESSON LXIIL
Bledo.
Straw.
Huéspeda.
Hostess.
Diente.
Tooth.
Puntuación.
Punctuation.
Desafío.
Challenge, duel.
Puntualidad.
Punctuality.
Espadachín.
Bully.
Paciencia.
Patience.
Estribo.
Stirrup.
Paja.
Straw.
Mequetrefe
Trifling fellow,
Pólvora.
Gunpowder.
meddler.
Perseverancia.
Perseverance.
Pasaje.
Passage.
Porción.
Portion, num-
Pedazo.
Piece.
ber.
Perro.
Dog.
Prenda.
Good quality,
Plazo.
Term.
jewel.
Plomo.
Lead.
Pronunciación.
Pronunciation.
Por qué
Reason why.
Propiedad.
Propriety,
Público.
Public.
property.
Principio.
Principle, begin-
Pulgada.
Inch.
ning.
Raíz.
Root.
Rasgo.
Trait.
Rebanada.
Slice.
Recado.
Message, errand.
Reforma.
Reform, refor-
Recibo.
Receipt
mation.
Rector.
Rector, director.
Regla.
Rule.
Refrán.
Proverb.
Reina.
Queen.
Relámpago.
Flash of light-
Repetición.
Repetition, re-
ning.
hearsal.
Relojero.
Watchmaker.
Resolución.
Resolution.
Regalo.
Present.
Rosa.
Rose.
Reposo.
Rest, repose.
Rutina.
Routine.
Resfriado.
Cold.
Suma.
Sum.
Reumatismo.
Rheumatism.
Sutileza.
Subtilty, fine-
Revés.
Wrong side.
ness.
back.
Salida.
Departure.
Rincón.
Comer.
Sílaba.
Syllable.
Ruiseñor.
Nightingale.
Soledad.
Solitude.
Sustancia.
Substance.
Subida.
Rising ground,
going up.
Suegra.
Mother-in-law.
COMPOÍ
3ITI0N.
Faltar á su palabra.
To break one's word.
Guardarse de s
klguna cosa.
To take care not to do a thing (not
to attempt to do a thing).
Digitized
by Google
LüSSOír LXIIL
373
Hablar á bulto.
Hablar á tontas y á locas.
Hablar al aire.
Hablar al oído.
Hablar al alma.
Hablar entre dientes.
Hablar por boca de ganso.
Hacer á uno perder los estribos.
Hacer de las suyas.
Hacer alarde de.
Hacer la cuenta sin la huéspeda.^
Hacer caso de.
Haberla {pr habérselas) con alguno.
Irse de la memoria.
írsele á uno la cabeza.
Van cien duros á que es cierto.
Llerar á mal.
Mal de su grado.
Mal que le pese.
Manos á la obra.
Meter bulla.
Meterse á caballero.
Meterse á sabio.
Meterse con alguno.
Meterse en camisa de once varas.
Meterse en todo.
Meterse en vidas agenas.
Mirar de hito en hito.
Mostrar las suelas de los zapatos.
Nacer de pies.
Nada se me da de ello.
No dejar meter baza.
No cabe más.
No estar para fiestas.
No le pesa de haber nacido.
No se me da un bledo.
No tener arte ni parte en alguna
cosa.
Perder cuidado.
Por ce ó por be.
Por fas ó nefas.
No llegará la sangre al río.
To speak at random.
To speak without rhyme or reason.
To talk vaguely.
To whisper into one's ear.
To speak one's mind.
To mutter.
To echo what another has said.
To make one lose his temper.
To show off one's tricks.
To boast of.
To reckon without the host.
To pay attention (or respect) to.
To dispute (or contend) with any one.
To escape one's memory.
To lose one's reason.
I wager á hundred dollars that it is
true.
To take anything amiss.
Unwillingly.
In spite of him.
To set about a work.
To make a noise, a bustle.
To assume the fine gentleman.
To affect learning and knowledge.
To pick a quarrel with any one.
To interfere in other people's busi-
To meddle in everything.
To dive into other people's affairs.
To look steadfastly at.
To take to one's heels.
To be bom to good luck.
I care nothing about it.
Not to allow one to slip in a word.
Nothing more can be desired.
To be out of temper.
He has no mean opinion of himself.
I do not care a straw.
To have no hand in anything.
Not to fear, to make one's self easy.
Some way or other.
Right or wrong.
There is nothing to be feared.
Digitized
by Google
374 LESSON LXIIL
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. D. Pepito ha faltado á su palabra, ó ¿ cree V. qué vendrá
todavía ? i Qué ha de venir ! Si él habla siempre á tontas y
alocas.
2. Pues yo creí que prometió formalmente venir hoy. — Don
Pepito no habla nunca formalmente.
3. i De qué manera habla entonces ? De muchas, él habla al
aire, á bulto, al oído, entre dientes, por boca de ganso; pero
nunca habla al alma.
4. Esto hará perder á cualquiera los estribos. — ^A esto le llama
él, haciendo alarde, hacer de las suyas.
5. Sí ; pero él se las habrá conmigo, porque ha hecho la cuenta
sin la huéspeda.— D. Luis, no haga V. caso, es un mequetrefe, si
Vds. quieren yo iré á s\\ casa y le haré venir mal de su grado, ó
mejor dicho, mal que le pese.
6. No, señor, no vaya V., es un hombre que se mete en todo.
— Y en eso tiene V. razón, porque él se mete con todo el mundo.
7. Y hasta se mete á sabio y á caballero. — Lo peor es que
mete mucha bulla.
8. Vamos, señores, ¿ en qué más se mete el pobre D. Pepito ? *
Se mete en camisa de once varas, en vidas agenas, &;c.
9. Pero, señores,, no olviden Vds. que si por ce ó por be,
lo llegase á saber, D. Pepito, y por fas ó por nefas hubiese un
desafío, no lo olviden Vds., vuelvo á repetir que D. Pepito es un
gran espadachín. ¡ Yaya ! pierda V. cuidado, que no llegará la
sangre al río.
10. I Don Pepito espadachín ! i Cascaras ! — ^Van cien pesos á
que si le miro de hito en hito, muestra las suelas de los zapatos.
11. V. no debe llevarlo á mal, aunque Don Pepito sea tan su
amigo ; pero es muy hablador y no deja á nadie meter baza. — Yo
no tengo arte ni parte en ello y no se me da un bledo.
12. ¿ Se acordó V. de decir aquello á su vecino el Sr. Foster ?
No, señor, se me fué de la memoria.
13. i Es un joven muy afortunado ? Sí, señor, ha nacido de
pies ; pero sé que no le pesa de haber nacido.
14. V. no debe criticarlo, porque ahora no está para fiestas. —
A mí no se me da un bledo de que esté ó no de mal humor.
15. Hable V. bajo ó hábleme V. al oído, porque veo al Señor
Foster allí enfrente y V. debe guardarse de que le oiga hablar de
ese modo, porque lo llevaría á mal. — Pierda V. cuidado que
no llegará la sangre al río.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LXIIL 376
EXERCISE.
1. Does that man always keep his word ? I have never
known him to break his word on a single occasion.
2. Peter is very sorry that Alexander went away without him,
and I do not know what he would have done if John had left him.
3. John took good care not to start at the same time as his
elder brother, for he well knew that he would have been obliged
to show him everything worth seeing in the city.
4. He very often talks for hours together without rhyme or
reason, to the very great annoyance of those who have to listen
to him.
5. Believe me, it is no proof of talent to talk away at random
for an hour at a time, without saying anything that could be
called either new or agreeable.
6. I cannot endure a man who is so ignorant as to come and
whisper something in my ear while I am engaged in conversa-
tion with another.
7. Not one of those ideas is his own, he only echoes what he
has heard said by others.
8. I should advise you to pay no attention to anything he
tells you.
9. Judging by his manner of speaking, one would say that
he had lost his reason.
10. I am willing to wager fifty dollars that not one word of
all you have read and heard on that subject {sohre esa materia)
is true.
11. I suppose you have already heard of my good fortune ?
I have ; and I need not tell you how glad I was to know that you
had succeeded.
12. Did you hear all the president said ? Everything ; he
spoke very loud, so that all those that were present might not
lose a word.
13. Although he affects great learning and knowledge, I have
had occasion to know that he is a very ignorant man.
14. I know very well that he has no mean opinion of himself ;
but, after all, his greatest fault is to dive a little too deeply into
other people's affairs.
Digitized
by Google
376
LESSON LXIV.
LESSON LXIV.
Alumbrar.
Soltar.
Suponer.
Situar.
Significar.
Saludar.
Sobrar.
Sonreirse.
Soplar.
Sonrojarse.
Sufrir.
Suplicar.
Suspirar.
Rasgar.
Eebajar.
Rebanar.
Recitar.
Recomendar.
Referir.
Regular.
Remendar.
Remediar.
Repasar.
Representar.
Resolver.
Zafar.
De gorra.
De perilla.
Cascos á la gineta.
A raya.
Á solas.
Siquiera.
En suma.
Santo.
Sutil.
To light, shine.
To loose, to let go.
To suppose.
To situate.
To signify.
To salute, to bow to.
To remain over, to be too
much, too many.
To smile.
To blow, to prompt
To blush.
To suffer, to bear.
To supplicate, to beseech.
To sigh, to long after.
Totear.
To lower.
To cut in slices.
To recite.
To recommend.
To refer, to tell, to relate.
To regulate.
To mend.
To remedy, to help.
To look over (a lesson, &c.).
To represent, to lay before.
To resolve.
To disembarrass.
Sponging, at the exi)ense of
others.
To the purpose, at the proper
time.
On one's high horse.
Within bounds, at bay.
All alone.
Even, only.
In a word, in fine.
Holy, saintly.
Subtile, fine.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LXIY.
377
Silencioso.
Silent
Sordo.
Deaf.
. Sustantivo.
Substantive.
Sucio.
Dirty, filthy.
Atrevimien- Assurance, dar-
Blanca.
Mite.
to. ing.
Bula.
Bull (of the
Cuerpo. Body.
Pope).
Inconve- Objection.
Flaqueza.
Weakness.
niente.
Gorra.
Cap, lady's
Esfuerzo. Effort, endeavor.
bonnet
Descaro. Bareíacedness.
Calzas ifem.ph]
). Breeches.
Fondos (pL). Funds.
Pieza.
Piece.
Matrimonio. Matrimony.
Trastienda.
Back shop.
Modismo. Idiom.
Tienda.
Store, shop.
Provecho. Profit, benefit
Tijeras.
Scissors.
Yugo. Yoke.
Tarjeta.
Card (visiting
Trapo. Rag.
or business).
Saber. Learning, knowl-
Traza
Mien, appear-
edge.
ance.
Sacacorchos. Corkscrew.
Trampa.
Trap, cheat.
Saldo. Balance.
Traducción.
Translation.
Salto. Leap, jump.
COMPOÍ
3ITI0N.
Quedarse en blanco.
To be left in the lurch.
Quedarse hecho una pieza (or he-
To be thunderstruck, to be trans-
lado).
fixed.
Querer decir.
To mean.
Sacar fuerzas de flaqueza.*
To make a virtue of a necessity.
Sacar provecho.
To turn to account.
Sacudir el yugo.
To shake off the :
^oke.
Salir á luz.
To be produced, 1
to be published.
Salir con algo.
To gain one's enc
.
Salir los colores á la cara.
To blush.
Salga lo que saliere.
Come what may.
Salirse con la suya.
To have one's own way, to accom-
plish an object.
Santo y bueno.
Well and good.
Sin más acá ni más allá.
Without ifs and ands.
* Saeer de la necesidad virtud.
Digitized
by Google
378
LFSSON LXIV.
Sin qué ni para qué.
En nombrando al ruin de Roma
luego asoma.
Sobre la marcha.
Tan claro como el sol (pr como el
agua).
Tener á menos hablar á uno.
Tener á uno á raya.
Tener algo en la punta de la lengua.
Tener buen diente.
Tener bula para todo.
Tener el pie en dos zapatos.
Tener los cascos á la gineta.
Tener su alma en su cuerpo.
Tomar el cielo con las manos.
Tomar la ocasión por los cabellos.
Tomar las (calzas) de Villadiego.
Vamos claros.
Venir á menos.
Venir al caso.
Venir con las manos lavadas.
Venir de perilla.
Venir una cosa pintada.
Verse negro.
Vestirse con veinte y cinco alfileres.
Dicho y hecho.
Vivir de gorra.
Vivir á sus anchas (anchuras).
Zafarse de alguna cosa.
Without rhyme or reason.
Speak of the devil, and his imps ap-
pear.
Off-hand (instantly).
As clear as daylight.
Not to deign to speak to one.
To keep one at bay.
To have anything on the tip of one's
tongue.
To have a good appetite.
To have permission to do what one
likes.
To have two strings to one's bow.
To be hare-brained, to have little
judgment.
To do what one thinks proper.
To be transported with rapture, to
be enraged.
To profit by the occasion.
To take to one'^ heels.
Let us understand one another.
To decline in any way.
To come to the point.
To wish to enjoy the fruit of an-
other's labor.
To come at the nick of time, or to
fit exactly.
A thing to suit (or fit) exactly.
To be afflicted, embarrassed.
To be dressed in style, to be decked
out.
No sooner said than done.
To live at another's expense.
To live at one's ease.
To get clear (or rid of) anything.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ¿ Qué quiere decir quedarse en blanco ? Quiere decir lo
mismo que quedarse á la luna de Valencia, esto es, quedarse sin
nada.
2. ¿ Y quedarse hecho una pieza ó helado, qué quiere decir ?
Son modismos que indican admiración ó sorpresa.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LXIV. 379
3. i Quiere V. explicarme algunos modismos españoles ? No
tengo inconveniente, pregúnteme V. el significado de los que no
comprenda V. — Muy bien.
4. Sacar fuerzas de flaqueza, ¿ qué quiere decir ? Yo creo que
es hacer esfuerzos ; pero también significa, hacer de la necesidad
virtud.
5. Sacar provecho, creo que no necesita explicación y si la
ocasión sfe presenta, creo que sabré sacarlo.— ¿ Y qué me dice V,
acerca de sacudir el yugo ? Que aquellos que tengan algún mal
yugo que sacudir deben hacerlo sobre la marcha.
6. Santo y bueno, pero V., ¿ no tiene ningún yugo que sacu-
dir ? No, señor, es verdad que estoy bajo el yugo del matrimo-
nio ; pero no deseo zafarme de- él, porque para mí aunque es yugo,
es un yugo santo que me ha hecho muy feliz y bajo el cual deseo
vivir todavía muchos años.
7. i No le parece á V. que aquel hombre vive de gorra ? Sí,
señor, aquí se venía todos los días con sus manos lavadas y se nos
comía un codo.
8. i Y por qué no lo echó V. de su casa? i Así lo hice ayer, y si
V. lo hubiera visto I parecía querer tomar el cielo con las manos i
9. I Vaya un atrevimiento I Al fin me vi obligado á amena-
zarle con una silla, y entonces tomó las de Villadiego.
10. Creo que antes era rÍ90, pero ahora ha venido á menos. —
No, lo que es tener, todavía tiene.
11. No hombre, si no tiene sobre qué caerse muerto. — Perdone
V., si V. quiere que, para practicar en los modismos del verbo
tener, le diga á V. lo que ese buen señor tiene, se lo diré á V.
12. Santo y bueno.— Pues entonces allá va sin qué ni para
qué.
13. Pero hombre, ¿ para qué sacar á la colada los trapos de
ese buen hombre? Si eso es tan claro como el sol que nos
alumbra.
14. Vamos claros, i quiere V. ó no que le diga lo que ese señor,
que se viste con 'veinte y cinco alfileres, tiene ? Pero si no viene
al caso.
15. Entonces se acabará el ejercicio sin poder introducir en la
práctica la mitad de los modismos que tenemos en la lección. —
I Ah ! sí, sí, tiene V. mil razones, escucho, i qué es lo que ese buen
señor tiene ?
. 16. En primer lugar tiene buen apetito y buen diente. — i Cás-
pita I qué si lo tiene ! ¿ y á quién se lo cuenta V. ?
Digitized
by Google
380 LESSON LXIV.
17. Tiene siempre algo en la punta de la lengua y nunca tíene
nada en el bolsillo.
18. Y según el descaro con que obra, parece tener bula para
todo ; también tiene los cascos á la gineta y con tanto tener creo
que es más lo que le falta que lo que tiene. ^
19. Yo no sé cómo tenerlo á raya, ¿ no me hará V. el favor de
aconsejarle que no venga más por aquí ? Amigo mío, dígaselo
V. mismo, porque yo tengo á menos hablar á una persona de su
especie.
20. Y sin embargo, vea V., él tiene el pie en dos zapatos, i y
qué más tiene ?
21. Déjeme V. pensar, {ahí sí, el pobre señor tiene todavía
otra cosa más. — Bien, pues, dígala V., que se acaba el ejercicio.
22. Tiene su alma en su cuerpo. Hombre, calle V., que aquí
viene él en persona. — Sí, en nombrando al ruin de Boma, luego
asoma.
23. Buenos días, D. Juan. — Téngalos V. muy buenos, D. Peri-
quito, ¿ qué se ofrece ? Vengo á pedirle á V. diez pesos presta-
dos, que me vendrían de perilla, ¡ porque me veo negro I
24. Hombre pídaselos V. al Sr. de V. que está en fondos, en
cuanto á mí me encuentro sin blanca.
EXERCISE.
1. I understand that your brother was left entirely in the
lurch ? Not at all ; on the contrary, he came out much better
than I did.
2. How did he feel when he learned that I had heard of the
whole matter ? He was thunderstruck, and could not give me
any reply.
3. How are you going to manage in such a case as that ? I
simply have to make a virtue of necessity.
4. I think there is little danger of his not succeeding ; what
do you think (what appears to you) ? Not the least ; he is very
prudent, and knows how to turn every thing to account.
5. Do you remember when that article was published ? I
do not remember exactly ; but it seems to me that it must have
been some time in last November.
6. You see that is what I told you the other day would take
place. Yes, that is true; but you seem to have forgotten the
condition I mentioned to your friend as he was going out.
7. Is not Mr. Martinez going to be here, as he promised ? I
Digitized
by Google
LUSSON LXV.
381
am expecting him. — We shall wait until seven o'clock ; if he
comes before that time, well and good ; if not, we shall go on
with the business of the evening without him.
8. Well, let us understand each other before going any
farther. It seems to me we understand each other perfectly ;
the thing is as clear as daylight.
9. Oh, Charles! I am so glad to see you! you have just
come at the nick of time ; we shall have the pleasure of your
company at dinner. You are very kind ; but really you must
excuse me ; I have a friend waiting for me.
10. You lost your coat ? how did you come home in the cold
without it ? Alexander lent me one of his that fitted me exactly.
11. No sooner said than done ; he took his hat and went out
in search of him, notwithstanding it rained in torrents.
12. You may be at ease in your mind on that score ; I shall
manage to get rid of him very soon.
13. I wish you would come to the point, for up to the present
I have been unable to find out what you mean.
14. One would have said, from the manner in which he was
(viéndolo) decked out, that he was going to the theatre or to a
ball instead of to the office.
LESSON LXV.
Aventurarse.
Apretar.
Cobrar.
Desafiar.
Escaldar.
Enhebrar.
Enzarzar.
Enfadarse.
Hilar.
Juntar.
Madrugar.
Prevenir.
Relucir.
Sustentar.
Trasquilar.
To venture.
To tighten, to urge.
To collect
To challenge.
To scald.
To thread (a needle), to link.
To sow discord.
To get angry.
To spin.
To join.
To rise early.
To warn, to inform.
To shine.
To sustain.
To shear.
Digiti:
zed by Google
382
LESSON LXV.
Tapar.
To cover up, to close up.
Trampear.
To impose upon, to deceive.
Tragar.
To swallow.
Trasnochar.
To sit up all night
Terminar.
To terminate.
Tolerar.
To tolerate.
Tornar. .
To retiu'n, to do over again.
Tranquilizar.
To tranquillize, to make any
one's mind easy.
Tutear.*
To address any one in the second
person singular, to speak fa-
miliarly to.
Expresivo.
Expressive.
Justo.
Just
Duro.
Hard.
Necio.
Silly, foolish.
Práctico.
Practised, experienced.
Ciego.
Blind.
Tuerto.
Bliiid of one eye.
Trigueño.
Dark (of the complexion).
Tinto.
Colored, red.
Tonto.
Foolish.
Tramposo.
Deceitful, swindling.
Terminante.
Decided.
Tranquilo.
Tranquil, quiet
Á borbotones.
Bubbling, hurriedly,confusedly
Palabras mayores.
OfiFensive words or expressions.
No ser rana.
To be able and exi)ert.
I Caramba I
There is no English word cor-
responding to this ; though it
is used about as ** Confound
it ! " might be used.
Asador. Spit (for roasting).
Cola. Tail.
Copo. Flake (of snow).
Danza. Dance.
♦ Tutear, composed of the two second person singular pronouns, tú
and te, with the termination of the first conjugation, ar, appended.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LXV.
383
Entendedor.
One who under-
Divisa.
Motto.
stands.
Familiaridad
. Familiarity.
Herrero.
Blacksmith.
Miel.
Honey.
Menosprecio
. Scorn, contempt.
Mona.
Monkey.
Hortelano.
Gardener.
Fama.
Fame, notoriety.
Dado.
Dye.
Moderación.
Moderation.
Proverbio.
Proverb.
Oveja.
Sheep.
Sayo.
Sort of loose coat
Necesidad.
Necessity.
or jacket.
Pareja.
Pair.
Pecho.
Breast
Baña.
Frog.
Ratón.
Mouse.
Viga.
Beam.
Tíd.
Uncle.
Tenacidad.
Tenacity.
Bebedor.
Toper, tippler.
Tos.
Cough.
(All these an
} maaeuUne,)
Soliloquio.
Soliloquy.
Trineo.
Sleigh.
Suegro.
Father-in-law.
Tacto.
Touch.
Sujeto.
Person, individ-
Talento.
Talent
ual.
Telégrafo.
Telegraph.
Sobrino.
Nephew.
Tenedor.
Fork.
Sinónimo.
Synonym.
Término.
Term.
Silencio.
Silence.
Trigo.
Wheat
Sentido.
Sense.
Termómetro.
Thermometer.
Semblante.
Countenance,
Torno.
Lathe.
looks.
Toque.
Touch, ringing
Secreto.
Secret
(of bells).
Trato.
Intercourse, treat-
Título.
Title.
ment
Trago.
Draught, drink.
Través.
Breadth (of a
thing).
Tirabuzón.
Corkscrew.
COMPO
SITION.
Á buena gana no hay pan duro.
Á lo hecho pecho.
Á quien se hace de miel las moscas
se lo comen.
Á quien madruga Dios le ayuda.
Al bien entendedor con media pala-
bra basta.
Al fin se canta la gloria.
Hunger is the best sauce.
What is done cannot be helped.
Smear yourself with honey, and you
will be devoured by flies.
The early bird catches the worm.
A word to the wise is sufficient.
Boast not till the victory is won.
Digitized
by Google
384
LESSON LXr.
Antes que te cases mira lo que
haces.
Antes cabeza de ratón que cola de
león.
Aunque la mona se yista de seda
mona se queda.
Bien vengas mal si vienes solo.
Cada oveja con su pareja (ar Dios
los cria y ellos se juntan).
Cada uno juzga por su corazón el
ageno.
Cada uno hace de su capa un sayo.
Cada uno sabe donde le aprieta el
zapato.
Cobra buena fama j échate á dor-
mir.
Como el perro del hortelano, que ni
come ni deja comer.
Cuenta y razón sustentan amistad.
Del mal el menos.
Debajo de una mala capa se encuen-
tra un buen bebedor.
Dime con quién andas, y te diré
quién eres.
Donde fueres haz como vieres.
Lo mejor de los dados es no jugar-
los.
En boca cerrada no entran moscas.
En casa del herrero asador de palo.
En tierra de ciegos el tuerto es rey.
Gato escaldado del agua fría huye.
Ir por lana y volver trasquilado.
Hombre prevenido nunca fue ven-
cido.
La caridad bien ordenada empieza
por uno mismo.
La mucha familiaridad es causa de
menosprecio.
La necesidad carece de ley.
La tenacidad es divisa del necio.
Look before you leap.
Better be the head of a mouse than
the tail of a lion.
A hog in armor is still but a hog.
Misfortune never comes alone.
Birds of a feather flock together.
Every man measures other people's
corn in his own bushel.
Every one may do as he likes with
his own.
Every one knows where the shoe
pinches him.
Get a name for early rising, and you
may lie a-bed all day.
Like the dog in the manger.
Short reckoning and long friends.
Of two evils, the lesser.
We should not judge the book by
the cover.
Tell me your company and I shall
tell you what you are.
When in Rome, do as Rome does.
The best throw at dice is to throw
them away.
A close mouth catches no flies.
No one goes worse shod than the
shoemaker's wife.
In the land of the blind, the one-
eyed man is king.
A burnt child dreads the fire.
The biter bitten.
Forewarned, forearmed.
Charity begins at home.
Familiarity breeds contempt.
Necessity has no law.
A wise man can change his mind ;
a fool never.
Digitized
by Google
LUSSOJÜf LXV.
385
Lo que no se puede remediar se ha
de aguantar.
Más vale tarde que nunca.
Más vale pájaro en mano que ciento
Tolando.
Mientras en mi casa estoy rey soy.
Nadie puede decir de esta agua no
beberé.
No es oro todo lo que reluce.
No hay mal que por bien no venga.
No la hagas no la temas.
Poquito á poco hilaba la vieja el copo.
Quien bien te quiere te hará llorar.
Quien mucho habla mucho yerra.
Vale más rodear que rodar.
Quien no se aventura no pasa la mar.
Ta que la casa se quema calenté-
monos.
Vemos la paja en el ojo a geno y no
la viga en el nuestro.
Tu enemigo es de tu oficio.
What can't be cured must be en-
dured.
Better late than never.
A bird in the hand is worth two in
the bush.
A man's house is his castle.
One can never tell what the future
will bring.
All is not gold that glitters.
It's an ill wind that blows nobody
good.
Do no evil and fear no harm.
Rome was not built in a day.
Spare the rod and spoil the child.
Who speaks much often blunders.
The longest way round, the shortest
way home.
Nothing venture, nothing have.
Let us make the best of a bad job.
We see the mote in our neighbor's
eye, and not the beam in our own.
Two of a trade never agree.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. i Hay muchos proverbios en español ? Hay muchísimos ;
en todas las lenguas los hay, pero en la española creo que hay
tantos que si se reuniesen todos formarían varios volúmenes.
2. i Le gustan á V. los proverbios ? Sí, señor, son muy
expresivos, pero debemos usarlos, como decía D. Quijote, con
moderación y no á borbotones como Sancho Panza.
3. En eso tiene V. razón, porque quien mucho habla mucho
yerra. — V. acaba de aplicar ese muy bien ; pero es imposible que
practiquemos con todos los que trae esta lección, en este
ejercicio.
4. Síd embargo, al que madruga Dios le ayuda.--V. dice bien,
y quien no se aventura no pasa la mar.
5. Espero que quien nos oiga conversar introduciendo tanto
refrán, no diga de ellos lo que se dice de los males. — ¿ Qué dicen
de los males ? Bien vengas mal si vienes solo.
6. I Oh I no, señor, en primer lugar los proverbios no son
males, y en segundo lugar á nosotros nos gustan, y queremos
27
Digitized
by Google
386 LESSON LXV.
practicar con ellos, para aprenderlos. — V. está en lo justo, y
además, cada uno hace de su capa un sayo.
7. i Ola, amiguito I V. me parece práctico en la materia, pero
no piense V. que yo soy rana, porque debajo de una mala capa
se encuentra un buen bebedor. — Caramba i que no me deja V.
meter baza I no se dirá de V. aquello de, en boca cerrada no en-
tran moscas.
8. Vamos amigo, ese refrán vino por los cabellos. — Pues si
vino por los cabellos, á pelo vino, además, que V. me parece ser
de aquellos que ven la paja en el ojo ageno y no la viga en el
suyo.
9. No se enfade V., amigo, que quien bien lo quiere le hará
llorar. — No, señor, no me enfado, pero ya veo que no es oro todo
lo que reluce.
10. I Bravo I bravo I ya va V. aprendiendo á enzarzar refranes,
lo hace V. cual otro Sancho Panza, y yo, con toda mi práctica,
he ido por lana y he vuelto trasquilado. — Su ejemplo de V. me
irá enseñando ; poquito á poco hilaba la vieja el copo, y dime con
quién andas y te diré quién eres.
11. I Qué hombre ! si V. va á ganar á su maestro I pero no hay
mal que por bien no venga ; V. me hace reir con sus refranes. —
Bien, del mal el menos, pero D. Manuel, ¿ es posible que le haya
de ganar su discípulo ?
12. No sé, no puedo decir de esta agua no beberé, y lo que no
se puede remediar se ha de aguantar, y al fin se canta la gloria. —
I Zape, como los enhebra I pero yo no me doy por vencido, señor
maestro, porque yo ya sé aquello de cobra buena fama y échate
á dormir.
13. La tenacidad es devisa del necio, y al buen entendedor
con media palabra basta. — Sí, pero esas ya son palabras mayores,
y á quien se hace de miel las moscas se lo comen, y mientras en
mi casa estoy, rey soy.
14. Espero, D. Carlos, que no me quiera V. poner fuera de su
casa. — No hombre, pero estos refranes son tan expresivos que le
hacen decir á uno más de lo que quiere ; pero á lo hecho pecho y
ya que V. me desafió, siga la danza.
15. Bueno, si V. lo quiere, ya que la casa se quema calenté-
monos ; pero bien haría V. antes que se case en mirar lo que hace,
porque cada uno sabe donde le aprieta el zapato. — Amigo mío, V.
no sabe de la misa la media ; yo nunca doy mi brazo á torcer, y
antes quiero ser cabeza de ratón que cola de león.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON LXV. 387
16. Sí, señor, pero aunque la mona se vista de seda, mona se
queda, no sea V. como el perro del hortelano, que ni come ni
deja comer, y acuérdese V. que cuenta y razón sustentan amistad
y lo mejor de los dados es no jugarlos. — Basta, basta, hombre me
doy por vencido.
17. No la hagas no la temas ; tu enemigo es de tu oficio. —
Pero, D. Carlos, le repito. . . .
18. La caridad bien ordenada entra por sí misma. — Pero si
repito que. . . .
19. Donde quiera que fueres haz como vieres. — Señor, me
rindo. — Más vale tarde que nunca.
EXERCISE.
1. Well, Charles, so you have come at last. Yes, better late
than never, you know ; but if it had continued raining I should
not have come at all.
2. Are you going out ? I thought we were going together
to the theatre this evening. — I must go out now ; but should I
get back as soon as I expect, we shall still have time to go to the
theatre.
3. If you undertake that journey, I should like to be your
companion. It is rather doubtful at present whether I shall;
but if I do, I should be delighted to have your company.
4 If the directors establish that as a general rule, a great
many persons will suffer heavy loss.
5. The conditions were, that if he did not discover the error,
or if, after having discovered it, he could not rectify it, he should
lose his place.
6. He said he would have no rest until he might hear some
news of that poor young man.
7. He promised that I should have the place, if it were in his
power to procure it for me.
8. In case his efforts should not be attended with success,
you could rely upon me to do all in my power to advance {pro-
mover) your interests.
9. Their embarrassments will not cease so long as they do not
introduce some system of reasonable economy.
10. Peter tells his stories so well, and with such an appear-
ance of truth, that one is actually tempted to believe them.
11. They made so many conditions, that it was clear that they
had no wish to help us.
Digitized
by Google
J
388 LESSON LXV.
12. Why did you not take that book ? I would not take it
because some leaves were wanting.
13. If there is anything within (in) my reach with which I
can serve you, just ♦ let me know.
14. Whatever he may have been in his youth, he is now a re-
spectable man, and beloved (loved) by everybody that knows him.
* English words in itcUica are not to be translated.
Digitized
by Google
GENERAL OBSERVATIONS
ON SOMB
GRAMMATICAL AND IDIOMATICAL PECULIARITIES OF THE
SPANISH LANGUAGE, NOT HITHERTO TREATED
OP IN THE GRAMMAR.
In order to acquire a thorough knowledge of a language,
it is necessary to compare carefully the different uses of the
several parts of speech in the native language and in the one
proposed to be learned.
The sense of a whole passage is very often changed by
the suppression or omission of an article, a preposition, or
a conjunction; by using one tense of a verb for another;
placing an adjective before its noun when, in order to con-
vey the idea intended, it should go after it ; and not unfre-
quently by translating a ceiiiain part of speech by a word
which, although its appearance would lead us to take it for
the equivalent of the word to be translated, bears in reality
no relation to the idea designed to be expressed.
We have deemed it wise, therefore, to devote a few pages
of our Combined Method to such general remarks as are
necessary to guide the learner, and which, if attentively
observed, will, after the study of the Spanish exercises con-
tained in the preceding lessons, enable him to write or speak
correctly and idiomatically in the Spanish language.
The Definite Article.
1. Illustrations have already been given in previous les-
sons as to the more common use of the article ; but there
389
Digitized
by Google
390
GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES.
are many others which require nice discrimination to decide
as to its use or omission in Spanish, as in English, as may
be seen from the following examples, which may serve as
a general rule for all those of the same kind :
I Está el rey en palacio f
Es costumbre en Espafia.
Su tío firmó por él, en ausencia de
8U padre.
Decía verdad.
Á tres de Junio.
Tuvo valor para responder.
Á mediados de agosto.
Is the king in the palace f
It is the custom in Spain.
His uncle signed for him, in the
absence of his father.
He told the truth.
On the 3d of June.
He had the courage to answer.
In the middle of August.
2. In Spanish the article is at times accompanied by a
preposition not required in English ; as,
Hace del caballero. I He plays the gentleman.
Indeiiziite Article.
3. The so-called indefinite article is, as has been stated
in one of the early lessons, frequently employed in English ;
and when translating from this language into Spanish, we
either suppress it entirely or render it by some other part
of speech ; as,
Tiene derecho sobre este caudal.
Á distancia de . . .
Cádiz es puerto de mar.
Es otro Alejandro.
En medio siglo (or dentro de medio
siglo).
Volveremos dentro de media hora.
Las obras de otro (or obras agenas).
Hubo tiempo en que . . .
He has a right to (or a claim upon)
this capital.
At a distance of . . .
Cadiz is a seaport (town).
He is another Alexander.
In half a century.
We shall return in half an hour.
The works of another (or o^iother's
works).
There was a time in which . . .
Personal and Possessive Pronouns.
4. The use and repetition of the personal and possessive
pronouns are more frequent in English than in Spanish;
and that seeming redundance is essential to the clearness
and precision of the English language ; but Spanish syntax,
owing to the completeness of the verb inflexions, does not
Digitized
by Google
GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES, 391
require a so layish use of these forms, and they are omitted,
save where absence would occasion ambiguity, and where
they are used for sake of emphasis ; in other words, the pro-
nouns are omitted wherever possible, without injury to the
construction or style ; as,
Es verdad.
Llueve.
Hace frío.
I Por qué es menester!
Él mismo príncipe.
Su misma madre.
Él mismo lo vio.
It is true.
It is raining (or it rains).
It is cold.
Why is it necessary f
The prince Aimself.
His mother Acrself.
He saw it Atmself.
6. Before leaving the pronouns, it is proper to remark
that the words one and ones^ so often used in English, to
avoid the unpleasant repetition of nouns, have no equivalent
in Spanish, as they are usually expressed in some other way,
as, for instance, by adjectives, and hence are to be left out in
translating from the former language to the latter ; as,
I Tiene V. caballos f I Have you horses (or any horses) f
Tengo dos buenos. 1 1 have two good ones,
6. Personal pronouns, when used redundantly in English,
as in the following example, are never expressed in Spanish :
Ambos perecieron. | Both of them perished (or were lost).
This, however, does not apply to such words as uno^ or
the cardinals generally, todOy etc., as, uno de ellos^ one of them,
todos elloSy all of them.
7. Even whole members of sentences are, not unf requently,
suppressed in translating from English into Spanish ; as.
Todo no podia entrar en un elogio, I All could not find place in a eulogy,
más sí en una sátira. I but all could find place in a satire.
Observe that the repetition of the words italicized in the
English sentence is avoided by means of the adverb si in
Spanish, which serves to correct the negation expressed in
the first member of the phrase, thus rendering the latter at
once shorter and more energetic.
Digitized
by Google
GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES.
8. There are certain' short modes of expression, certain
grammatical laconicisms, peculiar to the English language,
which are not admissible in Spanish; the ellipses must in
such cases often be filled up ; as,
Jamás hubo orador qcte hablase me-
jor.
De ahí dimcmcm estos errores.
No puede pensar en hacer mal.
La ciudad reducida á cenizas.
Ko va mal para ser nifio.
Su madre hafíada en lágrimas.
Aunque todos estuviesen juntos.
Esto eé por lo que toca á su persona.
En pro y en contra.
Con la espada en la mana
Never did orator speak better.
Hence these errors.
He cannot think of eviL
The city in ashes.
Not bad for a child.
Her mother in tears.
They were all together.
So much for his person (or personal
appearance).
For and against.
Sword in hand.
N. B. — It is also correct to say, Espada en mano.
InTersion.
Although we have spoken at some length, in Lesson LI,
on the subject of inversion, we take it for granted that the
student will not be displeased to meet here a few well-chosen
examples which will give him a still clearer idea of the order
followed in Spanish for the expression of ideas, and the con-
sequent difference of construction between that language
and English.
9. The substantive usually precedes its adjective ; as,
más perfecto del
Es el hombre
mundo.
Llave falsa.
Testigo falso.
Su hijo más joven,
He is the most perfect man in the
world.
False key.
False witness.
Her youngest son.
10. Instances occur, however, of the inversion taking
place in English, while the natural construction is followed
in Spanish ; especially in the case of past participles acting
as verbal adjectives ; as,
Digitized
by Google
GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES.
393
Una vez destruido este funda- This foundation being once de-
mento, todo se viene abajo. stroyed, the whole (edifice) comes
to the ground.
Admitida esta libertad, el hombre This liberty (being) once admitted,
puede . . . man can . . .
11. In all cases similar to that of the following example,
the possessives mio^ tuyOy suyo are placed after the substan-
tiy.e, and then, of course, they retain their final syllable ; as,
El otro hijo suyo, I His other son.
12. The same ideas are in not a few instances presented
in Spanish in an order very different from that followed in
English; as.
No ha venido para destruir, sino
para edificar.
Bien veo que . . .
Si tuviese V. que hacer una contrata.
It is not to destroy that he has come
but to build up.
I see (very) well that . . .
If you had an agreement to make.
(If you had to make an agreement would, of course, also be an allow-
able construction in English.)
No tenia razón aquel filósofo que
decía que . . .
Toca remunerar los servicios al que
los recibió.
Entre los griegos, los que . . .
£l que más hablaba.
Cien veces más quisiera yo que . . .
Sólo Dios es inmutable.
That philosopher who said that . . .
was wrong.
It is for him who received the serv-
ices to reward them.
Those amongst the Greeks, who . . .
He who spoke the most.
I would prefer a thousand times
that ...
God alone is unchanging.
NoTins.
13. There is a striking difference to be observed in the use
of nouns in the two languages ; we sometimes meet nouns in
the singular in English, while in Spanish they are used in the
plural only, and viceversa :
Plwrdl,
Mirar con maloa ojoa.
Puso los ojos en mí.
Dar oidos á . . .
Prestar oidos.
De pies á cabeza.
Singular,
To look with evil eye.
He set his eye on me.
To give ear to . . .
To lend an ear.
From head to foot.
Digitized
by Google
394
GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES,
Por todas partes.
Juego de manos.
Se presentó con los ojos en el suelo.
SingtUar.
A pie áescsAzo.
Estar en pie,
A remo y vela.
En toda suerte de negocios.
No son dueños de si.
In every direction.
Sleight of Tuind,
He came forward with downcast eye,
Plv/ral,
With bare feet (or in (his) bare feet).
To stand on (one's) feet.
With oa/rs and «a»7«.
In all sorts (or kinds) of business.
They are not masters of themselves.
One Part of Speech ibr Another.
14. It is not uncommon, in comparing English and Span-
ish composition, to see adjectives translated by substantives,
adverbs by substantives, substantives by verbs, and vice-versd.
Sometimes, in translating, difficulties, appearing at first sight
almost insurmountable, are overcome by the simple substitu-
tion of one part of speech for another.
Adjectives for Substantives.
Pica de guapo (or presumido de
guapo).
Es acusado de impío.
Se pone furioso.
He piques himself on his bravery.
He is accused of impiety.
He gets into a fury.
Substantives for Adverbs, and vice-versft.
Aunque idólatras de origen.
Come eíccesivamsnte.
Tuvo la diclia de salvarse.
Por desgracia nada oyeron.
Although originally idolaters.
He eats to excess.
Happily for him he escaped.
Unfortunately they heard nothing.
Substantives for Verbs, and vice-versa.
Habló lo mejor que pudo.
Debe probar su dicho.
Como acostumbra.
Después de almorzar.
Antes de comer.
He spoke to the best of his ability.
He must prove what he says.
According to his custom.
After breakfast.
Before dinner.
Verbs for Pronouns.
aseguran I Some historians assure us that • • .
Bay historiadores que
que ... I
Of Verbs in (General.
16. We very often find verbs active with the indefinite se^
and sometimes the passive verb with the particle se^ used in
Digitized
by Google
GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES.
395
Spanish to express the same idea conveyed in English by
passive, and sometimes also by active verbs ; one tense trans-
lated by another different tense, one number substituted in
the place of another, one person for other persons, and at
times even the same person translated by any or all the
others, according to the sense desired to be conveyed.
Passive in Ensrlish.
El concilio 86 celebraba eu Pisa.
El libro que se le atribuye.
Esto 86 encierra en la proposición.
Esto debe contar8e por nada.
Cuando 8e les ruega que respondan.
The council was held at Pisa.
The book which Í8 attributed to him.
That is contained in the proposition.
This is to 6e counted for nothing.
When they are requested to answer.
Active in English.
Viene é, juntarse con su familia.
Se casó con la duquesa.
Se hicieron á la vela.
He comes to join his family.
He married the duchess.
They set sail.
The Indicative or Subjunctive for the Infinitive.
Lo mandó que callase.
Es reputado por hombre que nada
posee.
Espero me responda V.
He ordered him to hold his tongue
(or to be silent).
He is supposed to possess nothing.
I expect you to answer me.
One Tense for Another.
I Te habré yo dado un derecho que
no tengo f
4 Por qué sólo los hombres habrán
de degenerar f
Cuanto más ha^/a/n^ menos ganarán.
Que un muerto resuscite^ no es cosa
común.
Have I then given thee a right which
I do not possess myself!
Why must mankind alone degen-
erate f
The more they do, the less they will
gain.
It is no common thing for a dead
(man) to be resuscitated.
One Number for Another in Verbs.
Son las seis. I It is six o'clock.
No le quedan más que tres hijos. I He ha>s only three children left.
One Person for Another.
Nosotros somos los bárbaros.
Si hubiesen sido ellos los vitupera-
dos.
Tt is we that are barbarians.
If it had been they that they had
blamed.
Digitized
by Google
396 GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES.
Xode of AakiTig Quaations aiul forming Neffations with Verbs.
16. The auxiliary do^ used in English in asking questions,
whether negatively or positively, is to be lost sight of in
translating into Spanish, inasmuch as the simple form of the
verb contains all that is required for that purpose, as may be
seen in the following examples :
Do you sometimes go to the opera f
Did you know that we were to come
so early!
I did not think you were to come
¿ Van Yds. algunas veces á la ópera f
¿Sabia y que debíamos venir tan
temprano f
No creia que debiesen Vds. venir
hasta las tres.
until three o'clock.
17. Xor is it to be translated into Spanish when it stands
in the English sentence merely for the purpose of giving
more emphasis to the expression ; as,
I thought they never went to the
theatre.
Yo creia que no iban nunca al teatro.
Sí, sefior, va/n á menudo.
Yes, sir, they do go often.
18. In English it sometimes takes the place of a verb, to
avoid the repetition of the latter ; in all such cases it is to be
rendered into Spanish by a simple particle (positive or nega-
tive, as required by the sense), or else the verb expressing
the action must itself be repeated ; as,
I Escribe V. todos los meses á su tío f
Sí, señor {or le escribo todos los
s).
Do you write to your uncle every
month f
Yes, sir, I do.
19. To what has already been retoiarked relative to con-
jugations, we have but a few words to add respecting a lim-
ited number of verbs of the third conjugation. Those which
have either of the letters cA, II, or ^, immediately preceding
the termination, make their past participle in endo, instead
of iendo ; as, ciñendo, mullendo, riñendo, hinchendo, bruñendo,
gruñendo, tañendo, instead of ciñiendo, mulliendo, riñiendo,
hinchiendo, hruñiendo, gruñiendo, tañiendo.
For the same reason the i is also suppressed in the 'third
persons singular and plural of the preterit definite of the in-
dicative, and in all the persons of the second and third ter-
Digitized
by Google
GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES. 397
minations of the imperfect subjunctive, and of the future of
the same mood ; as, ciñó^ mullos riñeron^ hinchera^ bruñese,
gruñere, instead of ciñió, muHió, riñieron, hinchiera, iruñiese,
gruñiere.
There is but one exception to this rule, and that occurs
in the verb henchir, which generally retains the i in the third
singular, preterit indicative, making it hinchió, in order to
avoid confounding it with hinchó, same person and tense of
hinchar, a regular verb of the first conjugation.
The reason of the suppression of the i in the cases pointed
out above is obvious, inasmuch as the letters ch, II, or ñ, when
forming a syllable with e, cannot be sounded «without the con-
currence of the i element to a certain extent. If, therefore,
the i were retained in those combinations, a forced and dis-
agreeable sound would be the result.
20. There are in English certain verbs of very frequent
occurrence, whose signification, if not determined by some
other part of speech, would often be difficult to explain.
Amongst this class, the verb to get plays a very important,
if not the most important part, and those of English speech
are sometimes at as great a loss to know exactly how to trans-
late it into a foreign language as foreigners are to know how
and when to use it idiomatically in English. This verb {to
get) has no exact equivalent in Spanish, but there are in that
language many verbs of something of a like nature, and by
which it may at times be correctly rendered, according to
the sense in which it is used. We venture to say that, in
the most difficult cases, a little thought, a moment's reflec-
tion would go far to remove all uncertainty.
Before making some uncouth makeshift of a translation,
pause a moment, and see what is the real meaning of to get
in the case before you ; then see what other verb would serve
in its place, or what other form of expression can be substi-
tuted for the one proposed to be translated. This you will
soon discover, for perhaps in no language can an instance be
found of the impossibility to express the same idea in more
than one way. For instance, let it be required to translate
Digitized
by Google
398 GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES.
into Spanish, To get in by the window ; here is a difficulty
just as great as any other case where the yerb to get can
be used.
Let us now see how else we can express that idea : To go
IN, or to come in by the window ; that is to say, we have to
convey the idea of motion into. This same idea is to be
expressed thus : To enter by the window = entrar por la
ventana \ entrar then is the standard and usual verb ex-
pressive of motion into. Let us now change the preposition
and reverse the sense, for the preposition in determines the
signification of get in the case under consideration.
Required to translate : To get out by the window ; the
same process as above gives us motion out\ hence, salir
por la ventana^ salir being the standard and usual Spanish
verb expressive of motion out.
This mode of reasoning will in all cases lead to the de-
sired end. Let your object be to find some verb in English
which used alone will mean the same thing as get and its
determining preposition.
Get, used in connection with adjectives, is no more diffi-
cult to be disposed of than when followed by prepositions,
and it may in general be turned into Spanish by one of the
three verbs ponerse^ hacerse^ or volverse (according to the
nature of the case), and an adjective corresponding to the
English one which governs get ; as.
To get rich.
To get red.
To get furious.
Hacerse rico.
Volverse or ponerse rojo.
Ponerse furioso.
These ideas in Spanish may be expressed by single verbs
derived from each of the adjectives respectively ; as,
Enriquecerse.
Enrojecerse.
Enfurecerse.
To get rich.
To get red {i. e,, to redden).
To get furious.
21. To GET, as an active verb, is usually translated into
Spanish by any of these: conseguir, obtener , procurar^ ha-
cerse de^ hacerse con^ according to the sense ; as,
Digitized
by Google
GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES.
399
Consiguió lo que deseaba.
Obtendrán el privilegio.
¿ Puede V. conseguirme or procurar-
me un ejemplar de ese libro f
Se hizo de un caballo para el yiaje.
He got what he wanted.
They will get the patent.
Can you get me a copy of that book 1
He got (i, e., bought) a horse for his
journey.
22. As for to gety used redundantly with the verb to have^
it disappears in the Spanish translation ; as,
Tenemos uno. I We have got one.
23. The above remarks are equally applicable to all verbs
of the class alluded to, as for instance to become; which
latter, as well as to gety is often elegantly translated by
llegar á ser ; as,
He became a citizen of the United
Se hizo ciudadano de los Estados
Unidos.
Llegó á ser hombre muy distinguido.
States.
He becamie a very distinguished man.
Digitized
by Google
COMPLETE LIST
OF THE
CONJUGATIONS OP ALL THE SPANISH VERBS, AUXILIARY,
REGULAR, IRREGULAR, REFLEXIVE, IMPERSONAL,
AND DEFECTIVE, WITH AN EXAMPLE
OF THE PASSIVE VOICE.
AirxniABT yEBB&
INFINITIVE.
PRESENT.
To he.
Ser. Estar.
To have.
Haber. Tener.*
PRESENT PARTICIPLE.
Having. Being.
Habiendo. Teniendo. | Siendo. Estando.
PAST PARTICIPLE.
Had. Been.
Habido. Tenido. | * Sido. Estado.
INDiCATlVK
I have.
PRESENT.
lam.
1. He.
2. Has.
3. Ha.
Tengo.
Tienes.
Tiene.
Soy.
Eres.
Es.
Estoy.
Estás.
Está.
1. Hemos.
2. Habéis.
3. Han.
Tenemos.
Tenéis.
Tienen.
Somos.
Sois.
SOTI.
Estamos.
Estáis.
Están.
♦ The verb ícner, to have, to possess, is not an auxiliary in the English
sense of the word ; but it is so considered by Spanish grammarians, and
therefore it is here presented in the list of the auxiliaries.
400
Digitized
by Google
CONJUGATIONS.
401
I had.
IMPERFECT.
Itvas.
1. Había.
2. Habías.
3. Había.
Tenía.
Tenías.
Tenía.
Era.
Eras.
Era.
Estaba.
Estabas.
Estaba.
1. Habíamos.
2. Habíais.
3. Habían.
Teníamos.
Teníais.
Tenían.
Eramos.
Eráis.
Eran.
Estábamos.
Estabais.
Estaban.
I had.
1. Hube.
2. Hubiste.
3. Hubo.
PRET
Tuve.
Tuviste.
Tuvo.
ERIT.
I was.
Fm'.
Fuiste.
Fué.
Estuve.
Estuviste.
Estuvo.
1. Hubimos.
2. Hubisteis.
3. Hubieron.
Tuvimos.
Tuvisteis.
Tuvieron.
Fuimos.
Fuisteis.
Fueron.
Estuvimos.
Estuvisteis.
Estuvieron.
FUTl
lah^llhave.
JRE.
I shall be.
1. Habré
2. Habrás.
3. Habrá.
Tendré.
Tendrás.
Tendrá.
Seré.
Serás.
Será.
Estaré.
Estarás.
Estará.
1. Habremos.
2. Habréis.
3. Habrán.
Tendremos.
Tendréis.
Tendrán.
Seremos.
Seréis.
Serán.
Estaremos.
Estaréis.
Estarán.
IMPERATIVE.
2. Have thou. Ten tú. í Se. Be (thou). Está. Be (thou).
2. Have ye. Tened. | Sed. Be (ye). Estad. Be (ye).
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
I may have.
1. Haya.
2. Hayas.
3. Haya.
1. Hayamos.
2. Hayáis.
3. Hayan.
28
Tenga.
Tengas.
Tenga.
Tengamos.
Tengáis.
Tengan.
Sea.
I may be.
Esté.
Estés.
Sea. Esté.
Seamos.
Sean.
Estemos.
Estéis.
Estén.
Digitized
by Google
402
CONJUOATIONS.
IMPERPECT.-
-First Termination.*
I would have.
1. Habría. Tendría.
2. Habrías. Tendrías.
3. Habría. Tendría.
I would he.
Sería. Estaría.
Serías. Estarías.
Sería. Estaría.
1. Habríamos. Tendríamos.
2. Habríais. Tendríais.
3. Habrían. Tendrían.
Seríamos. Estaríamos
Seríais. Estaríais.
Serían. Estarían.
Second Termination.
I would have. I would he.
1.
2.
3.
Hubiera.
Hubieras.
Hubiera.
Tuviera.
Tuvieras.
Tuviera.
Fuera.
Fueras.
Fuera.
Estuviera.
Estuvieras.
Estuviera.
1.
2.
3.
Hubiéramos.
Hubierais.
Hubieran.
Tuviéramos.
Tuvierais.
Tuvieran.
Fuéramos.
Fuerais.
Fueran.
Estuviéramos.
Estuvierais.
Estuvieran.
Third Termination.
1.
2.
3.
I should have.
Hubiese. Tuviese.
Hubieses. Tuvieses.
Hubiese. Tuviese.
I should he.
Fuese. Estuviese.
Fueses. Estuvieses.
Fuese. Estuviese.
1. Hubiésemos. Tuviésemos.
2. Hubieseis. Tuvieseis.
3. Hubiesen. Tuviesen.
Fuésemos. Estuviésemos.
Fueseis. Estuvieseis.
Fuesen. Estuviesen.
PUTÜEB.
I might or should have. I might or should he.
1.
2.
3.
Hubiere.
Hubieres.
Hubiere.
Tuviere.
Tuvieres.
Tuviere.
Fuere.
Fueres.
Fuere.
Estuviere.
Estuvieres.
Estuviere.
1.
2.
3.
Hubiéremos.
Hubiereis.
Hubieren.
Tuviéremos.
Tuviereis.
Tuvieren.
Fuéremos.
Fuereis.
Fueren.
Estuviéremos.
Estuviereis.
Estuvieren.
* It will be observed that, differing from almost all other grammars,
we give Ha as the first termination, this order appearing to us more log-
ical and, above all, more grammatical, and more in accordance with the
signification and uses of the three terminations.
Digitized
by Google
CONJUGATIONS.
403
MODELS OF
THE THREE
BEOVTiAK COnJTTOATIOnS.
FIBST CONJUGATION.
INFINITIVE.
Hablar.
1 To speak.
PRESENT PARTICIPLE.
Hablando
1 Speaking.
PAST PARTICIPLE.
Hablado.
1 Spoken.
INDICATIVE.
PRESENT.
Singular. Hwral.
1. Hablo. I speak. 1. Hablamos.
2. Hablas. 2. Habláis.
3. Habla. 3. Hablan.
IMPERFECT.
1. Hablaba.
2. Hablabas.
3. Hablaba.
I spoke, was
speaking, &c.
1. Hablábamos.
2. Hablabais.
3. Hablaban.
PRETERIT.
1. Habló.
2. Hablaste.
3. Habló.
I spoke.
1. Hablamos.
2. Hablasteis.
3. Hablaron.
FUTURE.
1. Hablaré.
2. Hablarás.
3. Hablará.
I shall or will
speak.
1. Hablaremos.
2. Hablaréis.
3. Hablarán.
IMPERATIVE.
2. Habla.
Speak (thou) 1 2. Hablad. Speak (you).
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Hable.
24 Hables.
3. Hable.
I may speak.
1. Hablemos.
2. Habléis,
3. Hablen.
Digitized
by Google
404
CONJUGATIONS.
IMPERFECT. — First Termination,
1. Hablaría.
2. Hablarías.
3. Hablaría.
1. Hablara.
2. Hablaras.
3. Hablara.
1. Hablase.
2. Hablases.
3. Hablase.
I should or would
speak.
1. Hablaríamos.
2. Hablaríais.
3. Hablarían.
Second Termination.
I might, would,
or should speak.
L Habláramos.
2. Hablarais.
3. Hablaran.
Third Termination.
I might, &c.,
speak.
FUTURE.
1. Hablare. I might, &:c..
2. Hablares.
3. Hablare.
Aprender.
Aprendiendo.
Aprendido.
1. Aprendo. I leam.
2. Aprendes.
3. Aprende.
1. Hablásemos.
2. Hablaseis.
3. Hablasen.
1. Habláremos.
2. Hablareia
3. Hablaren.
SECOND CONJUGATION.
INFINITIVE.
I To leam.
PRESENT PARTICIPLE.
I Learning.
PAST PARTICIPLE.
I Learned.
INDICATIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Aprendemos.
2. Aprendéis.
3. Aprenden.
IMPERFECT.
1. Aprendía. I learned, was
learning, &c.
2. Aprendías.
3. Aprendía.
1. Aprendíamos.
2. Aprendíais.
3. Aprendían.
Digitized
by Google
CONJUGATIONS, 406
PRETERIT.
1. Aprendí. I learned.
2. Aprendiste.
3. Aprendió.
1. Aprendimos.
2. Aprendisteis.
3. Aprendieron.
FUTURE.
1. Aprenderé. I shall or will
learn.
2. Aprenderás.
3. Aprenderá.
1. Aprenderemos.
2. Aprenderéis.
3. Aprenderán.
IMPERATIVE.
2. Aprende. Learn (thou). | 2. Aprended. Learn (you)
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Aprenda. I may learn.
2. Aprendas.
3. Aprenda.
1. Aprendamos.
2. Aprendáis.
3. Aprendan.
IMPERFECT. — First Termination.
1. Aprendería. I would or
should learn.
2. Aprenderías.
3. Aprendería.
1. Aprenderíamos.
2. Aprenderíais.
3. Aprenderían.
Second Termination.
1. Aprendiera. I might, would,
or should
learn.
2. Aprendieras.
3. Aprendiera.
1. Aprendiéramos.
2. Aprendierais.
3. Aprendieran.
Third Termination.
1. Aprendiese. I might, &c.,
learn.
2. Aprendieses.
3. Aprendiese.
1. Aprendiésemos.
2. Aprendieseis.
3. Aprendiesen.
FUTURE.
1. Aprendiere. I might, &c.,
learn.
2. Aprendieres.
3. Aprendiere.
1. Aprendiéremos.
2. Aprendiereis.
3. Aprendieren.
Digitized
by Google
406
CONJU&ATIONS.
TUIBD OONJXXaATION.
INFINITIVE.
Escribir.
1 To write.
PRESKNT PARTICIPT.H!.
Escribiendo. | Writing.
PAST PARTICIPLE.
Escrito.*
1 Written.
INDICATIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Escribo.
2. Escribes.
3. Escribe.
I write.
1. Escribimos.
2. Escribís.
3. Escriben.
IMPERFECT.
1. Escribía.
2. Escribías.
3. Escribía.
I wrote, was
writing.
1. Escribíamos.
2. Escribíais.
3. Escribían.
PRETERIT.
1. Escribí.
2. Escribiste.
3. Escribió.
I wrote.
1. Escribimos.
2. Escribisteis.
3. Escribieron.
FUTURE.
1. Escribiré.
2. Escribirás.
3. Escribirá.
I shaU (or will)
write.
1. Escribiremos.
2. Escribiréis.
3. Escribirán.
IMPERATIVE.
2. Escribe.
Write (thou). | 2. Escribid. Write (you)
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Escriba.
2. Escribas.
8. Escriba.
I may write.
1. Escribamos.
2. Escribáis.
3. Escriban.
♦ This is the only instance of irregularity in the verb Escribir,
Digitized
by Google
CONJUGATIONS,
407
1. Escribiría.
2. Escribirías.
3. Escribiría.
IMPERFECT. — First Termination.
1. Escribiríamos.
I would (or
should) write.
2. Escribiríais.
3. Escribirían.
1. Escribiera.
2. Escribieras.
3. Escribiera.
1. Escribiese.
2. Escribieses.
3. Escribiese.
Second Termination,
1. Escribiéramos.
I might, would,
or should
write.
2. Escribierais.
3. Escribieran.
Third Termination,
1. Escribiésemos.
I might, would,
or should
write.
2. Escribieseis.
3. Escribiesen.
FUTURE.
1. Escribiere. I might, &c.,
write.
2. Escribieres.
3. Escribiere.
1. Escribiéremos.
2. Escribiereis.
3. Escribieren.
COMPOUND TENSES.
These are formed by joining the several tenses of the auxil-
iary haber to the past participle of the verb expressing the
action.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PERFECT.
I have spoken,
I have learned,
I have written,
1. He \ hablado.
2. Has > aprendido.
3. Ha ) escrito.
Yo he hablado.
Yo he aprendido.
Yo he escrito.
Hemos \ hablado.
Habéis > aprendido.
Han ) escrito.
Digitized
by Google
408
CONJUGATIONS.
PAST PBRPBOT.
3.
Ihad spoken,
I had learned,
I had written.
Había \ hablado.
Habías > aprendido.
Había ) escrito.
Yo había hablado.
Yo había aprendido.
Yo había escrito.
Habíamos \ hablado.
Habíais > aprendido.
Habían ) escrito.
PRETERIT PERFECT.
I had spoken,
I had leamd.
I had written.
L Hube ^ hablado.
2. Hubiste. > aprendido.
3. Hubo ) escrito.
Yo hvbe hablado.
Yo hube aprendido.
Yo hvbe escrito.
Hubimos \ hablado.
Hubisteis > aprendido.
Hubieron. 3 escrito.
I shall have spoken.
I shall have learned.
I shall have written.
1. Habré \ hablado.
2. Habrás > aprendido.
3. Habrá 3 escrito.*
FUTURE PERFECT.
Yo habré hablado.
Yo habré aprendido.
Yo habré escrito.
Habremos \ hablado.
Habréis . > aprendido.
Habrán j escrito.
THE SEVEN PBINCIPAL CLASSES OF BEOTJLAB
ntBEOTTLAB VEBBK
FIBST CLASS.
Acertar.
To hit the mark.
INDICATIVE.
present.
1. Acierto.
2. Aciertas.
3. Acierta.
I hit the mark.
1. Acertamos.
2. Acertáis.
3. Aciertan.
* The other compound tenses are conjugated in like manner.
Digitized
by Google
CONJUGATIONS,
409
2. Acierta.
1. Acierte.
2. Aciertes.
3. Acierte.
IMPERATIVE.
I 2. Acertad.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Acertemos.
2. Acertéis.
3. Acierten.
The following verba, and their compounds, are conjugated like
ACERTAR:
Acrecentar.
To increase.
Derrengar.
To break the back.
Adestrar.
To render skilful.
Despernar.
To cut off the legs.
Alentar.
To breathe.
Despertar.
To awake.
Apacentar.
To feed.
Desterrar.
Apretar.
To squeeze.
Empedrar.
To pave.
Arrendar.
To hire.
Empezar.
To begin.
Asentar.
To place.
Encerrar.
To lock up.
Aserrar.
To saw.
Encomendar.
To recommend.
Aterrar.
To throw down.
Enterrar.
To bury.
Atestar.
To stuff.
Escarmentar.
To take warning.
Atravesar.
To cross.
Fregar.
To rub.
Aventar.
To winnow.
Gobernar.
To govern.
Calentar.
To warm.
Helar.
To freeze.
Cegar.
To bUnd.
Herrar.
To shoe.
Cerrar.
To shut.
Invernar.
To winter.
Comenzar.
To commence.
Mentar.
To mention.
Concertar.
To agree.
Merendar.
To take a collation.
Confesar.
To confess.
Negar.
To deny.
Decentar.
To taste for the
Nevar.
To snow.
first time.
Pensar.
To think.
Quebrar.
To break.
Sosegar.
To quiet.
Recomendar.
To recommend.
Soterrar.
To bury.
Regar.
To water.
Temblar.
To tremble.
Reventar.
To burst.
Tentar.
To tempt
Segar.
To cut down.
Trasegar.
To rake.
Sembrar.
To sow.
Tropezar.
To stumble.
Sentar.
To set.
Digitized
by Google
410
CONJUGATIONS.
8E00ND CLASS.
Agostar.
To put or go to bed.
INDICATIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Acuesto.
I put or go to bed.
1. Acostamos.
2. Acuestas.
2. Acostáis.
3. Acuesta.
3. Acuestan.
IMPERATIVE.
2. Acuesta.
1 2. Acostad.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
,
PRESENT.
1. Acueste.
1. Acostemo&
2. Acuestes.
2. Acostéis.
3. Acueste.
3. Acuesten.
Ths following verbs, and their compounds, are conjugated lik
Acostar :
Acordar.
To agree.
Consolar.
To console.
Agorar.
To divine.
Contar.
To count
Almorzar.
To breakfast
Costar.
To cost.
Amolar.
To grind.
Degollar.
Í0 behead.
Aporcar.
To hoe.
Demostrar.
To demonstrate.
Apostar.
To bet.
Descollar. .
To surpass.
Aprobar.
To approve.
Desconsolar.
To discourage.
Asolar.
To waste.
Desolar.
To desolate.
Atronar.
To thunder.
Desollar.
To skin.
Avergonzar.
To shame.
Desvergonzarse.
To be impudent
Colar.
To strain.
Emporcar.
To dirty.
Colgar.
To hang.
Encordar.
To string.
Comprobar.
To verify.
Encontrar.
To meet
Engrosar.
To engross.
Resollar.
To breathe.
Forzar.
To force.
Rodar.
To roll.
Holgar.
To rest.
Rogar.
To entreat
Hollar.
To tread.
Soldar.
To solder.
Mostrar.
To show.
Soltar.
To loose.
Poblar.
To people.
Sonar.
To sound.
Probar.
To prove.
Soñar.
To dream.
Recordar.
To remind.
Tostar.
To toast
Recostar.
To lie down.
Trocar.
To barter.
Regoldar.
To belch.
Tronar.
To thunder.
Renovar.
To renew.
Volar.
To fly.
Reprobar.
To reprove.
Volcar.
To overturn.
Rescontar.
To compensate.
Digitized
by Google
CONJUGATIONS.
411
THIBD
GLASS.
Mover.
1 To move.
INDICATIVE.
present.
1. Muevo.
2. Mueves.
3. Mueve.
1. Movemos.
2. Movéis.
3. Mueven.
IMPERATIVE.
2. Mueve.
1 2. Moved.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Mueva.
2. Muevas.
3. Mueva.
1. Movamos.
2. Mováis
3. Muevan.
The following verbs, and their compounds, are conjiigated I
Mover:
Absolver. To absolve.
Disolver. To dissolve.
Doler. To grieve.
Llover. To rain.
Moler. To grind.
Morder. To bite.
Retorcer. To twist again
Solver. To solve.
Torcer. To twist.
Volver. To turn.
:
FOUBTH CLASS.
Atender.
1 To attend.
INDICATIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Atiendo.
2. Atiendes.
3. Atiende.
1. Atendemos.
2. Atendéis.
3. Atienden.
IMPERATIVE.
2. Atiende.
1 2. Atended.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Atienda.
2. Atiendas.
3. Atienda.
1. Atendamos.
2. Atendáis.
3. Atiendan.
Digitized
by Google
412
CONJUGATIONS.
The following verbs, and their compounds, have the same
irregularities a^ Atender :
Ascender. To ascend.
Entender. To understand.
Cerner To sift.
Extender. To extend.
Condescender. To condescend.
Heder. To stink.
Contender. To contend.
Hender. To split
Defender. To defend.
Perder. To lose.
Desatender. To neglect.
Tender. To stretch out
Descender. To descend.
Trascender. To transcend.
Encender. To kindle.
Verter. To pour out.
Sentir.
1 Tú feel
INDICATIVE.
present.
1. Siento.
1. Sentimos.
2. Sientes.
2. Sentís.
3. Siente.
3. Sienten.
IMPERATIVE.
2. Siente.
1 2. Sentid.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
present.
1. Sienta.
1. Sintamos.
2. Sientas.
2. Sintáis.
3. Sienta.
3. Sientan.
imperfect.
First Termination.
1. Sentiría, &c.
Second Termination.
1. Sintiera.
1. Sintiéramos.
2. Sintieras.
2. Sintierais.
3. Sintiera.
3. Sintieran.
Third Termination.
1. Sintiese.
1. Sintiésemos.
2. Sintieses.
2. Sintieseis.
3. Sintiese.
3. Sintiesen.
Digitized
by Google
CONJUGATIONS.
413
FUTURE.
1. Sintiere.
1. Sintiéremos.
2. Sintieres.
2. Sintiereis.
3. Sintiere.
3. Sintieren.
The following
verba, and their compounds,
irregularities as Sentir :
have the same
Adherir.
To adhere.
Digerir.
To digest
Advertir.
To advert
Herir.
To wound.
Arrepentirse.
To repent.
Hervir.
To boil.
Asentir.
To assent.
Ingerir.
To ingraft
Conferir.
To confer.
Invertir.
To invert.
Consentir.
To consent.
Pervertir.
To pervert
Controvertir.
To controvert
Preferir.
To prefer.
Convertir.
To convert.
Referir.
To refer.
Deferir.
To defer.
Requerir.
To require.
Diferir.
To differ.
SIXTH CliASS.
Pedir
1 To ask.
INDICATIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Pido.
1. Pedimos.
2. Pides.
2. Pedís.
3. Pide.
3. Piden.
PRETERIT.
1. Pedí.
■
1. Pedimos
2. Pediste.
2. Pedisteis.
3. Pidió.
3. Pidieron
.
IMPERATIVE.
2. Pide.
1 2. Pedid.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Pida.
1. Pidamos.
2. Pidas.
2. Pidáis.
3. Pida.-
3. Pidan.
IMPBRFBOT. — First Termination,
1. Pediría, &c.
Digitized
by Google
414
CONJUGATIONS.
Second Termination,
1. Pidiera.
1. Pidiéramos.
2. Pidieras.
2. Pidierais.
3. Pidiera.
3. Pidieran.
Third Termination.
1. Pidiese.
1. Pidiésemos.
2. Pidieses.
2. Pidieseis.
3. Pidiese.
3. Pidiesen.
FUTURE.
1. Pidiere.
1. Pidiéremos.
2. Pidieres.
2. Pidiereis.
3. Pidiere.
3. Pidieren.
The following verba, and the
ir compounds, have the i
irregularitie
s as Pedir:
Arrecir. To benumb.
Gemir. To groan.
Ceñir. To belt
Medir. To measure.
Colegir. To collect.
Regir. To rule.
Competir. To contend.
Rendir. To render.
Concebir. To conceive.
Reñir. To quarreL
Constreñir. To constrain.
Repetir. To repeat.
Derretir. To melt.
Seguir. To follow.
Desleir. To dissolve.
Servir. To serve.
Elegir. To elect.
Teñir. To dye.
Embestir. To attack.
Vestir. To dress.
SEVENn
I CLASS.
Conducir.
1 To conduct
INDICi
ITIVB.
PREfi
lENT.
1. Conduzco.
1. Conducimos.
2. Conduces, &c.
2. Conducís, &a
PRBT
ERIT.
1. Conduje.
1. Condujimos.
2. Condujiste.
2. Condujisteis.
3. Condujo.
3. Condujeron.
Digitized
by Google
CONJUGATIONS, 415
IMPERATIVE.
2. Conduce. I 2. Conducid.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Conduzca, &c. I 1. Conduzcamos, &c.
iMPERFEOT.-^i^*r«i Termination,
1. Conduciría, &c. I 1. Conduciríamos, &c.
Second Termination,
1. Condujera, &c. I L Condujéramos, &c.
Third Termination.
1. Condujese, &c. | 1. Condujésemos, &c.
FUTURE.
1. Condujere, &c. | 1. Condujéremos, &c.
Ths folloimng verbs are conjugated like Conducir:
Aducir.
To adduce.
Producir.
To produce.
Deducir.
To deduce.
Reducir.
To reduce.
Introducir.
To introduce.
Traducir.
To translate
N. B.—*Conocer^ and all verbs ending in eer, of more than two syllables,
follow the irregularity of Conducir in the present indicative and subjuncUve,
and in the imperative. Elsewhere regular.
Digitized
by Google
416
CONJUGATIONS.
g
s
0;
1
g
i
1 i
. e
^
•c
•g
«
;c
•c
*C *E
09 -g
*3
*3
'3
•3
'3
•^4
53
*3 '5
c
cr"
cr"
cr
c
o^
O*
cr o<
"S
-s
-s
■s
-s
-s
■s
'S 'S
^
.if
*l
1
y
f
1
1
rieseis,
riereis.
9 '
ei-g
•3
*3
•3
*3
*3
'3
'3 's
^
cr
cr"
cr"
cr"
a*
o^
o^
o*
cr o'
-s
'S
'S
'S
-s
•s
-s
-s
'S 'S
OQ
s
8
s
a
1
^
8
1
1
[riésemos,
iriéremos,
3
*3
*3
*3
'3
'3
3
B B
P^
o^
o*
o*
a"
a*
a*
o*
a* a*
P
'iJ
Tí
'ij
TS
TS
TS
'^
rri -0
. <
<
-<
<
<3
<
<
^ ^
<
r 2
. 9
i
|-
Í
4
Í
riese,
riere.
CO '3
3
3
'3
3
*3
*3
*3 *5
CÍ5
^
o^
cr"
cr»
a*
a"
o<
o«
cr o<
g
.£
1
Í
'S
'S
■s
-s
"3
'S
'S
'S 'S
ñ
1
1
1
1
Í
s
Í
1
s
Í
í
^
Í
eses,
eres.
O
o
0)
4
a*
1
*3
cr
s
*3
!5
S 1
•g
:e
•c
i?
'S
'S
-s
'S
"S
'S
"S
"S
'S -3
H
"3
s*
1
h-3
-^
<;
-d
^
g"
cf
^^
¿
•Í
&
i Í
«
'S
^
;S
.2
•c
:s
•c -c
H
^
H
r4 '3
*3
*3
*3
3
"3
0
*3 '3
u
H
s
cr
cr"
cr
a"
o^
cr"
u*
cr c
#r*
•^
'C
'C
'C
rS
TS
'C
n3
r^ ro
3
PLi
cS
L <i
<
<3
<
<
<i
<3
<J <3
5
Ú
g
ü
ci
j<
C
»4
C
£
PM
Cli
^
t5
Í
é! .
1
>l
1
Í
1
■8
^
SI
'^99/d9diuj k^
-
1
-^
^
1
3
Digitized
by Google
CONJUGATIONS.
417
I
•TJ 'Ü 'Ü
a a a
< < <
tí
i
I
II
g s
•Í
S
.sf
■? I
s §
• s
_^ a
Í g
a ^
rS 'd
d a
2
I
3
«r
2
1 1
Í Í
I I
II
>
§» I I
. '2 ^
^ I "S
'w 'w 'd
fl fl fl
^ <3 ^
.1
'w 'w 'd 'w
S S § 3
-S
•w TÍ 'w 'w
§ s s g
of • "
rH O" ;§ S' ^
'd "w 'd "d
0 a tí a
< < < <
If II
4
S
g
I
08 08
4
Í
a
g g
Í f f
a fl
rd 'tí
§ g
I
u
§
^
® © ©
H H H
^ S S I
'f99/d9dtUf
Digitized
by Google
418
CONJUGATIONS.
1^
1
. a a S
"Sil
"S a
a s
I I •.
<) <j ^
'§ 1 1
.«f .2 -g
*§ I 1 I
^ í Í
& ^ ^
^
1 a
í
I ^
T
1^3
O
H
.i
I
Tí
I
•i
4
I
s.
r
3 i
Si -E
i
O
H
i i i
'lia
ííl
3 3 3
9 O
6 H
í
<J <J ^
'I
rH CQ
Digitized
by Google
CONJUGATIONS.
419
>
I
1
I
»^ Ph
I
i
8.
dicen.
decían.
dijeron.
1
'tí
i
"O
1
1 » 1
a o a
1
(3
0 fi 0
£ £ S
s
jS
£ £ £
0*
^ i 1
1
á
f
¡a
III
crf S S S»
■g
S
Q 1
J
'tí 'tí na
^ -tí rS 'tí
•o
"d
'í
'tí
ben
ben
ben
a
a
F
a
3^0
iS
ü
¿
M
¿ J8 J
^ I í
• .3 ,s «
1
1
1
III
'"lis
'p
ji
1
9 9 9
•tí 'tí na
•tí
'tí
•g -o -o
d
. i i ^
&
á
á
« « á
a ¿ i
i
¿
1
• ,
oil J ^
00 ití 'tí 'tí
tí
Ci
J
lia»
0 0 tí
a
M £ M
2
J
J
£ £ £
0
1
a
í
1
Iff
¿ M £
£
ü
J§
£
i j j
4íl
'tí
1
í
m
fl
fH
tí 0 0
- ^ S S
n
(§
f^
& & &
lili
¿ S fe
1 S S S I
I ' ■ ' I
Digitized
by Google
420
CONJUGATIONS.
1
"I
I
■i a
'■f III I
ill
L (3 3 ©
S 3
i
Í
01 01 Pi
O W W 9
Í
o"
g
i
s
^
o
i
I
.2 r2 ^
I
I
I
Ph
f i i t
it tí
nil
lili
i
(^ 'f99/U9dlUl ^
Q '
^
04
Digitized
by Google
CONJUGATIONS.
421
1
. -a
8
« a
.23
.2
.2
a
8 § 8 §
Ü o Ü o
S
s
0
.2
i I
I I
.2
2
a
I
s s
Hi.» 'O
.1
o
o
6
g
0 8 8 8
P O Q O
O O © O
i
I
55
^
§888
ü o o o
-5 e .tS
0
o
i
e3
M
I
I 1
1 8
§ o
ti
tí
H
n
03
8 8
4 é i 2
1-* ^ O) G>
<U .üí «S «Íh
8 8 8 8
o ü ü o
s s g
H H H
s
C^ 'p9/jt9dtUJ ^
Digitized
by Google
422
CONJUOATIONS.
-i
8
6
T
P3
>
O
O
-^1
B
OS
•S
§ I
I
a
■J? I • 1
•O 'd •© ^
•s
.sis
P P P
8^
p
s
i I
i 1
p p
f §
p
'd
s
09
o
p3
p3
.1
jd ^ 7^
•tJ 'O 'O «d
d «M <f4 aa^
•w "d 'd TS
dabas,
diste.
í
•d
4
1
darías,
dieras,
dieses,
o
4
lá
1
P
4 i i
1 1 S
£
•
s
1
1
i
í 1 1
3 s s
^
1
•}39/M(llUl
1
1
»2
V
i
1
•
Digitized
by Google
CONJUGATIONS.
423
55
^•a
i i
I 5
í 1 .3
í í I
td s % M
«S a> o> a> >
*9 tJ "TS "^
¥ -í -f
S S £
o d> o
ÍQ »Q rQ
^ § f í
„ 8 2
«q) «^ «(])
« P « Q
p «
í
sí -2
.f 1
s
^
Q
o
00
•»
.§
1
S
1
1
as
H
s
S
J
¿5
. i i Ú t
O. <M a> O O
•^ ^ »9 'O
I
ilil
s. -I I
£ i í i í
Sí I Zf V "5
o S o Q o
•§•
O S 3
H H H
'^ 2 32
í-t Oí eo
(^ '^/MdtUJ ^
Digitized
by Google
424
CONJUGATIONS.
a;
1
I
T
^
^
g
H
O
1-^
n
I
P o
Sf Í Í Í
-I ^ I I
I § M
o o o o
'^ P Q p Q
•tí d
o
p
I
o
"9
I
I
.1^
i í I -^
A I I I
S o b
1^ rQ rO
-• f I
¿ il ¿
O
S
'd
S i
tS 'Cí "TJ "TJ
a B s
^ H »«
^10
« -s" 2 .a
^ '3 S S S
;g *g .g ,2 ,2
0 Q J 0 0
^¡J 'w ^o ^¡5 ^^
f i
i i i i
i § s a
3 0 0 0 Q
P P P P 2
I I í
r^ r^ fQ
iff
í i i
i
P
O) ••-»
0
'd
•# í I
á 5
g g
s
© ^
0 ®
©
á
■^ -^ -c I?
I I. -s I
1 1^ I
^ u u
^ K ^ ^ •
1 ^ s g I
I ' — . — ' "i
R^ •f39/Mdmf le,
Digitized
by Google '^
CONJUGATIONS.
425
1
^
«
<í
"**
••«
1
^
1^
1
i
ü
^
S
o
s
^
•iS
'tí
d
o
%^
.2
'p
1
1
>
i
2
09
H
2
í
.8
H f I
to
í í g" I
^. a I .§ I
g) g) S[) g)
» » » p¿]
5 g) g) g)
í« w w w
S ^ « 3
2 2* "^ "ts
«1; 4 <i; ^
I
[
« !^ .® .1 .s
í I I I I
• .í -í .í .a"
allí I
S I I I I
i i i i i
o i 3 a g
i I I I I
Sf I I §) I
M » M M M
á :s I i I
g 5) 3) §) 3)
I
i i f i
i . ., .. .-
S .bo 3) 3} §>
^ M í- í- tj
k» tp «N <M «M
Sí
fcf .5 .2 .2 .2
g 3) I 5) I
(N S
M M M
© © ©
Eh H H
^ S S I
2i
Digitized
by Google
426
ICONJÜQATIONS.
T
<
O
O
I
ílll 1
o> a> a> a> O)
^ í
. tí
i i = .
^ P^ H »
i
»
el
.1"
o
03
Pt4
1
I
«^1 I -^
^1%
I S f S
^ W H W
lili
I
^ a> S a>
S i «9
e fc fc e
^ o O) a>
. of
.2f
*
^
1
1
1
í
g
g
E
o
o
o
•
O
Í
í
a
i
1
*g
2
s
g
g
g
S
E
1
H
»
H
»
»
H i i i
s
í í í í
^ íí í í
g g i É
(H H S » »
E^ H H
dj •fOi/MdtUf k|
3
D
GQ
Digitized
by Google
CONJUGATIONS.
427
I
s
.fill
-I I I I
M dl n
i Ú ^
s s s
•a •?! •*
>4 pCa ,£3
of ^ S ^ S
^ '3 .S «S «S
^ ^ ^ 'ia ,a
5Í Í Í
1 i i I S
I ^g I I I
tí (]3 n 3 9
•§
4
Í
5 ■§ s
S .2 J§
e9 ^ 0^
WWW
bS S !i
R CO H
S Si s
»^ Ph A4
I
H W W W
.8
I.
á; <?
s
Í i Í
i i I I I
» '§ I I I
of of ^ ^ ¿J
it ^s t s S
tí M M tí n
^. H ^ ¿5
(ÍJ 'pd^jtddtu^ ^
I
1
03
Digitized
by Google
428
CONJUQATJONS.
í
>
O
H
CQ
.§•
O
J^
1 1 Í I
~1
CQ
►■ á
I
«5
iS
I
I
i
i á í t
I I
-•"I áí t
•í; I
1. I I
<í ^
i S á á
b B ^ ^ 9
t i i i t
I
1
i? -f I
•r
I
i:
í
m
^ - B
i i
iS I I fa I
¿ i i í
M £ ¿ e
8 s !
Ill
I
¿5 ^ ^
Jt. ^'^ S
Digitized
by Google
CONJUGATIONS.
429
i^
CO g>
1
g
1
s
t
1
1
s
d
a
0
0
d
d
3
3
s
•r»
•r-»
•r»
•I-»
•I-»
•I-»
•I-»
•I-»
•r»
« %
1
.2"
I
i
1
.3"
!
.2
3
S
^s
3
0
0
3
3
3
3
•r»
•I-»
•r-»
•I-»
•I-»
•r»
•1-»
•I-»
f
S"
8*
^
Í
Í
f
S"
a
g
1
i
g
a
-•|
4
1
1
1
1.
1
4
^
>?
Hs
t?
^
Hs
>?
^
•-»
I.
r
i
^ i5
8) *§) 8)
rH « 3) So S)
^ ^ »? ^
I II ^
I I
g,
bo bo
o a
3.
I" l a _ ^^
3 3 S3 3 3
H^ H^ »-a H^ »^
H ^ ^
;^ s s
I
S ^ , ' •§
02
Digitized
by Google
426
CONJUQATJONS.
i
T
I
•Í «f
•^ Í S E E
o a> o a>
^ § ^ I
» » H H
•3 .a* .Í jf
*£ g g i i
.f I í ^ í
s § a s a
S g I I I
H pq Pel pq H
(4
O
H
«
o
O
g
i2
4S Oh
1
1
«2
I
P-i
eg
2" i "8*
I I f 1
^ » S H
ái 4 á; >?
s;
g
I I Í
tS s s
I
^. ^ ^ ^ .
I ^ s s i
0^ 'p9/j9diU[ \^
»-? GQ
Digitized
by Google
CONJUGATIONS.
427
|i
J I 2 ^
I
'III
ill f
u u n (z)
^ J a
Í Í «
^ OS Mri
í "S s
tI3 n n
IJ lllll
.i .s* .si
f-i" I I I
•S t t t
^ d> t '^ <*
i i Í
S s a
s s s
L^ «^ S^
^11
f é £
n Pd t^d
1 1 •^' ¿
I I. -^ "S
s
3
.£3 A
i
I
I
lit
% i %
rf cT g*
rf- ca" .S — —
ft, ^ -g -g I
tq U Cij ::;; :]:)
^ H H
¿5 'f^/u^duii
03
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
428
CONJUOATIONS.
T
>
I
O
>
o
a
It
"llii
•8
111
f
A" ^ á
1 11 Í
Hilt
i 1 1 Í
4 Í 1 1
I. -2 5
ill
.a
:§ 3
^
fl s fl s
S . g 8 2
K g 4) « 0
^ :s <s « e
• ■ ■
1 Í I
run
I
iT 8 • *
S S ^ ^
fin
i e s ¿
ff ^ • * 5
M £ ¿ e
• a a
g s I
R « S 8 S
" :s ^ <S <S
* «t »
Í SIS
^ c »:
^ ^ ^ H .
1 3 S S I
S > , ' -g
i
Digitized
by Google
CONJUGATIONS.
429
J^
i ^ Í 4
oi^ t % I
d fl 3 P
.22 ^ § *2 '2
<^{^ S) & 3) S)
CÍ D P 3 3
S) bo bo S)
3 3 3 3
•^ H» h» H^
i ^' i ^ i
« S) S) 4 S)
3 3 3 3 3
of •§ .sf .2 .Í
S) S) S) S) S)
??
Í
Í
^
^
F!
g
Q
s
1
s>
t
t
4
^
3
Ha
^
t?
3
^ 'I 1
i i I
^ 4 5
S) §) S)
3 3 3
H» t-a Ha
ci §' S'
fea*
^ I IS
r
I
S) bo S)
<M & -S
« 5 -
3-3 3 3
t á,
g^ ,2 ^ C
th 9 5) CO bo
3 3 3 3
>^ H> »-i »-i
III I
ES P
é
Si ^
•I-» •!-• 'r^
Í I
9 S> S> Sb t«
3 S* S' 3 3
§ 1 1 1 f
Ha H^ »^ ►^ »^
&5 H t5
^ S S
02
^^ Digitized by VjOOQ IC
430
CONJUGATIONS.
T
eo" ^
J
a
1
1
1
1
C
a
t
°
o
°
^
O
'S
°
*
O
^
^
•Í
Í
^
.^
1
.sf
i
J ■
«\i
1
.-s
i§
á
jp
5
^
i.
^
O
o
o
°
O
°
**
*
°
o
-Í
1
i
a
o
a
1
o
o
Í
1
o
1
p?
O
í
o
■5 ^
I
P^
& fi
S
I
I
i
i5
" ^ «3 ^ e
t í
C i í í
'•* -í 5Í I
O O O O
í I i
^
lí
!Í i i
o o 0
fe»' ^
o o
o
I?
ílll
é I I í I
o ó o o o
. H H H .
I ^^ s I
I " < ' 8
i
Digitized
by Google
CONJUGATIONS.
431
|J
ii
. © a ^
CO |tf S o
2 » ;:3 ^
fl o o o
Sega fl
^ ^ g $ 2
tf S .2 .2 .2
.2
í
•í
■i
.2"
<rfl
i
1
1
i
1"
1
1
.2
o
'o
o
o
°
O
O
'o
"o
í
1
^
I
8-
í
í
^
í
i
g
s
§
-•1
i
a
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
o
O
o
O
o
o
O
o
O
<?
I á á I
4 ^ ^ ^
I
I i i i
11
4 i
I f i
5 -s ^
?
i %
o o
M ?3 » -2
IB o o o
I ^ í í í
m fe .2 .2 .2
M 1»^ I— I imI 1^
H
o o o
^ t ^ ^
i 3 S S
'pd/jtddtuj ^
Digitized
by Google
432
CONJUGATIONS.
T
^
Í Í Í ^
Ph P4 m Ph
1 a s i s
I ^ 5 J s
014 Oh £ (M £
P3
O
H
d
g
I
o
I
I
P-i
•f ** -I *á
Q;« 04 P« P*
«•| I I Í
CU p« p« P4
Oi Oi £ pLi
III
»! á; ^
I
' i -4
I
.r Í
1 I
g.1
i i
1 1
11
O S 5
P« P< P4
ii <¿ ¿
. ¿S ^ ¿5
Digitized
by Google
CONJUQATIONS.
433
I
«o g
C9 «c)
a
i
I
o o
\
t
I
I
.a
§
¿
i
(2
S S 5
S S S
i a I li
S. g.
Í
I
O
s
S
>
I % !:
o o
P^ PL,
m
S
Pu
^ W H
PL|
^ s
á á
? i
I?
.■1
CO fl fl • ..
o o 0 o
P4 P4 PI4 P4
^ § S '^
&4 CU P4 P4
' § § 8
(li (^ P-i
Hi I
I
c
á
g.
s s
t t
I I S S 8
2^ >L cu i:i4 p4
Q* oT
&4 (l4
H ^ ^
;§ s s
'pd/Mdtuf ^
H
Ü
Digitized
by Google
43é
CONJUGATIONS.
T
m
pq
% i
s I
1-H -iS
fe fe"
O 53
.^
a;
«I
I
I
1 §
i. II. I.
O»
i I
fe 'S
O» <§.
.1"
I
0-1
ill
O» O» O» O»
2 .á «
o* o* o^
C9 o
0
o*
08
1
&
i" f I '^"
O" C O" O"
^
I
d § i
lit
sí -f -i"
.^ ^ fe s
§§•33
O* O' O* O*
s
2
I
.■s
a
o
i § s s
i s s s
1k ^ ^ ¿
§ g -s I
O» O» O» &
1
i!
1
1
1
^
s
•3
§
c
P
í
(J<
o-
c
u*
cr-
o«
S C « a «
•N « trt fp^ «4
P 2. p p p
o* o* CF* o* cr
• 00 *^ w ^
¿ i; ^ iS iS
p p p p P
O» O» O» O» O»
(4
di
¿3
I.
^
. Eh H H
8 -g 'wJ 'r; ¿
g iH #©« CO ^
^ ' y ' "^
►
p
H
ü
«3
Digitized
by Google
CONJUGATIONS.
435
1^
•
fl
4
A ^
a
.2
2
S
3 a>
.5?
t
2
•fl
•fl
2"
*3
2 2 2
.3
p^ p^ p^
o
2 ..
2 t t t
.s' ^g 2 'i 2
I 2 « «g «
s
8"
^
^
8
s
a
a
sS
s
^
2
•S
is
tN
;si
;s
Pch
Pi
pes
Pi
^
.e
«»
i<i
■<5
'^
,
1
1
O
<33
1
e*
tT
1
-§
•^
*S
trt
•S
03
Pi
(S
1
J
Pu,
s
g
<¡B,
i^
•<
l-H
pui
dl
CO o
rH- ^
.á ^O t
2 t 2
í ■§
^ ,^ .^ !§
93 « » iS
*?.
á; ^
s s s
o o a>
•a t T!
J Í
T! "S T! « f
I
Reiría,
Riera,
Riese,
»^ »4 »4
^ ^ ¿5
^ ^ S
1
'pdÍJLddvix
1
3
525
Í5
Digitized
by Google
436
CONJUGATIONS.
•••
T
>
<
O
O
^
d
-1
1
1
1
1
oT
.2
.Si
1
'1
1
s
s
1
S
Í
-^1
Í
a
eg
M
m
cS
«
Á
á it
•I ^ S" I -I
n s m ñ s!
I 1
CO at CO m
I. •« -2
^ á; ^
. d B B
S J § I §
S, ^ '& A 'Si
I 1 Í I g
*^ «S $ a> a>
"S. I •&
wan
•^ Í Í I
1 g s s s
" I Í f Í
OS CQ CQ 03
I
^ hi A b
. ^ » » »
a. !; 'a 'S< '&
- I ^
Í Í Í
OVO
'& *& *l
^- .Í « I 2
M > Í I
CQ CQ CQ CQ
<JS
H E? H
i 3 S g
1^ •t»9/Mdiaj It,
(I
I
S5
^
P
Digitized
by Google
CONJUOATIONS.
437
'
d
(j
.
§
c
d
¿
CO d
§
.2
1
1
s
.2
i
a>
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
.2"
«
to-
•Í
.2
.3-
2.
•f
1
3
'%
:§
.2
1
.2
1
1
1
-3
CQ
1
1
1
1
1
1
«r
i
a"
í
Í
8
if
8
xff
s
o
s
a
o
1
2
•d
>«
*2
1
1
L 1
1
1
1
1
s
1
1
1
I*
&
M (1|
O
I,
t3
(3
o
0)
TJ
•3
ai
CQ
1
p3
cod i íá
•0
•«J «2* .'**
I
^ ^
oé *C
61) fd
i
1
£
>í
í
■%
f
1
«J
1
1
1
"i
"i
.2
1
1
1
4
.á
í
i
1
1
i
^
1
W
^
1
1
1
(»
. H H H
5» "S rrt 'ra
» tH ^ 00
(Í¡ 'pdfjLddmi Cj^
1-9
0)
Digitized
by Google
438
CONJUaATIONS.
I
T
a
¿ ^ 4
i I t
1 I
•? T?
•2
^.a -a -A "2 -d S
•I i
i §
' Í Í
1 1
o o )i
sag
08 3 PS
.2" <¿
21
g.9
I
*o
? ■? 9
H H H H
:5»
CO
•d
(4
1
W
•
«
oé
é
Ó
2 >
1
0
?
%
if
s
*C
1
i
5>>
-M
"^
<M
-«J
<«J
•♦-•
■«J
■4-»
.2
»-H
,Si
(a
f
o
13
1
1
®^ 1
t
1
7
1
1
OS
1
Í
7
7-S
"»«»■
IS
^
fri
^
5
(h
f^
is
u
i3
i;
^ C
§
1
1
tS
-«J
■♦^
■*J
•4J
■*J
é
H
á
of
Í
•2
á
i
0)
© -tí
i
S
" "S
^
•?
S
•s
T?
T?
?l
(Í
(2
- H
H
H
>i4
íl
S
OQ
E-i
■?
S
g
%
«
»J
»4
»4
s
»— 1
Ps
S,
1
1
1
1
^
S
il
1
>^
1
1
1
^ a
'}99/d9dUiJ
a
«1
g
;»
3
fc
H
E
'd
3
i
g
S
HI
a
5
Digitized
by Google
CONJUGATIONS.
439
^
CO ^ í5 ;5
5 S S
> > >
«r q ^
c^" 2 á ;S
o
-i
I
o
^w .2
-3
*
1
1
.1
a
1
-3
1
.2
'3
k
"
>-
k
►
>-
»r
oT
a*
*5
•Í
.!i
•Í
i
•2
^
^
1
1
1
o
a
o
í2
1
o
i.
2
o
a
in
O
I
Í
O
a a
ÍÍ ^
ya
sg
08*
.
«
u
08
S
^- ®
s2
»d
2
61
'0
•2
.2
.2
«^-a
»«£
08
oS
13
13
08
08
^
^
^
>
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
é
1
d
X
^
^
^
o
d
1
i
CÍ 2
1
1
1
c5
s
•d
i^
1
1
TS
IS
■^
13
13
'3
'?
S?
*?
^
Í
s
4
io
t>
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
^
I
I
H
i
.•&
á
„-
1
á
•d
08
1
f
>
¿3
-3
•3
13
"«
13
'3
13
-3
H
(2
I i>
í>
^
^
í>
í>
^
^
>
i
(In
¿3
"g
i
^
¿
1
1
:2
i
^
í
1
tH
Oí
CO
§
1
1
í
'pd/dddmj
1
^
g-
|4
>
»-•
H
ü
tj
-3 •
Jz;
-<
CA
P
g
H
Q
P4
r/^
Digitized
by Google
440
CONJUQATIONS.
I
.1
T
«5
Pi
P
O
. i -i í I
f
«f .2"
I I
^ I s I
&
c
a
^
o
g
'.9
1
g
>
>
>
d § s
CO C3
c^ a
9 -2
.a
i
s
o
p p
> >
> >
9
a
CO
&
es (m
6A >d
P p
p p
g o
.2" .S
I Í I
^ Í
B i
61 >d
p p
►^ »5 r
> > >
8 § g
Ban
S s s
V© *« »2
á I i Í
q a a £
ti >€ .^ .s .s
p p *p *c a
► ► k i^ ►
£ IS 2
61 >« .S
5 C P
o
4>
i> i> > l> P-
H H H
tH (M CO 3
(^ 'pd/u9diuj 1^
8
525
n
Digitized
by Google
CONJUGATIONS.
441
1
eo fl
I 1 I
► F ►
e .2 of
.2 1^1
-Í S
> > >
2
t
. g fl a fl
§ ^g g S 2
S g .2 .2 .2
? * P k P
*g *C irt S is
sf
O
s
§
s
&
s
s
s
^
1
J
2
^
>
>
>
>
•s -a s
M- g •
> > >
I S -.
5 (2 p3
H
¿2
^ 1
«■ ii I I
i
í> > > í>
á;
'^ 1
ft •♦>»
• é c3
S ^ .2
>- > p-
í í
- cf of © 9*^
S § .2 .2 .2
^ > ^ > >
H H H
T-4 04 CO
i . .
.S5
Ü9
Digitized
by Google
M2
CONJUGATIONS.
COSJVQATIOIS OF A VEBB DT THE BEFLEZIVE
FOBM.
INFINITIVE.
Lavarse.
1 To wash one's self.
PRBSEirr PARTICIPLE.
Lavándose
I Washing one's self.
PAST PARTICIPLB.
Lavádose.
1 Washed one's self.
INDICATIVE
PRESENT.
1.
2.
3.
Me lavo.
Te lavas.
Se lava.
I wash myself.
1.
2.
3.
Nos lavamos.
Os laváis.
Se lavan.
IMPERFECT.
1.
2.
3.
Me lavaba.
Te lavabas.
Se lavaba.
I was washing,
washed, or
used to wash
myself.
1.
2.
3.
Nos lavábamos.
Os lavabais.
Se lavaban.
PRETERIT.
1.
2.
3.
Me lavé.
Te lavaste.
Se lavó.
I washed my-
self.
1.
2.
3.
Nos lavamos.
Os lavasteis.
Se lavaron.
FUTURE.
1.
2.
3.
Me lavaré.
Te lavarás.
Se lavará.
I shall wash
myself.
1.
2.
3.
Nos lavaremos.
Os lavaréis.
Se lavarán.
IMPERATIVE.
Lávate. Wash thyself. | 2. Lavaos. Wash you^
Digitized
by Google
CONJUGATIONS,
443
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Me lave.
2. Te laves.
3. Se lave.
1. Me lavaría.
2. Td lavarías.
3. Se lavaría,
1. Me lavara.
2. Te lavaras.
3. Se lavara.
1. Me lavase.
2. Te lavases.
3. Se lavase.
1. Mo lavare.
2. Te lavares.
3. fíe lavare.
I may wash my-
self.
1. Nos lavemos.
2. Os lavéis.
3. Se laven.
IMPERFECT. — First Termination,
I would wash my-
self.
1. Nos lavaríamos.
2. Os lavaríais.
3. Se lavarían.
Second Termination,
I mi^ht, would,
or should wash
myself.
1. Nos laváramos.
2. Os lavarais.
3. Se lavaran.
Third Termination,
i mig-ht, would,
or should wash
myself.
1. Nos lavásemos.
2. Os lavaseis.
3. Se lavasen.
FUTUKE.
I might or should 1. Nos laváremos.
wash myself.
2. Os lavareis.
3. Se lavaren.
INFIíaTIVE.
Ayudarse. J To help each other.
PRESENT PARTICIPLE.
Ayudándose. [ Helping each other.
PAST PARTICIPLE.
Ayudádosc. | Helped each other.
Digiti:
zed by Google
U4:
CONJUGATIONS,
INDICATIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Nos ayuda- We help each
mos. other.
2. Os ayudáis.
3. Se ayudan.
PRETERIT.
1. Nos ayuda- We helped
mos. each other.
2. Os ayudasteis.
3. Se ayudaron.
IMPERFECrr.
1. Nos ayudaba- We used to
mos. help each
other.
2. Os ayudabais.
3. Se ayudaban.
FUTURE.
1. Nos ayudare- We shall help
mos. each other.
2. Os ayudaréis.
3. Se ayudarán.
2. Ayudaos.
IMPERATIVE.
I Help each other.
PRESENT.
1. Nos ayude- We may help
mos. each other.
2. Os ayudéis.
3. Se ayuden.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
IMPERE. — First Termination,
1. Nos ayuda- We would
riamos. help each
other.
2. Os ayudaríais.
3. Se ayudarían.
Second Termination,
1. Nos ayudara- We might,
mos. would, or
should help
each other.
¡3. Os ayudarais.
3. Se ayudaran.
1. Nob ayudáremos.
2. Os oyudareis.
3. Se ayudaren.
Third Termination,
1. Nos ayudase- We might,
mos. could, would,
or should
help each
other.
2. Os ayudaseis.
3. Se ayudasen.
FUTURE.
We might or should help
each other.
Digitized
by Google
CONJUGATIONS.
445
mPESSOHAL VESB&
Ahaneceb. I To grow light.
INDICATIVE.
Simple Tenses.
Present
Imperfect
Preterit
Future.
Amanece.
Amanecía.
Amaneció.
Amanecerá.
COMPOUNl
It grows light
It was growing light
It grew light
It will grow light
0 Tenses.
Perfect Ha amanecido.
Past Perf Había amanecido.
Pret Perf Hubo amanecido.
Future Perf Habrá amanecido.
It has grown light
It had grown light.
It had grown light
It will have grown light
IMPBR
ATIVB.
Amanezca.
1 Let it grow light
SÜBJÜÍ
rCTIVB.
Simple
Tenses.
Present
Imperfect
Future.
Amanezca.
r Amanecería, j
< Amaneciera. >
( Amaneciese. )
Amaneciere.
It may grow light
c might, ^
It < should, or > grow light
( would )
It should grow light
Compound Tenses.
Perfect Haya amanecido.
( Habría \ ama-
Past Perf < Hubiera > ne-
( Hubiese ) cido.
Future Perf Hubiere amane-
cido.
It may have grown light
C might have, ^ grown
It < should have, or > light
( would have )
It should have grown light
N. B. — Anochecer^ to. grow dark, is conjugated in the same
manner, and has the same irregularity.
Digitized
by Google
44G
Nevar.
CONJUGATIONS,
I To snow.
Present. Nieva.
Imperfect. Nevaba.
Preterit. Nevó.
Future. Nevará.
INDICATIVE.
Simple Tenses.
It snows.
It was snowing.
It snowed.
It will snow.
Compound Tenses.
Perfect. Ha nevado.
Pa^t Perf. Había nevado.
Pret. Perf. Hubo nevado.
Future Perf. Habrá nevado.
It has snowed.
It had snowed.
It had snowed.
It will have snowed.
Nieve.
IMPERATIVE.
I Let it snow.
Present. Nieve.
c Nevaría.
Imperfect. < Nevara.
( Nevase.
Future. Nevare.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Simple Tenses.
It may snow.
c might, ^
It < should, or > snow.
( would )
It should snow.
Compound Tenses.
Perfect. Haya nevado.
c Habría j
Past Perf < Hubiera > nevado.
( Hubiese )
Flit Perf. Hubiere nevado.
It may have snowed.
r might have, j
It < should have, or > snowed.
( would have )
It should have snowed.
N. B. — Helar ^ to freeze, is conjugated in the same manner,
nnd lias the same tenses irregular.
Digitized
by Google
Tronar.
CONJUGATIONS.
I To thunder.
447
INDICATIVE.
SiMPLB Tenses.
Present. Truena.
Imperfect. Tronaba.
Preterit. Tronó.
Future. Tronará.
It thunders.
It was thundering.
It thundered.
It will thunder.
Compound Tenses.
Perfect. Ha tronado.
Past Perf. Había tronado.
Pret. Perf Hubo tronado.
Future Perf. Habrá tronado.
It has thundered.
It had thundered.
It had thundered.
It will have thundered.
Truene.
IMPERATIVE.
I Let it thunder.
Present.
Truene.
C Tronaría.
c Tronaría. \
Imperfect. < Tronara. >
( Tronase. )
Future.
Perfect
Past Perf
Tronare.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Simple Tenses.
It may thunder.
( might,
It ^ should, or > thunder.
( would )
It should thunder.
Haya tronado.
{^^^^^ \ tro-
< Hubiera >
( Hubiese )^^^^-
Future Perf Hubiere tronado.
Compound Tenses.
It may have thundered.
might have, \
It I should have, or > thundered.
( would have )
It should have thundered.
N. B. — Llover^ to rain, is conjugated like this verb, and changes
also the o into ue in the same tenses. Escarchar^ to freeze ;
granizar, to hail ; lloviznar, to drizzle ; and relampaguear, to
lighten, are all regular.
Digitized
by Google
448 CONJUGATIONS.
Hacer, to he (when employed in reference to time and weather).
Present
Imperfect.
Preterit,
Future,
Hace.
Hacia.
Hizo.
Hará.
INDICATIVE.
Simple Tenses.
It is.
It was.
It was.
It will be.
Compound Tenses.
Perfect, Ha hecho.
Past Perf Había hecho.
Pret, Perf Hubo hecho.
Future Perf, Habrá hecho.
It has been.
It had been.
It had been.
It will have been.
Haga.
Present.
Imperfect,
Future,
IMPERATIVE.
I Let it be.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Simple Tenses.
Haga.
c Haría. \
} Hiciera. >
( Hiciese. )
Hiciere.
It may be.
c might,
It < should, or
( would
It should be.
be.
Compound TENSEa
Perfect, Haya hecho.
f Habría \
Past Perf, < Hubiera > hecho.
i Hubiese 3
Future Perf Hubiere hecho.
It may have been.
r might have, j
It < should have, or > been.
( would have )
It should have been.
Haber, when signifying there to he.
Hay.
Había.
Hubo.
Habrá.
^ There is.
( There are.
( There was.
( There were.
There will be.
Ha habido.
( There has been.
( There have been.
Había habido. There had been.
Hubo habido. There had been.
Habrá habido. There shall have
been.
Digitized
by Google
CONJUGATIONS.
449
Haya.
Let there be.
Haya habido.
There may
Haya.
There may be.
have been.
Habría.
r There might,
' There might,
Hubiera.
< would, or
Habría habido.
could.
Hubiese.
( should be.
Hubiera habido.
would.
Hubiere.
There might or
Hubiese habido.
or should
should be.
have been.
Hubiere habido.
There might
or should
•
have been.
DEFEC
TIVE&
The following verbs are found used only in the tenses and
persons given in the anneoced examples :
Placer.
To please.
INDICATIVE.
Pres.y Sd pers, sing., Place.
Imperf *' " Placía.
Preterit, " Plugo.
It pleases.
It was pleasing.
It pleased.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Pres,, 3d per s. sing.. Plegué.
Future Perfect, " Pluguiere.
Soler.
It may please.
It would please.
It might please.
It should please.
To he wont.
INDICATIVE.
Suelo.
Sueles.
Suele.
Solemos.
Soléis.
Suelen.
31
PRESENT.
I am wont.
Thou art wont.
He is wont.
We are wont.
You are wont.
They are wont.
ndhifrinmlf
450
CONJUGATIONS.
mPKRPKCT.
Splía.
I was wont.
Solías.
Thou wast wont
Solía.
He was wont
Solíamos.
We were wont
Solíais.
You were wont
Solían.
They were wont
Yacer.
1
♦ To lie dead.
No part of this verb is made use of except the third persons of
the present indicative, yace and yacen, which are generally in-
scribed on tombstones.
coHJiroATioir of a tebb nr tee passive voice.
INFINITIVE.
Ser perdonado. ) To be pardoned.
PRESENT PARTICIPLE.
Siendo perdonado. | Being pardoned.
PAST PARTICIPLE.
Habiendo sido perdonado. | Having been pardoned.
INDICATIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Soy perdona- I am pardoned.
do.
2. Eres perdo-
nado.
3. Es perdonado.
1. Somos perdonados.
2. Sois perdonados.
3. Son perdonados.
IMPERFECT.
1. Era perdona- I was or used to
do. be pardoned.
2. Eras perdonado.
3. Era perdonado.
1. Éramos perdonados.
2. Erais perdonados.
3. Eran perdonados.
Digitized
by Google
CONJUGATIONS.
451
PRETERIT.
1. Fui perdona- I was par-
do. doned.
2. Fuiste perdonado.
3. Fué perdonado.
1. Fuimos perdonados.
2. Fuisteis perdonados.
3. Fueron perdonados.
FUTURE.
1. Seré perdona- I shall be par-
do, doned.
2. Serás perdonado.
3. Será perdonado.
1. Seremos perdonados.
2. Seréis perdonados.
3. Serán perdonados.
IMPERATIVE.
2. Sé perdonado. Be pardoned. J 2. Sed perdonados.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Sea perdonado. I may be par-
doned.
2. Seas perdonado.
3. Sea perdonado.
1. Seamos perdonados.
2. Seáis perdonados.
3. Sean perdonados.
IMPERFECT. — Fir^t Termination,
1. Sería perdona- I would be
do. pardoned.
2. Serías perdonado.
3. Sería perdonado.
1. Seríamos perdonados.
2. Seríais perdonados.
3. Serían per dona doa.
Second Termination.
L Fuera perdo- I might, could,
nado. would, or
should be
pardoned.
2. Fueras perdonado.
3. Fuera perdonado.
1. Fuéramos perdonados.
2. Fuerais perdonados.
3. Fueran perdonados.
Digitized
by Google
452
CONJUGATIONS.
Third Termination.
1. Fuese perdo- I might, could,
nado. would, or
should be
pardoned.
2. Fueses perdonado.
3. Fuese perdonado.
1. Fuésemos perdonados.
2. Fueseis perdonados.
3. Fuesen perdonados.
1. Fuere perdo- I might or
nado. should be
pardoned.
2. Fueres perdonado.
3. Fuere perdonado.
FUTURE.
1. Fuéremos perdonados.
2. Fuereis perdonados.
3. Fueren perdonados.
1. He sido per-
donado.
2. Has sido per-
donado.
3. Ha sido per-
donado.
1. Había sido
perdonado.
2. Habías sido
perdonado.
3. Había sido
perdonado.
1. Hube sido
perdonado.
2. Hubiste sido
perdonado.
3. Hubo sido
perdonado.
Compound Tenses.
INDICATIVE.
PERFECT.
I have been
pardoned.
. 1. Hemos sido perdonados.
2. Habéis sido perdonados.
3« Han sido perdonados.
PAST PERFECT.
I had been
pardoned.
1. Habíamos sido j^rdona-
dos.
2« Habíais sido perdonados.
3. Habían sido perdonados.
PRETERIT PERFECT.
I had been
pardoned.
1. Hubimos sido perdonados.
2. Hubisteis sido perdonados.
3. Hubieron sido perdonados.
Digitized
by Google
CONJUGATIONS.
453
FUTURE PERFECT.
Habré sido I shall have been
perdonado, pardoned.
Habrás sido
perdonado.
Habrá sido
perdonado.
1. Habremos sido perdonados.
2. Habréis sido perdonados.
3. Habrán sido perdonados.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PERFECT.
Haya sido I may have been
perdonado, pardoned.
Hayas sido
perdonado.
Haya sido
perdonado.
1. Hayamos sido perdonados.
2. Hayáis sido perdonados.
3. Hayan sido perdonados.
PLUPERFECT. — First Termination,
Habría sido I would have
perdonado, been pardoned.
Habrías sido
perdonado.
Habría sido
perdonado.
1. Habríamos sido
perdonados.
2. Habríais sido perdonados.
3. Habrían sido perdonados.
Hubiera sido I might, could,
perdonado, would, or
should have
been pardoned.
Hubieras sido
perdonado.
Hubiera sido
perdonado.
Second Termination,
1. Hubiéramos sido
perdonados.
2. Hubierais sido perdonados.
3. Hubieran sido perdonados.
Hubiese sido I might, could,
perdonado, would, or
should have
been pardoned.
Hubieses sido
perdonado.
Hubiese sido
perdonado.
Third Termination,
1. Hubiésemos sido
perdonados.
2. Hubieseis sido perdonados.
3. Hubiesen sido perdonados.
Digitized
by Google
454
CONJUGATIONS.
FUTURE PERFECT.
1. Hubiere sido I might or
perdonado, should have
been pardoned.
2. Hubieres sido
perdonado.
3. Hubiere sido
perdonado.
1. Hubiéremos sido
perdonados.
2. Hubiereis sido perdonadoa
3. Hubieren sido perdonado&
Digitized
by Google
LIST
OF THE PRINCIPAL ifeREGULAR VERBS IN THE SPANISH
LANGUAGE.
N. B. — The figures placed after ea^h verb refer to the pa^e at which the model
conjugation for that verb is to be found. For instance^ the number 415
éhows that Aducir is conjugated like Conducir, found at page 415.
Absolver, 411.
Abstraer, 438.
Acertar, 406.
Acordar, 410.
Acostar, 410,
Acrecentar, 409.
Adestrar, 409.
Adherir, 413.
Adquirir, 416.
Advertir, 413.
Aducir, 415.
Agorar, 410.
Alentar, 409.
Almorzar, 410.
Amolar, 410.
Andar, 417.
Apacentar, 409.
Apostar, 410.
Aprobar, 410.
Apretar, 409.
Arrecirse, 414.
Arrendar, 409.
Arrepentirse, 413.
Ascender, 412.
Asentar, 409.
Asentir, 413,
Aserrar, 409.
Asir. 418.
AEy-hlar, 410.
Atender, 411.
Aterrar íetíbar por t ie-
rra K 4O0.
Atiífitar (reíleoar), 400.
Atraer, 4S&.
Atravusí^r^ 409.
Aventnr, «109.
A ventarsfí, 400,
ATorjfouzar^ 410,
Bendecir, 419.
Caber, 420.
Caer, 438,
Calentar. 409.
Ceffar, 409.
Ceñir, 414.
Cerner, 412.
Cerrar, 409.
Cocer, 421.
Colar, 410.
Colegir, 414.
Colgar, 410.
Comenzar, 409.
Competir, 414.
Concebir, 414.
Concertar, 409.
Condescender, 412.
Condolerse, 411.
Conducir, 414.
Conferir, 413.
Confesar, 409.
Conocer, 415.
Conseguir, 414.
Consentir, 412. .
Consolar, 410.
Constreñir, 414.
Contar, 410.
Contener, like Tener.
(See auxiliary verbs.)
Coatendtr, 412.
Coníradecír, 423.
tiontraer, 4-^,
Controvertir, 413.
C^jiiverLír^ lia,
Corregir, 414.
Dar, 433.
Deüaí^r, 43S.
Deí^^Gtftr, 4Ü9.
Decir, J23.
lítduüir, 415.
Defender, 412.
Deferir, 413.
Degollar, 410.
Demoler, 411.
Demostrar, 410.
Denegar, 409.
Denostar, 410.
Derrengar, 409.
Derretir, 414.
Desavenir, 440.
Descender, 412.
Descollar, 410.
Descordar, 410.
Descomedirse, 414.
Desembrar, 409.
Deshacer, 427.
Deshelar, 409.
Desleír, 414.
Desolar, 410.
Desollar, 410.
Desovar, 410.
Despedir, 413.
Despernar, 409.
Despertar, 409.
Desplegar, 409.
Desterrar, 409.
Desvergonzarse, 410.
Diferir, 413.
Digerir, 413.
DiSH-'í^mir, 413.
piíicíirdar, 4i0.
DlStJlvLT, 411.
Divtírtir, 413,
Doler, 411.
Dormir, 434.
ElP^r. 4H,
Ecnht'ptír. 414,
F.mpeiliiLr, 4t^.
EinreTiflr, 409,
405
Digitized
by Google
456
LIST OF IRREGULAR VERBS.
Emporcar, 410.
Llover, 411.
Encender, 41S.
Encerrar, 409.
Encomendar, 409.
Maldecir, 428.
Encontrar, 410.
Manifestar, 409.
Encordar, 410.
Mantener, like Tener.
Engreírse, 418.
(See auxiliary verbs.)
Engrosar, 410.
Medir, 414.
Enmendar, 409.
Mentar, 409.
Enrodar, 410.
Mentir, 412.
Ensangrentar, 409.
Entender, 412.
Merendar, 409.
Moler, 411.
Enterrar, 409.
Morder, 411.
Envestir, 414.
Morir, 414.
Erguir, 426.
Mostrar, 410.
Errar, 426.
Mover, 413.
Escarmentar, 409.
Escocer, 421.
Esforzar, 410.
Estar, 400. (Seeauxill-
Negar, 409.
Nevar, 409.
ary verbs.)
Estreñir, 418.
Expedir, 418.
Oir,430.
Extender, 412.
Oler, 481.
Forzar, 410.
Pedir, 418.
Fregar, 409.
Pensar, 409.
Perder, 412.
Gemir, 414.
Pervertir, 418.
Placer, 449.
Gobernar, 409.
Plegar, 409.
Poblar, 410.
Haiibr,400. (SeeaixxiU-
Poder, 482.
Poner, 438.
aries and imperaon-
Preferir, 418.
als.)
Probar, 410.
Hacer, 427.
Heder, 412.
Helar, 409.
Producir, 415.
Proferir, 412.
Henchir, 4ia
Hender, 412.
Heñir, 413.
Herir, 418.
Quebrar, 409.
Querer, 434.
Herrar, 409.
Hervir, 418.
Holgar, 410.
HcJUu*, 410.
Raer, 488.
Recomendar, 400.
Recordar, 410.
Recostar, 410.
Impedir, 418.
Reducir, 415.
Incensar, 409.
Referir, 418.
Inducir, 415.
Regar, 409.
Inferir. 412.
Regir, 414.
Ingerir, 418.
Inquirir, 416.
Introducir, 416.
Remendar, 409.
Invernar, 409.
Rendir, 414.
Invertir, 418.
Renovar, 410.
Investir, 418.
Reñir, 414.
Ir, 428.
Repetir, 414.
Requebrar, 410.
Requerir, 418.
Jugar, 429.
Rescontrar, 410.
Resollar. 410.
Retentar, 409.
Reventar, 409.
Revolcar, 410.
Rodar, 410.
Rogar, 410.
Saber, 486.
SaUr, 487.
Satisfacer, 427.
Segar, 409.
Seguir, 414.
Sembrar, 409.
Sentar, 409.
Sentir, 412.
Seb, 400. (See aux-
iliary verbs.)
Servir, 414.
Serrar, 409.
Soldar, 410.
Soler, 449.
Soltar, 410.
Solver, 411.
Sonar, 410.
Soñar, 410.
Sosegar, 409.
Soterrar, 409.
Sugerir, 412.
Temblar, 409.
Tender, 412.
Tener, 400. (See
auxiliary verbs.)
Teñir, 414.
Tentar, 409.
Torcer, 411.
Tostar, 410.
Traducir, 415.
Traer, 438.
Trascender, 412.
Trascordarse, 410.
Trasegar, 409.
Trocar, 410.
Tronar, 410.
Tropezar, 409.
Valer, 489.
Venir, 440.
Ver, 441.
Verter, 412.
Vestir, 414.
Volar, 410.
Volcar, 410.
Volver, 411.
Tacer, 450.
Zaherir, 41&
Digitized
by Google
VOCABULARY.
Digitized
by Google
EXPLANATIONS.
ABBBEYIATIONS.
Act. part., Active participle.
Adj., Adjective.
Adv., Adverb.
Amer., American ; peculiar to
Americas.
Conj., Conjunction.
F., Feminine.
Indef., Indefinite.
Inteij., Inteijection.
Interr., Interrogative»
Irr., Irregular.
the
Lat., Latin.
M., Masculine.
Num., Numeral,
Ord., Ordinal.
P. P., Past Participle.
Pers., Personal.
Poss., Possessive.
Pres. Part., Present F&rticiple.
Pron., Pronoun.
Eef., Eeflexive.
S., Substantive.
KEY TO PRONUNCIATION.
(These rules apply solely to the italicized words given as the approximate
pronunciation, and placed after those which follow the true Spanish orthog-
raphy. )
S, as in command.
g, as in father.
s (Spanish long e), as in mate.
c, as in cart.
S, as in men.
€ (Spanish i), as in be.
g and gh, as in go.
h (is used as giving the nearest approach which English affords to the
Spanish guttural g and j), as in host.
hr, used to represent the Spanish rr^ and r following n, is but a makeshift ;
but the best to be obtained.
k, takes the place of the hard c sound at the end of syllables.
o (invariable )t as dn lord.
8, as the double s of pass.
th (the Castilian sound of soft c, and of «), as in thin.
9H (the Spanish soft d\ as in that.
ñ (invariable), as in rule.
All words containing soft c (t. e., c before e and t), sand 11^ are given two
pronunciations ; the first being the Castilian, and the second the American.
Let the student adopt either the one or the other, and follow it consistently
and absolutely ; otherwise hopeless confusion will be the result.
458
Digitized
by Google
VOCABULARY,
CONTAINING ALL THE SPANISH WOEDS USED
IN THE METHOD.
Note.-— The referenoes are made to the lemons of the Method where each
word is treated.
A, ÍÍ» prep,, at, to, in, and sigri of per-
tional direct ot indin:i<:t objoct. Voy
á Francia, I am going to France; á
lo meuüs, at Ica,^ ; á la vcr<lra.d, in-
deed ; á la españída, in the Spanish
fashion ; amo á mi amigo, I lovo my
fnend. L, 4
Abajo^ á-bá''ho, adv., bolow, down,
down-stairs. L. 33,
Ahalaniar, iUiñ^lán-tkár* [ü-bÉf-lín-fiSi-'J,
to bilaüce, to spriug, to rush» to
hurl one's self* L. 67.
Abandonar, íí-frííí-dd-íidr\ to abandon,
to ííJye ups to leave, to dest^rt, L. 53.
Abani&o á-hñ/ivé'-<^t ^* m., £a,n. L. 52.
Abierto á-héltr'-to^ p. p. irr. of Abrib
(which see). L. 63.
Aboer&dOf á-ho-gíi'fHOi s. m., lawyer,
advocate, attorney. L. 40.
Aborreoibl*» Íí-bo-hr<i-ihe'-h¡Á [¡£-bu-Lra-
sl; -bl£], adj., hateftil. L. 34.
Abril, S^hrel\ s, ra., April. L, ¡aS.
Abrir, á-bTéT\ to open. Ahiine.. to be
opened, to bloom (i, s., t<j open up J.
L. S8.
Aoá, ÍÍ- cfV , ady . , b ere. Acáy^X lá, be re
and there. L. 18.
A«iaba.r, á-cñ^hár\ to iinisb, to end.
A&ahmr de, to bo oí have just. Aca-
bar cow, to kill, to put an end to, to
destroy. L. 28.
Academia, ü-c&^Tim'-med.^ s* f., acade-
my. L. 51.
Aeaao, á^cá'-so, adv., perchan ce, by
chance, perhaps. Si acaso^ if at all.
Por H ftcrtflo, in caite that L* 32,
Accidente, Üc-the^di^'-td [iitne-dffu'-ta],
H, m*, ai indent L. 40.
Afteión, á-íheon' lác-a^iüii'J, s. t, action,
abarii. L. 34.
Acento, ^-th^'-to [S-Bgn'-to], s. m., ac-
cent. L. 47.
Aceptar, d-th}^-tar' [á-sgp-tar'], to ac-
cept. L. 45.
Acerca, H-thér'-ca tS-sSr'-ca], prep, {acer-
ca de, about). L. 49. "
Acertar, 4-th(^r-tdr' [á-sér-tór'], to make
Out or find out, to hit the mark, to
Esncceed, to be right (i. e., to conjec-
ture ri^fhtly). L. 34.
Aoierto, á-theér'-to [á-sggr'-to], s. m.,
auectis, L. 52.
Acomodar, &-cO'mo-ddr\ to accommo-
date, to suit. L. 31.
Acompañar, á-C(m-pán-ydr\ to accom-
pany, L. 47.
Aconfl^'ar, árconsü-hár'^ to counsel, to
advise. L. 45.
Acordar, d-cor-dár\ to accord, to agree,
to tune. Acordarse, to remember.
Acostar, ÍÍ-cA>8-tdr. to lay down. Acoa-
tnrfie^ to lie down, to go to bed. L.
35,
Actual, iíc-túM\ &á^,f present, actual.
I., 53.
Acndir, ÍÍ-cú-THér\ to hasten, to run,
to torn (to), to refer (to). L. 49.
Acuerdo, á-cúér'-do, s. m., agreement,
aceoTil, decision (of a court). L.
42.
Acullá, fi-eúl-yd' tS-cft-yS'l, adv., there.
Aquí y acullá, to and fro ; here and
there, L. 18.
Adelantar, á-da-l&n-t&r', to advance, to
niake progress. L. 36.
Adelante, a-dd-ldn'-ta, adv., forward.
Ell adelante, henceforward. Ade-
Uiit** ! so on, go forward, go ahead.
L, 43,
459
Digiti:
zed by Google
460
VOCABULARY.
Ademán, ard&mán\ s. m., postare, air,
gestare. L. 44.
Además, ¿Ií-dá4n¿í«',prep., besides; adv.,
moreover, besides. L. 37.
Adentro, á-dén'-tro^ adv., in, within,
inside. L. 47.
• Adivinar, árdé-vé^n&r\ to guess, to di-
vine. L, 46.
Adjetivo, ád-há-té'-vo^ s. m., adjective.
L. 43.
Amirable, ¿í-me-r¿í'-52á,adj., admirable,
wonderful. L. 51.
Admiración, ád-mé-rá-thean' [Sd-me-rS-
Bcon'], s. f., admiration, wonder. L.
51.
Admirar, &drrae-rár\ to admire, to won-
der at. L. 61.
Adonde, drdon'-dá (see Donde). L. 9.
Adquirir, ádrké-rér\ to acquire. L. 42.
Adverbial, itd4}ér-béál',B^., adverbial.
L. 50.
Adverbio, ¿íd-vér'-béo, s. m., adverb.
L. 43.
Advertir, iídrv^-ter\ to advise, to men-
tion, to point out, tawam, to observe.
L. 43.
Aéreo, ád'-rcio, adj., aerial. L. 48.
Aíeotaoi6iL,á-f¡ik4á4h€on'íi-fSkti-%son'},
s. f., affectation. L. 24.
Afectar, ií-félc-tár' , to affect L. 45.
Afeitar, á-fáe^tár\ to shave, to paint
(the face). L. 33.
Afirmación, á-fér-mH-théan' [S-fer-mS-
agon'], s. f., affirmation. L. 24.
Afirmar, ií-fér-már\ to affirm, to make
ñrm, to strengthen. L. 48.
Afligir, á-ñe-her', to afflict. L. 48.
Afortunado, d-for-tú-ná'-THo^ adj., for-
tunate. L. 63.
Ageno, á-há'-no^ adj., foreign, belong-
ing to others. L. 63.
Agitación, árhé-tÜrtheon' [S-be-tíC-sCon'],
s. f., agitation. L. 24.
Agradar, &-grá-THár\ to please. L. 53.
Agradecer, á-grO-THá-thér' [á-grS-vHS-
eSr'], to thank, to be obliged to, to be
grateful for. L. 39.
Agregar, á-grdrgár\ to add to, to unite.
L. 49.
Agrio, á'-gréo^ adj., sour. L. 22.
Agua, a'-gúq^ s. f., water. L. 7.
Aguantar, (f-grtí^n-tóír', to support, to
bear, to put up with, to bear with.
L. 53.
Aguardiente, grgÚQr-deiSn'-tá, s. m.,
brandy, rum. L. 50.
Agudeza, á-gú-THá'-thQ [S-gü-vHS'-sa], s.
f., wit, or witty saying. L. 57."
Agüero, Q-gúá'-rOf a. m., augury, omen.
L. 45.
Ahora, qo'-tq^ adv., now. L. 27.
Aire, Q'-é-rá, s. m., air. L. 46.
Ajedrei, ií-Kárdráth' CS-bS^drOs'], s. m.,
chess. L. 42.
Ala, ¿('-¿g, s. f., wing. L. 58.
Alabama, ÍUMán'-Íh(¡ [á4i-bSn'-s§], s.
f., praise. L. 53.
Alarde, m^r'-da, s. m. Hacer alarde^
to boast. L. 63.
Alberto, dlA»hr'4o, s. m., Albert L. 38.
Alcance, áUán'-íha [ái-cán'-ss], s. m.,
reach. L. 53.
Alcanzar, iü-c&n4híír' rái-cán-sSr'l, to
reach, to overtake, to take up with,
to catch. L. 53.
Alegrar, ma-grár\ to give joy, to make
glad. L. 37.
Alegre, ¿Uá'-grá, adj., joyful, glad,
merry. L. 21.
Alejandro, á-lá-hUn'-drOt s. m., Alex-
ander. L. 3.
Aleli, árlá-le\ s. m., gilliflower. L. 9.
Alemán, ma-man',, s. m., German (lan-
guage). L. 2.
Alemán, ma-mán\ s. m., German ; adj.,
German. L. 3.
Alemania, iHármá'-néihñ. f., (Germany.
L. 9.
Alfiler, iU-fé-lár', s. m. and f., pin. L.
46.
idgtaaiti,ia-gá-{há'-Ta [«-ga-sS'-ra], s. f.,
flouts of joy. L. 54.
Algodón, dl-go-THon',, s. m., cotton. L.
5.
Alguien, ál'-ghé^,, pron., somebody,
anybody, some one, any one. L. 11.
Alguno, ¿U^ú'-no,, adj., some. L. 11.
Alguno, iü-gú'-nko. pron. ind. and adj.,
somebody, some one, anybody, any
one, some. L. 11.
Alhaja, áM'-h^, s. f., jewel. L. 57-
Alimentar, á-lé-mén-tár^ to feed. Alú
mentarse de esperanzas^ to live on
hope. L. 53.
Alimento, á-l&mén'-to, s. m., food. L.
49.
Allá, ¿U^A' [S-yS'], adv., there, yonder.
L. 18.
Alma, ¿í{'-m0, s. f., soul. L. 47.
Almacén, ¿U-mílr-than' rsi-mS-BSn'], s. m.,
store, warehouse. L. 62.
Almorzar, ¿U-mor-thár' [Si-mor-sSr'], to
breakfast, to take breakfast. L. 35.
Almuerzo, álmúér'-tho [Si-müér'-soJ, s.
m., breakfast. L. 55.
Alrededor, dl-rnrTHd-THor' , adv.,
around. L. 56.
Alteración, ÍU-td-rítíkeon' LSi-ta-rS-sCon'],
s. f., alteration. L. 56.
Alto, ¿U'-to, adj., high, tall. L. 21.
Altura, iatú'rg^, s. f., height. L. 37.
Alumbrar, á^úmAiriír\ to light. L. 64.
Amable, á-má'^láy adj., amiable, lova-
ble. L. 47.
Digitized
by Google
VOCABULARY,
461
Amador, á-míí-rHor\ s. m., lover. L.
49.
Amanecer, á-má-ná-thh'' [S-mS-ns-sSr'l, to
become morning, to dawn, to be in a
place at daybreak. L. 30.
Amante, á-mán'-tá^ act. p. and s., lov-
ing, lover, sweetheart. L. 38.
Amar, á-már', to love. L. 21.
Amarillo, á-má-réV-yo [á-má-r6'-7o],adj.,
yellow. L. 54.
Ambición, ámM-íhéon' [Sm-be-séon'], s.
f.. ambition. L. 60.
Amóos, ám'-bo8, pron., both. L. 28.
Amenasar, á-má-niUár\ to menace, to
threaten. L. 59.
Amenidad, á-nut-ne-THárH^ s. f., amen-
ity. L. 32.
Amiga, á-mé'-gQ^ s. f., friend. L, 13.
Amigo, á-mé'-go^ s. m., friend. L. 13.
Amistad, ¿í-me8-tdTH\ s. f., friendship.
L. 61.
Amor, d-mor', s. m., love. L. 45.
Amplio, ám'-pléo, adj., ample. L. 52.
Ampo, ám'po, a. m., whiteness (of
snow). L. 61.
Analitioo,¿í-n¿í4¿' -¿e-co, adj., analytical.
L. 35.
Anaranjado, á-n&ráng-há'-THO^ adj.,
orange (color). 1^.^.
Ancho, ¿ín'^jijAi^'SajT', "Wide, broad.
L. 47. ^^
AnShura, Un-chú'-r(t^ s. f., width,
breadth. L. 61.
Anciano, án-thtá'-no [Sn-BSS'-no], adj.
and 8., old, old man. L. 48.
Andar, án-dár\ to walk, to go. L. 44.
Anécdota, á-nék' -do-tat, s. f., anecdote.
L. 44.
Ángel, ong'-hH, s. m., angel. L. 60.
Angnlo, án'-gú-lo, s. m., angle. En
dngtdos rectos, at right angles. B.
60.
Animal,¿í^é-m¿U', s. m. , animal . L. 62.
Animar, A^ne-Tnár', to animate, to en-
courage. L. 38.
Anoche, á^M'-chá, adv., last night. L.
28.
Anochecer, á-no-ehá-thér' [S-no-chs-ser'],
to become night, to be here or there
at nightfall. L. 30.
Antagonista, án-tá-go-néa'-iQ, s. m., an-
tagonist. L. 36.
Ante, ow'-tó, prep., before, in presence
of. L. 16.
Anteayer, án-tádyh-', adv., the day be-
fore yesterday. L. 16.
Antecedente, án-tá-thá-dhi'-tá [Sn-ts-ss-
den' -tal, s. m., antecedent. L. 61.
Antenoche, án-tá-no'-cfuíf the night be-
fore last. L. 23.
Anteojo, án-táo'-ho, s. m., eye-glass.
AtUeqjos, spectacles. L. 53.
Antepenúltimo, dn-id-pá-nÚl'-te-mo, adj*
and s. m., antepenultimate, ante-
penult.
Anterior, dn-tá-réor\ adj., preceding,
foregoing, previous, former. L. 49.
Antes, dn'-tés, prep. Antes de, before.
L. 42.
Antes, dn'-tés, adv., rather, first, sooner
than, but. L. 16.
Antepuesto, dn-td-púda'-tOt p. p., pre-
fixed ; s. prefix. L. 52.
Antiguo, án-té'-gúoy adj., ancient, old.
L. 62.
Antisocial, dn-te-ao-ihéál' [Sn-té-so-sSSi'],
adj., antisocial. L. 50.
Antojo, dn-to'-hOt s. m., whim, long-
ing. L. 63.
Anadir, dn-yd-rnér', to add to. L. 49.
Anil, dn-yél\ s. m., indigo (color). L.
54.
Ano, dn'-yOf s. m., year. L. 16.
Apariencia, d-pd^eH'-théQ [á-pá-reSn'-
Be§], s. f., appearance. L. 53.
Apegar, d-pd-gdr'^ to stick, to attach,
to paste, to adhere. L. 54.
Apenas, d-pá'-ndst adv., scarcely, hard-
ly. L. 29.
Aplicar, d-ple-edr', to apply. L. 62.
Apostar, drpos-tdr'^ to bet, to wager.
L. 63.
Apoyar, d-po-ydr\ to support, to lean,
to protect, to aid. L. 50.
Apreciable, drpra-théd'-blá [S-prS-seá'-
bia], adj., appreciable, respected. L.
56.
Apremiar, drprá-médr\ to press, to urge.
L. 45.
Aprender, d-prhindér\ to learn. L. 6.
Apretar, drpr€^idr\ to tighten, to press,
to urge. L. 65.
Aprisa, dpre'-sq, adv., quickly. L. 6.
Aprobación, d-pro-bd-tkeon' [á-pro-bá-
sCon'], 8. f., approbation. L. 24.
Aprobar, d-pro-bdr', to approve. L.
35.
Aprovechar, d^pr<hvSrchdr\ to progress,
to improve, to make the most of. L.
52.
Aproximar, d-proh-se-mdr', to approxi-
mate, to approach. L. 44.
Apto, ¿^'-to, ad,]., apti fit. L. 51.
Apurado, d-pú-rd'-THo, adj . , straitened,
embarrassed. L. 44.
Aquel, d-Ml\ pron., that one, he, the
former. L. 18.
Aqui, d-M\ adv., here. L. 18.
Árbol, ar'-bol, s. m., tree. L. 49.
Arboleda, gr-fto-ía'-Mrg, s. f., grove.
L. 49.
Arenal, d-rd-tidl', s. m., sandy ground.
L. 49.
Argüir, ar-gúir'f to argue. L. 34.
Digitized
by Google
462
VOCABULARY,
Aristocracia, d-re8-tO'Criír(hé''Q [S-r«8-to-
cra-9€-'a1, 8. f., aristocracy. L. 60.
Aristocrático, árrés-to-crá'.-te-co, adj.,
aristocrat. L. 35.
Aritmética, ñ-rét-mé'-té-CQ, s. f., arith-
metic. L. 21.
Armar, Qr-már\ to arm. L. 59.
Arpa, ítr'-pQ, s. f., harp. L. 15.
Arquitecto, Qr-ke-tek'-io^ s. m., archi-
tect. L. 48.
Arquitectura, ^r-Jbé-tófc-tó'-ra, s. f., ar-
chitecture. L. 51.
Arreglar, á-hrá-glár' y to arrange, to
regulate, to settle. L. 60.
Arrepentirse, d-/ira-p^-<¿r'-«á, to re-
pent. L. 38.
Anrestar, á-hrlh-tár\ to arrest. L. 37.
Arriba, á-Aré'-6g, adv., above, up-stairs.
L. 33.
Arte, f!^''ta, s. m. and f, art. L. 31.
Articulo, í^r-té'-cú-lo, s. m., article. L.
43.
Artificial, (^r-t^-fé-théíU' [ar-t^-fé-sesi'j,
adj., artificial. L. 49.
Artista, Qr-teS'tQ, s. m., artist. L. 36.
Asador, Ürsá-THor', s. m,,spit (for roast-
ing). L. 65.
Ascender, áa-thH-dér' [á-sgn-díír'], to
ascend, to go up, to mount. L. 37.
Ascensión, ds-thén-aéon' [á-sgn-seon'], s.
f., ascension. L. 49.
Asegurar, ¿i-«a-gil-rar', to secure, to as-
sure. L. 38.
Asesino, ásá-aé'-no, s. m., assassin. L.
59.
Asi, á-sé'y adv., so, thus. L. 20. Aai
que, so that, as soon as. L. 29. Asi
asi, 80 so. L. 39.
Asiento, d-ae^'-to, s. m., seat. L. 39.
Asir, á-8er\ to seize, to make the most
of. L. 42.
Asno, ds'-noy s. m., ass. L. 61.
Asombro, arsom'-bro, s. m. , amazement.
L. 46.
Astronomía, ds-tro no-mi' -á, s. f., as-
tronomy. L. 49.
Atención, á-t<én-théon' Cá-tén-séon'], s. f.,
attention. L. 56.
Atender, iírtH-dér\ to attend. L. 37.
Atlántico, dt-lAn'-té-co, s. m. and adj.,
Atlantic. L. 46.
Atolladero, á-tol-yd-THá'-ro [á-to-yá-
THS'-ro], s. m., difficulty. L. 60.
Atracción, á-trdk-théon' [á-trák-sg-on'],
s, f., attraction. L. 24. *
Atrás, drtrds', adv., behind, ago. L.
58.
Atreverse, ¿t-trd-v^r'-aa, to dare. L.
48. ^
Atrevimiento, d-trñ-vé-mehi'-to, s. m.,
daring, hardihood, assurance. L,
64.
Atrocidad, d-tro-the-THdrH' [S,-tro-aS-
vu&va']j s. f., atrocity. L. 36.
Atrepellar, d-tro-pál-ydr' [á-tro-p«-yír'],
to trample, to run over. L. 51.
Aullar, Qúl-ydr' [§&-yár'], to howl. L.
44.
Aumento, QÚ-nüin'-to, s. m., augment,
augmentation, increase. L. 59.
Aún, g<ln', adv., still, yet. L. 25.
Aunque, gtcn'-fcá, adv., although,
though. L. 36.
Ausencia, QÚ-ahi'-théií [aü-8¿n'-B6§], s. f.,
absence. L. 35.
Ausente, QÚ-sH-táf adj., absent. L.
59.
Autor^ QÚ-tor\ s. m., author. L. 47.
Autoridad, ^úUhre-rHdTH'^ s. f., au-
thority. L. 59.
Auxiliar, QÚk-sé'lédr', s. m. and adj.,
auxiliary. L. 57.
Auxiliar, QÚk-8é'lédr\ to help, to aid.
L. 62.
Auxilio, QÚk-sé'-léOy s. m., help, assist-
ance. L. 55.
Avenida, d-vá-^ié'-THQj s. f., avenue.
L. 15.
Aventurarse, d-ven-tu-rdr'-aa^ to ven-
ture. L. 65.
Avisar, drvé-adr'y to let know, to in-
form. L. 45.
Ay, ff'-6, inlj., alas. L. 46.
Ayer, d-yér\ adv., yesterday. L.*16.
Ayudar, dryiirTHdr'^ to aid, assist, to
help. L. 38.
Azul, d-thiU' CáBÜl'], adj., blue L. 54.
Bailar, hqHdr\ to dance. L. 28.
Baile, bQ'-e-láf s. m. , dance, ball. L. 30.
Bajar, hd-hdr', to go or come down, to
lower. L. 53.
Bajo, bd'-hOf adj., low, base, mean. L.
51.
Banco, bdn'-cOy s. m., bank. L. 31.
Bandera, bdn-dá'-rfh s. f., flag, stand-
ard, banner. L. 58.
"BsÁa.r^bd'n-ydr'y to bathe. L. 49.
Barato, bd-hrd'-to, adj., cheap. L. 13.
Barba, &gr'-5g, s. f . , chin, beard. L. 59.
Barbería, bar-ba-re'-Q, s. f., barber's
shop. L. 50.
Barbero, bar-bá'-ro, s. m., barber. L.
33.
Barbilampixlo, bdr-be-ldm^pSn'-yOy aé^.,
thin bearded. L. 50.
Barco, bar' -co, s. m., barque, vessel,
boat. L. 60.
Barón, bd-ron', s. m., baron. L. 51.
Barrer, ba-hr^', tojsweep. L. 24.
Basta, bds'-tQ, intj., enough ! L. 3C.
Bastante, &¿i«-¿¿tn'-¿á, adv., enough. L.
25.
Bastar, bd8-tdr\ to be enough. L. 30.
Digitized
by Google
VOCABULARY.
463
Bastón, hiÍ8-ton\ s. m., walking-cane.
L. 10.
Baza, há'-ihQ [bS'-sa], s. f., trick (at
cards). No dcjarmeter haza^ not to
let one put in a single word. L. 63.
Bebedor, bárhá-THor\ s. m., tippler,
toper, drinker. L. 65.
Beber, hárb(ér\ to drink. Beber los vien-
tos por algo, to solicit with mach
eagerness, to desire ardently. ,Beber
como una cuba, to drink like a fish.
L. 7.
Belleza^ hU-ya'Ah^ [bC-yü'-aií^ H. £,
bwiuty. L, 51.
Bello, bW-yü [be 'yol, adj., beautiful,
hiiiids(jtiit\ liiio. L. 3L
BendeoiT, hH-dá-ihér' LuíP'ds-aiír'J, to
bless. L. 41.
BendiU}, Mn-de'-tQ^ a4J<f blessed* L.
Beaair M-it^r\ to kiss. L* 39-
BeftO, &a'-^ci, ^. £Ei., IvIhs. L. 30.
Biblioteca, hc-hltí^-tá-CQ^ s. f., library.
Bien, ¿GÍ'n'; adv., well. L. 3. E^tá
íiírt, very well, all right. No 6*m,
scarcely, no Booner. L. 29.
Bienheobor, blh\-a-chor\ s. m., bene-
factor. L. 50,
Bienvenida» hlhi-vá-nl'-THH^, a. f., wel-
come* L. 45,
Billate, hcl-ya'-tdlh^.yv,'-i%\^. in., noto,
bill, bank -note* h. 7.
Blanoa, blan'-cQ, s. f. Etionntmrstisin
hlmtca^ tt> And one's eelf without a
cent, L* 64.
Blanoij, bMn-co^ a^j.^ whito. L. 58.
Blanco. Man' -co, 9. m.^ mart, tfirgi^t,
bull^s-eye. Queda rsy en blana}, lo
bo left in the. lureh,
BledOf hUV'THQ, s^ m., e^tTaW- No sc me
da uu bledííy Idoti^tearc a straw. L.
03.
Booa^ fto-iiff. fi- f-T tnouth. L. 44. Ila-
blar por hoca^ de gan&o, to repeat
what another bag siiul. L. 63.
Bocado, fio-cu -Tf/íí, s. nj., luouthful,
bite. Bocado ain bueao, a íiine4;Qre.
L. 61,
Bolsa, bat'-sg, s. f., purse. L. 45.
Bolsillo, bol-sil' -yo (boi-BG -yujj s. m.,
pocket, purse. L. 47.
Bondad, bim-dürji' , s. f., goodnees,
kindncRs. L, 39.
Bondadoso, bon-dá-Tiio'-ao, adj., good,
kind, L. 54.
Bonito, bo-ni'-to, atij., pretty. L^ 58,
Borbotón, bor-bQ-ton\ á borbotones, bub-
bling, hurriedly, íionfustidly. L. 63.
BoBi^iie, ioí'-jfcá, a. m.t woodhiud. L.
40,
Bota, bo'-t^, B. f., boot. L. 10,
Botiea, bo-te'-e§y s. f., drug-store. L.
62.
Boticario, ba-te-cá'-réo, s. m., druggist.
L. 49.
Bravata, brür^á'-tQ, s. f., bravado.
Echar bravatas, to boast. L. 62.
Bravo, brá'-voj adj., daring, fierce. L.
• 44.
Bravo ! br&'-vo, inlj., bravo ! L. 48.
Brazo, br&'-tho [brS'-so], s. m., arm. L.
44.
Bribón, bre-bon\ s. m., scoundrel, ras-
cal. L. 32.
Bruto, brú'-to, s. m., brute, ignorant
person. L. 48.
Bruto, brú'-to, adj., brutish, crude,
ignorant. L. 48.
Bueno, búa' -no, adj., good. L. 7. Do
buenas á primeras, all at once. L. 62.
Buey, búá'-é^ s. m., ox. L. 58.
Bula, bú'-lQ, s. f. Tener btUa para todo,
to act according to one's fancy. L. 64.
Bulla, btU'-yQ [bü'-y§], s. f., noise. Me-
ter bulla, to make a noise. L. 63.
Bullicio, btU-yé'-théo tbü-yS'-sSo], s. m.,
bustle, noise, uproar. L. 64.
Bulto, bul' -to, s. m., bundle. Hablar
á bulto, to talk at random. L. 63.
Burla, búr'-l^, s. f., jest, joke. Hablar
á burlas J to speak in jest. L. 33.
Burlar, búr-lár', to jest. Burlarse de
alguno, to make fun of, to laugh at
any one. Burla burlando, half jest,
half earnest. L. 33.
Burlón, búr-lon', s. m., wag, jester.
L. 44.
Bnsoa, bas'-cf^, s. f., search. En busca
de, in search of. L. 55.
Buscar, bús-cár', to search, to look for.
L. 4. Buscar cinco pies al gato, to
pick a quarrel. L. 4.
Caballejo, cá-bál-yá'-ho [cá-bS-yfi'-hol, s.
m., (dim. of Caballo), nag, miser-
able horse. L. 49.
Caballero, cd-bdl-ya'-ro [cS-bá-ya'-ro], s.
m., sir, gentleman, knight, horse-
man. L. 2.
Caballo, cá-bdl'-yo [cS-bá'-yo], s. m.,
horse. L. 4.
Cabello, cdrbW-yo tcá-b6'-yo], s. m., hair.
L. 33. Tomar la ocasión por los ca-
bellos, to profit by the occasion, to
take time by the forelock. L. 61.
Caber, cA-bh'', to hold, to contain. No
caber de gozo, to be overjoyed.
¿ Puede caber en tu imaginación ?
Can such a thing enter into your
imagination ? No cahe más, nothing
more can be desired. L. 42.
Cabeza, cA-bd'-th^ [cS-bS-8§'],s. f., head.
L. 28.
Digitized
by Google
464
VOCABULARY.
Cable, e&'-hla^ s. m., cable. L. 46.
CabQ, cá'-bo, 8. m., end. Al cabo^ at
last. L. 54.
Cada, c&'-THQf pron. , eacb, every. Oada
vez, every time. Coda una, each,
every one. L. 43.
Caer, cárér\ to fall, to see, to undeiv
stand, to be, to fall due. li. 41. Octer
de pies, to üétll on one's feet. Ya cai-
go en ello, now I see, understand.
Las ventanas caen á la plaza, the
windows look on the square. L. 69.
Café, cA-fa\ s. m., coifee, coifee-house.
L. 14.
Caja, c4'-^, s. f., box, case, cash (com-
mercial). L. 60.
Cal, düj s. f., lime. De ooZ y canto, of
solid masonry. L. 48.
Calabaza, cá-ldrbá'-ihQ [cá-is-bá'-s»], s. f.,
pumpkin. Dar calabazas^ to give
the mitten. L. 61.
Calcular, ciU-cúrlár'y to calculate. L.
51.
Caldo, eiU'-do, s. m., broth. L. 44.
Calducho, eál-dú'-cho, s. m., thin or
poor broth. L. 44.
Calentar, c&-Uín-tár\ to heat, to warm.
L. 34.
Calentura, cá^lén-tú-rQ, s. f., fever. L.
60.
Caliente, d^UH'-ta^ adj., hot, warm.
L. 44.
Callado, dU-y&'^Ho [cS-yá'-vHo], adj.,
silent, taciturn. L. 20.
Callar, cül-yár' [cS-ySr'], to keep silence.
CaUar su pico, to hold one's tongue,
to say nothing. L. 42.
Calle, cdl'-yá [cá'-ys], s. f., street. De-
jar á uno en la caUcy to strip one of
his all. L. 15.
Calor, cá-lor\ s. m., heat, warmth. L.
25.
Calva, dü'^Q, s. f., baldness, bald place.
L. 45.
Calvo, cál'-vo, adj., bald. L. 45.
Calia, ciü'-th(í [cái'-sa], s. f., stockings.
Tomar las calzas de Villadiego, to
make off, to make a hurried escape.
L. 50.
Cama, cá'~má^ s. f . , bed. Guardar canuty
to be confined to the bed. L. 14.
Cambiar, cámhéár\ to change. L. 69.
Cambio, cám'-béo^ s. m., change. L.
46.
Camino, cá-mé'-not s. ul, way, road.
L. 60.
Camisa, cd-me'sq^ s. f., shirt. Meterse
en camisa de once varas, to interfere
in the afikirs of others. L. 46.
Campo, cám'-po, s. m., field, country,
camp. Dejar el campo libre, to leave
the field to one's competitors. L. 59.
Canaato, cdrnás'-to, s. m., basket. L.
58.
Candidamente, cán'-de^rHá^nán4á, adv..
candidly. L. 48.
Cansado, c&n-aá'-THo, adj., tired, tire-
some. Estar cansado, to be tired.
Ser cans€ido, to be tiresome. L. 20.
Cansar, cán-sár\ to tire, to fiitigue.
L.33.
Cantar, cári-Uír'j to sing. L. 15.
Cantatrii, cáji-tá^tréth' [«Sn-ta-tres'l, s.
f., singer (female). L. 15.
Cantidad, c¿tn-té-Fir¿rir', s. f., quantity,
sum. L. 60.
Canto, cAn'-to, s.m., singing, cut stone.
L. 48.
Cantor, c&n^tor', s. m., singer. L. 15.
Cañón, c¿ín-yon\ a. m., cannon or deep
ravine. L. 44.
Ca&onaso, edn^o-nd'-iho [c<n-yo-ná'-«o],
8. m., cannon shot, gun shot. L. 44.
Capa, cá'-pa, s. f., cloak. Andar de
capa caída, to be crest&llen. L. 60.
Capacidad, cá-párthé-THárH' [cS-pS-sfi-
vhSth'], 8. f., capacity, capability.
L. 36.
Capaz, cá-páth' [cX-p&'], adj., capable.
L. 59.
Capitin, cA-pé-t&n't s. m., captain. L.
52.
Capricho, cdrpre'-cho^ s. m., whim, fan-
cy, caprice. L. 60.
Cara, cA'-r§, s. f., £a«e. Dar á alguno
con la puerta en la cara, to shut the
door in one's ÍBice. L. 60.
Carácter, cá-ráJc'-tér (irr. plural, carac-
teres), s. m., character, disposition.
L.40.
Caramba! cd-rám'-bQ, intj., strange!
zounds ! confound it ! L. 66.
Carcajada, c^r-q^-hd'-THd, s. f., horse
laugh, burst of laughter. L. 54.
Circel, CQr'-íhU [c§r'-8a], s. f., prison.
L. 34.
Carffa, cf^r'-gq, s. f., load, burden,
charge. L. 60.
Cargar, cgr-giir', to charge, to load, to
heap. L. 47.
Cargo, cqr'-go, s. m., load, charge, em-
ployment, oflice. L. 60.
Caridad, cá^h-THáTm' . s. f., charity.
L. 41.
Cariredondo, cA-re-hrd-don'-do, adj.,
round-faced. L. 59.
Came, cqr'-ná, s. f., flesh, meat. L. 7.
Camero, cq^r-nd'-ro, s. m., mutton,
sheep. L. 40.
Carniceria, cftr-ne-iha-Te'-Q [car-ne-sfi-
r6'-§}, 8. f., meat market, butcher-
shop. L. 11.
Carnicero, cqr-né-ihd'-ro [c§r-n6-8&'-ro],
s. m., butcher. L. 11.
Digitized
by Google
VOGABULARF.
465
k
Camusa, C§r-nú'-{hQ [car-nü'-sa], s. f.,
bad or spoiled meat. L. 49.
Caro, cd'-ro, adj., dear, costly, beloved.
L. 13.
Carpintero, t^r-pen-ta'-ro, s. m., car-
penter. L. 33.
Carrera, cd-hrá'-vQ, s. f., course, career,
race, profession. L. 48.
Carro, cft'-hro, s. m., car, wagon. L.
58.
Carruaje, cithrúf^'-háj s. m., carriage.
L. 51.
Carta, cgr'-ti^, s. f., letter. L. 7.
Cartilla, c^r-tH'-yQ [c§r-ts'-y§], s. f.,
primer. Cosa que no está en la car-
tUla, something strange* or uncom-
mon. L. 61.
Casa, eá'-aq^ s. f., house. L. 9.
Cascaras! c&s'-cá-ráa, inlj., oh! An
exclamation expressive of astonish-
ment or admiration. L. 63.
Casero, cá-sá'-ro, adj., domestic, home-
like. Comedia (Msera, household
play, parlor play. L. 59.
Casi, case, adv., almost. L. 32.
Caso, cá'-so, s. m., case, event. No
haga usted caso de eso, take no no-
tice of it. L. 60.
Casta&a, ciU-tan'-y^, s. f., chestnut.
L. 40.
Castellano, cáa-tal-yá'-no [cSs-ta-yS'-no],
s. m., Castilian language. L. 55.
Castellano, cás-tál-yá'-no [cás-ts-yS'-no],
adj., Castilian. L. 55.
Castillo, cda-tel'-yo [cás-te'-yo], s. m.,
castle. Hacer castillos en el aire, to
build castles in the air. L. 48.
Casualidad, cÜrsú^U-THáTH, s. f., ac-
cident, chance, casualty, hazzard.
L. 60.
Casuoha, tít-sú'-'cha, s. f., miserable
house. L. 44.
Catolicismo, cHrto-U-thes'-mo [cS-to-is-
sSs'-mo], 8. m., Catholicism. L. 49.
Catorce, cá-tor'-thá tcá-tor'-ss], num.
adj., fourteen. Luis Catorce, Louis
the Fourteenth. L. 14.
Causa, CQÚ'-sQ, s. f., cause. A causa
de, on account of. L. 40.
Causar, cg^ú-sAr', to cause. L. 51.
Casa, cA'-th^ [cá'-s§], s. f., chase, hunt.
Ir á la caza, to go hunting. L. 58.
Cazar, cárlhár' [cS-sSr'], to chase, to
hunt. L. 58.
Ceoa, fftfl'-cff r8is'cal- De Ceca en Meca,
to wsiTnli.T from pillnr li» ptiat. L. fll.
Celebraeién. ihñ-labtá-iheon' LíühVbra^
bP un'], s. f , rí'lrhmtmíl. L. 30.
GelebraTf thtl iñ-hrfír' [i5tiii>riír'l, to
celebrate- fMfhm que listed bnyn
venido, I am gl^ you have come,
L. 39.
83
Celeste, tha-Ves'-ta [85-iSB'-t5],adj., heav-
enly, celestial. L. 49.
Celestial, ihdrU^-tedl' [sS-iSs-tgsn, adj.,
celestial, heavenly. L. 49.
Célico, ¿/iá'-¿e-co[8S'-iéco},adj., heaven-
ly (used in poetry only). L. 49.
Celo, thá'-lo [ss'-io], s. m., zeal, jealousy.
L. 55.
Cena, tha'-riQ [ss'-na], s. f., supi)er. Last
Supper. L. 52.
Cenar, thá-nár' [sS-nSr'], to sup, to take
supper. L. 39.
Centavo, thén-tá'-vo [sgn-tS'-vo], s. m.,
cent. L. 14.
Centella, thén-tél'-pQ [sgn-tS'-ya], s. f.,
flash, spark. Echar rayos y cente-
llas, to foam with rage. L. 62.
Centena, thén-tá'-nQ [sgn-ta'-nf], s. f.,
about a hundred. L. 40.
Centenar, thén-tá-nár' [sín-tS-nár'], s. m.,
a hundred. L. 40.
Cerca, thér'-CQ [sér'-ca], adv., near, close
by. Cerca de su casa, near his house.
L. 31.
Ceremonial, thcí-rá-mo-néál' [sS-rS-mo-Qe-
Si'], adj., ceremonial, ceremonious.
L. 54.
Cerrar, tM-hr&r'} [sS-hrár'], to shut, to
close. L. 34.
Cerrojo, thé-hro'-ho [Bfi-hro'-ho], s. m.,
bolt. L. 59.
Cerveza, thér-vd'-tha [BSr-vS'-sg], s. f.,
ale, beer. L. 7.
Chaleco, chá-lá'-co, s. m., vest. L. 10.
Chancear, cMn-theár' [chán-sSSr'J, to
jest, to joke. L. 58.
Chanza, chán'-thQ CctaSn'-8§], s. f., jest,
joke. L. 58.
Charla, chgr'-líí, &• ^m chat, chit chat,
prattle. L. 60.
Charlar, chQ.r-l&r', to chat, to prattle.
L. 37.
Chasco, chds''CO, s. m., disappointment.
Llevarse un chasco solemne, to be
greatly disapi)ointed. L. 46.
Chelín, chá-lén', s. m., shilling. L. 61.
Chico, cfee'-co, adj. , little, small. L. 44
Chiquito, ché-ké'-to, dim. adj., very
small, very little, little one. L. 44.
Chito, c^e'-to, inlj., hush! silence! L.
46.
Chocolate, cho-co-lá'-tá, s. m., choco-
late. L. 14.
Cie^o, thea'-go [sss'-go], adj. and s. ul,
blind. A ciegaSf blindly, in the
dnrk. L. 4S.
Cielo, OiPit-hi [bííí' k-], B. m., he» ven,
.sky, ceiliriK^ Tr*miir e! t^itla eon las
miin<fii, to b<? transported with joy,
pTÍí:ft or pnssioii. L, 45,
Gian^ ÚÍ&4M' [fi^-^u'l, Qum. adj., a hun-
dred. (Bee CUkkto.) L- 14.
Digitized
by Google
466
VOCABULARY.
Ciencia, thé-hi'-thé^ [ee-Sn'-8S§], s. f.,
knowledge, science. L. 45.
Ciento, thé-én'-to [se-Sn'-to], num. adj., a
hundred. (See Cien.) L. 14.
Cierto, thé-ér'-to [ss-Sr'-to], adj., certain.
L. 48.
Cimiento, thé-mé-^'-to [86-m6-en'-to], s.
m., foundation. L. 59.
Cinco, then'-co LsSn'-co], num. adj., five,
fifth. L. 14.
Cinonenta, íhén-kúén'-tQ [sén-ka^n'-tf],
num. adj., fifty, fiftieth. L. 14.
Cirounspeooión, thér-cún-spék-théon'
[sSr-cün-spék-seon'], s. f., circumsi)ec-
tion. L. 24.
Circunstancia, thér-cún-stán'-théQ [ssr-
cfin-stán'-Bga], s. f., circumstance. L.
40.
Cita, the'-ffi [sé'-t§], s. f., appointment,
quotation. L. 60.
Citar, the-táf [86-t¿r'], to make an en-
gagement, to quote. L. 52.
Ciudad, théú-rH&TH' [séü-rnáTH'], s. f.,
city. L. 9.
Ciudadano, théú-THií-THá'-no [séü-^nS-
¥HS'-no], s. m., citizen. L. 47.
Civilización, thé-vé-lé-thá-théon' Css-vg.
lS-8á-8Son'], 8. f., civilization. L. 60.
Claridad, dá-ré-TH&TH' , a. f., clearness,
perspicuity. L. 36.
Claro, dd'-ro, adj., clear, bright. L. 59.
Clase, dá'-sá, s. f., class, kind. L. 54.
Clásico, dd'-ae-cOj adj., classic, clas-
sical. L. 35.
Clasificación, dd-thé-fé-cá-theon' [ciá-
8€-f€-cá-seon'], s. f., classification. L.
24.
Clima, dé'-ma, s. m., climate. L. 40.
Cocer, co-tkér' [co-sSr'], to cook, to boil.
L. 42.
Coche, co'-cAá, s. m., coach, .carriages
in general. L. 42.
Cocinero, co-thé-nd'-ro [co-se-ns'-ro], s.
m., cook. L. 11.
Cofre, co'-frd, s. m., chest, trunk, cof-
fer. L. 60.
Coger, co-üér', to catch, to take, to pick
up. L. 46.
Cojear, C0'hádr\ to limp, to walk lame.
L. 39.
Cojo, CO' -ho J adj. and s. m., lame. L.
44.
Colada, co-ld'-rH(iy s. f., stiffening of
clothes. Todo saldrá en la colada,
all will be bTooííht to light, !>, 6ñ.
Colectivo, w-íát-íc-rw, rtdj., iít>ll*jctlve.
L. 40.
Colfax, col-g¿tr\ tu haug. L. 59.
Colína, co-le'^^t s. 1, MU. h. 68.
C olocaoión^ Ctí-lo-cá-thef»fi 1 c o- lt>-c;S-fcffo n' 1,
s, r, envploynient, plíMje, poaitioD,
situatiün, L, 60,
Colocar, co-lo-cdr', to place, to put, to
arrange, to employ. L. 46.
Colorado, co-lo-r&'-THo, adj., red. L.
54.
Colotido, co-lo-re'-THo, s. m., coloring
(painting). L. 52.
Color, co-lor'y s. m., color. L. 52.
Combatir, com-bO-tér', to combat, to
fight. L. 54.
Combinación, com-he-níi-iheon' [com-bé-
iiS-86on'], s. f., combination. L. 24.
Combinado, com-he-na'-THo, p. p. and
adg., combined, mixed. L. 58.
Combinar, com-bé-nár\ to combine, to
compound, to mix. L. 58.
Comedia, co-má'-THéf^, s. f., comedy.
L. 52.
Comer, co-mér', to eat, to dine. L. 7.
Comerciante, co-m r-théán'-tá [co-m6r-
sSán'-ta], 8. m., merchant. L. 5.
Cometa, co-má'-tf^, s. m., comet; s. f.,
kite, toy. L. 60.
Cometer, co-má-tér', to commit. L.
43.
Cómico, co'-mé-co, s. m., actor, come-
dian. L. 63.
Cómico, co'-mé-co, adj., comic, comicaL
L. 35.
Como, CO' -mo, adv., how, as. L. 15.
Comodidad, co-ma-THé-THáTH' , s. f.,
commodity, convenience, comfort.
L. 49.
Cómodo, co'-mo-THo, adj., commodious,
convenient, comfortable. L. 29.
Compa&ero, com-pdn-yd'-ro, s. m., com-
panion, comrade. L. 60.
Compañía, com-pán-yé'-(^, s. f., commny.
L. 60.
Comparativo, comrpá-rá-té'-vo, adj.,
comparative. L. 61.
Compasión, comrpü-séon' , s. f., compas-
sion. L. 45.
Complacencia, com-plá-thhi'-thég, [com-
piS-sSn'-seg], 8. f., pleasure, compla-
cency. L. 39.
Complemento, com-plé-mhi'-to, s. m.,
complement. L. 51.
Componente, com-po-nén'-td, act. part.,
component. L. 49.
Componer, com-po-nér' , to mend, to ar-
range, to compound, to comi>ose. L.
49.
Composición, com-po-sé-theon' [com-po-
se-8€oii'], 8. f., composition. L. 24.
Comprar, comprar'^ to buy, to pur-
Comprender, com-pr^n-dér' , t<> compre-
liend, to understand^ to campriise.
U 50.
Con, con, prep-, with, by. L. 10.
Concebir, coii-iha-ber' Icou-sSHjCt'Ii to
conceive of. L. 51.
^^CjQO^le
VOCABULARY.
467
Conceder, connthá-dér' [conee-dSr'], to
grant, to concede. L. 53.
Concertar, ccm-tfc^r-tór' [con-sSr-tár'J, to
concertj to agree. L. 58.
Conciencia, con-thé^n'-íhéíí [con-s^Sn'-
sSa], s. f., conscience. L. 40.
Concierto, con-théér'-to [con-ssSr'-to], s.
HL, concert, agreement. L. 17.
Concluir, con-dúér'j to conclude, to fin-
ish, to be over with. L. 58.
Concordancia, con-cor-dán'-théa^ [con-
cor-dán'-86g],s. f., concordance, agree-
ment. L. 50.
Condescender, con-d^-tMn-dér [con-dS-
sSn-dSr' ], to condescend, to agree. L.
48.
Condición, con-de-théon' [con-dS-sSon'],
s. f., condition. L. 43.
Condicional, con-de-théo-nál' [con-de-sgo-
nsr], adj., conditional. L. 59.
Conducir, con-dú-thér' [con-dü-sSr'], to
conduct, to convey, to lead. L. 40.
Confesar, con-fé-sár', to confess, to
acknowledge, to avow. L. 34.
Confuso, c(m-/ií¿'-«o, adj., confused, con-
founded. L. 54.
Conjugación, con-hú-gá-fhéon' [con-hü-
gS-8€oQ'], s. f., conjugation. L. 43.
Conjugar, con-hú-g&r'j to conjugate.
L. 43.
Conjunción, con-hún-théon' [con-hün-
B6on'], s. f., conjunction. L. 43.
Conmigo, con-me'-go, pron., with me,
with myself. L. 26.
Conocer, co-no-tKér' [co-no-B«r'],to know,
to be acquainted with. L. 25.
Conocimiento, co-no-the-meén'-to [co-no-
sS-mSén'-to], s. m., knowledge, bill of
lading. L. 43.
Consecuencia, con-8á-húhi'-thé(^ [con-ss-
kaén'-86g], s. f., consequence. L. 34.
Conseguir, <¡on-8á-ghér\ to obtain, to
get, to succeed. L. 42.
Consejo, con-ad' -ho, s. m., counsel, ad-
vice. L. 53.
Consentir, con-a^ín-ter', to consent, to
agree to. L. 38.
Consistir, con-aéa-tér', to consist. L.
52.
Consolar, con-ao-l&r\ to console. L. 35.
Constancia, con-atán'-théq [con-stSn'-sSa],
s. f., constancy, steadiness. L. 46.
Construcción, con-atrúk-theon' [con-
strük-sSon'], s. f., construction. L.
51.
Contante* con-t^n-iá, b. m, und &uj*,
ready niLmüy, L*, 38.
Contal", i.vH-tfír\ tu tíount, to t^lo^te, to
tell. L. 35.
Contener, fnn-tá-n^r', to ciotitiiíHi tu
retain, tu x'u&traiu, to átc>p, to check.
Contenido, con-tá-né'-THo, s. m., con-
tents. L. 49.
Contentar, con-t^-t&r', to make con-
tented, to make glad. L. 33.
Contento, con-tén'-to, adj., content,
contented, satisfied, L. 33.
Contigo, con-te'-go, pron., with thee.
L. 26.
Continuar, con-te-núár', to continue.
L. 54.
Contra, con'-irQ, prep., against. L. 41.
Contradecir, con-trd-dá-thér' [con-trá-ds-
86r'], to contradict. L. 41.
Contrario, con-tr&'-réo, adj., contrary.
Al contrario^ on the contrary. L.
53.
Convencer, con-vhi-ther' [con-vSn-sér'],
to convince. L. 48.
Convenir, con-vá-nér\ to suit, to be
fitting, to agree. L. 30.
Conversación, con-vér-aá-théon' [con-vSr-
8á-8€on'], s. f., conversation. L. 24.
Conversar, con-v^-aár\ to converse.
L. 55.
Convertir, con-vh--tér' , to convert. L.
45.
Convicto, con-vék'-to, irr. past. part.
(convencer), convicted. L. 52.
Convite, con-vé'-tá, s. m., invitation.
L. 56.
Copulativo, co-pú-lürté'-vOf adj . , copula-
tive. L. 59.
Coqueta, co-ká'-tQ, s. f., coquette. L.
32.
Corazón, co-rd-{hon' [co-rS-son'], s. m.,
heart. L. 56.
Corbata, cor-b&'-ta, s. f., cravat. L. 10.
Corona, co-ro'-n^, s. f., crown. L. 56.
Correcto, co-hrék'-to, adj., correct. L.
29.
Corredor, co-hrSrTHor'y s. m., corridor,
broker. L. 49.
Corregir, co-hrá-hér', to correct. Co-
rregirae, to mend. L. 59.
Correo, co-hrd'-o^ s. m., currier, post,
mail. Casa de correoa, post-office.
L. 29.
Correr, co-hr^', to run. Oorrerae, to
be ashamed or confused, to blush.
L. 51.
Corretear, co-hrd-ta&r\ to run about.
L. 53.
Correveidile, co-hrárvde-THé'-láy s. m.,
tale-bearer, tattler. L. 50.
Corriente, rú-hrehi'-la, adj., current;
i!i. Hi., \xl i^unieutt do, Fn^*arü of, a. f,,
(.■nrrL^nt, HLrouin, L. 56.
Cor riente mente , co-h rriw - ta-m^n'-td,
!idv., lurrently, flnently* J-.^ 40,
Corro, cti'hrti, s. ni., niuilc of people
colleictüd together for talking, L^
U.
Digitized
by Google
468
VOCABULARY.
Cortante, cor-tán'-tá, adj., cutting,
e4ged, sharp. L. 38.
Cortapluma!, cor-UÍ-plú'-mifs, s. m.,
pen-knife. L. 9.
Cortar, cor-Uír', to cut. L. 33.
Corto, cor'-tOf adj., short. L. 21.
Cosa, co'-SQj s. f., thing. Á cosa de las
seis, about six o'clock. L. 11.
Coser, co-aér'j to sew. L. 24.
Cosmopolita, coa-mo-po-le'-ta, s. m.,
cosmopolite. L. 51.
Costa, C08'-tQ, s. f., coast, cost. A costa
de, at the expense of. L. 60.
Costado, co«-t^'-rAO, s. m., side. L. 61.
Costar, co84ár\ to cost. L. 61.
Costumbre, cos-túm'-brá, s. f., custom,
habit. L. 54.
Creación, cráá-théon' [crSá-s^on'], s. f.,
creation. L. 41.
Crear, crcíér', to create. L. 41.
Crédito, crá'-THé-tOj s. m., credit, cre-
dence. L. 57.
Creencia, cráH'-théQ [crfiéii'-B6§], s. f.,
belief. L. 49.
Creer, crá^% to believe, to think (a
thing). L. 27.
Creyente, crá-yén'-táf act. part, and s.
m. and f., believing, believer. L. 38.
Criado, ctM'-tho^ s. m., servant. L.
17.
Criar, crear', to breed, to rear, to bring
up. L. 51.
Criatura, créá-tá'-rQf s. f., creature, in-
fent. L. 60.
Crimen, eré' -men, s. m., crime. L. 59.
Criticar, cre-té-cdr', to criticise. L. 48.
Critico, cre'-te-cOj s. m., critic. L. 45.
Cronologista, cro-no-lo-hés'-tQ, s. m.,
chronologist. L. 36.
Crueldad, crúél-dárH', s. f., cruelty.
L. 36.
Cuaderno, cu^THer'-no, s. m., copy-
book. L. 4.
Cual, cúfíl\ pron., which. L. 10.
Cualidad, cua^lé-THiÍTH' y s. f., quality.
L. 36.
Cualquiera, cÚQl-Jciá'-rQ, pron. and
adj., any one, whosoever, some one.
L. 34.
Cuan, ctt(fn', adv., how, as (used only
before adjs. and other advs. ). L. 14.
Cuando, cú^n'-doj adv., when. L. 9.
Cuanto, cú^n'-to, adj., how much, how
many. Cuanto antes, at once, imme-
diately. Por cuanto, inasmuch a«.
L. 14.
Cuarto, cÚQv'-to, ord. adj. and s. m.,
fourth, room, chamber. L. 40.
Cuatro, cúií'-tro, num. adj., four. L.
15.
Cuba, cú'-b§, s. f., cask, tub. Guba (is-
land of). L. 61.
Cubrir, cú-brér', to cover. L. 59.
Cuchara, cú-cM'-r(}y s. f., spoon. L. 60.
Cuchillo, ctí-chél'-yo [cü-cbs'-yo], s. m.,
knife (table). L. 33.
Cuello, cúW-yo [cú«'-yo], s. m., neck,
collar. L. 60.
Cuenta, cfóién'-t^, s. f., account, bill.
L. 46.
Cuento, cÚén'-to, s. m., story, tale. L.
44. .
Cuerpo, cÚér'-po, s, m., body. L. 64.
Cuervo, cúér'-vo, s. m., crow. L. 45.
Cuesta, cues' -tQ, s. f., hill. Á cuestas,
on one's back or shoulders. L. 63.
Cuestión, cúés-téon', s. f., question. L.
40.
Cuidado, cúé-9n&'-TK0f s. m., care. Es-
tar de cuidado, to be dangerously ilL
Estar con cuidado, to be very anx-
ious. L. 28.
Cuidar, cúé-THÜr', to care, to take care.
L. 44.
Culpa, c(U''PQ, s. f., feiult, blame, guilt.
L. 60.
Culpar, eúl-pár', to blame. L. 60.
Cultivar, cúl'ie-vár', to cultivate. L.
60.
Cumpleuios, cúm-pláán'-yos, s. m.,
birthday. L. 62.
Cumplimiento, cúm^plc-meén'-to, s. m.,
complement, fulfilling.
Cumplir, cám-plér', to accomplish, to
fulfil. L. 57.
Cuñado, cún-yá'-THo, a. m. and f.,
brother-in-law, etc. L. 64.
Curioso, c4-réo'-so,adj . , curious, worthy
of note. L. 61.
Curso, cúr'-8o,a.m., course. L. 64.
Custodia, cÚ8-to'-rH€Q, s. f., custody.
L. 53.
Cutis, cu'-tes, s. m. and f., skin. L. 64.
Cuyo, cú'-yo, pron., of whom, whose,
of which, which. L. 17.
Dale, dd'-U, inlj., have at it, go at it
or him. L. 64.
Dama, dá'-m^, s. m., dame, lady. Da-
mas, draughts or checkers. L. 58.
Danza, dán'-th^ [dán'-sa], s. f., dance.
L. 64.
Dañar, dUn-y&r', to damage, to hurt, to
harm. L. 47.
Dtmo, dán'-yo, s. m., danger, harm.
L. 42.
Dar, d&r, to give. Dares y tomares,
disputes, ifs and ands. Darse á la
vela, to set sail. L. 26.
De, da, prep., of, from. De día, by
day. De intento, on purpose. L. 4.
Deber, dá-b^', a. m., duty. L. 28.
Deber, dá-bhr\ to owe, must, ought
L. 28.
Digitized
by Google
VOCABULARY.
469
ten. L. 59.
Becidlr, da-th^'tuir' [de-flí-ipíír']j to de-
cide. L. eo.
Décimo, úa-the-iíto [f]i'^€ mo]^ ord. ^dj,
and s. m., t^ntb. L. 15.
Deoir, dá-ihér [da síFr'], to Btiy, tü ttU.
L. 27.
Declarar, íífl-ríí¥-r¿ír', to declare. L. 48.
Bedal, da-vH ál\E^ m. , tU ]iiit>l e . L. 24.
Dedo^ da'-THO, s. m., fltiííer. L, 59.
Defectivo, da-pk-ts'-vOj adj., defective.
L. «3.
BefeotOj dü-Z^i'-ío, b* m*i defect, fkil-
ing. L, 55.
Defender, da-fén-dBr\ to defend. L.
37.
Deflnioidn, tla-p-né-theon' lúA-U-aB-
aÉon'], fin f., doflnition, L^ 59.
Den Air, dá'fB~ner\ to lieflot:. L. 59.
Dejar, dá-hár\ to Jeayer to let, to i>er-
mit L. 44.
Delante, rfú-ídíi'-ííf^ prep. Dclnnte de,
btófi>re, LiL llie prtisuncii of. L. 16.
Delei tar ^ ria-íi e-íúr ■ , to d e 1 i gh t. L . 47,
Delie&do, cJd-íé-cid'-riio, adj., clelicHto.
Deliflioao, (Zá-Zc-if&eD'-scí [dl-i^-ieü-HoJ,
adj.T delicious. L. 35,
Delinonente, da-leti-kiíln'-tú, s. tn.;, de-
linque ut, tmíisgresüor. L. M.
Delinquir, dd-len-ker' , to tmnagregs.
L. 34.
Delitc, da-lé'~iQ¡ a. m.^ CaiUlt^ crime.
L, 51,
Demii, dá'm&S!\ udv., ov^er and aT^ove,
too much í ad^j. {gencTally uí^i^d with
lo, loa, las), tlit! rt*st, othera. L. 43.
Demasiado, dá-má-sfá'-ríH}, adj* and
adv., too much, too. L. 25.
Dentro, dí^t'-iro, prcp., in, within, in-
fiidtí {alwa^ys followed by de). L. 3 1.
Dereoldo, dn-rá'-eho^ aflj*, (stmiííht,
pTtíu, ri/^ht. L. 50. ,
Desafiar, da-íá-fiiír\ to cbnllengc. L.
65.
Desafio, dá-sá-Je'-o, e, m., challenge,
duel. L. 63,
Desanimar, da-itií-iiñ-már\ to disheart-
en, to discourage. L. 38.
Dei cansadamente, dits-can-aÜ-Tnií-
mhi'-lá, adv., eaijily, at one's ease.
L. 33.
DesoanH&do, íiflAc"ífn-«^'-r;/fl,adj., easy,
Q 11 jet, refrrshcd. L. 33.
Be Boan sar , da^-cñti-tüT' , to rebt. L. 33.
Descanso, dás-cñn'-sa^ s. m., re^t, re-
pose, case. L. 33.
Descaro, dfla-cú'-ro, a. ui., barefaced-
ness, L, 64.
Deacender, dás-fhhi-^^* lú&^^o-ú£i^}^ to
descíind. L. 37. I
DeBOomponer, dds-com-po-nlhr^ to dis-
arrange, to discompose, to put out of
order. L. 53.
Desoompnesto, dds-com-puda'-to, adj.,
disarranged, out of order. L. 53.
DeBOonfiar, dda-con-fedr'y to distrust,
to mistrust. L. 43.
Desfirraoia, das-grd'-thea [d58-grá'-8€§], s.
f., misfortune, ill-luck. L. 48.
De8uaoer,(2a9-d-<A^'[dfi8-£-8er'j,toundo,
to destroy, to take to pieces. L. 57.
Desierto, dá-séér'-to, s. m., desert,
wilderness. L. 54.
DesifiTual, dá-aé-gúol^ adj., unequal,
uneven. L. 55.
Desooapar, dá-so-cú-pár', to quit, evac-
uate, to empty. L. 56.
Despacio, dás-pá'-théo [dSs-pá'-séo], adv.,
slowljr. L. 6.
Despedir, dás-pá-THér', to dismiss, to
say farewell, to send or put away.
L. 59.
Despertar, das-ptr-tár', to awake, to
awaken, to arouse, to rouse. L. 34.
Despierto, dás-péér'-to, adj., awake,
brisk, lively. L. 52.
Desproporoionadisimamente,<2d«-pro-
por-théo-ná-THe''8é-má-mén-tá\.d&Bpro-
por-8eo-nS-TH6'-8€-mS-m6n-tS], adv., dis-
proportionately. L. 50.
Después, dcis-púés'f prep, and adv.,
after, afterward. L. 16.
Determinante, dá-th'-me-nán'tü, adj.,
determining. L. 53.
Determinar, dá-tér-me-nár' , to deter-
mine. L. 53.
Detrás, dá-trds'y prep, and adv., be-
hind. L. 33.
Deudor, dáú-d4>r\8. m., debtor. L. 45.
Devolver, dd-vol-v^', to return, to
give back. L. 43.
Dia, dé''(^, s. m., day. L. 9.
Diablo, déq'-hlo, s. m., devil. L. 65.
Dialecto, dM-Uk'-to, s. m., dialect. L.
55.
DiálofiTO, dé&'-lo-go, s. m., dialogue. L.
59.
Diantre, déün'-trd^s. m., deuce. L. 46.
Dibujo, dé-bú'-ho^ s. m., design, draw-
ing. L. 51.
Diccionario, dik-theo-nd'-reo [d6k-86o-
nS'-rgo], 8. m., dictionary. L. 49.
Dicha, dé'-chQ^ s. f., happiness, good
fortune. L. 64.
Dicho, dé'-cho^ s. m., saying. L. 54.
Diciembre, dé-théhn'-hrá [d5-8g«m'-bra],
s. m., December. L. 24.
Diente, déén'-tá, s. m., tooth. Hablar
entre dientes, to mumble, to mutter.
L. 63.
Diez, death' [d€Sa'], num. adj., ten. L.
14.
Digitized
by Google
470
VOCABULARY,
Diferencia, a^farrhi'-iHe^ [de-fs-rSn'.
■€»], B. f„ difference. L. 48.
Diferenoiar, dé-fá-rhi-ihMr' [de-fs-ren-
■eXr], to differ, to distinguish. L.
48.
Diftoil, ds-fl'-thU [d6-f€'-8«l], adj., diffi-
cult. L. 21.
Difioultad, dé-fé-cúl-tíÍTH\ s. f., diffi-
culty. L. 36. '
Digno, dig' -no, adj., worthy, deserv-
ing. L. 53.
Diluviar, dé-lú-vé&r\ to pour, to rain
in deluge. L. 30.
Dimes, de'-més. Andar en dimes y di-
retes, to hum and haw. L. 47.
Diminutivo, di-me-nHrte'-vo, s. m., di-
minutive. L. 44.
Dinero, de-na'-ro, s. m., money. L.
13.
Dios, deo8\ 8. m., God. L. 31.
Diptongo, dep-ton'-go, 8.m., diphthong.
L. 57.
Dirección, de-rtk-fkeon' [de-rSk-Beon'], s.
m., direction. L. 24.
Directo, de-rék'-to, adj., direct. L. 51.
Director, dé-rék-tor\ s. m., director.
L. 50.
Dirigir, dé-ré-her', to direct ; dirigirse,
to apply. L. 63.
Discípulo, dé-thé'-pú-lo [ds-se'-pü-io], s.
m,, pupil, disciple. L. 18.
Discreto, d^s-crá'-to, adj., discreet, cir-
cumspect. L. 39.
Disculpa, dea-dU'-pit, s. f., apology, ex-
cuse. L. 60.
Discurso, dea-cúr'-8o, s. m., discourse,
speech. L. 53.
Disgustar, dés-gús-t&r', to disgust, to
displease. L. 50.
Disgusto, dés-gús'-to, a. m., disgust,
displeasure. L. 50.
Disponer, dés-po-n^', to dispose, to lay
out, to arrange, to prepare. L. 48.
Disposición, d^8-^o-8e-théon' [des-po-se-
sson'], s. f., disposition, arrange-
ment, distribution. L. 33.
Distancia, dea-tán'-thef^ [d68-tán'-8€§], s.
f., distance. L. 51.
Distante, des-tán'-tá, adj., distant. L.
38.
Distar, dea-tá/r', to be distant, to be far
from. L. 53.
Distinguir, de8-ten-ghér\ to distin-
guish. L. 43.
Divertir, de-v(ér-tér', to divert, to
amuse. L. 39.
Dividir, dé-vé-THér', to divide. L. 51.
Divisar, dé-vé-8ár\ to descry, to per-
ceive, to make out. L. 42.
Doble, do'-hld, adj., double. L. 40.
Doce, do'-íhá [do'-sai, num. adj. and s.
m., twelve, twelfth. L. 14.
Docena, do-thd'-nf^ [do-8S'-n§], s. f., doz-
en. L. 40.
Doler, do-lér', to ache, to have pain.
L. 36.
Dolor, do-lor', s. m., pain. L. 50.
Domingo, do-men' -go, s. m., Sunday.
L. 9.
Donde, don'-da, adv., where. L. 9.
Do&a, don'-yQ, s. f., lady, madam, Mrs.
L. 2.
Dormir, dor-mer', to sleep. L. 41.
Dos, do8, num. adj., and s. m., two,
second. L. 14.
Drama, drá'-ma, s. m., drama. L.
52.
Dramático, (¿r¿í-m¿('-^co, adj., dramat-
ic. L. 52.
Duda, dú'-THa, s. f., doubt. L. 43.
Dudar, dú-Tuár', to doubt. L. 28.
Durable, dú-rá'-blá, adj., durable. L.
58.
Durante, dú-rán'-td, act. part., during.
L. 59.
Durar, dú-rár', to last, to endure, to
continue. L. 59.
Duro, dú'-ro, adj., hard; s. m., dollar.
L. 60.
Ea ! ¿'-g, intj., say ! hallo! L. 46.
Echar, á-chár', to throw, to put out, to
cast. Echar de ver, to notice. L.
53.
Económico, á-co-no'-mé-co, adj., eco-
nomical^ economic. L. 35.
Edad, d-THawH', s. f., age. L. 53.
Edición, á-dé-théon' [s-de-s€on'J, s. f.,
edition. L. 60.
Edificar, á-dé-fé-cár' , to edify, to build.
L. 48.
Efecto, ^-fW-to, s. m., effect. L. 47.
Iljecutar, ^-M-eú-tár' , to execute, to
put into practice. L. 60.
^emplo, á-hém'-plo, s. m., example.
L. 32.
^ercer, á-Jiér-iliér' [a-ü6r-8«r'], to exer-
cise, to practise. L. 60.
Iljercioio, á-hhr-the'-theo [fi-hSr-sS'-sSo],
s. m., exercise. L. 8.
El, la, 10, los, las, def. art., the. L. 1.
El, M, pers. pron., he, it» L. 1.
Elección, d-Uh-theon' [a-i«k-séon'], s. f.,
election, choice. L. 24.
Elegancia, á-lá-g&n'-{hé{^ [s-is-gán'-sSf],
s. f., elegance. L. 52.
Elegante, á-ld-gán'-tá, adj., elegant.
L. 65.
Elegir, d-ldrhér', to elect, to choose.
L. 39.
Elemento, d-ld-mén'-to, s. m., element,
constituent part. L. 60.
Elena, d-ld'-na, s. f., Helena, Ellen.
L. 19.
Digitized
by Google
rOCABULARF.
471
Sliptioo, drlep'4e-c0f adj., elliptic, ellip-
tical. L. 60.
Embarcadero, em-b^r-cd-THd'-ro, s. m.,
landing, ferry. L. 58.
Embargo, hn-b^r'-go^ s. m., embargo.
Sin embargo^ notwithstanding. L.
48.
Empellar, hi^pá'n-yár' , to engage, to
pledge, to bind, to pawn. L. 45.
Empero, hnrpá'-ro^ coig., yet, how-
ever, but. L. 60.
Emplear, )ém^plaár\ to employ. L. 44.
Empleo, ém^pld'-Oj s. m., employ, em-
ployment, position. L. 57.
En, ¿n, prep., in, at, on. L. 8.
Enamorar, ¿í-ná-mo-rár' ^ to enamor,
to court, to make love to. L. 39.
Encargo, én-car'-go, s. m., charge,
command, commission. L. 57.
Encargar, én-CQr-gar, to charge, to or-
der, to commission. L. 58.
Encender, hirthén-dh-' [gn-Bgn-dSr'], to
light, to kindle. L. 37.
Encerrar, ht-thé-hrár' [Sn-sS-hrSr'], to
close, to shut up, to contain, to com-
prehend. L. 65.
Encima, H-thé'rmQ [Sn-se'-ma], prep,
and adv., above, over. L. 33.
Encontrar, íín-^xm-tr&r'j to meet, to
' find. L. 35.
Enemigo, á-ná-me'-go, s. m., enemy.
L. 51.
Enemistar, árná-mé8-tár\ to set at en-
mity, to antagonize. L. 60.
Energía, á-«^-Ae'-g, s. f., energy. L.
01.
Enfermar, én-fér-már', to make sick,
to become sick. L. 38.
Enfermo, ^-/^'-wo, adj., sick, ill. L.
48.
Enfrente, ht-fren'-td^ adv., opposite,
in front. L. 51.
Engañar, én-gdn'-ydr, to deceive, to
cheat, to take in. L. 32.
Enhebrar, H-d-brdr\ to thread, to link.
L. 65.
Enhonrabnena, én-onrhrf^-húá'-nfí^ s. f.,
congratulation, felicitation. L. 39.
Enrique, en-hri'-kd, s. m., Henry. L.
15.
Enseñar, ^«án-y¿ír', to show, to teach.
L. 27.
Ensuciar, ^-sú^thédr' [Sn-sü-BeSr'], to
soil, to daub. L. 60.
Entendedor, ht-tH-dd-THor'^ s. m., one
who understands. L. 65.
Entender, (én-ién-d6r\ to understand.
L. 31.
Entonoes, hirton'-thes [¿n-ton'-sés], adv.,
then. L. 23.
Entrambos, h^trdm'-boBt pron. pi.,
both. L. 60.
Entrar, hirirdr\ to go in, to enter, to
begin, to come in. L. 28.
Entre, hi'-trd, prep., between, in the
course of, among. L. 19.
Entretanto, hirtrd-tdn'-to, adv., in the
meantime. L. 60.
Entretener, tn-tra-td-nér', to entertain,
to occupy, to divert. L. 40.
Entusiasmo, ht-tú-aéds'-mo, s. m., en-
thusiasm. L. 54.
Enviar, hi-védr', to send. L. 14.
Envidiar, ér^vé-rHéár' ^ to envy. L.
40.
Equivocación, d-ki-va-cd-théon' [fi-k&
yo-cá-sSon'], s. f., mistake, misconcep-
tion. L. 50.
Equivocar, d-ké-vo-cdr' , to make a mis-
take, to mistake. L. 47.
Erguir, h-'gher', to hold erect (as the
head, etc.). L. 42.
Errar, t-hrdr\ to err, to miss. L. 41.
Erudición, d-rú-de-the-on' [a-rü-ds^s-
on'], s. f., erudition. L. 52.
Escaldar, ta-cdl-dár', to scald. L. 65.
Escena, is-the'-nQ [e-BS'-n§], s. f., scene.
L. 65.
Esoéptico, Mhep'-te-co [S-sSp'-ts-co],
adj., skeptical. L. 45.
Ssooba
Escoba^ ¿«-co'-ftg, s. f., broom. L. 49.
Escobajo, h'Co-bd'-ho, s. f.. miserable
stump of a broom. L. 49.
Escoger, és-co-hér', to choose. L. 66.
EBcribano, és-cre-há'-no, s. m., notary.
L. 19.
Escribiente, ^-cré-béén'-td, s. m.,
amanuensis, clerk. L. 38.
Escribir, és-cré-hér'; to write. L. 8.
Escritor, es-cre-tor'^ s. m., writer, au-
thor. L. 19.
Escritura. iía-crc-¿4'-rg, writing, docu-
ment, conveyance ; las escrituraa^
the Scriptures. L. 19.
Escuchar, és-cú-chdr', to hearken, to
listen. L. 60.
Escuela, Hs-kua'-lq, s. f., school. L. 21.
Escultor, ^-cúl'tor'j s. m., sculptor.
L. 31.
Escultura, ^c<U-(4'-rg, s. f., sculpture.
L.31.
Esforzar, U-for-ihár' [gg-for-tór'], to
strengthen, to exert, to make effort.
L. 60.
Esfuerzo, ^-fHker'-iho [es-fúér'^o], s. m.,
endeavor, effort. L. 47.
Espacio, ^'pd'théo [és-pá'-sfio], s. m.,
si)ace. L. 48.
Espada, és-p&'-THa, s. f., sword. L. 57.
Espadachín, és-pd-rHd-chén' , s. m.,
buUv. L. 63.
Espalda, es-pdl'-dQ, s. f., shoulder; pi.
back. L. 59.
Espima, és-pdn'-tfQ, s. f., Spain. L. 9.
■^
472
VOCABULAEY,
Espa&ol, )Í8-pán-yol\ a. and adj., Simui-
ish language and Spanish. A la e»-
paHola, in the Spanish fashion. L. 2.
Eipeoie, és-pá'-theá [gsps'-ges], s. f.,
species, sort, kind. L. 40.
Especiero, és-pá-theá'-ro [és-pfi-ssfi'-ro],
s. m., spicer, grocer. L. 65.
Espejo, és-pá'-hOf s. m., looking-glass.
L. 60.
Esperania, ts-pa-ran'-thq [Ss-ps-rán'-sal,
s. f., hope. L. 27.
Esperar, ^is-pá-r&r'j to hope, to expect,
to await. L. 32.
Espirita, és-pé-ré-tú, s. m., spirit. L.
45.
Esposa, ea-po'-sQ, s. f., wife. L. 39.
Esposo, éa-po'-so, s. m., husband. L.
39.
Esquela, ^-ká'-la, s. f., note. L. 56.
Esquina, ^s-ké'-n^, s. f., corner. L. 51.
Establecer, és-tá-blá-thér' [és-tí-bis-sér'],
to establish. L. 42.
Estación, és-td-theon' [Ss-tS-Béon'], s. f.,
season, station. L. 60.
Estado, ^-t&'-THOy 8. m., state. L. 19.
Estar, ^-tár\ to be, to understand.
Estar para salir, to be about to set
out. Estar por alguno, to be for one.
i Está usted? do you understand?
L. 22.
Este, W'tá, s. m., east. L. 22.
Este, Esta, Esto, W-ta, és'-tQ, ^'-to,
dem. pron., this, this one, he, she,
it. L. 18.
Estilo, és-té'-lo, s. m., style. L. 52.
Estimable, }^-t€-má'-blá, adj., estima-
ble. L. 39.
Estimar, ^-té-m&r'j to esteem, to esti-
mate. L. 39.
Esto, ^'-to (see Este). L. 18.
Estocada, és-to-cá-THQ, s. f., thrust,
stab. L. 53.
Estratagrema, h-trd-td-M'-ma, s. f.,
stratagem, ruse. L. 44.
Estrechar, és-trá-chdr', to tighten, to
squeeze, to press, to make narrow.
L. 60.
Estrecho, h-tra'-cho, adj., narrow,
straitened, close, intimate. Estre-
cho, s. m., strait. L. 60.
Estribo, és-tré'-bo, s. m., stirrup. L.
38.
Estudiante, ^-tu-rHedn'-td^ s. m., stu-
dent. L. 38.
Estudiar, és-tú-THédr' , to study. L. 3.
Estudio, és-tú'-THéo, s. m., study. L.
25.
Eternidad, a-Íér-ne-THdTH\ s. f., eter-
nity. L. 36.
Eterno, á-téfr'-no, adj., eternal. L. 41.
Evidencia, d-va-den'-theQ rs-vfi-dgn'-sCa],
s. f., evidence. L. 59.
Evitar, a^é-tdr\ to avoid, to keep
from. L. 47.
Ezafferación, )Sk-8d-há-rdrtheon' [^-sX-
bfi-rS-seon'], s. f., exaggeration. L.
48.
Ezafirerar, iksd-hd-rdr' ^ to exaggerate.
L. 60.
Examen, ^h-sd'-mhif s. m., examina-
tion. L. 38.
Examinar, ék-sd-me-ndr', to examine.
L. 41.
Exceder, ^s-thd-TH^hr' [^-ss-vHSr'], to
exceed, to overstep, to surpass. L.
53.
Excelente, ^kS'thá-lén'-tá [^-s5-i8n'-ts],
adj., excellent. L. 53.
Excepción, ^iks-th^ip-théon' [^-sep-fleon'],
s. f., exception. L. 45.
Exceptuar, éks-thíip-túdr' [^-eSp-tüár'],
to except. L. 60.
Exclamación, Sks-dd-md-théon' [gks-ciá-
mS-BSon',s.f., exclamation. L. 24.
Exclamar, eks-dd-mdr'f to exclaim.
L. 60.
Excusa, ^ikS'CÚ'-SQ, a. f., excuse, apol-
ogy. L. 60.
Excusar, ^ks-cúrsdr'^ to excuse, to apol-
ogize. L. 27.
Exhibición, éks-é-bé-théon' [gks-€-b6-
séon'l, s. f., exhibition. L. 48.
Exhibir, ^fc«-e-&er', to exhibit. L. 60.
Exigrir, ^k-se-her', to exact, to require,
to demand. L. 38.
Existencia, ^Sk-ses-ten'-iheQ [gk-Bes-t^n'-
8fa], s. f., existence (pi. stock). L.
52"
Existir, ^k-sés-ter\ to exist. L. 40.
Exito, ék'-sé-to, s. m., result, issue.
Buen éxito, success.
Experiencia, ¡^ks-pd-rihi'-the^ [?k8-ps-
rggn'-ssal, s. f., experience. L. 41.
Explicación, ^ks-plé-cd-theon' [éks-pié-
cS-sSon'], s. f., explanation. L. 48.
Explicar, iSks-ple-cdr't to explain. L.
45.
Exponer, cJk«-po-»^', to expose, to ex^
pound. L. 51.
Expresar, éks-prd-sdr' , to express. L.
52.
Expresión, liks-prá-séon' , s. f., expres-
sion. L. 56.
Expresivo, ¡iks-prd-se'-vo, adj., expres-
sive. L. 65.
Exterior, éks-td-reor', s. m., outside,
exterior. L. 48.
Extra, Hks'-trQ, adv., extra. L. 60.
Extranjero, éks-trdng-hd'-ro, s. m.,
foreigner. L. 60.
Extrañar, éhs-trdn-ydr' , to wonder at,
to find strange. L. 60.
Extraño, ^s-trdn'-yo, adj.» strange.
L. 48.
Digitized
by Google
VOCABULARY.
.473
Extraordinario, }gk8'triíor'di'ná'-reo,
adj., extraordinary. L. 46.
Extremado, éks'trá-má'-fHo, adj., ex-
treme. L. 55.
Fabrioar, fá-bré-c&r', to build, to make,
to manufacture. L. 48.
Facción, fák-théon' [fák^fion'], s. f.,
feature, faction. L. 35.
Fáoil, fá'-thU tf«'-86l], adj., easy. L.
21. -
Facilidad, fá-thé-lé-THárH' [fS-sé-is-
thSth], s. r., facility, ease. L. 36.
Facilitar, fá-thé-lé-tár' [fí-se-ie-tár'], to
facilitate, to make easy, to procure.
L. 49.
Fácilmente, fd-thelrnien'-td [fS-sSimen'-
tal, adv., easily. L. 49.
Factura, fák-tú'-TQ, s. f., invoice. L.
63.
Facultad, fd-eul'THárH\ s. f., faculty,
, iMJwer to do anything, liberty to do
anything. L. 63.
Falso, fál'-8o, adj., false. L. 45.
Falta, fiU'-tQ, s. f., want, fault, lack.
L. 27.
Faltar, fiU4ár\ to want, lack, to be
lacking in. L. 31.
Fama, fá'-ma, s. f., fame, reputation,
repute. L. 65.
Familia, fa-me'-leq^ s. f., family. L.
23.
Familiar, fOrmé-le dr' ^ adj., familiar.
L. 49.
Familiaridad, fá-mé-lid-ré-THdTH', s.
f., familiarity. L. 65.
Famoso, f armo' -so, adj., famous. L.
45.
Fanático, fd-na'-te-co, adj., fanatical.
L. 35.
Fas, fas, por/a« 6 por nefas, right or
wrong ; justly or unjustly. L. 63.
Fastidio, fás-té'-THéOy s. m., trouble,
annoyance. L. 47.
Favor, fdrvor', s. m., favor, mercy,
help. Á favor de, in behalf of. L.
39.
Favorecer, fdrvo-rd-ther' [fá-vo-ra-sffr'],
to favor. L. 56.
Favorito, fd-^o-re'-to^ adj., favorite.
L. 54.
Fe./á,s.f.. faith. L.45.
Febrero, f^hrd'-ro^ s. m., February.
L. 24.
Fecha, fd'-cha, s. f., date. L. 20.
Felicidad, fá-lé'thé-THdTH' [fS-is-sg-
thSth'], s. f., happiness, felicity. L.
48.
Felicitar, fá-lé-thé-tdr' [fa-ie-ss-tár], to
felicitate, to congratulate. L. 61.
Feliz, fá-lith' [fa-iss'l, adj., happy, for-
tunate. L. 21.
Feliimente, fd-Uth-mht'-td rfSiSB-mSn'-
ts], adv., happily, fortunately. L.
49.
Femenino, fd-md-ne'-no^ adj., feminine.
L. 47.
Feo, fd'-o, adj., ugly. L. 7.
Feros, /a-ro<A' [fa-ros'l, adj., ferocious,
fierce, ravenous. L. 54.
Ferrocarril, f^-hro-cd-hrél\ s. m., rail-
road. L. 60.
Fiado, féd'-THo, adj., confident, trust-
ing. Al fiado, on credit. L. 61.
Fiar, féár', to trust, to go bail. L.
61.
Fiel, /cóZ', adj., faithful. L. 21.
Fiesta, feds' -td, s. f., feast, festival,
féte. Día de jíesía, holiday. L. 62.
Figura, /e-gtí'-r^, s. f., figure, form,
shape. Hacer figura, to make or cut
a figure. L. 63.
Figurado, fe-gu-rd'-ruo, adj., figura-
tive. L. 51.
Filosofastro, fe-lo-so-fds'-tro, s. m.,
philosophaster. L. 49.
Filósofo, /e-Zo'-«o-/o, s. m., philosopher.
L. 49.
Fin, fen, s. m., object, end, point. Á
fin de, in. order to. L. 45.
Final, fe-ndl', s. m. and adj., end, ter-
mination, final. L. 61.
Finalmente, /é-náí-TO^'-tó, adv., final-
ly. L. 49.
Fino, /e'-no, adj., fine, clever, hand-
some, refined. L. 56.
Firma, fér'-mq, s. f. , signature. L. 56.
Fisonomía, fe-so-no-me'-^, s. f., physi-
ognomy. L. 45.
Flaqneza, fid-kd'-th^ [flS-ks'-8§l, s. f.,
leanness, weakness, foible, frailty.
L. 64.
Fondo, fon' -do, s. m., bottom, ground
(of colored articles) ; pi. funds, cash,
money. L. 60.
Formal, for-mM', adj., formal, reliable,
respectable. L. 45.
Formalidad, for-má-lé-THárH' , s. f.,
formality, reliability. L. 45.
Formar, for-mdr', to form, to shape.
L. 43.
Fortuna, /or-ftí'-wg, s. f., fortune, luck.
L. 42.
Fragata, frdrgd'-tQ, s. f., frigate. L.
60.
Fraile, frQ'é-ld, s. m., friar. L. 41.
Francés, frdn-thds [frSn-sSs'l, s. m. and
adj., French, Frenchman. L. 3.
Francia, frdn'-thé^ [fran'-8S§], s. f.,
France. L. 9.
Francisco, frdn-this'-co [frfin-sSs'-co], s.
m., Francis. L. 44.
Franco, /ran'-co, adj., frank, candid,
intimate. L. 34.
Digitized
by Google
áU
VOCABULARY,
Eranquesa, frUn-hd'-thQ [fríín-ks'-B§l, s.
f., frankness, intimacy. L. 48.
Frase, frá'-sát s. f., phrase, sentence.
L. 61.
Fray, frd'-é, s. m,, fríar. L. 41.
Frecuente, /ro-fcu^'-tó, adj., frequent.
L. 29.
Freir, fráér', to fry. L. 52.
Frente, frén-tá, adj., front, s. f., fore-
head. En frente, opposite. L, 45.
Fresco, fréa-co, adj., fresh, cool. Pin-
tara ai fresco, fresco painting. L.
46.
Fresco, frh'-co. s. m., cool breeze;
fresco (painting). L. 46.
Frio, fré'-o, adj., cold. L. 25.
Friolera, freo-la'-ro, a. f., trifle. L.
37.
Fruta, frú'-tat, s. f., fruit. L. 31.
Fruto, frú'-to, s. m., fruit (produce).
L. 40.
Fnegro, fuá' -go, s. m., ñre. L. 34.
"Fuente, fíién'-tá^s. f., fountain, spring,
source. L. 52.
Fuera, fúa'~rQ, adv., out. Fuera de
que, besides. L. 31.
Fuera! fúd'-rQ, intj., out! begone!
away ! L. 31.
Fuerza, fúér'-th^ [fCi«r'-Bft], s. f., force,
strength. A fuerza de, by dint of.
L. 68.
Fugra, fú'-ga, s. f., flight, escape. L.
57.
Fulano, /i¿-Z¿í'-no, s. m., so and so, such
a one. L. 55.
Fumar, fú-már', to smoke. L. 42.
Fusil, fú-sél', s. m., gun. L. 49.
Fusilar, fú-sé-ldr', to shoot (mil.) L.
45.
Futuro, fú-tú'-ro, s. m., future (tense).
L.43.
Futuro, fú-tú'-ro, adj., future.- L. 43.
Oalán, gít-lán', s. m. and adj., gallant,
actor ; gallant. L. 58.
Oalante, gá-l&n'-tá, adj., gallant, court-
ly. L. 58.
Oalioismo, gá-lé-thés'-mo, s. m.. Galli-
cism. L. 61.
Oallep'O, gáUyá'-go [gS-yS'-go], s. m.,
Qalician. L. 55.
Oallina, g<U-yé'-nQ [gS-yS'-na], s. f., hen.
L. 5.
Oana, gd'-nf^^ s. f., desire, will, appe-
tite. L. 59.
Oanapierde, gá-níi-pétr'-da, s. m., a
gave-away game of checkers. L.
50.
Oanar, gd-ndr', to gain, to win. L. 27.
Oanso, gán'-so, s. m., goose. Hablar
por boca de ganso, to repeat what
has been said by others. L. 63.
Oarrotaso, gSrhro-tá'-so, s. m., blow
with a cudgel. L. 44.
Oarrote, gá-hro'-tá, s. m., cudgel. L.
44.
Oastar, gás-tár', to waste, spend, to ex-
pend. L. 50.
Oatillo, gd-tel'-yo [gá-ts'-yo], s. m. dim.,
little cat, trigger of a gun. L. 53.
Oato^ gá'-to, s. m., cat. L. 46.
Oemido, hd-Tms'-THo, s. m., groan,
moan, lamentation. L. 59.
GFeneral, há-ná-riU'f s. m. and adj.,
general. L. 45.
Oénero, há'-ná-ro, s. m., gender, genus,
kind, sort, cloth. L. 57.
Oentilioio, hhi-te-U'-theo [hSnte-is'-
sSol, adj-, P^uliar toanation. L.
49.
Oentio, hhirié'-o, s. m., great crowd,
multitude. L. 40.
Oentualla, hé/n-túg^'-yg^ [hgn-tüa'-y§], s.
f., rabble, mob. L. 49.
Gigantesco, he-g&n-tés'-co, adj., gigan-
tic. L. 49.
Gineta, hé-ná'-tQ, tener los cascos á la
gineta, to be hare-brained. L. 64.
Qlóbo,glo'-bo, s. m., globe, balloon. L.
37.
Gobernante, go-h^-n&n'-td, acf. part,
governing; los gohemantes^the rulers.
L. 38.
Gobernar, go-hhr-nár', to govern. L.
34.
Gobierno, go-heér'-no, s. m., govern-
ment. L. 40.
Goce, go'-thá [go'-as], s. m., enjoyment.
. L. 54.
Golpe, gol'-pá, s. m., blow, stroke. L.
61.
González, gon-thá'-l^th [gon-gS'-iSs], s.
m., González. L. 49.
Gorra, go'-hr^, s. f., bonnet. Vivir de
gorra, to live at others' expense ; to
sponge. L. 64.
Gozar, go-th&r [go-sir'], to enjoy. L.
25.
Gozo, go'-tho [go'-so], s. m., joy, pleas-
ure. L. 51.
Grabado, grd-bd'-THo, s. m., engrav-
ing, cut (picture). L. 52.
Grabar, grá-bdr', to engrave. L. 52.
Gracia, grd'-thég [grá'-séal, s. f., grace,
favor, pardon, gracefulness. L.
51.
Gracias, grd'-théQS [grS'Hséfts], s. m.
pL, thanks, thank you. L. 23.
Grado, grd'-rno^ s. m., grade, degree.
L. 60.
Gramática, grd-md'-té-cQ, s. f., gram-
mar. L. 5.
Gramatical, grd-md-té-cál' , adj., gram-
matical. L. 51.
Digitized
by Google
VOCABULARY.
475
Grande, grUn'-da^ a^j-, large, great.
L. 7.
Chranizar, grd-ni-thar' [grS-ne-sar'], to
hail. L. 30.
Grato, grá'-to^aáj., grateful, pleasing,
agreeable. L. 56.
Grito, gré'-tOf s. m., cry, shout, scream.
L.. 59.
Gnerra, ghé'-hraf s. f., war. L. 56.
Guiñada, ghén-y&'-THií^B. f., wink. L.
54.
ChiipÚBOoa, ghi-púíh''COQ [gh€-püs'-co§],
8. f., Guipúscoa (a province in Spain).
£.. 55.
Gustar, gús-tár\ to like, to please, to
taste. L. 31.
Gusto, gÚ8''tOf s. m., taste, pleasure.
L. 23.
Habana, d-bá'-nQ, s. f., Havana. L. 12.
Habanero, á-bd-né'-ro^ adj. and s. m.,
Havanese. L. 49.
Haber, á-bér\ to have (used only as an
auxiliary verb with this significa-
tion. See L. 66). Impersonal verb,
there to be. L. 12.
Hábil, á'-hél^aAj.f able, skilful, expert,
clever. L. 21.
Habilidad, árbé-lé-THiÍTH' , s. f., ability,
skil^ulness, expertness. L. 36.
Habitante, á-bé-tán'-tá, s. m., inhabit-
ant. L. 40.
Hablador, (^-blá-THor', adj. and s. m.,
talkative and talker. L. 20.
Hablar, grblár', to speak, to talk. L. 1.
Haoer, a-thh"' [S-sdr'j, to do, to make.
Hacer de, to act as. L. 19.
Haoia, &''ÍhéQ íí'-bs%], adv., toward.
L.. 19.
Hallar, ál^dr' [«-y»'], to find. L. 37.
Hambre, Am' -bra, s. f., hunger. Te-
ner hambre^ to be hungry. ^- 25.
Hasta, ás'-ta, adv., until, till, as far
as, even. L. 19.
Hasmereir, dth-mcHrdir' [Ss-ms-rSSr'l, s.
m., laughing-stock. L. 50.
He! d, intj., oh! what! what is it!
L. 44.
Heoho, a'-chOf s. m., fact, event. L.
52.
Helar, á-lár', to freeze. L. 30.
Helena, á-lá'-nQ^ a. f., Helena, Ellen.
L. 19.
Hermanastto, h-'tnA-nas'-tro, s. m.
ang., step-brother, half-brother. L.
49.
Hermano, ¡ír-má'-nOf s. m., brother.
L. 6.
Hermoso, ¿r-mo'-«o, adj., beautiful,
handsome. L. 7.
Hermosura, tér-mo-sú'-r^^ s. f., beauty,
handsomeness. L. 53.
Herrero, ^-hra'-ro, s. m., blacksmith.
L. 65.
Hielo, ea'-lOy s. m., ice, frost. L. 30.
Hierba, y^'-ftg, 8. f., herb, grass. L. 60.
Hierro, eé'-hro, s. m., iron. L. 61.
Hi^o, e'-go, s. m., fig. L. 40.
Hijastro, e-hAs'-tro^ s. m., stepson. L. 49.
Euo, e'-^o, s. m., son. L. 6.
Eilúr, h-lár', to spin. L. 65.
Hilo, é'-lo, s. m., thread. L. 24.
Hinohar, en-char'^ to swell. L. 53.
Historia, e«-to'-reg, s. f., history. L.
15.
Hoja, o'-^g, s. f., leaf (of a tree or a
book). L. 59.
Hola, o'-Iq, intj., hallo ! L. 46.
Holgazán, ol-gá-thán' [oi-gá-sán'], adj.
and s. m., idle, lazy, loiterer, idler.
L. 6.
Hombre, om'-bráj s. m., man. Es más
hombre que su hermano, he is more
of a man than his brother. L. 6.
Honor, o-nor\ s. m., honor. L. 39.
Honroso, on-hro'-aOf adj., honorable.
L. 52.
Hora, o'-TQy s. f., hour. L. 23.
Homo, or' -no J s. m., oven. Cocer en
homOy to bake. L. 60.
Horrendo, o-hrhi'-dOf horrible (poet.).
L. 55.
Hortelano, or-tá-lá'-no, s. m., gardener.
L. 65.
Hospital, oa-pé'tál', s. m., hospital.
L. 47.
Hotel, o-tU', s. m., hotel. L.17.
Hueso, úá'jso, s. m., bone. L. 61.
Huésped, úés'-p^ÍTH, s. m., host. Echar
la cuenta sin la huésped, to reckon
without the host. L. 63.
Huir, ú-ér', to fiee, to make off. L. 34.
Hnmano, ú-má'-no^ adj., human. L.
48.
Hnmor, ú-mor', s. m., humor, wit. L.
27.
Idea, ^-nza'-g, s. f., idea, thought. L.
54.
Ideal, é-THádV, adj., ideal. L. 48.
Idioma, é-THeo'-m^^ s. m., language.
L. 55.
Idiota, é-riréo'-<g, s. m., idiot. L. 48.
Idiotismo, é-THeo-tés'-mo, s. m., idiom.
L. 49.
Iglesia, e-glá'-8éQ, s. f., church. L.
16.
Ignorancia, ég-no-rán-íheg, [Sg-no-rán'-
BSaJ, s. f., ignorance. L. 52.
Ignorante, eg-no-rán'-tá, adj., ignorant.
L. 61.
Ignorar, eg-no-rdr'j to be ignorant of,
not to know. L. 61.
Igual, e-gUQl', adj., equal, alike. L. 48.
ninirpfl hY
Goc»?if
476
VOCABULARY.
Igrnaldad, é-gúq^'THáTH\ s. f., equal-
ity. L. 55.
Uasión, é-lú-8eon\ s. f., illusion. L.
48. ^ ^
Imaginación, é-má-hé-ná-théon' [e-mS-
he-ns-seon'], s. f., imagination. L.
58.
Impedir, emrpd'THér\ to impede, to
hinder. L. 43.
Imperativo, em-pe-ra-ie'-vOt adj. and s.
m., imperative, imperative mode.
L. 43.
Imperfeooión, em-pHr-f&c-theon' iSm-
pér-f^k-sSon'], s, f., imperfection. L,
55.
Imperfecto, em-ph'-fik'-to, adj., imi>er-
fect. L. 43.
Impersonal, ém-p^'80-nM\ adj., im-
personal. L. 61.
Imponer, em-po-nh-'^ to impose, to in-
form, to acquaint. L. 44.
Importante, empor-tan'-ta^ adj., im-
portant. L. 38.
Importar, em-por-tdr', to imjwrt, to be
of importance, to amount to. L. 31.
Imposible, em-po-se'-bla^ adj., impossi-
ble. L. 31.
Impreso, ém-prá'-ao, p. p. of Impbi-
MIE, to print. L. 61.
Imprimir, ém-pré-mér\ to print. L.
61.
Improyisar, em-pro-ve-sdr', to impro-
vise, to extemporise. L. 58.
Improviso, ém-pro-vé'-so. De improvi-
so, unexpectedly, on a sudden. L.
62.
Imprudencia, ém-prú-dén'-ihé^ [sm-prft-
den'-sSftl, s. f., imprudence. L. 43.
Imprudente, em-pru-den'-td, adj., im-
prudent. L. 20.
Impuesto, ém-púás'-to, p. p. of Impo-
ner. L. 52.
In, en, Lat. prep., used in Spanish as
a prefix only, and generally with a
negative signification. L. 50,
Incendiar, én-thhi-deár' [én-sSn-dSár'],
to set fire to a house. L. 51.
Incluir, én-dúer'y to include. L. 49.
Incómodamente, m-co'-TM-THii-men-ta,
adv., inconveniently, uncomfort-
ably. L. 29.
Incomodar, en-cO'VMhm&r\ to put out,
to incommode. L. 47.
Incómodo, én-co'-mo-THo, adj., incom-
modious, inconvenient. L. 29.
Incompleto, én-com-plá''to, adj., in-
complete. L. 48.
Inconveniente, en-con-vd-ne-hi'-ta, s.
m. and adj., difficulty, obstacle, in-
convenient. L. 64.
Increible, én-crüé'-bláj adj., incredible.
L. 61.
Indefinido, enrdá-fé-né'-THOf a4j., in-
definite. L. 61.
Independencia, en-dehpht-den'-ihef^ [en-
dS-pSn-dén'-sS§], s. f., independence.
L. 35.
Indicativo, én-dé-cá-te'-voy adj., indic-
ative. L. 43.
índice, ¿n'-de-thd [én'-dé-sá], b, m., in-
dex. L. 61.
Indigno, én-deg'-no^ adj., unworthy,
undeserving. L. 53.
Indigo, én' -de-go, adj. (See Añil.)
L. 54.
Indirecto, en-de-rik'-to, adj., indirect.
L. 51,
Individuo, énrdé-vi'-WHÚo, s. m., in-
dividual. L. 51.
Industrioso, én-dús-tréo'-ao, a4j., in-
dustrious. L. 35.
Inepto, é-nép'-tOf adj., unfit, inept.
L. 51.
Inexplicable, i-néks-pli-cá'-blá, adj.,
inexplicable. L. 61.
Infancia, én-fán'-théQ [6n-fín'-8€g], s. f.,
infancy. L. 54.
Inferior, én-fchréor\ adj., inferior. L.
^21.
Inñmo, én'-fe-moy adj., lowest. L. 21.
Inflnidiad, én-fé-né-THáTH\8. f., infini-
tar. L. 40.
Infinitivo, én-fé-ne-te'-vo, adj., infini-
tive. L. 43.
Infinito én-fé-né'-to, adj., infinite. L.
39.
Influir, én-fiúer\ to influence. L. 48.
Infortunio, en-for-tú'-neo, s. m., mis-
fortune. L. 41.
Ingenio, én-há'-néOf s. m., genius. L.
61.
Ingenioso, énrha-néo'-ao^ &dJM ingeni-
ous. L. 61.
Inglaterra, éng-la-Hé'-hrQ, s. f., Eng-
land. L. 9.
Inglés, eng-la8\ s. m. and adj., Eng-
lish. L. 2.
Inicial, é-né-théál [e-ns-seái'], adj., ini-
tial. L. 56.
Injusticia, én-hús-té'-thég [en-b&s-té'-
sSa], s. f., injustice. L. 45.
Inmediato, én-má-THéá'-to, adj., im-
mediate, near. L, 61.
Inmemorial, én-má-mo-réál', adj., im-
memorial. L. 55.
Inocente, é-no-ihH'-tá [é-no-sSn'-ts],
adj., innocent. L. 34. *
Inquietar, én-kéá-tár\ to disquiet, to
make uneasy. L. 61.
Inquieto, én-kéá'-to, adj., uneasy, rest-
less. L. 61.
Insec 0, én-8¡ík'-to^s. m., insect. L. 61.
Inspirar, ér^8pi-rár\ to inspire. L.
58.
Digitized
by Google
VOCABULARY.
á77
Instante, en-gUtn'-td^ s. m., instant.
Al instante j immediately. L. 42.
Instinto, én-8tén''to^ s. m., instinct.
L. 61.
Instrnooión, eh-strúk-théon' [€n-8trük-
seon'lf 8. f., instruction, learning.
L. 52.
Instruido, én-strué'-THOj adj., in-
structed, learned, educated. L. 49.
Instruir, en-strúer^ to instruct, to
teach. L. 47.
Instrumento, en-atru-mhi'-to, s. m., in-
strument. L. 61.
Intachable, en-tá-chá'Ma, adj., unim-
peachable, irreproachable. L. 62.
Intención, en-íén-théon' [€n-tén-8€on'],
8. f., intention. L. 61.
Intentar, én-tén-tár'^ to attempt L.
61.
Interés, m-tá-ráa', s. m., interest. L.
54.
Interesante, m-iá-rá-sán'-táf adj., in-
teresting. L. 47.
Interesar, én'tcM-d-8ár\ to interest.
L. 61.
ínterin, en'-ta-ren, adv., in the mean-
while. L. 61.
Interior, enrta-réor'y adj., interior. L.
48.
Interior, en-tá^éor\ s. m., interior.
L. 45.
Inteijección, hy-tér-Mk-fheon' [en-tgr-
hSk-sSon'], 8. f., inteijection. L. 43.
InterroiTftoión, én-té-hro-gd-théon' [Sn-
t^-hro-gá-seon'J, s. f., interrogation.
L. 61.
Interro^nte,. hirié-hro-gdn'-tá^ s. m.,
note of interrogation ; act. part, of
interrogar.
Interrogar, énri^hro-gár', to interro-
gate, to (question. L. 61.
Interrumpir, én-íé-hrúm-pér' , to inter-
rupt. L. 64.
Intimidad, én-té-mé-THdTH\ s. f., inti-
macy. L. 56.
íntimo, én'-te-mo^ adj., intimate. L.
56.
Introducir, en-tro-dú-thér [sn-tro-dü-
8€r'], to introduce. L. 40.
. Inútil, é-^ú'-tU, adj., useless. L. 50.
Invariable, é»-uá-reá'-Wá, adj., invari-
able. L. 56.
Inversión, én-vh'-séon'^ s. f., inver-
sion. L. 61.
Invertir, én^<éT-ter\ to invert. L. 61.
Invierno, én-veér'-no, s. m., winter.
L. 24.
Invitar, €n-vé-tdr\ to invite. L. 56.
Ir, ér, to go. L. 18.
Iris, é'-re«, s. f., rainbow. L. 61.
Irlanda, ér-l&n'-df}, s. f., Ireland. L.
40.
Irregular, é-Ará-pti-tóír', adj., irregular.
L. 43f
Irregularidad, é-hrá-gú-lá-ré-THárH' ,
8. f., irregularity. L. 56.
Isabel, é-8á-bél\ s. f., Isabel. L. 55.
Isla. éa'-lQ, 8. f., island. L. 61.
Italia, e-ta-léQ, s. f., Italy. L. 40.
Italiano, é-tá-léá'-noy s. m. and adj.,
Italian. L. 61.
Izquierdo, éth-héér-do [68-k66r'-do], adj.,
left, left side. L. 50.
Jabón, hd-bon'j s. m., soap. L. 5.
Jamás, M-máa'ySkáY., never. L. 25.
Jaque, há'-ká, check (in playing chess).
L. 42.
Jardin, fcgr-dc»', s. m., garden. L. 18.
Jardinero, hg,r-dé-ná'-rOj a. m., gar-
dener. L. 34.
José, ho-sá', s. m., Joseph. L. 43.
Joven, Ao'-r¿n, adj., young. L. 13.
Juan, húan\ s. m., John. L. 17.
Juana, Awg'-ng, s. f., Jane. L. 17.
Juego, húá'-go, s. m., game, play, set.
L. 61.
Jueves, húá'-vh, s. m., Thursday. L.
9.
Juei, huafh' [hüSs'l, s. m., judge. L. 9.
Ju^ar, hú-gár', to play. L. 41.
Juicio, húe'-théo [hüs'-séo], s. m., judg-
ment, sense, trial. L. 53.
Julio, hú'-léo, s. m., July, Julius. L.
24.
Juntar, hún-tár^ to join, to gather
together. L. 65.
Junto, hún'-tOj adv., near, close to.
L. 39.
Juramento, hú-rá-mén'-to, s. m., oath,
affidavit. L. 53.
Justicia, há8-té'-théi^ [hasts'-se»], s. f.,
justice, righteousness. L. 61.
Justo, hÚ8'-to, adj., just, right. L. 61.
Juventud, hú-vén-tUTH\ s. f., youth.
L. 48.
La, la, def. art., f. sing. L. 5.
lift) ¿0> pron. f. sing., her, it. L. 8.
Lacónico, 2¿í-co'-n6-co, adj., laconic. L.
38.
Laboriosidad, Id-ho-réo-sé-THáTH, s. f.,
industry. L. 51.
Lacre, Id'-crd, s. m., sealing-wax. L. 5.
Lado, Id-THO, s. m., side. L. 18.
Ladrón, lá-dron\ robber, thief. L. 44.
LagOj Id'-go, s. m , lake. L. 40.
Lágrima, Id'-gré-m^, s. f., tear. L. 51.
Lápiz, Id'-péth [i&'-pés], s. m., pencil.
L. 51.
Largo, iQr'-go, adj., long. L. 21.
Lástima, Ids'-te-mQ, s. f., pity. L. 25.
Lastimar, lás-té-mdr', to hurt, wound,
to offend. I^. 61.
Oigitizfírl
hy Google
478
VOCABULARY.
Latin, lií-tin\ s. m., Latin. I^. 61.
Latinajo, Wrte-na'-ho^ s. m. aug., dog-
Latin. L. 49.
Latitud, Urt^tÚTH', 8. f., width, lati-
tude. L. 61.
Lavandera, ¡A-vdn-aA'-r^, s. f., washer-
woman. L. 5.
Lavar, lií^&r\ to wash. L. 24.
Le, Za, pron., him, it, to him, to it.
L. 10.
Lección, Uk-théon' [iSk-sSon'], s. f., les-
son. L. 8.
Leche, la' -cha, s. f., milk. L. 7.
Lectura, lek-tu'-ra^ s. f., reading. L.
38.
Leer, láér'^ to read. L. 7.
Leffua, lá'-gÚQy s. f., league. A Span-
ish league is 2Á English miles.
L. 61.
Leido, láé'-THo^ adj., bien íeído, well
read. L. 52.
Lejos, W'hos^ adv., far, distant. A lo
lejos, in the distance. L. 31.
Lengua, lén'-gúi^, s. f., tongue, lan-
guage. L. 23.
Lenguaje, IH-gÚQ'-ha, s. m., language.
L. 66.
Lento, len'-to, adj., slow, tardy, quiet.
L. 61.
León, láón, s. m., lion. L. 54.
Letra, tó'-írg, s. f , letter (of the alpha-
bet), letter (of credit) ; pi., letters
(literature). L. 61.
Levantar, ld-ván-tdr\ to raise, to lift
up. Levantarse^ to arise, to get up.
L. 33.
Levita, lá-vé'-ta, s. m., Levite, frock-
coat. L. 61.
Ley, Za'-e, s, f., law. L. 8.
Liberal, lé-bá-ráV, adj., liberal, L. 62.
Libertad, lé-bér-táTH' , s. f., liberty.
L. 40.
Libra, le'-brQ, s. f., ^und. Libra es-
terlina, pound sterling. L. 47.
Librar, lé-brár', to free, to deliver, to
draw on (commercial). L. 45.
Libre, li'-brd, adj., free. L. 59.
Libreria, lé-brá-ré'-a, s. f., book-store.
L. 11.
Librero, lé-brá'-ro, s. m., book-seller.
L, 11.
Libro, lé'-bro, s. m., book. L. 4.
Ligero, lé-há'-ro, adj., light, swift. L,
46.
Limosna, lé-mos'-nQ, s. f., alms. L. 61.
Limpiar, lém-péár', to clean. L. 64.
Limpieza, lem'-peá'-thQ [iém-pes'-s§J, 8.f.,
cleanliness. L. 61.
Limpio, lém'-péo, adj., clean, cleanly.
L. 20.
Linea, lé'-nÓQ, s. f., line. L. 61.
Lisboa, lés-bo'-Qt s. f., Lisbon. L. 55.
Linon^tLfle-song'-hQ, s. f., flattery. L.61.
Lisonjear, le^song-háár'f to flatter. L.
61.
Lisoi^ero, le-song-ha'-rOf adj. and a
m., flattering, flatter. L. 61.
Lista, leS'tQ, s. f., list L. 61.
Listo, les' 'to, a4j., ready, sharp, quick.
L. 46.
Literato, le-torra'-to, s. m., man of let-
ters, literateur. L. 51.
Literatura, íé-tó-rd-tó'-rg, s. f., litera-
ture. L. 52.
Litro, W'tro, s. m., litre. L. 60.
Lo, U), neut art, the. L. 8.
Lo, lo, pron., him, it. L. 26.
Local, lo-ciW, adj., local. L. 54.
Loco, lo'-co, adj., mad, crazy. A ton-
tas y á locos, inconsiderately. L. 61.
Loco, lo'-co, s. m., madman. L. 6L
Lodo, lo'-THo, s. m., mud, mire. L. 45.
Lograr, lo-grár', to succeed, to reach,
to obtain. L. 38.
Londres, lon'-drés, s. m., London. L.
12.
Longitud, long-hé-tÚTH\ s. f., length,
longitude. L. 61.
Loteria, lo-torre'-q, s. f., lottery. L. 65.
Lucir, lú-thér' [lu-sSr'], to shine, to glit-
ter. L. 65.
Luego, lúa'-go, adv., by-and-by, pres-
ently; conj., then, therefore. L. 33.
Lugar, lú-gár', s. m., place, village.
En lupar de, instead of. L. 29.
Luis, lv£s', s. m., Louis. L. 15.
Luisa, lúé'-sa, s. f., Louise, Louisa.
L. 2.
Luna, lú'-riQ, s. f., moon. L. 61.
Luto, lú'-tOj s. m.. mourning. L. 60.
LuB, lúth' [lüs'], s! f., light. Dar á luz,
to publish, to bring to light L. 61.
Llamar, lyá-már' [yS-mSr'], to call, to
knock. L. 27.
Llave, ly&'-vá [yS'-v«], s. f., key. L.
59.
Llegar, lyárgár [y«-g«r'], to arrive. lle-
gar á hacer, to become. L. 37.
Llenar, lyá-nár' [yS-nír], to fill, to ful-
fil, L. 54.
Lleno, ¡yd' -no [yS'-no], adj., full. L. 54.
Llevar, lya-vár' CyS-vSr'], to cany, to
bear, to bring forth. L. 14.
Llorar, lyo-rár' [yo-rír'l, to cry, to weep.
L. 51.
Lloro, lyo'-ro [yo'-ro], s. m., tear, act of
crying, weeping. L. 54.
Llover, lyo-v<ir' [yo-v€r'], to rain. IMh
rcr á cántaros, to pour down. L. 30.
Llovisnar, lyo-ves-ndr' [yo-veB-nfir'], to
drizzle. L. 30.
Lluvia, lyu'-véQ [yñ'-yCa], s. f.. rain. L.
30.
Digitized
by Google
VOCABULABF.
479
Hacho, ma'-eko^ s. m., male ; male. L.
63.
Madera, mií-THá'-rQ^ s. f., wood, tim-
ber, lumber. L. 4.
Hadraatra, mit-drds'-trQ, s. f., step-
mother. L. 49.
Hadre, ma'-drdj 8. f., mother. Lengua
madre, an original language. L. 6.
Madrid, mtírdréTH\ s. m., Madrid. L.
12.
Madrileño, míirdré-lán'-yo, s. m., a na-
tive of Madrid. L. 49.
Madrufirada, mUrdru-gH'THQ, s. f., the
night hours between midnight and
sunrise. L. 65.
Madrufirar, márdrú-gár'j to rise very
early. L. 62.
Madures, míl-THÚ-r&tK' [mS-<FHü-rSs'], s.
f., maturity, ripeness. L. 51.
Maestro, m^'-tro, s. m., master,
teacher. L. 62.
Mafirnifioo, máfir-»é'-/e-co,adj., magnifi-
cent. L. 58.
Mai, miUj 8. m., evil, harm, disease.
L. 48.
Mai, nUUf adv.,*badly. Mai de su gra-
do, in spite of him. L. 3.
Maldito, mM-de'-to, adj., accursed, per-
verse. L. 62.
Malicia, mürlé'-théQ [ms-ie'-8€a], s. f.,
malice, wickedness. L. 62.
Malo, má'-h, adj . , bad, fil, wicked. L. 7.
Mamá, m&-má\ s. f., mama. L. 5.
Mandar, mán-dár\ to send, to com-
mand, to order. L. 17.
Manera, míL-ná'-r^, s. f., manner. De
manera que, so that. L. 42.
Mania, má-né'-ati &• ^-i mania, whim.
L. 57.
Manifestar, má-né-f^-tdr', to mani-
fest, to show. L. 51.
Maninesto, márné-fe}Í8'-to, adj., mani-
fest. L. 52.
Mano, md'-no, s. f., hand, quire (of pa-
per). L. 28.
Manteca, mán-tá'-cq, butter ; in the
Americas, lard. L. 62.
Mantequilla, man-ta-kel'-ygt [mSn-ta-ke'-
ya], 8. f., butter. (Amer.) L. 62.
Manuel, má-né-W, s. m., Emanuel.
L. 2.
Manuscrito, TO¿í-»<í«-cré'-to, s. m.,
manuscript. L. 62.
Manzana, mán-thW-nQ [mSn-sá'-na], s. f.,
apple, block (of houses). L. 31.
Manzanar, mán-thá-ndr' [mán-sá-nSr'],
8. m., apple orchard. L. 49.
Mañana, mán-y&'-nat, s. f., morning,
to-morrow. Pasado mañana, the day
after to-morrow. L. 30.
Mar, mfir, s. m. and f., sea. Alta mar,
high sea. L. 62.
Marca, mf^r'-ca, s. f., mark, brand. L.
42.
Marcha, matr'-chQ, s. f., march. Sobre
la marcha, ofT-hand, on the spot. L.
51.
Marchar, mi^r-chdr', to march. L. 19.
Marfirarita, m^j^r-gd-re'-tg^, s. f., Marga-
ret. L. 3.
Maria, md-re'-a, s. f., Mary. L. 44.
Martes, m^r'-tés, s. m., Tuesday. L. 9.
Marzo, m^r'-fho [mar'-soJ, s. m., March.
L. 24.
Más, m4s, adv., more. L. 16.
Mas, mda, conj., but.
Máscara, más'-cá-ra, s. f., mask. L. 60.
Masculino, mds-cú-W-no, adj., mascu-
line. L. 47.
Mator, m^-tdr', to kill. L. 44.
Matemático, md-ta-md'-te-co, s. m.,
mathematician ; adj., mathematical.
L. 60.
Materia, md-td'-req, s. f., matter, sub-
ject, afiair. L. 54.
Material, má-tá-ré-ál' , adj., material.
L. 48.
Materialista, md-ta-réd-lea'-tQ, s. m.,
materialist. L. 36.
Matrimonio, m^-tré-m^'-néo, s. m.,
matrimony, marriage. L. 64.
Maullado, mf^M-yd'-THo [maü-yá'-¥Ho],
8, m., mew (of a cat). L." 46.
Máximo, mdk'-sé-m^, adj. (supl. of
grande), chief, principal, very great.
L. 21.
Mayo, má'-yo, s. m.. May (month). L.
24.
Mayor, md-yor', adj., greater, larger.
El mayor, the greatest, largest, old-
est. L. 20.
Mayúscula, md-yús'-cú-lf^, adj., capital
(letter of the alphabet). L. 62.
Me, md, pron., me, to me. L. 26.
Meca, wa'-cg, s. f. De Ceca en Meca,
from pillar to post. L. 61.
Media, md'-THé^, s. f., stocking. L. 10.
Medianamente, mu-THed-nd-men'-id,
adv., middling, fairly. L. 39.
Mediania, md-THéd-ne'-í^, s. f., modera-
tion, mediocrity. L. 52.
Mediano, md-THéd'-no, adj., medium,
moderate. L. 39.
Médico, md'-THé'Co, s. m., physician,
doctor. L. 19.
Medida, ww-riré'-rH^, s. f., measure.
L. 55.
Medio, md'-THéo, adj., half, middle.
Medianoche, midnight. L. 30.
Medio, má'-THéo, s. m., middle, means.
In America a half real, or six and a
quarter centavos. L. 37.
Mediodía, má-FHéo-dé'-íj, s. m., noon,
midday, south. L. 30.
r^.
mkm
480
VOCABULARY.
Hedir, md-FHer', to measure. L. 89.
Mexicano, mé-he^á'-no, s. m. and adj.,
Mexican. L. 47.
México, mé''hé'COj s. m., Mexico. L. 20.
Mejor, márhor\ adj. and adv., better.
L. 25.
Melocotón, m(é4o-co-t<m', s. m., peach.
Compare durazno, peach. (Amer.)
L. 31.
Melón, m^Zon', s. m., melon. L. 31.
Memoria, marmo'-rea, s. f., memory.
Aprender de memoria, to learn by
heart. L. 38.
Memorias, mcHno'-réáSy s. f. pi., re-
membrances, compliments. L. 39.
Mención, mén-théon' [mén-86on'], s. f.,
mention. L. 52.
Mencionar, m,én-théo-nár' [mSn-sSo-nSr'],
to mention. L. 45.
Menester, má-nés-tér'j s. m., need,
want, necessity. L. 30.
Menor, má-nor\ adj., less, smaller,
minor, younger. L. 20.
Menos, má'-nos, adv., less. A lo me-
nos, at least. L. 16.
Menoscabo, m>a-no8-cá'-bo, s. m., dete-
rioration. L. 62.
Menosprecio, má-nos-prá'-theo [ms-nos-
pra'-86o], s. m., scorn, contempt. L.
65.
Mente, m¡én'-ta, s. f., mind. L. 62.
Mentir, mén-ter', to lie. L. 45.
Menudo, má-nú'-THo, adj., small, slen-
der, mean. A menudo, often. L.
25.
Mequetrefe, má-ká'trá'-fd, s. m., trifler,
jackanai>es. L. 63.
Mercader, mer-cHrTHh'' , s. m., dealer,
trader, shop-keeper. L. 62.
Mercado, m^ér-c&'-THo, s. m., market.
L. 17.
Mercantil, mér-cán-fel' , adj., mercan-
tile. L. 56.
Merecer, mñ-rá-thér' [ms-ra-sér'], to
merit, to deserve. L. 62.
Merendar, ma-rhi-dár', to lunch. L.
34.
Merienda, má-re-hh'-dgt, s. f., lunch.
L. 34.
Meridiano, má-ré-riréá'-no, s. m., me-
ridian. L. 62.
Merino, mu-re'-no, s. m., merino
(sheep). L. 40.
Mérito, m^'-ré'to, s. m., merit. L. 55.
Mes, más, s. m., month. Al mes, by
the month. L. 16.
Mesa, ma'-sq, s. f., table. L. 14.
Metal, mé-iM', s. m., metal. L. 62.
Meter, ma-th-', to put in, to introduce
into. L. 46.
Metódico, má'to'-THé-co, adj., method-
ical. L. 36.
Método, má'-tO'THo, s. m., method.
L. 47.
Metrópoli, má-tro'-po-lé, s. f., metrop-
olis. L. 51.
Mi, me, pron., me. L. 25.
Mi, me, poss. pron., my. L. 6.
Miedo, méa'-THo, s. m., fear. L. 25.
Miel, me-áJU, s. f., honey, syrup. L. 65.
Miembro, méém'-bro, s. m., member,
limb. L. 62.
Miércoles, méér'-co-lés, s. m., Wednes-
day. L. 9.
Mil, mil, num. adj. and s. m., a thou-
sand, one thousand. L. 14.
Milla, mel'-yQ [mc'-ya], s. f., mile. L.
62.
Millar, mel-yár [mS-ySr'], s. m., a thou-
sand. L. 40.
Millón, mélryon' [me-yon'], num. adj.
and s. m., million. L. 40.
Mineral, mé-nct-rál'f s. m., mineral.
L. 62.
Minúscula, mé-nús'-cú-lQ, adj., small
(letter, not capital). L. 62.
Minnto, mé-nú'-to, s. m., minute. L.
23.
Mio, me'-o, poss. pron. and poss. a4j.,
mine. L. 13.
Mirar, me-rdr', to look, to behold, to
observe. L. 29.
Mismo, m^'-ma, adj.j same, self, self-
same. El mésmo, he himself. L. 27.
Mitad, mé-táTH, s. f., half. L. 40.
Moda, mo'-THQ, s. f., fashion. L. 25.
Modelo, mo-THá'-lo^ s. m., model. L. 55.
Moderación, mo-THo-rá-theon' [mo-rns-
rií-thSon'], s. f., moderation. L. 65.
Moderno, mo-THer'-no, adj., modem.
L. 52.
Modificar, mo-THe-fe-cár\ to modify.
L. 61.
Modo, mo'-Ff 0, s. m., mode, manner,
means. De ningún modo, by no
means. L. 42.
Molestar, m^lés-tár', to molest, to dis-
turb, -to trouble. L. 43.
Momento, mo-mién'-to, s. m., moment.
L. 62.
Mona, m4)'-nQ, s. f., female monkey.
L. 65.
Monárquico, m.o-nQr'-hé-co, adj., mon-
archical. L. 35.
Moneda, mo-nd'-THQ, s. f., coin. Pa-
pel moneda, paper money. L. 13.
Montar, mon-tár', to mount, to ride
(horseback). L. 62.
Montaraz, mon-tá-Jiráth' [mon-tX-hr&'],
adj., mountain, wild. L. 54.
Monte, m<m''tá^ s. m., mountain.
Monte de piedad, pawn-shop. L. 40.
Morder, mor-dér', to bite, to nip. L.
36.
Digitized
by Google
J
VOCABULARY.
481
Moribundo, mo-rb-hún'-do, adj., dying.
L. 37.
Morir, mo-rer\ to die. L. 44.
Moioa, mos'-CQ, s. f., fly. L. 44.
Mostrar, mos-trár\ to show. L, 35.
Motiyo, mo-te'-vOf s. m., motive. L.
34.
Mover, mo-v<ér\ to move. L. 36.
MoEO, mo'-tho [mo'-8o], s. m., youth,
young man, waiter. -L. 62.
Mnohacha, mú-chi'-^hQ^ s. f., girl. L. 6.
Maohaoho, mú-di&'-cho, s. m., boy. L.
6.
Maoho, mú'-cihOy adj. and adv., much,
a great deal, very. L. 8.
Mudable, mú-Tuá'-blá^ adj., mutable,
changeable, fickle. L. 49.
Mudar, mú-THár\ to change. L. 62.
Mnela, múá'-lq^ s. f., molar, back
tooth. L. 50.
Muerte, mii¡h''-tá^ s. f., death. L. 38.
Muerto, múér'-to^ p. p. of Mobib, dead,
killed. L. 52.
Muestra, mi^'-trg, s. f., sample, sign.
L. 62.
Mujer, mú-har'^ s. f., woman, wife.
L. 6.
Multitud, miU'te-tÚTH'y s. f., multi-
tude. L. 40.
Mundo, mún'-dOj s. m., world. L. 35.
Murmuración, múr-mú-rdrthéon' [mür-
mü-rS-8€on'], s. f., murmuring, back-
biting. L. 62.
Murmurar, múr-múrrár\ to murmur,
to backbite. L. 62.
Museo, fnú-8á''0f s. m., museum. L.
51.
Música, mú'-se-CQ, s. f., music. L. 15.
Músico, mú''8é-co, s. m., musician.
L. 15.
Muy, mú'-ét very. L. 6.
Nacer, nü-thér' [nS^fir'], to be bom.
Nacer de pies, to be bom to good
luck. L. 62.
Nación, nártheon' [nS-sSon'], s. f., na-
tion. L. 24.
Hada, ná'-THfí, adv., in no degree.
L. 11.
Hada, n&'-THQy s. f., nothing, nonen-
tity. L. II.
Hadar, nd-Tnár', to swim. L. 53.
Hadie, ná'-THéá, ind. pron., nobody,
no one. L. 11.
Hápoles, ná'-po'l}^, s. f., Naples. L.
47.
Haranja, na-rdng'-hi^, s. f., orange. L.
31.
Hatural, nd-tú-ríü', s. m. and a^j.. na-
tive, natural. L. 44.
naturaleza, ná-tú-ra-1á'-tliQ [ní-tü-rS-ls'-
B§], s. f., nature. L. 40.
S3
naturalista, nd-tú-rH-les'-tfh s* m., nat-
uralist. L. 36.
Havarra, ná-u^'-fera, s. f., Navarre.
L. 55.
Havarro, nA-vQ'-hrOt s. m., Navarrese.
L. 55.
navegación, nil-vá-gil-theon' [nS-vS-gS-
85on'], s. f., navigation. L. 24.
Navidad, nd-vé-THárH^ s. f., Christ-
mas, nativity. L. 43.
Navio, ndrve'-o^ s. m., ship. L. 53.
Necesario, ná-thá-sá'-reo [n«-85-8á'-r6o],
adj. J necessary. L. 27.
Necesidad, na-thá-sé-THáTH' [ns-sa-as-
THáTH'], s. f., necessity. L. 44.
Necesitar, ncirthá-ae-Ur' [n«-8fi-8€-tár'], to
need, to require. L. 5.
Necio, na'-iheo [na'-sSo], adj. and s. m.,
foolish, fool. L. 65.
Nefas, ná'-fás. Por fas 6 por nefas,
right or wrong. L. 63.
Negación, ná-git-íhéon' [nfi^-seon'j, s.
f., negation. L. 62.
Negar, na-g&r'f to deny, to refuse. L.
34.
Negativa, ná-gá-té'-^vo, s. f., negation,
refusal, negative. L. 62.
Negligente, n^-le-kH'^ta, adj., negli-
gent. L. 50.
Negocio, na-go'-theo [ns-go'-seo], s. m.,
business, affair, matter. L. 27.
Negro, n&'-gro, s. m. and adj., negro,
black. L. 62.
Neutro, naú'-tro, adj., neuter. L. 62.
Nevar, ná-t)ár', to snow. L. 30.
Ni, ne, cong., neither, nor. L. 8.
Nieve, néá'-rá, s. f., snow. L. 30.
Ninguno, nenrgú'-no, pron., no one, no-
body. Ninguna cosa, nothing. L.
11.
N^a, nen'-VQ^ s. f., babe, child, little
girl, maiden. L. 17.
Nino, nm'-yo, s. m., babe, little boy.
L. 17.
No. no, adv., no. L. 1.
No Die, no'-hla^ adj., noble. L. 62.
Nobleza, no-Má'lhQ [no-bis'-sa], s. f.,
nobleness, nobility. L. 55.
Noche, no' -cha, s. f., evening, night.
Noche buena, Christmas eve. L. 23.
Nombrar, nom-br&r', to appoint, to
name. L. 48.
Nombre, nom'-brd, s. m., name, noun.
L. 40.
Nominativo, no-me-ná-íé'-tjo, s. m.,
nominative. L. 62.
Nono, no'-no, see Noveno. L. 15.
Norte, nor'-td, s. m., north. L. 22.
Nos, nos, pers. pron., us. to us. L. 26.
Nosotros, no-8o'-tro8, pron., we, our-
selves. L. 1.
Nota, no'-tQ, s. f., note. L. 62.
uiyiiiLLUUiCoOglo
482
VOCABULARY.
Hotar, n(htíír\ to note, to observe. L.
58. ^
Hotioia, no-té' -theq, [no-t8'-8e§], s. f., no-
tice, news (pi. ) L. 27.
Notorio, no-io'-réOf adj., notorious. L.
45.
Hovecientoi, no-va-theh^'-toa rao-v6-
s^gn'-tos], num. adj., nine hundred.
L. 14.
Hove dad, no-várTHdTH'y s. f., novelty,
news. L. 39.
Hovela, no-vá'-lQ, s. f., novel, romance.
L. 52.
Noveno, no-vá^-no^ ord. adj. and s. m.,
ninth. L. 15.
Ho venta, no-v^'-tg, num. adj., ninety.
L. 14.
Hoviembre, no-vé^'-hrá, s. m., No-
vember. L. 24.
Haestro, núéa'-tro, poss. pron., ours.
L. 13.
Hueva, núd'-vít, s. f., news (generally
used in the plural). L. 60.
Hueva York, nua'-vg-yorfc, s. f., New
York. L. 9.
Hneve, núá'-vát num. adj., nine. L.
14.
Huevo, núá'-vOy adj., new. De nttetio,
anew. L. 21.
Huez, núáth' [nüfia'], s. f., walnut, nut
L. 40.
Humeral, nú-má-ríU', adj., numeral.
L. 14.
Húmero, nu'-ma-ro, s. m., number. L.
14.
Hunca, níí»'-cíf, adv., never. L. 25.
Ó, 0, conj., or, either. L. 8.
Obedecer, o-bá-THo-th^' [o-bfi-THfi-s5r'],
to obey. L. 48.
Objetivo, oh-hd-te'-vOf adj. and s. m.,
objective. L. 62.
Objeto, ob'hd'-to, s. m., object. L. 48.
Oblifiraoión, ob-lé-gdrthéon' [ob-i6-gS-
86on'], 8. f., obligation, duty. L. 24.
Oblifirar, ob-lé-gár', to oblige, to force,
to compel. L. 61.
Obra, o''br(i, s. f., work. L. 15.
Obrar, o-brdr', to work, to operate.
L. 40.
Observar, ob-s^r-vár' ^ to observe, to re-
mark. L. 48.
Obstante, ob-atdn'-td, see No obstan-
te. L. 54.
Obvio, ob'-veo, adj., obvious. L. 43.
Ocasión, o-cÜ-seon', s. f., occasion, op-
portunity. L.. 39.
Occidente, oh-thé-dén'-tá [ok-sS-dSn'-ts],
s. m., the West. L. 51.
Ochenta, o-chhi'-tQ, num. adj., eighty.
L. 14.
Ocho, o'-cho, num. adj., eight. L. 14.
Ochocientos, o-eho-thehi'-tos [o-cho*
sCen'-toBj, num. adj., eight hundred.
L. 14.
Octavo, oJb-M'-vo, ord. adj., eighth. L.
15.
Octubre, ok-tú'-bráf s. m., October, L.
24.
Ocultar, a-cúl'tílr\ to hide. L. 48.
Oculto, o-&ál''to, adj., hidden, secret.
L. 52.
Ocupación, o-cú-pü-théon' ío-ct-p&-»5oa']^
s. f., occupation, business. L. 54.
Ocupar, o-cu-pár\ to occupy, to engage
in. L. 47.
Ocurrir, o-cúrhrér\ to occur, to strike.
L. 62.
Oeste, oés'-ta, s. m., west. L. 51.
Ofender, o-fén-dér'j to offend. L. 27.
Oficio, o-fe'-ihéo [o-fS'-sSol, s. m., office,
trade, business. L. 38.
Ofirecer, o-frárTHér' [o-lrt-Bgr'], to offer.
L. 39.
Oh. 0, oh ! exclamation. L. 46.
Oiao, oe'-THOf s. m., hearing, ear. L.
61.
Oir, oer't to hear. (Hgaf hist, listen.
, L. 41.
Ojala, o'-h4-lií, inlg., would that ! oh
that! L. 37.
Ojo, o'-hOy s. m., eye. L. 29.
Oler, o-lér\ to smell. L. 41.
Olfato, ol'fá'-to, 8. m., the sense of
smell. L. 61.
Olla, ol'-pQ [o'-y§], s. f., earthenware
pot. L. 62.
Olor, o-lor't s. m., odor, scent, smell.
L. 62.
Olivar, o-le^ár\ s. m., olive grove. L.
62.
Olvidar, oí-tjé-nrár', to forget. L.
Omnibus, om'-né-húsj s. m., omnibus.
L. 51.
Once, on'-tha [on'-ssl, num. adj., eleven.
L. 14.
Opera, o'-pd-rQ, a. f., opera. L. 25.
Opinión, o-pé-néon', s. f., opinion. L.
42.
Oponer, o-po-nér\ to oppose. L. 61.
Optimo, o»'-¿é-mo, adj., best, extremely
good. L. 21.
Opuesto, o-p<ww'-to, adj., opposed, op-
posing, opposite. L. 52.
Oración, o-rd-th&m' [o-rá-sSon'], s. f.,
prayer, speech, discourse. L. 45.
Orden, or'-dtSn^ s. m. andf., order. L.
39.
Ordenar, or'dd-ndr\ to ordain, to com-
mand. L. 51.
Organista, or-gd-nea'-tQ^ s. m., organ-
ist. L. 36.
Oriente, o-réén'-td, s. m., east. L. 51.
Digitized
by Google
VOCABULARY,
483
Oro, o'-ro, s. m., gold. L. 8.
Ob, o«, pron., you (objective case). L.
26.
Ostión, o8-teon\ s. m. See Ostba. L.
62.
Ostra, 08'-trQ, s. f., oyster. L. 62.
Oto&o, o-ton'-yo, s. m., autumn. L. 24.
Otro, o'-tro, indef. pron., other, an-
other. L. 18.
Oveja, o-vá'-hQf s. f., sheep. L. 65.
Ox ! okSy intj., exclamation used to
frighten off fowls. L. 46.
Paoa, p&'-CQ, s. f., Fanny. L. 44.
Paoienoia, píí-iheén'-ihéQ [pá-8€en'-86§],
8. f., patience. L. 63.
Paoo, pit' 'CO, s. m., contraction of Fran-
cisco, Frank. L. 44.
Padecer, pá-Titá-thér' [pá-rna-sér'], to
suffer. L. 47.
Padrastro, pHrdrds'-tro^ s. m., step-
father. L. 49.
Padre, pa'-dra, s. m., father. L. 6 and
45.
Pafirar, pá-gdr\ to pay. L. 14.
Pafiraté, p&^árrá\ s. m., promissory
note. L. 54.
Página, pá'-he-nQf s. f., page (of a
book). L. 50.
Pals, pfh^'i 8- na., country. L. 19.
Paisano, pqé-sd'-noj s. m., country-
man, comx)atriot. L. 50.
Paqa, p^i'-Ag , s. f., straw. L. 63.
Pájaro, p&'-há-ro, s. m., bird. L. 48.
Pajarraco, pá-M-hrá'-co, s. m. (aug. of
pajaro), an ugly, clumsy bird. L. 49.
Pfuabra, pá-lá'-brfí, s. f., word, word
of promise. Palabras mayores, of-
fensive words. L. 15 and 65.
Palacio, pá-lá'-thio [pá-iá'-sgo],. s. m.,
palace. L. 48.
Palagrana, pá-lán-gá'-n0, s. f., wash-
bowl. L. 46.
Palo, pd'-lOf 8. m., stick of wood, i>ole.
L.62.
Pan, pan, s. m., bread, loaf. L. 7.
Panaderia, pA-nHrTHa-re'-Q, s. f., bak-
ery. L. 11.
Panadero, pá-nit-THá'-ro, s. m., baker.
L. 11.
Pantalón, p¿(n-^¿on', s. m., pantaloon,
trousers. L. 17.
Pl^o, v&n'-yo, s. m., cloth. L. 62.
Pafinelo, pán^yúá'-lo, s. m., pocket-
handkerchief. L. 5.
Papá, pH^n', 8. m., papa. L. 5.
Papel, piC^U'f 8. m., pajier, part (in a
play). HsMOTpapel de, to cut a fig-
ure, to take a part. L. 4.
Panuito, 'pH-que'-to. r. m. ^contraction
oí Francisco, Francis), Franky. L.
44.
Par, par, s. m., pair, couple. Al par,
at par. L. 40.
Para, p&'-r^, prep., for, to, in order to,
toward. L. 19.
Parabién, j)a-rd-6c^', s. m., congratu-
lation, compliment. L. 62.
Paraguas, i)d-rg'-(/iig«, s. m., umbrella.
L. 50.
Parar, parrar', to stop, to stand, to
stand up, to end in. L. 51.
Parasol, pá-rársoV , s. m., parasol. L.
50.
Parecer, pá-rá-thér' [pS-rt-aCr'], to ap-
pear, to seem. L. 30.
Pared, pd-r^TH', s. f., wall. L. 50.
Paris, pá-réa' ,s.m., Paris. L. 12.
Parque, par'-ká, s. m., i>ark, caliber.
L. 17.
Parte, pq,r'-tá, s. f., part; s. m., mes-
sage, despatch. L. 27.
Participar, p^r-té-thé-pár' [p^r-ts-se-
pSr'], to participate, to partake of.
L. 57.
Participio, pQr-te-thé'-peo [par-tc-so'-
p6o], s. m., participle. L, 43~
Particnla, p^r-té'-cú-lQ, s. f., particle.
L. 50.
Particular, pQr-te-cú-lár', adj., particu-
lar, private. L. 49.
Partida, j)gr-íe'-rsg, s. f., departure.
L. 42.
Partir, pQr-tér', to depart, to set out,
to divide. L, 19.
Partitivo, pQr-te-té'-vo, adj., partitive.
L. 63.
Pasaje, pá-s&'-há, s. m., passage, fare.
L. 58, 63.
Pasar, pÜ-adr', to pass, to go in, to enter.
Pose usted, señor, come in, sir. L. 16.
Pascua, páB'-cúgt, s. f., Easter. L. 59.
Paseante, pá-sáán'-tá, s. m., passer-by,
promenader. L. 38.
Pasearse, pá-sádr'-sá, to take a walk,
to promenade. L. 24.
Paseo, pd'Sá'-o, s. m., walk, prome-
nade. L. 57.
Pasiva, pársé'-vQ, s. f., the passive
voice. L. 50.
Pasivo, pá-sé'-vo, adj., passive. L. 63.
Paso, pa' -80, 8. m., step, pace. L. 54.
Patio, pá'-téo, s. m., yard, pit (in the-
atres). L. 46.
Patronímico, pa-tro-ne'-me-co, adj.,
patronjrmic. L. 49.
Paz. path [pSa], 8. f., peace. L. 43.
Pecno, pa'-cho, s. m., breast. A lo he-
cho pecho, what is done cannot be
helped. L. 65.
Pechuga, pa-chu'-gq, s. f., breast of a
fowl. L. 68.
Pedazo, pá-d&'-tho [pa-dS'-so], s. m.,
piece, morsel, bit. L. 63.
Digitized
by Google
484
VOCABULARY.
Pedir, pá-raer', to ask, to demand, to
ask ior. L. 30.
Pedro, pa'-dro, s. m., Peter. L. 19.
Pegrar, pá-gár'y to stick, to paste, to
beat. L. 63.
Peinar, páé-nár', to comb. L. 46.
Peine, pá'é-ná, s. m., comb. L. 46.
Peli^o, pá-lé'-grOf a. m., danger, peril.
L. 51.
Pelo, pa' 'lo, s. m., hair. A pdo, to the
purpose, fitting. En pelo^ bareback
"(to ride). L. 33. 44.
Pelota, pá-lo'-tQ, s. f., ball (for play-
ing). L. 54.
Pena, pa'-n^, s. f., i)ain, penalty. A
duras penas, with much difficulty.
L. 59.
Pensamiento, ph^aH^meen'-to, s. m.,
thought. L. 48.
Pensar, pH-sár', to think, to intend.
L. 34.
Penúltimo, pé-nül'-té-mo, adj., penul-
timate, penult. L. 50.
Peilasoo, pán-yda'-coy s. m., a large
rock. L. 56.
Peor, pá-or', adj. and adv., worse. L.
20.
Pepa, pd'-pQ, s. f., Fanny. L. 44.
Pepe, pa' -pa. (See Pepito. ) L. 44.
Pepito, pd-pé'-to, s. m. (contraction of
Jose, Joseph), Joe. L. 44.
Pequeño, pá-kán'-yo, adj., little, small,
young. L. 7.
Per-, pir, Lat. prep, used in Spanish as
a prefix only. L. 50.
Pera, pd'-r^^, s. f., pear. L. 59.
Peral, pá-rál', s. m., pear-tree. L.
59.
Perder, p^-d^r', to lose. L. 37.
Perdonar, p^-do-wár', to pardon. L.
27.
Perezoso, pd-rd-tho'-so [ps-rfi-so'-so],
adj., lazy, slothful. L. 38.
Perfeccionar. ph--fíik'théo-ndr' [pgp-f Sk-
8So-nár'], to perfect, to improve. L.
38.
Perfecto, ph--fék'-to, adj., perfect. L.
29.
Perilla, 2)á-réí'-yfl^ [pfi-rg'.ya], s. f., small
pear. Venir deperiZía, to suit exact-
ly. L. 64.
Periódico, üá-reo'-rffé-co, s. m., news-
paper. L. 8.
Permanecer, ph'-márndrth'ér' [p5r-mS-
nS-sSr'], to remain, to stop, to stay.
L. 45.
Permanencia, ph'-md-nen'-thect [pSr-mS-
nSn'-seal, s. f., permanence, duration,
stay, L. 51.
Permitir, pi^r-mé-tér' , to permit, to al-
low. L. 44.
Pero, pd'-ro, coig., but. L. 3.
Perpendicular, p^-phi-dé-cú-Ulr', a^.,
perpendicular. L. 51.
Perro, pt^'-hro, s. m., dog. L. 63.
Perseverancia, pér-sdr-vd-r&n'-ihéQ [per-
sa-vS-rán'-sSft], s.f., perseverance. L.
63.
Persistir, pér-ala-ter' , to persist. L.
50.
Persona, pér-so'-n^, s. f., person. L.
38.
Personal, pér-ao-níW , adj., personal.
L. 63.
Pesa, pa'-a^, s. f., weight (for weigh-
ing). L. 55.
Pésame, pá'-aá-mdf s. m., condolence.
L. 59.
Pesar, pd-sdr', to weigh, .to regret.
No le peaa de haber nacido, he has
an excellent opinion of himself. L.
31.
Pesar, pd-adr', a. m., regret, grief, sor-
row. Á pesar de, in spite of, not-
withstanding. L. 31.
Pescado, péa-cd'-rHo, a. m., fish. L. 7.
Pescar, pés-c&r', to fish. L. 63.
Pésimo, üo'-fie-mo, adj., worst, very
bad. L. 21.
Peso, pd'-so, s. m., weight, heaviness,
dollar. L. 14.
Pianista, péá-né8'-t§, a. m., pianist.
L. 15.
Piano, pea' -no, a. m., piano. L. 15.
Picante, pé-cdn'-td, adj., piquant, high-
ly seasoned, pungent, pointed (say-
ing). L. 54.
Picar, pé-cár', to prick, to bite, to
pique, to thrust. L. 46.
Picaresco, pé-cá-rés'-co, adj., roguish.
L. 49.
Picaro, pé'-cá-ro, adj., rogue, rascal,
knave. L. 32.
Pico, pe'-co, s. m., beak, bill. Callarse
el pico, to hold one's tongue. L. 61.
Pie, pea', s. m., foot. A pie, on foot.
Nacer de pies, to be bom with good
luck. L. 39.
Pierna, peér'-nQ, a. t, leg. L. 33.
Pieza, péá'-thQ [pss'-sa], s. f., piece. L.
64.
Pinar, pé-nár', a. m., pine-grove. L.
49.
Pino, pe'-no, s. m., pine. L. 40.
Pintar, pen-tár', to paint, to represent.
L. 54.
Pintor, pen-tor', s. m., painter. L. 31.
Pintura, pen-tú'-r^, a. f., painting. L.
31.
Pipa, pé'-p^, s. f., pipe. L. 42.
Pique, pe'-Jcd, s. m., pique, ofience.
EstEiba pique de perderse, he was on
the brink of ruin. L. 62.
Piropos, pé-ro'-pos, a. m., sayings.
Digitized
by Google
VOCABULARr.
485
sweet phrases addressed to women.
L. 58.
Hsayerde, pé-aá-v^'-dá, s. m., fop,
coxcomb. L. 50.
Piso, pé'-so, s. m., floor, story (of a
house). L. 53.
Pistola, péS'to'-lQ^ s. f., pistol. L. 44.
Pistoletaio, pes-to-la-ta'tho [pCs-tois-
tá'-so], s. m., pistol-shot. L. 44.
Placer, plárthér' [piá-sgr'], to please.
L. 31.
Placer, pUi-ih^' [piá-8«p'], s. m., pleas-
ure, gold-diggings. L. 31.
Plata, pld'-tQ, s. f., silver. L. 8.
Plato, pld'-to, s. m., plate, dish (of
food). L. 57.
Plaia, pld'-thQ [piá'-s§l, s. f., place, situ-'
ation, square, market-place. Ptcusa
de toros, arena for bull-fights. L.
17,54.
Plazo, pld'-tho [piá'-8o], s. m., term (of
payment). L. 63.
Plomo, plo'-mOf s. m., lead. L. 63.
Pluma, i>¿^'-m0, s. f., feather, pen. L. 5.
Plural, plú-rül', adj., plural. L. 57.
Plu80Tiamperfecto,i)ítt«-fc<igm-jíer-/gA;'-
to, s. m., pluperfect, past perfect.
L. 43.
Pobre, po'-hra^ adj., poor, needy,
wretched. L. 13.
Pobreza, po-hrá'-tha [po-brfi'-sa], s. f.,
poverty. Ii. 59.
Poco, po'-co, adv., little; pi., few.
Poco á poco, slowly, gently, softly.
L. 32.
Pooo, po'-co, s. m., little. L. 6.
Poder, po-TH^r\ to be able. No poder
más, to be exhausted. Xi. 32.
Poder, po-THéT\ s. m., power, author-
ity, possession. L. 35.
Poesía, poa-ae'-q^ s. f., poetry, poesy.
L. 31.
Poeta, j?oá'-<ff, s. m., poet. L. 31.
Poetastro, j7oá-t¿Í8'-^o, s. m., poetaster.
L. 44.
Poético, poP/-te-co, adj., poetic, poeti-
cal. L. 35.
Poloa^ pol'-cat, s. f., polka. L. 33.
Política, po-lé'-te-cdíy s. f., iwlitics, po-
liteness. L. 52.
Politico, po-le'-te-co, adj., political, po-
lite. L. 52.
Politico, po-lé'-té-co, s. m., politician.
L. 52.
Polio, pol'-yo [po'-yo], s. m., chicken.
L. 5.
Polvo, poi'-vo, s. m., powder, dust. L.
62.
Pólvora, pól'-vo-rQy s. f., gunpowder.
L. 63.
Ponderar, pon-dd-rdr\ to exaggerate,
to cry up. L. 54.
Poner, po-nér', to put, to place, to lay,
to set (as the sun). Ponerse, to be-
come, to get. Se puso serio, he be-
came serious. L. 41.
Por, por, prep., by, for, in behalf of, in
favor of, about, through. L. 19.
Porción, por-theon' [por^éon'], s. f., por-
tion, part, lot, number, quantity.
L. 63.
Pormenor, por-márnor', s. m. (general-
ly used in the plural). Pormenor es^
details, particulars. L. 50.
Porque por'-ká, conj., because. L. 18.
Por qué, por-ká', coiy., why? for what
reason? s. m., reason wherefor. L.
18.
Portarse, por-tdr'-sd, to behave, to con-
duct one's self. L. 55.
Portugal, por-tú-gdl', s. m., Portugal.
L. 60.
Portugués, por-tú-ghás', s. m. and adj.,
Portuguese. L. 44.
Poseer, po-saér', to possess. L. 34.
Posesivo, po-sd-ae'-vo, adj., possessive.
L. 63.
Posible, po-86'-&Zá, adj., possible. L. 31.
Positivo, po-ae^te'-vo, adj., positive.
L. 48.
Posponer, poa-po-nh"', to postpone, to
place after. L. 63.
Potencial, po-tén-thédl' [po-tén-ssái'],
adj.^ potential. L. 63.
Práctica, práfc'-<é-<^, s.* f., practice.
L. 23.
Practicante, prdh'-te-edn'-td, s. m.,
practitioner. L. 38.
Practicar, prdk-té-cdr', to practise. L.
23.
Práctico, adj., practical. L. 65.
Pre-, prd, Lat. prep, used in Spanish
as prefix only. L. 50.
Preceder, prá-ífco-Firgr' [pra-sS-THér'], to
precede, to go before. L. 63.
Precepto, prá-tMp'-to IprS-sgp'-to], s.
m.j precept. L. 53.
Precio, prá'-théo Lprs'-BSo], s. m., price,
prize. L. 50.
Preciso, prd-thé'-so [prS-sg'-so], adj., ne-
cessary, obligatory, precise. L. 63.
Preferir, prd-fá-rér\ to prefer. L. 38.
Pregunta, prárgún'-t§, s. f., question,
inquiry. L. 33.
Preguntar, pra-qún-tdr' , to ask ques-
tions, to question, to inquire. L. 33.
Preliminar, prá-lé-mé-ndr' , adj., pre-
liminary. L. 63.
Premiar, pra-méár', to reward. L. 62.
Premio, prd'-Tnéo, s. m., premium, re-
ward, prize. L. 59.
Prenda, prH'-dq,, s. f., pledge, jewel ;
pi. endowments, talents, parts. L.
41, 63.
Digitized
by Google
486'
VOCAnULART.
Prender, prén-der', to take up, to ar-
rest. L. 39.
Preposición, prd-po-aé-theon' [prft-po-s^-
B€on'3, B. f., preposition. L. 43.
Presencia, i>rá-«^'-tAéa Lprft-Bén'-se»], s.
f., presence. L. 63.
Presentar, prá-ahi-tár', to present, to
introduce, to offer. L. 39.
Presente, prá-sén'-táj adj., present.
Tener presente, to bear in mind. L.
43.
Presidente, prá-8é-^ién''tá, s. m., presi-
dent. L. 46.
Presidio, prá-sé'-rHio, s. m., prison.
L. 59.
Presidir, prá-aé-THér', to preside. L.
54.
Preso, prá'so, irreg. p. p. (of Pben-
deb), taken. Esta preso, he is
taken (prisoner). L. 52.
Prestar, prés-tár\ to lend. L. 59.
Presto, pr^'-to, adj., quick, ready,
prompt. L. 20.
Presto, prés'-to, adv., soon, quickly.
L. 20.
Pretender, prd^hi-der', to pretend, to
lay claim to, to claim, to solicit.
L. 48.
Pretensión, prá-fén-theon', s. f., pre-
tention, claim, thing solicited. L.
57.
Pretérito, prárté'-ré-to, adj., preterit.
L. 63.
Pretexto, prá-téks'-to, s. m., pretext.
L. 58.
Prevenir, prá-vd-nér\ to prevent, to
foresee, to warn, to prepare. L. 65.
Prever, pra-vér', to foresee. L. 69.
Primavera, jwé-w^-ra'-rg, s. f., spring.
L. 24.
Primero, pré-má'-ro^ adj., first ; adv.,
first, rather, sooner. L. 15.
Primo, pre' -mo, s. m., cousin. L. 13.
Principal, ^rén-thé-piü' FprSn-se-pai'],
adj.^ ^rincii)al, chief. L. 36.
Principiante, prén-thé-péán'-tá [prfti-se-
pS5n'-tfi], act. part., beginner. L.
38.
Principiar, prcn-fAé-p6íír'[preii.B6-p€ár'],
to begin, to commence. L. 23.
Principio, pren-thé'-péo [prSn-se'-péol, s.
m., beginning, commencement, prin-
ciple. L. 63.
Prisa, pre'-sg, s. f., haste, speed, hurry.
L. 30.
Prisionero, pré-séo-ná'-ro, s. m., pris-
oner. L. 48.
Prisma, prés'-ma^, s. m., prism. L. 54.
Probable, pro-há'-hlá, adj., probable.
L. 29.
Probar, pro-R^r', to try, to prove, to
taste. L.35.
Procesión, pro-W^eon' [pro-BS-s€on']/B.
f., procession. L. 46.
Procurar, pro-eú-rár', to procure, to
endeavor, to try to. L. 51.
Producción, pro-dák-tl^eon' [pro-dük-
séon'], 8. f., production. L. 40.
Producir, pro-dú-ther' [pro-dü-ser'], to
produce. L. 40.
Proeía, proá-e^íj [proá'-B§l, s. f., prow-
ess. L. 54.
Profecía, pro-fá-thé'-^ [pro-ffi4€'-ft], s.
f., prophecy. L. 45.
Profesión, pro-/¿-«eon', 8. f., profession.
L. 38.
Profesor, pro-fá^or\ s. m., professor.
L. 18.
Prohibir, pro-e-bér', to prohibit. L.
53.
Prójimo, pro'-Aé-mo, 8. m., neighbor.
L. 28.
Promesa, pro-má'-sQ, a. í., promise.
L. 57.
Prometer, pro-má-tíir', to promise. -L.
52.
Pronombre, pro-nom'-brá, s. m., pro-
noun. L. 43.
Pronominal, pro-no-mí-níü\ adj., pro-
nominal. L. 61.
Prontitud, pron-té-tÚTH\ s. f., prompt-
ness, promntitude, quickness. L.
43.
Pronto, pron'-to, adj., prompt, quick,
ready ; adv., soon, promptly, quick-
ly. L. 20.
Pronunciación, pro-nún-théá-théon'
[pro-nüD-8gS-B€on'], s. f., pronuncia-
tion. L. 63.
Pronunciar, pro-nún-íhéár' [pro-nün-
8€«r'], to pronounce. L. 15.
Propiedad, pro-péá-rHárH', b. f., pro-
priety, property. L. 63.
Propio, pro'-péo, adj., proper, own,
selfsame, same. L. 49.
Proponer, pro-po-n^', to proi>o6e. L.
51.
Prosa, pro'-8§, s. f., prose. L. 31.
Proporcionar, pro-por-íhéo-nár' [pro-
por-86o-niír'], to proportion, to pro-
cure, to offer. L. tó.
Protestante, |)ro-t&-tón'-tó, s. m., Pro-
testant. L. 49.
Protestantismo, pro-th'tán-tes'-mo, s.
m.. Protestantism. L. 49.
Provecho, pro-vá'-cho, s. m., profit,
benefit. L. 64.
Proveer, pro-va^r', to provide. L. 34.
Proverbio, pro-xh^'-héo, s; m., proverb.
L. 65.
Provincia, pro-ven'-f^, s. f., province.
L. 19.
Provisto, pro-ves'-to, p. p. (of Peo-
veer), provided. L. 52.
Digitized
by Google
VOCABULARY,
487
Frózimo, prok'-sé-mo, adj., next, near-
est. L. 23.
Pmdenoia, vrú-dén'-théQ [prü-dSii'-s6§],
8. f., prudence. L. 34.
Prudente, prUirden'-ta, adj., prudent.
L. 20.
Prueba, prúá'-bo, s. f., proof. L. 46.
PruBia, prú'-séQ, s. f., Prussia. L. 46.
Publicar, pú-blé-cár', to publish. L.
48.
Público, pú'-blé<Ot s. m. and adj., pub-
lic. L. 51.
Pudrir, pú-drér\ to rot. L. 41.
Pueblo, púá'-blOy s. m., town, people.
L. 60.
Puerta, pú^'-t§, s. f., door. L. 27.
Pues, puá8\ coig., then, therefore, in-
asmuch as, since, because ; inlj . , well !
Pu<w qué ? well, what of it ? L. 41.
"Brilgtini, piU-gá'-iBQ, s. f., inch. L.
63.
Punta, pún'-tü, s. f., point, stitch. L.
50..
Puntapié, pún-tQnpéa\ s. m., kick. L.
50.
Puntilla, pún-tU'-yQ [pün-ts'-ya], s. f.,
small npint. De puwtiUaSf on tip-
toe. lT 44.
Punto, pún'-tOy s. m., point (of time or
space;, spot, place. L. 51.
Puntuación, pún-túd-théon' [pñn-tüS-
b6oii'], s. f.', punctuation. L. 63.
Puntual, pún-túél'f adj., punctual, ex-
act, accurate. L. 63.
Puntualidad, pún-túá-lé-TH&TH'y s. f.,
punctuality. L. 63.
Purista, pú-réa'-tQf s. m., purist. L.
Quo, Jfca, rel. pron., that, which, that
wnich, he who ; interr. pron., what,
that ; conj., that. L. 3, 16, 17.
Quebrar, há-brár\ to break, to smash.
L. 34.
Quedar^ fcá-raár', to stop, to stay, to
remam, to become. El campo quedó
por los amíjricanos, the Americans
were victorious. L. 38.
Quejarse^, ká-hár'-ad, to complain, to be
vexed, to moan. L. 38.
Quemar, ká-már', to burn. L. 32.
Querir, ká-rér\ to wish, to dcsiro, to
will, to love, to like, to bo willing.
L. 13.
Querido, kd-re'-THo, adj., dear. L. 13.
Queso, ká'-so, s. m., cheese. L. 7.
Quien, ké-H\ rel. and interr. pron.,
who, whom. L. 17,
Quienquiera, keén-Tcéd'-ra^, indef.
pron., whosoever. L. 50.
Quieto, ked'-tOy adj., quiet, still, at rest.
L. 62.
Quejada, korhd'-THQ, s. f . , jaw. L. 50.
Quince, kén'-thd [kén'-eS], num. adj.,
fifteen. L. 14.
Quinientos, ké-neén'-tos, adj., five hun-
dred. L. 14.
Quinto, kén'-tOf ord. adj. and s. m.,
fifth. L. 15.
Quitar, ks-tár\ to remove, to take
away, ofi", out, to prevent. L. 53.
Quitasol, ké-t(í-8ol\ s. m., parasol. L.
50.
Quizá, ké-OiQ' [k6-B§'], adv., perhaps.
L. 34.
Radical, hrd-rHé-ciU't adj., radical. L.
63.
Baiz, hrfí-éth' [hra-es'l, s. f., root, sweet
potato. (Amer.) L. 63.
Sama, hrd'-mQy s. f., branch. L. 61.
Bamillete, rhd-meL-yd'-td [hrS-m€-yS'-t5],
s. m., bouquet. L. 27.
Bamo, hr&'-mo, s. m., branch depart-
ment. L. 53.
Bana, Ar^t'-n^, s. f., frog. No ser rana,
to be wide-awake, expert. L. 65.
Bapaza, hrdrpd'-ih^i [hrS-pS'-B{i], s. f.,
little girl. ¡ Miren la rapazwila I look
at the little vixen. L. 61.
Bare, hrd'-ro, adj., rare, odd, curious,
scarce. L. 63.
Basg'ar, hrá8'gár\ to scratch, to tear.
L. 64.
Basg'O, hr&a'-go, s. m., trait, stroke,
instance. L. 63.
Bato, hrá'~io, s. m., while, moment.
A ratos, from time to time. L. 44.
Baton, hrd-ton', s. m., mouse. L. 65.
Baya, hr&'-y^, s. f., stroke, dash. L. 64.
Bayo, hrd'-yoy s. m. , ray, flash, thunder-
bolt. L. 62, 63.
Bazón, hrd-thon' [hrS-son'], s. f., reason,
right. Toner razón, to be right. L.
25.
Bazonár, hrd-tho-ndr' [hrS-Bo-nSr'J, to
reason. L. 63.
Be-, hrd, used as a prefix. L. 50.
Beal, hrd-dl\ adj., real, royal ; s. m.,
real, Spanish coin, usually about
twelve cents. L. 47, 48.
Bealidad, hrdd-le-THdrn' , s. f., reality.
L.48.
Bebajar, hrdrbd-hdr', to reduce, to ^
abate, to lower, to beat down
(prices). L. 64.
Bebanada, hrd-bd-nd'-rna, s. f., slice,
piece (of bread). L. 63.
Bebanar. hrd-bd-ndr\ to slice, to cut
(bread). L. 64.
Bebimo, hrd-bdn'-yo, s. m., flock of
sheep. L. 40.
Beoardo, hrd-cg.r'-do, s. m., message,
errand. L. 63.
Digitized
by Google
488
VOCABULAEY,
Beoepoión, hrá-thí^théon' [hrJS-BSp-
BSon'], 8. f., reception. L. 64.
Beoibimiento, hra-tíie-bé-méH'-to [rhs-
86-bS-m68n'-to], 8. m., act of receiv-
ing, reception. L. 55.
Beoibir, hrá-thé-bér' [hra-se-ber'], to re-
ceive. L. 8.
Beoibo, hrá-thé'-bo [rhS-sS'-bo], a. m.,
receipt. L. 63.
Beoiprooo, hrá-thé'-pro-co [hrS-se'-pro-
co], adj., reciprocal. L. 63.
Beoitar, hrá-thé-t&r' [hrS-sS-tar'], to re-
cite. L. 64.
Beoomendaoión, hrá-co-rnén-dá-theon'
[hra-co-m6n-dá£-86on'], s. f., recom-
mendation. L. 60.
Beoomendar, hrá-co-mhi-dár'f to rec-
onunend. L. 64.
Beoonooer, hrd-co-no-thér' [hrs-co-no-
ggr'], to recognize, to acknowledge.
L. 39.
Beoordar, hra-cor-dar't to remember,
to remind. L. 35.
Beoto, hr^h'-to, adj., right. L. 55.
Beotor, hrek-tor', s. m., rector, direc-
tor. L. 63.
Beourrir, hrSrcúrhrer', to recur, to
have recourse. L. 60.
Beonrso, hrá-cúr'-sOf s. m., recourse,
resource. L. 40.
Bednoir, hrá-dú-thér' [hrfi-dü-sSr'], to
reduce. L. 54.
Beferir, hrá-fá-rér', to refer, to re-
late. L. 64.
BefleziYO, hra-flM-ae'-vo^ adj., reflex-
ive, reflective. L. 63.
Beflezionar, hrá-flélc-séo-nár', to re-
flect, to think. L. 48.
Beforma, hrd-for'-m^, s. f., reform,
reformation. L. 63.
Beformar, hrá-for-már\ to reform, to
form anew, to discharge (from an
employment or office). L. 48.
Befrán, rhá-frán', s. m., refrain, prov-
erb. L. 63, 65.
Begalar, hrá-gá-lár\ to regale, to pre-
sent with, to make a present of. L.
63.
Begalo, hra-gd'-lo, s. m., gift, present.
L. 63.
Bégimen, hrd'-hé-mhi, s. m., regimen,
government. L. 57.
Begimiento, hrá-hé-méhi'-tOt 8. m.,
regiment. L. 19.
Begir, hrá-hir'j to govern. L. 57.
Begla, hrd'-glfi, s. f , rule, ruler. L. 63.
Begnlar, hrd-gú-lár\ adj., regular,
tolerable, moderate, ordinary; adv.,
tolerably, fidr, middling. L. 27, 57,
64.
'RegJÚB.TÍáAñ.,hrd-gú-ld-ré-THdTH', s .f. ,
regularity. L. 55.
Be^larizar, hrd-gthUi^e-thdr' [hrs-sft.
l«-re-8ár'], to regulate. L. 48.
Behusar, hrd-ú-sár'j to refuse. L. 61.
Beina, fcrá'é-ng, s. f., queen. L. 63.
BeinaxLte, hrde-nán'-tdy act. part.,
reigning. L. 38.
Beinar, hrde-nár\ to reign. L. 15.
Beino, hrd'e-nOy s. m., kingdom. Ij.
45.
Beir, hrd-er\ to laugh. L. 21.
Belaoión, hrd-lá-théon' [hrS-iS-Beon'J, s.
f., relation, account, recital. L. 43.
Belámpago, hrá-lám'-pá-gOf s. m., flash
of lightning. L. 63. . _
Belampagnear, hrd-Uím-pá'ghdár'j to
lighten. L. 30.
Belatar, hrd-ldrt&r\ to relate. L. 45.
Beligión, hrárle-héon' f s. f., religion.
L. 35.
Beligioso, hrárlé-heo'-aOf adj., reli-
gious. L. 35.
Beloj, hrd-loh'f s. m., watch, cloc¿.
L. 28.
Belojero, hr&-lo-M'-ro, s. m., watch-
maker. L. 63.
Belnoir, hrd-lu-ther' [rhft-iu-sSr'], to
sparkle, to glitter. No es oro todo
. lo que reluce, all is not ^old that
glitters. L. 65.
Bemediar, hrá-má-xné&r', to remedy.
L. 64.
Bemedio, hrdrm&'-THeo, s. m., remedy.
L. 53.
Bemendar, hrd-mén-dár'^ to rex)air, to
mend. L. 64.
Bemunerar, Jird-mú-iüirr&r' ^ to remu-
nerate. L. 52.
Bendir, hrhi-der\ to render, to sub-
due. i2<?ncíírse, to surrender. L. 39.
Beñir, ^ráw-yer', to quarrel, to dispute,
to scold. L. 39.
Eeo, hrd'-o, s. m., culprit, ofiender.
L. 53.
Bepartir, hrd-par-ter', to divide. L. 58.
Bepasar, hrá-ph-8dr\ to repass, to ex-
amine, to glance over. L. 64.
Bepaso, hrd-pd'-so, s. m., revision, the
act of going or looking over. L. 61 .
Bepente, hrd-p^'-td. De repente, sud-
denly, on a sudden. L. 54.
Bepetición, hrd-pd-té-théon' [hrs-ps-t€-
seon'], s. f., repetition. L. 63.
Bepetir, hrd-pd-ter', to repeat. L. 39.
Beposar, hrd-po-s&r', to repose, to rest.
L. 39.
Beposo, hrd-po'-so, s. m., repose, rest.
L. 63.
Beprender, hrd-prhi'dér', to repre-
hend, to reprimand. L. 42.
Bepresentar, hrd-prd-sH-tdr'j to rep-
resent, to make appear, to perform
(a part), to enact. L. 04.
Digitized
by Google
VOCABULARY.
489
Beprobar, lira-pr(hbár\ to reprove, to
upbraid. L. 60.
Bepúblioa, hrá-pú'-hlé-CQy s. f., repub-
Uc. L. 65.
'Reputación, hrá^pú-tárihéon' [hrs-pü-tS-
bSoii'], reputation. L. 24.
^Baroir, hra-a^r-thér' [hra-sfr-aer'], to
indemnify, to compensate, to make
up for. L. 59.
Besentirse, hráraén-tér'-sd, to resent,
to feel the effects of. L. 59.
Besfriado, hraa-fre&'-TMOy s. m., a cold.
L. 63.
BesfriaiBe, hráa-freár'-ad^to catch cold.
- L. 63.
Besidente, Ará-«é-<2^'-¿á, adj., act.
part, (of Besidib), resident, resid-
ing. L. 38.
Besidir, hrá-8e-THér\ to reside. L. 9.
Besifltir, hrd-aés-tér', to resist. L. 51.
BesolucióxL, hrá-80-liJÍrihéon' [hrfi-so-lu-
sSon'J, s. f., resolution. L. 63.
Besólver, hrá-8o!rvér\ to solve, to re-
solve. L. 64.
Bespeoto, i^ra-«p^'-to, s. m., respect,
as, in this respect. L. 51.
Bespetable, hrá-spá-tá'-blát adj., re-
spectable. L. 39.
Bespetar, hrá-spá-tár\ to respect. L.
36.
Bespeto, hra-spa'-to, s. m., respect, re-
gard. L. 56.
Besponder, hrá-8pon-dér\ to respond,
to answer, to reply to. L. 33.
Bespondón, hra-spon-don'^ adj., ready
or quick to reply. L. 33,
BespueBta, hras-puda'-ta^ s. f., re-
sponse, reply, answer. L. 30.
Bestante, hrés-tán'-td, s. m., act. part,
(of Eestab), remainder, rest, re-
maining. L. 46.
Besultar, hrá-súl-tdr'y to result, to turn
out, to occur. L. 43.
Be tirar, Aró-íe-rár', to retire, to with-
draw, to retreat. L. 63.
Betrato, hrá-tr&'-to, s. m., portrait,
likeness. L. 17.
Bemnatismo, hráú-mU-tes'-mo, s. m.,
rheumatism. L. 63.
Beunir, hrdH-ner', to unite, to reunite,
to assemble. L. 52.
Bevés, hrá-vás', s. m., back part, wrong
side. Al revés, on the contrary, up-
side down. L. 63.
BevoltOBO, hra-vol'to'-so, adj., turbu-
lent, rebellious. L. 44.
Bey, hrá'-é, s. m., king. L. 15.
Beyezuelo, hráe-thúá'4o [hrse-süs'-iol, s.
m. (dim. of Bey), petty king, king-
ling. L. 44.
Bioacho, hri-cá'-chOf adj., very rich,
new rich. L. 49.
Bioo^ hre'-cOt adj., rich. L. 13.
Bidioulez, hré-dé-cú-láth' Lhre-dg-cü-lSs'],
8. f., ridicule. L. 45.
Bidioulizar, hré-de-cú-lé-thár' [hre-dS-
cü-ié-8ír' 1, to ridicule. L. 48.
Bidioulo, hré-dé'-cú-lOt a^. and s. m.,
ridiculous, ridicule. L. 5.
Bigodón, hré-go-THon\ s. m., rigadoon,
country dance. L. 23.
Binoón, hrén-con', s. m., comer. L. 55.
Bio, hre'-Oj s. m., river. L. 40.
Biqueza, hré-ká'-tha [hré-kft'-sg], s. f.,
riches. L. 48.
Bisa, hré'-SQt s. f., laugh, laughter.
L. 48.
Bivalizar, hré-vá-lé-thár' [hré-vS-ie-sáp'],
to rival, to vie with. L. 51.
Bobar, hro-bUr', to rob, to steal. L. 44.
Bodar, hro-THár\ to roll. L. 54.
Bodear, hro-THá&r\ to go around, to
surround, to revolve. L. 54.
Bodeado, hro-THá&'-THo, adj. and p. p.
(of Bodeab), surrounded. L. 58.
Bodilla, hro-THel'-y^ [hro-TH6'.y§], s. f.,
knee. De rodiUaa, on the knees.
L. 59.
Bodrignez, hro-dre'-ghUh [hro-dre'-ghgg],
8. m., Rodriguez. L. 49.
Bogar, hro-gár', to beg of, to pray. L.
35.
Bojo, Aro' -Ao, adj., red. L. 54.
Bomano, hro-má'-no, adj., Boman. L.
54.
Bomper, hrom-p'ér\ to break, to tear.
L. 46.
Bopa, liro'-pQj s. f., clothes, under-
clothes, inner wearing apparel. L.
28.
Bosa, hro'-sny s* f.» '¡osq. L. 63.
Boto, hro'-tOf irr. p. p. (of Eompee),
broken, out of order. L. 52.
Bnbio, hrú'-beo, adj., ruddy. L. 63.
Buido, hrúé'-THO, s. m., noise. L. 46.
Buin, hrú-én'j adj., mean, churlish,
villanous. L. 63.
Buindad, hrúén-THárH'^ s. f ., meanness,
churlishness villany. L. 48.
Buisenor, hrúé-8án-yor\ s. m., night-
ingale. L. 63.
Bumor, hrú-mor\ s. m., rumor. L. 54.
Butina, hrú-te'-nQy s. f., routine. L.
Sábado, aW-hárTHOt s. m., Saturday.
L. 9.
Saber, sd-Mr', to know, to hear from,
to savor, to taste ; s. m., learning,
knowledge. L. 21 and 42.
Sabio, 8á''béo, adj., wise, sage, learned.
L. 21.
Sabor, 8^¿'hor\ s. m., savor, taste. L.
62 and 66.
Digitized
by Google
490
VOCABULARY,
Baoamnelai, aü-cii'múa'-lcís, s. m.,
tooth-drawer, dentist. L. 50.
Saoar, 8á'Cár\ to dmw out, to take
out, to pull out. L. 50 and 66.
Saco, 8á'-co, s. m., sack, bag, sack-
coat. L. 66.
Saondir, í<í-ctí-FHer', to shake off, to
shake. L. 54.
Sal, íáZ, 8. f, salt, wit. L. 55.
Saldo, 8(íl'-do, s. m., balance (of ac-
counts). L. 64.
Salida, sá-lé'-Tua, s. f., going out, de-
parture, start. L. 63.
Saliente, «¿f-Ze^n'-ta^adJ. and act. part.,
projecting, salient. L. 38.
Salir, 8á-lér', to go or to come out, to
set out, to leave, to start, to finish,
to rise (as of the sun). Salió á su
padre, he resembled his father. L.
20.
Salón, 8iírlon\ s. m., parlor, saloon,
hall. L. 58.
Saltar, 8dl-tár\ to jump, to leap. L.
58.
Salto, 8iU'-t0f s. m.. leap, jump, fall
(water-fall). L. 59.
Salud, 8á'lÚTH\ s. f., health. L. 25.
Saludar, 8&-lú-FHár\ to salute. L. 64.
Sánchez, sán'-chMh [aán'-chgs], s. m.,
Sánchez. L. 49. •
Sangre, sán'-grd, blood. L. 64.
Santificar, 8án-té-fé-cár\ to sanctify.
L. 45.
Santo, san' -to, adj., holy, saintly. L.
64.
Sastre, 8ds'-trd, s. m., tailor. L. 11.
Sastrería, saa-trd-re'-a, s. f., tailor-
shop. L. 11.,
Satírico, «a-¿6'-r6-co, adj., satirical. L.
35.
Satisfacer, sá-ies-fi-tMr' [sS-tés-fá-sSr'],
to satisfy. L. 42.
Satisfecho, 8^-tes-fd'-cho, adj. and p. p.
(of Satisfacer), satisfied. L. 44
and 52.
Sayo, 8á'-yo, s. m., a loose coat or
jacket. L. 65.
Sazonar, 8á-tho-n&r' [sá-so-nSr'], to sea-
son. L. 62.
Se, sd, per. pron. (instead of Lb, Les,
to him, to her, to them, to you), L.
26 ; pron. (used to form the passive
voice), L. 32; rcf. pron., L. 33.
Se-, 8d, Lat. prep, prefix. L. 50.
Secreto, sd-crd'-to, s. m., secret, se-
crecy. L. 65.
Sed, 8^TH, s. f., thirst. L. 25.
Seda, sá'-PH(}, s. f., silk. L. 5.
Seguir, 8d-gher', to follow, to con-
tinue. L! 39.
SegúxL* sd-qún\ prep., according to.
L. 40 and 66.
Segundo, sárgún'-do, ord. adj. and s.
m., second. L. 15 and 23.
Seguro, 8drgú'-ro, adj., sure, secure.
L.43.
Seis, «á'-e«, num. adj., six. L. 14.
Seiscientos, 8dé8-theén'-to8 Lsát^-sóga'-
tos], num. adj., six hundred. L. 14.
Semana, 8á-m&'-n^^ s. f., week. L. '8.
Semblante, 8hn-hlán'-td, s. m., counte-
nance, face, aspect, look. L. 59. •
Sentar, 8(én-tár' , to sit, to sit down, to
set down, to enter (,in a book), to fit,
to be becoming to. L. 34.
Sentencia, 8én-tén'-thég, [aént¿n'-B€§],
8. f., sentence. L. 43.
Sentido, aen-te'-vnOj s. m., sense, idea.
L. 65.
Sentir, 8hi-tér\ to feel, to regret. L. 38.
Senor, 8án-yor\ Sir, Mr., Lord. L. 1.
Señora, 8dn-yo'-rQj s. f., lady, madam,
Mrs., wife. L. 2.
Señorita, adn-yo-ri'-tQj s. f., young
lady. Miss. L. 2.
Se&orito, adn-yo-re'-to, s. m., yoniig
sir^ young gentleman, Mr. L. 2.
Séptimo, 8%p''te-m0y s. and ord. adj.,
seventh. L. 15.
Ser, «¿r, s. m., to be, to exist (coi9pare
with Estab). L. 11 and 22.
Ser, 8^, s. m., being, existence. L.
54.
Servidor, s^r-ue-FHor', s. m., servant.
Servidor de usted, your servant. L.
39.
Servir, 8'ér-ver\ to serve, to oblige.
Servir 8e, to be good enough, to be
kind enough, to be pleased (to do).
L. 39.
Sesenta, «a-s^'-í(j, num. adj., sixty.
L. 14.
Setenta, «a-<g«'-<g, num. adj., seventy.
L. 14.
Setecientos, 8d-tá-t.hehi'-to8 [sa-ta-séSn'-
tos], num. adj., seven hundred. L».
14.
Septiembre, s^p-té^i'-brd, s. m., Sep-
tember. L. 24.
Sezo, 8^' -80, s. m., sex. El bello íea;o,
the fair sex. L. 58.
Sezto, 8ék'-t0f ord. adj. and s. m.,
sixth. L. 15.
Si, sé, adv., yes. L. 1.
SI, 86, indef. pron., self, one's self. L.
26.
Si, se, conj., if, but. L. 23.
Siempre, sé^m'-prd, adv., always. Por
siempre jamás, forever and ever. L.
25.
Siesta, 8éé8'-tQ, s. f., siesta, afternoon
nap. L. 62.
Siete, 8éd'-id, num. adj., seven. L. 14.
Ciglo, se'-glo, s. m., century. L. 52.
Digitized
by Google
VOCABULART.
491
Sigrnifioado, sed-ne-fe-ca'-THo^ s. m.,
signification, meaning. L. 49.
8i?iiifioar, aég-Hé-fé-cár', to signify.
L. 64.
Silaba; aé'-lá-bQ, s. f., syllable. L. 63.
Bilenoio, sé-lén'-théo [ss-iéu'-seo], s. m.,
silence. L. 65.
Bilenoioso, sé-lén-théo'-so rsé-lSn-sCo'-
Bol, adj., silent. L. 64.
Billa, sél'-yQ [86'-y§J,s. f., chair, saddle.
L.. 14.
Simpatizar, aem-píUtl-ihár' [8€m-pS-t€-
sSr'J, to sympathize. L. 51.
Simple, aem'-pld, adj., simple, single,
silly. L. 43.
Sin, «é», prep., without, (^n embargo,
notwithstanding. L. 19.
Sinceridad, sén-thd-ré-THáTH' [sén-ss-
r6-THáTH'J, s. f., sincerity. L. 45.
Sincero, sén-thd'-ro [sen-sft'-ro], adj.,
sincere. L. 40.
Singular, sén-gií-Uír't adj., singular.
1.. 57.
Sino, 86' -no, conj., but, if not. L. 3.
Sinónimo, si-no' -ni-mOf s. m., syno-
nym. L. 65.
Sinrazón, sm-rá-thon' [sen-rá-son'], s. f.,
wrong, injustice. L. 50.
Siquiera, «é-fceá'-rg, conj., even, at
least. L. 40.
Sitio, sé'-téo, s. m., place, position,
siege. L. 58.
Situado, 8é-túa'-rHo, p. p. (of Situar).
L. 20.
Situar, sé-túdr', to situate, to be situ-
ated. L. 64.
Bo-, «0, prep., under. So pretexto de,
under pretext of. L. 41.
Sobrar, ao-brár', to bo over and above.
L.64,
Sobre, ao'-brd, prep., upou, on, over,
above, about; s. m., envelope. L.
41.
Spbreescrito, so-bra-P.t-cré'-to, s. m.,
superscription, address (of a letter).
L. 56.
Sobrina, so-bré'-nfí, s. f., niece. L. 65.
Sobrino, so-bré'-no, s. m., nephew. L.
65.
Socialismo, so-théd-lés'-mo [so-séSics'-
mo], s. m., socialism. L. 50.
Sociedad, ao-thed-THÍÍTH' [so-sea-THSíH'],
s. m., society, company, a firm. L.
32.
Socio, 8o'-theo [so'-sCo], s. m., partner,
comx>anion, member of a firm. L.
62.
Sofá, 80-fá\ s. m., sofa. L. 34.
Sol, 8ol, s. m., sun. L. 45.
Solas, 8o'-l¿l8, all alone. L. 64.
Soldado, 8ol-dá'-TH0, s. m., soldier. L.
52.
Soledad, so-Io-tbHth', s. f., solitude,
loneliness. L. 63.
Solemne, ao-lém'-ná, adj., solemn, thor-
ough, downright. L. 61.
Soler, 8o4ér'j to be accustomed to, to
be wont. L. 41.
Solicitar, ao-lé-thé-tár' [Bo-i6-86t«r'], to
solicit. L. 47.
Soliloquio, 8o-lé-lo'-kéo, s. m., solilo-
quy. L. 65.
Solo, 80' 4o, adj., alone; aólOy adv.,
only, merely. L. 25.
Soltar, 8ol-tár'y to untie, to loose, to
liberate, to let go free. L. 64.
Soltero, 8ol-tá'-rOf s. m., bachelor, un-
married man. L. 51.
Sombra, «ow'-ftr^, s. f., shade, shadow.
L. 58.
Sombrero, 8om-brá'-ro, s. m., hat. L.
10.
Son, aoiij s. m., sound. Sin ton y sin
«0», without rhyme and without
reason. L. 47.
Sonar, ao-ndr'^ to sound. L. 45.
Sonido, ao-ne'-mo, s. m., sound. L.
47.
Sonreírse, aon-ráér'-ad, to smile. L.
64.
Sonrisa, son-ré'-aí^j s. f., smile. L. 54.
Sonrojar, son-ro-Mr'^ to make one
blush. L.64.
So2.ar, aon-yár', to dream. L. 35.
Sopa, «o'-pg, s. f., soup. L. 44.
Sopetón, ao-pd-tmi", s. m. De sopetáUf
unexpectedly. L. 44.
Soplar, 8o-plár'j to blow, to prompt.
L. 64.
Sordo, 8or'-do, adj., deaf. L. 64.
Sorprender, aor-prén-dér'j to surprise.
L. 42.
Sorpresa, aor-prd'-SQ, a. f., surprise.
L. 51.
Sospechar, aos-pd-ch&r', to suspect. L.
60.
Su, 8Ú, poss. adj., his, her, its, their,
your. L. 5.
Sub-, sub J Lat. prep., prefix. L. 50.
Subida, 8Ú-hé'-TH(^, s. f., rising, rise,
ascent. L. 63.
Subir, aú'bér', to go or come up, to
ascend, to mount, to rise. L. 50.
Subjuntivo, 8Úb-hún-té'-vo, adj., sub-
junctive. L. 43.
Substancia, avh-stdn'-thia [gúb-stSn'-séa],
s. f., substance. L. 63.
Suceder, aú-thd-THh-' [sú-sa-'PHgr'], to
happen, to take place, to succeed
(to come after). L. 45.
Sucesivo, 8Ú-fhd-8€'-vo Lsñ-sS-sé'-vol, s.
f., future. L. 32.
Sucio, aú'-théo Lsü'-céo], adj., soiled,
dirty. L. 64.
Digitized
by Google
492
VOCABULARY,
Snd, 8ÚTH, 8. m., South. L. 26.
Snegrra, «iia'-prg, s. f., mother-in-law.
L. 63.
Suegro, súá'-grot a. m., father-in-law.
L. 63.
Suela, aúá'-lii, s. f., sole. L. 61.
Suelo, 8Úá'-l0i s- ni., ground, floor, soil.
L. 54.
Suelto, 8ÚH'-to, adj. and p. p. (of Sol-
tar), loose, free. L. 64.
Sue&o, 8Úán'-y0j s. m., sleep, dream.
L. 25.
Suerte, aú^'-táf s. f., luck, chance,
sort. Echar sutertes^ to cast lots. L.
58.
Suficiente, sú-fe-théhí'-tá [bü-í e-seen'-ts],
adj., sufficient. L. 40.
Snfrir, 8Ú-frér', to suflfer, to bear with,
to undergo. L. 64.
Sujeto, 8Ú-ha'-to, s. m., individual, per-
son, topic, matter, subject. L. 27.
Sujeto, 8Ú-há'-to, adj., subject.
Suma, 8Ú'-mi}, s. m., sum. En «unta,
in short. L. 63 and 64.
Superior, 8Ú-pá-réor\ adj., superior.
L. 21.
Superlativo, 8Ú-pí^r-lárÍe'-vo^ adj., su-
perlative. L. 60.
SuperstioioBO, 8Ú-p}ír'8té-Íhéo'-8o [sü-p^r-
8t€-B6o'-8o], adj ., superstitious. L. 45.
Suplicar, sú-plé-cár', to supplicate, to
beg, to crave. L. 64.
Suponer, 8Ú-po-n^\ to suppose. L. 64.
Supremo, aú-prá'-mOf adj., supreme,
highest. L. 21.
Supuesto, 8Ú-púd8''to, p. p. (of Supo-
ner). Por supuesto^ of course. L.
64.
Sur, 8Úr (see Sud). L. 66.
Sus, 8Ú8i inlj., holloa, exclamation.
L. 46.
Suspirar, sús-pé-rdr', to sigh. L. 64.
Sustantivo, sús-tán-té'-vo, s. m. and
adj., substantive. L. 64.
Sustentar, 8Ú8-tén-tdr' , to sustain. L.
65.
Sutil, su-tel't adj., subtle, thin, slender.
L. 64.
Sutileia, 8Ú-te-lá'-thQ [sñ-té-is'-sa], s. f.,
subtlety, cunning, slendemess. L.
63.
Suyo, 8Ú'-yo, poss. adj., his, hers, its,
theirs, yours, one's. L. 13.
Tabaco, tdrbd'-eo, s. m., tobacco, cigar.
L. 42.
Tablero, tá-blá'-roy s. m., a smooth
board, chess or checker-board. L. 51.
Tacto,¿¿íA;'-to, s. m., the sense of touch.
L. 65.
Tal, tm, adj., such, so. Tal vez, per-
haps. L. 32.
Talento, tá-lén'-to, s. m., talent, cbility. .
L. 65.
También, táiíi-beén'^ conj. and adv.,
also, as well, moreover, L. 29.
Tampoco, tám-po'-co, adv., neither, not
either, nor. L. 29.
Tan, t&n^ adv., so, so much, as, as
much. L. 20.
Tanto, tan' -to, adj., so, in such a man-
ner. Tanto mejor, so much the bet-
ter. Por lo tantOf therefore. L. 20.
Tapar, tá'pár\ to cover up, to stop up.
L. 65.
Tapete, tá-pá'-ta^ s. m., table-coYer.
L. 61.
Tardar, tQr-dár\ to delay, to put off.
L. 60.
Tarde, tgr'-dáy s. f., afternoon ; adv.,
late. L. 20.
Tarea, tá-rá-a, s. f., task. L. 58.
Tarjeta, tftr-há'-tat, s. f., card, visiting
card. Tarjeta postal, postal card.
L. 64.
Tate, t&'-tdj inlj., easy there! take
care ! L. 46.
Taza, tW'thQ [ts'-Bgl, s. f., cup. L. 55.
Té, ta, s. m., tea. L. 55.
Te, td, pers. pron., thee, to thee. L.
26.
Teatro, tad' -tro, s. m., theatre. L. 17.
Teja, té'-?iaj s. f., tile. De tejas abajo,
humanly speaking. L. 61.
Telegráfico, tá-lá-grd'-fe-co, adj., tele-
graphic. L. 65.
!elé8n - -
Telégrafo, t^lá'-grd-fo, s. m., telegraph.
L. 46.
Tema, /c'-wfl^, s. m., theme, exercise;
s. f., dispute, contention. L. 57.
Temer, té-mér', to fear. L. 28.
Temerario, tá-md-rd'-réo^ adj., rash,
foolhardy. L. 54.
Temor, ta-mor', s. m., fear. L. 54.
Temprano, tém-prd'rno^ adv., early,
soon. L. 20.
Tenacidad, ta-nd-the-THdrn' [ts-nS-se-
thSth'J, s. f., tenacity. L. 65.
Tenedor, <á-ná-EHor', s. m., fork. L.
65.
Tener, td-nér'j to have, to hold, to be,
to take place. L. 10.
Tentación, fén-td-theon' [t£n-t¿-séoii'], s.
m., temptation. L. 61.
Teñir, tán-yer\ to dye. L. 39.
Teoría, táo-ré'-Q, s. f., theory. L. 23.
Tercero, tér-thá'-ro [t«r-s«'-ro], ord. adj.
and 8. m., third. L. 15.
Tercio, fér'-theo Ltgr'-seo], p. m., third,
third part. L. 40.
Terminación, tér-me-nd-theon' [tér-ms-
nS-B€on'], s. f., termination. L. 49.
TeriTjinante. t6r-mé-ndn'-tá, adj., con-
clusive. L. 65.
Digitized by VjOOQ iC
Terminar, í^-wé-nár', to terminate.
L. 65.
Término, iér'-me-no, s. m., termina-
tion, term. L. 65.
Termómetro, <^-wio'-mé-fro, s. m., ther-
mometer. L. 60.
Terrenal, tó-hrá-nül', adj., terrestrial.
L. 49. .
Terreno, tó-hrá'-no, s. m., ground. L.
55.
Terrible, t^hré'-blá, adj., terrible. L.
53.
Terrón, t^hron', s. m., a clod, upturned
earih. L. 49.
Terroso, férhro'-so, adj., earthy. L.
49.
Terrestre, té-hrés'-trd^ adj., terrestrial,
earthly. L. 49.
Tertulia, th'4ú'-lé(i, s. í-» party, soiree.
L. 39.
Ti, té, pcrs. pron., thee, following a
prep. L. 26.
Tiempo, téhn'-po, s. m., time, weather.
L. 23.
Tienda, /ei^'-dg, s. f., store, shop. L.
64.
Tierra, tW-hr^, s. f., earth, land, na-
tive land. L. 45.
Tijeras, té-há'-rQS, s. f. pi., scissors.
L. 64.
Tinta, tén'-ÍQ, s. f., ink. L. 5.
lintero, ten-td'-ro, s. m., ink-stand.
Dejarse algo en el tintero, to leave
something unsaid. L. 4.
Tinto, tén'-to, adj., red. Vino tinto,
claret wine. L. 65.
Tie, te'-o, s. m., uncle. L. 65.
Tirabuzón, té-rd-bú-thon' Its-rá-bú-son'],
s. m., cork-screw. L. 65.
Tiránico, té-rá'-né-co, adj., tyrannical.
L. 35.
Tirar, té-rár', to throw, to cast, to
shoot. Tire usted por aquí, take
this road. L. 64.
lire, te'-ro, s. m., throw, cast. A tiro
de pistola, within pistol shot. L.
53.
Titulo, té'-tú-lo, s. m., title. L. 55.
Tooante, to-cdn'-ta, prep., concerning,
relating to, touching. L. 38.
Tocar, to-cár', to touch, to play (on an
instrument). L. 15.
Todavía, to-Tiiá-ve'-Q, adv-, yet^ atilL
Todo, fo-T^o, adj.. ail, ÍTorícJíf los días,
c Yí * ry d ay ► DeUíJí ^>, c n t i ri* ly h Con
iodo^ licj wi.' vc r, n tit w i tli standing. L.
IK
Todo, io-THO, &. m,f the whole, L. Gl,
Tolerar H Uf-iú-rÚr', ti> t*>lerate» L. ftii.
Toma ' tú'-m(}, interj.^ ludfuid ! L. 45.
Tomar, ixhrnnr', tu take. L, 14*
Tomo, to' -mo, s. m., volume. Un libro
de tres tomos, a book in three vol-
umes. L. 15.
Tonel, to-nW, s. m., cask, barrel. L.
60. .
Tonto, ton'-to, adj., foolish. A tontos
y á locos, at random. L. 60.
Tontera, ton-td'-rQ, s. f., foolish action.
L. 60. ,
Toque, to'-kd, a. m., roll (of a drum),
ringing (of bells). Ahí está el to-
que, that is where the difficulty
lies. L. 65.
Torero, to-rd'-ro, s. m., bull-fighter.
L. 53.
Tomar, tor-ndr', to return, to begin
anew. L. 65.
Torno, tor' -no, s. m., lathe. En torno,
round about. L. 65.
Toro, to'-ro, s. m., bull. L. 53.
Tos, tos, 8. f., cough. L. 65.
Trabajador, trá-bá-há-THor' , adj., and
s. m., hardworking, worker. L. 17.
Trabajar, íríí-6á-Aár', to work, to labor.
L. 17.
Trabajo, trd-bá'-ho, s. m., work, labor,
occupation. L. 17.
Traducción, trd-duk-théon' [trá-dük-
86on']j s. f., translation. L. 64.
Traducir, trd-du-thér' [trS-dü-sgr'], to
translate. L. 40.
Traer, trá^ír', to bring, to carry, to
wear. L. 42.
Tragar, trd-gár', to swallow. L. 65.
Tragedia, trd-hd'-THéa, s. f., tragedy.
L. 52.
Trágico, trd'-hé'Co, adj., tragic. L. 35.
Trago, trd'-go, s. m., draught, drink.
Echar un trago, to take a drink. L.
59.
Traje, trd'-hd, s. m., dress, costume.
L. 54.
Trampa, trdm'-pq, s. f., trap, swindle.
Caer en la trampa, to fall into the
snare. L. 64.
Trampear, trdm^pddr', to swindle, 'to
impose upon. L. 65.
Tramposo, trdm^po'-so^ adj., deceitful,
swindling ; s. m., cheat, swindler.
L. 65.
Tranquilidad, tr^n-lcé4é-THdTH'^ s. f.,
tranquility, peace, quietness. L. 46.
Tranquilizar ^ frfiv-l-e-^r-ihfir ftrffn-kS-lG-
eiTi'l, U} üimtiujÜLie. L, Í15.
TranqtdlOT ir&tf-W-fo, aiJj.^ tmnquil,
quiot, peaceful. L. GO.
Trapo ^ inV-pu, s, mM Tstg. h, tí4.
Tras, fr'tlR^, pre p., iH^hinclT iifti^r^ L. 41.
Traiourso. frílK-í*Hí*'-ifü^ s^ m,, iMiiirsu,
prwíiRíii [of time L L. 51.
Trasnochar, lrñ^-iUt-cháT\ to sit up all
night. L. US.
Digitized
by Google
494
VOCABULARY,
Trasquilar, trds-hé-ldr', to shear
(sheep). Ir por lana y volver traa-
quüadOf the hiter bitten. L. 65.
Trastienda, trda-teH'-dQ^ s. f., a room
back of shop or store. L. 64.
Tratado, trá-tá'-THo^ s. m., treatise,
treaty. L. 46.
Tratante, trártán'-tá, s. m., dealer. L.
38.
Tratar, tr&'tár\ to treat, to have in-
tercourse with or relations with, to
trade, to deal, to traffic, to try. L. 32.
Trato, trá'-to, s. m., treatment, deal-
ings, intercourse. L. 65.
Través, trá-vás\ prep. Al travéa de,
through. L. 65.
Travesura, tra-vd-su'-rQ, s. f., trick,
mischief, naughtiness. L. 53.
Travieso, trá-véá'-so, adj., tricky,
naughty, mischievous. L. 52.
Traía, trá-íha [trS'-sg], s. f., trace.
Tener buena trazaj to look well. L.
64.
Treoe, trd'-thd [trS'-8&], num. adj., thir-
teen. L. 14.
Treinta, trá'én-tQ^ num. adj., thirty.
L. 14.
Tres, trás^ num. adj., three. L. 14.
Tribunal, tre-bu-nM', s. m., tribunal,
court of justice. L. 53.
Trig^o^íré-sfo, s. m., wheat. L. 65.
Trig'eno, tre-gdn'-yo^ adj., brown, dark
(complexion). L. 66.
Trinchar, trén-chgr'f to cut up, to
carve. L. 50.
Trineo, tré'-ndOy s. m., sleigh. L. 65.
Trinidad, tré^é-THáTH\ s. f.. Trinity.
L. 21.
Triptong^o, trep-ton'-go^ s. m., trip-
thong. L. 57.
Triste, trea'-td, sad, mournful, dull.
L. 21.
Tristesa, trea-td'-sg, s. f., sadness, dul-
ness. L. 41.
Tronar, tro-ndr', to thunder. L. 30.
Tropa, tro'-pa, s. f., troop. L. 40.
Trueoo, trud'-co^ s. m., barter, ex-
change. A truecoy provided that.
L.61.
Trueno, trúd'-no^ s. m., thunder, clap
of thunder. L. 30.
Trueque, trúd'-kd (see Trueco). L. 48.
Tú, túy pers. pron., thou ; poss. adj.,
thy. L. 1.
Tuerto, túér'-to, adj., blind of one eye.
L. 65.
Tutear, tú-td¡ír\ to thou and thee, to
speak familiarly (in the second per-
son singular). L. 65.
Tuteo, tú-td'-Oy s. m., theeing and thou-
ing. L. 65.
Tuyo, tó'-yo, poss. pron., thine. L. 13.
u, 4, conj., used instead of ó before
words beginning with o or ho, L. 8.
Jf, «/, interj., ugh ! L. 46.
ultimo, úl'-té-mo, adj., last. Por úlii-
moj at last, finally. L. 61.
Un, ttn, adj. and indef. art., one, a
(always used before, never after,
words). L. 4.
Una, ú'-fíií^ fem. of Uno, which see.
L. 5.
Universidad, ú-né-vlér-sé-THáTH' , s. f.,
university. L. 65.
Uno, ú'-nOy indef. art. and adj., a, one.
Unq á M»o, one by one. L. 14.
Una,u»'-2^g, s. f., finger-nail. L. 33.
Usar, ú-aár', to use. L. 62.
Uso, ú'-so, s. m,, use. .L. 61.
Usted, ú-8t^TH\ s. m. and f., you (con-
traction of VUESTBA MEBCED, yoUr
worship). L. 1.
Util, ú'-tél, adj., useful. L. 13.
Uva, ú'-VQf s. f., grape. L. 40.
Vaoa, vA'-CQy s.f., cow, beef. L. 55.
Vaoio, vá-thé'-o tvá-8«'-o], adj., empty.
L. 58.
Valencia, várlH'-thea [vá-i«n'-theft], s. f.,
Valencia. L. 55.
Valentía, vd-lén-té'Q,, s. f., valor, brav-
ery. L. 54.
Valer, vd-lh^', to be worth, to be good
for. Más vale tarde que nunca, hot-
ter late than never. ¡Válgame Dios!
bless me ! L. 41.
Valiente, vá-léén'-tá, adj., valiant,
brave. L. 47.
Valor, várlor', s. m., valor, bravery,
worth, value. L. 25.
Vals, VQlSy s. m., waltz. L. 23.
Vamos! vd'-mosy intj., come! come
• along ! • L. 46.
Vapor, vd-por'f s. m., steam, steam-
boat, steamer. L. 37.
Vara, vd'-rg, s. f., rod ; yard measure.
L. 47.
Vario, vd'-réoy adj., various, variable;
pi., several. L. 43.
Varón, td^on\ s. m., man, male, hu-
man being. L. 62.
Vascongadas, vda-con-gá'-THás (Las
Provincias), s. f. pl., the three
Spanish provinces of Álava, Guipúz-
coa and Biscay. L. 56.
Vascuence, vás-kúhi'-thd tTSa-kü^n'-nS],
s. m., the Biscayan dialect. L. 55.
Vasija, vd-ae'-hg, s. f., cask for liquors.
L. 52.
Vaso, vd'-ao, s. m., vase, glass (for
drinking), tumbler. L. 61.
Vaya, vd'-yg, inlj., come now! indeed!
L. 42.
Vecino, vd-thé'-no [vfi-BS'-noj. L. 28.
Digitized
byUoogle
VOCABULARY.
495
Veinte, vá'en-td, num. adj., twenty.
L. 14.
Vela, va'-l^^ s. f., sail (of a ship),
candle. L. 53.
Vencer, vht-fhh-' [vfn-a«r'], to van-
quish, to overcome, to conquer. L.
59.
Vender, vhi-dér', to sell. L. 6.
Venir, vé-ner\ to come, to suit, to fit.
Venir á pelo, to be just the tiling.
No hay mal que por bien no venga^
it's an ill wind that blows good to
nobody. L. 18.
Ventaja, vH-td'-hQ^ s. f., advantage.
L. 43.
Ventana, v^-td'-nit, s. f., window. L.
28.
Ver, ver, to see, to look. A «cr, let us
look. Verse negro, to be in great
distress. L. 29.
Verano, vá-r¿í'-no, 8. m., summer. L.
24.
Verbal, v^-hia\ adj., verbal. L. 49.
Verbo, u^'-fco, s. m., verb. L. 41.
Verdad, ver-dáTH\ s. f., truth. A la
verdad, truly, indeed. L. 43.
Verdaderamente, vh^-dH-THá-rárm^'-
tó, adv., truly, veritably. L. 32.
Verde, u^'-da, adj., green. L. 54.
Verdura, ver-du'-rQ^ s. f., verdure,
vegetables. L. 34.
Vergüenza, v<ér-guH''th{it [v^r-guen'-sft],
8. f., shame. Tener vergüenza, to be
ashamed. L. 25.
Versión, vh-seon', s. f., version. L. 64.
Verg.0, vh-'-so, s. m., verse, line of
poetry. L. 62.
Vestido, V(é8-t6'~TH0, 8. m., dress, wear-
ing apparel. L. 39.
Vestir, vé»-ter\ to dress, to clothe. L.
25.
Vez, váth [vSs], 8. f., time. Una vez,
once. Dos veces, twice. En vez de,
instead of. Hacer las veces de, to
act as, to serve as. Tal vez, perhaps.
Á mi vez, in my turn. A veces, at
times.
Viajar, viá-Mr', to travel. L. 21.
Vicerector, vé-ihá-r^ílc-tor' I v6^«.rék-tor'],
s. m., vicerector. L. 50.
Viceversa, vé-thá-v^'-s^ [ve-BS-vSr'-Bg],
vice versa. L. 47.
Vioio, vé'-ihéo [ve'-sSo], s. m., vice. L.
41.
Victoria, vek-to'-réQ, a. f., victory. L.
46.
Vida, ve'-THQ, s. f., life. L. 50.
Viejo, vé^'-ho, adj., old. L. 13.
Viena, vePZ-ng, s. f., Vienna. L. 12.
Viento, v&in'-to, s. m., wind. L. 30.
Viernes, véh-'-n^, s. m ., Friday. Vier-
nes santo, Good Friday. L. 9.
Viga, vS'-ga, 8. f., beam. L. 65.
Vifiadiego, vel-^i^-déá'-go [T€-yg-des'-go]f
s. m . Tomar ía& de Villadiego^ to run
away, to take to one^s heels. L. 50.
Vinaoho, vhi^&'-cho, s. m., bad wine.
L. 49.
Vino, ve'-no, s. m., wine. L. 7.
yio\BÁ.o, véO'lá'-THo, s. m. and adj.,
violet (color). L. 54.
Violeta, veo-ldrtQ, s. f., violet. L. 64.
Violin, veo-len', s. m., violin. L. 15.
Violinista, v&hlé-nés'-tQ, s. m., violin-
ist. L. 36.
Virtud, vér-tÚTH', s. f., virtue. En
virtud de, by virtue of. L. 41.
Visita, vé-8€'-t{t, s. f., visit. L. 28.
Visitar, vé-se-tár', to visit, to examine.
L. 52.
Vista, ves'-tQ, s. f., sight, view. A vista^
at sight. Perder de vista, to lose
sight of. L. 29 and 51.
Visto, vés'-to, past. part, (of Ver),
seen. L. 62.
Vistoso, vés-to'-so, adj., conspicuous,
showy. L. 64.
¡Viva! t?6'-«g, intj., long live I hur-
rah ! huzza ! L. 46.
Viviente, vé-véhi'-tá, a. m. and act.
IMirt, living being ; living, animated.
L. 38.
Vivir, ve-vér', to live. L. 9.
Vivo, ve'-vo, adj., alive, lively, spright-
ly. L. 20.
Vizcaino, vét?i-cq,'-&^o [ve8-c§'-6-no], s.
m. and adj., Biscayan. L. 55.
Vizcaya, véth-cá'-pQ [vCs-cá'-ya], s. f.,
Biscay. L. 55.
Vocabulario, vo-cd-hú-lá'-réo, s. m., vo-
cabulary. L. 58.
Vocal, vChciW, adj. and s. m., vocal,
vowel. L. 58.
Volar, vO'lár', to fly. L. 45.
Volumen, vo-lú'-men, s. m., volume.
L. 15.
Voluntad, voAún-THáTH' , s. f., will.
L. 45.
Volver, vol-^h-', to come or go back, to
return, to do again, to turn. Volver
en si, to recover one's senses. Vol-
ver á las andadas, to return to one's
old habits. L. 36.
Vos, vos, pers. pron., you. L. 66.
Vosotros, vo-so'-tros, pers. pron., you,
ye. L. 1.
Vol, voth [vos], s. f., voice, word, ru-
mor, report. Corre la «o« que . . . ,
it is rumored that . . . L. 58.
Vuelta, vúW-t^, s. f., return, turn,
trip. A wAia de correo, by return
mail. Dar una vuelta, to take a
walk. Dar la vuelta al parque, to go
round the park. L. 46.
r^.
mk.
496
VOCABULARY,
Vnelto, vúW-io, past. part, (of Vol-
yeb), returned. L. 52.
Vuestro, vú^'-tro, poss. adj., your. L.
13.
Vnlgar, viU-gUr', adj., vulgar. L. 59.
T, «, coiy., and. L. 3.
Yc, yá^ adv., already, yet, sometimes.
Ya lo uno, ya lo otro, sometimes
one, sometimes the other. L. 25 and
37.
Yacer, yárthér [yjUSr'], to lie. L. 41.
Yerno, yh-'^no, s. m., son-in-law. L. 60.
Yo, yo, pers. pron., I. Yo mismo, I
myself. L. 1.
Yugo, yú'-go, s. m., yoke. L. 64.
Zafarse, thá-fár'-aá Lsá-fár'-nsj, to es-
cape, to get rid of. L. 64.
Zag>a, tha'-gg CsS'-ga], s. f., rear. No
irle á uno en zagaj not to be far be-
hind any one. L. 44. '
Zapatería, tJUt-pa-ta-re'-Q [sá-pS-ts-rs'^a],
s. f., shoe trade, shoemaker's sh(m.
L. 17.
Zapatero, thárpdria'-ro [sá-pártu'-ro], s.
m., shoemaker. L. 8.
Zapato, thárpá'-to [si-pá'-to], s. m.-, shoe.
L. 10.
Zape, íhd'-pá [si'-ps], inlj., used to
frighten away the cats ; God forbid !
L. 46.
Zas, thá8 [sis], inlj., used to imitate
the sound of repeated knocks or
blows. L. 62.
Zutano, thu'tá'-no [sü-tá'-no], s. m., such
a one. L. 55.
THE END.
Digitized
by Google
Digitized
by Google
Digitized
by Google
Digitized
by Google
THE UNIVERSITY OF MICHIG^^
f
' V--«. ^-4
...coo,. '
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11